Physics Binder 1

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
General Certificate of Education Advanced Subsidiary Level

and Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/1
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
MAY/JUNE SESSION 2002
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
Additional materials:
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (Type B or HB is recommended)
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

SP (CW/CG) S21725/2
© CIE 2002 [Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 10 8 m s –1
permeability of free space, 0 = 4 × 10 –7 H m–1
permittivity of free space, 0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 F m–1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10 –19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10 –34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10 –27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10 –31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10 –27 kg
molar gas constant, R = 8.31 J K –1 mol –1
the Avogadro constant, NA = 6.02 × 10 23 mol –1
the Boltzmann constant, k = 1.38 × 10 –23 J K –1
gravitational constant, G = 6.67 × 10 –11 N m 2 kg –2
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s –2
9702/1/M/J/02
3
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + at 2

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = pV
gravitational potential, φ = – Gm
r
simple harmonic motion, a = – 2x
velocity of particle in s.h.m., v = v0 cos t

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)
resistors in series, R = R1 + R2 + . . .
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + . . .

Q
electric potential, V=
40r
capacitors in series, 1/C = 1/C1 + 1/C2 + . . .
capacitors in parallel, C = C1 + C2 + . . .
energy of charged capacitor, W= QV

alternating current/voltage, x = x0 sin t
hydrostatic pressure, p = qgh
Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas, p= V
<c >
radioactive decay, x = x0 exp(– t )
decay constant, = 0.693

t
3H02
critical density of matter in the Universe, q0 =
8G
equation of continuity, Av = constant
Bernoulli equation (simplified), p1 + qv12 = p2 + qv22
Stokes’ law, F = Ar v
qv r
Reynolds’ number, Re =

drag force in turbulent flow, F = Br 2qv 2
9702/1/M/J/02 [Turn over
4
1 Which of the following pairs of units are both SI base units?
A ampere, degree celsius

B ampere, kelvin
C coulomb, degree celsius
D coulomb, kelvin
2 The diagram shows two vectors X and Y.
X Y
In which vector triangle does the vector Z show the magnitude and direction of vector X – Y?
A B
Y Y
X Z X
Z
C D
Z X Z X
Y Y
3 Which formula could be correct for the speed v of ocean waves in terms of the density ρ of sea-
water, the acceleration of free fall g, the depth h of the ocean and the wavelength λ?
g g
A v= gλ B v= C v= ρgh D v=
h ρ
9702/1/M/J/02
5
4 A student measures the time t for a ball to fall from rest through a vertical distance h. Knowing that
the equation h = gt 2 applies, the student plots the graph shown.
0
0 t
Which of the following is an explanation for the intercept on the t axis?
A Air resistance has not been taken into account for larger values of h.
B There is a constant delay between starting the timer and releasing the ball.
C There is an error in the timer that consistently makes it run fast.
D The student should have plotted h against t 2.
5 The power loss P in a resistor is calculated using the formula P = V 2 /R.
The uncertainty in the potential difference V is 3% and the uncertainty in the resistance R is 2%.
What is the uncertainty in P?
A 4% B 7% C 8% D 11%

6
6 The graph relates to the motion of a falling body.
0
0 time
Which is a correct description of the graph?
A y is distance and air resistance is negligible

B y is distance and air resistance is not negligible
C y is speed and air resistance is negligible
D y is speed and air resistance is not negligible
7 Which graph represents the motion of a car that is travelling along a straight road with a uniformly
increasing speed?
A B C D
displacement
displacement
acceleration
acceleration
0 0 0 0
0 time 0 time 0 time 0 time
9702/1/M/J/02
7
8 A stone is thrown upwards from the top of a cliff. After reaching its maximum height, it falls past
the cliff-top and into the sea.
The graph shows how the vertical velocity v of the stone varies with time t after being thrown
upwards. R and S are the magnitudes of the areas of the two triangles.
S
0
0 t
R
What is the height of the cliff-top above the sea?
A R B S C R+S D R-S
9 Two similar spheres, each of mass m and travelling with speed v, are moving towards each other.
v v
m m
The spheres have a head-on elastic collision.
Which statement is correct?
A The spheres stick together on impact.

B The total kinetic energy after impact is mv2.
C The total kinetic energy before impact is zero.
D The total momentum before impact is 2mv.

8
10 A wooden block of mass 0.60 kg is on a rough horizontal surface. A force of 12 N is applied to the
block and it accelerates at 4.0 m s –2.
4.0 m s–2
wooden block
12 N
What is the magnitude of the frictional force acting on the block?
A 2.4 N
B 9.6 N
C 14 N
D 16 N
11 A body, initially at rest, explodes into two masses M1 and M2 that move apart with speeds v1
and v2 respectively.
v1
What is the ratio –– ?
v2
1 1
M1 M2 MM11  2  M2  2
A ––– B ––– C  –––  D  ––– 
M2 M1  M22  MM11 
12 A submarine descends vertically at constant velocity. The three forces acting on the submarine
are viscous drag, upthrust and weight.
Which relationship between their magnitudes is correct?
A weight < drag

B weight = drag
C weight < upthrust
D weight > upthrust
9702/1/M/J/02
9
13 A ruler of length 0.30 m is pivoted at its centre. Equal and opposite forces of magnitude 2.0 N are
applied to the ends of the ruler, creating a couple as shown.
2.0 N
50°
ruler
pivot
50°
2.0 N
What is the magnitude of the torque of the couple on the ruler when it is in the position shown?
A 0.23 Nm B 0.39 Nm C 0.46 Nm D 0.60 Nm
14 A cylindrical block of wood has a cross-sectional area A and weight W. It is totally immersed in
water with its axis vertical. The block experiences pressures pt and pb at its top and bottom
surfaces respectively.
Which of the following expressions is equal to the upthrust on the block?
A (pb - pt)A + W
B (pb - pt)
C (pb - pt)A
D (pb - pt)A - W
15 The vector diagram shows three coplanar forces acting on an object at P.
3N
P
4N
4N
The magnitude of the resultant of these three forces is 1 N.
What is the direction of this resultant?
A ↓ B ↓ C ↓ D ↑

10
16 Power is transferred through a machine as shown.
power input PI power output PO

machine
power loss PL
What is the efficiency of the machine?
PI P P P
______ __L __L __O
A PO + PL B PI C PO D PI
17 Air in a bicycle pump is forced through a valve at a constant pressure p. In one stroke of the pump
the volume of air in the pump chamber is reduced from V1 to V2.
V1 V2
p p
to valve to valve
initially finally
What is the work done on this air in one stroke of the pump?
p(V1 + V2)
A ________
2
B p(V1 + V2)
C p(V1 - V2)
D pV1
9702/1/M/J/02
11
18 A trolley runs from P to Q along a track. At Q its potential energy is 50 kJ less than at P.
trolley
At P, the kinetic energy of the trolley is 5 kJ. Between P and Q the work the trolley does against
friction is 10 kJ.
What is the kinetic energy of the trolley at Q?
A 35 kJ
B 45 kJ
C 55 kJ
D 65 kJ
19 To travel at a constant speed, a car engine provides 24 kW of useful power. The driving force on
the car is 600 N.
At what speed does it travel?
A 2.5 m s–1
B 4.0 m s–1
C 25 m s–1
D 40 m s–1
20 For a given liquid at atmospheric pressure, which process can occur at any temperature?
A boiling
B evaporation
C melting
D solidification

12
21 A mass of a liquid of density ρ is thoroughly mixed with an equal mass of another liquid of density
2ρ. No change of the total volume occurs.
What is the density of the liquid mixture?

4
_ρ 3
_ρ 5
_ρ
A B C D 3ρ
3 2 3
22 Which of the following correctly defines the terms stress, strain and Young modulus?
stress strain Young modulus
A (force) x (area) (extension) x (original length) (stress) / (strain)

B (force) x (area) (extension) / (original length) (stress) x (strain)
C (force) / (area) (extension) / (original length) (stress) / (strain)
D (force) / (area) (extension) x (original length) (stress) x (strain)
23 A wire is stretched by 8 mm when a load of 60 N is applied.
What will be the extension of a wire of the same material having four times the cross-sectional
area and twice the original length, when the same load is applied?
A 2 mm B 4 mm C 8 mm D 16 mm
24 The tension in a spring of natural length l0 is first increased from zero to T1, causing the length to
increase to l1. The tension is then reduced to T2, causing the length to decrease to l2 (as shown).
tension
R U M
T1
S V N
T2
L Q P
0
0 l0 l2 l1 length
Which area of the graph represents the work done by the spring during this reduction in length?
A MLP B MNQP C MNSR D MPLU
9702/1/M/J/02
13
25 Which of the following summarises the change in wave characteristics on going from infra-red to
ultraviolet in the electromagnetic spectrum?
frequency speed
(in a vacuum)
A decreases decreases
B decreases remains constant
C increases remains constant
D increases increases
26 The diagram shows a cathode-ray oscilloscope trace of a sound wave. The time-base is calibrated
at 2.0 ms cm–1.
What is the frequency of the sound wave?
A 62.5 Hz B 125 Hz C 250 Hz D 500 Hz
27 Which statement correctly relates the intensity of a sound wave to the vibrations of the molecules?
A intensity α amplitude
B intensity α (amplitude)2
C intensity α displacement
D intensity α (displacement)2

14
28 The diagram shows an experiment which has been set up to demonstrate two-source interference,
using microwaves of wavelength λ.
S1
O
S2
microwave microwave
transmitter metal plate detector
with two slits
The detector is moved from O in the direction of the arrow. The signal detected decreases until the
detector reaches the point X, and then starts to increase again as the detector moves beyond X.
Which equation correctly determines the position of X?
A OX = λ/2 B OX = λ C S2X – S1X = λ/2 D S2X – S1X = λ
29 Two progressive waves of frequency 300 Hz are superimposed to produce a stationary wave in
which adjacent nodes are 1.5 m apart.
What is the speed of the progressive waves?
A 100 m s –1 B 200 m s –1 C 450 m s –1 D 900 m s –1
9702/1/M/J/02
15
30 The graphs show the variation with potential difference V of the current I for three circuit elements.
I I I
0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V
graph X graph Y graph Z
The three circuit elements are a metal wire at constant temperature, a semiconductor diode and a
filament lamp.
Which row of the table correctly identifies these graphs?
metal wire semiconductor filament

at constant temperature diode lamp
A X Z Y
B Y X Z
C Y Z X
D Z X Y

16
31 In the circuit below, the battery converts an amount E of chemical energy to electrical energy
when charge Q passes through the resistor in time t.
Which expressions give the e.m.f. of the battery and the current in the resistor?
e.m.f. current
A EQ Q/t
B EQ Qt
C E/Q Q/t
D E/Q Qt
32 The filament of a 240 V, 100 W electric lamp heats up from room temperature to its operating
temperature. As it heats up, its resistance increases by a factor of 16.
What is the resistance of this lamp at room temperature?
A 36 Ω B 580 Ω C 1.5 kΩ D 9.2 kΩ
33 The diagrams show connected wires which carry currents I1, I2, I3 and I4.
The currents are related by the equation I1 + I2 = I3 + I4.
To which diagram does this equation apply?
A B C D
I1 I4 I3 I4
I3 I2
I1 I2
I4 I1 I2
I2 I3 I1
I4 I3
9702/1/M/J/02
17
34 When four identical lamps P, Q, R and S are connected as shown in diagram 1, they have normal
brightness.
P Q
P Q
R S R S
diagram 1 diagram 2
When the four lamps are connected as shown in diagram 2, which statement is correct?
A The lamps do not light.

B The lamps are less bright than normal.
C The lamps have normal brightness.
D The lamps are brighter than normal.
35 A potential divider is used to give outputs of 2 V and 3 V from a 5 V source, as shown.
+5V
R1
+3V
R2
+2V
R3
0V
What are possible values for the resistances R1, R2 and R3?
R1/ k Ω R2/ k Ω R3/ k Ω
A 2 1 5
B 3 2 2
C 4 2 4
D 4 6 10

18
36 Which path shows a possible movement of an electron in the electric field shown?
A
B
electron beam
C
D
37 Two parallel conducting plates are connected to a battery, one plate to the positive terminal and
the other plate to the negative. The plate separation is gradually increased, the plates remaining
connected to the battery.
Which graph shows how the electric field E between the plates depends on the plate separation x ?
A B C D
E E E E
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
38 Which set of radioactive emissions corresponds to the descriptions given in the table headings?
high-speed high-speed high-frequency

electrons helium nuclei photons
A α β γ
B α γ β
C β α γ
D β γ α
9702/1/M/J/02
19
39 The nucleus of one of the isotopes of nickel is represented by 60

28 Ni.
Which line in the table correctly describes a neutral atom of this isotope?
number of protons number of neutrons number of orbital

electrons
A 28 32 28
B 28 60 28
C 60 28 28
D 60 32 32
40 A nucleus of bohrium yx Bh decays to mendelevium 255 Md

101 by a sequence of three α-particle
emissions.
bohrium yx Bh → dubnium + α
→ lawrencium + α
101 Md + α
→ mendelevium 255
How many neutrons are there in a nucleus of yx Bh?
A 267
B 261
C 160
D 154
9702/1/M/J/02
20
BLANK PAGE
9702/1/M/J/02
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name

and Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/2
PAPER 2
1 hour
No additional materials.
TIME 1 hour
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.

The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
FOR EXAMINER’S USE

SPA (SM/CG) S21690/3
2
Data
permeability of free space, ␮0 = 4␲ × 10 –7 H m–1
permittivity of free space, ⑀0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 F m–1
9702/2 M/J02
3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p⌬V
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
4␲⑀0r

Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8␲G
Stokes’ law, F = Ar ␩v
qv r
␩
9702/2 M/J02 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.
1 Make reasonable estimates of the following quantities.
(a) mass of an apple
mass = ............................................... kg [1]
(b) number of joules of energy in 1 kilowatt-hour
number = ................................................... [1]
(c) wavelength of red light in a vacuum
wavelength = ............................................... m [1]
(d) pressure due to a depth of 10 m of water
pressure = .............................................. Pa [1]
2 A student uses a micrometer screw gauge to measure the diameter of a wire. He fails to
notice that, with the gauge fully closed, the reading is not zero.
(a) State and explain whether the omission introduces a random error or a systematic error
into the readings of the diameter.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the readings are precise but not accurate.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9702/2 M/J02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) Explain what is meant by the centre of gravity of an object.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A non-uniform plank of wood XY is 2.50 m long and weighs 950 N. Force-meters (spring
balances) A and B are attached to the plank at a distance of 0.40 m from each end, as
illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
force-meter A force-meter B
0.40 m 0.40 m
X Y
2.50 m
Fig. 3.1
When the plank is horizontal, force-meter A records 570 N.
(i) Calculate the reading on force-meter B.
reading = ................................................ N
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, mark a likely position for the centre of gravity of the plank.
(iii) Determine the distance of the centre of gravity from the end X of the plank.
distance = ............................................... m
[6]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A steel ball of mass 73 g is held 1.6 m above a horizontal steel plate, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
steel ball
mass 73 g
1.6 m
steel
plate
Fig. 4.1
The ball is dropped from rest and it bounces on the plate, reaching a height h.
(a) Calculate the speed of the ball as it reaches the plate.
speed = .......................................... m s–1 [2]
(b) As the ball loses contact with the plate after bouncing, the kinetic energy of the ball is
90% of that just before bouncing. Calculate
(i) the height h to which the ball bounces,
h = ............................................... m
9702/2 M/J02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) the speed of the ball as it leaves the plate after bouncing.
speed = .......................................... m s–1

[4]
(c) Using your answers to (a) and (b), determine the change in momentum of the ball
during the bounce.
change = ............................................. N s [3]
(d) With reference to the law of conservation of momentum, comment on your answer
to (c).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Some gas is contained in a cylinder by means of a moveable piston, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
gas
moveable
piston
cylinder
Fig. 5.1
State how, for this mass of gas, the following changes may be achieved.
(a) increase its gravitational potential energy
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) decrease its internal energy
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) increase its elastic potential energy
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
9702/2 M/J02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Two horizontal metal plates are situated 1.2 cm apart, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
1.2 cm
Fig. 6.1
The electric field between the plates is found to be 3.0 ⫻104 N C–1 in the downward direction.
(a) (i) On Fig. 6.1, mark with a + the plate which is at the more positive potential.
(ii) Calculate the potential difference between the plates.
potential difference = ................................................ V

[3]
(b) Determine the acceleration of an electron between the plates, assuming there is a
vacuum between them.
acceleration = .......................................... m s–2 [3]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 (a) Figs. 7.1(a) and (b) show plane wavefronts approaching a narrow gap and a wide gap
respectively.
(a) (b)
Fig. 7.1
On Figs. 7.1(a) and (b), draw three successive wavefronts to represent the wave after it
has passed through each of the gaps. [5]
9702/2 M/J02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Light from a laser is directed normally at a diffraction grating, as illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
scale
diffraction
grating
162°
laser
136°
Fig. 7.2
The diffraction grating is situated at the centre of a circular scale, marked in degrees.
The readings on the scale for the second order diffracted beams are 136° and 162°.
The wavelength of the laser light is 630 nm.
Calculate the spacing of the slits of the diffraction grating.
spacing = ............................................... m [4]
(c) Suggest one reason why the fringe pattern produced by light passing through a
diffraction grating is brighter than that produced from the same source with a double slit.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 A student has available some resistors, each of resistance 100 Ω.
(a) Draw circuit diagrams, one in each case, to show how a number of these resistors may
be connected to produce a combined resistance of
(i) 200 Ω,
(ii) 50 Ω,
(iii) 40 Ω.
[4]
9702/2 M/J02
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The arrangement of resistors shown in Fig. 8.1 is connected to a battery.
25 Ω
100 Ω
25 Ω
Fig. 8.1
The power dissipation in the 100 Ω resistor is 0.81 W. Calculate
(i) the current in the circuit,
current = ................................................ A
(ii) the power dissipation in each of the 25 Ω resistors.
power = ............................................... W
[4]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 The radiation from a radioactive source is detected using the apparatus illustrated in
Fig. 9.1.
detector
aluminium
6 cm
radioactive
source shielding
Fig. 9.1
Different thicknesses of aluminium are placed between the source and the detector. The
count rate is obtained for each thickness. Fig. 9.2 shows the variation with thickness x of
aluminium of the count rate.
count rate
/s–1
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
x / mm
Fig. 9.2
9702/2 M/J02
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) Suggest why it is not possible to detect the presence of the emission of α-particles from
the source.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State the evidence provided on Fig. 9.2 for the emission from the source of
(i) β-particles,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) γ-radiation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
9702/2 M/J02
16
BLANK PAGE
9702/2 M/J02
Candidate
Candidate Name

and Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/3
PAPER 3 Practical Test
1 hour 15 minutes
As specified in Instructions to Supervisors
Graph paper
TIME 1 hour 15 minutes
Answer the one question.
You are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made, and to plan
the presentation of the records so that it is not necessary to make a fair copy of them. The working of
the answers is to be handed in. Marks are mainly given for a clear record of the observations actually
made, for their suitability and accuracy, and for the use made of them.

Additional answer paper and graph paper should be submitted only if it becomes necessary to do so.
You are reminded of the need for good English and clear presentation in your answers.
This question paper consists of 5 printed pages and 3 blank pages.

SPA (CW/CG) S21726/2
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will be required to investigate the torsional oscillations of a loaded rod
suspended by a spring.
(a) The spring has been placed on the cork so that it is positioned in the centre of the rod.
Take each piece of plasticine and shape it into a small ball. Carefully push the two balls
onto the rod so that their centres are situated at equal distances d from the spring. The
value of d initially should be about 10 cm. Clamp the top of the spring using the small
blocks of wood provided so that the rod and the balls are suspended horizontally as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
clamp
blocks of
wood
spring
plasticine ball
cork
rod
d d
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Measure and record the distance d from the spring to the centre of each ball.
(ii) Displace the rod slightly so that it performs torsional oscillations in the horizontal
plane as shown in Fig. 1.2.
top view
Fig. 1.2
9702/3/M/J/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Make measurements to determine the period T of these oscillations, and record
your measurements.
(iv) Change the value of d and repeat (i), (ii) and (iii) until you have six sets of readings
for T and d where d is in the range 7.0 cm 艋 d 艋 12.0 cm. Include values of T 2 and
d 2 in your table of results.
(v) Justify the number of significant figures which you have given for d 2.
(c) It is suggested that T and d are related by the equation
 8π
8π 22m  4π 2II 
 4π
T 2 =  ____  d 2 +
+  ____00 
 k   k 
where m is the mass of one of the balls of plasticine and I0 and k are constants.
(i) Plot a graph of T 2 (y-axis) against d 2 (x-axis).

(ii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of the line of best fit.
(iii) Calculate values for k and I0 given that m = 20 g.
Include appropriate units with your values.
(iv) Use the results of your experiment to find a value for T when there are no balls on
the rod.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS SPACE

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Measurements and calculations
9702/3/M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
Graph grid
9702/3/M/J/02
6
BLANK PAGE
9702/3/M/J/02
7
BLANK PAGE
9702/3/M/J/02
8
BLANK PAGE
9702/3/M/J/02
Candidate
Candidate Name

General Certificate of Education Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/4
PAPER 4
1 hour
TIME 1 hour


SPA (NH/CG) S14609/4
2
Data
9702/4 M/J/02
3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
electric potential, V =
4␲⑀0r
energy of charged capacitor, W = QV
Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas, p = V
<c >

t
3H02
8␲G
qv r
␩
9702/4 M/J/02 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere of radius 6.38 × 106 m. Its mass is
assumed to be concentrated at its centre.
Given that the gravitational field strength at the Earth’s surface is 9.81 N kg–1, show that
the mass of the Earth is 5.99 × 1024 kg.
[2]
(b) A satellite is placed in geostationary orbit around the Earth.
(i) Calculate the angular speed of the satellite in its orbit.
angular speed = ........................................ rad s–1 [3]
(ii) Using the data in (a), determine the radius of the orbit.
radius = ........................................ m [3]
9702/4 M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Some water in a saucepan is boiling.
(a) Explain why
(i) external work is done by the boiling water,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) there is a change in the internal energy as water changes to steam.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) By reference to the first law of thermodynamics and your answers in (a), show that
thermal energy must be supplied to the water during the boiling process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) (i) The kinetic theory of gases leads to the equation
m<c 2> = kT.
Explain the significance of the quantity m<c 2>.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use the equation to suggest what is meant by the absolute zero of temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Two insulated gas cylinders A and B are connected by a tube of negligible volume, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
tap
cylinder A cylinder B
Fig. 3.1
9702/4 M/J/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
Each cylinder has an internal volume of 2.0 × 10–2 m3. Initially, the tap is closed and cylinder A
contains 1.2 mol of an ideal gas at a temperature of 37 °C. Cylinder B contains the same
ideal gas at pressure 1.2 × 105 Pa and temperature 37 °C.
(i) Calculate the amount, in mol, of the gas in cylinder B.
amount = ......................................... mol
(ii) The tap is opened and some gas flows from cylinder A to cylinder B. Using the fact
that the total amount of gas is constant, determine the final pressure of the gas in
the cylinders.
pressure = ........................................ Pa
[6]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) (i) Define simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 4.1, sketch the variation with displacement x of the acceleration
a of a particle undergoing simple harmonic motion.
0
0 x
[4]
Fig. 4.1
(b) A strip of metal is clamped to the edge of a bench and a mass is hung from its free end
as shown in Fig. 4.2.
clamp
metal strip
mass
Fig. 4.2
9702/4 M/J/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
The end of the strip is pulled downwards and then released. Fig. 4.3 shows the variation
with time t of the displacement y of the end of the strip.
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 t/s
Fig. 4.3
Ep
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 t/s
Fig. 4.4
On Fig. 4.4, show the corresponding variation with time t of the potential energy Ep of
the vibrating system. [3]
(c) The string supporting the mass breaks when the end of the strip is at its lowest point in
an oscillation. Suggest what change, if any, will occur in the period and amplitude of the
subsequent motion of the end of the strip.
period: ..............................................................................................................................
amplitude: .....................................................................................................................[2]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Define potential at a point in an electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An isolated metal sphere of radius r carries a charge +Q. The charge may be assumed
to be concentrated at the centre of the sphere.
(i) State, in terms of r and Q, the electric potential V at the surface of the sphere.
Identify any other symbols you use.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Write down the relationship between capacitance C, charge Q and potential V.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) Hence show that the capacitance C of the sphere is given by
C = 4πε0r.
[3]
9702/4 M/J/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The sphere in (b) has a radius of 15 cm and carries a charge of 2.0 × 10–6 C.
Calculate
(i) the capacitance of the sphere,
capacitance = .............................. µF
(ii) the energy stored on the sphere.
energy = .............................. J
[4]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Two similar coils A and B of insulated wire are wound on to a soft-iron core, as
soft-iron core
coil A coil B
Fig. 6.1
When the current I in coil A is switched on and then off, the variation with time t of the
current is shown in Fig. 6.2.
0
t
Fig. 6.2
0
t
Fig. 6.3
On Fig. 6.3, draw a graph to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced in
coil B. [3]
9702/4 M/J/02
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 6.4 is the circuit of a bridge rectifier.
S Q
load
R
Fig. 6.4
An alternating supply connected across PR has an output of 6.0 V r.m.s.
(i) On Fig. 6.4, circle those diodes that are conducting when R is positive with respect
to P. [1]
(ii) Calculate the maximum potential difference between points Q and S, assuming
that the diodes are ideal.
potential difference = .............................. V [2]
(iii) State and explain how a capacitor may be used to smooth the output from the
rectifier. You may draw on Fig. 6.4 if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Electrons are emitted from a metal surface when it is illuminated with suitable electromagnetic
radiation.
(a) Name the effect described above.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy Ek of the emitted electrons
is shown in Fig. 7.1.
–19
Ek / 10 J
0
0 4 8 12 16 20
14
f / 10 Hz
Fig. 7.1
Use Fig. 7.1 to determine
(i) the threshold frequency of the radiation,
threshold frequency = ........................................ Hz
(ii) a value for the Planck constant.
Planck constant = ........................................ J s

[4]
9702/4 M/J/02
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) On Fig. 7.1, draw a line to show the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic
energy Ek of the emitted electrons for a second metal which has a lower work function
than that in (b). [2]
(d) The kinetic energy of the electrons is described as the maximum. Suggest why emitted
electrons are likely to have a range of values of kinetic energy for any one frequency of
the electromagnetic radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9702/4 M/J/02
16
BLANK PAGE
9702/4 M/J/02
Candidate
Candidate Name

PHYSICS 9702/5
PAPER 5 Practical Test
1 hour 30 minutes

As specified in Instructions to Supervisors
Graph paper
TIME 1 hour 30 minutes
Answer both questions.
You are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made, and to plan
the presentation of the records so that it is not necessary to make a fair copy of them. The working of
the answers is to be handed in. Marks are mainly given for a clear record of the observations actually
made, for their suitability and accuracy, and for the use made of them.

TOTAL
This question paper consists of 6 printed pages and 2 lined pages.

(NH/CG) S14607/3
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
It is recommended that you spend about 60 minutes on this question.
1 Decorative lights are sometimes wired in parallel. It is important to know how the current
passing through the lights depends on the potential difference applied to them as the
number of lights is changed. In this experiment you will investigate the variation of current
with potential difference for two identical filament lamps and use the results of your
experiment to suggest how current varies with potential difference for any number of
identical lamps wired in parallel.
(a) Set up the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1 using the filament lamp labelled P.
power supply
S
P
A
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Close switch S.

(ii) Measure and record six sets of readings of current I and potential difference V for I
in the range 1.0 A ≤ I ≤ 2.0 A. Include in your table of results values for lg (I /A) and
lg (V /V).
(iii) Open switch S.
(c) Connect the second filament lamp (labelled Q) in parallel with lamp P. Measure and
record six sets of readings of I and V for I in the range 2.0 A ≤ I ≤ 4.0 A. Include in your
table of results values for lg (I /A) and lg (V /V).
It is suggested that I and V are related by the equation
I = kV n
where k and n are constants.
9702/5 M/J/02
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) (i) Plot a graph of lg (I /A) (y-axis) against lg (V /V) (x-axis) for the results obtained in
parts (b) and (c). Use the same axes for both sets of results. Draw the line of best
fit for each set of results.
(ii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of each of the lines of best fit.
(iii) Use your answers from (ii) to find values for n and k in each case. You need not be
concerned with the units of these quantities.
(iv) Comment on the values of n and k which you have obtained.
(e) (i) What values would you expect to obtain for n and k if the experiment were
repeated with three identical lamps connected in parallel?
(ii) Suggest an equation which describes the relationship between I and V for m
identical lamps in parallel.
DO NOT WRITE
IN THIS SPACE

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Measurements and calculations
9702/5 M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
Graph grid

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 The properties of many magnetic materials are affected by temperature. One effect is the
loss of permanent magnetism when the temperature of a magnetic material exceeds a
particular value. This temperature is known as the Curie point.
Design an experiment to investigate how the magnetic field strength of a magnet depends
on the temperature of the magnet in the range from 0 °C to 200 °C.
In your account you should pay particular attention to
(a) the method of measuring the magnetic field strength (magnetic flux density),
(b) how the temperature of the magnet would be measured in the given range,
(c) the method of ensuring that the temperature of the magnet is uniform,
(d) the procedure to be followed,
(e) the control of variables.
9702/5 M/J/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
9702/5 M/J/02
Candidate
Candidate Name

PHYSICS 9702/6
PAPER 6 Options
45 minutes

TIME 45 minutes
Answer all the questions in any two Options.

This question paper consists of 20 printed pages.

SPA (NH/CG) S14799/3
2
Data
9702/6 M/J/02
3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
4␲⑀0r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8␲G
qv r
␩
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Answer all of the questions in any two Options.
The Options are as follows:
Option A Astrophysics and Cosmology questions 1, 2, 3 and 4
Option F The Physics of Fluids questions 5, 6 and 7
Option M Medical Physics questions 8, 9 and 10
Option P Environmental Physics questions 11, 12 and 13
Option T Telecommunications questions 14, 15 and 16
Option A
Astrophysics and Cosmology
1 The average diameter of the Earth’s orbit around the Sun is 2.99 × 108 km.
(a) Calculate, to three significant figures, the magnitude, in metres, of the astronomical
unit (AU).
1 AU = ........................................ m [1]
(b) (i) Define the parsec (pc).
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use your answer to (a) to calculate the magnitude, in metres, of the parsec.
1 pc = ........................................ m
[5]
9702/6 M/J/02
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) On Fig. 2.1, sketch a graph to show the variation with distance d from Earth of the linear
speed v of galaxies.
0
0 d
[1]
Fig. 2.1
(b) Suggest why your graph implies a finite age for the Universe.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why, although most galaxies appear to be moving away from the Milky Way
galaxy, it cannot be assumed that the Universe had its origin somewhere in the Milky
Way.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Explain how your graph of Fig. 2.1 may be used to
(i) obtain a value for the Hubble constant,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) estimate the age of the Universe.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the variation with the age of the Universe of its mean temperature.
12
10
temperature / K
10
10
8
10
6
10
4
10
2
10
0
10
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
age of Universe / s
Fig. 3.1
On Fig. 3.1, mark positions at which
(a) light elements were formed (mark this position L), [1]
(b) decoupling of radiation and matter occurred (mark this position D), [1]
(c) the formation of galaxies began (mark this position G). [1]
4 Suggest why the detection of very distant galaxies is a recent development in astronomy.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................[3]
9702/6 M/J/02
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option F
The Physics of Fluids
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 illustrates a cross-section through a ship.
sea level
Fig. 5.1
The point G is the centre of gravity. On Fig. 5.1,
(i) mark the approximate position of the centre of buoyancy (label this point B),
(ii) draw lines to show the position of the metacentre (label this point M).
[2]
(b) For stability, the point M must be above the point G. Suggest the effect on the ship of
increasing the separation of M and G when the ship is in rough seas.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 An ideal incompressible fluid of density ρ flows along a pipe as shown in Fig. 6.1.
area A1
area A2
v1 v2
pressure p1 pressure p2
Fig. 6.1
The fluid travels at speed v1 where the area of cross-section is A1 and at speed v2 where the
area of cross-section is A2. The fluid pressure at these points is p1 and p2 respectively.
(a) State formulae, in terms of v1, A1 and ρ for
(i) the volume of fluid flowing per unit time along the pipe,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) the mass flow-rate of the fluid.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Derive formulae, in terms of v1, v2, A1, A2 and ρ, for
(i) the change in kinetic energy per unit time of the fluid as it flows through the pipe,
(ii) the work done per unit time to force the fluid along the pipe.
[4]
9702/6 M/J/02
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) Using your answers in (b), derive the Bernoulli equation
p1 + 1 ρv 2 = p2 + 1 ρv 2.
2 1 2 2
(ii) State one assumption, other than that of an ideal fluid, which you made in your
derivation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
7 A metal sphere is held just below the surface in a deep vessel containing oil. It is released
from rest at time t = 0.
(a) On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the speed v of
the sphere.
0
0 t
[2]
Fig. 7.1
(b) By reference to the forces acting on the sphere, describe the motion of the sphere.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[5]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option M
Medical Physics
8 (a) Outline the use of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic information about internal body
structures.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[5]
(b) The intensity I of a parallel beam of ultrasound is related to its initial intensity I0 and the
thickness x of the medium through which it has travelled by the relation
I = I0 e–µx
where µ is a constant for the medium.
Fig. 8.1 shows the constant µ for different media.
medium µ / m–1
blood 2
bone 130
muscle 23
Fig. 8.1
9702/6 M/J/02
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) Use the information in Fig. 8.1 to suggest why
1. ultrasound is not used to examine structures within bones,
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
2. bones may be at risk when using high intensities of ultrasound to treat

diseased joints.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[4]
(ii) Determine the ratio
fraction of intensity of ultrasound transmitted through 10 mm of muscle

.
fraction of intensity of ultrasound transmitted through 10 mm of bone
ratio = ........................................ [3]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A student can only focus clearly on objects which are between 75 cm and 10 cm from his
eyes.
(a) Name the eye defect from which the person is suffering.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Determine the power of the lenses required so that distant objects may be seen clearly.
power = ........................................ D [2]
(c) Suggest why this student has an advantage over a person with normal vision when a
small object, such as the spring in a watch, is to be examined closely.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9702/6 M/J/02
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Fig. 10.1 shows the variation with frequency f of the minimum intensity level I.L. of sound
heard by a particular person.
120
I.L. / dB
100
80
60
40
20
0
0.05 0.1 0.5 1 3 10 20
3
f / 10 Hz
Fig. 10.1
(a) Explain what is meant by intensity level.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Describe, with reference to features of Fig. 10.1, the defects of hearing from which the
person is suffering.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option P
Environmental Physics
11 (a) Compare a pumped-water storage scheme and a tidal barrage scheme for the
generation of electrical energy. You should include two distinct aspects in your
comparison.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) A pumped-water storage scheme is used both to pump water and to generate electrical
energy. It is capable of pumping water at a rate of 77 m3 s–1 to a height of 180 m. The
density of water is 1000 kg m–3.
(i) Calculate the useful power output of the turbine assembly when it is used as a
pump.
power = ........................................ MW
(ii) The same turbine assembly generates 100 MW when the stored water is released
at the same rate as when it was being pumped. By reference to your answer in (i),
comment on this output power.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
9702/6 M/J/02
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 A wind generator has blades of length r. Air of density ρ and speed v is incident normally on
the plane of the rotating blades.
(a) Show that the kinetic energy E of the wind incident normally per unit time on the plane
of the rotating blades is given by
E = 1 πr 2v 3ρ.
2
[3]
(b) One particular wind generator has blades of length 12 m. Air of density 1.2 kg m–3 and
speed 4.5 m s–1 is incident normally on the generator. Calculate the power output of the
generator given that its overall efficiency is 55%.
power = ........................................ kW [2]
(c) Suggest one problem associated with high wind speeds on such a generator, and how
the problem is overcome.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
13 (a) Comment on the statement that wind generators are pollution-free.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Suggest why there is controversy over the building of wind farms capable of generating
the same output as a nuclear reactor.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9702/6 M/J/02
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option T
Telecommunications
14 Fig. 14.1 shows the signal received at the aerial of a radio.
voltage
0
0 100 200 300 time / µs
Fig. 14.1
(a) State the form of modulation illustrated in Fig. 14.1.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the frequency of the transmission,
frequency = .............................. Hz
(ii) the frequency of the modulating waveform.
frequency = .............................. Hz
[3]

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) On Fig. 14.2, draw a graph to show the variation with frequency f of the signal shown in
Fig. 14.1. Show appropriate values on the frequency axis.
signal
voltage
0
0 f
[3]
Fig. 14.2
9702/6 M/J/02
19 For
Examiner’s
Use
15 Railway tracks provide a convenient route for communication cables. However, passing
electric trains produce interference (noise) of power 7.3 ×10–5 W in a certain co-axial cable.
The signal-to-noise ratio in this cable must not fall below 25 dB for the effective transmission
of the signal.
(a) Show that the minimum effective signal power in the cable is 0.023 W. [2]
(b) The cable has a loss of 4.8 dB km–1. Calculate the maximum length of cable which can
be used without the need for repeater amplifiers for an input signal of power 5.8 W.
length = ........................................ km [3]
(c) Co-axial cables are being replaced by optic fibres along railway tracks. Suggest two
reasons why this is being done.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
16 (a) State two uses of polar orbiting satellites.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State two uses, other than for television transmissions, of geostationary satellites.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i) State a typical wavelength used for satellite communication.
wavelength = ........................................ m
(ii) Explain briefly why the transmission frequency from Earth to a satellite is different
from the frequency that the satellite transmits back to Earth.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
9702/6 M/J/02
General Certificate of Education
Advanced Subsidiary Level and Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2003
1 hour
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write in soft pencil.

Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

SP (SLC/JG) S46444/4
© UCLES 2003 [Turn over
2
Data
9702/01/M/J/03
3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p ⌬V
r
simple harmonic motion, a=– ω 2x
velocity of particle in s.h.m., v = v0 cos ω t

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
4␲⑀0r
capacitors in parallel, C = C 1 + C2 + . . .

alternating current/voltage, x = x0 sin ω t
hydrostatic pressure, p = ρgh
Nm 2
<c >
radioactive decay, x = x0 exp(– λt )
0.693
decay constant, λ=
t
3H02
critical density of matter in the Universe, ρ0 =
8␲G
Bernoulli equation (simplified), p1 + ρv12 = ρ2 + ρv22
ρvr
Reynolds’ number, Re = ␩
drag force in turbulent flow, F = Br 2ρv 2

4
1 Which of the following is a scalar quantity?
A acceleration
B mass
C momentum
D velocity
2 The unit of work, the joule, may be defined as the work done when the point of application of a
force of 1 newton is moved a distance of 1 metre in the direction of the force.
Express the joule in terms of the base units of mass, length and time, the kg, m and s.
A kg m–1 s2 B kg m2 s–2 C kg m2 s–1 D kg s–2
3 Two forces, each of 10 N, act at a point P as shown in the diagram. The angle between the
directions of the forces is 120°.
10 N
120°
10 N
P
What is the magnitude of the resultant force?
A 5N B 10 N C 17 N D 20 N
4 Which experimental technique reduces the systematic error of the quantity being investigated?
A adjusting an ammeter to remove its zero error before measuring a current

B measuring several internodal distances on a standing wave to find the mean internodal
distance
C measuring the diameter of a wire repeatedly and calculating the average
D timing a large number of oscillations to find a period
5 A student makes measurements from which she calculates the speed of sound as 327.66 m s–1.
She estimates that her result is accurate to ±3 %.
Which of the following gives her result expressed to the appropriate number of significant figures?
A 327.7 m s–1 B 328 m s–1 C 330 m s–1 D 300 m s–1
9702/01/M/J/03
5
6 A steel rule can be read to the nearest millimetre. It is used to measure the length of a bar whose
true length is 895 mm. Repeated measurements give the following readings.
length / mm 892, 891, 892, 891, 891, 892
Are the readings accurate and precise to within 1 mm?
results are accurate results are precise

to within 1 mm to within 1 mm
A no no
B no yes
C yes no
D yes yes
7 A projectile is fired at an angle α to the horizontal at a speed u, as shown.
What will be the vertical and horizontal components of its velocity after a time t ?
Assume that air resistance is negligible. The acceleration of free fall is g.
vertical component horizontal component

A u sin α u cos α
B u sin α – gt u cos α – gt
C u sin α – gt u cos α
D u cos α u sin α – gt

6
8 The graph of velocity against time for an object moving in a straight line is shown.
velocity
0
0 time
Which of the following is the corresponding graph of displacement against time?
displacement
0
0 time
displacement
0
0 time
displacement
0
0 time
displacement
0
0 time
9702/01/M/J/03
7
9 A ball is released from rest above a horizontal surface. The graph shows the variation with time of
its velocity.
1st
impact
2nd
velocity
impact
3rd
impact
Y
0
time
X
release
ball ball ball ball ball

falling rising falling rising falling
Areas X and Y are equal.
This is because
A the ball’s acceleration is the same during its upward and downward motion.
B the speed at which the ball leaves the surface after an impact is equal to the speed at which it
returns to the surface for the next impact.
C for one impact, the speed at which the ball hits the surface equals the speed at which it leaves
the surface.
D the ball rises and falls through the same distance between impacts.
10 Two blocks X and Y, of masses m and 3m respectively, are accelerated along a smooth horizontal
surface by a force F applied to block X as shown.
F
X Y
What is the magnitude of the force exerted by block X on block Y during this acceleration?
F F F 3F
A 4 B 3 C 2 D 4

8
11 A car with front-wheel drive accelerates in the direction shown.
Which diagram best shows the direction of the total force exerted by the road on the front wheels?
A B C D
12 A ball of mass 2 kg travelling at 8 m s–1 strikes a ball of mass 4 kg travelling at 2 m s–1. Both balls
are moving along the same straight line as shown.
8 m s–1 2 m s–1 v
2 kg 4 kg 2 kg 4 kg
After collision, both balls move at the same velocity v.
What is the magnitude of the velocity v?
A 4 m s–1 B 5 m s–1 C 6 m s–1 D 8 m s–1
9702/01/M/J/03
9
13 The diagram shows four forces applied to a circular object.
30 N
20 N
20 N
30 N
Which of the following describes the resultant force and resultant torque on the object?
resultant force resultant torque

A zero zero
B zero non-zero
C non-zero zero
D non-zero non-zero
14 A balloon is acted upon by three forces, weight, upthrust and sideways force due to the wind, as
shown in the diagram.
upthrust
10 000 N
sideways force
500 N
weight
9000 N
What is the vertical component of the resultant force on the balloon?
A 500 N B 1000 N C 10 000 N D 10 500 N

10
15 A ball falls from rest through air and eventually reaches a constant velocity.
For this fall, forces X and Y vary with time as shown.
force X force Y
0 0
0 time 0 time
What are forces X and Y ?
force X force Y
A air resistance resultant force
B air resistance weight
C upthrust resultant force
D upthrust weight
16 Which of the following expressions defines power?
A force x distance moved in the direction of the force

B force x velocity
C work done ÷ time taken
D work done x time taken
17 A weight W hangs from a trolley that runs along a rail. The trolley moves horizontally through a
distance p and simultaneously raises the weight through a height q.
trolley
rail
Y
r q
X
weight W p
As a result, the weight moves through a distance r from X to Y. It starts and finishes at rest.
How much work is done on the weight during this process?
A Wp B W(p + q) C Wq D Wr
9702/01/M/J/03
11
18 A motorist travelling at 10 m s–1 can bring his car to rest in a distance of 10 m.
If he had been travelling at 30 m s–1, in what distance could he bring the car to rest using the same
braking force?
A 17 m B 30 m C 52 m D 90 m
19 A suspended copper wire is gradually loaded until it is stretched just beyond the elastic limit, and it
is then gradually unloaded.
Which graph (with arrows indicating the sequence) best illustrates the variation of the tensile
stress with longitudinal strain?
A B C D
stress stress stress stress
0 0 0 0
0 strain 0 strain 0 strain 0 strain
20 A child drinks a liquid of density ρ through a vertical straw.
Atmospheric pressure is p0 and the child is capable of lowering the pressure at the top of the straw
by 10%. The acceleration of free fall is g.
What is the maximum length of straw that would enable the child to drink the liquid?
p0 9p0 p0 10p0
A 10ρg B 10ρg C ρg D ρg
21 What is the ultimate tensile stress of a material?
A the stress at which the material becomes ductile

B the stress at which the material breaks
C the stress at which the material deforms plastically
D the stress at which the material reaches its elastic limit

12
22 A beam, the weight of which may be neglected, is supported by three identical springs. When a
weight W is hung from the middle of the beam, the extension of each spring is x.
original position
of the beam
x
The middle spring and the weight are removed.
What is the extension when a weight of 2W is hung from the middle of the beam?
3x 4x
A 2 B 3 C 2x D 3x
23 Which of the following is true for all transverse waves?
A They are all electromagnetic.

B They can all be polarised.
C They can all travel through a vacuum.
D They all involve the oscillation of atoms.
24 The graph represents a stationary wave at two different times.
displacement
X Y
distance along
the wave
What does the distance XY represent?
A half the amplitude

B half the frequency
C half the period
D half the wavelength
9702/01/M/J/03
13
25 Electromagnetic waves of wavelength λ and frequency f travel at speed c in a vacuum.
Which of the following describes the wavelength and speed of electromagnetic waves of
frequency f / 2?
wavelength speed in a
vacuum
A λ/2 c/2
B λ/2 c
C 2λ c
D 2λ 2c
26 A sound wave is displayed on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. The time base of the c.r.o.
is set at 2.5 ms / cm.
1 cm
A 50 Hz B 100 Hz C 200 Hz D 400 Hz
27 When the light from two lamps falls on a screen, no interference pattern can be obtained.
Why is this?
A The lamps are not point sources.

B The lamps emit light of different amplitudes.
C The light from the lamps is not coherent.
D The light from the lamps is white.

14
28 A diffraction grating is used to measure the wavelength of monochromatic light, as shown in the
diagram.
grating
monochromatic 70.0°
light
The spacing of the slits in the grating is 1.00 x 10–6 m. The angle between the first order diffraction
maxima is 70.0°.
What is the wavelength of the light?
A 287 nm B 470 nm C 574 nm D 940 nm
29 What physical quantity would result from a calculation in which a potential difference is multiplied
by an electric charge?
A electric current
B electric energy
C electric field strength
D electric power
30 The current in a component is reduced uniformly from 100 mA to 20 mA over a period of 8.0 s.
What is the charge that flows during this time?
A 160 mC B 320 mC C 480 mC D 640 mC
31 The sum of the electrical currents into a point in a circuit is equal to the sum of the currents out of
the point.
Which of the following is correct?
A This is Kirchhoff’s first law, which results from the conservation of charge.
B This is Kirchhoff’s first law, which results from the conservation of energy.
C This is Kirchhoff’s second law, which results from the conservation of charge.
D This is Kirchhoff’s second law, which results from the conservation of energy.
9702/01/M/J/03
15
32 The e.m.f. of the cell in the following circuit is 9.0 V. The reading on the high-resistance voltmeter
is 7.5 V.
I V
15 Ω
What is the current I ?
A 0.1 A B 0.5 A C 0.6 A D 2.0 A
33 The diagram shows an arrangement of four resistors.
10 kΩ 6 kΩ
X Y
6 kΩ 10 kΩ
What is the resistance between X and Y?
A 4 kΩ B 8 kΩ C 16 kΩ D 32 kΩ

16
34 The diagram shows a potential divider connected to a 9.0 V supply of negligible internal
resistance.
10 kΩ
P
9.0 V
50 kΩ
What range of voltages can be obtained between P and Q?
A zero to 1.5 V
B zero to 7.5 V
C 1.5 V to 7.5 V
D 1.5 V to 9.0 V
35 An electric field exists in the space between two charged metal plates.
+
X
Y
–
Which of the following graphs shows the variation of electric field strength E with distance d from X
along the line XY?
A B C D
E E E E
0 0 0 0
0 d 0 d 0 d 0 d
9702/01/M/J/03
17
36 The diagram shows two metal plates P and Q between which there is a potential difference of
700 V. Plate Q is earthed.
– 700 V
plate P
5 mm R
plate Q
What is the magnitude and direction of the electric field at point R?
A 1.4 x 102 N C–1 from P towards Q

B 1.4 x 102 N C–1 from Q towards P
C 1.4 x 105 N C–1 from P towards Q
D 1.4 x 105 N C–1 from Q towards P
37 A positive charge and a negative charge of equal magnitude are placed a short distance apart.
Which diagram best represents the associated electric field?
A B C D
+ – + – + – + –
38 In what way do the atoms of the isotopes 126C, 136C and 146C differ?
A different charge
B different numbers of electrons
C different numbers of neutrons
D different numbers of protons

18
38Sr) is radioactive and emits β-particles.

39 Strontium- 90 (90
Which equation could represent this nuclear decay?
A 90Sr
38 → 90
39Sr + –1 β
0
B 90Sr
38 → 90
39Y + –1 β
0
C 90Sr
38 → 90
37Rb + 1 β
0
D 90Sr
38 → 90
37Sr + 1 β
0
40 Protons and neutrons are thought to consist of smaller particles called quarks.
The ‘up’ quark has a charge of 2 e : a ‘down’ quark has a charge of – 1 e, where e is the
3 3
–19
elementary charge (+1.6 x 10 C).
How many up quarks and down quarks must a proton contain?
up quarks down quarks

A 0 3
B 1 1
C 1 2
D 2 1
9702/01/M/J/03
19
BLANK PAGE
9702/01/M/J/03
20
BLANK PAGE
9702/01/M/J/03
Centre Number Candidate Number Name

PHYSICS 9702/03
Paper 3 Practical Test
May/June 2003
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
Additional Materials: As specified in the Confidential Instructions.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
You are expected to record all your observations as soon as these observations are made, and to plan the
presentation of the records so that it is not necessary to make a fair copy of them. The working of the
answers is to be handed in.
Marks are mainly given for a clear record of the observations actually made, for their suitability and
accuracy, and for the use made of them.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
For Examiner’s Use
If you have been given a label, look at the

details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if

provided.

SP (SM) S45889/2
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this question you will investigate how the period of oscillation of a bent metal wire varies
with the angle between the straight parts of the wire.
(a) (i) Secure the cork in the clamp so that the pin is mounted horizontally.
(ii) Make a sharp bend in the wire at its centre so that the angle θ between the straight
parts of the wire is about 160° as shown in Fig. 1.1.
θ wire
Fig. 1.1
(iii) Measure and record the angle θ.
θ = ..............................................
(iv) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in this measurement of θ, showing your working.
% uncertainty in θ = ..................................................
(b) (i) Suspend the wire from the pin so that the arrangement is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
pin
θ wire
Fig. 1.2
9702/03/M/J/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Displace the wire from its equilibrium position and release it so that it performs
small oscillations in a vertical plane, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
Fig. 1.3
(iii) Make and record measurements to determine the period T of these oscillations.
T = .....................................................................
(c) Remove the wire from the pin. Change the value of θ by gently bending the wire.
The new value of θ should be in the range 160° ≥ θ ≥ 30°. Measure and record the new
value of θ.
θ = .........................................................

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) (i) Repeat (b) and (c) until you have six sets of readings for T and θ. Include values of
1 and cos θ in your table of results.
T4
(ii) Justify the number of significant figures which you have given for cos θ.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
1
(e) (i) Plot a graph of (y-axis) against cos θ (x-axis).
T4
(ii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of the line of best fit.
gradient = .....................................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................................
9702/03/M/J/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(f) T and θ are related by an expression of the form
1
= A cosθ + B
T4
where A and B are constants.
Use your answers from (e)(ii) to state the values of A and B. Include appropriate units in
each case.
A = ...............………..................
B = .........................………........
(g) A theoretical treatment of this oscillator shows that
2
 3g 
A = 1 2 
2  4π L 
where L is the total length of the wire.
By making one further measurement, and using the results of your experiment, calculate
a value for g, the acceleration of free fall.
g = ................................................
9702/03/M/J/03
7
BLANK PAGE
9702/03/M/J/03
8
BLANK PAGE
9702/03/M/J/03

PHYSICS 9702/04
Paper 4
May/June 2003
1 hour
No Additional Materials are required.

3
details. If any details are incorrect or 4
in the space given at the top of this page. 5
Stick your personal label here, if 6

provided.
Total
This document consists of 15 printed pages and 1 blank page.

SJF2603/CG S46432/2
2
Data
9702/4/M/J03
3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
4␲⑀0r

Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8␲G
qv r
␩
9702/4/M/J03 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) Define gravitational potential.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why values of gravitational potential near to an isolated mass are all negative.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The Earth may be assumed to be an isolated sphere of radius 6.4 × 103 km with its mass
of 6.0 × 1024 kg concentrated at its centre. An object is projected vertically from the
surface of the Earth so that it reaches an altitude of 1.3 × 104 km.
Calculate, for this object,
(i) the change in gravitational potential,
change in potential = ……………………………………. J kg–1
(ii) the speed of projection from the Earth’s surface, assuming air resistance is
negligible.
speed = ……………………………………. m s–1

[5]
9702/4/M/J03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) Suggest why the equation
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
is not appropriate for the calculation in (c)(ii).
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) On Fig. 2.1, place a tick (✓) against those changes where the internal energy of the
body is increasing. [2]
water freezing at constant temperature ..........................................
a stone falling under gravity in a vacuum ..........................................
water evaporating at constant temperature ..........................................
stretching a wire at constant temperature ..........................................
Fig. 2.1
(b) A jeweller wishes to harden a sample of pure gold by mixing it with some silver so that
the mixture contains 5.0% silver by weight. The jeweller melts some pure gold and then
adds the correct weight of silver. The initial temperature of the silver is 27 °C. Use the
data of Fig. 2.2 to calculate the initial temperature of the pure gold so that the final
mixture is at the melting point of pure gold.
gold silver
melting point / K 1340 1240
specific heat capacity
(solid or liquid) / J kg–1 K–1 129 235
specific latent heat of
fusion / kJ kg–1 628 105
Fig. 2.2
temperature = ………………………………… K [5]
9702/4/M/J03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Suggest a suitable thermometer for the measurement of the initial temperature of the
gold in (b).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 An aluminium sheet is suspended from an oscillator by means of a spring, as illustrated in
Fig. 3.1.
oscillator
spring
aluminium
sheet
electromagnet
Fig. 3.1
An electromagnet is placed a short distance from the centre of the aluminium sheet.
The electromagnet is switched off and the frequency f of oscillation of the oscillator is
gradually increased from a low value. The variation with frequency f of the amplitude a of
vibration of the sheet is shown in Fig. 3.2.
0
0.9f 0
f0 f
Fig. 3.2
9702/4/M/J03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
A peak on the graph appears at frequency f0.
(a) Explain why there is a peak at frequency f0.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The electromagnet is now switched on and the frequency of the oscillator is again
gradually increased from a low value. On Fig. 3.2, draw a line to show the variation with
frequency f of the amplitude a of vibration of the sheet. [3]
(c) The frequency of the oscillator is now maintained at a constant value. The amplitude of
vibration is found to decrease when the current in the electromagnet is switched on.
Use the laws of electromagnetic induction to explain this observation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 In a particular experiment, a high voltage is created by charging an isolated metal sphere, as
metal sphere
insulating
column
Fig. 4.1
The sphere has diameter 42 cm and any charge on its surface may be considered as if it
were concentrated at its centre.
The air surrounding the sphere loses its insulating properties, causing a spark, when the
electric field exceeds 20 kV cm–1.
(a) By reference to an atom in the air, suggest the mechanism by which the electric field
causes the air to become conducting.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate, for the charged sphere when a spark is about to occur,
(i) the charge on the sphere,
charge = ………………………………. C [3]
9702/4/M/J03
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) its potential.
potential = ………………………………. V [2]
(c) Under certain conditions, a spark sometimes occurs before the potential reaches that
calculated in (b)(ii). Suggest a reason for this.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 An α-particle and a β-particle are both travelling along the same path at a speed of
1.5 × 106 m s–1.
They then enter a region of uniform magnetic field as shown in Fig. 5.1.
1.0 cm
path of α-particle
and of β-particle
1.0 cm
region of magnetic field

into plane of paper
Fig. 5.1
The magnetic field is normal to the path of the particles and is into the plane of the paper.
(a) Show that, for a particle of mass m and charge q travelling at speed v normal to a
magnetic field of flux density B, the radius r of its path in the field is given by
mv
r = ___ .
Bq
[3]
9702/4/M/J03
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Calculate the ratio
radius of path of the α-particle

_________________________ .
radius of path of the β-particle
ratio = …………………………………. [3]
(c) The magnetic field has flux density 1.2 mT. Calculate the radius of the path of
(i) the α-particle,
radius = …………………………….. m
(ii) the β-particle.
radius = ……………………………... m
[3]
(d) The magnetic field extends over a region having a square cross-section of side 1.0 cm
(see Fig. 5.1). Both particles emerge from the region of the field.
On Fig. 5.1,
(i) mark with the letter A the position where the emergent α-particle may be detected,
(ii) mark with the letter B the position where the emergent β-particle may be detected.
[3]
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Strontium-90 decays with the emission of a β-particle to form Yttrium-90. The reaction is
represented by the equation
90 90 0
38 Sr → 39Y + –1e + 0.55 MeV.
The decay constant is 0.025 year –1.

90 90
(a) Suggest, with a reason, which nucleus, 38 Sr or 39Y, has the greater binding energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain what is meant by the decay constant.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) At the time of purchase of a Strontium-90 source, the activity is 3.7 × 106 Bq.
(i) Calculate, for this sample of strontium,

1. the initial number of atoms,
number = ……………………………………. [3]

2. the initial mass.
mass = ………………………………. kg [2]

9702/4/M/J03
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Determine the activity A of the sample 5.0 years after purchase, expressing the
A
answer as a fraction of the initial activity A0. That is, calculate the ratio ––– .
A0
ratio = ………………………………….. [2]
9702/4/M/J03
16
BLANK PAGE
9702/4/M/J03

Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/05
May/June 2003
1 hour 30 minutes

details. If any details are incorrect or For Examiner’s Use
2
provided. Total

SP (SM) S45907/3
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will investigate the relationship between the current in a copper wire
and the orientation of a magnet suspended near to the copper wire. The magnet (with a
pointer attached) has been suspended as shown in Fig. 1.1.
stand
magnet
thin strip of card
pointer
Fig. 1.1
A piece of straight copper wire has been taped to one edge of a 50 cm rule and a 360°
protractor attached to the centre of the rule. You should not disturb the copper wire or the
protractor from their positions on the rule during the course of the experiment.
9702/05/M/J/03
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Set up the circuit shown in Fig. 1.2.
d.c. power supply

S
80 90 100 11
70 0
12
60 0
13
50 0
14
40
0
15
30
0160
20
170 180 190 200

10
350 0 0
0 34
21
33
0
22
0
32
0
copper wire
0 23
31 0
0 24
30 250
0
0
260 270 280 29
50 cm rule
protractor
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Place the rule on a sheet of white paper below the magnet. The pointer should be
perpendicular to the wire and the centre of the protractor directly below the point of
suspension. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 1.3.
pointer
TOP VIEW magnet
80 90 100
70 110
12
60 0
13
50 0
copper wire
14
40
0
15
30
0
16 0
20
170 180 190

10
0
350
340
200
21
0
33
0
22
0
32
0 23
31 0
0 24
30 0
250
290 260
280 270
rule
protractor
Fig. 1.3
(iii) Close switch S.
(iv) Adjust the current until the pointer shows a measurable deflection. When the
pointer has stopped moving, measure and record the deflection θ and the current I.
θ = ………………………………………..
I = ………………………………………..

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(v) Change the setting on the power supply unit and repeat (iv) until you have five
more sets of readings for θ and I. The current should not exceed about 5 A. Include
all six values of tan θ in your table of results.
(vi) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for tan θ.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(vii) Open switch S.
(b) (i) Plot a graph of tan θ (y-axis) against I (x-axis).
(ii) Determine the gradient of the line of best fit.
gradient = ………………………………….
9702/05/M/J/03
5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The formula which relates θ and I is
tan θ = kI
where k is a constant.
Use your answer from (b)(ii) to state the value of k.

Include an appropriate unit with your value.
k = …………………………
(d) (i) Use the results from your experiment to calculate a value for θ when the current in
the copper wire is 15 A.
θ = ……………………………………….
(ii) Give one reason why it may be difficult to verify this experimentally.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
9702/05/M/J/03
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 One type of radiation detector known as a Geiger-Müller tube is shown in Fig. 2.1.
wire anode cylindrical cathode
B
thin mica window
gas at low pressure
Fig. 2.1
In order for the tube to function, a potential difference VAB has to be applied between A and
B. The count rate registered by an instrument connected to the tube depends on several
factors such as the distance from the radioactive source to the thin mica window, the activity
of the source and VAB. The tube can detect α, β and γ-radiation.
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate how the count rate due to γ-radiation only
depends upon the potential difference VAB. You have access to three different radioactive
sources only. Information relating to each of these sources is given in the table below.
source type of radiation emitted half-life of source
Radium-226 α, β and γ 1600 years
Bismuth-214 β and γ only 20 minutes
Cobalt-60 β and γ only 5 years
You may assume that the following equipment is available, together with any other apparatus
that may be found in a school or college science laboratory.
Aluminium plates of different thicknesses

Ammeter
Connecting wires
Datalogger
Geiger-Müller tube
Lead plates of different thicknesses
Metre rule
Oscilloscope
Ratemeter
Scaler
Signal generator
Source handling tool
Variable d.c. power supply
Voltmeter

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
You should draw a diagram showing the arrangement of your apparatus. In your account you
should pay particular attention to
(a) which source you would use, giving a reason for your choice,
(b) the procedure to be followed, including how the count rate would be measured,
(c) the control of variables,
(d) any safety precautions you would take.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
9702/05/M/J/03
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
9702/05/M/J/03
10
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/03
11
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/03
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/03
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
PHYSICS 9702/01
May/June 2004
1 hour
Soft clean eraser

Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces
provided unless this has been done for you.
answers A, B, C, and D.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.

IB04 06_9702_01/3RP
 UCLES 2004 [Turn over
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 x 108 m s–1
permeability of free space, µ0 = 4π x 10–7 H m–1
permittivity of free space, ε0 = 8.85 x 10–12 F m–1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 x 10–19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 x 10–34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 x 10–27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 x 10–31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 x 10–27 kg
molar gas constant, R = 8.31 J K–1 mol–1
the Avogadro constant, NA = 6.02 x 1023 mol–1
the Boltzmann constant, k = 1.38 x 10–23 J K–1
gravitational constant, G = 6.67 x 10–11 N m2 kg–2
acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s–2
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

3
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + 21 at 2

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p ∆V
gravitational potential, φ = − Gm
r
simple harmonic motion, a = −ω 2 x
velocity of particle in s.h.m., v = v 0 cos ωt

v = ± ω √ ( x 20 − x 2)
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R 1 + 1/R 2 + . . .
electric potential, V= Q
4 π ε 0r
capacitors in series, 1/C = 1/C 1 + 1/C 2 + . . .
energy of charged capacitor, W = 21 QV
alternating current/voltage, x = x 0 sin ω t
hydrostatic pressure, p = ρ gh
pressure of an ideal gas, p = 31 Nm < c 2>

V
radioactive decay, x = x 0 exp(–λt )
decay constant, λ = 0.693

t1
2
3H 02
critical density matter of the Universe, ρ0 =
8 πG
Bernoulli equation (simplified) p1 + 21 ρv12 = p + 21 ρv22

2
Stokes' law, F = Ar η v
ρvr
Reynolds' number, Re = η
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04 [Turn over

4
1 Which pair contains one vector and one scalar quantity?
A displacement : acceleration
B force : kinetic energy
C momentum : velocity
D power : speed
2 Which of the following could be measured in the same units as force?
A energy / distance
B energy x distance
C energy / time
D momentum x distance
3 The notation µs is used as an abbreviation for a certain unit of time.
What is the name and value of this unit?
name value
A microsecond 10 –6 s
B microsecond 10 –3 s
C millisecond 10 –6 s
D millisecond 10 –3 s
4 What is the reading shown on this milliammeter?
4 6
2 8
0 10
mA
A 2.35 mA B 2.7 mA C 3.4 mA D 3.7 mA
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

5
5 The following trace is seen on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
The setting of the time base is then changed from 10 ms cm–1 to 20 ms cm–1and the Y-sensitivity is
unaltered.
Which trace is now seen on the screen?
A B
C D
6 In a simple electrical circuit, the current in a resistor is measured as (2.50 ± 0.05) mA. The
resistor is marked as having a value of 4.7 Ω ± 2 %.
If these values were used to calculate the power dissipated in the resistor, what would be the
percentage uncertainty in the value obtained?
A 2% B 4% C 6% D 8%

6
7 A car is travelling with uniform acceleration along a straight road. The road has marker posts
every 100 m. When the car passes one post, it has a speed of 10 m s–1 and, when it passes the
next one, its speed is 20 m s–1.
What is the car’s acceleration?
A 0.67 m s–2 B 1.5 m s–2 C 2.5 m s–2 D 6.0 m s–2
8 A tennis ball is released from rest at the top of a tall building.
Which graph best represents the variation with time t of the acceleration a of the ball as it falls,
assuming that the effects of air resistance are appreciable?
A B
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
9 A motorcycle stunt-rider moving horizontally takes off from a point 1.25 m above the ground,
landing 10 m away as shown.
1.25 m
10 m
What was the speed at take-off?
A 5 m s –1 B 10 m s –1 C 15 m s –1 D 20 m s –1
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

7
10 A ball falls vertically and bounces on the ground.
The following statements are about the forces acting while the ball is in contact with the ground.
A The force that the ball exerts on the ground is always equal to the weight of the ball.
B The force that the ball exerts on the ground is always equal in magnitude and opposite in
direction to the force the ground exerts on the ball.
C The force that the ball exerts on the ground is always less than the weight of the ball.
D The weight of the ball is always equal in magnitude and opposite in direction to the force that
the ground exerts on the ball.
11 The diagram shows a situation just before a head-on collision. A lorry of mass 20 000 kg is
travelling at 20.0 m s–1 towards a car of mass 900 kg travelling at 30.0 m s–1 towards the lorry.
_1
20.0 m s
_1
30.0 m s
mass of lorry mass of car

20 000 kg 900 kg
What is the magnitude of the total momentum?
A 373 kN s B 427 kN s C 3600 kN s D 4410 kN s
12 An object, immersed in a liquid in a tank, experiences an upthrust.
What is the physical reason for this upthrust?
A The density of the body differs from that of the liquid.

B The density of the liquid increases with depth.
C The pressure in the liquid increases with depth.
D The value of g in the liquid increases with depth.

8
13 A uniform beam of weight 50 N is 3.0 m long and is supported on a pivot situated 1.0 m from one
end. When a load of weight W is hung from that end, the beam is in equilibrium, as shown in the
diagram.
3.0 m
1.0 m
W pivot
What is the value of W ?
A 25 N B 50 N C 75 N D 100 N
14 The diagram shows a sign of weight 20 N suspended from a pole, attached to a wall. The pole is
kept in equilibrium by a wire attached at point X of the pole.
wire
wall
pole
X
SIGN
The force exerted by the pole at point X is F, and the tension in the wire is 40 N.
Which diagram represents the three forces acting at point X?
A B
F
40 N
20 N
20 N
40 N
F
C D
40 N
20 N
F
F
20 N
40 N
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

9
15 What is the expression used to define power?
energy output
A
energy input
B energy x time taken

C force x velocity
work done
D
time taken
16 A ball is thrown vertically upwards.
Neglecting air resistance, which statement is correct?
A The kinetic energy of the ball is greatest at the greatest height attained.
B By the principle of conservation of energy, the total energy of the ball is constant throughout
its motion.
C By the principle of conservation of momentum, the momentum of the ball is constant
throughout its motion.
D The potential energy of the ball increases uniformly with time during the ascent.
17 Car X is travelling at half the speed of car Y. Car X has twice the mass of car Y.
A Car X has half the kinetic energy of car Y.
B Car X has one quarter of the kinetic energy of car Y.

C Car X has twice the kinetic energy of car Y.
D The two cars have the same kinetic energy.
18 A barrel of mass 50 kg is loaded onto the back of a lorry 1.6 m high by pushing it up a smooth
plank 3.4 m long.
lorry
3.4 m
1.6 m
plank
barrel
mass = 50 kg
What is the minimum work done?
A 80 J B 170 J C 780 J D 1700 J

10
19 Comparing the properties of solids, liquids and gases, which option is correct?
property solids liquids gases
A ordering of molecules high not so high random

B spacing of molecules close far far
C translation of molecules no no yes
D vibration of molecules no yes yes
20 Particles of dust, suspended in water, are viewed through a microscope. The particles can be
seen to move irregularly.
This movement is due to
A convection currents in the water.
B evaporation of the water near the dust particles.

C gravitational forces acting on the particles of dust.
D water molecules hitting the dust particles in a random way.
21 Two solid substances P and Q have atoms of mass MP and MQ respectively. They have NP and
NQ atoms per unit volume.
It is found by experiment that the density of P is greater than that of Q.
Which of the following deductions from this experiment must be correct?
A MP > MQ
B NP > NQ
C MPNP > MQNQ
D
MP > M Q
NP NQ
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

11
22 The graph shown was plotted in an experiment on a metal wire.
0
0 X
The shaded area represents the total strain energy stored in stretching the wire.
How should the axes be labelled?
Y X
A force extension
B mass extension
C strain energy
D stress strain
23 Nylon breaks when the stress within it reaches 1 x 10 9 Pa.
Which range includes the heaviest load that could be lifted by a nylon thread of diameter 1 mm?
A 2 N to 20 N
B 20 N to 200 N
C 200 N to 2000 N
D 2000 N to 20 000 N
24 Which observation indicates that sound waves are longitudinal?
A Sound can be reflected from a solid surface.

B Sound cannot be polarised.
C Sound is diffracted around corners.
D Sound is refracted as it passes from hot air to cold air.

12
25 The diagram shows a transverse wave on a rope. The wave is travelling from left to right.
At the instant shown, the points P and Q on the rope have zero displacement and maximum
displacement respectively.
direction of wave
Which of the following describes the direction of motion, if any, of the points P and Q at this
instant?
point P point Q
A downwards stationary
B stationary downwards
C stationary upwards
D upwards stationary
26 A plane wave of amplitude A is incident on a surface of area S placed so that it is perpendicular

to the direction of travel of the wave. The energy per unit time reaching the surface is E.
1
The amplitude of the wave is increased to 2 A and the area of the surface is reduced to 2
S.
How much energy per unit time reaches this smaller surface?
1
A 4E B 2E C E D 2
E
27 What is the approximate range of frequencies of infra-red radiation?
A 1 x 103 Hz to 1 x 109 Hz
B 1 x 109 Hz to 1 x 1011 Hz
C 1 x 1011 Hz to 1 x 1014 Hz
D 1 x 1014 Hz to 1 x 1017 Hz
28 The lines of a diffraction grating have a spacing of 1.6 x 10–6 m. A beam of light is incident
normally on the grating. The first order maximum makes an angle of 20 o with the undeviated
beam.
What is the wavelength of the incident light?
A 210 nm B 270 nm C 420 nm D 550 nm
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

13
29 The diagram shows an electron in a uniform electric field.
In which direction will the field accelerate the electron?
electron
A
electric
D B field
C
30 The diagram shows a thundercloud whose base is 500 m above the ground.
500 m
The potential difference between the base of the cloud and the ground is 200 MV. A raindrop with
a charge of 4.0 x 10–12 C is in the region between the cloud and the ground.
What is the electrical force on the raindrop?
A 1.6 x 10–6 N B 8.0 x 10–4 N C 1.6 x 10–3 N D 0.40 N
31 Two wires made of the same material and of the same length are connected in parallel to the
same voltage supply. Wire P has a diameter of 2 mm. Wire Q has a diameter of 1 mm.
What is the ratio current in P ?

current in Q
A 1 B 1 C 2 D 4
4 2
32 What is an equivalent unit to 1 volt?
A 1 J A–1 B 1 J C–1 C 1 W C–1 D 1 W s–1

14
33 The terminal voltage of a battery is observed to fall when the battery supplies a current to an
external resistor.
What quantities are needed to calculate the fall in voltage?
A the battery's e.m.f. and its internal resistance
B the battery's e.m.f. and the current

C the current and the battery's internal resistance
D the current and the external resistance
34 The potential difference between point X and point Y is 20 V. The time taken for charge carriers to
move from X to Y is 15 s, and, in this time, the energy of the charge carriers changes by 12 J.
What is the current between X and Y?
A 0.040 A B 0.11 A C 9.0 A D 25 A
35 The diagram shows a battery, a fixed resistor, an ammeter and a variable resistor connected in
series.
A voltmeter is connected across the fixed resistor.
The value of the variable resistor is reduced.
Which correctly describes the changes in the readings of the ammeter and of the voltmeter?
ammeter voltmeter
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04

15
36 Kirchhoff’s two laws for electric circuits can be derived by using conservation laws.
On which conservation laws do Kirchhoff’s laws depend?
Kirchhoff’s Kirchhoff’s
first law second law
A charge current
B charge energy
C current mass
D energy current
37 The diagram shows a parallel combination of three resistors. The total resistance of the
combination is 3 Ω.
12 Ω
6Ω
What is the resistance of resistor X?
A 2Ω B 3Ω C 6Ω D 12 Ω
38 A nucleus of the nuclide 241

94 Pu decays by emission of a β-particle followed by the emission of an
α-particle.
Which of the nuclides shown is formed?

239 239 237 237
A 93 Np B 91Pa C 93 Np D 92 U

16
39 A thin gold foil is bombarded with α-particles as shown.
incident α-particles
gold foil
The results of this experiment provide information about the
A binding energy of a gold nucleus.

B energy levels of electrons in gold atoms.
C size of a gold nucleus.
D structure of a gold nucleus.
40 Isotopes of a given element all have the same
A charge / mass ratio.

B neutron number.
C nucleon number.
D proton number.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2004 9702/01/M/J/04


PHYSICS 9702/02
Paper 2
May/June 2004
1 hour


1
5

provided.
Total

SP (NF/GR) S53571/5
2
Data
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r

Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
qv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) State the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
scalar: ..............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
vector: ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two forces of magnitude 6.0 N and 8.0 N act at a point P. Both forces act away from
point P and the angle between them is 40°.
Fig. 1.1 shows two lines at an angle of 40° to one another.
P 40°
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw a vector diagram to determine the magnitude of the resultant of the
two forces.
magnitude of resultant = ...................................... N [4]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows the variation with distance x along a wave of its displacement d at a particular
time.
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
x/m
Fig. 2.1
The wave is a progressive wave having a speed of 330 m s–1.
(a) (i) Use Fig. 2.1 to determine the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ................................... m
(ii) Hence calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = .................................... Hz
[3]
(b) A second wave has the same frequency and speed as the wave shown in Fig. 2.1 but
has double the intensity. The phase difference between the two waves is 180°.
On the axes of Fig. 2.1, sketch a graph to show the variation with distance x of the
displacement d of this second wave. [2]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A student has been asked to determine the linear acceleration of a toy car as it moves down
a slope. He sets up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 3.1.
Fig. 3.1
The time t to move from rest through a distance d is found for different values of d. A graph of
d (y-axis) is plotted against t 2 (x-axis) as shown in Fig. 3.2.
120
100
d / cm
80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
t 2 / s2
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) Theory suggests that the graph is a straight line through the origin.
Name the feature on Fig. 3.2 that indicates the presence of
(i) random error,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) systematic error.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) Determine the gradient of the line of the graph in Fig. 3.2.
gradient = ........................................... [2]
(ii) Use your answer to (i) to calculate the acceleration of the toy down the slope.
Explain your working.
acceleration = ........................................ m s–2 [3]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A ball has mass m. It is dropped onto a horizontal plate as shown in Fig. 4.1.
v plate
Fig. 4.1
Just as the ball makes contact with the plate, it has velocity v, momentum p and kinetic
energy Ek.
(a) (i) Write down an expression for momentum p in terms of m and v.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Hence show that the kinetic energy is given by the expression
p2
Ek = .
2m
[3]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Just before impact with the plate, the ball of mass 35 g has speed 4.5 m s–1. It bounces
from the plate so that its speed immediately after losing contact with the plate is
3.5 m s–1. The ball is in contact with the plate for 0.14 s.
Calculate, for the time that the ball is in contact with the plate,
(i) the average force, in addition to the weight of the ball, that the plate exerts on the
ball,
magnitude of force = .................................... N
direction of force = ........................................

[4]
(ii) the loss in kinetic energy of the ball.
loss = ....................................... J [2]
(c) State and explain whether linear momentum is conserved during the bounce.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Two forces, each of magnitude F, form a couple acting on the edge of a disc of radius r, as
shown in Fig. 5.1.
F r
F
Fig. 5.1
(a) The disc is made to complete n revolutions about an axis through its centre, normal to
the plane of the disc. Write down an expression for
(i) the distance moved by a point on the circumference of the disc,
distance = .........................................................
(ii) the work done by one of the two forces.
work done = ..........................................................

[2]
(b) Using your answer to (a), show that the work W done by a couple producing a torque T
when it turns through n revolutions is given by
W = 2πnT. [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) A car engine produces a torque of 470 N m at 2400 revolutions per minute. Calculate
the output power of the engine.
power = .................................. W [2]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts incident on, and emerging from, a double slit arrangement.
O X
Fig. 6.1
The wavefronts represent successive crests of the wave. The line OX shows one direction
along which constructive interference may be observed.
(a) State the principle of superposition.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw lines to show
(i) a second direction along which constructive interference may be observed (label
this line CC),
(ii) a direction along which destructive interference may be observed (label this line
DD).
[2]
(c) Light of wavelength 650 nm is incident normally on a double slit arrangement. The
interference fringes formed are viewed on a screen placed parallel to and 1.2 m from the
plane of the double slit, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
screen
light of
a
wavelength 650 nm
1.2 m
not to scale
Fig. 6.2
The fringe separation is 0.70 mm.
(i) Calculate the separation a of the slits.
separation = .................................. m [3]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) The width of both slits is increased without changing their separation a. State the
effect, if any, that this change has on
1. the separation of the fringes,
...................................................................................................................................
2. the brightness of the light fringes,
...................................................................................................................................
3. the brightness of the dark fringes.
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A household electric lamp is rated as 240 V, 60 W. The filament of the lamp is made from
tungsten and is a wire of constant radius 6.0 × 10–6 m. The resistivity of tungsten at the
normal operating temperature of the lamp is 7.9 × 10–7 Ω m.
(a) For the lamp at its normal operating temperature,
(i) calculate the current in the lamp,
current = ........................................ A
(ii) show that the resistance of the filament is 960 Ω.
[3]
(b) Calculate the length of the filament.
length = ........................................ m [3]
(c) Comment on your answer to (b).
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 A thermistor has resistance 3900 Ω at 0 °C and resistance 1250 Ω at 30 °C. The thermistor is
connected into the circuit of Fig. 8.1 in order to monitor temperature changes.
thermistor
1.50 V
R V
Fig. 8.1
The battery of e.m.f. 1.50 V has negligible internal resistance and the voltmeter has infinite
resistance.
(a) The voltmeter is to read 1.00 V at 0 °C. Show that the resistance of resistor R is 7800 Ω.
[2]
(b) The temperature of the thermistor is increased to 30 °C. Determine the reading on the
voltmeter.
reading = ................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The voltmeter in Fig. 8.1 is replaced with one having a resistance of 7800 Ω.
Calculate the reading on this voltmeter for the thermistor at a temperature of 0 °C.
reading = ................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/02/M/J/04

18
BLANK PAGE
9702/02/M/J/04
19
BLANK PAGE
9702/02/M/J/04
20
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced.
The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
9702/02/M/J/04

PHYSICS 9702/03
May/June 2004
1 hour 15 minutes


provided.

SPA (KN) S60436/2
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this question you will determine the density of water by immersing a mass suspended by a
spring into a beaker of water.
(a) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig.1.1. The pointers A and B should be attached
to each end of the spring. The pointer A should also be attached to the paper clip.
The pointer B should be attached to the mass holder. The total mass of the holder
and the masses should be 200 g.
50 cm rule
paper clip
200 g mass
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2004 9702/03/M/J/04

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Record the reading from pointer B.
reading from pointer B = ................................................. m
(iii) Add a further mass of 100 g (0.98 N weight) to the mass holder and record the new
reading from pointer B.
new reading from pointer B = ................................................. m
(iv) Hence determine the extension of the spring when an additional force of 0.98 N is
applied to the spring.
extension = ................................................. m
(b) Hooke’s law can be expressed in the form
F = kx ,
where F is the force required to produce an extension x, and k is the spring constant.
Use your answers from (a) to determine a value for k. You may assume that the spring
obeys Hooke’s law.
k = ........................................... N m–1

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) Use the vernier callipers to measure the diameter of one of the masses.
diameter = ................................................. m
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in the measurement of the diameter of the
mass.
percentage uncertainty = .....................................................
(iii) Calculate the cross-sectional area A, in m2, of the mass. Ignore the slot that is cut
into the mass.
A = ................................................ m2
© UCLES 2004 9702/03/M/J/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) (i) Put all of the masses onto the mass holder so that the spring supports a total mass
of 300 g. This mass should remain constant for the rest of the experiment. Record
the readings from the pointers A and B and hence calculate a value for the length l
between the pointers.
reading from pointer A = ................................................. m
reading from pointer B = ................................................. m
l = ................................................. m
(ii) Place a beaker of water under the mass as shown in Fig. 1.2. Adjust the position of
the boss so that part of the mass is immersed in the water as shown in Fig. 1.2.
boss
d beaker of water
Fig. 1.2
(iii) Make and record measurements to determine the depth d of the submerged part of
the mass and the length l between the pointers.
d = ................................................. m
l = ................................................. m

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iv) Adjust the position of the boss and repeat (iii) until you have six sets of readings for
d and l. Record all your readings in a table in the space below.
(e) (i) Plot a graph of l (y-axis) against d (x-axis).
(ii) Draw the line of best fit.
(iii) Determine the gradient of this line.
gradient = .................................................
© UCLES 2004 9702/03/M/J/04

7 For
Examiner’s
Use

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
(f) Theory suggests that l and d are related by the equation
–ρw Agd
l = ––––––– +c
k
where ρw is the density of water, g is the acceleration of free fall and c is a constant. You
may assume that g = 9.8 m s–2.
Use your answer from (e)(iii) together with the values of A, g and k to determine a value
for the density of water.
ρw = ................................................
(g) An accurate measurement of d is not possible with the apparatus that has been
supplied. State one difficulty that you had when making this measurement, and suggest
one improvement that you would make if additional materials were available.
difficulty ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
improvement .....................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2004 9702/03/M/J/04


PHYSICS 9702/04
Paper 4
May/June 2004
1 hour


1
5

provided.
Total

SP (NF/JG) S53572/2
2
Data
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
qv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) State the significance of the Millikan experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In the Millikan experiment, oil droplets were found to have the following charges.
1.56 × 10–19 C
4.88 × 10–19 C
1.64 × 10–19 C
3.14 × 10–19 C
4.76 × 10–19 C
Use these data to determine a value for the elementary charge. Explain your working.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
elementary charge = .................................. C [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 The pressure p of an ideal gas is given by the expression
1 Nm 2
p = <c > .
3 V
(a) Explain the meaning of the symbol <c 2>.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The ideal gas has a density of 2.4 kg m–3 at a pressure of 2.0 × 105 Pa and a
temperature of 300 K.
(i) Determine the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of the gas atoms at 300 K.
r.m.s. speed = .................................. m s–1 [3]
(ii) Calculate the temperature of the gas for the atoms to have an r.m.s. speed that is
twice that calculated in (i).
temperature = ......................................... K [3]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A binary star consists of two stars that orbit about a fixed point C, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
R2
C
M1 M2
R1
Fig. 3.1
The star of mass M1 has a circular orbit of radius R1 and the star of mass M2 has a circular
orbit of radius R2. Both stars have the same angular speed ω, about C.
(a) State the formula, in terms of G, M1, M2, R1, R2 and ω for
(i) the gravitational force between the two stars,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) the centripetal force on the star of mass M1.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The stars orbit each other in a time of 1.26 × 108 s (4.0 years). Calculate the angular
speed ω for each star.
angular speed = ................................... rad s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) Show that the ratio of the masses of the stars is given by the expression
M1 R
= 2.
M2 R1
[2]
M1
(ii) The ratio is equal to 3.0 and the separation of the stars is 3.2 × 1011 m.
M2
Calculate the radii R1 and R2.
R1 = ........................................ m
R2 = ........................................ m
[2]
(d) (i) By equating the expressions you have given in (a) and using the data calculated in
(b) and (c), determine the mass of one of the stars.
mass of star = ......................................... kg
(ii) State whether the answer in (i) is for the more massive or for the less massive star.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A vertical spring supports a mass, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
Fig. 4.1
The mass is displaced vertically then released. The variation with time t of the displacement
y from its mean position is shown in Fig. 4.2.
+2
y / cm
+1
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
t/s
–1
–2
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
A student claims that the motion of the mass may be represented by the equation
y = y0sinωt.
(a) Give two reasons why the use of this equation is inappropriate.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Determine the angular frequency ω of the oscillations.
angular frequency = .................................. rad s–1 [2]
(c) The mass is a lump of plasticine. The plasticine is now flattened so that its surface area
is increased. The mass of the lump remains constant and the large surface area is
horizontal.
The plasticine is displaced downwards by 1.5 cm and then released.
On Fig. 4.2, sketch a graph to show the subsequent oscillations of the plasticine. [3]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Explain, in terms of heating effect, what is meant by the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value
of an alternating current.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the relation between the peak current I0 and the r.m.s. current Irms of a
sinusoidally-varying current.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The value of a direct current and the peak value of a sinusoidal alternating current are
equal.
(i) Determine the ratio
power dissipation in a resistor of resistance R by the direct current

———————————————————————————————— —.
power dissipation in the resistor of resistance R by the alternating current
ratio = ..................................... [2]
(ii) State one advantage and one disadvantage of the use of alternating rather than
direct current in the home.
advantage ...............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ...........................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) A current I varies with time t as shown in Fig. 5.1.
+4
+3
I/A
+2
+1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
–1 t / ms
–2
–3
–4
Fig. 5.1
For this varying current, state
(i) the peak value,
peak value = ................................ A [1]
(ii) the r.m.s. value.
r.m.s. value = ................................ A [1]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed in the form
∆U = q + w,
where U is the internal energy of the system,

∆U is the increase in internal energy,
q is the thermal energy supplied to the system,
w is the work done on the system.
Complete Fig. 6.1 for each of the processes shown. Write down the symbol ‘+’ for an
increase, the symbol ‘–’ to indicate a decrease and the symbol ‘0’ for no change, as
appropriate.
U q w
the compression of an ideal gas at

constant temperature
the heating of a solid with no

expansion
the melting of ice at 0 °C to give water

at 0 °C
(Note: ice is less dense than water)
[6]
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 (a) State the de Broglie relation, explaining any symbols you use.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An electron of mass m has kinetic energy E. Show that the de Broglie wavelength λ of
this electron is given by
h
λ= .
2mE
[2]
(c) Calculate the potential difference through which an electron, initially at rest, must be
accelerated so that its de Broglie wavelength is equal to 0.40 nm (the diameter of an
atom).
potential difference = .................................... V [3]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the variation with nucleon number of the binding energy per nucleon of a
nucleus.
binding energy
per nucleon
0
0
nucleon number
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1, mark with the letter S the position of the nucleus with the greatest stability.
[1]
(b) One possible fission reaction is
235 U
92 + 1n
0 → 144Ba
56 + 90 Kr
36 + 210n.
(i) On Fig. 8.1, mark possible positions for
1. the Uranium-235 (235

92U) nucleus (label this position U),
2. the Krypton-90 (90

36Kr) nucleus (label this position Kr). [1]
(ii) The binding energy per nucleon of each nucleus is as follows.
235 U:
92 1.2191 × 10–12 J
144Ba:
56 1.3341 × 10–12 J
90 Kr:
36 1.3864 × 10–12 J
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
Use these data to calculate
1. the energy release in this fission reaction (give your answer to three significant
figures),
energy = ........................................ J [3]
2. the mass equivalent of this energy.
mass = ........................................ kg [2]
(iii) Suggest why the neutrons were not included in your calculation in (ii).
...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

16
BLANK PAGE
Copyright Acknowledgements:
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. The publishers will be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly
infringed.
9702/04/M/J/04

PHYSICS 9702/05
May/June 2004
1 hour 30 minutes

details. If any details are incorrect or For Examiner’s Use

provided.
Total

(KN) S60658/2
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the period of oscillation of a suspended metre rule
depends on the distance d from the point of suspension to the centre of the rule.
(a) (i) Mount a pin about 50 cm above the bench using a stand, boss and clamp.
(ii) Suspend the rule from the pin by passing it through one of the small holes in the
rule. The arrangement should be as shown in Fig. 1.1.
pin
centre of rule
rule
Fig. 1.1
(iii) Measure the distance d.
d = ...................................... cm
© UCLES 2004 9702/05/M/J/04

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iv) Gently displace the rule from its equilibrium position so that the rule performs small
oscillations. Make and record measurements to determine the period T of these
oscillations.
T = ...................................... s
(v) Explain how you used the vertically-mounted pencil to assist in the measurement
of the oscillations.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(vi) Change the value of d by adjusting the position of the rule on the pin. Repeat (iii)
and (iv) until you have six sets of readings for T and d. Include values of T 2d and
d 2 in your table of results.
(vii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for d 2.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) Plot a graph of T 2d (y-axis) against d 2 (x-axis).
(iii) Determine the gradient and the y-intercept of this line.
gradient = ......................................
y-intercept = ......................................
© UCLES 2004 9702/05/M/J/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Theory suggests that T and d are related by the equation
A
T 2 = kd + –– .
d
where k and A are constants.
Use your answers from (b)(iii) to find the values of k and A.

Include appropriate units in each case.
k = ......................................
A = ......................................
(d) Use the results of your experiment to find a value for T when d = 1.0 cm.
T = ........................................................... s
© UCLES 2004 9702/05/M/J/04

7
BLANK PAGE

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Beta particles can be deflected by magnetic fields.
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate how magnetic flux density affects the angle
through which beta particles are deflected when they pass through a uniform magnetic field.
The only radioactive source that is available to you is a Radium-226 source which emits α, β
and γ radiation.
You should draw a diagram showing the arrangement of your apparatus. In your account you
should pay particular attention to
(a) the procedure to be followed,
(b) the method by which beta particles only would be detected,
(c) the method of measuring the angle of deflection,
(d) how the magnetic field would be produced, measured and changed,
(e) any safety precautions you would take.
© UCLES 2004 9702/05/M/J/04

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2004 9702/05/M/J/04

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/04
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/04

PHYSICS 9702/06
Paper 6
May/June 2004
45 minutes
Answer all of the questions in any two options.


A
details. If any details are incorrect or F
M
P
provided.
T
Total

SPA (NF/GCR) S53718/7
2
Data
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
qv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Answer all of the questions in any two of the Options.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
The Options are as follows.
Option T Telecommunications questions 14, 15 and 16
Option A
1 (a) State Olbers’ paradox.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Suggest how Olbers’ paradox is resolved by a model based on an expanding Universe.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 The star Altair is 16 light-years from the Sun.
(a) Calculate the distance between Altair and the Sun in parsecs (pc).
distance = .................................... pc [2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows the position of Altair relative to Earth at two positions of Earth, separated
in time by 0.5 years.
first position of Earth
Sun Altair
α
second position of Earth not to scale
Fig. 2.1
The angle α is equal to the parallax angle of Altair.

Determine the angle α.
α = ................................................ arc sec [2]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) State the Cosmological Principle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe the nature of cosmic microwave background radiation and suggest how this
supports the Cosmological Principle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Planets have been discovered orbiting stars other than the Sun.
(a) Suggest and explain two reasons why direct observation of such planets is not
possible.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Suggest and explain how their existence can be inferred.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option F
5 (a) Expanded polystyrene has a density of 15 kg m–3.
Calculate the volume of expanded polystyrene required as a buoyancy aid so that it

provides a resultant upward force of 25 N when totally submerged in water of density
1.0 × 103 kg m–3.
volume = .......................................... m3 [3]
(b) A rowing boat has a cross-section as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
B B
Fig. 5.1
In order to improve its buoyancy in the event that it turns over, expanded polystyrene
blocks are to be fitted inside the boat.
Suggest, with a reason, whether the blocks should be fixed at position A on the keel or
at the two positions marked B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 represents one type of car.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Suggest why, as the car travels at increasing speeds, the downward force that the car
exerts on the road can become less.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The effect in (a) can lead to a loss of control of the car at high speeds. To prevent this, a
‘spoiler’ may be fitted to the back of the car, as illustrated in Fig. 6.2.
spoiler
Fig. 6.2
Suggest why the spoiler reduces this problem.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 The drag force F on a spherical particle of radius r moving with streamline flow at speed v
through a fluid of viscosity η is given by the expression
F = 6πr ηv.
(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show streamline flow of a fluid around a sphere. [2]
Fig. 7.1
(b) Spherical particles of radius 4.5 × 10–7 m and density 3.9 × 103 kg m–3 are initially
distributed uniformly throughout some water of density 1.0 × 103 kg m–3 and viscosity
9.5 × 10–4 Pa s.
The water is 8.0 mm deep. Assume that there are no currents in the water.
(i) Calculate the terminal speed at which a particle falls through the water.
speed = ............................................. m s–1 [4]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) After some time, the water near the surface becomes clear as the particles settle,
as illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
Fig. 7.2
Calculate the approximate fraction of the particles that remain suspended in the
water after a time of 1.0 hour.
fraction = .............................................. [3]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option M
Medical Physics
8 (a) Briefly explain the principles of the generation of ultrasound.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) An ultrasound pulse is transmitted into the body of a patient. The pulse is partially
reflected at a fat/muscle boundary and then at a muscle/bone boundary. The reflected
pulses are received back at the transmitter and are displayed, after processing, on the
screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.). The trace is shown in Fig. 8.1.
1.0 cm
transmitted reflected reflected

pulse pulse pulse
Fig. 8.1
The time-base of the c.r.o. is 10 µs cm–1.
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) the thickness of the layer of fat given that the speed of ultrasound in fat is
1450 m s–1,
thickness = ....................................... cm [3]
(ii) the muscle thickness given that the speed of ultrasound in muscle is 1590 m s–1.
thickness = ....................................... cm [2]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) The human eye is able to accommodate. Explain what is meant by accommodation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The range of distinct vision of an elderly person is 1.2 m to 4.0 m.
(i) State the range of distinct vision for a person with normal vision.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) In order to correct the elderly person’s vision, two pairs of spectacles are required.
Calculate the power of the lenses in each pair of spectacles.
power of lenses = ............................. D and .................................. D [3]
(iii) Suggest how the inconvenience of changing spectacles for distant vision and then
close-up vision may be overcome.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Fig. 10.1 shows the variation with frequency f of the threshold intensity level I.L. of a person
with defective hearing.
100
I.L. / dB
80
60
40
20
0
10 102 103 104 105
f / Hz
Fig. 10.1
Describe and explain these defects.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option P
11 (a) (i) Explain what is meant by the solar constant.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The Sun radiates energy at a rate of 3.9 × 1026 W. The radius of the Earth’s orbit
about the Sun is 1.5 × 108 km. Calculate the solar constant.
solar constant = ........................................... W m–2 [2]
(b) Fig. 11.1 illustrates sunlight incident on the Earth.
N
sunlight
Fig. 11.1
Explain why the power of the sunlight per unit surface area is greater at N (Nairobi) than
at C (Cambridge).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 In many countries, there are daily and seasonal variations in demand for electrical power.
(a) Explain why there are variations in demand.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Explain the advantage of having some form of pumped water storage scheme for the
generation of electrical energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
13 A certain engine operates on the cycle illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
pressure A B
55
105 Pa
1020 J
400 J
C
6
1 O
40 150 760
volume / cm3
Fig. 13.1
A mass of gas is firstly compressed adiabatically (O → A) such that 400 J of work is done on
the gas. During the stage A → B, fuel is injected into the gas and this causes heating at
constant pressure as the fuel burns. The gas and burned fuel then expand adiabatically
(B → C) and, during this process, 1020 J of work is done by the gas and burned fuel. Finally,
during the stage C → O, energy is wasted.
(a) (i) During the stage A → B, 2500 J of energy is supplied to the gas. Show that the
work done by the gas as it expands during this stage is 605 J.
(ii) Calculate the energy wasted during the stage C → O.
energy = ..................................... J
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

19 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Determine the efficiency Ε of the engine, given that
useful work done during the expansion from A to C

Ε= .
total energy input
Ε = ……………………………
[5]
(b) State one similarity and one difference between the operating cycle of this engine and
that of a four-stroke petrol engine.
similarity: .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
difference: .......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option T
Telecommunications
14 In a certain telephone system, the actual signal power in a wire is expressed as the number
of decibels (dB) above or below a reference power level of 1.0 mW.
(a) State a formula for the ratio of two powers P1 and P2, expressed in decibels (dB).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A signal in a wire has a power of 25.4 mW. Express this signal power as a number of dB
above or below the reference level.
number of dB = ........................................................
............................................... the reference level [2]
(c) The wire has an attenuation per unit length of 3.2 dB km–1.
(i) Explain what is meant by attenuation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate the length of the wire for the signal in (b) to be reduced to the reference
level.
length = .................................................... km
[3]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

21 For
Examiner’s
Use
15 (a) Explain what is meant by amplitude modulation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The variation with frequency f of the power P of an amplitude-modulated signal from a
radio station is shown in Fig. 15.1.
0
46.5 50 53.5
f / kHz
Fig. 15.1
(i) the wavelength at which the radio station is broadcasting,
wavelength = ....................................... m
(ii) the bandwidth of the radio signal,
bandwidth = ........................................ kHz
(iii) the maximum frequency of the demodulated signal.
frequency = ........................................ kHz

[5]

22 For
Examiner’s
Use
16 (a) Describe the orbit of a geostationary satellite.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) State a typical frequency for communication between the Earth’s surface and a
geostationary satellite.
frequency = ........................................... Hz
(ii) Suggest why the frequency of transmission from the satellite is different from that
received by the satellite from Earth.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Give one advantage and one disadvantage of the use of geostationary satellites when
compared with polar-orbiting satellites for telephone communication.
advantage: ......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04

23
BLANK PAGE
9702/06/M/J/04
24
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced.
The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
9702/06/M/J/04
PHYSICS 9702/01
May/June 2005
1 hour
Soft clean eraser

Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.

For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and
record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

IB05 06_9702_01/2RP
2
Data
speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1
permeability of free space, µ0 = 4π × 10–7 H m–1
permittivity of free space, ε0 = 8.85 × 10–12 F m–1
elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10–19 C
the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s
unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10–27 kg
rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg
rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg
the Avogadro constant, NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1
the Boltzmann constant, k = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1
gravitational constant, G = 6.67 × 10–11 N m2 kg–2
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

3
Formulae
1
v2 = u2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p∆V
r
simple harmonic motion, a = – ω 2x
velocity of particle in s.h.m., v = v0 cos ωt

v = ± ω √( x 02 – x2)
resistors in parallel, 1 / R = 1 / R1 + 1 / R2 + . . .
4 πε 0r
capacitors in series, 1 / C = 1 / C1 + 1 / C2 + . . .
energy of charged capacitor, W= 1

2 QV
alternating current/voltage, x = x0 sin ωt
pressure of an ideal gas, p= 1 Nm <c 2>

3 V
radioactive decay, x = x0 exp(–λt)

t1
2
3H 02
8πG
Bernoulli equation (simplified), p1 + 1

2 ρv 21 = p2 + 1
2 ρv 22
Stokes’ law, F = Arηv

ρvr
Reynolds’ number, Re = η

4
1 Decimal sub-multiples and multiples of units are indicated using a prefix to the unit. For example,
the prefix milli (m) represents 10–3.
Which of the following gives the sub-multiples or multiples represented by pico (p) and giga (G)?
pico (p) giga (G)
A 10–9 109
B 10–9 1012
C 10–12 109
D 10–12 1012
2 A metal sphere of radius r is dropped into a tank of water. As it sinks at speed v, it experiences a
drag force F given by F = kr v, where k is a constant.
What are the SI base units of k?
A kg m2 s–1 B kg m–2 s–2 C kg m–1 s–1 D kg m s–2
3 An Olympic athlete of mass 80 kg competes in a 100 m race.
What is the best estimate of his mean kinetic energy during the race?
A 4 x 102 J B 4 x 103 J C 4 x 104 J D 4 x 105 J
4 In an experiment, a radio-controlled car takes 2.50 ± 0.05 s to travel 40.0 ± 0.1 m.
What is the car’s average speed and the uncertainty in this value?
A 16 ± 1 m s–1
B 16.0 ± 0.2 m s–1
C 16.0 ± 0.4 m s–1
D 16.00 ± 0.36 m s–1
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

5
5 The diagram shows two pulses on the screen of a cathode ray oscilloscope. A grid of 1 cm
squares covers the screen. The time base setting is 1 µs cm–1.
1 cm
How long does each pulse last?
A 2 µs B 3 µs C 4 µs D 6 µs
6 Which feature of a graph allows acceleration to be determined?
A the area under a displacement-time graph

B the area under a velocity-time graph
C the slope of a displacement-time graph
D the slope of a velocity-time graph
7 A boy throws a ball vertically upwards. It rises to a maximum height, where it is momentarily at
rest, and falls back to his hands.
Which of the following gives the acceleration of the ball at various stages in its motion? Take
vertically upwards as positive. Neglect air resistance.
at maximum
rising falling
height
A – 9.81 m s–2 0 + 9.81 m s–2

B – 9.81 m s–2 – 9.81 m s–2 – 9.81 m s–2
C + 9.81 m s–2 + 9.81 m s–2 + 9.81 m s–2
D + 9.81 m s–2 0 – 9.81 m s–2

6
8 The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for a car.
12
v / m s–1 10
0
0 1 2 3 4
t/s
What is the distance travelled between time t = 0 and t = 4 s?
A 2.5 m B 3.0 m C 20 m D 28 m
9 A projectile is launched at point O and follows the path OPQRS, as shown. Air resistance may be
neglected.
Q
P R
O S
Which statement is true for the projectile when it is at the highest point Q of its path?
A The horizontal component of the projectile’s acceleration is zero.

B The horizontal component of the projectile’s velocity is zero.
C The kinetic energy of the projectile is zero.
D The momentum of the projectile is zero.
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

7
10 Which is not one of Newton's laws of motion?
A The total momentum of a system of interacting bodies remains constant, providing no

external force acts.
B The rate of change of momentum of a body is directly proportional to the external force
acting on the body and takes place in the direction of the force.
C If body A exerts a force on body B, then body B exerts an equal and oppositely-directed force
on body A.
D A body continues in a state of rest or of uniform motion in a straight line unless acted upon
by some external force.
11 Two equal masses travel towards each other on a frictionless air track at speeds of 60 cm s–1 and
40 cm s–1. They stick together on impact.
60 cm s–1 40 cm s–1
What is the speed of the masses after impact?
A 10 cm s–1 B 20 cm s–1 C 40 cm s–1 D 50 cm s–1
12 What is the centre of gravity of an object?
A the geometrical centre of the object

B the point about which the total torque is zero
C the point at which the weight of the object may be considered to act
D the point through which gravity acts

8
13 An L-shaped rigid lever arm is pivoted at point P.
5N
2m
2m
10 N
3m 1m
20 N
Three forces act on the lever arm, as shown in the diagram.
What is the magnitude of the resultant moment of these forces about point P?
A 30 N m B 35 N m C 50 N m D 90 N m
14 The vector diagram shows three coplanar forces acting on an object at P.
3N
P
4N
4N
The magnitude of the resultant of these three forces is 1 N.
What is the direction of this resultant?
A B C D
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

9
15 A steel ball is falling at constant speed in oil.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the gravitational potential energy Ep and the kinetic
energy Ek of the ball?
A B
energy energy
Ek Ek
Ep Ep
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
energy Ek energy Ek
Ep Ep
0 0
0 time 0 time

10
16 An electrical generator is started at time zero. The total electrical energy generated during the
first 5 seconds is shown in the graph.
50
energy / J
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
What is the maximum electrical power generated at any instant during these first 5 seconds?
A 10 W B 13 W C 30 W D 50 W
17 A concrete cube of side 0.50 m and uniform density 2.0 x 103 kg m–3 is lifted 3.0 m vertically by a
crane.
What is the change in potential energy of the cube?
A 0.75 kJ B 7.4 kJ C 29 kJ D 470 kJ
18 The hydrostatic pressure p at a depth h in a liquid of density ρ is given by the formula p = hρ g.
Which equation, or principle of physics, is used in the derivation of this formula?
A density = mass ÷ volume

B potential energy = mgh
C atmospheric pressure decreases with height
D density increases with depth
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

11
19 Pollen grains are suspended in a liquid and are illuminated strongly. When observed under a
microscope they are seen to be in continuous random motion.
What is the reason for this?
A convection currents in the liquid

B evaporation of the liquid
C molecules of the liquid colliding with the pollen grains
D pollen grains colliding with each other
20 A number of similar springs, each having the same spring constant, are joined in three
arrangements X, Y and Z. The same load is applied to each.
X Y Z
load
load
load
What is the order of increasing extension for these arrangements?
smallest largest
A X Y Z
B Z X Y
C Z Y X
D Y X Z

12
21 Cylindrical samples of steel, glass and rubber are each subjected to a gradually increasing tensile
force F. The extensions e are measured and graphs are plotted as shown below.
F F F
0 0 0
0 e 0 e 0 e
Which row correctly relates the graphs to the materials?
steel glass rubber
A X Y Z
B X Z Y
C Y X Z
D Y Z X
A
22 Two steel wires P and Q have lengths l and 2l respectively, and cross-sectional areas A and
2
respectively. Both wires obey Hooke’s law.
What is the ratio tension in P when both wires are stretched to the same extension?
tension in Q
A 1 B 1 C 2 D 4
4 2 1 1
23 What do not travel at the speed of light in a vacuum?
A electrons
B microwaves
C radio waves
D X-rays
24 The number of wavelengths of visible light in one metre is of the order of
A 104. B 106. C 108. D 1010.
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

13
25 A health inspector is measuring the intensity of a sound. Near a loudspeaker his meter records
an intensity I. This corresponds to an amplitude A of the sound wave. At another position the
meter gives an intensity reading of 2 I.
What is the corresponding sound wave amplitude?
A A B 2A C 2A D 4A
2
26 A sound wave is set up in a long tube, closed at one end. The length of the tube is adjusted until
the sound from the tube is loudest.
What is the nature of the sound wave in the tube?
A longitudinal and progressive

B longitudinal and stationary
C transverse and progressive
D transverse and stationary
27 T is a microwave transmitter placed at a fixed distance from a flat reflecting surface S.
A small microwave receiver is moved steadily from T towards S and receives signals of alternate
maxima and minima of intensity.
The distance between successive maxima is 15 mm.
What is the frequency of the microwaves?
A 1.0 x 107 Hz
B 2.0 x 107 Hz
C 1.0 x 1010 Hz
D 2.0 x 1010 Hz

14
28 A teacher sets up the apparatus shown to demonstrate a two-slit interference pattern on the
screen.
double screen
single
slit
slit
source
of light q
p r
Which change to the apparatus will increase the fringe spacing?
A decreasing the distance p

B decreasing the distance q
C decreasing the distance r
D decreasing the wavelength of the light
29 A parallel beam of white light is incident normally on a diffraction grating. It is noted that the
second-order and third-order spectra partially overlap.
Which wavelength in the third-order spectrum appears at the same angle as the wavelength of
600 nm in the second-order spectrum?
A 300 nm B 400 nm C 600 nm D 900 nm
30 The diagram shows a pair of metal plates 4.0 mm apart connected to a 9.0 V battery.
4.0 mm 9.0 V
What is the electric field between the plates?
A 4.4 x 10–4 N C–1

B 3.6 x 10–2 N C–1
C 36 N C–1
D 2.3 x 103 N C–1
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

15
31 Which diagram represents the electric field in the vicinity of a positive electric charge of
magnitude Q?
A B
Q Q
C D
Q
Q
32 A copper wire of cross-sectional area 2.0 mm2 carries a current of 10 A.
How many electrons pass through a given cross-section of the wire in one second?
A 1.0 x 101 B 5.0 x 106 C 6.3 x 1019 D 3.1 x 1025
33 A cylindrical piece of a soft, electrically-conducting material has resistance R. It is rolled out so

that its length is doubled but its volume stays constant.
What is its new resistance?
A R B R C 2R D 4R
2

16
34 The I-V characteristics of two electrical components P and Q are shown below.
2.0
I/A
1.5
P
Q
1.0
0.5
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
V/V
A P is a resistor and Q is a filament lamp.

B The resistance of Q increases as the current in it increases.
C At 1.9 A the resistance of Q is approximately half that of P.
D At 0.5 A the power dissipated in Q is double that in P.
35 Which electrical component is represented by the following symbol?
A a diode
B a light-dependent resistor
C a resistor
D a thermistor
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

17
36 The diagram shows a circuit with four voltmeter readings V, V1, V2 and V3.
V V1
V V
V2
V
2R
V3
V
Which equation relating the voltmeter readings must be true?
A V = V1 + V2 + V3
B V + V1 = V2 + V3
C V3 = 2(V2)
D V – V1 = V3

18
37 In the circuit below, P is a potentiometer of total resistance 10 Ω and Q is a fixed resistor of

resistance 10 Ω. The battery has an e.m.f. of 4.0 V and negligible internal resistance. The
voltmeter has a very high resistance. The slider on the potentiometer is moved from X to Y and a
graph of voltmeter reading V is plotted against slider position.
Y
4.0 V
V
Q
Which graph is obtained?
A B
V V
4 4
2 2
0 0
X slider position Y X slider position Y
C D
V V
4 4
2 2
0 0
X slider position Y X slider position Y
38 Which two nuclei contain the same number of neutrons?

12 14
A 6C and 6C
16 15
B 7N and 8O
23 24
C 11 Na and 12 Mg
32 32
D 14 Si and 15 P
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

19
39 A student conducts an experiment using an α-particle source.
When considering safety precautions, what can be assumed to be the maximum range of
α-particles in air?
A between 0 and 5 mm
B between 5 mm and 200 mm
C between 200 mm and 500 mm
D between 500 mm and 1000 mm
40 The following represents a sequence of radioactive decays involving two α-particles and one
β-particle.
217 α α β
85 At V W X
What is the nuclide X?

213 215 209 217
A 85 At B 77 Ir C 82 Pb D 81Tl
© UCLES 2005 9702/01/M/J/05

20
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been
reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
9702/01/M/J/05
PHYSICS
Paper 2
9702/02
May/June 2005
1 hour
Candidate
Name
Centre Candidate
Number Number

The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. For Examiner’s Use
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 1
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE. 2

DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES. 3
Total

SP (CW/AR) S92061/3.1
2
Data
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)
resistors in series, R = R1 + R 2 + . . .

Q
40r

Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
qv r

4

For
Examiner’s
Use
1 Make estimates of the following quantities.
(a) the speed of sound in air
speed = ................................................. [1]
(b) the density of air at room temperature and pressure
density = ................................................. [1]
(c) the mass of a protractor
mass = ................................................. [1]
(d) the volume, in cm3, of the head of an adult person
volume = ......................................... cm3 [1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

5
2 The Brownian motion of smoke particles in air may be observed using the apparatus shown
For
in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
microscope
smoke
cell
light
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe what is seen when viewing a smoke particle through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Suggest and explain what difference, if any, would be observed in the movement of
smoke particles when larger smoke particles than those observed in (a) are viewed
through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

6
3 A bullet of mass 2.0 g is fired horizontally into a block of wood of mass 600 g. The block is
For
suspended from strings so that it is free to move in a vertical plane. Examiner’s
The bullet buries itself in the block. The block and bullet rise together through a vertical Use
distance of 8.6 cm, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
wood
block
bullet
8.6 cm
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the block and bullet.
change = ............................................. J [2]
(ii) Show that the initial speed of the block and the bullet, after they began to move off
together, was 1.3 m s–1.
[1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

7
(b) Using the information in (a)(ii) and the principle of conservation of momentum,
For
determine the speed of the bullet before the impact with the block. Examiner’s
Use
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [2]
(c) (i) Calculate the kinetic energy of the bullet just before impact.
kinetic energy = .............................................. J [2]
(ii) State and explain what can be deduced from your answers to (c)(i) and (a)(i) about
the type of collision between the bullet and the block.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]

8
4 A glass fibre of length 0.24 m and area of cross-section 7.9 × 10–7 m2 is tested until it breaks. For
The variation with load F of the extension x of the fibre is shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
x / 10–4 m
0
0 20 40 60 80
F/N
Fig. 4.1
(a) State whether glass is ductile, brittle or polymeric.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Use Fig. 4.1 to determine, for this sample of glass,
(i) the ultimate tensile stress,
ultimate tensile stress = ........................................... Pa [2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

9
(ii) the Young modulus,

For
Examiner’s
Use
Young modulus = ........................................... Pa [3]
(iii) the maximum strain energy stored in the fibre before it breaks.
maximum strain energy = .............................................. J [2]
(c) A hard ball and a soft ball, with equal masses and volumes, are thrown at a glass
window. The balls hit the window at the same speed. Suggest why the hard ball is more
likely than the soft ball to break the glass window.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]

10
5 (a) Explain what is meant by the diffraction of a wave.

For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Light of wavelength 590 nm is incident normally on a diffraction grating having 750 lines
per millimetre.
The diffraction grating formula may be expressed in the form
d sinθ = nλ.
(i) Calculate the value of d, in metres, for this grating.
d = ............................................. m [2]
(ii) Determine the maximum value of n for the light incident normally on the grating.
maximum value of n = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

11
(iii) Fig. 5.1 shows incident light that is not normal to the grating.
For
Examiner’s
Use
incident diffracted
light light
grating
Fig. 5.1
Suggest why the diffraction grating formula, d sinθ = nλ, should not be used in this
situation.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Light of wavelengths 590 nm and 595 nm is now incident normally on the grating.
Two lines are observed in the first order spectrum and two lines are observed in the
second order spectrum, corresponding to the two wavelengths.
State two differences between the first order spectrum and the second order spectrum.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

12
6 Two parallel metal plates P and Q are situated 8.0 cm apart in air, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
For
Examiner’s
Use
8.0 cm
P Q
+160 V
Fig. 6.1
Plate Q is earthed and plate P is maintained at a potential of +160 V.
(a) (i) On Fig. 6.1, draw lines to represent the electric field in the region between the
plates. [2]
(ii) Show that the magnitude of the electric field between the plates is 2.0 × 103 V m–1.
[1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

13
(b) A dust particle is suspended in the air between the plates. The particle has charges of
For
+1.2 × 10–15 C and –1.2 × 10–15 C near its ends. The charges may be considered to be Examiner’s
point charges separated by a distance of 2.5 mm, as shown in Fig. 6.2. Use
2.5
+1.2 x 10–15 C mm
35° direction of
electric field
–1.2 x 10–15 C
Fig. 6.2
The particle makes an angle of 35° with the direction of the electric field.
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw arrows to show the direction of the force on each charge due to
the electric field. [1]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the force on each charge due to the electric field.
force = ............................................. N [2]
(iii) Determine the magnitude of the couple acting on the particle.
couple = .......................................... N m [2]
(iv) Suggest the subsequent motion of the particle in the electric field.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]

14
7 (a) Define the resistance of a resistor.

For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the circuit of Fig. 7.1, the battery has an e.m.f. of 3.00 V and an internal resistance r.
R is a variable resistor. The resistance of the ammeter is negligible and the voltmeter
has an infinite resistance.
3.00 V
r
R
A
Fig. 7.1
The resistance of R is varied. Fig. 7.2 shows the variation of the power P dissipated in R
with the potential difference V across R.
1.2
P/W
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
V/V
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05

15
(i) Use Fig. 7.2 to determine

For
Examiner’s
1. the maximum power dissipation in R, Use
maximum power = .................................................. W
2. the potential difference across R when the maximum power is dissipated.
potential difference = ................................................... V

[1]
(ii) Hence calculate the resistance of R when the maximum power is dissipated.
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
(iii) Use your answers in (i) and (ii) to determine the internal resistance r of the battery.
r = ............................................. Ω [3]
(c) By reference to Fig. 7.2, it can be seen that there are two values of potential difference
V for which the power dissipation is 1.05 W.
State, with a reason, which value of V will result in less power being dissipated in the
internal resistance.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]

16
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the position of Neptunium-231 (23193 Np) on a diagram in which nucleon For
number (mass number) A is plotted against proton number (atomic number) Z. Examiner’s
Use
250
248
246
A
244
242
240
238
236
234
232
Np
230
228
226
224
86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Z
Fig. 8.1
(a) Neptunium-231 decays by the emission of an α-particle to form protactinium.

On Fig. 8.1, mark with the symbol Pa the position of the isotope of protactinium
produced in this decay. [1]
(b) Plutonium-243 (24394 Pu) decays by the emission of a β-particle (an electron).
On Fig. 8.1, show this decay by labelling the position of Plutonium-243 as Pu and the
position of the daughter product as D. [2]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2005 9702/02/M/J/05


PHYSICS 9702/03
May/June 2005
1 hour 15 minutes


provided.

SPA (MML 8097 3/04) S84954/2
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this question you will investigate how the force required to maintain equilibrium of a
suspended mass depends on the angle between the line of action of the force and the
horizontal.
You are supplied with a piece of string that has a loop at each end and one in the middle.
(a) (i) Suspend the mass from the middle loop and attach the other loops to a mounted
boss and a newton-meter as shown in Fig. 1.1. The body of the newton-meter must
be clamped so that it is along the line of action of force F. You may need to rotate
the clamp in order to achieve this. The section AB of the string should be horizontal
and the bases of the stands should be clamped to the bench.
newton-meter
stand
B
A
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2005 9702/03/M/J/05

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Using the protractor, measure the angle . Record the value of and the reading F
from the newton-meter.
= ...................................
F = ...................................
(iii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in the value of .
percentage uncertainty in = ...................................
(b) State two difficulties that you had when making measurements of F and .
1 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Change the height of one of the bosses above the bench and adjust the separation of
the stands to give new values of and F. The section AB must remain horizontal. You
will need to loosen a G-clamp in order move a stand. Measure and record the new
values of and F. Repeat the procedure until you have six sets of readings for and F.
You must ensure that, when you are taking readings, the body of the newton-meter is
along the line of action of the force F and that it does not go off scale.
Include all six sets of values of F, and 1/sin in your table of results.
(d) Plot a graph of F (y-axis) against 1/sin (x-axis) and draw the best straight line through
the points.
(e) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of the line.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2005 9702/03/M/J/05

5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(f) The equation that relates F and is
mg
F = ––––– + k
sin
where m is the mass of the load, k is a constant and g is the acceleration of free fall.
You may take the value of g to be 9.81 m s–2.
Use your answers from (e) to determine values for m and k. Include appropriate units.
m = ...................................
k = ....................................
© UCLES 2005 9702/03/M/J/05

7
BLANK PAGE
9702/03/M/J/05
8
BLANK PAGE
9702/03/M/J/05

PHYSICS 9702/04
Paper 4
May/June 2005
1 hour


1
5

provided.
Total

SP (SLM/AR) S74754/4
2
Data
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± ω √(x 02 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
Bernoulli equation (simplified), p1 + ρv12 = p2 + ρv22
ρv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The orbit of the Earth, mass 6.0 × 1024 kg, may be assumed to be a circle of radius
1.5 × 1011 m with the Sun at its centre, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Earth,
mass 6.0 x 1024 kg
Sun
1.5 x 1011 m
Fig. 1.1
The time taken for one orbit is 3.2 × 107 s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the magnitude of the angular velocity of the Earth about the Sun,
angular velocity = ............................... rad s–1 [2]
(ii) the magnitude of the centripetal force acting on the Earth.
force = ....................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) State the origin of the centripetal force calculated in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Determine the mass of the Sun.
mass = ..................................... kg [3]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) State what is meant by an ideal gas.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The product of pressure p and volume V of an ideal gas of density ρ at temperature T is
given by the expressions
p = ρ<c 2>
and pV = NkT,
where N is the number of molecules and k is the Boltzmann constant.
(i) State the meaning of the symbol <c 2>.
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Deduce that the mean kinetic energy EK of the molecules of an ideal gas is given
by the expression
EK = kT.
[2]
(c) In order for an atom to escape completely from the Earth’s gravitational field, it must
have a speed of approximately 1.1 × 104 m s–1 at the top of the Earth’s atmosphere.
(i) Estimate the temperature at the top of the atmosphere such that helium, assumed
to be an ideal gas, could escape from the Earth. The mass of a helium atom is
6.6 × 10–27 kg.
temperature = ....................................... K [2]
(ii) Suggest why some helium atoms will escape at temperatures below that calculated
in (i).
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) Define specific latent heat of fusion.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A mass of 24 g of ice at –15 °C is taken from a freezer and placed in a beaker containing
200 g of water at 28 °C. Data for ice and for water are given in Fig. 3.1.
specific heat capacity specific latent heat of fusion

/ J kg–1 K–1 / J kg–1
ice 2.1 × 103 3.3 × 105
water 4.2 × 103 –
Fig. 3.1
(i) Calculate the quantity of thermal energy required to convert the ice at –15 °C to
water at 0 °C.
energy = ....................................... J [3]
(ii) Assuming that the beaker has negligible mass, calculate the final temperature of
the water in the beaker.
temperature = ..................................... °C [3]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A tube, closed at one end, has a constant area of cross-section A. Some lead shot is placed
in the tube so that the tube floats vertically in a liquid of density ρ, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
tube, area of
cross-section A
liquid,
density
lead shot
Fig. 4.1
The total mass of the tube and its contents is M.

When the tube is given a small vertical displacement and then released, the vertical
acceleration a of the tube is related to its vertical displacement y by the expression
Aρg
a=– y,
M
where g is the acceleration of free fall.
(a) Define simple harmonic motion.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Show that the tube is performing simple harmonic motion with a frequency f given by
f=
1
2π AMρg .
[3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the variation with time t of the vertical displacement y of the tube in
another liquid.
3
y / cm
2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
–1 t/s
–2
–3
Fig. 4.2
(i) The tube has an external diameter of 2.4 cm and is floating in a liquid of density
950 kg m–3. Assuming the equation in (b), calculate the mass of the tube and its
contents.
mass = ..................................... kg [3]
(ii) State what feature of Fig. 4.2 indicates that the oscillations are damped.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 An isolated conducting sphere of radius r is given a charge +Q. This charge may be
assumed to act as a point charge situated at the centre of the sphere, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
+Q
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2. shows the variation with distance x from the centre of the sphere of the potential V
due to the charge +Q.
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
x
Fig. 5.2
(a) State the relation between electric field and potential.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Using the relation in (a), on Fig. 5.3 sketch a graph to show the variation with distance x
of the electric field E due to the charge +Q.
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r x
[3]
Fig. 5.3

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 An ideal iron-cored transformer is illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
core
input output
primary secondary
coil coil
Fig. 6.1
(a) Explain why
(i) the supply to the primary coil must be alternating current, not direct current,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) for constant input power, the output current must decrease if the output voltage
increases.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the variation with time t of the current Ip in the primary coil. There is no
current in the secondary coil.
Ip
0
0 t
Fig. 6.2
0
0 t
Fig. 6.3
0
0 t
Fig. 6.4
(i) Complete Fig. 6.3 to show the variation with time t of the magnetic flux Φ in the
core. [1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 6.4 to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E induced in the
secondary coil. [2]
(iii) Hence state the phase difference between the current Ip in the primary coil and the
e.m.f. E induced in the secondary coil.
phase difference = ........................................... [1]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 The isotope Manganese-56 decays and undergoes β-particle emission to form the stable
isotope Iron-56. The half-life for this decay is 2.6 hours.
Initially, at time t = 0, a sample of Manganese-56 has a mass of 1.4 µg and there is no
Iron-56.
(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show the variation with time t of the mass of Iron-56 in the sample
for time t = 0 to time t = 11 hours.
mass of
Iron-56
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
t / hours
[2]
Fig. 7.1
(b) For the sample of Manganese-56, determine
(i) the initial number of Manganese-56 atoms in the sample,
number = ............................................[2]
(ii) the initial activity.
activity = ..................................... Bq [3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Determine the time at which the ratio
mass of Iron-56
mass of Manganese-56
is equal to 9.0.
time = ................................ hours [2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 (a) Define capacitance.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) One use of a capacitor is for the storage of electrical energy.
Briefly explain how a capacitor stores energy.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the change in the energy stored in a capacitor of capacitance 1200 µF
when the potential difference across the capacitor changes from 50 V to 15 V.
energy change = ....................................... J [3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05


PHYSICS 9702/05
May/June 2005
1 hour 30 minutes

missing, please fill in your correct details For Examiner’s Use

provided.
Total

SPA (MML 8097 3/04) S81478/2
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this question you will investigate how the period of oscillation of a loaded steel blade
varies with the length of the blade and use the results of your experiment to determine a
value for the Young modulus of steel.
(a) Use the G-clamp and the small blocks of wood to clamp the steel blade to the bench
as shown in Fig. 1.1. The blade has two small 50 g masses attached to one end. You
should not disturb the position of these masses during the course of the experiment.
blade
blocks of wood
50g masses
G-clamp
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Measure and record the distance d from the centre of the masses to the edge of
the blocks as shown in Fig. 1.2. You will need to hold the blade horizontal when you
make the measurement of d.
© UCLES 2005 9702/05/M/J/05

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
d
Fig. 1.2
d = ........................................................... m
(ii) Displace the end of the blade from its equilibrium position and release it so that
the strip performs small oscillations in a vertical plane. Make and record
measurements to determine the period T of oscillation of the blade.
T = ............................................................ s

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Change the value of d and repeat (b)(i) and (ii) until you have six sets of readings of
distance d and period T for values of d in the range 0.130 m < d < 0.250 m.
Include in your table of results all six sets of values for lg (T / s) and lg (d / m).
(d) (i) Plot a graph of lg (T / s) (y-axis) against lg (d / m) (x-axis).

gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2005 9702/05/M/J/05

5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(e) Theory suggests that T and d are related by a simple power law of the form
T = kd n
where n and k are constants.
Use your answers from (d)(iii) to find the values of n and k.
You need not be concerned with the units of these quantities.
n = ....................................
k = ....................................
A theoretical treatment of this oscillator suggests that
√
162M
k = –––––
Ebt 3
where M is the mass attached to the end of the blade, E is the Young modulus, b is the
width of the blade and t is the thickness of the blade as shown in Fig. 1.3.
b
t
Fig. 1.3
© UCLES 2005 9702/05/M/J/05

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(f) (i) Measure the values of b and t. The measurement of t should be made on a part of
the blade where there is no tape.
b = ......................................... m
t = ......................................... m
(ii) State the name of the instrument used to measure t.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in the value of t 3.
percentage uncertainty in t 3 = ........................................ %
(g) Determine a value for E. Include an appropriate unit.
E = ...............................................................

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Many homes have smoke detectors fitted to the ceilings of certain rooms to provide an
early warning of a fire. These detectors contain a weak radioactive source that ionises the
air between two metal plates. See Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
A low voltage battery in the detector causes the ions to move. This produces a very small
ionisation current in a circuit containing the battery and the plates. Any reduction in this
ionisation current due to smoke is detected and an alarm sounds.
An airline company wishes to install some of these smoke detectors in its aircraft and
needs to know if changes in air pressure will affect the ionisation current.
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate how the ionisation current depends on air
pressure. You should draw a detailed labelled diagram showing the arrangement of your
apparatus. In your account you should pay particular attention to
(a) the type of source used in the investigation (i.e. whether it is an alpha, beta or gamma
emitter) giving a reason for your choice,
(b) how the ionisation current would be measured (given that it is very small),
(c) the method of changing and measuring the air pressure,
(d) the procedure to be followed,
(e) any safety precautions that you would take.
© UCLES 2005 9702/05/M/J/05

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2005 9702/05/M/J/05

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/05
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/05

PHYSICS 9702/06
Paper 6
May/June 2005
45 minutes


A
details. If any details are incorrect or F
M
P
provided.
T
Total

SP (CW/AR) S74759/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
qv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option A Astrophysics and Cosmology questions 1, 2 and 3
Option T Telecommunications questions 13 and 14
Option A
1 Fig.1.1 illustrates the Milky Way galaxy.
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, mark the approximate position of the Solar System. [1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) State approximate values, in light-years, for
(i) the diameter of the Milky Way galaxy,
diameter = ............................... light-years [1]
(ii) the average separation of stars in one arm of the galaxy.
separation = ............................... light-years [1]
(c) Hubble was able to map out the Universe to a distance of approximately 500 million
light-years.
State the number of galaxies that were estimated to exist within this distance.
number = ................................................. [1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows the variation with age of the temperature of the Universe.
temperature
/K F
0
100 102 104 106 108 1010 1012 1014 1016 1018 age / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Point F on the graph represents the point at which light elements were formed. Suggest
the maximum temperature at which this formation occurred.
temperature = ............................................. K [1]
(b) Mark the point on the line at which galaxies began to form. [1]
(c) Suggest why, in the Universe, there is an excess of matter over antimatter.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 It has been reported recently that some galaxies have been discovered that are estimated to
be 12600 million light-years from Earth.
(a) (i) The Hubble constant has been estimated to be 60 km s–1 Mpc–1. Use this value to
calculate the approximate age of the Universe. (1 pc = 3.1 × 1016 m)
age = ....................................... years [5]
(ii) Hence calculate the fraction of the age of the Universe for which the light from
these galaxies has been travelling to Earth.
fraction = ................................................. [1]
(iii) Suggest why the discovery of these galaxies may have significance for an
understanding of the development of the Universe.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain why there is a limit to the extent of the observable Universe.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option F
4 A rectangular iceberg floats in seawater of density 1030 kg m–3, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
area of top
6.4 x 104 m2
28 m
surface
of sea
Fig. 4.1
The iceberg floats with its top, area 6.4 ×104 m2, 28 m above the surface of the sea. The
density of ice is 920 kg m–3.
(a) State what provides the upthrust on an object when it is immersed in a fluid.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The bottom of the iceberg is at a depth d, measured in metres. Give expressions, in
terms of d, for
(i) the mass of the iceberg,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) the mass of seawater displaced by the iceberg.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Using your answers in (b), determine
(i) the depth d,
d = ............................................. m [2]
(ii) the fraction of the iceberg that is below the water surface.
fraction = ................................................. [1]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) Explain what is meant by a viscous liquid.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Suggest why, for viscous flow of a fluid through a pipe, the flow rate is expressed as a
volume flow rate, measured in m3 s–1, rather than a linear speed, measured in m s–1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The volume flow rate V of a viscous liquid undergoing steady flow through a tube of
length L and radius r is given by
πr 4p
V = –––– ,
8ηL
where η is the viscosity of the liquid and p is the pressure difference between the ends
of the tube.
Water of density 1.0 × 103 kg m–3 flows out of a container through a tube of length 13 cm
and internal diameter 1.8 mm, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
water
9.1 cm
tube
13 cm
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
When the axis of the tube is at a depth of 9.1 cm below the water surface, water runs out
of the tube at a rate V of 1.5 × 10–6 m3 s–1.
(i) Show that the pressure difference between the ends of the tube is approximately
890 Pa.
[2]
(ii) Determine the viscosity of the water.
viscosity = .................................... N s m–2 [2]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Streamlines are a means by which fluid flow may be modelled.
(a) Explain
(i) what is meant by a streamline,
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) why streamlines can never touch or cross.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State and explain the change in fluid flow when streamlines become closer together.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option M
Medical Physics
7 (a) Outline briefly the use of magnetic resonance to obtain diagnostic information about
internal body structures.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[5]
(b) In some medical applications, the diagnostic information may be obtained using
magnetic resonance or using X-rays. State two disadvantages of the use of magnetic
resonance.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 A person is accidentally exposed for a short time to ionising radiation.
(a) Explain
(i) what is meant by absorbed dose,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) why the effect of the exposure depends on the type of radiation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Suggest why the effects of the exposure cannot be fully assessed within a few weeks of
the exposure.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A person discovers that the power of the lens used to correct the defect of one of his eyes is
+2.5 D.
(a) For this corrective lens,
(i) name the type of lens,
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) calculate the focal length in centimetres.
focal length = ........................................... cm [1]
(b) (i) Name the defect of this eye.
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Make calculations to estimate the distance of the far point and the distance of the
near point from this unaided eye.
distance of far point = .......................................................
distance of near point = .......................................................

[4]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option P
10 (a) Explain why the Earth’s resources of fossil fuels are different from the total reserves.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The formation of fossil fuels is a continuous process. Suggest why the reserves of these
fuels are considered to be finite.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

17 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) Complete Fig. 11.1 to illustrate the action of a four-stroke petrol engine. [4]
stroke induction compression power ...................
inlet valve open ................... ................... closed
outlet valve ................... ................... ................... open
Fig. 11.1
(b) Modern four-stroke petrol engines frequently consist of four cylinders, each fitted with
two inlet valves and two exhaust valves. Suggest, with one reason (in each case), why
(i) there are four cylinders,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) there are more than two valves in each cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) (i) Explain what is meant by pollution.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State one example of pollution that is
1. man-made,
...........................................................................................................................
2. natural.
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Suggest why large areas of forest are important to maintain the Earth’s atmosphere and
the environment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

19 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option T
Telecommunications
13 An analogue signal is to be transmitted in digital form.
(a) Outline briefly the principles involved in the analogue-to-digital conversion of the signal
and its transmission.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[5]
(b) Suggest two advantages of the transmission of data in digital form.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
14 It is proposed to install an optic fibre link between London (England) and Sydney (Australia).
The optic fibre, length 18000 km, has an attenuation of 1.7 dB km–1. The noise power in the
fibre is 6.0 × 10–19 W. The refractive index of the core of the fibre is 1.5.
(a) Explain what is meant by
(i) attenuation,
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) noise.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The signal-to-noise ratio must not fall below 25 dB.
(i) Show that the smallest effective signal power that can be detected in the fibre is
1.9 × 10–16 W.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of fibre through which a signal can be
transmitted for an input signal of power 7.0 mW.
length = ........................................... km [3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

21 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) With reference to your answer in (b)(ii), suggest what can be done to enable the signal
to be received in Sydney.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) An alternative means by which the signal could be sent is by using a geostationary
satellite. The orbit of such a satellite is 3.6 × 104 km above the Earth’s surface.
(i) Explain what is meant by a geostationary orbit.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) By considering the times of transmission by optic fibre and by satellite, explain
briefly one advantage of the fibre when compared with the satellite.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2005 9702/06/M/J/05

22
BLANK PAGE
9702/06/M/J/05
23
BLANK PAGE
9702/06/M/J/05
24
BLANK PAGE
9702/06/M/J/05
PHYSICS 9702/01
May/June 2006
1 hour
Soft clean eraser

Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
answers A, B, C and D.

IB06 06_9702_01/2RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p ∆V
gravitational potential, φ = − Gm
r
simple harmonic motion, a = −ω 2 x
velocity of particle in s.h.m., v = v 0 cos ω t

v = ± ω √( x02 – x2)
resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R 1 + 1/R 2 + . . .
electric potential, V = Q
4π ε 0r
capacitors in series, 1/C = 1/C 1 + 1/C 2 + . . .
alternating current/voltage, x = x 0 sin ω t
pressure of an ideal gas, p = 31 Nm < c 2>

V
radioactive decay, x = x 0 exp(–λt )

t1
2
3H02
critical density matter of the Universe, ρ0 =
8 πG
Bernoulli equation (simplified), p1 + 21 ρv12 = p + 21 ρv22

2
Stokes' law, F = Ar η v
ρvr
Reynolds' number, Re = η

4
1 Which pair includes a vector quantity and a scalar quantity?
A displacement; acceleration
B force; kinetic energy
C power; speed
D work; potential energy
2 For which quantity is the magnitude a reasonable estimate?
A frequency of a radio wave 500 pHz
B mass of an atom 500 µg

C the Young modulus of a metal 500 kPa
D wavelength of green light 500 nm
3 The following physical quantities can be either positive or negative.
s : displacement of a particle along a straight line
θ : temperature on the Celsius scale

q : electric charge
V : readings on a digital voltmeter
Which of these quantities are vectors?
A s, θ, q, V
B s, q, V
C θ, V
D s only
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

5
4 A light meter measures the intensity I of the light falling on it. Theory suggests that this varies as
the inverse square of the distance d.
light meter
Which graph of the results supports this theory?
A B
I I
0 0
0 d 0 d
C D
I I
0 0
0 d2 0 1
d2

6
5 The cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) display shows the waveform produced by an electronic
circuit. The c.r.o. time-base is set at 10 ms per division.
What is the period of the signal shown?
A 20 ms B 30 ms C 40 ms D 80 ms
6 The resistance R of an unknown resistor is found by measuring the potential difference V across
V
the resistor and the current I through it and using the equation R = . The voltmeter reading has
I
a 3 % uncertainty and the ammeter reading has a 2 % uncertainty.
What is the uncertainty in the calculated resistance?
A 1.5 % B 3% C 5% D 6%
7 An experiment is done to measure the acceleration of free fall of a body from rest.
Which measurements are needed?
A the height of fall and the time of fall

B the height of fall and the weight of the body
C the mass of the body and the height of fall
D the mass of the body and the time of fall
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

7
8 The velocity of an object during the first five seconds of its motion is shown on the graph.
20
velocity / m s–1
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
What is the distance travelled by the object in this time?
A 4m B 20 m C 50 m D 100 m
9 The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for a mass moving up and down on the end of a spring.
Which point represents the velocity of the mass when at the lowest point of its motion?
UP
A
velocity
B D
0
0 time
DOWN C

8
10 A cyclist is riding at a steady speed on a level road.
According to Newton’s third law of motion, what is equal and opposite to the backward push of
the back wheel on the road?
A the force exerted by the cyclist on the pedals

B the forward push of the road on the back wheel
C the tension in the cycle chain
D the total air resistance and friction force
11 In perfectly elastic collisions between two atoms, it is always true to say that
A the initial speed of one atom will be the same as the final speed of the other atom.
B the relative speed of approach between the two atoms equals their relative speed of
separation.
C the total momentum must be conserved, but a small amount of the total kinetic energy may
be lost in the collision.
D whatever their initial states of motion, neither atom can be stationary after the collision.
12 Two railway trucks of masses m and 3m move towards each other in opposite directions with
speeds 2v and v respectively. These trucks collide and stick together.
What is the speed of the trucks after the collision?
A v B v C v D 5v
4 2 4
13 The diagrams show three forces acting on a body.
In which diagram is the body in equilibrium?
A B
C D
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

9
14 A force F is applied to a beam at a distance d from a pivot. The force acts at an angle θ to a line
perpendicular to the beam.
θ
pivot
Which combination will cause the largest turning effect about the pivot?
F d θ
A large large large

B large large small
C small small large
D small large small
15 A rigid uniform bar of length 2.4 m is pivoted horizontally at its mid-point.
0.8 m 0.8 m
200 N 300 N
Weights are hung from two points of the bar as shown in the diagram. To maintain horizontal
equilibrium, a couple is applied to the bar.
What is the torque and direction of this couple?
A 40 N m clockwise
B 40 N m anticlockwise
C 80 N m clockwise
D 80 N m anticlockwise
16 What is the internal energy of an object?
A It is the energy associated with the object’s movement through space.

B It is the energy associated with the random movement of the molecules in the object.
C It is the energy due to the attractions between the molecules within the object.
D It is the sum of all the microscopic potential and kinetic energies of the molecules.

10
17 A motorist travelling at 10 m s–1 can bring his car to rest in a braking distance of 10 m.
In what distance could he bring the car to rest from a speed of 30 m s–1 using the same braking
force?
A 17 m B 30 m C 52 m D 90 m
18 A stone of weight 4.0 N in the Earth’s gravitational field is moved from P to Q and then to R along
the path shown.
Q 40 m R
30 m
50 m
P Earth's surface
How much potential energy does the stone gain?
A 120 J B 200 J C 280 J D 1200 J
19 Below are four short paragraphs describing the molecules in a beaker of water at 50 oC.
Which paragraph correctly describes the molecules?
A The molecules all travel at the same speed. This speed is not large enough for any of the
molecules to leave the surface of the water. There are attractive forces between the
molecules.
B The molecules have a range of speeds. Some molecules travel sufficiently fast to leave the
surface of the water. There are no forces between the molecules.
C The molecules have a range of speeds. Some molecules travel sufficiently fast to leave the
surface of the water. There are attractive forces between the molecules.
D The molecules have a range of speeds. The fastest molecules are unable to leave the
surface of the water. There are attractive forces between the molecules.
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

11
20 In an experiment to demonstrate Brownian motion, smoke particles in a container are illuminated

by a strong light source and observed through a microscope.
The particles are seen as small specks of light that are in motion.
What causes the Brownian motion?
A collisions between the smoke particles and air molecules

B collisions between the smoke particles and the walls of the container
C convection currents within the air as it is warmed by the light source
D kinetic energy gained by the smoke particles on absorption of light
21 In describing the behaviour of a spring, the spring constant is used.
Different loads are used to extend the spring by different amounts.
To find the spring constant, which quantities are required?
A the elastic limit and the loads

B the elastic limit, extensions and the length of the spring
C the loads and the extensions of the spring
D the loads and the length of the spring
22 The graph shows the behaviour of a sample of a metal when it is stretched until it starts to
undergo plastic deformation.
force / N
550 Y
500 X
0
0 10.0 12.0
extension / mm
What is the total work done in stretching the sample from zero extension to 12.0 mm?
Simplify the calculation by treating the region XY as a straight line.
A 3.30 J B 3.55 J C 3.60 J D 6.60 J

12
23 Which phenomenon is associated with transverse waves but not longitudinal waves?
A polarisation
B reflection
C refraction
D superposition
24 A displacement-time graph is shown for a particular wave.
displacement
0
time
A second wave of similar type has twice the intensity and half the frequency.
When drawn on the same axes, what would the second wave look like?
A B
displacement displacement
0 0
time time
C D
0 0
time time
25 The frequency of a certain wave is 500 Hz and its speed is 340 m s–1.
What is the phase difference between the motions of two points on the wave 0.17 m apart?
A π rad B π rad C 3 π rad D π rad

4 2 4
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

13
26 Where, in a standing wave, do the vibrations of the medium occur?
A only at the nodes

B only at the antinodes
C at all points between the nodes
D at all points between the antinodes
27 Monochromatic light is incident on a diffraction grating and a diffraction pattern is observed.
Which line of the table gives the effect of replacing the grating with one that has more lines per
metre?
number of orders of angle between first and

diffraction visible second orders of diffraction
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
28 A double-slit interference experiment is set up as shown.
*
red
light
source
single double screen
slit slit
not to scale
Fringes are formed on the screen. The distance between successive bright fringes is found to be
4 mm.
Two changes are then made to the experimental arrangement. The double slit is replaced by
another double slit which has half the spacing. The screen is moved so that its distance from the
double slit is twice as great.
What is now the distance between successive bright fringes?

14
29 Two parallel metal plates are at potentials of +800 V and +1300 V.
Which diagram best shows the electric field between the metal plates?
A B
+800 V +1300 V +800 V +1300 V
C D
+800 V +1300 V +800 V +1300 V
30 An electron of charge e is introduced between two metal plates a distance d apart.
A potential difference V is applied to the plates as shown in the diagram.
F
d electron V
Which expression gives the electric force F on the electron?

eV V dV
A B eVd C D
d ed e
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

15
31 The current in the circuit is 4.8 A.
R
X Y
What is the rate of flow and the direction of flow of electrons through the resistor R?
A 3.0 × 1019 s–1 in direction X to Y
B 6.0 × 1018 s–1 in direction X to Y
C 3.0 × 1019 s–1 in direction Y to X
D 6.0 × 1018 s–1 in direction Y to X
32 Which equation is used to define resistance?
A energy = (current)2 × resistance × time
B potential difference = current × resistance
C power = (current)2 × resistance
D resistivity = resistance × area ÷ length
33 A p.d. of 12 V is connected between P and Q.
500 Ω X 1000 Ω
P Q
2000 Ω Y
1000 Ω
What is the p.d. between X and Y?
A 0V B 4V C 6V D 8V

16
34 The diagram shows a low-voltage circuit for heating the water in a fish tank.
source heater
The heater has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. The voltage source has an e.m.f. of 12 V and an internal
resistance of 1.0 Ω.
At what rate does the voltage source supply energy to the heater?
A 27 W B 36 W C 48 W D 64 W
35 The diagram shows an arrangement of resistors.
10 Ω
X
10 Ω 10 Ω
Y
10 Ω
What is the total electrical resistance between X and Y?
A less than 1 Ω
B between 1 Ω and 10 Ω
C between 10 Ω and 30 Ω
D 40 Ω
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

17
36 When four identical lamps P, Q, R and S are connected as shown in diagram 1, they have normal
brightness.
P Q
P Q
R S R S
diagram 1 diagram 2
The four lamps and the battery are then connected as shown in diagram 2.
A The lamps do not light.

B The lamps are less bright than normal.
C The lamps have normal brightness.
D The lamps are brighter than normal.
37 The diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (LDR) and a thermistor forming a potential divider.
Under which set of conditions will the potential difference across the thermistor have the greatest
value?
illumination temperature
A low low
B high low
C low high
D high high

18
38 What is a correct order of magnitude estimate for the diameter of a typical atomic nucleus?
A 10–14 m B 10–18 m C 10–22 m D 10–26 m
39 The decay of a nucleus of neptunium is accompanied by the emission of a β-particle and

γ-radiation.
What effect (if any) does this decay have on the proton number and the nucleon number of the
nucleus?
proton number nucleon number
A increases decreases
C unchanged decreases
D increases unchanged
40 Radon-220 is radioactive and decays to Polonium-216 with the emission of an α-particle. The
equation for the radioactive decay is shown.
220 216
86 Rn → 84 Po + 42 He
How many neutrons are in the radon and polonium nuclei?
Rn Po
A 86 84
B 134 132
C 220 212
D 220 216
© UCLES 2006 9702/01/M/J/06

19
BLANK PAGE
9702/01/M/J/06
20
BLANK PAGE
9702/01/M/J/06

PHYSICS 9702/02
Paper 2
May/June 2006
1 hour


1
Total

SPA (SJF3675/CG) S98404/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p V
r

v = ± √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
qv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) Derive the SI base unit of force.
SI base unit of force = ………………………………… [1]
(b) A spherical ball of radius r experiences a resistive force F due to the air as it moves
through the air at speed v. The resistive force F is given by the expression
F = crv,
where c is a constant.
Derive the SI base unit of the constant c.
SI base unit of c = ………………………………… [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The ball is dropped from rest through a height of 4.5 m.
(i) Assuming air resistance to be negligible, calculate the final speed of the ball.
speed = …………………………… m s–1 [2]
(ii) The ball has mass 15 g and radius 1.2 cm.

The numerical value of the constant c in the equation in (b) is equal to 3.2 × 10–4
when measured using the SI system of units.
Show quantitatively whether the assumption made in (i) is justified.
[3]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A rod AB is hinged to a wall at A. The rod is held horizontally by means of a cord BD,
attached to the rod at end B and to the wall at D, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wall D
cord
T
hinge P
F
C
B
A
rod
W
Fig. 2.1
The rod has weight W and the centre of gravity of the rod is at C. The rod is held in
equilibrium by a force T in the cord and a force F produced at the hinge.
(a) Explain what is meant by
(i) the centre of gravity of a body,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the equilibrium of a body.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The line of action of the weight W of the rod passes through the cord at point P.
Explain why, for the rod to be in equilibrium, the force F produced at the hinge must also
pass through point P.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The forces F and T make angles α and β respectively with the rod and AC = AB, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
Write down equations, in terms of F, W, T, α and β, to represent
(i) the resolution of forces horizontally,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the resolution of forces vertically,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) the taking of moments about A.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) Explain what is meant by the internal energy of a substance.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain, in molecular terms, whether the internal energy of the following
increases, decreases or does not change.
(i) a lump of iron as it is cooled
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) some water as it evaporates at constant temperature
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) Define density.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A U-tube contains some mercury. Water is poured into one arm of the U-tube and oil is
poured into the other arm, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
oil
water
71 cm
53 cm
mercury
Fig. 4.1
The amounts of oil and water are adjusted until the surface of the mercury in the two
arms is at the same horizontal level.
(i) State how it is known that the pressure at the base of the column of water is the
same as the pressure at the base of the column of oil.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The column of water, density 1.0 × 103 kg m–3, is 53 cm high. The column of oil is
71 cm high.
Calculate the density of the oil. Explain your working.
density = ………………………………. kg m–3 [3]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the variation with force F of the extension x of a spring as the force is
increased to F3 and then decreased to zero.
F3
F2
F1
0
0 x1 x2
x
Fig. 5.1
(a) State, with a reason, whether the spring is undergoing an elastic change.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The extension of the spring is increased from x1 to x2.
Show that the work W done in extending the spring is given by
W= k (x 22 – x12),
where k is the spring constant.
[3]
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) A trolley of mass 850 g is held between two fixed points by means of identical springs,
trolley spring
Fig. 5.2
When the trolley is in equilibrium, the springs are each extended by 4.5 cm. Each spring
has a spring constant 16 N cm–1.
The trolley is moved a distance of 1.5 cm along the direction of the springs. This causes
the extension of one spring to be increased and the extension of the other spring to be
decreased. The trolley is then released. The trolley accelerates and reaches its
maximum speed at the equilibrium position.
Assuming that the springs obey Hooke’s law, use the expression in (b) to determine the
maximum speed of the trolley.
speed = …………………………. m s–1 [4]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 A long tube, fitted with a tap, is filled with water. A tuning fork is sounded above the top of the
tube as the water is allowed to run out of the tube, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
tuning fork
512 Hz
32.4 cm
Fig. 6.1 Fig. 6.2
A loud sound is first heard when the water level is as shown in Fig. 6.1, and then again when
the water level is as shown in Fig. 6.2.
Fig. 6.1 illustrates the stationary wave produced in the tube.
(a) On Fig. 6.2,
(i) sketch the form of the stationary wave set up in the tube, [1]
(ii) mark, with the letter N, the positions of any nodes of the stationary wave. [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The frequency of the fork is 512 Hz and the difference in the height of the water level for
the two positions where a loud sound is heard is 32.4 cm.
Calculate the speed of sound in the tube.
speed = …………………… m s–1 [3]
(c) The length of the column of air in the tube in Fig. 6.1 is 15.7 cm.
Suggest where the antinode of the stationary wave produced in the tube in Fig. 6.1 is
likely to be found.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A circuit contains three similar lamps A, B and C. The circuit also contains three switches,
S1, S2 and S3, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
A
X
S1 S2 S3
B C
Fig. 7.1
One of the lamps is faulty. In order to detect the fault, an ohm-meter (a meter that measures
resistance) is connected between terminals X and Y. When measuring resistance, the ohm-
meter causes negligible current in the circuit.
Fig. 7.2 shows the readings of the ohm-meter for different switch positions.
switch meter reading

S1 S2 S3 /Ω
open open open ∞

closed open open 15 Ω
open closed open 30 Ω
open closed closed 15 Ω
Fig. 7.2
(a) Identify the faulty lamp, and the nature of the fault.
faulty lamp: .......................................................................................................................
nature of fault: ............................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Suggest why it is advisable to test the circuit using an ohm-meter that causes negligible
current rather than with a power supply.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Determine the resistance of one of the non-faulty lamps, as measured using the ohm-
meter.
resistance = …………………… Ω [1]
(d) Each lamp is marked 6.0 V, 0.20 A.
Calculate, for one of the lamps operating at normal brightness,
(i) its resistance,
resistance = …………………… Ω [2]

(ii) its power dissipation.
power = …………………… W [2]
(e) Comment on your answers to (c) and (d)(i).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 The radioactive decay of nuclei is both spontaneous and random.
Explain what is meant by
(a) radioactive decay of a nucleus,
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) spontaneous decay,
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) random decay.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2006 9702/02/M/J/06


PHYSICS 9702/03
May/June 2006
1 hour 15 minutes
Additional Materials: As listed in the Confidential Instructions.
This document consists of 10 printed pages, 2 blank pages and an insert.

SPA (SJF3699/CG) T03560/4
2 For
Examiner's
Use
You may not need to use all of the materials provided.
1 In this question you will investigate the stability of a container of water as the height of
water in the container is changed.
(a) (i) A sheet of paper with a scale on it has been inserted in this Question Paper. Cut
the sheet of paper along the dotted lines as shown in Fig. 1.1.
cut here
5°
10°
15°
scale
20°
25°
30°
35°
40°
45°
cut here
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2006 9702/03/M/J/06

3 For
Examiner's
Use
(ii) You are provided with two sheets of card attached to each other. Use the paper
clips to attach the scale to the card, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
paper clip card
sca
le paper clip
paper clip
paper clip
Fig. 1.2

4 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) (i) You are provided with a plastic bottle that has a 30 cm rule fixed to one side. You
should not remove this rule from the bottle during the experiment. Place the bottle
so that the bottom of the rule is just touching the card that has been taped to the
bench. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 1.3.
30 cm rule
bottle
card taped to bench
Fig. 1.3
© UCLES 2006 9702/03/M/J/06

5 For
Examiner's
Use
(ii) Place the scale behind the bottle so that the left-hand edge of the scale is aligned
with the rule. Place some paper towels below the scale. The arrangement should
now be as shown in Fig. 1.4.
5° 10° scale
15°
20°
25°
30°
35°
40°
45°
paper towels
Fig. 1.4

6 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) (i) Gently push the top of the bottle in the direction shown in Fig. 1.5 so that the bottle
begins to tilt.
5° 10°
15°
scale
20°
25°
30°
35°
push 40°
45°
Fig. 1.5
Continue pushing until the bottle falls over. Measure and record the angle θ at
which the bottle just falls over onto the paper towels.
θ = …………………………
(ii) Remove the cap from the bottle. Add a small amount of water to the bottle using
the funnel so that the initial depth d of water in the bottle is about 1 cm. Replace
the cap so that the water does not leak out when the bottle falls.
(iii) Repeat (c) (i), recording your values of d and θ below.
d = …………………………
θ = …………………………
© UCLES 2006 9702/03/M/J/06

7 For
Examiner's
Use
(iv) Determine the percentage uncertainty in the value of d.
percentage uncertainty in d = ……………………………….
(v) State one source of error in the measurement of d.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(vi) State one source of error in the measurement of θ.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................

8 For
Examiner's
Use
(d) Change the level of the water in the bottle and repeat (c) (i) until you have nine sets of
values for d and θ . Values of d should be in the range from zero to about 15 cm.
(e) Plot a graph of θ (y-axis) against d (x-axis) and draw a smooth curve through the
points.
(f) Use your graph to find the value of d for which θ is a maximum.
d = ……………………………………………
© UCLES 2006 9702/03/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner's
Use

10 For
Examiner's
Use
(g) Suppose that the experiment were to be repeated with a bottle that has a base
diameter twice that of the original, but of the same height. On the graph paper, draw a
curve of the results that you might expect to obtain with this second bottle. Label this
second curve C.
(h) It is difficult to obtain reliable results in this experiment. Suggest two ways in which the
experiment might be improved.
1. ..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2006 9702/03/M/J/06

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/03/M/J/06
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/03/M/J/06

PHYSICS 9702/04
Paper 4
May/June 2006
1 hour
Write in dark blue or black pen.


1
Total

SPA (SJF3676/CG) S98407/4
2
Data
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
ρv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere with its mass M concentrated at its
centre.
A satellite of mass m orbits the Earth such that the radius of the circular orbit is r.
(a) Show that the linear speed v of the satellite is given by the expression
⎛ ⎞
v = √ ⎝GM
r ⎠
.
[2]
(b) For this satellite, write down expressions, in terms of G, M, m and r, for
(i) its kinetic energy,
kinetic energy = …………………………. [1]

(ii) its gravitational potential energy,
potential energy = …………………………. [1]

(iii) its total energy.
total energy = …………………………. [2]

© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The total energy of the satellite gradually decreases.
State and explain the effect of this decrease on
(i) the radius r of the orbit,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the linear speed v of the satellite.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) The equation
pV = constant × T
relates the pressure p and volume V of a gas to its kelvin (thermodynamic)

temperature T.
State two conditions for the equation to be valid.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A gas cylinder contains 4.00 × 104 cm3 of hydrogen at a pressure of 2.50 × 107 Pa and a
temperature of 290 K.
The cylinder is to be used to fill balloons. Each balloon, when filled, contains
7.24 × 103 cm3 of hydrogen at a pressure of 1.85 × 105 Pa and a temperature of 290 K.
Calculate, assuming that the hydrogen obeys the equation in (a),
(i) the total amount of hydrogen in the cylinder,
amount = ……………………….. mol [3]
(ii) the number of balloons that can be filled from the cylinder.
number = ……………………….. [3]

© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 The electrical resistance of a thermistor is to be used to measure temperatures in the range
12 °C to 24 °C. Fig. 3.1 shows the variation with temperature, measured in degrees Celsius,
of the resistance of the thermistor.
2400
2200
resistance
/
2000
1800
1600
1400
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
temperature /
Fig. 3.1
(a) State and explain the feature of Fig. 3.1 which shows that the thermometer has a
sensitivity that varies with temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At one particular temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 2040 ± 20 Ω.

Determine this temperature, in kelvin, to an appropriate number of decimal places.
temperature = ……………………… K [3]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A piston moves vertically up and down in a cylinder, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
cylinder
pivot
piston
pivot P
wheel
Fig. 4.1
The piston is connected to a wheel by means of a rod that is pivoted at the piston and at the
wheel. As the piston moves up and down, the wheel is made to rotate.
(a) (i) State the number of oscillations made by the piston during one complete rotation of
the wheel.
number = ………………………. [1]
(ii) The wheel makes 2400 revolutions per minute. Determine the frequency of
oscillation of the piston.
frequency = ………………………. Hz [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The amplitude of the oscillations of the piston is 42 mm.
Assuming that these oscillations are simple harmonic, calculate the maximum values
for the piston of
(i) the linear speed,
speed = …………………………. m s–1 [2]
(ii) the acceleration.
acceleration = …………………………. m s–2 [2]
(c) On Fig. 4.1, mark a position of the pivot P for the piston to have
(i) maximum speed (mark this position S), [1]

(ii) maximum acceleration (mark this position A). [1]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 An isolated conducting sphere of radius r is placed in air. It is given a charge +Q. This charge
may be assumed to act as a point charge situated at the centre of the sphere.
(a) (i) Define electric field strength.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State a formula for the electric field strength E at the surface of the sphere. Also,
state the meaning of any other symbols used.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The maximum field strength at the surface of the sphere before electrical breakdown
(sparking) occurs is 2.0 × 106 V m–1. The sphere has a radius r of 0.35 m.
Calculate the maximum values of
(i) the charge that can be stored on the sphere,
charge = ………...……………… C [2]

(ii) the potential at the surface of the sphere.
potential = ………...……………… V [2]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Suggest the effect of the electric field on a single atom near the sphere’s surface as
electrical breakdown of the air occurs.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Two long, straight, current-carrying conductors, PQ and XY, are held a constant distance
apart, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
Q Y
I I
P X
Fig. 6.1
The conductors each carry the same magnitude current in the same direction.
A plan view from above the conductors is shown in Fig. 6.2.
current out current out

of paper of paper
Q Y
Fig. 6.2
(a) On Fig. 6.2 draw arrows, one in each case, to show the direction of
(i) the magnetic field at Q due to the current in wire XY (label this arrow B), [1]
(ii) the force at Q as a result of the magnetic field due to the current in wire XY (label
this arrow F). [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) State Newton’s third law of motion.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use this law and your answer in (a)(ii) to state the direction of the force on wire XY.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The magnetic flux density B at a distance d from a long straight wire carrying a current I
is given by
I
B = 2.0 × 10–7 × .
d
Use this expression to explain why, under normal circumstances, wires carrying
alternating current are not seen to vibrate. Make reasonable estimates of the
magnitudes of the quantities involved.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A parallel beam of electrons, all travelling at the same speed, is incident normally on a
carbon film. The scattering of the electrons by the film is observed on a fluorescent screen,
glass envelope
fluorescent
carbon film screen
beam of
electrons
vacuum
Fig. 7.1
(a) Assuming that the electrons behave as particles, predict what would be seen on the
screen.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In this experiment, the electrons do not behave as particles.
Describe briefly the pattern that is actually observed on the screen. You may draw a
sketch if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The speed of the electrons is gradually increased.
State and explain what change, if any, is observed in the pattern on the screen.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
QUESTION 8 IS ON THE NEXT PAGE

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 A proton is moving with constant velocity v. It enters a uniform magnetic field that is normal
to the initial direction of motion of the proton, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
proton
velocity v
uniform magnetic field
into plane of paper
Fig. 8.1
A uniform electric field is applied in the same region as the magnetic field so that the proton
passes undeviated through the fields.
(a) On Fig. 8.1, draw an arrow labelled E to show the direction of the electric field. [1]
(b) The proton is replaced by other particles. The electric and magnetic fields remain
unchanged.
State and explain the deviation, if any, of the following particles in the region of the
fields.
(i) an α-particle with initial velocity v
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) an electron with initial velocity 2v
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06


PHYSICS 9702/05
May/June 2006
1 hour 30 minutes

1
Total

SPA (SJF3701/CG) T03735/2
2
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/06
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the current in a wire depends on the length of the
wire. You will use the results of your experiment to determine a value for the resistivity of the
material of the wire.
(a) Set up the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1. Use a crocodile clip to attach a connecting lead to
the bare wire at the zero end of the metre rule. The crocodile clip should be attached
as close as possible to the zero mark on the rule.
A
metre rule
0 P 100
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Adjust the power supply to give an output voltage of 3.0 V. Place the connecting
lead P onto the wire near the centre. Measure and record the length x and the
current I.
x = …………………………………. m
I = …………………………………. A
(ii) State one way of improving the precision in the measurement of x.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Change the value of x and repeat (b) (i) until you have six sets of readings of length x
and current I for values of x in the range 0.400 m < x < 0.900 m. You may need to adjust
the setting on the power supply to maintain a constant output potential difference of
3.0 V. Include in your table of results values for lg (x/m) and lg (I / A).
(d) (i) Plot a graph of lg (x / m) (y-axis) against lg (I / A) (x-axis).
gradient = ………………………………….
y-intercept = ………………………………….
© UCLES 2006 9702/05/M/J/06

5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(e) x and I are related by a simple power law of the form
x = kI n
where n and k are constants.
Use your answers from (d) (iii) to find the values of k and n. You need not be concerned
with the units of these quantities.
k = ……………………………
n = ……………………………
(f) A simple theoretical treatment of this circuit gives
VA
k=
ρ
where V is the potential difference across the wire, A is the cross-sectional area of the
wire and ρ is the resistivity of the material of the wire.
(i) Remove the crocodile clip from the wire. Use a micrometer screw gauge to
measure the diameter of the wire.
diameter of wire = ……………………………… mm
(ii) Determine the cross-sectional area A of the wire.
A = ……………………………… m2
© UCLES 2006 9702/05/M/J/06

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in A.
percentage uncertainty in A = ………………………………… %
(g) Using your answers from (e) and (f), determine a value for ρ.
ρ = …………………………… Ω m
(h) The experiment is repeated with a wire of the same material but twice the diameter.
Suggest what value of k would be obtained.
k = ……………………………………..

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A fine wire mesh has individual wires that are spaced very close together. See Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
The mesh behaves like two diffraction gratings placed at right angles to each other. The
diffraction grating formula is d sinθ = nλ.
The spacing between the wires of the mesh is to be found accurately. Design a laboratory
experiment using light of a single wavelength to determine the spacing between the wires.
You may assume that the wavelength of the light is known.
You should draw a detailed labelled diagram showing the arrangement of your apparatus. In
your account you should pay particular attention to
(a) the type of light source to be used, giving a reason for your choice,
(b) the procedure to be followed and the measurements that would be taken,
(c) how the measurements would be used to find values of θ,
(d) how the spacing between the wires would be deduced,
(e) any safety precautions you may take.
© UCLES 2006 9702/05/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2006 9702/05/M/J/06

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/06
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/05/M/J/06

PHYSICS 9702/06
Paper 6
May/June 2006
45 minutes


A
Total

SP (SJF3677/CG) S98408/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)

Q
40r
Nm 2
<c >

t
3H02
8G
ρv r

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option T Telecommunications questions 14, 15, 16 and 17
Option A
1 State, by reference to their orbits, two differences between planets and comets in the Solar
System.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 The Universe may be described as ‘open’, ‘flat’ or ‘closed’.
(a) State clearly the factor on which the ultimate fate of the Universe depends.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 illustrates the variation with time of the extent of a ‘flat’ Universe.
extent of
Universe
present time
time
Fig. 2.1
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw a line to show the variation with time of the extent of a closed
Universe. [2]
(ii) Suggest three reasons why the ultimate fate of the Universe is not known.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A galaxy has been discovered that is 1.3 × 1010 light-years from Earth.
Given that the Hubble constant is 60 km s–1 Mpc–1, calculate the ratio
speed of galaxy
.
speed of light in free space
ratio = ………………………… [4]
4 The Hubble Space Telescope is a telescope that was put into Earth orbit.
State and explain reasons for and against the development of such telescopes.
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option F
5 State the principle on which each of the following is based.
(a) the equation of continuity, Av = constant
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) the Bernoulli equation
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 illustrates one form of filter pump.
water
tube T
nozzle N
water
Fig. 6.1
Water is forced through the nozzle N.
(a) With reference to the Bernoulli principle, explain why the air pressure in tube T is below
atmospheric pressure.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Suggest with a reason the change, if any, in the pressure difference produced by the
pump when
(i) higher speed water emerges from the nozzle,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) the water is replaced by another liquid of higher density emerging from the nozzle
at the same speed.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A car is moving along a straight horizontal road at constant speed.
(a) Explain why the production of eddy currents behind the car results in an increase in fuel
consumption.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A car having a frontal area A is moving through still air of density ρ with speed v. The
drag force F acting on the car is given by the expression
F = CDAρv 2,
where CD is a constant for the car.

(i) Show that the power output P of the car’s engine that is required to overcome drag
is given by
P = kv 3,
[2]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) One particular car has a frontal area A of 1.8 m2 and a constant CD of 0.34.
The power available to overcome drag in still air of density 1.1 kg m–3 is 84 kW.
Calculate the maximum speed vmax of the car.
vmax = …………………………… m s–1 [2]
(iii) The car in (ii) now moves against a current of air of speed 9.0 m s–1, measured
relative to the ground. The air has density 1.1 kg m–3.
Calculate the ratio
power output to maintain speed vmax against air current of speed 9.0 m s–1
.
power output to maintain speed vmax in still air
ratio = …………………………… [3]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option M
Medical Physics
8 (a) Outline the principles of the generation of ultrasonic waves using piezo-electric
transducers.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Suggest and explain one advantage of the use of ultrasound of frequency 1 MHz, rather
than 100 kHz, for medical diagnosis.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
9 Describe and explain two uses of a laser in clinical therapy.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [6]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) Explain what is meant by the threshold of hearing. State its value for a person with
normal hearing.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) A person has an eardrum of area 54 mm2. When listening to music using an earphone,
the earphone produces 0.14 µW of sound power at the eardrum.
(i) Calculate the sound intensity level (I.L.) at the eardrum.
I.L. = ………………………… dB [3]
(ii) Comment on the value you have calculated in (i).
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option P
11 (a) Outline the main principles of a pumped-water storage scheme.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) A reservoir for a pumped-water storage scheme is to be built such that the mean height
of the water, of density 1.0 × 103 kg m–3, above the turbines is 95 m. The scheme has an
overall efficiency of 75 % and is to provide 78 MW of electrical power for a period of
4.0 hours.
Calculate the minimum volume of water that must be stored in the reservoir.
volume = ………………………… m3 [4]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 A machine operates between temperatures of TH and TL. A quantity QH of thermal energy is
absorbed at temperature TH and as a result, the machine does a quantity W of mechanical
work, as indicated in Fig. 12.1.
temperature
TH
QH
mechanical
engine
work W
temperature
TL
Fig. 12.1
(a) By reference to the second law of thermodynamics, explain why some thermal energy
must be rejected at temperature TL.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State an expression relating TH, TL, QH and W.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A steam engine operates between the temperatures of 120 °C and 40 °C. Calculate the
maximum theoretical efficiency of the engine.
efficiency = ………………………… [2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
13 Fig. 13.1 shows the variation with time of the electric power demands of a city on two
different days, several months apart.
power
demand
mid- 4 a.m. 8 a.m. noon 4 p.m. 8 p.m. mid-

night night
time
Fig. 13.1
(a) Give two possible explanations for

(i) the increase in demand between 6 a.m. and 10 a.m.,
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the different average levels of demand on the two days.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Suggest the effect on the graph of Fig.13.1. if

(i) a popular hour-long television programme ends at 8 p.m.,
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) there is an exceptionally hot day.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

17 For
Examiner’s
Use
Option T
Telecommunications
14 (a) Explain what is meant by frequency modulation (FM).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A sinusoidal carrier wave has amplitude 12 V and frequency 600 kHz. The frequency of
the carrier wave changes by 25 kHz per volt.
The carrier wave is used for the transmission of a signal of frequency 3.0 kHz and
amplitude 2.0 V.
For the frequency modulated carrier wave, state
(i) the amplitude,
amplitude = ………………………… V [1]
(ii) the maximum frequency,
maximum frequency = ………………………… kHz [1]
(iii) the minimum frequency,
minimum frequency = ………………………… kHz [1]
(iv) the number of times per second that the frequency of the carrier wave changes
from the maximum value, to the minimum value and then back to the maximum
value.
number = ………………………… [1]

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
15 Fig. 15.1 shows a block diagram of a circuit used for the encoding of an analogue signal and
its transmission in digital form.
analogue sample
and X
signal
hold
clock
Fig. 15.1
(a) State the name of the block labelled X (do not use an abbreviation).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Suggest the function of the clock.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Suggest one advantage of using a high-frequency clock.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

19 For
Examiner’s
Use
16 Before the development of microwave links and optic fibres, co-axial cables were used
widely for telephone communication.
(a) Fig. 16.1 shows one type of co-axial cable.
copper braid
copper conductor
Fig. 16.1
State the purpose of the copper braid and how this purpose is achieved.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) One advantage over co-axial cables of microwave links and of optic fibres is increased
bandwidth.
Explain why increased bandwidth has led to a reduction in the cost of telephone calls.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
Question 17 is on page 20

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
17 (a) State two sources of noise associated with metal cables.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A metal cable has a signal attenuation of 5.8 dB km–1 and the noise power in the cable
is 7.6 µW.
An input signal to the cable has a power of 2.6 W and the minimum acceptable signal-
to-noise ratio is 35 dB.
Calculate
(i) the minimum acceptable signal power in the cable,
power = ……………………………… W [2]

(ii) the maximum uninterrupted length of cable for the transmission of this signal.
length = ……………………………… km [2]
© UCLES 2006 9702/06/M/J/06

PHYSICS 9702/01
Paper 1 Multiple Choice May/June 2007
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*4519935956*

IB07 06_9702_01/2RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

3
Formulae
1
v2 = u2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ± ω √( x 02 – x2)
4 πε 0r

2 QV

t1
2

4
1 Which is a pair of SI base units?
A ampere joule
B coulomb second
C kilogram kelvin
D metre newton
1 µm
2 What is the ratio ?
1 Gm
A 10–3 B 10–9 C 10–12 D 10–15
3 Which formula could be correct for the speed v of ocean waves in terms of the density ρ of sea-
water, the acceleration of free fall g, the depth h of the ocean and the wavelength λ?
g g
A v = gλ B v= C v = ρgh D v= ρ
h
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

5
4 An oscilloscope display consists of two separate traces, a waveform and a long horizontal line.
The horizontal line may be taken as the zero level.
The grid on the screen is calibrated in cm squares, the timebase setting is 2.5 ms cm–1, and the
Y-sensitivity is 5 mV cm–1.
What are the period and the peak positive voltage of the waveform in the diagram?
period / ms peak positive voltage / mV
A 5 17
B 5 25
C 10 17
D 10 25
5 The resistance of an electrical component is measured. The following meter readings are
obtained.
0.4 0.6
0.8
0.2
mV
A
1.0
0
What is the resistance?
A 2.5 Ω B 2.7 Ω C 2500 Ω D 2700 Ω

6
6 What gives the value of a body’s acceleration?
A the area under its displacement-time graph

B the area under its velocity-time graph
C the gradient of its displacement-time graph
D the gradient of its velocity-time graph
7 An object has an initial velocity u. It is subjected to a constant force F for t seconds, causing a
constant acceleration a. The force is not in the same direction as the initial velocity.
A vector diagram is drawn to find the final velocity v.
X
v
What is the length of side X of the vector diagram?
A F B Ft C at D u + at
8 A stone is dropped from the top of a tower of height 40 m. The stone falls from rest and air
resistance is negligible.
What time is taken for the stone to fall the last 10 m to the ground?
A 0.38 s B 1.4 s C 2.5 s D 2.9 s
9 What is meant by the weight of an object?
A the gravitational field acting on the object

B the gravitational force acting on the object
C the mass of the object multiplied by gravity
D the object’s mass multiplied by its acceleration
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

7
10 The graph shows the variation with time of the momentum of a ball as it is kicked in a straight
line.
p1
momentum
0
0 t1 t2 time
p2
Initially, the momentum is p1 at time t1. At time t2 the momentum is p2.
What is the magnitude of the average force acting on the ball between times t1 and t2?
p1 − p 2 p1 − p 2 p1 + p 2 p1 + p 2
A B C D
t2 t 2 − t1 t2 t 2 − t1
11 A lorry of mass 20 000 kg is travelling at 20.0 m s–1. A car of mass 900 kg is travelling at 30.0 m s–1
towards the lorry.
_1
20.0 m s
_1
30.0 m s
mass of lorry mass of car

20 000 kg 900 kg
What is the magnitude of the total momentum?
A 209 kN s B 373 kN s C 427 kN s D 1045 kN s

8
12 The diagram shows the masses and velocities of two trolleys about to collide.
4 m s–1 1 m s–1
2 kg 4 kg
After the impact they move off together.
What is the total kinetic energy of the trolleys after the collision?
A 1.3 J B 12 J C 18 J D 19 J
13 Two 8.0 N forces act at each end of a beam of length 0.60 m. The forces are parallel and act in
opposite directions. The angle between the forces and the beam is 60 °.
8.0 N
60° 0.60 m
60°
8.0 N
What is the torque of the couple exerted on the beam?
A 2.4 N m B 4.2 N m C 4.8 N m D 9.6 N m
14 Which expression defines power?
A force × distance moved in the direction of the force
B force × velocity
C work done ÷ time taken
D work done × time taken
15 The density of mercury is 13.6 × 103 kg m–3.
The pressure difference between the bottom and the top of a column of mercury is 100 kPa.
What is the height of the column?
A 0.75 m B 1.3 m C 7.4 m D 72 m
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

9
16 Which group of statements applies only to the liquid state?
A B
atoms separated by many atomic diameters atoms separated by many atomic diameters
positions of atoms can change atoms are in fixed positions
atoms vibrate atoms are in continuous, random motion
C D
atoms can touch each other atoms can touch each other
positions of atoms can change atoms are in fixed positions
some random motion of atoms some random motion of atoms
17 A piece of copper is drawn into a continuous wire.
What behaviour is the copper exhibiting?
A brittle only
B elastic only
C plastic only
D both brittle and elastic
18 The force-extension graph of a particular sample of rubber as a load is applied and then removed
is shown.
force
0
0 extension
What does the shaded area represent?
A the energy transformed into heat during the complete cycle

B the recoverable elastic potential energy stored at maximum extension
C the work done on the sample while loading
D the work done on the sample while unloading

10
19 A spring of unextended length 0.50 m is stretched by a force of 2.0 N to a new length of 0.90 m.
The variation of its length with tension is as shown.
2.0
tension / N
0
0 0.50 0.90
length / m
How much strain energy is stored in the spring?
A 0.40 J B 0.80 J C 0.90 J D 1.8 J
20 A simple crane consists of a rigid vertical pillar supporting a horizontal beam.
W
X
A weight W is lifted by a rope at the end of the beam.
What are the forces at points X, Y and Z due to the weight W?
force at X force at Y force at Z
A tension compression tension

B tension tension compression
C compression tension compression
D compression compression compression
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

11
21 Which of the following types of wave can be polarised?
A a longitudinal progressive wave

B a longitudinal stationary wave
C a transverse stationary wave
D a transverse sound wave
22 Sound wave X has intensity 1012 times greater than that of sound wave Y.
By how much is the amplitude of X greater than the amplitude of Y?
A 106 times
B 3.16 × 106 times
C 5 × 1011 times
D 1012 times
23 The graph shows the shape at a particular instant of part of a transverse wave travelling along a
string.
P S
displacement
Q
0
distance along string
R
Which statement about the motion of points in the string is correct?
A The speed at point P is a maximum.

B The displacement at point Q is always zero.
C The energy at point R is entirely kinetic.
D The acceleration at point S is a maximum.

12
24 The diagram illustrates part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
visible
high 1 2 low
frequencies frequencies
Which labels are correct for the regions marked 1 and 2?
1 2
A infrared X-rays
B microwaves X-rays
C ultraviolet microwaves
D X-rays infrared
25 The diagram represents a stationary wave on a stretched string.
What is represented by point P and by the length x?
point P length x
A antinode one wavelength

B antinode two wavelengths
C node one wavelength
D node two wavelengths
26 A two-slit arrangement is set up to produce interference fringes on a screen. The fringes are too
close together for convenient observation when a monochromatic source of violet light is used.
In which way would it be possible to increase the separation of the fringes?
A Decrease the distance between the screen and the slits.

B Increase the distance between the two slits.
C Increase the width of each slit.
D Use a monochromatic source of red light.
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

13
27 A stationary longitudinal wave is set up in a pipe.
In the diagrams below, the length of each arrow represents the amplitude of the motion of the air
molecules, and the arrow head shows the direction of motion at a particular instant.
Which diagram shows a stationary wave in which there are two nodes and two antinodes?
A B C D
28 Which diagram represents the electric field of a negative point charge, shown by • ?
A B C D

14
29 An electron, travelling horizontally at constant speed in a vacuum, enters a vertical electric field
between two charged parallel plates as shown.
+ + + + +
electron
electric field
– – – – –
What are the horizontal and vertical components of the motion of this electron when it is in the
field?
horizontal component of vertical component of

motion motion
A constant speed acceleration upwards

B constant speed acceleration downwards
C acceleration to the right acceleration downwards
D acceleration to the right acceleration upwards
30 The electric field strength between a pair of parallel plates is E. The separation of the plates is
doubled and the potential difference between the plates is increased by a factor of four.
What is the new electric field strength?
A E B 2E C 4E D 8E
31 What is a correct statement of Ohm’s law?
A The potential difference across a component equals the current providing the resistance and
other physical conditions stay constant.
B The potential difference across a component equals the current multiplied by the resistance.
C The potential difference across a component is proportional to its resistance.
D The potential difference across a component is proportional to the current in it providing
physical conditions stay constant.
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

15
32 The current in a resistor is 8.0 mA.
What charge flows through the resistor in 0.020 s?
A 0.16 mC B 1.6 mC C 4.0 mC D 0.40 C
33 A cell of e.m.f. 2.0 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to the network of resistors
shown.
5.0 kΩ 2.0 kΩ
2.0 V P Q
5.0 kΩ 3.0 kΩ
V1 is the potential difference between S and P. V2 is the potential difference between S and Q.
What is the value of V1 – V2?
A +0.50 V B +0.20 V C –0.20 V D –0.50 V
34 A circuit is set up with an LDR and a fixed resistor as shown.
5kΩ
9V
The voltmeter reads 4 V.
The light intensity is increased.
What is a possible voltmeter reading?
A 3V B 4V C 6V D 8V

16
35 In the circuit below, the battery converts an amount E of chemical energy to electrical energy
when charge Q passes through the resistor in time t.
Which expressions give the e.m.f. of the battery and the current in the resistor?
e.m.f. current
A EQ Q/t
B EQ Qt
C E/Q Q/t
D E/Q Qt
36 A battery has an e.m.f. of 3.0 V and an internal resistance of 2.0 Ω.
3.0 V battery
2.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
The battery is connected to a load of 4.0 Ω.
What are the terminal potential difference V and output power P?
V/V P/W
A 1.0 0.50
B 1.0 1.5
C 2.0 1.0
D 2.0 1.5
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

17
37 A researcher has two pieces of copper of the same volume. All of the first piece is made into a
cylindrical resistor P of length x.
resistor P current
All of the second piece is made into uniform wires each of the same length x which he connects
between two bars of negligible resistance to form a resistor Q.
resistor Q current
bar of
negligible
resistance
wires
How do the electrical resistances of P and Q compare?
A P has a larger resistance than Q.

B Q has a larger resistance than P.
C P and Q have equal resistance.
D Q may have a larger or smaller resistance than P, depending on the number of wires made.
38 A detector is exposed to a radioactive source. Fluctuations in the count-rate are observed.
What do these fluctuations indicate about radioactive decay?
A It is random.
B It is spontaneous.
C It is exponential.
D It is non-linear.
39 The symbol 77 32 Ge represents a nucleus of germanium that decays to a nucleus of arsenic by

emitting a β-particle.
What is the symbol of this arsenic nucleus?

76 78 78 77
A 32 As B 32 As C 31 As D 33 As

18
40 Each of the nuclei below is accelerated from rest through the same potential difference.
Which one completes the acceleration with the lowest speed?

1 4 7 9
A 1H B 2 He C 3 Li D 4 Be
© UCLES 2007 9702/01/M/J/07

19
BLANK PAGE
9702/01/M/J/07
20
BLANK PAGE
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
9702/01/M/J/07
*0042755591*
PHYSICS 9702/02
Paper 2 AS Structured Questions May/June 2007
1 hour
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions. 1

appropriate units.
2
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part 3
question.
4
Total
SP (SLM/CGW) T19293/2
2
Data
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)
Q
4␲⑀0r
0.693
decay constant, λ =
t

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The uncalibrated scale and the pointer of a meter are shown in Fig. 1.1.
uncalibrated
scale
Fig. 1.1
The pointer is shown in the zero position.

The meter is to be used to indicate the volume of fuel in the tank of a car.
A known volume V of fuel is poured into the tank and the deflection θ of the pointer is noted.
Fig. 1.2 shows the variation with θ of V.
80
V
/103 cm3
60
40
20
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
θ /°
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) On Fig. 1.1,
(i) calibrate the scale at 20 × 103 cm3 intervals, [2]

(ii) mark a possible position for a volume of 1.0 × 105 cm3. [1]
(b) Suggest one advantage of this scale, as compared with a uniform scale, for measuring
fuel volumes in the tank of the car.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Define electric field strength.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Two flat parallel metal plates, each of length 12.0 cm, are separated by a distance of
1.5 cm, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
+210 V
electron
1.5 cm
speed 5.0 x 107 m s–1
12.0 cm
Fig. 2.1
The space between the plates is a vacuum.

The potential difference between the plates is 210 V. The electric field may be assumed
to be uniform in the region between the plates and zero outside this region.
Calculate the magnitude of the electric field strength between the plates.
field strength = ........................................N C–1 [1]
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) An electron initially travels parallel to the plates along a line mid-way between the plates,
as shown in Fig. 2.1. The speed of the electron is 5.0 × 107 m s–1.
For the electron between the plates,
(i) determine the magnitude and direction of its acceleration,
acceleration = .............................................. m s–2
direction ...................................................[4]
(ii) calculate the time for the electron to travel a horizontal distance equal to the length
of the plates.
time = ............................................... s [1]
(d) Use your answers in (c) to determine whether the electron will hit one of the plates or
emerge from between the plates.
[3]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) Define density.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Liquid of density ρ fills a container to a depth h, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
area A
Fig. 3.1
The container has vertical sides and a base of area A.
(i) State, in terms of A, h and ρ, the mass of liquid in the container.
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Hence derive an expression for the pressure p exerted by the liquid on the base of
the container. Explain your working.
[2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The density of liquid water is 1.0 g cm–3. The density of water vapour at atmospheric
1
pressure is approximately g cm–3.
1600
Determine the ratio
volume of water vapour

(i) ,
volume of equal mass of liquid water
ratio = ..................................................[1]
mean separation of molecules in water vapour

(ii) .
mean separation of molecules in liquid water
ratio = ...................................................[2]
(d) State the evidence for
(i) the molecules in solids and liquids having approximately the same separation,
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) strong rigid forces between molecules in solids.
strong: ......................................................................................................................
rigid: .....................................................................................................................[2]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) A stone of mass 56 g is thrown horizontally from the top of a cliff with a speed of
18 m s–1, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
18 m s–1
16 m
sea level
Fig. 4.1
The initial height of the stone above the level of the sea is 16 m. Air resistance may be
neglected.
(i) Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the stone as a result of
falling through 16 m.
change = ............................................... J [2]
(ii) Calculate the total kinetic energy of the stone as it reaches the sea.
kinetic energy = .............................................. J [3]
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Use your answer in (a)(ii) to show that the speed of the stone as it hits the water is
approximately 25 m s–1.
[1]
(c) State the horizontal velocity of the stone as it hits the water.
horizontal velocity = .........................................m s–1 [1]
(d) (i) On the grid of Fig. 4.2, draw a vector diagram to represent the horizontal velocity
and the resultant velocity of the stone as it hits the water. [1]
Fig. 4.2
(ii) Use your vector diagram to determine the angle with the horizontal at which the
stone hits the water.
angle = .............................................. ° [2]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Light reflected from the surface of smooth water may be described as a polarised transverse
wave.
(a) By reference to the direction of propagation of energy, explain what is meant by
(i) a transverse wave,
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) polarisation.
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A glass tube, closed at one end, has fine dust sprinkled along its length. A sound source
is placed near the open end of the tube, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
dust heap
tube
sound
source
39.0 cm
Fig. 5.1
The frequency of the sound emitted by the source is varied and, at one frequency, the
dust forms small heaps in the tube.
(i) Explain, by reference to the properties of stationary waves, why the heaps of dust
are formed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) One frequency at which heaps are formed is 2.14 kHz.
The distance between six heaps, as shown in Fig. 5.1, is 39.0 cm.
Calculate the speed of sound in the tube.
speed = .........................................m s–1 [3]
(c) The wave in the tube is a stationary wave. Explain, by reference to the formation of a
stationary wave, what is meant by the speed calculated in (b)(ii).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 A car battery has an internal resistance of 0.060 Ω. It is re-charged using a battery charger
having an e.m.f. of 14 V and an internal resistance of 0.10 Ω, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
car
0.10 Ω 0.060 Ω battery
battery
+
charger
14 V
– E
Fig. 6.1
(a) At the beginning of the re-charging process, the current in the circuit is 42 A and the
e.m.f. of the battery is E (measured in volts).
(i) For the circuit of Fig. 6.1, state
1. the magnitude of the total resistance,
resistance = ............................................. Ω
2. the total e.m.f. in the circuit. Give your answer in terms of E.
e.m.f. = .............................................. V
[2]
(ii) Use your answers to (i) and data from the question to determine the e.m.f. of the
car battery at the beginning of the re-charging process.
e.m.f. = ...............................................V [2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) For the majority of the charging time of the car battery, the e.m.f. of the car battery is 12 V
and the charging current is 12.5 A. The battery is charged at this current for 4.0 hours.
Calculate, for this charging time,
(i) the charge that passes through the battery,
charge = .............................................. C [2]
(ii) the energy supplied from the battery charger,
energy = ............................................... J [2]
(iii) the total energy dissipated in the internal resistance of the battery charger and the
car battery.
energy = ............................................... J [2]
(c) Use your answers in (b) to calculate the percentage efficiency of transfer of energy from
the battery charger to stored energy in the car battery.
efficiency = ..............................................% [2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 The radioactive decay of a strontium (Sr) nucleus is represented in Fig. 7.1.
92
nucleon 91
number
Sr
90
89
88
36 37 38 39 40
proton number
Fig. 7.1
(a) State whether Fig. 7.1 represents α-decay, β-decay or γ-decay.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) One type of radioactive decay cannot be represented on Fig. 7.1.

Identify this decay and explain why it cannot be represented.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/02/M/J/07

*2082050702*
PHYSICS 9702/04
Paper 4 A2 Structured Questions May/June 2007
1 hour 45 minutes
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
2
question.
4
10
11
Total
SP (NF/CGW) T16040/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)
Q
4␲⑀0r
0.693
t

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
1 (a) Explain what is meant by a gravitational field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spherical planet has mass M and radius R. The planet may be considered to have all
its mass concentrated at its centre.
A rocket is launched from the surface of the planet such that the rocket moves radially
away from the planet. The rocket engines are stopped when the rocket is at a height R
above the surface of the planet, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
R 2R
planet
R
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the rocket, after its engines have been stopped, is m.
(i) Show that, for the rocket to travel from a height R to a height 2R above the planet’s
surface, the change ΔEP in the magnitude of the gravitational potential energy of
the rocket is given by the expression
GMm
ΔEP = .
6R
[2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) During the ascent from a height R to a height 2R, the speed of the rocket changes
from 7600 m s–1 to 7320 m s–1. Show that, in SI units, the change ΔEK in the kinetic
energy of the rocket is given by the expression
ΔEK = (2.09 × 106)m.
[1]
(c) The planet has a radius of 3.40 × 106 m.
(i) Use the expressions in (b) to determine a value for the mass M of the planet.
M = …………………………… kg [2]
(ii) State one assumption made in the determination in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Use the kinetic theory of matter to explain why melting requires energy but there is no
change in temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Define specific latent heat of fusion.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A block of ice at 0 °C has a hollow in its top surface, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
hollow
ice
Fig. 2.1
A mass of 160 g of water at 100 °C is poured into the hollow. The water has specific
heat capacity 4.20 kJ kg–1 K–1. Some of the ice melts and the final mass of water in the
hollow is 365 g.
(i) Assuming no heat gain from the atmosphere, calculate a value, in kJ kg–1, for the
specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat = …………………………. kJ kg–1 [3]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) In practice, heat is gained from the atmosphere during the experiment. This means
that your answer to (i) is not the correct value for the specific latent heat.
State and explain whether your value in (i) is greater or smaller than the correct
value.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Two charged points A and B are separated by a distance of 6.0 cm, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
6.0 cm
A B
Fig. 3.1
The variation with distance d from A of the electric field strength E along the line AB is shown
in Fig. 3.2.
20
E / kV m–1
15
10
0 6
0 2 4
d /cm
position position
of A of B
Fig. 3.2
An electron is emitted with negligible speed from A and travels along AB.
(a) State the relation between electric field strength E and potential V.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The area below the line of the graph of Fig. 3.2 represents the potential difference
between A and B.
Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the potential difference between A and B.
potential difference = …………………………. V [4]
(c) Use your answer to (b) to calculate the speed of the electron as it reaches point B.
speed = …………………………. m s–1 [2]
(d) (i) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the value of d at which the electron has maximum
acceleration.
d = …………………… cm [1]
(ii) Without any further calculation, describe the variation with distance d of the
acceleration of the electron.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 An ideal transformer has 5000 turns on its primary coil. It is to be used to convert a mains
supply of 230 V r.m.s. to an alternating voltage having a peak value of 9.0 V.
(a) Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number = ……………………………… [3]
(b) The output from the transformer is to be full-wave rectified. Fig. 4.1 shows part of the
rectifier circuit.
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, draw
(i) diode symbols to complete the diagram of the rectifier such that terminal A of the
resistor R is positive with respect to terminal B, [2]
(ii) the symbol for a capacitor connected to provide smoothing of the potential difference
across the resistor R. [1]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the variation with time t of the smoothed potential difference V across the
resistor R.
0
0 t1 t2 t3 t4
t
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the interval of time during which the capacitor is being charged from the
transformer.
from time ………… to time …………… [1]
(ii) The resistance of the resistor R is doubled. On Fig. 4.2, sketch the variation with
time t of the potential difference V across the resistor. [2]

12 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) (i) Explain what is meant by a photon.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Show that the photon energy of light of wavelength 350 nm is 5.68 × 10–19 J. [1]
(iii) State the value of the ratio
energy of photon of light of wavelength 700 nm

.
energy of photon of light of wavelength 350 nm
ratio = …………….. [1]
(b) Two beams of monochromatic light have similar intensities. The light in one beam has
wavelength 350 nm and the light in the other beam has wavelength 700 nm.
The two beams are incident separately on three different metal surfaces. The work
function of each of these surfaces is shown in Fig. 5.1.
metal work function / eV
tungsten 4.49
magnesium 3.68
potassium 2.26
Fig. 5.1
(i) Explain what is meant by the work function of the surface.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) State which combination, if any, of monochromatic light and metal surface could
give rise to photo-electric emission. Give a quantitative explanation of your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]

14 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Define the decay constant of a radioactive isotope.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Strontium-90 is a radioactive isotope having a half-life of 28.0 years. Strontium-90 has a
density of 2.54 g cm–3.
A sample of Strontium-90 has an activity of 6.4 × 109 Bq. Calculate
(i) the decay constant λ, in s–1, of Strontium-90,
λ = …………………………. s–1 [2]
(ii) the mass of Strontium-90 in the sample,
mass = …………………………. g [4]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) the volume of the sample.
volume = …………………………. cm3 [1]
(c) By reference to your answer in (b)(iii), suggest why dust that has been contaminated
with Strontium-90 presents a serious health hazard.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

16 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A magnet is suspended vertically from a fixed point by means of a spring, as shown in
Fig. 7.1.
spring
magnet
coil R
Fig. 7.1
One end of the magnet hangs inside a coil of wire. The coil is connected in series with a
resistor R.
(a) The magnet is displaced vertically a small distance D and then released.
Fig. 7.2 shows the variation with time t of the vertical displacement d of the magnet from
its equilibrium position.
+D
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
t /s
–D
Fig. 7.2
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) State and explain, by reference to electromagnetic induction, the nature of the
oscillations of the magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [5]
(ii) Calculate the angular frequency ω0 of the oscillations.
ω0 = …………….……………… rad s–1 [2]
(b) The resistance of the resistor R is increased.

The magnet is again displaced a vertical distance D and released.
On Fig. 7.2, sketch the variation with time t of the displacement d of the magnet. [2]

18 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The resistor R in Fig. 7.1 is replaced by a variable-frequency signal generator of constant
r.m.s. output voltage.
The angular frequency ω of the generator is gradually increased from about 0.7ω0 to
about 1.3ω0, where ω0 is the angular frequency calculated in (a)(ii).
(i) On the axes of Fig. 7.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with ω of the amplitude
A of the oscillations of the magnet. [2]
0
0.7ω 0 1.0ω 0 1.3ω 0
ω
Fig. 7.3
(ii) State the name of the phenomenon illustrated in the graph of Fig. 7.3.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Briefly describe one situation where the phenomenon named in (ii) is useful and
one situation where it should be avoided.
useful: .......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
avoid: ........................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

19
BLANK PAGE

20 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section B
8 (a) State three characteristics of an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp).
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
3. ................................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) An amplifier circuit for a microphone is shown in Fig. 8.1.
–
+
120 kΩ
R
V OUT
Fig. 8.1
(i) Name the type of feedback used with this op-amp.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The output potential difference VOUT is 5.8 V for a potential difference across the
resistor R of 69 mV. Calculate
1. the gain of the amplifier circuit,
gain = ……………………… [1]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

21 For
Examiner’s
Use
2. the resistance of resistor X.
resistance = ……………………… Ω [2]
(iii) State one effect on the amplifier output of reducing the resistance of resistor X.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

22 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) Explain the principles behind the use of X-rays for imaging internal body structures.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Describe how the image produced during CT scanning differs from that produced by
X-ray imaging.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

23 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 An analogue signal is sampled at a frequency of 5.0 kHz. Each sample is converted into a
four-bit number and transmitted as a digital signal.
Fig. 10.1 shows part of the digital signal.
START
0010 0101 1010 1111 0100 0010 0101 1010 1111 0100
most significant bit

Fig. 10.1
The digital signal is transmitted and is finally converted into an analogue signal.
(a) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of this final
analogue signal.
18
16
signal 14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
t /ms
[4]
Fig. 10.2
(b) Suggest two ways in which the reproduction of the original analogue signal could be
improved.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

24 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 is a block diagram showing part of a mobile phone handset used for sending a
signal to a base station.
aerial
microphone
Fig. 11.1
Complete Fig. 11.1 by labelling each of the blocks. [3]
(b) Whilst making a call using a mobile phone fitted into a car, a motorist moves through
several different cells. Explain how reception of signals to and from the mobile phone is
maintained.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07

*9679180360*
PHYSICS 9702/05
Paper 5 Planning, Analysis and Evaluation May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes

The two questions in this paper carry equal marks.
Total
SP (CW/CGW) T19291/3
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 It is useful to know how the speed of an object is affected by its size when it moves through
liquid in a confined space. In a laboratory this can be modelled by dropping small steel balls
through oil.
It is suggested that the terminal velocity v is related to the radius r of a steel ball by the
equation
v = kr 2
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate whether v is related to r as indicated in the

above equation. You should draw a diagram showing the arrangement of your equipment. In
your account you should pay particular attention to
(b) how the radius of the steel ball would be measured,
(c) how the terminal velocity of the steel ball in oil would be measured,
(d) the control of variables,
(e) how the data would be analysed,
(f) any safety precautions that you would take.

[15]
© UCLES 2007 9702/05/M/J/07

3 For
Examiner’s
Use
Diagram
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/05/M/J/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Conducting putty is a soft material which can easily be made into different shapes. It conducts
electricity. An experiment was carried out to investigate how the resistance of a fixed volume
of conducting putty varied with its length.
The resistance of the conducting putty was measured using an ohmmeter, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
ohmmeter
metal metal
contact cylinder of conducting putty contact
plate plate
l
Fig. 2.1

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
Values of the length l of the conducting putty and the resistance R as measured by the
ohmmeter are given in Fig. 2.2.
l / cm R/Ω
6.0 ± 0.4 25
10.0 ± 0.4 60
14.0 ± 0.4 115
18.0 ± 0.4 185
22.0 ± 0.4 275
26.0 ± 0.4 380
Fig. 2.2
It is suggested that the resistivity ρ of the conducting putty is given by the formula
(R – R0)V
ρ = ________
l2
where R0 is the resistance of the connecting wires and V is the volume of the conducting
putty.
(a) Explain why plotting a graph of R against l2 would enable you to confirm the relationship
between R and l.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate and record values of l2, in cm2, in the table. Include in the table the absolute
errors in l2. [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of R (y-axis) against l2 (x-axis). Include error bars for l2. [2]
(ii) Draw a best-fit straight line and a worst acceptable straight line on your graph. Both
lines should be clearly labelled. [2]
(iii) Determine the gradient of the best-fit line. Include the error in your answer.
gradient = ..................................... [2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/05/M/J/07

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
400
350
300
R/Ω
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
l2/cm2
Question 2 continues over the page.

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The volume of conducting putty used is 18.8 cm3. Determine the value of ρ. Include the
error and the unit in your answer.
ρ = ................................................ [5]
© UCLES 2007 9702/05/M/J/07
General Certificate of Secondary Education
*8596069373*
PHYSICS 9702/31
Paper 31 Advanced Practical Skills 1 May/June 2007
2 hours
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
DO NOT WRITE ON ANY BARCODES.

You will be allowed to work with the apparatus for a maximum of one hour for each question.
presentation of the records so that it is not necessary to make a fair copy of them. The working of the answers
is to be handed in.
All questions in this paper carry equal marks.
Total
MML 12308 12/05 T19383/3

2
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/07
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will measure the potential difference across a resistor R2 of resistance
R2 as the resistance of the circuit is varied.
(a) (i) Connect the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1 using one of the resistors in the chain.
4.5 V
R2
V
X Y
chain of
resistors
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Record the value of the potential difference V across R2.
V = .....................................................

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Change the number n of resistors between X and Y and repeat (a)(ii) until you have
six sets of readings for V and n. Include values of 1 / V in your table of results.
(c) (i) Plot a graph of 1 / V (y-axis) against n (x-axis).
(iii) Determine the gradient and the y-intercept of the graph.
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/31/M/J/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) V and n are related by the equation
1 nR1 1
–– = ––– + ––
V ER2 E
where R1 is the resistance of each of the resistors in the chain and E is the e.m.f. of the
battery.
R1
Using your answers from (c)(iii), determine values of E and the ratio –– .
R2
You should include units where appropriate.
E = .....................................................
R1
–– = .....................................................
R2
© UCLES 2007 9702/31/M/J/07

7 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment you will investigate the height to which a ball rises when it has been
released from a stretched piece of rubber.
(a) (i) Suspend the piece of rubber from a clamp and stand using the two small blocks of
wood. Attach the ball to the lower end of the rubber. The arrangement should be as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
blocks of wood
piece of rubber
ball
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Clamp the rule vertically. Position the rule near to the suspended ball.
(iii) Record the position of the centre of mass of the ball when it is in equilibrium.
position of centre of mass of the ball = .....................................................

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) Pull the ball vertically downwards. Record the new position of the centre of mass of
the ball and determine its vertical displacement x.
new position of centre of mass of the ball = .....................................................
x = .....................................................
(ii) Release the ball and note the position of its centre of mass when the ball reaches
maximum height.
position of centre of mass at maximum height = .....................................................
(iii) Calculate the maximum height h of the ball above the equilibrium position.
h = .....................................................
(c) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in h, showing your working.
percentage uncertainty in h = .....................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/31/M/J/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) Change the value of x and repeat (b). Record the new values of x and h.
position of centre of mass when displaced = .....................................................
position of centre of mass at maximum height = .....................................................
x = .....................................................
h = .....................................................
(e) It is suggested that h is directly proportional to x 2. Do the results of your experiment

support this idea? You should explain your reasoning clearly.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
(f) (i) State four sources of error or limitations of the procedure in this experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest four improvements that could be made to this experiment. You may suggest
the use of other apparatus or different procedures.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/31/M/J/07

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/07
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/07
*5019008129*
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours
DO NOT WRITE ON ANY BARCODES.

is to be handed in.
Total
SPA (SLM/CG) T26891/3

2
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/07
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will measure the current I through a resistor R3 as its resistance is
changed.
(a) (i) Use the voltmeter to measure the e.m.f. E of the power supply.
E = ................................................... V
(ii) Connect the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1. R1 and R2 are labelled, and R3 may be
chosen from any one of the remaining resistors. Each resistor carries a label
indicating its resistance.
R2
R1 A
I R3
Fig. 1.1
(iii) Record the values of the current I and the resistance R3 of resistor R3.
I = .................................................. A
R3 = ................................................... Ω

4 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Change the resistor R3 and repeat (a)(iii) until you have six sets of readings for I and
1
R3. Include values of in your table of results.
I
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of (y-axis) against R3 (x-axis).
I
(iii) Determine the gradient and the y-intercept of the graph.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/32/M/J/07

5 For
Examiner’s
Use

6 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The relationship between I and R3 is
I 冢ER2 3冣
1 = R1 + R2 R + R1
E
where R1 is the resistance of the resistor R1, R2 is the resistance of the resistor R2, and
E is the e.m.f. of the power supply.
Using your answers from (a)(i) and (c)(iii), determine values of R1 and R2.
R1 = .......................................................
R2 = .......................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/32/M/J/07

7
BLANK PAGE

8 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment you will investigate how the rebound height h of a table-tennis ball is
related to the height d from which it is dropped.
If air resistance is ignored, then theory predicts that

h
e=
d
where e is a constant. Air resistance may be ignored if d < 40 cm.
(a) (i) Mount a half-metre rule vertically using a stand, boss and clamp.
(ii) Place the table-tennis ball next to the rule and record d. Release the ball and make
measurements to determine the rebound height h, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
d
h
Fig. 2.1
d = .......................................................
h = .......................................................
(iii) Explain how you used the apparatus to ensure that the rebound height h was
measured as accurately as possible.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/32/M/J/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iv) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in h.
percentage uncertainty in h = .......................................................
(v) Calculate a value for e.
e = ......................................................
(b) Repeat (a)(ii) and (b)(v) using a different value of d.
d = .......................................................
h = .......................................................
e = .......................................................
(c) Do the results of your experiment indicate that e is a constant within the limits of
experimental accuracy? Explain your reasoning clearly.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

10 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) (i) State four sources of error or limitations of the procedure in this experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2007 9702/32/M/J/07

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/07
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/07
PHYSICS 9702/01
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*2514539443*

IB08 06_9702_01/RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

3
Formulae
uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + 1

2 at 2
v2 = u2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ± ω √( x 02 – x2)
4 πε 0r

2 QV

t1
2

4
1 Five energies are listed.
5 kJ
5 mJ
5 MJ
5 nJ
Starting with the smallest first, what is the order of increasing magnitude of these energies?
A 5 kJ → 5 mJ → 5 MJ → 5 nJ
B 5 nJ → 5 kJ → 5 MJ → 5 mJ
C 5 nJ → 5 mJ → 5 kJ → 5 MJ
D 5 mJ → 5 nJ → 5 kJ → 5 MJ
2 Which of the following correctly expresses the volt in terms of SI base units?
A AΩ
B W A–1
C kg m2 s–1 A–1
D kg m2 s–3 A–1
3 What is a reasonable estimate of the average kinetic energy of an athlete during a 100 m race
that takes 10 s?
A 40 J B 400 J C 4000 J D 40 000 J
4 The resistance R of a resistor is determined by measuring the potential difference V across it and
the current I in it. The value of R is then calculated using the equation
R= V .
I
The values measured are V = 1.00 ± 0.05 V and I = 0.50 ± 0.01 A.
What is the percentage uncertainty in the value of R ?
A 2.5 % B 3.0 % C 7.0 % D 10.0 %
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

5
5 Four students each made a series of measurements of the acceleration of free fall g. The table
shows the results obtained.
Which set of results could be described as precise but not accurate?
g / m s–2
A 9.81 9.79 9.84 9.83

B 9.81 10.12 9.89 8.94
C 9.45 9.21 8.99 8.76
D 8.45 8.46 8.50 8.41
6 An object accelerates in a direction that is always perpendicular to its motion.
What is the effect, if any, of the acceleration on the object’s speed and direction?
speed direction
A changes changes
B changes constant
C constant changes
D constant constant
1
7 The acceleration of free fall on a planet P is 6
of the acceleration of free fall on Earth.
The mass of a body on planet P is 30 kg.
What is its weight on planet P?
A 4.9 N B 49 N C 180 N D 290 N

6
8 A football is dropped from the top of a tall building.
Which acceleration-time graph best represents the motion of the football through the air?
A B
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
9 Which is a statement of the principle of conservation of momentum?
A Momentum is the product of mass and velocity.

B Momentum is conserved only in elastic collisions.
C Momentum is conserved by all bodies in a collision.
D Momentum is conserved providing no external forces act.
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

7
10 Two equal masses X and Y are moving towards each other on a frictionless air track as shown.
The masses make an elastic collision.
air track
50 cm s–1 30 cm s–1
X Y
Which row gives possible velocities for the two masses after the collision?
velocity of X velocity of Y
A zero 20 cm s–1 to the right

B 10 cm s–1 to the right 10 cm s–1 to the right
C 20 cm s–1 to the left zero
D 30 cm s–1 to the left 50 cm s–1 to the right
11 A car of mass 750 kg has a horizontal driving force of 2.0 kN acting on it. It has a forward
horizontal acceleration of 2.0 m s–2.
resistive force
driving force
What is the resistive force acting horizontally?
A 0.5 kN B 1.5 kN C 2.0 kN D 3.5 kN
12 A ball is falling at terminal speed in still air. The forces acting on the ball are upthrust, viscous
drag and weight.
What is the order of increasing magnitude of these three forces?
A upthrust → viscous drag → weight
B viscous drag → upthrust → weight
C viscous drag → weight → upthrust
D weight → upthrust → viscous drag

8
13 Two rigid rods, XZ and YZ, are fixed to a vertical wall at points X and Y.
A load of weight W is hung from point Z.
The load is not moving.
X W
load
Which diagram shows the forces acting at point Z?
A B
force in XZ force in XZ
W force in YZ W force in YZ
C D
force in XZ force in XZ
W force in YZ W force in YZ
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

9
14 A uniform ladder rests against a vertical wall where there is negligible friction. The bottom of the
ladder rests on rough ground where there is friction. The top of the ladder is at a height h above
the ground and the foot of the ladder is at a distance 2a from the wall.
The diagram shows the forces which act on the ladder.
ladder
h
W
W
F
a a
Which equation is formed by taking moments?
A Wa + Fh = 2W a
B Fa + Wa = Fh
C W a + 2W a = F h
D W a – 2W a = 2F h

10
15 A submarine is in equilibrium in a fully submerged position.
sea
steel water
air
What causes the upthrust on the submarine?
A The air in the submarine is less dense than sea water.

B The sea water exerts a greater upward force on the submarine than the weight of the steel.
C The submarine displaces its own volume of sea water.
D There is a difference in water pressure acting on the top and bottom of the submarine.
16 A positive charge experiences a force F when placed at point X in a uniform electric field.
The charge is then moved from point X to point Y.
Distances r and s are shown on the diagram.
r uniform
electric
field
F
X
What is the change in the potential energy of the charge?
A decreases by Fs
B increases by Fs
C decreases by Fr
D increases by Fr
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

11
17 Which quantities are conserved in an inelastic collision?
kinetic energy total energy linear momentum
A conserved not conserved conserved

B conserved not conserved not conserved
C not conserved conserved conserved
D not conserved conserved not conserved
18 A steel ball is falling at constant speed in oil.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the gravitational potential energy Ep and the kinetic
energy Ek of the ball?
A B
energy energy
Ek Ek
Ep Ep
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
Ek Ek
energy energy
Ep Ep
0 0
0 time 0 time

12
19 The total energy input Ein in a process is partly transferred to useful energy output U, and partly to
energy that is wasted W.
What is the efficiency of the process?
A U × 100 %
W
B W × 100 %
Ein
C U × 100 %
Ein
D U + W × 100 %
Ein
20 Why does an ideal gas exert pressure on its container?
A The molecules of the gas collide continually with each other.

B The molecules of the gas collide continually with the walls of the container.
C The molecules of the gas collide inelastically with the walls of the container.
D The weight of the molecules exerts a force on the walls of the container.
21 The formula for hydrostatic pressure is p = ρ gh.
A density = mass ÷ volume

© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

13
22 A sample of metal is subjected to a force which increases to a maximum value and then
decreases back to zero. A force-extension graph for the sample is shown.
force
Y
X
0
0 extension
When the sample contracts it follows the same force-extension curve as when it was being
stretched.
What is the behaviour of the metal between X and Y?
A both elastic and plastic

B elastic but not plastic
C plastic but not elastic
D not elastic and not plastic
23 A spring of original length 100 mm is compressed by a force. The graph shows the variation of the
length L of the spring with the compressing force F.
12
10
F/N
8
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
L / mm
What is the energy stored in the spring when the length is 70 mm?
A 0.090 J B 0.21 J C 0.27 J D 0.63 J

14
24 The Young modulus of steel is determined using a length of steel wire and is found to have the
value E.
Another experiment is carried out using a wire of the same steel, but of twice the length and half
the diameter.
What value is obtained for the Young modulus in the second experiment?
1 1
A 4 E B 2 E C E D 2E
25 The graph shows how the height of a water surface at a point in a harbour varies with time t as
waves pass the point.
height
p
mean height
t
What are p and q?
p q
A displacement wavelength
B displacement period
C amplitude wavelength
D amplitude period
26 The intensity I of a sound at a point P is inversely proportional to the square of the distance x of P
from the source of the sound. That is
I ∝ 12 .
x
source S P Q
of sound
r
2r
Air molecules at P, a distance r from S, oscillate with amplitude 8.0 µm.
Point Q is situated a distance 2r from S.
What is the amplitude of oscillation of air molecules at Q?
A 1.4 µm B 2.0 µm C 2.8 µm D 4.0 µm
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

15
27 Sound waves, emitted by a small loudspeaker, are reflected by a wall.
The frequency f of the waves is adjusted until a stationary wave is formed with the antinode
nearest the wall at a distance x from the wall.
Which expression gives f in terms of x and the speed of sound c?
4 c c
A f= c B f = 2c C f= D f=
x x 2x 4x
28 A diffraction grating has N lines per unit length and is placed at 90° to monochromatic light of
wavelength λ.
What is the expression for θ, the angle to the normal to the grating at which the third order
diffraction peak is observed?
A sin θ = 1 B sin θ = 3N λ C sin θ = Nλ D sin θ = 3λ

3 Nλ 3 N
29 Light of wavelength 700 nm is incident on a pair of slits, forming fringes 3.0 mm apart on a screen.
What is the fringe spacing when light of wavelength 350 nm is used and the slit separation is
doubled?
A 0.75 mm B 1.5 mm C 3.0 mm D 6.0 mm
30 An electron enters the space between two parallel charged plates with an initial velocity u.
+ v
e θ
e
u
While in the electric field, its direction changes by θ and it emerges with a velocity v.
What is the relation between v and u?

A v= u B v = u cosθ C v= u D v = u sinθ
cos θ sinθ

16
31 The diagram shows an oil droplet that has become charged by gaining five electrons. The droplet
remains stationary between charged plates.
+5000 V
oil
0.8 cm
droplet
0V
What is the magnitude and direction of the electrostatic force on the oil droplet?
A 5.0 × 10–15 N upwards
B 5.0 × 10–15 N downwards
C 5.0 × 10–13 N upwards
D 5.0 × 10–13 N downwards
32 A power cable X has a resistance R and carries current I.
1
A second cable Y has a resistance 2R and carries current I.
2
power dissipated in Y
What is the ratio ?
power dissipated in X
1 1
A B C 2 D 4
4 2
33 A total charge of 100 C flows through a 12 W light bulb in a time of 50 s.
What is the potential difference across the bulb during this time?
A 0.12 V B 2.0 V C 6.0 V D 24 V
34 Two copper wires X and Y have the same volume. Wire Y is four times as long as wire X.
L 4L
X Y
resistance of wire Y
What is the ratio ?
resistance of wire X
A 4 B 8 C 16 D 64
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

17
35 The potential difference across a resistor is 12 V. The current in the resistor is 2.0 A.
4.0 C passes through the resistor.
What is the energy transferred and the time taken?
energy / J time / s
A 3.0 2.0
B 3.0 8.0
C 48 2.0
D 48 8.0
36 A thermistor and another component are connected to a constant voltage supply. A voltmeter is
connected across one of the components. The temperature of the thermistor is then reduced but
no other changes are made.
In which circuit will the voltmeter reading increase?
A B
V
V
C D
V V

18
37 In the circuit shown, the 6.0 V battery has negligible internal resistance. Resistors R1 and R2 and
the voltmeter have resistance 100 kΩ.
6.0 V
R1 R2
100 kΩ 100 kΩ
V
100 kΩ
What is the current in the resistor R2?
A 20 µA B 30 µA C 40 µA D 60 µA
38 The unknown e.m.f. E of a cell is to be determined using a potentiometer circuit. The balance
length is to be measured when the galvanometer records a null reading.
What is the correct circuit to use?
A B
E E
C D
E E
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

19
39 What is the approximate mass of a nucleus of uranium?
A 10–15 kg B 10–20 kg C 10–25 kg D 10–30 kg
40 A radioactive nucleus is formed by β-decay. This nucleus then decays by α-emission.
Which graph of proton number Z plotted against nucleon number N shows the β-decay followed
by the α-emission?
A B
236 236
N N
234 234
232 232
230 230
88 90 92 94 88 90 92 94
Z Z
C D
236 236
N N
234 234
232 232
230 230
88 90 92 94 88 90 92 94
Z Z
© UCLES 2008 9702/01/M/J/08

20
BLANK PAGE
9702/01/M/J/08
*2349041106*
PHYSICS 9702/02
1 hour

The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part For Examiner’s Use
question.
1
Total
SPA (DR/DR) T43263/4

2
Data
permittivity of free space, ␧0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 F m–1
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)
Q
4␲␧0r
0.693
t

4
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided. For

Examiner’s
Use
1 Make reasonable estimates of the following quantities.
(a) the frequency of an audible sound wave
frequency = ........................................... Hz [1]
(b) the wavelength, in nm, of ultraviolet radiation
wavelength = ........................................... nm [1]
(c) the mass of a plastic 30 cm ruler
mass = .............................................. g [1]
(d) the density of air at atmospheric pressure
density = ..................................... kg m–3 [1]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

5
2 A spring is placed on a flat surface and different weights are placed on it, as shown in For
Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
weights
spring
Fig. 2.1
The variation with weight of the compression of the spring is shown in Fig. 2.2.
compression
/ cm
3
0
0 10 20 30 40
weight / N
Fig. 2.2
The elastic limit of the spring has not been exceeded.
(a) (i) Determine the spring constant k of the spring.
k = ........................................... N m–1 [2]

6
(ii) Deduce that the strain energy stored in the spring is 0.49 J for a compression of For
3.5 cm. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(b) Two trolleys, of masses 800 g and 2400 g, are free to move on a horizontal table. The
spring in (a) is placed between the trolleys and the trolleys are tied together using thread
so that the compression of the spring is 3.5 cm, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
thread
spring
trolley trolley
mass 800g mass 2400 g
Fig. 2.3
Initially, the trolleys are not moving.

The thread is then cut and the trolleys move apart.
(i) Deduce that the ratio
speed of trolley of mass 800 g

speed of trolley of mass 2400 g
is equal to 3.0.
[2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

7
(ii) Use the answers in (a)(ii) and (b)(i) to calculate the speed of the trolley of mass For
800 g. Examiner’s
Use
speed = ........................................... m s–1 [3]

8
3 A shopping trolley and its contents have a total mass of 42 kg. The trolley is being pushed For
along a horizontal surface at a speed of 1.2 m s–1. When the trolley is released, it travels a Examiner’s
distance of 1.9 m before coming to rest. Use
(a) Assuming that the total force opposing the motion of the trolley is constant,
(i) calculate the deceleration of the trolley,
deceleration = ........................................... m s–2 [2]
(ii) show that the total force opposing the motion of the trolley is 16 N.
[1]
(b) Using the answer in (a)(ii), calculate the power required to overcome the total force
opposing the motion of the trolley at a speed of 1.2 m s–1.
power = ........................................... W [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

9
(c) The trolley now moves down a straight slope that is inclined at an angle of 2.8° to the For
horizontal, as shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
2.8°
Fig. 3.1
The constant force that opposes the motion of the trolley is 16 N.
Calculate, for the trolley moving down the slope,
(i) the component down the slope of the trolley’s weight,
component of weight = ........................................... N [2]
(ii) the time for the trolley to travel from rest a distance of 3.5 m along the length of the
slope.
time = ............................................ s [4]
(d) Use your answer to (c)(ii) to explain why, for safety reasons, the slope is not made any
steeper.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

10
4 (a) (i) Define the terms For

Examiner’s
1. tensile stress, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. tensile strain,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
3. the Young modulus.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why the Young modulus is not used to describe the deformation of a liquid
or a gas.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The change ∆V in the volume V of some water when the pressure on the water increases
by ∆p is given by the expression
∆V
∆p = 2.2 × 109 ,
V
where ∆p is measured in pascal.
In many applications, water is assumed to be incompressible.
By reference to the expression, justify this assumption.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

11
(c) Normal atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 Pa. For

Examiner’s
Divers in water of density 1.08 × 103 kg m–3 frequently use an approximation that every Use
10 m increase in depth of water is equivalent to one atmosphere increase in pressure.

Determine the percentage error in this approximation.
error = ........................................... % [3]

12
5 (a) State what is meant by For

Examiner’s
(i) the frequency of a progressive wave, Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the speed of a progressive wave.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) One end of a long string is attached to an oscillator. The string passes over a frictionless
pulley and is kept taut by means of a weight, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
string
pulley
oscillator
weight
Fig. 5.1
The frequency of oscillation is varied and, at one value of frequency, the wave formed
on the string is as shown in Fig. 5.1.
(i) Explain why the wave is said to be a stationary wave.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State what is meant by an antinode.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) On Fig. 5.1, label the antinodes with the letter A. [1]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

13
(c) A weight of 4.00 N is hung from the string in (b) and the frequency of oscillation is For
adjusted until a stationary wave is formed on the string. The separation of the antinodes Examiner’s
on the string is 17.8 cm for a frequency of 125 Hz. Use
The speed v of waves on a string is given by the expression

T
v= ,
m
where T is the tension in the string and m is its mass per unit length.
Determine the mass per unit length of the string.
mass per unit length = ........................................... kg m–1 [5]

14
6 An electric heater consists of three similar heating elements A, B and C, connected as shown For
Use
240 V S1
A B
S2
C
S3
Fig. 6.1
Each heating element is rated as 1.5 kW, 240 V and may be assumed to have constant
resistance.
The circuit is connected to a 240 V supply.
(a) Calculate the resistance of one heating element.
resistance = ……………….……….. Ω [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

15
(b) The switches S1, S2 and S3 may be either open or closed. For
Examiner’s
Complete Fig. 6.2 to show the total power dissipation of the heater for the switches in Use
the positions indicated.
S1 S2 S3 total power / kW
open closed closed ……………………
closed closed open ……………………
closed closed closed ……………………
closed open open ……………………
closed open closed ……………………
[5]
Fig. 6.2

16
237
7 Uranium-236 ( 236
92U) and Uranium-237 ( 92U) are both radioactive. For
Uranium-236 is an α-emitter and Uranium-237 is a β-emitter. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Distinguish between an α-particle and a β-particle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The grid of Fig. 7.1 shows some proton numbers Z on the x-axis and the number N of
neutrons in the nucleus on the y-axis.
149
148
number of
neutrons N
147
146
145
236
92U
144
143
142
141
140
88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97
proton number Z
Fig. 7.1
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

17
The α-decay of Uranium-236 ( 236

92U) is represented on the grid. This decay produces a For
nucleus of thorium (Th). Examiner’s
Use
(i) Write down the nuclear equation for this α-decay.
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, mark the position for a nucleus of
1. Uranium-237 (mark this position with the letter U),
2. Neptunium, the nucleus produced by the β-decay of Uranium-237 (mark this

position with the letters Np). [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/02/M/J/08

18
BLANK PAGE
9702/02/M/J/08
19
BLANK PAGE
9702/02/M/J/08
20
BLANK PAGE
9702/02/M/J/08
*6791636055*
PHYSICS 9702/04
1 hour 45 minutes
appropriate units.
2
question.
4
10
11
12
Total
SPA (DR/DR) T43265/4

2
Data
permittivity of free space, ε0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 F m–1
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √(x 20 – x 2)
Q
4␲ε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided. Use
1 (a) (i) Define the radian.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) A small mass is attached to a string. The mass is rotating about a fixed point P at
constant speed, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
mass rotating
at constant speed
Fig. 1.1
Explain what is meant by the angular speed about point P of the mass.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

5
(b) A horizontal flat plate is free to rotate about a vertical axis through its centre, as shown For
Use
plate
M
d
Fig. 1.2
A small mass M is placed on the plate, a distance d from the axis of rotation.
The speed of rotation of the plate is gradually increased from zero until the mass is
seen to slide off the plate.
The maximum frictional force F between the plate and the mass is given by the
expression
F = 0.72W,
where W is the weight of the mass M.

The distance d is 35 cm.
Determine the maximum number of revolutions of the plate per minute for the mass M to
remain on the plate. Explain your working.
number = ........................................... [5]
(c) The plate in (b) is covered, when stationary, with mud.

Suggest and explain whether mud near the edge of the plate or near the centre will first
leave the plate as the angular speed of the plate is slowly increased.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

6
2 (a) Explain qualitatively how molecular movement causes the pressure exerted by a gas. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The density of neon gas at a temperature of 273 K and a pressure of 1.02 × 105 Pa is
0.900 kg m–3. Neon may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of neon atoms at
(i) 273 K,
speed = ........................................... m s–1 [3]
(ii) 546 K.
speed = ........................................... m s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

7
(c) The calculations in (b) are based on the density for neon being 0.900 kg m–3. For
Suggest the effect, if any, on the root-mean-square speed of changing the density at Examiner’s
constant temperature. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
3 A tube, closed at one end, has a uniform area of cross-section. The tube contains some For
sand so that the tube floats upright in a liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
tube
liquid
d
sand
Fig. 3.1
When the tube is at rest, the depth d of immersion of the base of the tube is 16 cm.
The tube is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the depth d of the base of the tube is shown in Fig. 3.2.
17
d / cm
16
15
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
t/s
Fig. 3.2
(a) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine, for the oscillations of the tube,
(i) the amplitude,
amplitude = ........................................... cm [1]
(ii) the period.
period = ........................................... s [1]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

9
(b) (i) Calculate the vertical speed of the tube at a point where the depth d is 16.2 cm. For
Examiner’s
Use
speed = ........................................... cm s–1 [3]
(ii) State one other depth d where the speed will be equal to that calculated in (i).
d = ........................................... cm [1]
(c) (i) Explain what is meant by damping.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The liquid in (b) is now cooled so that, although the density is unchanged, there is
friction between the liquid and the tube as it oscillates. Having been displaced, the
tube completes approximately 10 oscillations before coming to rest.
On Fig. 3.2, draw a line to show the variation with time t of depth d for the first 2.5 s
of the motion. [3]

10
4 (a) Define electric potential at a point. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two isolated point charges A and B are separated by a distance of 30.0 cm, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
30.0 cm
A B
Fig. 4.1
The charge at A is + 3.6 × 10–9 C.

The variation with distance x from A along AB of the potential V is shown in Fig. 4.2.
600
V/V
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
x / cm
–200
–400
–600
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

11
(i) State the value of x at which the potential is zero. For

Examiner’s
x = ........................................... cm [1] Use
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine the charge at B.
charge = ........................................... C [3]
(c) A small test charge is now moved along the line AB in (b) from x = 5.0 cm to x = 27 cm.
State and explain the value of x at which the force on the test charge will be maximum.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

12
5 A capacitor C is charged using a supply of e.m.f. 8.0 V. It is then discharged through a For
resistor R. Examiner’s
The circuit is shown in Fig. 5.1. Use
8.0V R
C
Fig. 5.1
The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the resistor R during the
discharge of the capacitor is shown in Fig. 5.2.
V/V
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
t/s
Fig. 5.2
(a) During the first 1.0 s of the discharge of the capacitor, 0.13 J of energy is transferred to
the resistor R.
Show that the capacitance of the capacitor C is 4500 µF.
[3]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08
13
(b) Some capacitors, each of capacitance 4500 µF with a maximum working voltage of 6 V, For
are available. Examiner’s
Use
Draw an arrangement of these capacitors that could provide a total capacitance of

4500 µF for use in the circuit of Fig. 5.1.
[2]

14
6 A small rectangular coil ABCD contains 140 turns of wire. The sides AB and BC of the coil For
are of lengths 4.5 cm and 2.8 cm respectively, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
pole-piece
of magnet
2.8 cm
B
C
m
5c
4.
A D
axis of rotation
Fig. 6.1
The coil is held between the poles of a large magnet so that the coil can rotate about an axis
through its centre.
The magnet produces a uniform magnetic field of flux density B between its poles.
When the current in the coil is 170 mA, the maximum torque produced in the coil is
2.1 × 10–3 N m.
(a) For the coil in the position for maximum torque, state whether the plane of the coil is
parallel to, or normal to, the direction of the magnetic field.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For the coil in the position shown in Fig. 6.1, calculate the magnitude of the force on
(i) side AB of the coil,
force = ........................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

15
(ii) side BC of the coil. For

Examiner’s
Use
force = ........................................... N [1]
(c) Use your answer to (b)(i) to show that the magnetic flux density B between the poles of
the magnet is 70 mT.
[2]
(d) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The current in the coil in (a) is switched off and the coil is positioned as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
The coil is then turned through an angle of 90° in a time of 0.14 s.
Calculate the average e.m.f. induced in the coil.
e.m.f. = ........................................... V [3]

16
7 The Millikan oil-drop experiment enabled the charge on the electron to be determined. For
Examiner’s
(a) State a fundamental property of charge that was suggested by this experiment. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Two parallel metal plates P and Q are situated in a vacuum. The plates are horizontal
and separated by a distance of 5.4 mm, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
plate Q
5.4mm
plate P
Fig. 7.1
The lower plate P is earthed. The potential difference between the plates can be varied.
An oil droplet of mass 7.7 × 10–15 kg is observed to remain stationary between the
plates when plate Q is at a potential of +850 V.
(i) Suggest why plates P and Q must be parallel and horizontal.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the charge, with its sign, on the oil droplet.
charge = ........................................... C [3]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

17
(c) The procedure in (b) was repeated for three further oil droplets. The magnitude of For
the charge on each of the droplets was found to be 3.2 × 10–19 C, 6.4 × 10–19 C and Examiner’s
3.2 × 10–19 C. Use
Explain what value these data and your answer in (b)(ii) would suggest for the charge
on the electron.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

18
8 A positron (+10e ) is a particle that has the same mass as an electron and has a charge of For
+1.6 × 10–19 C. Examiner’s
A positron will interact with an electron to form two γ-ray photons. Use
0 + 0 → 2γ
+1e –1e
Assuming that the kinetic energy of the positron and the electron is negligible when they
interact,
(a) suggest why the two photons will move off in opposite directions with equal energies,
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) calculate the energy, in MeV, of one of the γ-ray photons.
energy = ........................................... MeV [3]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

19
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 A block diagram for an electronic sensor is shown in Fig. 9.1.
output
device
Fig. 9.1
(a) Complete Fig. 9.1 by labelling the remaining boxes. [2]
(b) A device is to be built that will emit a red light when its input is at +2 V. When the input is
at –2 V, the light emitted is to be green.
(i) On Fig. 9.2, draw a circuit diagram of the device.
input
either + 2V
or – 2V
[2]
Fig. 9.2
(ii) Explain briefly the action of this device.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

20
10 Outline briefly the main principles of the use of magnetic resonance to obtain information For
about internal body structures. Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [8]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

21
11 (a) (i) Describe what is meant by frequency modulation. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) A sinusoidal carrier wave has frequency 500 kHz and amplitude 6.0 V. It is to be
frequency modulated by a sinusoidal wave of frequency 8 kHz and amplitude 1.5 V.
The frequency deviation of the carrier wave is 20 kHz V–1.
Describe, for the carrier wave, the variation (if any) of
1. the amplitude,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. the frequency.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State two reasons why the cost of FM broadcasting to a particular area is greater than
that of AM broadcasting.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

22
12 (a) Optic fibre transmission has, in some instances, replaced transmission using co-axial For
cables and wire pairs. Examiner’s
Optic fibres have negligible cross-talk and are less noisy than co-axial cables. Use
Explain what is meant by
(i) cross-talk,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) noise.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An optic fibre has a signal attenuation of 0.20 dB km–1.

The input signal to the optic fibre has a power of 26 mW. The receiver at the output of
the fibre has a noise power of 6.5 µW.
Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of optic fibre given that the signal-to-noise
ratio at the receiver must not be less than 30 dB.
length = ........................................... km [5]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

23
BLANK PAGE
9702/04/M/J/08
24
BLANK PAGE
9702/04/M/J/08
PHYSICS 9702/05
1 hour 15 minutes

The two questions in this paper carry equal marks.
Total
SP (DR/DR) T46313/3
2
1 A student wishes to measure the resistivity of glass. A teacher suggests that its resistivity is For
of the order of 106 Ω m which is very large. Examiner’s
Use
Resistivity ρ is defined by the equation
ρ = RA
l
where R is resistance, A is cross-sectional area and l is the length of the material.
The student is given a number of sheets of glass of the same thickness and of different
areas.
Design a laboratory experiment to determine the resistivity of glass. You should draw
a diagram showing the arrangement of your equipment. In your account you should pay
particular attention to
(b) how the glass would be connected to the circuit,
(c) the measurements that would be taken,
(d) the control of variables,
(e) how the data would be analysed,
(f) any safety precautions that you would take. [15]
© UCLES 2008 9702/05/M/J/08

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/05/M/J/08
5
2 A radioactive source was placed facing a Geiger-Müller tube. An experiment was carried out For
to investigate how the count rate registered by the tube varied with the thickness of a lead Examiner’s
absorber placed between the source and the tube. Use
The equipment was set up as shown in Fig. 2.1.
x
ratemeter
radioactive
Geiger-Müller lead source
tube absorber
Fig. 2.1
The count rate R reaching the Geiger-Müller tube from the source was recorded for different
thicknesses x of the lead absorbers.

6
Values of x and R are given in Fig. 2.2. For

Examiner’s
Use
x/m R / s–1
0.0050 750 ± 20
0.0100 580 ± 20
0.0150 430 ± 20
0.0200 330 ± 20
0.0250 250 ± 20
0.0300 190 ± 20
Fig. 2.2
It is suggested that R and x are related by the formula
R = R 0e –ρηx
where R0 is the count rate with no absorbers, ρ is the density of lead and η is a quantity
called the mass absorption coefficient.
(a) If a graph of In R against x were plotted, what quantities in the above equation would
the gradient and y-intercept represent?
gradient = .....................................................
y -intercept = ................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate and record values of In R in the table. Include in the table the absolute errors
in In R. [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of In R on the y-axis against x on the x-axis. Include error bars for In R.
[2]
(ii) Draw the best-fit straight line and a worst acceptable straight line on your graph.
Both lines should be clearly labelled. [2]
(iii) Determine the gradient of the best-fit line. Include the error in your answer.
gradient = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/05/M/J/08

7
For
7.0 Examiner’s
Use
6.8
In (R / s–1)
6.6
6.4
6.2
6.0
5.8
5.6
5.4
5.2
5.0
0 0.0050 0.0100 0.0150 0.0200 0.0250 0.0300 0.0350
x/m

8
(d) The density of lead is given as 11 300 kg m–3. Using the answer to (c)(iii) determine the For
value of η. Include the error in your value. Include an appropriate unit. Examiner’s
Use
η = ................................................ [3]
(e) Use your answer from (d) to determine the thickness of lead required to reduce R to
10% of R0. Include the error in your value.
x = ........................................... m [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/05/M/J/08

*6147607221*
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours

is to be handed in.
Total
SP SHW 00011 3/07 T50155/3

2
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/08
3

For
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the angles of the strings in a pulley system are Use
affected by the mass suspended from the mid-point of the string. From these results you will
determine the mass.
(a) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.1. Clamp the pulleys so that they are 50 cm
above the bench and 30 cm from each other. Take the ends of the string and feed them
through each pulley. Hang a 0.200 kg mass from each end of the string. Suspend the
object holder from the middle loop in the string.
pulley pulley
30 cm
50 cm
object holder
200 g mass 200 g mass
Fig. 1.1
(b) Place one of the eleven identical objects in the object holder and measure the angle θ
between the strings as shown in Fig. 1.2.
tension T tension TT
Fig. 1.2
θ = .....................................................
4
(c) Repeat (b), changing the number of objects placed in the object holder. Repeat this
For
procedure until you have six sets of readings for the number n of objects and angle θ. Examiner’s
Include in your table of results values for θ and cos θ .
2 2 ( ) Use
(d) Plot a graph of cos ( θ2 ) on the y-axis against the number n of objects on the x-axis and
draw the line of best fit.
(e) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of this line.
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/31/M/J/08

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(f) Determine the value of the tension T in one of the strings shown in Fig. 1.2.
For
Examiner’s
The value of g is 9.81 N kg–1. Use
T = .................................................. N
(g) It is suggested that the relationship between cos ( θ2 ) and n is

( θ2 ) = mgn
cos
2T
+ k
where m is the mass of one object and k is a constant.
Use your answers from (e) and (f) to determine a value for m.
m = .....................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/31/M/J/08

7

For
Examiner’s
2 In this question you will investigate how the light detected by a light-dependent resistor (LDR) Use
depends on the thickness of an absorber.
(a) (i) Connect the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1. The light-emitting diode (LED) should be
connected the right way round so that light is emitted.
+ –
LED
LDR
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Use the black paper and the Sellotape to make a cylinder of length 4 cm. The
cylinder should fit neatly over the LDR.
(iii) Cut the cylinder in half so that you have two cylinders of length 2 cm.
(iv) Tape one cylinder over the LDR and the other cylinder over the LED as shown in
Fig. 2.2.
Sellotape Sellotape
LDR LED
2 cm 2 cm
Fig. 2.2
(b) Place the cylinders together, as shown in Fig. 2.3. Record the voltmeter reading V0.
Fig. 2.3
V0 = .....................................................
8
(c) Fold the sheet of tracing paper in half four times so that you have 16 layers.
For
Examiner’s
(i) Measure the thickness of these 16 layers. Use
thickness of 16 layers = .....................................................
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in this measurement. Show your working.
(iii) Determine the thickness t of one layer of tracing paper.
t = .....................................................
(iv) Justify the number of significant figures you have given for t.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/31/M/J/08

9
(d) (i) Place four layers of tracing paper between the LED and the LDR as shown in
For
Fig. 2.4. Record the voltmeter reading V. Examiner’s
Use
LDR LED
Fig. 2.4
V = .....................................................
(ii) Repeat (i) using eight layers of tracing paper.
V = .....................................................
(e) Explain whether your results support the idea that V – V0 is proportional to the number
of layers n of tracing paper.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

10
(f) (i) State four sources of error or limitations of the procedure for this experiment.
For
Examiner’s
1. ............................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest four improvements that could be made to the experiment. You may suggest
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/31/M/J/08

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/08
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/08
*2252188686*
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours

is to be handed in.
Total
SPA (FF/DT) T46316/6

2
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/08
3
You may not need to use all of the materials provided. For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will measure the period of oscillation of a wooden rod weighted at
different positions. You will use the results to determine the mass of the rod.
(a) Set up the rod so that it is pivoted by a nail as shown in Fig. 1.1. Another nail should be
placed through the bottom hole and a 0.100 kg mass is to be held in place with a small
piece of Blu-Tack.
cork
nail
0.100 kg
mass
nail
Fig. 1.1
(b) Measure the distance l between the two nails.
l = .................................................. m
(c) Displace the rod so that it oscillates with a small amplitude in a vertical plane as shown
in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
Determine the period T of oscillation.
T = ................................................... s

4
(d) Move the bottom nail and the mass to different holes and repeat (b) and (c) until you For
have six sets of readings for l and T. Include values for T 2 in your table of results. Examiner’s
Use
(e) Plot a graph of T 2 on the y-axis against l on the x-axis and draw the line of best fit.
(f) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of this line.
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/32/M/J/08

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(g) It is suggested that the relationship between T 2 and l is For

Examiner’s
Use
4π2ml
T2 = + z
g (m + M )
where m is 0.100 kg, M is the mass of the rod, g = 9.81 N kg –1 and z is a constant for
this experiment.
Use your answers from (f) to determine the values of M and z. Give appropriate units.
M = .......................................................
z = .......................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/32/M/J/08

7
BLANK PAGE
Please turn over for Question 2

8
Examiner’s
2 (a) Roll out the modelling clay into a cylinder of length 4 cm. Wrap the 4 cm width of paper Use
around the cylinder’s length and fix with Sellotape as shown in Fig. 2.1.
card modelling
clay
Sellotape
4 cm
Fig. 2.1
(b) (i) Use the string to measure the circumference c of the cylinder.
c = ......................................................
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in c.
% uncertainty in c = ......................................................
(iii) Use your answer to (i) to determine the radius r of the cylinder.
r = ......................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/32/M/J/08

9
(c) Place the cylinder at the top of the slope and release it so that it rolls down the slope. For
Measure the time t for the cylinder to travel a distance of 50 cm from rest. Examiner’s
Use
t = .................................................... s
(d) Undo the paper and roll the modelling clay into a cylinder of length 8 cm. Wrap the 8 cm
width of paper around the cylinder’s length and fix with Sellotape. Repeat (b)(i), (b)(iii)
and (c).
c = ......................................................
r = ......................................................
t = ......................................................
(e) Explain whether your results support the idea that t 2 is proportional to r.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

10
(f) (i) State four sources of error or limitations of the procedure for this experiment.
For
Examiner’s
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest four improvements that could be made to the experiment. You may suggest
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2008 9702/32/M/J/08

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/08
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/08
PHYSICS 9702/01
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*9311393880*

Any working should be done in this booklet.
IB09 06_9702_01/6RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v2 = u2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which statement, involving multiples and sub-multiples of the base unit metre (m), is correct?
A 1 pm = 10–9 m
B 1 nm = 10–6 m
C 1 mm = 106 µm
D 1 km = 106 mm
2 The diagram shows a resultant force and its horizontal and vertical components.
vertical
component
resultant
θ
horizontal
component
The horizontal component is 20.0 N and θ = 30°. What is the vertical component?
A 8.7 N B 10.0 N C 11.5 N D 17.3 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

5
3 The diagram shows the stem of a Celsius thermometer marked to show initial and final
temperature values.
initial final
temperature temperature
–10 –5 0 +5 +10 +15
What is the temperature change expressed to an appropriate number of significant figures?
A 14 °C B 20.5 °C C 21 °C D 22.0 °C
4 The diagrams show digital voltmeter and analogue ammeter readings from a circuit in which
electrical heating is occurring.
0.4 0.6
0.8
0.2
mV
A
1.0
0
What is the electrical power of the heater?
A 0.53 W B 0.58 W C 530 W D 580 W
Space for working

6
5 Which displacement-time graph best represents the motion of a falling sphere, the initial
acceleration of which eventually reduces until it begins to travel at constant terminal velocity?
A B
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
0 0
0 time 0 time
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

7
6 When a car driver sees a hazard ahead, she applies the brakes as soon as she can and brings
the car to rest.
The graph shows how the speed v of the car varies with time t after she sees the hazard.
0
0 t1 t2 t
Which graph represents the variation with time t of the distance s travelled by the car after she
has seen the hazard?
A B
s s
0 0
0 t1 t2 t 0 t1 t2 t
C D
s s
0 0
0 t1 t2 t 0 t1 t2 t
Space for working

8
7 Which statement about Newton’s laws of motion is correct?
A The first law follows from the second law.

B The third law follows from the second law.
C Conservation of energy is a consequence of the third law.
D Conservation of linear momentum is a consequence of the first law.
8 The diagram shows the path of a golf ball.
Which row describes changes in the horizontal and vertical components of the golf ball’s velocity,
when air resistance forces are ignored?
horizontal vertical
A constant deceleration constant acceleration downwards

B constant deceleration acceleration decreases upwards then increases downwards
C constant velocity constant acceleration downwards
D constant velocity acceleration decreases upwards then increases downwards
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

9
9 A tennis ball of mass 100 g is struck by a tennis racket. The velocity of the ball is changed as
shown.
20 m s–1
30 m s–1
What is the magnitude of the change in momentum of the ball?
A 1 kg m s–1 B 5 kg m s–1 C 1000 kg m s–1 D 5000 kg m s–1
10 A stationary body explodes into two components of masses m and 2m.
The components gain kinetic energies X and Y respectively.
m 2m
direction m moves direction 2m moves
with kinetic energy X with kinetic energy Y
X
What is the value of the ratio ?
Y
1 1 2 4
A B C D
4 2 1 1
Space for working

10
11 The diagram represents a sphere under water. P, Q, R, and S are forces acting on the sphere,
due to the pressure of the water.
water surface
S Q
Each force acts perpendicularly to the sphere’s surface. P and R act in opposite directions
vertically. Q and S act in opposite directions horizontally.
Which information about the magnitudes of the forces is correct?
A P<R ; S=Q
B P>R ; S=Q
C P=R ; S=Q
D P=R= S=Q
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

11
12 An object, made from two equal masses joined by a light rod, falls with uniform speed through air.
The rod remains horizontal.
Which statement about the equilibrium of the system is correct?
A It is not in equilibrium because it is falling steadily.

B It is not in equilibrium because it is in motion.
C It is not in equilibrium because there is a resultant torque.
D It is in equilibrium because there is no resultant force and no resultant torque.
13 A spindle is attached at one end to the centre of a lever 1.20 m long and at its other end to the
centre of a disc of radius 0.20 m. A cord is wrapped round the disc, passes over a pulley and is
attached to a 900 N weight.
1.20 m
F F
spindle
0.20 m lever
disc
pulley
cord
900 N
What is the minimum force F, applied to each end of the lever, that could lift the weight?
A 75 N B 150 N C 300 N D 950 N
Space for working

12
14 The forward motion of a motor-boat is opposed by forces F which vary with the boat’s speed v in
accordance with the relation F = k v 2, where k is a constant.
The effective power of the propellers required to maintain the speed v is P.
Which expression relates k, P and v ?

P P P P
A k= B k= C k= D k=
v v2 v3 v4
15 The diagram shows two identical vessels X and Y connected by a short pipe with a tap.
X Y
h m
Initially, X is filled with water of mass m to a depth h, and Y is empty.
When the tap is opened, water flows from X to Y until the depths of water in both vessels are
equal.
How much potential energy is lost by the water during this process? (g = acceleration of free fall)
mgh mgh
A 0 B C D mgh
4 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

13
16 Which row best describes how the molecules move in solids, in liquids and in gases?
solids liquids gases
A fixed in position only vibrate move about freely

B slowly in all directions quickly in all directions very quickly in all directions
C vibrate about mean position vibrate and move about move about freely
D vibrate in one direction only vibrate in two directions vibrate in all three directions
17 Water can exist in three states: solid, liquid or vapour. Transitions between these states can
involve melting, freezing, evaporation or boiling.
Under conditions of constant pressure, which transition can occur over a range of temperatures
rather than at one fixed temperature?
A boiling
B evaporation
C freezing
D melting
Space for working

14
18 The diagram shows a flask connected to a U-tube containing liquid. The flask contains air at
atmospheric pressure.
air
liquid
heat
The flask is now gently heated and the liquid level in the right-hand side of the U-tube rises
through a distance h. The density of the liquid is ρ.
What is the increase in pressure of the heated air in the flask?
A hρ B 1 hρg C hρg D 2hρg

2
19 Four materials are formed into rods of the same dimensions.
At room temperature, which can sustain the largest plastic deformation?
A the ductile material aluminium

B the brittle material carbon
C the brittle material glass
D the ductile material steel
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

15
A
20 Two steel wires P and Q have lengths l and 2l respectively, and cross-sectional areas A and
2
respectively. Both wires obey Hooke’s law.
tension in P
What is the ratio when both wires are stretched to the same extension?
tension in Q
1 1 2 4
A B C D
4 2 1 1
21 A rubber band is stretched by hanging weights on it and the force-extension graph is plotted from
the results.
20
force / N
15
10
0
0 10 20 30
extension / cm
What is the best estimate of the strain energy stored in the rubber band when it is extended
30 cm?
A 2.0 J B 2.6 J C 5.1 J D 200 J
Space for working

16
22 Diffraction is the name given to the
A addition of two coherent waves to produce a stationary wave pattern.

B bending of waves round an obstacle.
C change of direction when waves cross the boundary between one medium and another.
D splitting of white light into colours.
23 Which wave properties change when light passes from air into glass?
A colour and speed

B frequency and wavelength
C speed and wavelength
D wavelength and colour
24 The diagram represents the pattern of stationary waves formed by the superposition of sound
waves from a loudspeaker and their reflection from a metal sheet (not shown).
W X Y Z
W, X, Y and Z are four points on the line through the centre of these waves.
Which statement about these stationary waves is correct?
A An antinode is formed at the surface of the metal sheet.

B A node is a quarter of a wavelength from an adjacent antinode.
C The oscillations at X are in phase with those at Y.
D The stationary waves oscillate at right angles to the line WZ.
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

17
25 A diffraction grating with N lines per metre is used to deflect light of various wavelengths λ.
The diagram shows a relation between the deflection angles θ for different values of λ in the
n th order interference pattern.
sin θ
0
0 λ
What is the gradient of the graph?
N n 1
A Nn B C D
n N Nn
26 A stationary wave of frequency 80.0 Hz is set up on a stretched string of length 210 cm.
210 cm
What is the speed of the waves that produce this stationary wave?
A 56.0 m s–1 B 112 m s–1 C 5600 m s–1 D 11 200 m s–1
Space for working

18
27 The diagram shows the paths of two charged particles, X and Y, during their passage between a
pair of oppositely charged metal plates, P and Q.
P
X Y
The plates are charged such that the electric field between them is directed from Q to P.
Which charges on X and Y will produce the observed paths?
X Y
A – –
B – +
C + –
D + +
28 There is a potential difference between a pair of parallel plates.
Which values of potential difference and separation of the plates will produce an electric field
strength of the greatest value?
potential
separation
difference
A 2V 2d
d
B 2V 2
V
C 2 2d
V d
D 2 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

19
29 The diagram shows an electron, with charge e, mass m, and velocity v, entering a uniform
electric field of strength E.
electron
v E
x
The direction of the field and the electron’s motion are both horizontal and to the right.
Which expression gives the distance x through which the electron travels before it stops
momentarily?
mv mv mv 2 mv 2
A x= B x= C x= D x=
E Ee 2E 2Ee
30 Which amount of charge, flowing in the given time, will produce the largest current?
charge / C time / s
1
A 4 4
B 4 1
C 1 4
1
D 4
4
Space for working

20
31 A 12 V battery is charged for 20 minutes by connecting it to a source of electromotive force

(e.m.f.). The battery is supplied with 7.2 × 104 J of energy in this time.
How much charge flows into the battery?
A 5.0 C B 60 C C 100 C D 6000 C
32 What is meant by the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a cell?
A The e.m.f. of a cell is the energy converted into electrical energy when unit charge passes
through the cell.
B The e.m.f. of a cell is the energy transferred by the cell in driving unit charge through the
external resistance.
C The e.m.f. of a cell is the energy transferred by the cell in driving unit charge through the
internal resistance of the cell.
D The e.m.f. of a cell is the amount of energy needed to bring a unit positive charge from
infinity to its positive pole.
33 Two cells of e.m.f. 3.0 V and 1.2 V and negligible internal resistance are connected to resistors of
resistance 9.0 Ω and 18 Ω as shown.
3.0 V 1.2 V
I 9.0 Ω
18 Ω
What is the value of the current I in the 9.0 Ω resistor?
A 0.10 A B 0.20 A C 0.30 A D 0.47 A
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

21
34 Six identical 12 Ω resistors are arranged in two groups, one with three in series and the other with
three in parallel.
12 Ω
12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω 12 Ω
12 Ω
series parallel
What are the combined resistances of each of these two arrangements?
series parallel
A 4.0 Ω 0.25 Ω
B 4.0 Ω 36 Ω
C 36 Ω 0.25 Ω
D 36 Ω 4.0 Ω
Space for working

22
35 The diagrams show a light-dependent resistor in circuit P, and a thermistor in circuit Q.
circuit P circuit Q
How does the potential difference across the fixed resistor in each circuit change when both the
brightness of the light on the light-dependent resistor and the temperature of the thermistor are
increased?
circuit P circuit Q
A decrease decrease
B decrease increase
C increase decrease
D increase increase
36 How do the nucleon (mass) number and proton (atomic) number of two isotopes of an element
compare?
nucleon number proton number
A different different
B different same
C same different
D same same
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

23
37 Nuclear decay is both spontaneous and random.
When the count rate of a radioactive isotope is measured, the readings fluctuate.
Which row describes what the fluctuations demonstrate?
spontaneous random
nature nature
A no no
B no yes
C yes no
D yes yes
38 Which two nuclei contain the same number of neutrons?

12 14
A 6C and 6C
16 15
B 7N and 8O
23 24
C 11 Na and 12 Mg
32 32
D 14 Si and 15 P
Space for working

24
42
39 The calcium nuclide 20 Ca is formed by beta decay.
What are the nucleon (mass) number and proton (atomic) number of the unstable nuclide that
underwent beta decay to form the calcium nuclide?
A 41 19
B 41 21
C 42 19
D 42 21
40 When boron-11 ( 115B ) is bombarded with α-particles, a new nucleus is formed and a neutron is
released.
Which nuclear equation could represent this reaction?

A 11
5B + 11He → 11
6C + 01n
B 11
5B + 22 He → 12
7N + 01n
C 11
5B + 42 He → 14
6C + 11n
D 11
5B + 42 He → 14
7N + 01n
Space for working
© UCLES 2009 9702/01/M/J/09

Location Entry Codes
As part of CIE’s continual commitment to maintaining best practice in assessment, CIE uses
different variants of some question papers for our most popular assessments with large and
widespread candidature. The question papers are closely related and the relationships between
them have been thoroughly established using our assessment expertise. All versions of the
paper give assessment of equal standard.
The content assessed by the examination papers and the type of questions is unchanged.
This change means that for this component there are now two variant Question Papers, Mark
Schemes and Principal Examiner’s Reports where previously there was only one. For any
individual country, it is intended that only one variant is used. This document contains both
variants which will give all Centres access to even more past examination material than is usually
the case.
The diagram shows the relationship between the Question Papers, Mark Schemes and Principal
Examiners’ Reports that are available.
Question Paper Mark Scheme Principal Examiner’s

Report
Introduction Introduction Introduction
First variant Question Paper First variant Mark Scheme First variant Principal
Examiner’s Report
Second variant Question Second variant Mark Second variant Principal

Paper Scheme Examiner’s Report
Who can I contact for further information on these changes?

Please direct any questions about this to CIE’s Customer Services team at:
international@cie.org.uk
The titles for the variant items should correspond with the table above, so that at the top of the
first page of the relevant part of the document and on the header, it has the words:
• First variant Question Paper / Mark Scheme / Principal Examiner’s Report
or
• Second variant Question Paper / Mark Scheme / Principal Examiner’s Report
as appropriate.
First Variant Question Paper

*3132047580*
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour

appropriate units. For Examiner’s Use
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 1
part question.
2
Total
SHW 00268 5/08 T73024/3

2
Data
permeability of free space, ␮0 = 4π × 10 –7 H m–1
the Boltzmann constant, k = 1.38 × 10 –23 J K–1
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
hydrostatic pressure, p = gh
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas, p= 3 <c >
V

v = ± √ (x02 – x 2)
Q
4π0r
radioactive decay, x = x0 exp(– λt)

t 1
2

4

Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) State the most appropriate instrument, or instruments, for the measurement of the
following.
(i) the diameter of a wire of diameter about 1 mm
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the resistance of a filament lamp
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) the peak value of an alternating voltage
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The mass of a cube of aluminium is found to be 580 g with an uncertainty in the
measurement of 10 g. Each side of the cube has a length of (6.0 ± 0.1) cm.
Calculate the density of aluminium with its uncertainty. Express your answer to an
appropriate number of significant figures.
density = ................ ± ................ g cm–3 [5]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

5
2 A ball B of mass 1.2 kg travelling at constant velocity collides head-on with a stationary ball S For
of mass 3.6 kg, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
ball B ball S
mass 1.2 kg mass 3.6 kg
Fig. 2.1
Frictional forces are negligible.
The variation with time t of the velocity v of ball B before, during and after colliding with ball S
+4
+3
v / m s–1
+2
+1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 t/s
–1
–2
Fig. 2.2
(a) State the significance of positive and negative values for v in Fig. 2.2.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

6
(b) Use Fig. 2.2 to determine, for ball B during the collision with ball S, For
Examiner’s
(i) the change in momentum of ball B, Use
change in momentum = .......................................... N s [3]
(ii) the magnitude of the force acting on ball B.
force = ............................................. N [3]
(c) Calculate the speed of ball S after the collision.
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

7
(d) Using your answer in (c) and information from Fig. 2.2, deduce quantitatively whether For
the collision is elastic or inelastic. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
3 (a) Define the torque of a couple. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A torque wrench is a type of spanner for tightening a nut and bolt to a particular torque,
force F
nut torque scale
C
45 cm
Fig. 3.1
The wrench is put on the nut and a force is applied to the handle. A scale indicates the
torque applied.
The wheel nuts on a particular car must be tightened to a torque of 130 N m. This is
achieved by applying a force F to the wrench at a distance of 45 cm from its centre
of rotation C. This force F may be applied at any angle to the axis of the handle, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
For the minimum value of F to achieve this torque,
(i) state the magnitude of the angle that should be used,
= .............................................. ° [1]
(ii) calculate the magnitude of F.
F = ............................................. N [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

9
4 A spring having spring constant k hangs vertically from a fixed point. A load of weight L, when For
hung from the spring, causes an extension e. The elastic limit of the spring is not exceeded. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State
(i) what is meant by an elastic deformation,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) the relation between k, L and e.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Question 4 continues on page 10

10
(b) Some identical springs, each with spring constant k, are arranged as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
arrangement total extension spring constant of
arrangement
…………………… ……………………
…………………… ……………………
…………………… ……………………
Fig. 4.1
The load on each of the arrangements is L.
For each arrangement in Fig. 4.1, complete the table by determining
(i) the total extension in terms of e,
(ii) the spring constant in terms of k.

[5]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

11
5 Two sources S1 and S2 of sound are situated 80 cm apart in air, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
100 cm
S1 M
80 cm
S2
Fig. 5.1
The frequency of vibration can be varied. The two sources always vibrate in phase but have
different amplitudes of vibration.
A microphone M is situated a distance 100 cm from S1 along a line that is normal to S1S2.
As the frequency of S1 and S2 is gradually increased, the microphone M detects maxima and
minima of intensity of sound.
(a) State the two conditions that must be satisfied for the intensity of sound at M to be
zero.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m s–1.
The frequency of the sound from S1 and S2 is increased. Determine the number of
minima that will be detected at M as the frequency is increased from 1.0 kHz to 4.0 kHz.
number = ................................................ [4]

12
6 Two vertical parallel metal plates are situated 2.50 cm apart in a vacuum. The potential For
difference between the plates is 350 V, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
350 V
electron
+ –
2.50 cm
Fig. 6.1
An electron is initially at rest close to the negative plate and in the uniform electric field
between the plates.
(a) (i) Calculate the magnitude of the electric field between the plates.
electric field strength = ....................................... N C–1 [2]
(ii) Show that the force on the electron due to the electric field is 2.24 × 10–15 N.
[2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

13
(b) The electron accelerates horizontally across the space between the plates. Determine For
Examiner’s
(i) the horizontal acceleration of the electron, Use
acceleration = ....................................... m s–2 [2]
(ii) the time to travel the horizontal distance of 2.50 cm between the plates.
time = ............................................. s [2]
(c) Explain why gravitational effects on the electron need not be taken into consideration in
your calculation in (b).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
7 A network of resistors, each of resistance R, is shown in Fig. 7.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
A Z
R R
R
B Y
R
C X
Fig. 7.1
(a) Calculate the total resistance, in terms of R, between points
(i) A and C,
resistance = ................................................ [1]
(ii) B and X,
resistance = ................................................ [1]
(iii) A and Z.
resistance = ................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09

15
(b) Two cells of e.m.f. E1 and E2 and negligible internal resistance are connected into the For
network in (a), as shown in Fig. 7.2. Examiner’s
Use
E1
A Z
R R
I1
I3 R
B Y
I2 R
C X
E2
Fig. 7.2
The currents in the network are as indicated in Fig. 7.2.
Use Kirchhoff’s laws to state the relation
(i) between currents I1, I2 and I3,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) between E2, R, I2 and I3 in loop BCXYB,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) between E1, E2, R, I1 and I2 in loop ABCXYZA.
............................................................................................................................ [1]

16
8 The spontaneous and random decay of a radioactive substance involves the emission of For
either -radiation or -radiation and/or -radiation. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain what is meant by spontaneous decay.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the type of emission, one in each case, that
(i) is not affected by electric and magnetic fields,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) produces the greatest density of ionisation in a medium,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) does not directly result in a change in the proton number of the nucleus,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) has a range of energies, rather than discrete values.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/21/M/J/09
Second Variant Question Paper

*0821450793*
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

part question.
2
Total
SP (SLM/CGW) V04889/1
2
Data
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4π0r

t 1
2

4

Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) Two of the SI base quantities and their units are mass (kg) and length (m).
Name three other SI base quantities and their units.
1. quantity ....................................................... unit .........................................................
2. quantity ....................................................... unit .........................................................
3. quantity ....................................................... unit .........................................................

[3]
(b) The pressure p due to a liquid of density ρ is related to the depth h by the expression
p = ρgh,
Use this expression to determine the derived units of pressure. Explain your working.
[5]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

5
2 An experiment is conducted on the surface of the planet Mars. For

A sphere of mass 0.78 kg is projected almost vertically upwards from the surface of the Examiner’s
planet. The variation with time t of the vertical velocity v in the upward direction is shown in Use
Fig. 2.1.
10
v /m s-1
0
0 1 2 3 4 t /s
–5
–10
Fig. 2.1
The sphere lands on a small hill at time t = 4.0 s.
(a) State the time t at which the sphere reaches its maximum height above the planet’s
surface.
t = .............................................. s [1]
(b) Determine the vertical height above the point of projection at which the sphere finally
comes to rest on the hill.
height = ............................................. m [3]

6
(c) Calculate, for the first 3.5 s of the motion of the sphere, For
Examiner’s
(i) the change in momentum of the sphere, Use
change in momentum = ...........................................N s [2]
(ii) the force acting on the sphere.
force = ..............................................N [2]
(d) Using your answer in (c)(ii),
(i) state the weight of the sphere,
weight = ..............................................N [1]
(ii) determine the acceleration of free fall on the surface of Mars.
acceleration = ........................................ m s–2 [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

7
3 (a) Define the torque of a couple. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A torque wrench is a type of spanner for tightening a nut and bolt to a particular torque,
force F
nut torque scale
45 cm
Fig. 3.1
The wrench is put on the nut and a force is applied to the handle. A scale indicates the
torque applied.
The wheel nuts on a particular car must be tightened to a torque of 130 N m. This is
achieved by applying a force F to the wrench at a distance of 45 cm from its centre
of rotation C. This force F may be applied at any angle to the axis of the handle, as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
For the minimum value of F to achieve this torque,
(i) state the magnitude of the angle that should be used,
= .............................................. ° [1]
(ii) calculate the magnitude of F.
F = ............................................. N [2]

8
4 A spring having spring constant k hangs vertically from a fixed point. A load of weight L, when For
hung from the spring, causes an extension e. The elastic limit of the spring is not exceeded. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State
(i) what is meant by an elastic deformation,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) the relation between k, L and e.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

9
(b) Some identical springs, each with spring constant k, are arranged as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
arrangement total extension spring constant of
arrangement
…………………… ……………………
…………………… ……………………
…………………… ……………………
Fig. 4.1
The load on each of the arrangements is L.
For each arrangement in Fig. 4.1, complete the table by determining
(i) the total extension in terms of e,
(ii) the spring constant in terms of k.

[5]

10
5 A double-slit interference experiment is set up using coherent red light as illustrated in For
Use
double slit screen
coherent
red light 0.86 mm
2.4 m
Fig. 5.1 (not to scale)
The separation of the slits is 0.86 mm.

The distance of the screen from the double slit is 2.4 m.
A series of light and dark fringes is observed on the screen.
(a) State what is meant by coherent light.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Estimate the separation of the dark fringes on the screen.
separation = .......................................... mm [3]
(c) Initially, the light passing through each slit has the same intensity.
The intensity of light passing through one slit is now reduced.
Suggest and explain the effect, if any, on the dark fringes observed on the screen.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

11
6 Two vertical parallel metal plates are situated 2.50 cm apart in a vacuum. The potential For
difference between the plates is 350 V, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
350 V
electron
+ –
2.50 cm
Fig. 6.1
An electron is initially at rest close to the negative plate and in the uniform electric field
between the plates.
(a) (i) Calculate the magnitude of the electric field between the plates.
electric field strength = ....................................... N C–1 [2]
(ii) Show that the force on the electron due to the electric field is 2.24 × 10–15 N.
[2]

12
(b) The electron accelerates horizontally across the space between the plates. Determine For
Examiner’s
(i) the horizontal acceleration of the electron, Use
acceleration = ....................................... m s–2 [2]
(ii) the time to travel the horizontal distance of 2.50 cm between the plates.
time = ............................................. s [2]
(c) Explain why gravitational effects on the electron need not be taken into consideration in
your calculation in (b).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

13
7 (a) A network of resistors, each of resistance R, is shown in Fig. 7.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
R R
X
S1 S2
Y
R R
Fig. 7.1
Switches S1 and S2 may be ‘open’ or ‘closed’.
Complete Fig. 7.2 by calculating the resistance, in terms of R, between points X and Y
for the switches in the positions shown.
switch S1 switch S2 resistance between points X and Y
open open ..............................................................
open closed ..............................................................
closed closed ..............................................................
Fig. 7.2
[3]

14
(b) Two cells of e.m.f. E1 and E2 and negligible internal resistance are connected into a For
network of resistors, as shown in Fig. 7.3. Examiner’s
Use
M N
I1 R R
I2 R I4
E1
P Q
E2
R I3 R
L K
Fig. 7.3
The currents in the network are as indicated in Fig. 7.3.
Use Kirchhoff’s laws to state the relation
(i) between currents I1, I2, I3 and I4,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) between E1, E2, R, and I3 in loop NKLMN,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) between E2, R, I3 and I4 in loop NKQN.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

15
8 The spontaneous and random decay of a radioactive substance involves the emission of For
either -radiation or -radiation and/or -radiation. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain what is meant by spontaneous decay.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the type of emission, one in each case, that
(i) is not affected by electric and magnetic fields,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) produces the greatest density of ionisation in a medium,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) does not directly result in a change in the proton number of the nucleus,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) has a range of energies, rather than discrete values.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/22/M/J/09

16
BLANK PAGE
9702/22/M/J/09
*8781528465*
PHYSICS 9702/04
1 hour 45 minutes
appropriate units.
2
question. 4
10
11
12
13
Total
SP (NF/CGW) T73027/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
Nm 2
<c >

⎯ ⎯ ⎯02⎯ ⎯ ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
v = ± ω √⎯(x
Q
4πε0r
resistors in series, R = R1 + R 2 + . . .
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Define gravitational field strength.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spherical planet has diameter 1.2 × 104 km. The gravitational field strength at the
surface of the planet is 8.6 N kg–1.
The planet may be assumed to be isolated in space and to have its mass concentrated
at its centre.
Calculate the mass of the planet.
mass = .......................................... kg [3]
(c) The gravitational potential at a point X above the surface of the planet in (b) is
– 5.3 × 107 J kg–1.
For point Y above the surface of the planet, the gravitational potential is
– 6.8 × 107 J kg–1.
(i) State, with a reason, whether point X or point Y is nearer to the planet.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) A rock falls radially from rest towards the planet from one point to the other.
Calculate the final speed of the rock.
speed = ...................................... m s–1 [2]

© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09
5
2 Sources of α-particles are frequently found to contain traces of helium gas. For
A radioactive source emits α-particles at a constant rate of 3.5 × 106 s–1. The α-particles are Examiner’s
collected for a period of 40 days. Each α-particle becomes one helium atom. Use
(a) By reference to the half-life of the source, suggest why it may be assumed that the rate
of emission of α-particles is constant.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The helium gas may be assumed to be an ideal gas. Calculate the volume of gas that is
collected at a pressure of 1.5 × 105 Pa and at a temperature of 17 °C.
volume = ......................................... m3 [3]

6
3 When a liquid is boiling, thermal energy must be supplied in order to maintain a constant For
temperature. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State two processes for which thermal energy is required during boiling.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the specific latent heat of vaporisation
of a liquid.
Some liquid in a beaker is heated electrically as shown in Fig. 3.1.
to electrical
circuit
heater
liquid
Fig. 3.1
Energy is supplied at a constant rate to the heater. When the liquid is boiling at a constant
rate, the mass of liquid evaporated in 5.0 minutes is measured.
The power of the heater is then changed and the procedure is repeated.
Data for the two power ratings are given in Fig. 3.2.
power of heater mass evaporated in 5.0 minutes

/W /g
50.0 6.5
70.0 13.6
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

7
(i) Suggest For

Examiner’s
1. how it may be checked that the liquid is boiling at a constant rate, Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
2. why the rate of evaporation is determined for two different power ratings.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of the liquid.
specific latent heat of vaporisation = ....................................... J g–1 [3]

8
4 A vertical peg is attached to the edge of a horizontal disc of radius r, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
peg
disc
Fig. 4.1
The disc rotates at constant angular speed ω. A horizontal beam of parallel light produces a
shadow of the peg on a screen, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
screen
peg
R
Q
parallel beam θ
S
of light P
r
Fig. 4.2 (plan view)
At time zero, the peg is at P, producing a shadow on the screen at S.

At time t, the disc has rotated through angle θ. The peg is now at R, producing a shadow
at Q.
(a) Determine,
(i) in terms of ω and t, the angle θ,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) in terms of ω, t and r, the distance SQ.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

9
(b) Use your answer to (a)(ii) to show that the shadow on the screen performs simple For
harmonic motion. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The disc has radius r of 12 cm and is rotating with angular speed ω of 4.7 rad s–1.
Determine, for the shadow on the screen,
(i) the frequency of oscillation,
frequency = ......................................... Hz [2]
(ii) its maximum speed.
speed = .................................... cm s–1 [2]

10
5 A solid metal sphere, of radius r, is insulated from its surroundings. The sphere has For
charge +Q. Examiner’s
This charge is on the surface of the sphere but it may be considered to be a point charge at Use
its centre, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
+Q
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) Define capacitance.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Show that the capacitance C of the sphere is given by the expression
C = 4πε0r.
[1]
(b) The sphere has radius 36 cm.

Determine, for this sphere,
(i) the capacitance,
capacitance = ............................................ F [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

11
(ii) the charge required to raise the potential of the sphere from zero to 7.0 × 105 V. For
Examiner’s
Use
charge = ........................................... C [1]
(c) Suggest why your calculations in (b) for the metal sphere would not apply to a plastic
sphere.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) A spark suddenly connects the metal sphere in (b) to the Earth, causing the potential of
the sphere to be reduced from 7.0 × 105 V to 2.5 × 105 V.
Calculate the energy dissipated in the spark.
energy = ............................................ J [3]

12
6 (a) Define the tesla. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A large horseshoe magnet produces a uniform magnetic field of flux density B between
its poles. Outside the region of the poles, the flux density is zero.
The magnet is placed on a top-pan balance and a stiff wire XY is situated between its
poles, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
Y
pole P
magnet
top-pan
balance
Fig. 6.1
The wire XY is horizontal and normal to the magnetic field. The length of wire between
the poles is 4.4 cm.
A direct current of magnitude 2.6 A is passed through the wire in the direction from X
to Y.
The reading on the top-pan balance increases by 2.3 g.
(i) State and explain the polarity of the pole P of the magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

13
(ii) Calculate the flux density between the poles. For

Examiner’s
Use
flux density = ............................................ T [3]
(c) The direct current in (b) is now replaced by a very low frequency sinusoidal current of
r.m.s. value 2.6 A.
Calculate the variation in the reading of the top-pan balance.
variation in reading = ............................................ g [2]

14
7 You are provided with a coil of wire, a bar magnet and a sensitive ammeter. For
Examiner’s
Outline an experiment to verify Lenz’s law. Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

15
8 (a) Explain why, for the photoelectric effect, the existence of a threshold frequency and a For
very short emission time provide evidence for the particulate nature of electromagnetic Examiner’s
radiation, as opposed to a wave theory. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State and explain two relations in which the Planck constant h is the constant of
proportionality.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[6]

16
9 (a) A sample of a radioactive isotope contains N nuclei at time t. At time (t + Δt), it contains For
(N – ΔN) nuclei of the isotope. Examiner’s
Use
For the period Δt, state, in terms of N, ΔN and Δt,
(i) the mean activity of the sample,
activity = ............................................... [1]
(ii) the probability of decay of a nucleus.
probability = ............................................... [1]
(b) A cobalt-60 source having a half-life of 5.27 years is calibrated and found to have an
activity of 3.50 × 105 Bq. The uncertainty in the calibration is ±2%.
Calculate the length of time, in days, after the calibration has been made, for the stated
activity of 3.50 × 105 Bq to have a maximum possible error of 10%.
time = ...................................... days [4]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

17
Section B For
Examiner’s
10 (a) By reference to an amplifier, explain what is meant by negative feedback.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An amplifier circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in

Fig. 10.1.
–
+
V IN 120 kΩ V OUT
R
Fig. 10.1
The supply for the op-amp is ± 9.0 V.

The amplifier circuit is to have a gain of 25.
Calculate the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ........................................... Ω [2]
(c) State the value of the output voltage VOUT of the amplifier in (b) for input voltages VIN of
(i) – 0.08 V,
VOUT = ............................................ V [1]
(ii) +0.4 V.
VOUT = ............................................ V [1]

18
11 (a) Explain the main principles behind the use of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic information For
about internal body structures. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Data for the acoustic impedances and absorption (attenuation) coefficients of muscle
and bone are given in Fig. 11.1.
acoustic impedance absorption coefficient

/ kg m–2 s–1 / m–1
muscle 1.7 × 106 23

bone 6.3 × 106 130
Fig. 11.1
The intensity reflection coefficient is given by the expression
(Z2 – Z1)2
.
(Z2 + Z1)2
The attenuation of ultrasound in muscle follows a similar relation to the attenuation of

X-rays in matter.
A parallel beam of ultrasound of intensity I enters the surface of a layer of muscle of

thickness 4.1 cm as shown in Fig. 11.2.
muscle bone
beam of
ultrasound
4.1 cm
Fig. 11.2
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

19
The ultrasound is reflected at a muscle-bone boundary and returns to the surface of the For
muscle. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate
(i) the intensity reflection coefficient at the muscle-bone boundary,
coefficient = ............................................... [2]
(ii) the fraction of the incident intensity that is transmitted from the surface of the muscle
to the surface of the bone,
fraction = ............................................... [2]
(iii) the intensity, in terms of I, that is received back at the surface of the muscle.
intensity = ............................................ I [2]

20
12 A signal is to be transmitted along a cable system of total length 125 km. For
The cable has an attenuation of 7 dB km–1. Amplifiers, each having a gain of 43 dB, are placed Examiner’s
at 6 km intervals along the cable, as illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Use
6 km 6 km amplifier 6 km
gain 43 dB
input output
signal signal
450 mW
125 km
Fig. 12.1
(a) State what is meant by the attenuation of a signal.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the total attenuation caused by the transmission of the signal along the cable,
attenuation = ......................................... dB [1]
(ii) the total signal gain as a result of amplification by all of the amplifiers along the
cable.
gain = ......................................... dB [1]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09

21
(c) The input signal has a power of 450 mW. Use your answers in (b) to calculate the output For
power of the signal as it leaves the cable system. Examiner’s
Use
power = ....................................... mW [3]

22
13 (a) Fig. 13.1 is a block diagram illustrating part of a mobile phone handset used for receiving For
a signal from a base station. Examiner’s
Use
switch
DAC
Fig. 13.1
Complete Fig. 13.1 by labelling each of the blocks. [4]
(b) Explain the role of the base station and the cellular exchange when a mobile phone is
switched on and before a call is made or received.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09
23
BLANK PAGE
9702/04/M/J/09
24
BLANK PAGE
9702/04/M/J/09
*2434125478*
PHYSICS 9702/05
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
SPA (SJF5063/CG) T76306/2

2
1 A student wishes to determine the Young modulus E of wood from the period of oscillation of For
a loaded wooden rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1. Examiner’s
Use
fixed end
load
Fig. 1.1
An equation relating the period of oscillation T to the overhanging length l of the rule is
kl 3
T2 = .
E
The constant k is given by
16π 2M
k=
wd 3
where M is the mass of the load, w is the width of the rule and d is the thickness of the rule.
Design a laboratory experiment to determine the Young modulus of wood. You should draw
a diagram showing the arrangement of your equipment. In your account, you should pay
particular attention to
(b) the measurements to be taken,
(d) how to analyse the data,
(e) how to determine E,
(f) the safety precautions to be taken.

[15]
© UCLES 2009 9702/05/M/J/09

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
........................................................................................................................................................ Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/05/M/J/09

5
2 An experiment is carried out to investigate how the current I required to melt a wire varies For
with the diameter d of the wire. Examiner’s
Use
The equipment is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wire
Fig. 2.1
Question 2 continues on the next page.

6
It is suggested that I and d are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
q
I = pd Use
where p and q are constants.
(a) A graph is plotted with lg I on the y-axis and lg d on the x-axis. Express the gradient and
y-intercept in terms of p and q.
gradient = …………………………………
y-intercept = …………………………………
[1]
(b) Values of d and I are given in Fig. 2.2.
d / 10–5 m I/A lg (d / 10–5 m) lg (I / A)
15 2.6 ± 0.1
19 3.5 ± 0.1
23 4.4 ± 0.1
27 5.4 ± 0.1
31 6.4 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of lg (d / 10–5 m) and lg (I / A) in Fig. 2.2. Include in the table
the absolute errors in lg (I / A). [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of lg (I / A) against lg (d / 10–5 m). Include error bars for lg (I/ A). [2]
(ii) Draw the line of best fit and a worst acceptable straight line on your graph. Both
(iii) Determine the gradient of the line of best fit. Include the error in your answer.
gradient = ………………………………… [2]
© UCLES 2009 9702/05/M/J/09

7
For
0.85 Examiner’s
Use
0.80
lg (I / A)
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50
-5
lg (d / 10 m)

8
(iv) Determine the y-intercept of the line of best fit. Include the error in your answer. For
Examiner’s
Use
y-intercept = ………………………………… [2]
(d) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine the values of p and q. Include the
error in your values. You need not give the units of p and q.
p = …………………………………
q = …………………………………
[3]
© UCLES 2009 9702/05/M/J/09

*0157111586*
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours

is to be handed in.
Additional answer paper and graph paper should be used only if it becomes necessary to do so.
Total
SP (CW/CGW) T73980/3
2

For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the current in a circuit depends on the arrangement
of resistors within the circuit. You have been provided with four 47 Ω resistors and one
unknown resistor.
(a) Connect the unknown resistor, labelled X, in series with the four 47 Ω resistors, an
ammeter, a battery and a switch, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
47Ω 47Ω 47Ω 47Ω
Fig. 1.1
Close the switch and record the current I in the circuit. Immediately after taking the
reading, open the switch.
I = .................................................. A
© UCLES 2009 9702/31/M/J/09

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows a number of possible combinations of the 47 Ω resistors, together with
For
values of their combined resistance R. Examiner’s
Use
Resistor arrangement R/Ω
12
16
24
47
71
94
118
141
188
Fig. 1.2

4
From Fig. 1.2, select six combinations of resistors. Connect each combination in turn
For
in the circuit of Fig. 1.1, keeping resistor X in the same place. Measure and record the Examiner’s
current I for each of your combinations. Use
1
Include in your table the values of R and I .
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of I on the y-axis against R on the x-axis. Draw the line of best fit.
(ii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of this line.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/31/M/J/09

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(d) It is suggested that the relationship between I and R is

For
Examiner’s
Use
1 R Q
I =P + P
where P and Q are constants.
Use your answers from (c)(ii) to determine values for P and Q. Give appropriate units.
P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/31/M/J/09

7

For
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment you will investigate the angle of tilt of a bottle when it contains different
amounts of water.
(a) (i) Use the water supplied to measure the volume of the bottle. (1 ml = 1 cm3)
volume of container = .............................................. cm3
(ii) Justify the number of significant figures you have given for the volume of the bottle.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(b) Add water to the empty bottle until it is about half-full.
(i) Measure the height h as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
h = ................................................ cm

8
(ii) The angle of tilt θ of the bottle is the angle it makes with the horizontal when it is
For
about to topple, as shown in Fig. 2.2. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.2
Making sure that the lid is secure, tilt the bottle as shown, until it is about to topple,
and measure θ.
θ = .................................................... °
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in θ.
(iv) Measure the volume V of the water in the bottle.
V = .............................................. cm3
© UCLES 2009 9702/31/M/J/09

9
(c) Empty the water from the bottle. Refill the bottle so that it is about a quarter-full and
For
repeat (b)(i), (b)(ii) and (b)(iv). Examiner’s
Use
h = ................................................ cm
θ = .................................................. °
V = .............................................. cm3
(d) It is suggested that h is inversely proportional to cosθ. Explain whether the results of
your experiment support this idea.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

10
(e) (i) State four sources of error or limitations of the procedure in this experiment.
For
Examiner’s
1. ............................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/31/M/J/09

11
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/09
12
BLANK PAGE
9702/31/M/J/09
*8960588287*
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours

is to be handed in.
Total
SPA SHW 00236 4/08 T08038/7 R

2
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/09
3
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, a tube is suspended from a length of wool. The tube will be rotated. You
will investigate how the time taken for the rotating tube to momentarily come to rest depends
on the length of the wool holding the tube.
Attach the wool to the middle of the tube making use of the groove on the tube to position the
wool correctly. Clamp the other end of the wool securely using the two wooden blocks. The
length l should be 50 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
clamp
boss
wooden blocks
wool
clamp stand
tube
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Keeping the wool taut and the tube horizontal, turn the tube through ten complete
turns in order to twist the wool, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
10 complete turns
to twist wool
Fig. 1.2
The mark at one end of the tube is to help you count complete turns.
(ii) When you release the tube, the wool will untwist and then twist again, before
coming to rest momentarily. It will then untwist in the other direction.
Release the tube, and measure and record the time t taken for the tube to come to
rest momentarily for the first time.
t = ......................................................
4
(b) Change l and repeat (a)(i) and (a)(ii) until you have six sets of values for l and t. l should For
be in the range 10 cm to 50 cm. Examiner’s
Use
Include values of l in your table of results.
(c) (i) Plot a graph of t on the y-axis against l on the x-axis. Draw the line of best fit.
(ii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of this line.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/32/M/J/09

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(d) It is suggested that the relationship between l and t is For

Examiner’s
t=p l +k Use
where p and k are constants.
Use your answers from (c)(ii) to determine values for p and k. Give appropriate units.
p = ......................................................
k = ......................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/32/M/J/09

7
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the deflection at the centre of the loaded Use
resistance wire of the arrangement shown in Fig. 2.1 depends on the current in the wire.
50 cm
clamps
resistance
wire
clamp stand 100 g mass

holder
G-clamp
Fig. 2.1
The apparatus has been set up for you. The resistance wire is held firmly between the clamps.
Do not make any adjustments to the bosses, clamps or G-clamps.
You should wear safety goggles throughout.

8
(a) Connect 45 cm of resistance wire, an ammeter and a 12 V variable power supply in For
series, as shown in Fig. 2.2. Use the crocodile clips available to make electrical contact Examiner’s
with the measured length of the resistance wire. Use
45 cm
resistance
wire
+
12 V d.c.
variable supply
–
Fig. 2.2
(b) (i) With the switch open, measure the height of the bottom of the mass holder above
the bench.
height = ......................................................
(ii) Explain how you ensure the accuracy of this reading of the height.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/32/M/J/09

9
(c) (i) Close the switch and vary the power supply until the current I in the circuit is about For
1.2 A. Do not touch the resistance wire, as it will be hot. Examiner’s
Use
Measure and record this value of I.
I = ................................................... A
(ii) With the switch closed, measure and record the new height of the bottom of the
mass holder above the bench. Open the switch.
new height = ......................................................
(iii) Calculate the deflection x of the resistance wire, caused by the current in the
circuit. (The deflection is equal to the change in height of the mass holder above
the bench.)
x = ......................................................
(iv) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in x.
percentage uncertainty = ......................................................
(d) (i) Repeat (b)(i), to check the height of the bottom of the mass holder above the bench,
with the switch open.
height = ......................................................

10
(ii) Close the switch and vary the power supply to use a different current, less than For
1.2 A. Record your new value of I. Examiner’s
Use
I = ................................................... A
(iii) Repeat (c)(ii) and (c)(iii) to find the new deflection of the resistance wire, caused
by the new current in the circuit.
new height = ......................................................
x = ......................................................
(e) It is suggested that I is proportional to x. Explain whether the results of your experiment
support this idea.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/32/M/J/09

11
(f) (i) State four sources of error or limitations of the procedure in this experiment. For
Examiner’s
1. ............................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2009 9702/32/M/J/09

12
BLANK PAGE
9702/32/M/J/09
PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*0280134660*

IB10 06_9702_11/5RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v2 = u2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 The SI unit for potential difference (the volt) is given, in base units, by
A kg m A–1 s–3.
B m2 A–1 s–2.
C kg m2 s–2.
D kg m2 A–1 s–3.
2 The product of pressure and volume has the same SI base units as
A energy.
B force.
C force .
area
D force .
length
3 An ion is accelerated by a series of electrodes in a vacuum. A graph of the power supplied to the
ion is plotted against time.
What is represented by the area under the graph between two times?
A the change in kinetic energy of the ion

B the average force on the ion
C the change in momentum of the ion
D the change in velocity of the ion
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

5
4 The diagram shows a square-wave trace on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. A grid of
1 cm squares covers the screen. The time-base setting is 10 ms cm–1.
1 cm
1 cm
What is the approximate frequency of the square wave?
A 70 Hz B 140 Hz C 280 Hz D 1400 Hz
Space for working

6
5 A vector quantity V is resolved into two perpendicular components X and Y. The angle between V
and component X is θ.
Y
X
The angle between component X and the vector V is increased from 0° to 90°.
How do the magnitudes of X and Y change as the angle θ is increased in this way?
X Y
A increase increase
B increase decrease
C decrease increase
D decrease decrease
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

7
6 A student finds the density of a liquid by measuring its mass and its volume. The following is a
summary of his measurements.
mass of empty beaker = (20 ± 1) g
mass of beaker + liquid = (70 ± 1) g
volume of liquid = (10.0 ± 0.6) cm3
He correctly calculates the density of the liquid as 5.0 g cm–3.
What is the uncertainty in this value?
A 0.3 g cm–3 B 0.5 g cm–3 C 0.6 g cm–3 D 2.6 g cm–3
7 A micrometer screw gauge is used to measure the diameter of a copper wire.
The reading with the wire in position is shown in diagram 1. The wire is removed and the jaws of
the micrometer are closed. The new reading is shown in diagram 2.
15 20
10 15
0 5 0 10
diagram 1 diagram 2
What is the diameter of the wire?
A 1.90 mm B 2.45 mm C 2.59 mm D 2.73 mm
Space for working

8
8 The diagram shows a velocity-time graph for a vehicle.
16
velocity 14
/ m s–1
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
time / s
The vehicle, moving at 4.0 m s–1, begins to accelerate at time = 0.
What is the vehicle’s acceleration at time = 3.0 s?
A 0.67 m s–2 B 1.0 m s–2 C 1.3 m s–2 D 2.0 m s–2
9 A small steel ball falls freely under gravity after being released from rest.
Which graph best represents the variation of the height h of the ball with time t ?
A B C D
h h h h
0 0 0 0
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

9
60 cm s–1 40 cm s–1
11 A brick weighing 20 N rests on an inclined plane. The weight of the brick has a component of 10 N
parallel with the plane. The brick also experiences a frictional force of 4 N.
4N
10 N
What is the acceleration of the brick down the plane? Assume that the acceleration of free fall g is
equal to 10 m s–2.
A 0.3 m s–2 B 0.8 m s–2 C 3.0 m s–2 D 8.0 m s–2
Space for working

10
12 The diagram shows two identical spheres X and Y.
X Y
Initially, X moves with speed v directly towards Y. Y is stationary. The spheres collide elastically.
What happens?
X Y
1 1
A moves with speed 2 v to the right moves with speed 2 v to the right
B moves with speed v to the left remains stationary
1 1
C moves with speed 2 v to the left moves with speed 2 v to the right
D stops moves with speed v to the right
13 Forces of 3 N, 4 N and 5 N act at one point on an object. The angles at which the forces act can
vary.
What is the value of the minimum resultant force of these forces?
A 0
B between 0 and 2 N
C 2N
D between 2 N and 4 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

11

15 A force of 1000 N is needed to lift the hook of a crane at a steady velocity. The crane is then used
to lift a load of mass 1000 kg at a velocity of 0.50 m s–1.
How much of the power developed by the motor of the crane is used in lifting the hook and the
load? Assume that the acceleration of free fall g is equal to 10 m s–2.
A 5.0 kW B 5.5 kW C 20 kW D 22 kW
Space for working

12
16 A constant force F, acting on a car of mass m, moves the car up the slope through a distance s at
constant velocity v. The angle of the slope to the horizontal is α.
Which expression gives the efficiency of the process?
mgs sinα mv mv 2 mg sinα

A B C D
Fv Fs 2Fs F
17 Atmospheric pressure at sea level has a value of 100 kPa.

The density of sea water is 1020 kg m–3.
At what depth in the sea would the total pressure be 110 kPa?
A 1.0 m B 9.8 m C 10 m D 11 m
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

13
18 When ice melts, it contracts.
Which row is correct for ice turning into water?
distance between
density
atoms
19 In stress-strain experiments on metal wires, the stress axis is often marked in units of 108 Pa and
the strain axis is marked as a percentage. This is shown for a particular wire in the diagram.
3
stress / 108 Pa
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
strain / %
What is the value of the Young modulus for the material of the wire?
A 6.0 × 107 Pa B 7.5 × 108 Pa C 1.5 × 109 Pa D 6.0 × 109 Pa
Space for working

14
20 A spring is compressed by a force. The graph shows the compressing force F plotted against the
length L of the spring.
12
F/N
10
8
6
4
2
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
L / mm
What is the spring constant of this spring?
A 0.2 N m–1 B 5 N m–1 C 100 N m–1 D 200 N m–1
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

15
21 Which graph represents the force-extension relationship of a rubber band that is stretched almost
to its breaking point?
A B
force force
0 0
0 extension 0 extension
C D
force force
0 0
22 Electromagnetic waves from an unknown source in space were found to be significantly diffracted
when passing through gaps of the order of 10–5 m.
Which type of wave are they most likely to be?
A radio waves
B microwaves
C infra-red waves
D ultraviolet waves
Space for working

16
23 Using monochromatic light, interference fringes are produced on a screen placed a distance D
from a pair of slits of separation a. The separation of the fringes is x.
Both a and D are now doubled.
What is the new fringe separation?
A x B x C 2x D 4x
2
24 Diagram 1 shows a ripple tank experiment in which plane waves are diffracted through a narrow
slit in a metal sheet.
Diagram 2 shows the same tank with a slit of greater width.
In each case, the pattern of the waves incident on the slit and the emergent pattern are shown.
vibrating vibrating
bar bar
diagram 1 diagram 2
Which action would cause the waves in diagram 1 to be diffracted less and so produce an
emergent pattern closer to that shown in diagram 2?
A increasing the frequency of vibration of the bar

B increasing the speed of the waves by making the water in the tank deeper
C reducing the amplitude of vibration of the bar
D reducing the length of the vibrating bar
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

17
25 The diagram shows a steel wire clamped at one end and tensioned at the other by a weight hung
over a pulley.
weight
fixed stand vibration fixed support

generator
A vibration generator is attached to the wire near the clamped end. A stationary wave with one
loop is produced. The frequency of the vibration generator is f.
Which frequency should be used to produce a stationary wave with two loops?
A f B f C 2f D 4f
4 2
26 Which row describes the circumstances under which forces act on a charged particle in a uniform
electric field?
charged particle direction of force
A moving charges only parallel to the field

B stationary charges only perpendicular to the field
C stationary and moving charges parallel to the field
D stationary and moving charges perpendicular to the field
Space for working

18
27 The diagram shows two points P and Q which lie, 90° apart, on a circle of radius r.
A positive point charge at the centre of the circle creates an electric field of magnitude E at both P
and Q.
+
Q
r
Which expression gives the work done in moving a unit positive charge from P to Q?
 πr 
A 0 B E×r C E×   D E × (πr )
 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

19
28 Two oppositely-charged parallel plates are arranged as shown.
_ +
An electron is released from rest from the surface of the negatively-charged plate.
The electron travels from the negatively-charged plate towards the positively-charged plate.
Which graph shows how the force F on the electron varies with its distance x from the negative
plate?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
Space for working

20
29 In the diagram, the shaded area represents a uniform electric field directed away from the
observer (at right-angles into the plane of the paper).
electron beam
A horizontal beam of electrons enters the field, travelling from left to right.
In which direction is this beam deflected by the field?
A upwards (in the plane of the paper)

B downwards (in the plane of the paper)
C away from the observer
D towards the observer
30 In terms of energy transfer W and charge q, what are the definitions of potential difference (p.d.)
and electromotive force (e.m.f.)?
p.d. e.m.f.
W W
A
q q
W
B Wq
q
W
C Wq
q
D Wq Wq
31 What is the unit of resistivity?
A Ω m–2 B Ω m–1 C Ω D Ωm
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

21
32 The resistance of a thermistor depends on its temperature, and the resistance of a

light-dependent resistor (LDR) depends on the illumination.
Under which conditions will the resistance of both a thermistor and an LDR be highest?
thermistor LDR
A highest temperature highest illumination

B highest temperature lowest illumination
C lowest temperature highest illumination
D lowest temperature lowest illumination
33 The resistors P, Q and R in the circuit have equal resistance.
Q R
The battery, of negligible internal resistance, supplies a total power of 12 W.
What is the power dissipated by heating in resistor R?
A 2W B 3W C 4W D 6W
Space for working

22
34 In deriving a formula for the combined resistance of three different resistors in series, Kirchhoff’s
laws are used.
Which physics principle is involved in this derivation?
A the conservation of charge

B the direction of the flow of charge is from negative to positive
C the potential difference across each resistor is the same
D the current varies in each resistor, in proportion to the resistor value
35 A source of e.m.f. of 9.0 mV has an internal resistance of 6.0 Ω.
It is connected across a galvanometer of resistance 30 Ω.
What will be the current in the galvanometer?
A 250 µA B 300 µA C 1.5 mA D 2.5 mA
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

23
36 In each arrangement of resistors, the ammeter has a resistance of 2 Ω.
Which arrangement gives the largest reading on the ammeter when the same potential difference
is applied between points P and Q?
A B
1Ω
1Ω 2Ω
A A
P Q P Q
2Ω
C D
1Ω
1Ω
A A
P Q P Q
2Ω 2Ω
37 What are the correct descriptions of a γ-ray and a β-particle?
γ-ray β-particle
A high-speed electron electromagnetic radiation

B electromagnetic radiation helium-4 nucleus
C electromagnetic radiation high-speed electron
D high-speed electron helium-4 nucleus
Space for working

24
38 The grid shows a number of nuclides arranged according to the number of protons and the
number of neutrons in each.
A nucleus of the nuclide 83 Li decays by emitting a β-particle.
What is the resulting nuclide?
number of
protons 4 A B
6 7 8
3 3 Li 3 Li 3 Li
3 4
2 2 He 2 He C D
1 2
1 1H 1H
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
number of neutrons
39 What is not conserved in nuclear processes?
A charge
B momentum
C the total number of neutrons
D the total number of nucleons
β-particle.
217 α α β
85 At V W X

213 215 209 217
A 85 At B 77 Ir C 82 Pb D 81 Tl
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/11/M/J/10

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*6110680828*

IB10 06_9702_12/RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v2 = u2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
15 20
10 15
0 5 0 10
diagram 1 diagram 2
A 1.90 mm B 2.45 mm C 2.59 mm D 2.73 mm
A kg m A–1 s–3.
B m2 A–1 s–2.
C kg m2 s–2.
D kg m2 A–1 s–3.
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

5

Space for working

6
1 cm
1 cm
A 70 Hz B 140 Hz C 280 Hz D 1400 Hz
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

7
Y
X
X Y
A increase increase
B increase decrease
C decrease increase
D decrease decrease
A energy.
B force.
C force .
area
D force .
length
Space for working

8
A B C D
h h h h
0 0 0 0
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
16
velocity 14
/ m s–1
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
time / s
A 0.67 m s–2 B 1.0 m s–2 C 1.3 m s–2 D 2.0 m s–2
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

9
X Y
What happens?
X Y
1 1
1 1
60 cm s–1 40 cm s–1
Space for working

10
vary.
A 0
B between 0 and 2 N
C 2N

Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

11
4N
10 N
A 0.3 m s–2 B 0.8 m s–2 C 3.0 m s–2 D 8.0 m s–2

A B C D
Fv Fs 2Fs F
Space for working

12
A 5.0 kW B 5.5 kW C 20 kW D 22 kW
distance between
density
atoms
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

13

A 1.0 m B 9.8 m C 10 m D 11 m
12
F/N
10
8
6
4
2
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
L / mm
A 0.2 N m–1 B 5 N m–1 C 100 N m–1 D 200 N m–1
Space for working

14
A B
force force
0 0
C D
force force
0 0
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

15
3
stress / 108 Pa
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
strain / %
A 6.0 × 107 Pa B 7.5 × 108 Pa C 1.5 × 109 Pa D 6.0 × 109 Pa
over a pulley.
weight

generator
A f B f C 2f D 4f
4 2
Space for working

16
vibrating vibrating
bar bar
diagram 1 diagram 2

A radio waves
B microwaves
C infra-red waves
D ultraviolet waves
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

17
A x B x C 2x D 4x
2
_ +
plate?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
Space for working

18
electron beam

Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

19
and Q.
+
Q
r
 πr 
A 0 B E×r C E×   D E × (πr )
 2
Space for working

20
electric field?


thermistor LDR

p.d. e.m.f.
W W
A
q q
W
B Wq
q
W
C Wq
q
D Wq Wq
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

21
A B
1Ω
1Ω 2Ω
A A
P Q P Q
2Ω
C D
1Ω
1Ω
A A
P Q P Q
2Ω 2Ω
A 250 µA B 300 µA C 1.5 mA D 2.5 mA
Space for working

22
Q R
A 2W B 3W C 4W D 6W
laws are used.

Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

23
number of
protons 4 A B
6 7 8
3 3 Li 3 Li 3 Li
3 4
2 2 He 2 He C D
1 2
1 1H 1H
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
number of neutrons
Space for working

24
β-particle.
217 α α β
85 At V W X

213 215 209 217
A 85 At B 77 Ir C 82 Pb D 81 Tl
γ-ray β-particle

A charge
B momentum
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/12/M/J/10

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*6578157725*

IB10 06_9702_13/RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v2 = u2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
A energy.
B force.
C force .
area
D force .
length
Y
X
X Y
A increase increase
B increase decrease
C decrease increase
D decrease decrease
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

5
1 cm
1 cm
A 70 Hz B 140 Hz C 280 Hz D 1400 Hz
Space for working

6
15 20
10 15
0 5 0 10
diagram 1 diagram 2
A 1.90 mm B 2.45 mm C 2.59 mm D 2.73 mm
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

7
A kg m A–1 s–3.
B m2 A–1 s–2.
C kg m2 s–2.
D kg m2 A–1 s–3.

Space for working

8
4N
10 N
A 0.3 m s–2 B 0.8 m s–2 C 3.0 m s–2 D 8.0 m s–2
X Y
What happens?
X Y
1 1
1 1
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

9

vary.
A 0
B between 0 and 2 N
C 2N
Space for working

10
60 cm s–1 40 cm s–1
A B C D
h h h h
0 0 0 0
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

11
16
velocity 14
/ m s–1
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
time / s
A 0.67 m s–2 B 1.0 m s–2 C 1.3 m s–2 D 2.0 m s–2

A 1.0 m B 9.8 m C 10 m D 11 m
Space for working

12
distance between
density
atoms

A B C D
Fv Fs 2Fs F
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

13
A 5.0 kW B 5.5 kW C 20 kW D 22 kW
A B
force force
0 0
C D
force force
0 0
Space for working

14
3
stress / 108 Pa
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
strain / %
A 6.0 × 107 Pa B 7.5 × 108 Pa C 1.5 × 109 Pa D 6.0 × 109 Pa
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

15
12
F/N
10
8
6
4
2
0
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
L / mm
A 0.2 N m–1 B 5 N m–1 C 100 N m–1 D 200 N m–1
A x B x C 2x D 4x
2
Space for working

16
A radio waves
B microwaves
C infra-red waves
D ultraviolet waves
over a pulley.
weight

generator
A f B f C 2f D 4f
4 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

17
vibrating vibrating
bar bar
diagram 1 diagram 2

Space for working

18
electron beam

Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

19
_ +
plate?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
Space for working

20
electric field?

and Q.
+
Q
r
 πr 
A 0 B E×r C E×   D E × (πr )
 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

21
A 250 µA B 300 µA C 1.5 mA D 2.5 mA
p.d. e.m.f.
W W
A
q q
W
B Wq
q
W
C Wq
q
D Wq Wq

thermistor LDR

Space for working

22
A B
1Ω
1Ω 2Ω
A A
P Q P Q
2Ω
C D
1Ω
1Ω
A A
P Q P Q
2Ω 2Ω
Q R
A 2W B 3W C 4W D 6W
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

23
laws are used.

A charge
B momentum
γ-ray β-particle

Space for working

24
β-particle.
217 α α β
85 At V W X

213 215 209 217
A 85 At B 77 Ir C 82 Pb D 81 Tl
number of
protons 4 A B
6 7 8
3 3 Li 3 Li 3 Li
3 4
2 2 He 2 He C D
1 2
1 1H 1H
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
number of neutrons
Space for working
© UCLES 2010 9702/13/M/J/10

*2059499789*
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour

part question.
1
Total
DC (CW/CGW) 15339/5
2
Data
permeability of free space, μ0 = 4π × 10 –7 H m–1
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

5

Examiner’s
Use
1 A unit is often expressed with a prefix. For example, the gram may be written with the prefix
‘kilo’ as the kilogram. The prefix represents a power-of-ten. In this case, the power-of-ten
is 103.
Complete Fig. 1.1 to show each prefix with its symbol and power-of-ten.
prefix symbol power-of-ten

kilo k 103
nano n .............................
centi ....................... 10–2
................................ M 106
................................ T 1012
Fig. 1.1
[4]

6
2 (a) Complete Fig. 2.1 to show whether each of the quantities listed is a vector or a scalar. For
Examiner’s
Use
vector / scalar
distance moved ................................
speed ................................
acceleration ................................
Fig. 2.1
[3]
(b) A ball falls vertically in air from rest. The variation with time t of the distance d moved by
the ball is shown in Fig. 2.2.
d /m
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
t /s
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

7
(i) By reference to Fig. 2.2, explain how it can be deduced that For
Examiner’s
1. the ball is initially at rest, Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. air resistance is not negligible.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 2.2 to determine the speed of the ball at a time of 0.40 s after it has been
released.
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [2]
(iii) On Fig. 2.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the distance d moved
by the ball for negligible air resistance. You are not expected to carry out any further
calculations. [3]

8
3 (a) The variation with extension x of the tension F in a spring is shown in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
200
F /N
150
100
50
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
x /cm
Fig. 3.1
Use Fig. 3.1 to calculate the energy stored in the spring for an extension of 4.0 cm.
energy = .............................................. J [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

9
(b) The spring in (a) is used to join together two frictionless trolleys A and B of mass M1 and For
M2 respectively, as shown in Fig. 3.2. Examiner’s
Use
spring
trolley A trolley B
mass M1 mass M2
Fig. 3.2
The trolleys rest on a horizontal surface and are held apart so that the spring is
extended.
The trolleys are then released.
(i) Explain why, as the extension of the spring is reduced, the momentum of trolley A
is equal in magnitude but opposite in direction to the momentum of trolley B.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) At the instant when the extension of the spring is zero, trolley A has speed V1 and
trolley B has speed V2.
Write down
1. an equation, based on momentum, to relate V1 and V2,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. an equation to relate the initial energy E stored in the spring to the final
energies of the trolleys.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

10
(iii) 1. Show that the kinetic energy EK of an object of mass m is related to its For
momentum p by the expression Examiner’s
Use
p2
EK = .
2m
[1]
2. Trolley A has a larger mass than trolley B.

Use your answer in (ii) part 1 to deduce which trolley, A or B, has the larger
kinetic energy at the instant when the extension of the spring is zero.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

11
4 (a) State what is meant by the diffraction of a wave. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A laser produces a narrow beam of coherent light of wavelength 632 nm. The beam is
incident normally on a diffraction grating, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
diffraction
grating X
laser light
P 76 cm
wavelength 632 nm
165 cm screen
Fig. 4.1
Spots of light are observed on a screen placed parallel to the grating. The distance
between the grating and the screen is 165 cm.
The brightest spot is P. The spots formed closest to P and on each side of P are X
and Y.
X and Y are separated by a distance of 76 cm.
Calculate the number of lines per metre on the grating.
number per metre = ................................................. [4]

12
(c) The grating in (b) is now rotated about an axis parallel to the incident laser beam, as For
shown in Fig. 4.2. Examiner’s
Use
diffraction diffraction
grating grating
laser laser
light light
before rotation after rotation
Fig. 4.2
State what effect, if any, this rotation will have on the positions of the spots P, X and Y.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) In another experiment using the apparatus in (b), a student notices that the distances
XP and PY, as shown in Fig. 4.1, are not equal.
Suggest a reason for this difference.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

13
5 (a) State what is meant by an electric field. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The electric field between an earthed metal plate and two charged metal spheres is
earthed
metal plate
charged charged
sphere sphere
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, label each sphere with (+) or (–) to show its charge. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, mark a region where the magnitude of the electric field is
1. constant (label this region C), [1]
2. decreasing (label this region D). [1]

14
(c) A molecule has its centre P of positive charge situated a distance of 2.8 × 10–10 m from For
its centre N of negative charge, as illustrated in Fig. 5.2. Examiner’s
Use
2.8 × 10–10 m
P
applied
electric field
30° 5.0 × 104 V m–1
N
molecule
Fig. 5.2
The molecule is situated in a uniform electric field of field strength 5.0 × 104 V m–1. The
axis NP of the molecule is at an angle of 30° to this uniform applied electric field.
The magnitude of the charge at P and at N is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
(i) On Fig. 5.2, draw an arrow at P and an arrow at N to show the directions of the
forces due to the applied electric field at each of these points. [1]
(ii) Calculate the torque on the molecule produced by the forces in (i).
torque = ......................................... N m [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

15
6 An electric heater is to be made from nichrome wire. Nichrome has a resistivity of For
1.0 × 10–6 Ω m at the operating temperature of the heater. Examiner’s
The heater is to have a power dissipation of 60 W when the potential difference across its Use
terminals is 12 V.
(a) For the heater operating at its designed power,
(i) calculate the current,
current = .............................................. A [2]
(ii) show that the resistance of the nichrome wire is 2.4 Ω.
[2]
(b) Calculate the length of nichrome wire of diameter 0.80 mm required for the heater.
length = ............................................. m [3]

16
(c) A second heater, also designed to operate from a 12 V supply, is constructed using the For
same nichrome wire but using half the length of that calculated in (b). Examiner’s
Explain quantitatively the effect of this change in length of wire on the power of the Use
heater.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

17
7 One of the isotopes of uranium is uranium-238 ( 238

92
U). For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) State what is meant by isotopes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) For a nucleus of uranium-238, state
(i) the number of protons,
number = ................................................. [1]
(ii) the number of neutrons.
number = ................................................. [1]
(c) A uranium-238 nucleus has a radius of 8.9 × 10–15 m.
Calculate, for a uranium-238 nucleus,
(i) its mass,
mass = ............................................ kg [2]
(ii) its mean density.
density = ...................................... kg m–3 [2]

18
(d) The density of a lump of uranium is 1.9 × 104 kg m–3. For

Using your answer to (c)(ii), suggest what can be inferred about the structure of the Examiner’s
atom. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/21/M/J/10

*5961585709*
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

part question.
1
Total
DC (LEO/DJ) 17382/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4π0r

t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

5

Examiner’s
Use
1 A metal wire has a cross-section of diameter approximately 0.8 mm.
(a) State what instrument should be used to measure the diameter of the wire.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State how the instrument in (a) is
(i) checked so as to avoid a systematic error in the measurements,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) used so as to reduce random errors.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

6
2 (a) The distance s moved by an object in time t may be given by the expression For
Examiner’s
s = 1 at 2 Use
2
where a is the acceleration of the object.
State two conditions for this expression to apply to the motion of the object.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A student takes a photograph of a steel ball of radius 5.0 cm as it falls from rest. The
image of the ball is blurred, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
The image is blurred because the ball is moving while the photograph is being taken.
initial position
of ball in photograph 80
cm
final position 90
of ball in photograph cm
100
cm
Fig. 2.1
The scale shows the distance fallen from rest by the ball. At time t = 0, the top of the ball
is level with the zero mark on the scale. Air resistance is negligible.
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

7
Calculate, to an appropriate number of significant figures, For

Examiner’s
(i) the time the ball falls before the photograph is taken, Use
time = ............................................ s [3]
(ii) the time interval during which the photograph is taken.
time interval = ............................................. s [3]
(c) The student in (b) takes a second photograph starting at the same position on the scale.
The ball has the same radius but is less dense, so that air resistance is not negligible.
State and explain the changes that will occur in the photograph.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
3 (a) (i) Define force. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State Newton’s third law of motion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Two spheres approach one another along a line joining their centres, as illustrated in
Fig. 3.1.
sphere sphere
A B
Fig. 3.1
When they collide, the average force acting on sphere A is FA and the average force
acting on sphere B is FB.
The forces act for time tA on sphere A and time tB on sphere B.
(i) State the relationship between
1. FA and FB,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. tA and tB.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use your answers in (i) to show that the change in momentum of sphere A is equal
in magnitude and opposite in direction to the change in momentum of sphere B.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

9
(c) For the spheres in (b), the variation with time of the momentum of sphere A before, For
during and after the collision with sphere B is shown in Fig. 3.2. Examiner’s
Use
15
momentum
to right / N s
10
sphere A
5
0
time
sphere B
–-5
5
-10
–10
-15
–15
Fig. 3.2
The momentum of sphere B before the collision is also shown on Fig. 3.2.
Complete Fig. 3.2 to show the variation with time of the momentum of sphere B during
and after the collision with sphere A. [3]

10
4 (a) State two features of a stationary wave that distinguish it from a progressive wave. For
Examiner’s
1. ...................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A long tube is open at one end. It is closed at the other end by means of a piston that
can be moved along the tube, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
tube
piston
loudspeaker
L
Fig. 4.1
A loudspeaker producing sound of frequency 550 Hz is held near the open end of the
tube.
The piston is moved along the tube and a loud sound is heard when the distance L
between the piston and the open end of the tube is 45 cm.
The speed of sound in the tube is 330 m s–1.
(i) Show that the wavelength of the sound in the tube is 60 cm.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 4.1, mark all the positions along the tube of
1. the displacement nodes (label these with the letter N),
2. the displacement antinodes (label these with the letter A).

[3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

11
(c) The frequency of the sound produced by the loudspeaker in (b) is gradually reduced. For
Examiner’s
Determine the lowest frequency at which a loud sound will be produced in the tube of Use
length L = 45 cm.
frequency = .......................................... Hz [3]

12
5 (a) Tensile forces are applied to opposite ends of a copper rod so that the rod is stretched. For
The variation with stress of the strain of the rod is shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
2.5
stress / 108 Pa
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
strain / 10–3
Fig. 5.1
(i) Use Fig. 5.1 to determine the Young modulus of copper.
Young modulus = .......................................... Pa [3]
(ii) On Fig. 5.1, sketch a line to show the variation with stress of the strain of the rod as
the stress is reduced from 2.5 × 106 Pa to zero. No further calculations are expected.
[1]
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

13
(b) The walls of the tyres on a car are made of a rubber compound. For
The variation with stress of the strain of a specimen of this rubber compound is shown Examiner’s
in Fig. 5.2. Use
stress
0
0 strain
Fig. 5.2
As the car moves, the walls of the tyres bend and straighten continuously.
Use Fig. 5.2 to explain why the walls of the tyres become warm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

14
6 (a) A metal wire of constant resistance is used in an electric heater. For

In order not to overload the circuit for the heater, the supply voltage to the heater is Examiner’s
reduced from 230 V to 220 V. Use
Determine the percentage reduction in the power output of the heater.
reduction = ............................................ % [2]
(b) A uniform wire AB of length 100 cm is connected between the terminals of a cell of
e.m.f. 1.5 V and negligible internal resistance, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
1.5 V
100 cm
C
A B
L
5.0 Ω
A
Fig. 6.1
An ammeter of internal resistance 5.0 Ω is connected to end A of the wire and to a

contact C that can be moved along the wire.
Determine the reading on the ammeter for the contact C placed
(i) at A,
reading = ............................................. A [1]

© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10
15
(ii) at B. For
Examiner’s
Use
reading = ............................................ A [1]
(c) Using the circuit in (b), the ammeter reading I is recorded for different distances L of the
contact C from end A of the wire. Some data points are shown on Fig. 6.2.
0.4
I/A
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
L / cm
Fig. 6.2
(i) Use your answers in (b) to plot data points on Fig. 6.2 corresponding to the
contact C placed at end A and at end B of the wire. [1]
(ii) Draw a line of best fit for all of the data points and hence determine the ammeter
reading for contact C placed at the midpoint of the wire.
reading = .............................................. A [1]

16
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) to calculate the potential difference between A and the For
contact C for the contact placed at the midpoint of AB. Examiner’s
Use
potential difference = .............................................. V [2]
(d) Explain why, although the contact C is at the midpoint of wire AB, the answer in (c)(iii) is
not numerically equal to one half of the e.m.f. of the cell.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

17
7 (a) The radioactive decay of some nuclei gives rise to the emission of α-particles. For
State Examiner’s
Use
(i) what is meant by an α-particle,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) two properties of α-particles.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) One possible nuclear reaction involves the bombardment of a stationary nitrogen-14
nucleus by an α-particle to form oxygen-17 and another particle.
(i) Complete the nuclear equation for this reaction.
14 ...... 17
7
N + α 8
O + ................. [2]
......
(ii) The total mass-energy of the nitrogen-14 nucleus and the α-particle is less than
that of the particles resulting from the reaction. This mass-energy difference
is 1.1 MeV.
1. Suggest how it is possible for mass-energy to be conserved in this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................... [1]
2. Calculate the speed of an α-particle having kinetic energy of 1.1 MeV.
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/22/M/J/10

*7976032303*
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour

part question.
1
Total
DC (KN/DJ) 17380/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± (x02 – x 2)
Q
4π0r

t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

5

Examiner’s
Use
1 A digital voltmeter with a three-digit display is used to measure the potential difference across
a resistor. The manufacturers of the meter state that its accuracy is ±1% and ±1 digit.
The reading on the voltmeter is 2.05 V.
(a) For this reading, calculate, to the nearest digit,
(i) a change of 1% in the voltmeter reading,
change = ..............................................V [1]
(ii) the maximum possible value of the potential difference across the resistor.
maximum value = ..............................................V [1]
(b) The reading on the voltmeter has high precision. State and explain why the reading may
not be accurate.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

6
2 (a) State the two conditions that must be satisfied for a body to be in equilibrium. For
Examiner’s
1. ...................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Three co-planar forces act on a body that is in equilibrium.
(i) Describe how to draw a vector triangle to represent these forces.
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
....................................................................... [3]
(ii) State how the triangle confirms that the forces are in equilibrium.
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

7
(c) A weight of 7.0 N hangs vertically by two strings AB and AC, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
T1
35° T2
50°
7.0 N
Fig. 2.1
For the weight to be in equilibrium, the tension in string AB is T1 and in string AC it

is T2.
On Fig. 2.1, draw a vector triangle to determine the magnitudes of T1 and T2.
T1 = ................................................... N
T2 = ................................................... N
[3]
(d) By reference to Fig. 2.1, suggest why the weight could not be supported with the strings
AB and AC both horizontal.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

8
3 A cyclist is moving up a slope that has a constant gradient. The cyclist takes 8.0 s to climb For
the slope. Examiner’s
The variation with time t of the speed v of the cyclist is shown in Fig. 3.1. Use
v / m s–1
0
0 2 4 6 8
t/s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Use Fig. 3.1 to determine the total distance moved up the slope.
distance = ............................................. m [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

9
(b) The bicycle and cyclist have a combined mass of 92 kg. For
The vertical height through which the cyclist moves is 1.3 m. Examiner’s
Use
(i) For the movement of the bicycle and cyclist between t = 0 and t = 8.0 s,
1. use Fig. 3.1 to calculate the change in kinetic energy,
change = .............................................. J [2]
2. calculate the change in gravitational potential energy.
change = .............................................. J [2]
(ii) The cyclist pedals continuously so that the useful power delivered to the bicycle
is 75 W.
Calculate the useful work done by the cyclist climbing up the slope.
work done = .............................................. J [2]

10
(c) Some energy is used in overcoming frictional forces. For

Examiner’s
(i) Use your answers in (b) to show that the total energy converted in overcoming Use
frictional forces is approximately 670 J.
[1]
(ii) Determine the average magnitude of the frictional forces.
average force = ..............................................N [1]
(d) Suggest why the magnitude of the total resistive force would not be constant.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

11
4 (a) State the evidence for the assumption that For

Examiner’s
(i) there are significant forces of attraction between molecules in the solid state, Use
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the forces of attraction between molecules in a gas are negligible.
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain, on the basis of the kinetic model of gases, the pressure exerted by a gas.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) Liquid nitrogen has a density of 810 kg m–3. The density of nitrogen gas at room
temperature and pressure is approximately 1.2 kg m–3.
Suggest how these densities relate to the spacing of nitrogen molecules in the liquid
and in the gaseous states.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]

12
5 (a) A source of sound has frequency f. Sound of wavelength λ is produced by the source. For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) State
1. what is meant by the frequency of the source,
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
2. the distance moved, in terms of λ, by a wavefront during n oscillations of the

source.
distance = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Use your answers in (i) to deduce an expression for the speed v of the wave in
terms of f and λ.
[2]
(b) The waveform of a sound wave produced on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope
(c.r.o.) is shown in Fig. 5.1.
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 5.1
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

13
The time-base setting of the c.r.o. is 2.0 ms cm–1. For

Examiner’s
(i) Determine the frequency of the sound wave. Use
frequency = ............................................Hz [2]
(ii) A second sound wave has the same frequency as that calculated in (i). The
amplitude of the two waves is the same but the phase difference between them
is 90°.
On Fig. 5.1, draw the waveform of this second wave. [1]

14
6 (a) (i) State what is meant by an electric current. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Define electric potential difference.
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The variation with potential difference V of the current I in a component Y and in a
resistor R are shown in Fig. 6.1.
0.7
I/A
0.6
component Y
0.5
resistor R
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
V/V
Fig. 6.1
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

15
Use Fig. 6.1 to explain how it can be deduced that resistor R has a constant resistance For
of 20 Ω. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The component Y and the resistor R in (b) are connected in parallel as shown in
Fig. 6.2.
E Y R 20 Ω
Fig. 6.2
A battery of e.m.f. E and negligible internal resistance is connected across the parallel
combination.
Use data from Fig. 6.1 to determine
(i) the current in the battery for an e.m.f. E of 6.0 V,
current = ..............................................A [1]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit for an e.m.f. of 8.0 V.
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]

16
(d) The circuit of Fig. 6.2 is now re-arranged as shown in Fig. 6.3. For
Examiner’s
Use
Y R
Fig. 6.3
The current in the circuit is 0.20 A.
(i) Use Fig. 6.1 to determine the e.m.f. E of the battery.
E = ..............................................V [1]
(ii) Calculate the total power dissipated in component Y and resistor R.
power = .............................................W [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

17
7 One property of α-particles is that they produce a high density of ionisation of air at For
atmospheric pressure. In this ionisation process, a neutral atom becomes an ion pair. The Examiner’s
ion pair is a positively-charged particle and an electron. Use
(a) State
(i) what is meant by an α-particle,
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) an approximate value for the range of α-particles in air at atmospheric pressure.
range = ........................................... cm [1]
(b) The energy required to produce an ion pair in air at atmospheric pressure is 31 eV.
An α-particle has an initial kinetic energy of 8.5 × 10–13 J.
(i) Show that 8.5 × 10–13 J is equivalent to 5.3 MeV.
[1]
(ii) Calculate, to two significant figures, the number of ion pairs produced as the
α-particle is stopped in air at atmospheric pressure.
number = .................................................. [2]

18
(iii) Using your answer in (a)(ii), estimate the average number of ion pairs produced For
per unit length of the track of the α-particle as it is brought to rest in air. Examiner’s
Use
number per unit length = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/23/M/J/10

*2231879907*
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours

presentation of the records so that it is not necessary to make a fair copy of them.
Total
DC (LEO/CGW) 15331/5
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

3

For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will measure the potential difference (p.d.) across a set of resistors in
series and the current through the resistors.
(a) Measure and record the e.m.f. of the power supply.
e.m.f. = ................................................. V
(b) (i) Connect the circuit of Fig. 1.1, ensuring that the movable lead is connected between
resistors 1 and 2.
V
movable lead
P 1 2 3 etc
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Close the switch and record the voltmeter reading V and the ammeter reading Ι.
After recording your results, open the switch.
V = .................................................. V
Ι = .................................................. A
(iii) Using your answer to (b)(ii), calculate the total resistance R of resistor P in
series with resistor 1.
(R = V )
Ι
R = ...................................................Ω

4
(c) By adjusting the movable lead, the resistor P may be connected in series with a
For
number N of other resistors, giving different values of the total resistance R. Examiner’s
In (b), N = 1. Use
Repeat (b)(ii), for different values of N, until you have six sets of readings for N, V
and Ι.
1
Include values of in your table of results.
R
1
(d) (i) Plot a graph of Ι on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
R
(iii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of the line of best fit.
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) The quantities Ι and R are related by the equation

For
Examiner’s
M
Ι= +L Use
R
where M and L are constants.
Using your answers from (d)(iii), determine values for M and L. You should include units
where appropriate.
M = ......................................................
L = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

7

For
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the time of swing of a tube depends on its
length.
(a) You are provided with two tubes and a string that has a loop at each end.
(i) Pass the string through the shorter tube, as shown in Fig. 2.1a. Pass one loop
through the other loop, as shown in Fig. 2.1b, to secure the tube in place, as shown
in Fig. 2.1c.
Fig. 2.1a
Fig. 2.1b
Fig. 2.1c
(ii) Hang the string from the clamp, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2

8
(b) Displace the tube, as shown in Fig. 2.3.

For
Release the tube. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.3
The time the tube takes to return to the release position for the first time is the time
period T. This may be determined accurately by measuring the time taken for the tube to
complete several swings, backwards and forwards.
Showing all your working, determine an accurate value for the time period T.
T = ................................................... s
(c) (i) Using the vernier calipers, measure the length l of the shorter tube, as shown in
Fig. 2.3.
l = .....................................................
(ii) Explain how you have made this measurement as accurate as possible.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in this measurement of l. Show all your
working.
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

9
(d) (i) Pass the string through the longer tube so that it rests above the shorter tube, as
For
Use
total length
l
Fig. 2.4
(ii) Repeat (b) to determine the new value of T.
new value of T = .....................................................
(iii) Measure the length of the longer tube.
length of the longer tube = .....................................................
(iv) Use your answers to (c)(i) and (d)(iii) to determine the new value of l (the total
length of the two tubes), as shown in Fig. 2.4.
new value of l = .................................................cm
(e) It is suggested that T and l are related by the equation
T2 = k l
where k is a constant. By calculating values of k, explain whether your results support

this relationship.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
10
(f) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure in this
For
experiment. Examiner’s
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe four improvements that could be made to this experiment. You may
suggest the use of other apparatus or different procedures.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/31/M/J/10

*3823421500*
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours

Total
DC (KN/CGW) 15325/5
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

3
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment, you will measure the current through a set of resistors. Use
(a) (i) Connect the circuit of Fig. 1.1, ensuring that the movable lead is connected between
resistors 1 and 2.
Z 1 2 3
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Close the switch and record the ammeter reading I. Open the switch after recording
your measurement.
I = ................................................... A

4
(b) By adjusting the movable lead, the resistor Z may be connected in series with a For
number N of other resistors. Each of the resistors labelled 1 to 12 has a resistance Examiner’s
of 22 Ω. Use
Repeat (a)(ii) for different values of N until you have six sets of readings for N and I.
1
Include in your table of results values of – and the total resistance R of the 22 Ω resistors
I
connected into the circuit.
(The total resistance R of the 22 Ω resistors in series can be determined using the
formula R = R1 + R2 + R3 + ................ )
(c) (i) Plot a graph of R on the y-axis against 1

– on the x-axis.
I
(iii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of the line of best fit.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(d) The quantities R and I are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
G +H
R = –– Use
I
where G and H are constants.
Use your answers to (c)(iii) to determine values for G and H. You should include units
where appropriate.
G = ......................................................
H = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

7
Examiner’s
2 In this question, you will investigate how the attractive force between two magnets depends Use
on their separation.
(a) You are provided with a pair of magnets, one of which is fixed to the bench. You are also
provided with some microscope slides, adhesive tape, a loop of cotton and a newton
meter. You also have access to a micrometer screw gauge.
(i) Place the loop of cotton around the magnet that is not fixed, as shown in Fig. 2.1,
and use the adhesive tape to secure the cotton to the sides.
loop of cotton
adhesive tape
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Place the magnet with the loop of cotton end-to-end with the fixed magnet, so that
they are attracting, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
fixed magnet
Fig. 2.2

8
(b) (i) Using the newton meter, measure the maximum force F required to pull the magnets For
apart, as shown in Fig. 2.3. Examiner’s
Use
fixed magnet newton meter

Fig. 2.3
F = ................................................... N
(ii) Explain why it is difficult to determine this force accurately.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in the maximum force required to separate the
attracting magnets. Show all your working.
percentage uncertainty = ......................................................
(c) (i) Using the micrometer screw gauge, measure the total thickness t of three of the
microscope slides, as shown in Fig. 2.4.
Fig. 2.4
t = ............................................... mm
(ii) Explain how you have made this measurement as accurate as possible.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

9
(iii) Place the three slides between the two attracting magnets, as shown in Fig. 2.5. Use For
the newton meter to find the maximum force F needed to separate the magnets. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 2.5
F = ......................................................
(d) Repeat (c)(i) and (c)(iii) for a single slide placed between the attracting magnets.
t = ................................................ mm
F = ......................................................
(e) It is suggested that F and t are related by the equation

k
F = ––
t
By calculating values of k, explain whether your results support this relationship.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................

10
(f) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure in this For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/32/M/J/10

*3165965497*
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours

Total
DC (CW/SW) 24452/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10

3

For
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the current through a semiconductor diode Use
depends on the voltage across it.
(a) Assemble the circuit of Fig. 1.1.

Make sure that the diode is connected the correct way round.
220 Ω
A B
Fig. 1.1
(b) Set the power supply voltage to 12 V and close the switch.
Record the voltmeter reading V and the ammeter reading I.
You should find that I is at least 0.02 A.
V = .....................................................
I = .....................................................

4
(c) Reduce the power supply voltage, recording V and I until you have six sets of readings.
For
Examiner’s
Open the switch when you have finished your measurements. Use
Include in your table of results the values of V 10.

(V 10 = V x V x V x V x V x V x V x V x V x V )
(d) (i) Plot a graph of I on the y-axis against V 10 on the x-axis.
(ii) Draw the straight line of best fit.
(iii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of this line.
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between I and V is

For
Examiner’s
I = aV 10 + b Use
where a and b are constants.
Using your answers from (d)(iii), determine the values of a and b.

Give appropriate units.
a = ......................................................
b = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10

7
BLANK PAGE
Please turn over for Question 2.

8

For
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the speed of a glass ball falling through oil Use
depends on its size.
The apparatus has been set out for you as shown in Fig. 2.1.
oil
marks
glass balls
Fig. 2.1
(a) Measure and record the distance x between the upper and lower marks on the measuring
cylinder.
x = .....................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10

9
(b) (i) You have been provided with two different sizes of glass ball: large and small. Take
For
measurements to determine the diameter d of the small glass balls. Examiner’s
Use
d = .............................................. mm
(ii) Take measurements to determine the time t for a small glass ball to fall distance x
through the oil.
Do not remove any balls from the oil. You may ask for more glass balls if needed.
t = ................................................... s
(c) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of t.
(d) Calculate the speed v of a small glass ball falling distance x through the oil.
x
(v = )
t
v = .....................................................

10
(e) Repeat (b) and (d) for the large glass balls.
For
Examiner’s
Use
d = .............................................. mm
t = ................................................... s
v = .....................................................
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between v and d is
v = kd 2
(i) Using your data, calculate two values of k.
first value of k = .....................................................
second value of k = .....................................................
(ii) Explain whether your results support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your values of k
in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10
11
(g) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure in this
For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/33/M/J/10

*5326129682*
PHYSICS 9702/34
2 hours

Total
DC (LEO/SW) 23039/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

3
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the length of a loaded spring as the load is varied.
(a) Measure and record the length L of the metal rod.
L = ................................................... m
(b) (i) Support the rod as shown in Fig. 1.1.
clamp
spring
h pivot
rod bench
d
5 cm
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Adjust the position of the pivot so that it is approximately 5 cm from the free end of
the rod.
(iii) Adjust the clamp so that the rod is horizontal and the spring is vertical.
(c) Measure and record the length h of the coiled part of the spring and the distance d from
the pivot to the point where the spring is attached to the rod.
h = ................................................... m
d = ................................................... m

4
(d) Repeat (b)(iii) and (c) for different positions of the pivot along the rod until you have six For
sets of readings of d and h. Include values of 1/d in your table of results. Examiner’s
Use
1
(e) (i) Plot a graph of h on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
d
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between d and h is For

Examiner’s
A Use
h= +B
d

Wz
The value of A is equal to
k
where W is the weight of the rod,
k is the spring constant of the spring
and z is a constant.
The values for W and k are given on the card.
Use your answer from (e)(iii) and the values on the card to calculate z.
Give the appropriate unit.
z = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

7
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the effect of an electric current on a nearby magnet. Use
(a) A circuit has been set up for you as shown in Fig. 2.1. Do not adjust the position of the
stands.
low voltage supply

+ –
A
horizontal
copper wire
Fig. 2.1
Switch on the current. Use the variable resistor to adjust the current I to about 2 A.
Record your value of current.
I = ....................................................A
(b) Switch off the current. Place the thread over the horizontal copper wire, so that the
magnet hangs as shown in Fig. 2.2.
+ –
A
insulator
in clamp
crocodile horizontal
clip copper wire
x thread
magnet
Fig. 2.2
(c) By moving your hand, adjust the distance x between the copper wire and the dotted line
along the side of the magnet to about 7 cm.
Record your value of x.
x = ................................................. cm

8
(d) Place the protractor on the bench beneath the magnet. For
Switch on the current. The magnet will turn through an angle. Wait until the magnet Examiner’s
comes to rest. Use
Measure and record the angle θ turned through by the magnet.

Switch off the current.
θ = .....................................................°
(e) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of θ.
percentage uncertainty in θ = ......................................................
(f) (i) Reverse the direction of the current in the copper wire.
Repeat (d) to find a second value of θ.
θ = .....................................................°
(ii) Use your answers to (d) and (f)(i) to determine an average value of the magnitude
of θ.
average value of θ = .....................................................°
(g) Change x to about 4 cm.

Adjust the value of I so that the deflection θ is the same as in (f)(ii).
Record x and I.
x = ................................................. cm
I = ................................................... A
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

9
(h) It is suggested that, for a given value of θ, the relationship between I and x is For
Examiner’s
I = kx Use
first value of k = .......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your values of k.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................

10
(i) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure in this For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/34/M/J/10

*3390359075*
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours

Total
DC (CW/CGW) 23781/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10

3

For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the relationship between the power dissipated in a
filament lamp and the resistance of the lamp.
(a) Assemble the circuit of Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(b) Set the power supply voltage to 12 V and close the switch so that the lamp lights. Record
the voltmeter reading V and the ammeter reading I.
V = .................................................. V
I = .................................................. A

4
(c) Reduce the power supply voltage, recording V and I until you have six sets of readings.
For
Examiner’s
Open the switch when you have finished your measurements. Use
Include in your table of results values of P, R and R 4, where P is the power dissipated in
the lamp and R is the resistance of the lamp.
V
(P = VI and R = )
I
(d) (i) Plot a graph of P on the y-axis against R 4 on the x-axis.

(ii) Draw the straight line of best fit.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10
5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between P and R is

For
Examiner’s
P = aR 4 + b Use

a = ......................................................
b = ......................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10

7
BLANK PAGE

8

For
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the movement of a tube is affected by fluid
friction.
The apparatus has been set up for you as shown in Fig. 2.1. The mass hanger will move up
and down if it is pulled down and released.
clamp
spring
mass hanger
and masses
tube
oil distance
indicator
tray
Fig. 2.1
(a) (i) By adjusting the position of the clamp, lower the spring and mass hanger so that
the bottom of the tube is immersed centrally in the oil to a depth d of about 5 cm, as
shown in Fig. 2.2.
(ii) Measure and record d.
d = .....................................................
distance
indicator
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10

9
(b) Adjust the distance indicator so that its arrow is level with the bottom of the mass hanger,
For
as shown in Fig. 2.2. Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) Pull down the mass hanger about 3 cm and release it so that it moves up and
down.
Each time the mass hanger moves down, you will see that the lowest position that
it reaches changes gradually from 3 cm to 0 cm below the arrow.
(ii) Repeat (i) and start the stopwatch when the mass hanger’s lowest position is 2.0 cm
below the arrow. Stop the stopwatch when the lowest position has become 0.5 cm
below the arrow.
Record this time t.
t = .....................................................
(d) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in t.
(e) (i) By again adjusting the position of the clamp, lower the spring and mass hanger so
that d is about 10 cm.
(ii) Repeat (a)(ii), (b) and (c).
d = .....................................................
t = .....................................................

10
(f) (i) It is suggested that the relationship between t and d is

For
Examiner’s
t 4 = k3 Use
d
Using your data, calculate two values of k.
first value of k = .....................................................
second value of k = .....................................................
(ii) Explain whether your results support the relationship in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have used for your values of k.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10

11
(g) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure in this
For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/35/M/J/10

*7303645500*
PHYSICS 9702/41
1 hour 45 minutes

You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use For Examiner’s Use
appropriate units.
1
question. 3
10
11
12
Total
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
Nm 2
<c >

⎯ ⎯ ⎯02⎯ ⎯ ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
v = ± ω √⎯(x
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Define the radian.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A stone of weight 3.0 N is fixed, using glue, to one end P of a rigid rod CP, as shown
in Fig. 1.1.
glue
85 cm P
stone,
C weight 3.0 N
Fig. 1.1
The rod is rotated about end C so that the stone moves in a vertical circle of
radius 85 cm.
The angular speed ω of the rod and stone is gradually increased from zero until the glue
snaps. The glue fixing the stone snaps when the tension in it is 18 N.
For the position of the stone at which the glue snaps,
(i) on the dotted circle of Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter S the position of the stone, [1]
(ii) calculate the angular speed ω of the stone.
angular speed = ................................... rad s–1 [4]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
5
2 (a) Some gas, initially at a temperature of 27.2 °C, is heated so that its temperature rises For
to 38.8 °C. Examiner’s
Calculate, in kelvin, to an appropriate number of decimal places, Use
(i) the initial temperature of the gas,
initial temperature = ............................................. K [2]
(ii) the rise in temperature.
rise in temperature = ............................................ K [1]
(b) The pressure p of an ideal gas is given by the expression
p = 13 ρ⬍c 2⬎
where ρ is the density of the gas.
(i) State the meaning of the symbol ⬍c 2⬎.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use the expression to show that the mean kinetic energy <EK> of the atoms of an
ideal gas is given by the expression
<EK> = 32 kT.
Explain any symbols that you use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [4]

6
(c) Helium-4 may be assumed to behave as an ideal gas. For

A cylinder has a constant volume of 7.8 × 103 cm3 and contains helium-4 gas at a Examiner’s
pressure of 2.1 × 107 Pa and at a temperature of 290 K. Use
Calculate, for the helium gas,
(i) the amount of gas,
amount = ......................................... mol [2]
(ii) the mean kinetic energy of the atoms,
mean kinetic energy = .............................................. J [2]
(iii) the total internal energy.
internal energy = .............................................. J [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

7
3 (a) State what is meant by For

Examiner’s
(i) oscillations, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) free oscillations,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) simple harmonic motion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two inclined planes RA and LA each have the same constant gradient. They meet at
their lower edges, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
ball
L R
Fig. 3.1
A small ball moves from rest down plane RA and then rises up plane LA. It then moves
down plane LA and rises up plane RA to its original height. The motion repeats itself.
State and explain whether the motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
4 (a) Explain what is meant by the potential energy of a body. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
2
(b) Two deuterium ( 1 H) nuclei each have initial kinetic energy EK and are initially separated
by a large distance.
The nuclei may be considered to be spheres of diameter 3.8 × 10–15 m with their masses
and charges concentrated at their centres.
The nuclei move from their initial positions to their final position of just touching, as
2 2
initially 1H 1H
kinetic energy EK kinetic energy EK
3.8 × 10–15 m
2 2
finally 1H 1H
at rest
Fig. 4.1
(i) For the two nuclei approaching each other, calculate the total change in
1. gravitational potential energy,
energy = ............................................ J [3]
2. electric potential energy.
energy = ............................................ J [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
9
(ii) Use your answers in (i) to show that the initial kinetic energy EK of each nucleus For
is 0.19 MeV. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(iii) The two nuclei may rebound from each other. Suggest one other effect that could
happen to the two nuclei if the initial kinetic energy of each nucleus is greater than
that calculated in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

10
5 (a) A constant current is maintained in a long straight vertical wire. A Hall probe is positioned For
a distance r from the centre of the wire, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
current-carrying
wire
Hall probe
X Y
terminals to
r Hall probe circuitry
and voltmeter
Fig. 5.1
(i) Explain why, when the Hall probe is rotated about the horizontal axis XY, the Hall
voltage varies between a maximum positive value and a maximum negative value.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The maximum Hall voltage VH is measured at different distances r.

Data for VH and the corresponding values of r are shown in Fig. 5.2.
VH / V r / cm
0.290 1.0
0.190 1.5
0.140 2.0
0.097 3.0
0.073 4.0
0.060 5.0
Fig. 5.2
It is thought that VH and r are related by an expression of the form
VH = k
r
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

11
1. Without drawing a graph, use data from Fig. 5.2 to suggest whether the For
expression is valid. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
1
2. A graph showing the variation with of VH is plotted.
r
State the features of the graph that suggest that the expression is valid.
..............................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The Hall probe in (a) is now replaced with a small coil of wire connected to a sensitive
voltmeter. The coil is arranged so that its plane is normal to the magnetic field of the
wire.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction and hence explain why the
voltmeter indicates a zero reading.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) State three different ways in which an e.m.f. may be induced in the coil.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]

12
6 A student is asked to design a circuit by which a direct voltage of peak value 9.0 V is obtained For
from a 240 V alternating supply. Examiner’s
The student uses a transformer that may be considered to be ideal and a bridge rectifier Use
incorporating four ideal diodes.

The partially completed circuit diagram is shown in Fig. 6.1.
240 V +
load
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw symbols for the four diodes so as to produce the polarity across the
load as shown on the diagram. [2]
(b) Calculate the ratio
number of turns on the secondary coil .

number of turns on the primary coil
ratio = ................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

13
7 Negatively-charged particles are moving through a vacuum in a parallel beam. The particles For
have speed v. Examiner’s
The particles enter a region of uniform magnetic field of flux density 930 μT. Initially, the Use
particles are travelling at right-angles to the magnetic field. The path of a single particle is
shown in Fig. 7.1.
negatively-charged
arc of radius 7.9 cm
particles, speed v
uniform magnetic field,
flux density 930 μT
Fig. 7.1
The negatively-charged particles follow a curved path of radius 7.9 cm in the magnetic field.
A uniform electric field is then applied in the same region as the magnetic field. For an electric
field strength of 12 kV m–1, the particles are undeviated as they pass through the region of
the fields.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark with an arrow the direction of the electric field. [1]
(b) Calculate, for the negatively-charged particles,
(i) the speed v,
v = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

charge
(ii) the ratio .
mass
ratio = .................................... C kg–1 [3]

14
8 A π0 meson is a sub-atomic particle. For

A stationary π0 meson, which has mass 2.4 × 10–28 kg, decays to form two γ-ray photons. Examiner’s
The nuclear equation for this decay is Use
π0 γ + γ.
(a) Explain why the two γ-ray photons have the same energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Determine, for each γ-ray photon,
(i) the energy, in joule,
energy = .............................................. J [2]
(ii) the wavelength,
wavelength = ............................................ m [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

15
(iii) the momentum. For

Examiner’s
Use
momentum = ........................................... N s [2]

16
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 The circuit diagram of Fig. 9.1 is an amplifier circuit incorporating an operational amplifier
(op-amp).
4.2 kΩ
1.0 kΩ +9 V
–
+
1.5 V +
–9 V V
–
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, mark, with the letter X, the virtual earth. [1]
(ii) Explain what is meant by a virtual earth.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) In bright sunlight, the light-dependent resistor (LDR) has resistance 200 Ω.
(i) Calculate, for the LDR in bright sunlight, the voltmeter reading.
reading = ............................................ V [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

17
(ii) The sunlight incident on the LDR becomes less bright. For
State and explain the effect on the voltmeter reading of this decrease in Examiner’s
brightness. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]

18
10 (a) Briefly explain the principles of CT scanning. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [6]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

19
(b) A simple section through a body consists of four voxels, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1. For
Examiner’s
section Use
directions
of viewing
Fig. 10.1
An X-ray image of the section is obtained by viewing along each of the directions shown
in Fig. 10.1.
The detector readings for each direction of viewing are summed to give the pattern of
readings shown in Fig. 10.2.
25 22
34 31
Fig. 10.2
For any one direction, the total of the detector readings is 16.
(i) For the pattern of readings of Fig. 10.2, state the magnitude of the background
reading.
background reading = ................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, mark the pattern of pixels for the four-voxel section. [2]

20
11 Many radio stations now broadcast on FM rather than on AM. In general, FM is broadcast at For
much higher frequencies than AM. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Explain what is meant by FM (frequency modulation).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State two advantages and two disadvantages of FM transmissions when compared with
AM transmissions.
advantages of FM transmissions
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
disadvantages of FM transmissions
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

21
12 A ground station on Earth transmits a signal of frequency 14 GHz and power 18 kW towards For
a communications satellite orbiting the Earth, as illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Examiner’s
Use
ground station,
signal power
18 kW
ency
signal frequ
14 GHz
satellite
Earth
Fig. 12.1
The loss in signal power between the ground station and the satellite is 190 dB.
(a) Calculate the power of the signal received by the satellite.
power = .......................................... W [3]
(b) The signal received by the satellite is amplified and transmitted back to Earth.
(i) Suggest a frequency for the signal that is sent back to Earth.
frequency = ...................................... GHz [1]
(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

*8631935288*
PHYSICS 9702/42
1 hour 45 minutes
appropriate units.
2
3
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (LEO/DJ) 17381/5
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4π0r

t 1
2

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Define gravitational potential at a point.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The Earth may be considered to be an isolated sphere of radius R with its mass
concentrated at its centre.
The variation of the gravitational potential φ with distance x from the centre of the Earth
distance x
0 R 2R 3R 4R 5R
0
–2.0
/ 107 J kg–1
–4.0
–6.0
–8.0
Fig. 1.1
The radius R of the Earth is 6.4 × 106 m.
(i) By considering the gravitational potential at the Earth’s surface, determine a value
for the mass of the Earth.
mass = ......................................... kg [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10
5
(ii) A meteorite is at rest at infinity. The meteorite travels from infinity towards the For
Earth. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate the speed of the meteorite when it is at a distance of 2R above the Earth’s
surface. Explain your working.
speed = ..................................... m s–1 [4]
(iii) In practice, the Earth is not an isolated sphere because it is orbited by the Moon, as
initial path
of meteorite
Moon
Earth
The initial path of the meteorite is also shown.
Suggest two changes to the motion of the meteorite caused by the Moon.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

6
2 A long strip of springy steel is clamped at one end so that the strip is vertical. A mass of 65 g For
is attached to the free end of the strip, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
mass
springy 65 g
steel
clamp
Fig. 2.1
The mass is pulled to one side and then released. The variation with time t of the horizontal
displacement of the mass is shown in Fig. 2.2.
displacement
/ cm
1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
t/s
–1
–2
Fig. 2.2
The mass undergoes damped simple harmonic motion.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by damping.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

7
(ii) Suggest, with a reason, whether the damping is light, critical or heavy. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) (i) Use Fig. 2.2 to determine the frequency of vibration of the mass.
frequency = ......................................... Hz [1]
(ii) Hence show that the initial energy stored in the steel strip before the mass is
released is approximately 3.2 mJ.
[2]
(c) After eight complete oscillations of the mass, the amplitude of vibration is reduced from
1.5 cm to 1.1 cm. State and explain whether, after a further eight complete oscillations,
the amplitude will be 0.7 cm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
3 (a) The resistance of a thermistor at 0 °C is 3840 Ω. At 100 °C the resistance is 190 Ω. For
When the thermistor is placed in water at a particular constant temperature, its resistance Examiner’s
is 2300 Ω. Use
(i) Assuming that the resistance of the thermistor varies linearly with temperature,
calculate the temperature of the water.
temperature = ......................................... °C [2]
(ii) The temperature of the water, as measured on the thermodynamic scale of

temperature, is 286 K.
By reference to what is meant by the thermodynamic scale of temperature, comment

on your answer in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) A polystyrene cup contains a mass of 95 g of water at 28 °C.
A cube of ice of mass 12 g is put into the water. Initially, the ice is at 0 °C. The water, of
specific heat capacity 4.2 × 103 J kg–1 K–1, is stirred until all the ice melts.
Assuming that the cup has negligible mass and that there is no heat exchange with the
atmosphere, calculate the final temperature of the water.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J kg–1.
temperature = ......................................... °C [4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

9
4 Two point charges A and B each have a charge of + 6.4 × 10–19 C. They are separated in a For
vacuum by a distance of 12.0 μm, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
12.0 μm
A P Q B
+6.4 × 10–19 C +6.4 × 10–19 C
3.0 μm 3.0 μm
Fig. 4.1
Points P and Q are situated on the line AB. Point P is 3.0 μm from charge A and point Q is
3.0 μm from charge B.
(a) Calculate the force of repulsion between the charges A and B.
force = .......................................... N [3]
(b) Explain why, without any calculation, when a small test charge is moved from point P to
point Q, the net work done is zero.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the work done by an electron in moving from the midpoint of line AB to
point P.
work done = ........................................... J [4]

10
5 (a) State two functions of capacitors in electrical circuits. For

Examiner’s
1. ..................................................................................................................................... Use
2. .....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Three capacitors, each marked ‘30 μF, 6 V max’, are arranged as shown in Fig. 5.1.
A B
Fig. 5.1
Determine, for the arrangement shown in Fig. 5.1,
(i) the total capacitance,
capacitance = ......................................... μF [2]
(ii) the maximum potential difference that can safely be applied between points A
and B.
potential difference = ........................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

11
(c) A capacitor of capacitance 4700 μF is charged to a potential difference of 18 V. It is then For

partially discharged through a resistor. The potential difference is reduced to 12 V. Examiner’s
Calculate the energy dissipated in the resistor during the discharge. Use
energy = ........................................... J [3]

12
6 (a) A uniform magnetic field has constant flux density B. A straight wire of fixed length For
carries a current I at an angle θ to the magnetic field, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
magnetic field
flux density B
I
current-carrying
wire
Fig. 6.1
(i) The current I in the wire is changed, keeping the angle θ constant.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with current I of the force F on the
wire.
0
0 I
Fig. 6.2
[2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

13
(ii) The angle θ between the wire and the magnetic field is now varied. The current I is For
kept constant. Examiner’s
On Fig. 6.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with angle θ of the force F on the Use
wire.
0
0 30 60 90
/°
Fig. 6.3 [3]
(b) A uniform magnetic field is directed at right-angles to the rectangular surface PQRS of a
slice of a conducting material, as shown in Fig. 6.4.
Q R
direction of
movement
P S
of electrons
Fig. 6.4
Electrons, moving towards the side SR, enter the slice of conducting material. The
electrons enter the slice at right-angles to side SR.
(i) Explain why, initially, the electrons do not travel in straight lines across the slice
from side SR to side PQ.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain to which side, PS or QR, the electrons tend to move.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
14
7 (a) Explain what is meant by the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of an alternating voltage. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An alternating voltage V is represented by the equation
V = 220 sin(120πt),
where V is measured in volts and t is in seconds.
For this alternating voltage, determine
(i) the peak voltage,
peak voltage = ........................................... V [1]
(ii) the r.m.s. voltage,
r.m.s. voltage = ........................................... V [1]
(iii) the frequency.
frequency = ......................................... Hz [1]
(c) The alternating voltage in (b) is applied across a resistor such that the mean power
output from the resistor is 1.5 kW.
Calculate the resistance of the resistor.
resistance = .......................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

15
8 Americium-241 is an artificially produced radioactive element that emits α-particles. For

A sample of americium-241 of mass 5.1 μg is found to have an activity of 5.9 × 105 Bq. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Determine, for this sample of americium-241,
(i) the number of nuclei,
number = ............................................... [2]
(ii) the decay constant,
decay constant = ........................................ s–1 [2]
(iii) the half-life, in years.
half-life = .................................... years [2]
(b) Another radioactive element has a half-life of approximately 4 hours.

Suggest why measurement of the mass and activity of a sample of this element is not
appropriate for the determination of its half-life.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

16
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Negative feedback may be used in amplifier circuits. State
(i) what is meant by negative feedback,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) two effects of negative feedback on an amplifier incorporating an operational

amplifier (op-amp).
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 9.1 is a circuit for an amplifier that is used with a microphone.
microphone 120 kΩ
V OUT
Fig. 9.1
The output potential difference VOUT is 4.4 V when the potential at point P is 62 mV.
Determine
(i) the gain of the amplifier,
gain = ............................................... [1]

© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10
17
(ii) the resistance of the resistor R. For

Examiner’s
Use
resistance = .......................................... Ω [2]
(c) The maximum potential produced by the microphone at point P on Fig. 9.1 is 95 mV.
The power supply for the operational amplifier may be either +/– 5 V or +/– 9 V.
State which power supply should be used. Justify your answer quantitatively.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]

18
10 (a) State the name of an electrical sensing device that will respond to changes in For
Examiner’s
(i) length, Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) pressure.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A relay is sometimes used as the output of a sensing circuit.
The output of a particular sensing circuit is either + 2 V or – 2 V.
On Fig. 10.1, draw symbols for a relay and any other necessary component so that the
external circuit is switched on only when the output from the sensing circuit is + 2 V.
+2 V or –2 V
output from terminals

sensing circuit of external
circuit
Fig. 10.1
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

19
11 Explain the main principles behind the generation of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic For
information about internal body structures. Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]

20
12 A telephone link between two towns is to be provided using an optic fibre. The length of the For
optic fibre between the two towns is 75 km. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State two changes that occur in a signal as it is transmitted along an optic fibre.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 1.6 dB km–1. The minimum
permissible signal-to-noise power ratio in the fibre is 25 dB. The average noise power in
the optic fibre is 6.1 × 10–19 W.
(i) Suggest one reason why power ratios are expressed in dB.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The signal input power to the optic fibre is designed to be 6.5 mW.
Determine whether repeater amplifiers are necessary in the optic fibre between the
two towns.
[5]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10

*8470198490*
PHYSICS 9702/43
1 hour 45 minutes
appropriate units.
2
3
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (SM/DJ) 28740
2
Data
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4π0r

t 1
2

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The Earth may be considered to be an isolated sphere of radius R with its mass
concentrated at its centre.
The variation of the gravitational potential φ with distance x from the centre of the Earth
distance x
0 R 2R 3R 4R 5R
0
–2.0
/ 107 J kg–1
–4.0
–6.0
–8.0
Fig. 1.1
The radius R of the Earth is 6.4 × 106 m.
(i) By considering the gravitational potential at the Earth’s surface, determine a value
for the mass of the Earth.
mass = ......................................... kg [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10
5
(ii) A meteorite is at rest at infinity. The meteorite travels from infinity towards the For
Earth. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate the speed of the meteorite when it is at a distance of 2R above the Earth’s
surface. Explain your working.
speed = ..................................... m s–1 [4]
(iii) In practice, the Earth is not an isolated sphere because it is orbited by the Moon, as
initial path
of meteorite
Moon
Earth
The initial path of the meteorite is also shown.
Suggest two changes to the motion of the meteorite caused by the Moon.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

6
2 A long strip of springy steel is clamped at one end so that the strip is vertical. A mass of 65 g For
is attached to the free end of the strip, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
mass
springy 65 g
steel
clamp
Fig. 2.1
The mass is pulled to one side and then released. The variation with time t of the horizontal
displacement of the mass is shown in Fig. 2.2.
displacement
/ cm
1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
t/s
–1
–2
Fig. 2.2
The mass undergoes damped simple harmonic motion.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by damping.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

7
(ii) Suggest, with a reason, whether the damping is light, critical or heavy. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) (i) Use Fig. 2.2 to determine the frequency of vibration of the mass.
frequency = ......................................... Hz [1]
(ii) Hence show that the initial energy stored in the steel strip before the mass is
released is approximately 3.2 mJ.
[2]
(c) After eight complete oscillations of the mass, the amplitude of vibration is reduced from
1.5 cm to 1.1 cm. State and explain whether, after a further eight complete oscillations,
the amplitude will be 0.7 cm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
3 (a) The resistance of a thermistor at 0 °C is 3840 Ω. At 100 °C the resistance is 190 Ω. For
When the thermistor is placed in water at a particular constant temperature, its resistance Examiner’s
is 2300 Ω. Use
(i) Assuming that the resistance of the thermistor varies linearly with temperature,
calculate the temperature of the water.
temperature = ......................................... °C [2]
(ii) The temperature of the water, as measured on the thermodynamic scale of

temperature, is 286 K.
By reference to what is meant by the thermodynamic scale of temperature, comment

on your answer in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) A polystyrene cup contains a mass of 95 g of water at 28 °C.
A cube of ice of mass 12 g is put into the water. Initially, the ice is at 0 °C. The water, of
specific heat capacity 4.2 × 103 J kg–1 K–1, is stirred until all the ice melts.
Assuming that the cup has negligible mass and that there is no heat exchange with the
atmosphere, calculate the final temperature of the water.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J kg–1.
temperature = ......................................... °C [4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

9
4 Two point charges A and B each have a charge of + 6.4 × 10–19 C. They are separated in a For
vacuum by a distance of 12.0 μm, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
12.0 μm
A P Q B
+6.4 × 10–19 C +6.4 × 10–19 C
3.0 μm 3.0 μm
Fig. 4.1
Points P and Q are situated on the line AB. Point P is 3.0 μm from charge A and point Q is
3.0 μm from charge B.
(a) Calculate the force of repulsion between the charges A and B.
force = .......................................... N [3]
(b) Explain why, without any calculation, when a small test charge is moved from point P to
point Q, the net work done is zero.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the work done by an electron in moving from the midpoint of line AB to
point P.
work done = ........................................... J [4]

10
5 (a) State two functions of capacitors in electrical circuits. For

Examiner’s
1. ..................................................................................................................................... Use
2. .....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Three capacitors, each marked ‘30 μF, 6 V max’, are arranged as shown in Fig. 5.1.
A B
Fig. 5.1
Determine, for the arrangement shown in Fig. 5.1,
(i) the total capacitance,
capacitance = ......................................... μF [2]
(ii) the maximum potential difference that can safely be applied between points A
and B.
potential difference = ........................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

11
(c) A capacitor of capacitance 4700 μF is charged to a potential difference of 18 V. It is then For

partially discharged through a resistor. The potential difference is reduced to 12 V. Examiner’s
Calculate the energy dissipated in the resistor during the discharge. Use
energy = ........................................... J [3]

12
6 (a) A uniform magnetic field has constant flux density B. A straight wire of fixed length For
carries a current I at an angle θ to the magnetic field, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
magnetic field
flux density B
I
current-carrying
wire
Fig. 6.1
(i) The current I in the wire is changed, keeping the angle θ constant.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with current I of the force F on the
wire.
0
0 I
Fig. 6.2
[2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

13
(ii) The angle θ between the wire and the magnetic field is now varied. The current I is For
kept constant. Examiner’s
On Fig. 6.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with angle θ of the force F on the Use
wire.
0
0 30 60 90
/°
Fig. 6.3 [3]
(b) A uniform magnetic field is directed at right-angles to the rectangular surface PQRS of a
slice of a conducting material, as shown in Fig. 6.4.
Q R
direction of
movement
P S
of electrons
Fig. 6.4
Electrons, moving towards the side SR, enter the slice of conducting material. The
electrons enter the slice at right-angles to side SR.
(i) Explain why, initially, the electrons do not travel in straight lines across the slice
from side SR to side PQ.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Explain to which side, PS or QR, the electrons tend to move.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
14
7 (a) Explain what is meant by the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of an alternating voltage. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An alternating voltage V is represented by the equation
V = 220 sin(120πt),
where V is measured in volts and t is in seconds.
For this alternating voltage, determine
peak voltage = ........................................... V [1]
(ii) the r.m.s. voltage,
r.m.s. voltage = ........................................... V [1]
(iii) the frequency.
frequency = ......................................... Hz [1]
(c) The alternating voltage in (b) is applied across a resistor such that the mean power
output from the resistor is 1.5 kW.
Calculate the resistance of the resistor.
resistance = .......................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

15
8 Americium-241 is an artificially produced radioactive element that emits α-particles. For

A sample of americium-241 of mass 5.1 μg is found to have an activity of 5.9 × 105 Bq. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Determine, for this sample of americium-241,
(i) the number of nuclei,
number = ............................................... [2]
(ii) the decay constant,
decay constant = ........................................ s–1 [2]
(iii) the half-life, in years.
half-life = .................................... years [2]
(b) Another radioactive element has a half-life of approximately 4 hours.

Suggest why measurement of the mass and activity of a sample of this element is not
appropriate for the determination of its half-life.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]

16
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Negative feedback may be used in amplifier circuits. State
(i) what is meant by negative feedback,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) two effects of negative feedback on an amplifier incorporating an operational

amplifier (op-amp).
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 9.1 is a circuit for an amplifier that is used with a microphone.
microphone 120 kΩ
V OUT
Fig. 9.1
The output potential difference VOUT is 4.4 V when the potential at point P is 62 mV.
Determine
(i) the gain of the amplifier,
gain = ............................................... [1]

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10
17
(ii) the resistance of the resistor R. For

Examiner’s
Use
resistance = .......................................... Ω [2]
(c) The maximum potential produced by the microphone at point P on Fig. 9.1 is 95 mV.
The power supply for the operational amplifier may be either +/– 5 V or +/– 9 V.
State which power supply should be used. Justify your answer quantitatively.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]

18
10 (a) State the name of an electrical sensing device that will respond to changes in For
Examiner’s
(i) length, Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) pressure.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A relay is sometimes used as the output of a sensing circuit.
The output of a particular sensing circuit is either + 2 V or – 2 V.
On Fig. 10.1, draw symbols for a relay and any other necessary component so that the
external circuit is switched on only when the output from the sensing circuit is + 2 V.
+2 V or –2 V
output from terminals

sensing circuit of external
circuit
Fig. 10.1
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

19
11 Explain the main principles behind the generation of ultrasound to obtain diagnostic For
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [6]

20
12 A telephone link between two towns is to be provided using an optic fibre. The length of the For
optic fibre between the two towns is 75 km. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State two changes that occur in a signal as it is transmitted along an optic fibre.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The optic fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 1.6 dB km–1. The minimum
permissible signal-to-noise power ratio in the fibre is 25 dB. The average noise power in
the optic fibre is 6.1 × 10–19 W.
(i) Suggest one reason why power ratios are expressed in dB.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) The signal input power to the optic fibre is designed to be 6.5 mW.
Determine whether repeater amplifiers are necessary in the optic fibre between the
two towns.
[5]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/M/J/10

*7016023063*
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (SHW 00379 1/09) 17605/4

2
1 A hammer is often used to force a nail into wood. The faster the hammer moves, the deeper For
the nail moves into the wood. Examiner’s
Use
This can be represented in a laboratory by a mass falling vertically onto a nail.
It is suggested that the depth d of the nail in the wood (see Fig. 1.1) is related to the
velocity v of the mass at the instant it hits the nail by the equation
d = kv n
nail
d
wood
Fig. 1.1
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate the relationship between v and d so as to

determine a value for n. You should draw a diagram showing the arrangement of your
equipment. In your account you should pay particular attention to
(d) the analysis of the data,
(e) the safety precautions to be taken.

[15]
© UCLES 2010 9702/51/M/J/10

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Defining the Methods of Method of Safety Additional

For problem data collection analysis considerations detail
Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2010 9702/51/M/J/10

5
2 The reactance Xc of a capacitor is defined as For

Examiner’s
V0 Use
Xc =
I0
where V0 is the peak voltage across the capacitor and I0 is the peak current through the
capacitor.
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the reactance of a capacitor varies with the
frequency f of the a.c. supply to the capacitor.
The equipment is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1.
a.c.
to dual-beam
power
oscilloscope
supply
Fig. 2.1
The dual-beam oscilloscope is used to determine values of V0 and I0.

6
It is suggested that Xc and f are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
1 Use
Xc =
2fC
where C is the capacitance of the capacitor.
1
(a) A graph is plotted with Xc on the y-axis and on the x-axis. Express the gradient in
f
terms of C.
gradient = ................................................. [1]
(b) Values of f, V0 and I0 are given in Fig. 2.2.
1
f / Hz V0 / V I0 / 10–3 A / 10–3 s Xc /
f
220 5.0 ± 0.2 15 ± 0.2
250 5.0 ± 0.2 17 ± 0.2
300 5.0 ± 0.2 21 ± 0.2
350 5.0 ± 0.2 24 ± 0.2
400 5.0 ± 0.2 28 ± 0.2
450 5.0 ± 0.2 31 ± 0.2
Fig. 2.2
1
Calculate and record values of and Xc in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute uncertainties
f
in Xc. [3]
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of Xc / against / 10–3 s. Include error bars for Xc. [2]
f
(ii) Draw the straight line of best fit and a worst acceptable straight line on your graph.
(iii) Determine the gradient of the line of best fit. Include the uncertainty in your
answer.
gradient = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/51/M/J/10

7
360 For
Examiner’s
Use
340
Xc / Ω
320
300
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
140
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
1
/ 10–3 s
f

8
(d) Using your answer to (c)(iii), determine the value of C. Include the absolute uncertainty For
in your value and an appropriate unit. Examiner’s
Use
C = ................................................ [3]
(e) The time constant is defined as = CR where R is the total resistance of the circuit.
(i) C is placed in a circuit with total resistance 220 k. Determine the value of .
= .............................................. s [1]
(ii) The percentage uncertainty in the total resistance of the circuit is ±10%. Determine
the percentage uncertainty in .
percentage uncertainty = ............................................ % [1]
© UCLES 2010 9702/51/M/J/10

*0043403827*
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (LEO/KN) 20959/3
2
1 A current in a flat circular coil produces a magnetic field. For

Examiner’s
A student suggests that the strength B of the magnetic field is related to the distance x from Use
the centre of the coil (see Fig. 1.1) by the equation
B = B0e–px
where B0 is the strength of the magnetic field for x = 0, and p is a constant.
coil
centre of coil
Fig. 1.1
Design a laboratory experiment that uses a Hall probe to investigate the relationship
between B and x. You should draw a diagram showing the arrangement of your equipment.

[15]
© UCLES 2010 9702/52/M/J/10

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

4
For
........................................................................................................................................................ Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2010 9702/52/M/J/10

5
2 A student is investigating how the period T of a simple pendulum depends on its length l as For
Use
Fig. 2.1
The time t for 10 oscillations is recorded for a pendulum of length l. The period T of the
pendulum is determined. The procedure is then repeated for different lengths.

6
It is suggested that T and l are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
Use
l
T = 2π
g
(a) A graph is plotted of T 2 on the y-axis against l on the x-axis. Express the gradient in
terms of g.
gradient = ................................................. [1]
(b) Values of l and t are given in Fig. 2.2.
l / cm t/s
90.0 18.9 ± 0.1
80.0 17.9 ± 0.1
70.0 16.7 ± 0.1
60.0 15.5 ± 0.1
50.0 14.1 ± 0.1
40.0 12.6 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of T and T 2 in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute uncertainties in T 2.
[3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of T 2 / s2 against l / cm. Include error bars for T 2. [2]
answer.
gradient = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/52/M/J/10

7
3.7 For
Examiner’s
Use
3.5
T 2 / s2
3.3
3.1
2.9
2.7
2.5
2.3
2.1
1.9
1.7
1.5
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
l / cm

8
(d) Using your answer to (c)(iii), determine the value of g. Include the absolute uncertainty For
Use
g = ................................................. [3]
(e) (i) Using your answer to (d), determine the value of l that is required to give a period
of 1.0 s.
l = ............................................ cm [1]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of l.
© UCLES 2010 9702/52/M/J/10

*4530339818*
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (LEO/KN) 28739
2
1 A current in a flat circular coil produces a magnetic field. For

Examiner’s
A student suggests that the strength B of the magnetic field is related to the distance x from Use
the centre of the coil (see Fig. 1.1) by the equation
B = B0e–px
where B0 is the strength of the magnetic field for x = 0, and p is a constant.
coil
centre of coil
Fig. 1.1
Design a laboratory experiment that uses a Hall probe to investigate the relationship
between B and x. You should draw a diagram showing the arrangement of your equipment.

[15]
© UCLES 2010 9702/53/M/J/10

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

4
For
........................................................................................................................................................ Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2010 9702/53/M/J/10

5
2 A student is investigating how the period T of a simple pendulum depends on its length l as For
Use
Fig. 2.1
The time t for 10 oscillations is recorded for a pendulum of length l. The period T of the
pendulum is determined. The procedure is then repeated for different lengths.

6
It is suggested that T and l are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
Use
l
T = 2π
g
(a) A graph is plotted of T 2 on the y-axis against l on the x-axis. Express the gradient in
terms of g.
gradient = ................................................. [1]
(b) Values of l and t are given in Fig. 2.2.
l / cm t/s
90.0 18.9 ± 0.1
80.0 17.9 ± 0.1
70.0 16.7 ± 0.1
60.0 15.5 ± 0.1
50.0 14.1 ± 0.1
40.0 12.6 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of T and T 2 in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute uncertainties in T 2.
[3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of T 2 / s2 against l / cm. Include error bars for T 2. [2]
answer.
gradient = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/53/M/J/10

7
3.7 For
Examiner’s
Use
3.5
T 2 / s2
3.3
3.1
2.9
2.7
2.5
2.3
2.1
1.9
1.7
1.5
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
l / cm

8
(d) Using your answer to (c)(iii), determine the value of g. Include the absolute uncertainty For
Use
g = ................................................. [3]
(e) (i) Using your answer to (d), determine the value of l that is required to give a period
of 1.0 s.
l = ............................................ cm [1]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of l.
© UCLES 2010 9702/53/M/J/10

PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*4675180455*

IB11 06_9702_11/7RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
Which row gives the sub-multiples or multiples represented by pico (p) and giga (G)?
pico (p) giga (G)
A 10–9 109
B 10–9 1012
C 10–12 109
D 10–12 1012
2 Which definition is correct and uses only quantities rather than units?
A Density is mass per cubic metre.

B Potential difference is energy per unit current.
C Pressure is force per unit area.
D Speed is distance travelled per second.
3 A force of 5.0 N pushes a ball due north and another force of 3.0 N pushes it due east.
5.0 N
3.0 N
What is the magnitude of the net force acting on the ball?
A 2.8 N B 4.0 N C 5.8 N D 8.0 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

5
4 The diagram shows a trace of a wave on a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
The vertical and horizontal gridlines have a spacing of 1.0 cm. The voltage scaling is 4 V cm–1 and
the time scaling is 5 ms cm–1.
1 cm
1 cm
What are the amplitude and period of the wave?
amplitude / V period / ms
A 1.5 4
B 5.0 10
C 6.0 20
D 12.0 20
Space for working

6
5 The diagram shows an experiment to measure the speed of a small ball falling at constant speed
through a clear liquid in a glass tube.
1.50 s 115 mm
3.50 s 385 mm
There are two marks on the tube. The top mark is positioned at 115 ± 1 mm on the adjacent rule
and the lower mark at 385 ± 1 mm. The ball passes the top mark at 1.50 ± 0.02 s and passes the
lower mark at 3.50 ± 0.02 s.
−
The constant speed of the ball is calculated by 385 115 = 270 = 135 mm s–1.
3.50 − 1.50 2.00
Which expression calculates the fractional uncertainty in the value of this speed?
A 2 + 0.04
270 2.00
B 2 – 0.04
270 2.00
C 1 × 0.02
270 2.00
D 1 ÷ 0.02
270 2.00
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

7
6 The graph shows how the acceleration of an object moving in a straight line varies with time.
acceleration
0
0 time
Which graph shows the variation with time of the velocity of the object?
A B
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
velocity velocity
0
0
time
0
0 time
Space for working

8
7 A ball is released from rest at time zero. After 1.0 s it bounces inelastically from a horizontal
surface and rebounds, reaching the top of its first bounce after 1.5 s.
10
velocity
/ m s–1
5
0 time / s
0 0.5 1.0
. 1.5
–5
What is the total displacement of the ball from its original position after 1.5 s?
A 1.25 m B 3.75 m C 5.00 m D 6.25 m
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

9
8 A body has a weight of 58.9 N when on the Earth. On the Moon, the acceleration of free fall is
1.64 m s–2.
What are the weight and the mass of the body when it is on the Moon?
weight / N mass / kg
A 9.85 1.00
B 9.85 6.00
C 58.9 1.00
D 58.9 6.00
9 A body of mass m, moving at velocity v, collides with a stationary body of the same mass and
sticks to it.
Which row describes the momentum and kinetic energy of the two bodies after the collision?
momentum kinetic energy

1
A mv 4
mv 2
1
B mv 8
mv 2
1
C 2mv 2
mv 2
D 2mv mv 2
Space for working

10
10 A molecule of mass m travelling horizontally with velocity u hits a vertical wall at right-angles to its
velocity. It then rebounds horizontally with the same speed.
What is its change in momentum?
A zero B mu C – mu D – 2mu
11 A cable car of weight W hangs in equilibrium from its cable at point P.
The cable has tensions T1 and T2 as shown.
T1
cable
P
T2
weight W
cable car
Which diagram correctly represents the forces acting at point P?
A B C D
T2 T2 T2 T2
W T1 W T1 W T1 W T1
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

11
30 N
20 N
20 N
30 N
Which row describes the resultant force and resultant torque on the object?
A zero zero
B zero non-zero
C non-zero zero
D non-zero non-zero
Space for working

12
13 A uniform metre rule of mass 100 g is supported by a pivot at the 40 cm mark and a string at the
100 cm mark. The string passes round a frictionless pulley and carries a mass of 20 g as shown in
the diagram.
0 20 40 60 80 100
20 g
At which mark on the rule must a 50 g mass be suspended so that the rule balances?
A 4 cm B 36 cm C 44 cm D 64 cm
14 A steel sphere is dropped vertically onto a horizontal metal plate. The sphere hits the plate with a
speed u, leaves it at a speed v, and rebounds vertically to half of its original height.
Which expression gives the value of v ?

u
A 1 B 1 C 1 D 1– 1
22 2 2 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

13
15 A block of mass 2.0 kg is released from rest on a slope. It travels 7.0 m down the slope and falls a
vertical distance of 3.0 m. The block experiences a frictional force parallel to the slope of 5.0 N.
2.0 kg
7.0 m
3.0 m
What is the speed of the block after falling this distance?
A 4.9 m s–1 B 6.6 m s–1 C 8.6 m s–1 D 10.1 m s–1
16 A man has a mass of 80 kg. He ties himself to one end of a rope which passes over a single fixed
pulley. He pulls on the other end of the rope to lift himself up at an average speed of 50 cm s–1.
What is the average useful power at which he is working?
A 40 W B 0.39 kW C 4.0 kW D 39 kW
Space for working

14
17 A body travelling with a speed of 10 m s–1 has kinetic energy 1500 J.
If the speed of the body is increased to 40 m s–1, what is its new kinetic energy?
A 4500 J B 6000 J C 24 000 J D 1 350 000 J
18 Which process does not require energy to be supplied?
A boiling
B evaporation
C freezing
D melting
19 1.5 m3 of water is mixed with 0.50 m3 of alcohol. The density of water is 1000 kg m–3 and the
density of alcohol is 800 kg m–3.
What is the density of the mixture with volume 2.0 m3?
A 850 kg m–3 B 900 kg m–3 C 940 kg m–3 D 950 kg m–3
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

15
20 A long, thin metal wire is suspended from a fixed support and hangs vertically. Masses are
suspended from its lower end.
The load on the lower end is increased from zero and then decreased again back to zero.
The diagram shows the force-extension graph produced.
force T
S
0
0 V extension
Where on the graph would the elastic limit be found?
A anywhere between point R and point S

B beyond point S but before point T
C exactly at point S
D exactly at point T
Space for working

16
21 The Young modulus E can be determined from measurements made when a wire is stretched.
Which quantities would be measured in order to determine E ?
A mass of original length

diameter of wire extension of wire
stretching load of wire
B mass of new length cross-sectional

diameter of wire
stretching load of wire area of wire
C mass of wire original length cross-sectional new length

of wire area of wire of wire
D mass of wire new length

of wire
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

17
22 The four graphs represent a progressive wave on a stretched string. Graphs A and B show how
the displacement d varies with distance x along the string at one instant. Graphs C and D show
how the displacement d varies with time t at a particular value of x.
The labels on the graphs are intended to show the wavelength λ, the period T and the amplitude
a of the wave, but only one graph is correctly labelled.
Which graph is correctly labelled?
A B
T λ
d d
a
0 0
x a x
0 0
C D
λ T
d d
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
Space for working

18
23 Which statement about sound waves in air at constant temperature is correct?
A Amplitude is inversely proportional to velocity.

B Frequency is inversely proportional to wavelength.
C Velocity is proportional to wavelength.
D Wavelength is proportional to amplitude.
24 A source of sound of constant power P is situated in an open space. The intensity I of sound at
distance r from this source is given by
I= P .
4πr 2
How does the amplitude a of the vibrating air molecules vary with the distance r from the source?
A a∝ 1 B a ∝ 12 C a∝r D a ∝ r2
r r
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

19
25 The basic principle of note production in a horn is to set up a stationary wave in an air column.
mouthpiece bell
horn
For the lowest note produced by a horn, a node is formed at the mouthpiece and the antinode is
formed at the bell. The frequency of this note is 75 Hz.
What are the frequencies of the next two higher notes for this air column?
first higher note second higher note

/ Hz / Hz
A 113 150
B 150 225
C 150 300
D 225 375
26 Which electromagnetic wave phenomenon is needed to explain the spectrum produced when
white light falls on a diffraction grating?
A coherence
B interference
C polarisation
D refraction
Space for working

20
27 A diffraction grating with 500 lines per mm is used to observe diffraction of monochromatic light of
wavelength 600 nm.
The light is passed through a narrow slit and the grating is placed so that its lines are parallel to
the slit. Light passes through the slit and then the grating.
grating
X
slit
light
Y
An observer views the slit through the grating at different angles, moving his head from X parallel
to the grating, through Y, opposite the slit, to Z parallel to the grating on the opposite side.
How many images of the slit does he see?
A 3 B 4 C 6 D 7
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

21
28 A potential difference is applied between two metal plates that are not parallel.
Which diagram shows the electric field between the plates?
A B
+ – + –
C D
+ – + –
Space for working

22
29 The diagram shows a charged particle as it approaches a pair of charged parallel plates in a
vacuum.
– – – – – – – –
+ + + + + + + +
Which row describes the horizontal and vertical components of its motion as it travels between
the plates?
horizontal component vertical component
A constant acceleration constant acceleration

B constant acceleration constant velocity
C constant velocity constant acceleration
D constant velocity constant velocity
30 Two parallel plates, a distance 25 mm apart, have a potential difference between them of
12 kV.
What is the force on an electron when it is in the uniform electric field between the plates?
A 4.8 × 10–20 N
B 7.7 × 10–20 N
C 4.8 × 10–17 N
D 7.7 × 10–14 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

23
A 1.0 × 101 B 5.0 × 106 C 6.3 × 1019 D 3.1 × 1025
32 A battery is marked 9.0 V.
What does this mean?
A Each coulomb of charge from the battery supplies 9.0 J of electrical energy to the whole
circuit.
B The battery supplies 9.0 J to an external circuit for each coulomb of charge.
C The potential difference across any component connected to the battery will be 9.0 V.
D There will always be 9.0 V across the battery terminals.
Space for working

24
33 The graphs show possible current-voltage (I-V ) relationships for a filament lamp and for a
semiconductor diode.
P Q R S
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
Which row best specifies the correct I-V graphs for the lamp and the diode?
semiconductor
filament lamp
diode
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

25
34 The resistance of a metal cube is measured by placing it between two parallel plates, as shown.
X Y
The cube has volume V and is made of a material with resistivity ρ. The connections to the cube
have negligible resistance.
Which expression gives the electrical resistance of the metal cube between X and Y?
1 2
3 3 ρ ρ
A ρV B ρV C 1
D 2
3 3
V V
35 The diagram shows part of a current-carrying circuit. The ammeter has negligible internal
resistance.
1.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
A
5.0 A 5.0 A
5.0 Ω
What is the reading on the ammeter?
A 0.7 A B 1.3 A C 1.5 A D 1.7 A
Space for working

26
36 Four resistors of equal value are connected as shown.
W Y
X Z
How will the powers to the resistors change when resistor W is removed?
A The powers to X, Y and Z will all increase.

B The power to X will decrease and the powers to Y and Z will increase.
C The power to X will increase and the powers to Y and Z will decrease.
D The power to X will increase and the powers to Y and Z will remain unaltered.
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

27
37 In the circuit shown, XY is a length L of uniform resistance wire. R1 and R2 are unknown resistors.
J is a sliding contact that joins the junction of R1 and R2 to points on XY through a small signal
lamp S.
– X x Y +
J
R1 R2
V1
To determine the ratio of the potential differences across R1 and R2, a point is found on XY at
V2
which the lamp is off. This point is at a distance x from X.
V1
V2
L x L−x x
A B C D
x L x L−x
27
38 The first artificial radioactive substance was made by bombarding aluminium, 13 Al , with
30
α-particles. This produced an unstable isotope of phosphorus, 15 P .
What was the by-product of this reaction?
A an α-particle
B a β-particle
C a γ-ray
D a neutron
Space for working

28
39 Uranium-238, 23892 U , decays by α-emission into a daughter product which in turn decays by
β-emission into a grand-daughter product.
What is the grand-daughter product?

234 234 234 230
A 90 Th B 91 Pa C 92 U D 90 Th
40 Which statement about nuclei is correct?
A Different isotopic nuclei have different proton numbers.

B For some nuclei, the nucleon number can be less than the proton number.
C In some nuclear processes, mass-energy is not conserved.
D Nucleon numbers of nuclei are unchanged by the emission of β-particles.
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/11/M/J/11

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*2977973239*

IB11 06_9702_12/4RP
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Stress has the same SI base units as
A force .
mass
B force .
length
C force .
area
D energy.
2 To check calculations, the units are put into the following equations together with the numbers.
Which equation must be incorrect?
A force = 300 J / 6 m
B power = 6000 J × 20 s
C time = 6 m / 30 m s–1
D velocity = 4 m s–2 × 30 s
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

5
3 In making reasonable estimates of physical quantities, which statement is not correct?
A The frequency of sound can be of the order of GHz.

B The wavelength of light can be of the order of 600 nm.
C The Young modulus can be of the order of 1011 Pa.
D Beta radiation is associated with one unit of negative charge.
4 The uncertainty in the value of the momentum of a trolley passing between two points X and Y
varies with the choice of measuring devices.
Measurements for the same trolley made by different instruments were recorded.
1 distance between X and Y using a metre rule with cm divisions = 0.55 m

2 distance between X and Y using a metre rule with mm divisions = 0.547 m
3 timings using a wristwatch measuring to the nearest 0.5 s at X = 0.0 s and at Y = 4.5 s
4 timings using light gates measuring to the nearest 0.1 s at X = 0.0 s and at Y = 4.3 s
5 mass of trolley using a balance measuring to the nearest g = 6.4 × 10–2 kg
6 mass of trolley using a balance measuring to the nearest 10 g = 6 × 10–2 kg
Which measurements, one for each quantity measured, lead to the least uncertainty in the value
of the momentum of the trolley?
A 1, 3 and 6 B 1, 4 and 6 C 2, 3 and 6 D 2, 4 and 5
Space for working

6
5 The time-base on a cathode-ray oscilloscope is set at 6 ms / cm.
A trace consisting of two pulses is recorded as shown in the diagram.
2.5 cm
4.5 cm
What is the time interval between the two pulses?
A 0.42 ms B 0.75 ms C 1.33 ms D 27 ms
6 A bullet is fired horizontally with speed v from a rifle. For a short time t after leaving the rifle, the
only force affecting its motion is gravity. The acceleration of free fall is g.
the horizontal distance travelled in time t
Which expression gives the value of ?
the vertical distance travelled in time t
A vt B v C 2vt D 2v
g gt g gt
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

7
7 A particle moves in the manner shown by the velocity-time graph.
The displacement of the particle has been measured so that it is zero at t = 0. Point Q refers to a
point in its motion.
velocity Q
2
/ m s–1
0
0 5 10 15 20 time / s
–2
Which row of the table is correct?
times for maximum acceleration at

displacement / s point Q / m s–2
A 2.5 12.5 2
B 5 15 2
C 2.5 12.5 0
D 5 15 0
Space for working

8
8 A tennis ball falls freely, in air, from the top of a tall building.
Which graph best represents the variation of distance s fallen with time t ?
A B
s s
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
s s
0 0
0 t 0 t
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

9
9 A small glider moves along a friction-free horizontal air track as shown below.
elastic buffer
glider
air track
air
At each end of the air track there is a perfectly elastic buffer.
Which graph represents the variation with time t of the velocity v of the glider as it moves
between the two buffers?
A B
v v
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
v v
0 0
0 t 0 t
Space for working

10
10 A force F is applied to a freely moving object. At one instant of time, the object has velocity v and
acceleration a.
Which quantities must be in the same direction?
A a and v only
B a and F only
C v and F only
D v, F and a
11 The momentum of an object changes from 160 kg m s–1 to 240 kg m s–1 in 2 s.
What is the mean resultant force on the object during the change?
A 40 N B 80 N C 200 N D 400 N
12 A car accelerates in a straight line.
A graph of the momentum of the car is plotted against time.
What is evaluated by finding the gradient of the graph at a particular time?
A the acceleration of the car

B the resultant force on the car
C the kinetic energy of the car
D the power supplied to the car
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

11
13 The diagram shows a particle P, travelling at speed v, about to collide with a stationary particle Q
of the same mass. The collision is perfectly elastic.
P Q
Which statement describes the motion of P and of Q immediately after the collision?
1 1
A P rebounds with speed 2
v and Q acquires speed 2
v.
B P rebounds with speed v and Q remains stationary.

1
C P and Q both travel in the same direction with speed 2
v.
D P comes to a standstill and Q acquires speed v.
14 A stone is projected horizontally in a vacuum and moves along the path shown.
path of stone
H
X
T
V
X is a point on this path. XV and XH are vertical and horizontal lines respectively through X. XT is
the tangent to the path at X.
Along which directions do forces act on the stone at X?
A XV only B XH only C XV and XH D XT only
Space for working

12
15 The diagrams all show a pair of equal forces acting on a metre rule.
Which diagram shows forces that provide a couple and zero resultant force?
A B C D
16 A uniform rod XY of weight 10.0 N is freely hinged to a wall at X. It is held horizontal by a force F
acting from Y at an angle of 30° to the horizontal, as shown.
wall
60° 30°
X Y
10.0 N
What is the value of F ?
A 5.0 N B 8.7 N C 10.0 N D 20.0 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

13
17 The diagram shows two fixed pins, Y and Z. A length of elastic is stretched between Y and Z and
around pin X, which is attached to a trolley.
Y
50 mm
X 80 mm P
trolley
30 mm Z
X is at the centre of the elastic and the trolley is to be propelled in the direction P at right angles
to YZ. The tension in the elastic is 4 N.
What is the force accelerating the trolley in the direction P when the trolley is released?
A 2.4 N B 3.2 N C 4.8 N D 6.4 N
18 An electric motor produces 120 W of useful mechanical output power. The efficiency of the motor
is 60 %.
Which row is correct?
electrical power waste heat power

input / W output / W
A 72 48
B 192 72
C 200 72
D 200 80
Space for working

14
19 A hammer with 10 J of kinetic energy hits a nail and pushes it 5.0 mm into a plank.
Both the hammer and nail come to rest after the collision.
What is the average force that acts on the nail while it moves the 5.0 mm?
A 0.050 N B 2.0 N C 50 N D 2000 N
20 The diagram shows two vessels, P and Q, both with sides inclined at 45°.
vessel P vessel Q
Vessel P tapers outwards and vessel Q tapers inwards, as shown.
Both vessels contain a liquid. The depth of the liquid in the vessels is the same. The liquid in
vessel P is twice as dense as the liquid in vessel Q.
pressure due to the liquid on the base of P

What is the ratio ?
pressure due to the liquid on the base of Q
2 2 1 1
A B C D
1 1 2 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

15
21 Two solid substances P and Q have atoms of mass MP and MQ respectively. They have nP and nQ
atoms per unit volume.
The density of P is greater than the density of Q.
What must be correct?
A MP > MQ
B nP > nQ
C MP nP > MQ nQ
MP M Q
D >
nP n Q
22 The table summarises some descriptions of evaporation.
Which row of the table is correct?
involves a reduction in the

involves a change in state occurs at a fixed
average kinetic energy
from liquid to vapour temperature
of the remaining atoms
A true true true

B true false true
C true false false
D false true false
Space for working

16
23 The behaviour of a wire under tensile stress may be described in terms of the Young modulus E
of the material of the wire and of the force per unit extension k of the wire.
For a wire of length L and cross-sectional area A, what is the relation between E and k ?
A E= A B E = kA C E = kL D E= L
kL L A kA
24 The diagram shows the structure of part of a mattress.
spring layer 1
layer 2
The manufacturer wants to design a softer mattress (one which will compress more for the same
load).
Which change will not have the desired effect?
A using more layers of springs

B using more springs per unit area
C using springs with a smaller spring constant
D using springs made from wire with a smaller Young modulus
25 In which order of magnitude are the frequencies of electromagnetic waves in the visible
spectrum?
A 1012 Hz B 1013 Hz C 1014 Hz D 1015 Hz
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

17
26 A transverse progressive wave is set up on a string.
The graph shows the variation with time of displacement for a point on this string.
displacement
X Y
0
0 time
The separation XY on the graph represents the ……1…… of the wave.
X and Y have equal ……2…… .
Which words correctly complete gaps 1 and 2?
1 2
A time period amplitudes

B time period displacements
C wavelength amplitudes
D wavelength displacements
27 If a wave can be polarised, it must be
A a longitudinal wave.
B an electromagnetic wave.
C a sound wave.
D a transverse wave.
Space for working

18
28 In which situation does diffraction occur?
A A wave bounces back from a surface.

B A wave passes from one medium into another.
C A wave passes through an aperture.
D Waves from two identical sources are superposed.
29 The diagrams show the arrangement of apparatus for a Young’s slits experiment and also part of
the pattern formed on the screen with a ruler placed next to it.
screen
laser
0.90 mm
light
5.0 m
dark
30 mm
bright
20 mm
A 4.8 × 10–7 m B 5.4 × 10–7 m C 3.2 × 10–6 m D 3.4 × 10–6 m
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

19
30 The diagram shows two parallel metal plates connected to a d.c. power supply through a resistor.
There is a uniform electric field in the region between the plates.
Which change would cause a decrease in the strength of the electric field?
A a small increase in the distance between the plates

B a small increase in the potential difference between the plates
C a small increase in the value of the resistor
D a small increase to the area of both plates
Space for working

20
31 In each electric field diagram, a positively charged particle is moved from X to Y.
In which diagram would the particle experience an increasing repulsive force?
A B
Y X
X Y
C D
X Y
Y X
32 What describes the electric potential difference between two points in a wire that carries a
current?
A the force required to move a unit positive charge between the points
B the ratio of the energy dissipated between the points to the current
C the ratio of the power dissipated between the points to the current
D the ratio of the power dissipated between the points to the charge moved
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

21
33 A cylindrical piece of a soft, electrically-conducting material has resistance R. It is rolled out so

that its length is doubled but its volume stays constant.
What is its new resistance?
A R B R C 2R D 4R
2
34 A source of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E has a constant internal resistance r and is connected to
an external variable resistor of resistance R.
As R is increased from a value below r to a value above r, which statement is correct?
A The terminal potential difference remains constant.

B The current in the circuit increases.
C The e.m.f. of the source increases.
D The largest output power is obtained when R reaches r.
35 Which graph best represents the way in which the current I through a thermistor depends upon
the potential difference V across it?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
Space for working

22
36 Safety on railways is increased by using several electrical switches.
In the diagram, switches P, Q, R, S and T control the current through a green lamp.
P Q
S
R
green lamp
T
Which row does not allow the green lamp to light?
P Q R S T
A closed closed closed open closed

B closed open closed closed open
C closed open open closed closed
D open open closed open closed
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

23
37 The diagram shows a fixed resistor and a light-dependent resistor (LDR) in series with a constant
low-voltage supply.
+ –
When the LDR is in the dark, the fixed resistor and the LDR have the same value of resistance.
Light is shone on the LDR.
What happens to the potential differences across the two components?
p.d. across resistor p.d. across LDR
A decreased increased
B increased decreased
C no change increased
D no change decreased
38 The diagram shows a d.c. circuit.
6Ω
P Q
3Ω 6Ω
6Ω
What is the resistance between the points P and Q due to the resistance network?
A 0.47 Ω B 2.1 Ω C 3.0 Ω D 21 Ω
Space for working

24
238
39 The uranium nucleus 92 U undergoes α-decay, producing nucleus X.
Nucleus X undergoes β-decay, producing nucleus Y.
For nucleus Y, what are the values of the proton number and nucleon number?
A 89 234
B 89 236
C 91 234
D 91 236
40 Radon-220 is radioactive and decays to polonium-216 with the emission of an α-particle. The
equation for the radioactive decay is shown.
220 216
86 Rn → 84 Po + 42 He
How many neutrons are in the radon and polonium nuclei?
Rn Po
A 86 84
B 134 132
C 220 212
D 220 216
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/12/M/J/11

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*1314855051*

IB11 06_9702_13/FP
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 A force of 5.0 N pushes a ball due north and another force of 3.0 N pushes it due east.
5.0 N
3.0 N
What is the magnitude of the net force acting on the ball?
A 2.8 N B 4.0 N C 5.8 N D 8.0 N
Which row gives the sub-multiples or multiples represented by pico (p) and giga (G)?
pico (p) giga (G)
A 10–9 109
B 10–9 1012
C 10–12 109
D 10–12 1012

Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

5
4 The diagram shows an experiment to measure the speed of a small ball falling at constant speed
through a clear liquid in a glass tube.
1.50 s 115 mm
3.50 s 385 mm
There are two marks on the tube. The top mark is positioned at 115 ± 1 mm on the adjacent rule
and the lower mark at 385 ± 1 mm. The ball passes the top mark at 1.50 ± 0.02 s and passes the
lower mark at 3.50 ± 0.02 s.
−
The constant speed of the ball is calculated by 385 115 = 270 = 135 mm s–1.
3.50 − 1.50 2.00
Which expression calculates the fractional uncertainty in the value of this speed?
A 2 + 0.04
270 2.00
B 2 – 0.04
270 2.00
C 1 × 0.02
270 2.00
D 1 ÷ 0.02
270 2.00
Space for working

6
5 The diagram shows a trace of a wave on a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
The vertical and horizontal gridlines have a spacing of 1.0 cm. The voltage scaling is 4 V cm–1 and
the time scaling is 5 ms cm–1.
1 cm
1 cm
What are the amplitude and period of the wave?
amplitude / V period / ms
A 1.5 4
B 5.0 10
C 6.0 20
D 12.0 20
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

7
6 A body has a weight of 58.9 N when on the Earth. On the Moon, the acceleration of free fall is
1.64 m s–2.
What are the weight and the mass of the body when it is on the Moon?
weight / N mass / kg
A 9.85 1.00
B 9.85 6.00
C 58.9 1.00
D 58.9 6.00
Space for working

8
acceleration
0
0 time
Which graph shows the variation with time of the velocity of the object?
A B
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
velocity velocity
0
0
time
0
0 time
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

9
8 A ball is released from rest at time zero. After 1.0 s it bounces inelastically from a horizontal
surface and rebounds, reaching the top of its first bounce after 1.5 s.
10
velocity
/ m s–1
5
0 time / s
0 0.5 1.0
. 1.5
–5
What is the total displacement of the ball from its original position after 1.5 s?
A 1.25 m B 3.75 m C 5.00 m D 6.25 m
9 A molecule of mass m travelling horizontally with velocity u hits a vertical wall at right-angles to its
velocity. It then rebounds horizontally with the same speed.
What is its change in momentum?
A zero B mu C – mu D – 2mu
Space for working

10
10 A body of mass m, moving at velocity v, collides with a stationary body of the same mass and
sticks to it.
Which row describes the momentum and kinetic energy of the two bodies after the collision?

1
A mv 4
mv 2
1
B mv 8
mv 2
1
C 2mv 2
mv 2
D 2mv mv 2
30 N
20 N
20 N
30 N
Which row describes the resultant force and resultant torque on the object?
A zero zero
B zero non-zero
C non-zero zero
D non-zero non-zero
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

11
12 A uniform metre rule of mass 100 g is supported by a pivot at the 40 cm mark and a string at the
100 cm mark. The string passes round a frictionless pulley and carries a mass of 20 g as shown in
the diagram.
0 20 40 60 80 100
20 g
At which mark on the rule must a 50 g mass be suspended so that the rule balances?
Space for working

12
13 A cable car of weight W hangs in equilibrium from its cable at point P.
The cable has tensions T1 and T2 as shown.
T1
cable
P
T2
weight W
cable car
Which diagram correctly represents the forces acting at point P?
A B C D
T2 T2 T2 T2
W T1 W T1 W T1 W T1
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

13
14 A steel sphere is dropped vertically onto a horizontal metal plate. The sphere hits the plate with a
speed u, leaves it at a speed v, and rebounds vertically to half of its original height.
Which expression gives the value of v ?

u
A 1 B 1 C 1 D 1– 1
22 2 2 2
15 A block of mass 2.0 kg is released from rest on a slope. It travels 7.0 m down the slope and falls a
vertical distance of 3.0 m. The block experiences a frictional force parallel to the slope of 5.0 N.
2.0 kg
7.0 m
3.0 m
What is the speed of the block after falling this distance?
A 4.9 m s–1 B 6.6 m s–1 C 8.6 m s–1 D 10.1 m s–1
16 A body travelling with a speed of 10 m s–1 has kinetic energy 1500 J.
If the speed of the body is increased to 40 m s–1, what is its new kinetic energy?
A 4500 J B 6000 J C 24 000 J D 1 350 000 J
Space for working

14
17 A man has a mass of 80 kg. He ties himself to one end of a rope which passes over a single fixed
pulley. He pulls on the other end of the rope to lift himself up at an average speed of 50 cm s–1.
What is the average useful power at which he is working?
A 40 W B 0.39 kW C 4.0 kW D 39 kW
A boiling
B evaporation
C freezing
D melting
19 1.5 m3 of water is mixed with 0.50 m3 of alcohol. The density of water is 1000 kg m–3 and the
density of alcohol is 800 kg m–3.
What is the density of the mixture with volume 2.0 m3?
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

15
20 The Young modulus E can be determined from measurements made when a wire is stretched.
Which quantities would be measured in order to determine E ?
A mass of original length

stretching load of wire
B mass of new length cross-sectional

diameter of wire
stretching load of wire area of wire
C mass of wire original length cross-sectional new length

of wire area of wire of wire
D mass of wire new length

of wire
Space for working

16
force T
S
0
0 V extension

B beyond point S but before point T
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

17
22 A source of sound of constant power P is situated in an open space. The intensity I of sound at
distance r from this source is given by
I= P .
4πr 2
How does the amplitude a of the vibrating air molecules vary with the distance r from the source?
A a∝ 1 B a ∝ 12 C a∝r D a ∝ r2
r r
23 The four graphs represent a progressive wave on a stretched string. Graphs A and B show how
the displacement d varies with distance x along the string at one instant. Graphs C and D show
how the displacement d varies with time t at a particular value of x.
The labels on the graphs are intended to show the wavelength λ, the period T and the amplitude
a of the wave, but only one graph is correctly labelled.
Which graph is correctly labelled?
A B
T λ
d d
a
0 0
x a x
0 0
C D
λ T
d d
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
Space for working

18
24 Which statement about sound waves in air at constant temperature is correct?
A Amplitude is inversely proportional to velocity.

B Frequency is inversely proportional to wavelength.
C Velocity is proportional to wavelength.
D Wavelength is proportional to amplitude.
25 Which electromagnetic wave phenomenon is needed to explain the spectrum produced when
white light falls on a diffraction grating?
A coherence
B interference
C polarisation
D refraction
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

19
26 A diffraction grating with 500 lines per mm is used to observe diffraction of monochromatic light of
wavelength 600 nm.
The light is passed through a narrow slit and the grating is placed so that its lines are parallel to
the slit. Light passes through the slit and then the grating.
grating
X
slit
light
Y
An observer views the slit through the grating at different angles, moving his head from X parallel
to the grating, through Y, opposite the slit, to Z parallel to the grating on the opposite side.
How many images of the slit does he see?
A 3 B 4 C 6 D 7
Space for working

20
mouthpiece bell
horn
For the lowest note produced by a horn, a node is formed at the mouthpiece and the antinode is
formed at the bell. The frequency of this note is 75 Hz.

/ Hz / Hz
A 113 150
B 150 225
C 150 300
D 225 375
28 Two parallel plates, a distance 25 mm apart, have a potential difference between them of
12 kV.
What is the force on an electron when it is in the uniform electric field between the plates?
A 4.8 × 10–20 N
B 7.7 × 10–20 N
C 4.8 × 10–17 N
D 7.7 × 10–14 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

21
29 A potential difference is applied between two metal plates that are not parallel.
Which diagram shows the electric field between the plates?
A B
+ – + –
C D
+ – + –
Space for working

22
30 The diagram shows a charged particle as it approaches a pair of charged parallel plates in a
vacuum.
– – – – – – – –
+ + + + + + + +
Which row describes the horizontal and vertical components of its motion as it travels between
the plates?
A constant acceleration constant acceleration

B constant acceleration constant velocity
C constant velocity constant acceleration
D constant velocity constant velocity
31 A battery is marked 9.0 V.
What does this mean?
A Each coulomb of charge from the battery supplies 9.0 J of electrical energy to the whole
circuit.
B The battery supplies 9.0 J to an external circuit for each coulomb of charge.
C The potential difference across any component connected to the battery will be 9.0 V.
D There will always be 9.0 V across the battery terminals.
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

23
A 1.0 × 101 B 5.0 × 106 C 6.3 × 1019 D 3.1 × 1025
33 Four resistors of equal value are connected as shown.
W Y
X Z
How will the powers to the resistors change when resistor W is removed?
A The powers to X, Y and Z will all increase.

B The power to X will decrease and the powers to Y and Z will increase.
C The power to X will increase and the powers to Y and Z will decrease.
D The power to X will increase and the powers to Y and Z will remain unaltered.
Space for working

24
34 The graphs show possible current-voltage (I-V ) relationships for a filament lamp and for a
P Q R S
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
Which row best specifies the correct I-V graphs for the lamp and the diode?
semiconductor
filament lamp
diode
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

25
35 The resistance of a metal cube is measured by placing it between two parallel plates, as shown.
X Y
The cube has volume V and is made of a material with resistivity ρ. The connections to the cube
have negligible resistance.
Which expression gives the electrical resistance of the metal cube between X and Y?
1 2
3 3 ρ ρ
A ρV B ρV C 1
D 2
3 3
V V
Space for working

26
36 In the circuit shown, XY is a length L of uniform resistance wire. R1 and R2 are unknown resistors.
J is a sliding contact that joins the junction of R1 and R2 to points on XY through a small signal
lamp S.
– X x Y +
J
R1 R2
V1
To determine the ratio of the potential differences across R1 and R2, a point is found on XY at
V2
which the lamp is off. This point is at a distance x from X.
V1
V2
L x L−x x
A B C D
x L x L−x
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

27
37 The diagram shows part of a current-carrying circuit. The ammeter has negligible internal
resistance.
1.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
A
5.0 A 5.0 A
5.0 Ω
A 0.7 A B 1.3 A C 1.5 A D 1.7 A
38 Which statement about nuclei is correct?
A Different isotopic nuclei have different proton numbers.

B For some nuclei, the nucleon number can be less than the proton number.
C In some nuclear processes, mass-energy is not conserved.
D Nucleon numbers of nuclei are unchanged by the emission of β-particles.
Space for working

28
27
30
A an α-particle
B a β-particle
C a γ-ray
D a neutron
40 Uranium-238, 23892 U , decays by α-emission into a daughter product which in turn decays by
β-emission into a grand-daughter product.
What is the grand-daughter product?

234 234 234 230
A 90 Th B 91 Pa C 92 U D 90 Th
Space for working
© UCLES 2011 9702/13/M/J/11

* 1 2 7 9 2 1 4 4 4 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour

The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or For Examiner’s Use
part question.
1
Total
DC (NF/SW) 29916/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
gravitational potential, φ =–
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4

Examiner’s
Use
1 Measurements made for a sample of metal wire are shown in Fig. 1.1.
quantity measurement uncertainty
length 1750 mm ± 3 mm
diameter 0.38 mm ± 0.01 mm
resistance 7.5 Ω ± 0.2 Ω
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the appropriate instruments used to make each of these measurements.
(i) length
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) diameter
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) resistance
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Show that the resistivity of the metal is calculated to be 4.86 × 10–7 Ω m.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the uncertainty in the resistivity.
uncertainty = ± .......................................... Ω m [4]

© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11
5
(c) Use the answers in (b) to express the resistivity with its uncertainty to the appropriate For
number of significant figures. Examiner’s
Use
resistivity = .......................................... ± .......................................... Ω m [1]

6
2 (a) Explain what is meant by work done. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A car is travelling along a road that has a uniform downhill gradient, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
25 m s–1
7.5°
Fig. 2.1
The car has a total mass of 850 kg. The angle of the road to the horizontal is 7.5°.
Calculate the component of the weight of the car down the slope.
component of weight = ............................................. N [2]
(c) The car in (b) is travelling at a constant speed of 25 m s–1. The driver then applies the
brakes to stop the car. The constant force resisting the motion of the car is 4600 N.
(i) Show that the deceleration of the car with the brakes applied is 4.1 m s–2.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the distance the car travels from when the brakes are applied until the
car comes to rest.
distance = ............................................. m [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

7
(iii) Calculate For

Examiner’s
1. the loss of kinetic energy of the car, Use
loss of kinetic energy = .............................................. J [2]
2. the work done by the resisting force of 4600 N.
work done = .............................................. J [1]
(iv) The quantities in (iii) part 1 and in (iii) part 2 are not equal. Explain why these two
quantities are not equal.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

8
3 (a) Explain what is meant by centre of gravity. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Define moment of a force.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A student is being weighed. The student, of weight W, stands 0.30 m from end A of a
uniform plank AB, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
P
A B
0.30 m 0.20 m
W 80 N 70 N
0.50 m
2.0 m
The plank has weight 80 N and length 2.0 m. A pivot P supports the plank and is 0.50 m
from end A.
A weight of 70 N is moved to balance the weight of the student. The plank is in equilibrium
when the weight is 0.20 m from end B.
(i) State the two conditions necessary for the plank to be in equilibrium.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

9
(ii) Determine the weight W of the student. For

Examiner’s
Use
W = ............................................. N [3]
(iii) If only the 70 N weight is moved, there is a maximum weight of student that can
be determined using the arrangement shown in Fig. 3.1. State and explain one
change that can be made to increase this maximum weight.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

10
4 (a) Define, for a wire, For

Examiner’s
(i) stress, Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) strain.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A wire of length 1.70 m hangs vertically from a fixed point, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
wire
25.0 N
Fig. 4.1
The wire has cross-sectional area 5.74 × 10–8 m2 and is made of a material that has a
Young modulus of 1.60 × 1011 Pa. A load of 25.0 N is hung from the wire.
(i) Calculate the extension of the wire.
extension = ............................................. m [3]
(ii) The same load is hung from a second wire of the same material. This wire is
twice the length but the same volume as the first wire. State and explain how the
extension of the second wire compares with that of the first wire.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

11
5 (a) A variable resistor is used to control the current in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
12 V
I1 R
6.0 Ω
Fig. 5.1
The variable resistor is connected in series with a 12 V power supply of negligible internal
resistance, an ammeter and a 6.0 Ω resistor. The resistance R of the variable resistor
can be varied between 0 and 12 Ω.
(i) The maximum possible current in the circuit is 2.0 A. Calculate the minimum
possible current.
minimum current = .............................................. A [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the variation with R of current I1 in the circuit.
2.0
I1 / A
1.0
0
0 4 8 12 R/Ω
[2]
Fig. 5.2

12
(b) The variable resistor in (a) is now connected as a potential divider, as shown in Fig. 5.3. For
Examiner’s
Use
12 V
I2
A
6.0 Ω
Fig. 5.3
Calculate the maximum possible and minimum possible current I2 in the ammeter.
maximum I2 = ................................................... A
minimum I2 = ................................................... A
[2]
(c) (i) Sketch on Fig. 5.4 the I – V characteristic of a filament lamp.
0
0
V
[2]
Fig. 5.4
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

13
(ii) The resistor of resistance 6.0 Ω is replaced with a filament lamp in the circuits of For
Fig. 5.1 and Fig. 5.3. State an advantage of using the circuit of Fig. 5.3, compared Examiner’s
to the circuit of Fig 5.1, when using the circuits to vary the brightness of the filament Use
lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

14
6 (a) State two assumptions of the simple kinetic model of a gas. For
Examiner’s
1. ...................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Use the kinetic model of gases and Newton’s laws of motion to explain how a gas exerts
a pressure on the sides of its container.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

15
7 (a) Explain the term interference. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A ripple tank is used to demonstrate interference between water waves.
Describe
(i) the apparatus used to produce two sources of coherent waves that have circular
wavefronts,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) how the pattern of interfering waves may be observed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
16
(c) A wave pattern produced in (b) is shown in Fig. 7.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 7.1
Solid lines on Fig. 7.1 represent crests.
On Fig. 7.1,
(i) draw two lines to show where maxima would be seen (label each of these lines
with the letter X), [1]
(ii) draw one line to show where minima would be seen (label this line with the letter N).
[1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/21/M/J/11

* 0 6 5 9 9 2 5 2 3 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

Total
DC (NF/DJ) 29959/4
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4

Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) Distinguish between scalar quantities and vector quantities.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In the following list, underline all the scalar quantities.
acceleration force kinetic energy mass power weight [1]
(c) A stone is thrown with a horizontal velocity of 20 m s–1 from the top of a cliff 15 m high.
The path of the stone is shown in Fig. 1.1.
20 m s–1
cliff 15 m
ground
Fig. 1.1
Air resistance is negligible.
For this stone,
(i) calculate the time to fall 15 m,
time = .............................................. s [2]
(ii) calculate the magnitude of the resultant velocity after falling 15 m,
resultant velocity = ........................................ m s–1 [3]

© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11
5
(iii) describe the difference between the displacement of the stone and the distance For
that it travels. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

6
2 (a) A sphere of radius R is moving through a fluid with constant speed v. There is a frictional For
force F acting on the sphere, which is given by the expression Examiner’s
Use
F = 6πDRv
where D depends on the fluid.
(i) Show that the SI base units of the quantity D are kg m–1 s–1.
[3]
(ii) A raindrop of radius 1.5 mm falls vertically in air at a velocity of 3.7 m s–1. The value
of D for air is 6.6 × 10–4 kg m–1 s–1. The density of water is 1000 kg m–3.
Calculate
1. the magnitude of the frictional force F,
F = ............................................. N [1]
2. the acceleration of the raindrop.
acceleration = ........................................ m s–2 [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

7
(b) The variation with time t of the speed v of the raindrop in (a) is shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
0
0 t
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the variation with time of the acceleration of the raindrop.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) A second raindrop has a radius that is smaller than that given in (a). On Fig. 2.1,
sketch the variation of speed with time for this second raindrop. [2]

8
3 (a) (i) Explain what is meant by work done. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Define power.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows part of a fairground ride with a carriage on rails.
9.5 m s–1 4.1 m

30°
Fig. 3.1
The carriage and passengers have a total mass of 600 kg. The carriage is travelling at a
speed of 9.5 m s–1 towards a slope inclined at 30° to the horizontal. The carriage comes
to rest after travelling up the slope to a vertical height of 4.1 m.
(i) Calculate the kinetic energy, in kJ, of the carriage and passengers as they travel
towards the slope.
kinetic energy = ............................................ kJ [3]
(ii) Show that the gain in potential energy of the carriage and passengers is 24 kJ.
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

9
(iii) Calculate the work done against the resistive force as the carriage moves up the For
slope. Examiner’s
Use
work done = ............................................ kJ [1]
(iv) Use your answer in (iii) to calculate the resistive force acting against the carriage
as it moves up the slope.
resistive force = ............................................. N [2]

10
4 A student measures the Young modulus of a metal in the form of a wire. For
Examiner’s
(a) Describe, with the aid of a diagram, the apparatus that could be used. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe the method used to obtain the required measurements.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

11
(c) Describe how the measurements taken can be used to determine the Young modulus. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]

12
5 (a) For a cell, explain the terms For

Examiner’s
(i) electromotive force (e.m.f.), Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) internal resistance.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The circuit of Fig. 5.1 shows two batteries A and B and a resistor R connected in
series.
3.0 V 12 V
A B
0.10 Ω 0.20 Ω
Fig. 5.1
Battery A has an e.m.f. of 3.0 V and an internal resistance of 0.10 Ω. Battery B has an
e.m.f. of 12 V and an internal resistance of 0.20 Ω. Resistor R has a resistance of 3.3 Ω.
(i) Apply Kirchhoff’s second law to calculate the current in the circuit.
current = .............................................. A [2]
(ii) Calculate the power transformed by battery B.
power = ............................................. W [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

13
(iii) Calculate the total energy lost per second in resistor R and the internal For
resistances. Examiner’s
Use
energy lost per second = ......................................... J s–1 [2]
(c) The circuit of Fig. 5.1 may be used to store energy in battery A. Suggest how your
answers in (b) support this statement.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
6 (a) Apparatus used to produce interference fringes is shown in Fig. 6.1. The apparatus is For
not drawn to scale. Examiner’s
Use
two slits
B bright fringe
P dark fringe
LASER C bright fringe
screen
Laser light is incident on two slits. The laser provides light of a single wavelength.
The light from the two slits produces a fringe pattern on the screen. A bright fringe is
produced at C and the next bright fringe is at B. A dark fringe is produced at P.
(i) Explain why one laser and two slits are used, instead of two lasers, to produce a
visible fringe pattern on the screen.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State the phase difference between the waves that meet at
1. B ............................................. [1]
2. P ............................................. [1]
(iii) 1. State the principle of superposition.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. Use the principle of superposition to explain the dark fringe at P.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

15
(b) In Fig. 6.1 the distance from the two slits to the screen is 1.8 m. The distance CP is For
2.3 mm and the distance between the slits is 0.25 mm. Examiner’s
Calculate the wavelength of the light provided by the laser. Use
wavelength = ........................................... nm [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/22/M/J/11

* 8 9 5 5 3 1 3 3 5 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour

part question.
1
Total
DC (CW/DJ) 29964/5
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4
1 (a) For each of the following, tick [✓] one box to indicate whether the experimental technique For
would reduce random error, systematic error or neither. The first row has been completed Examiner’s
as an example. Use
random error systematic error neither

keeping your eye
in line with the
scale and the
✓
liquid level for a
single reading of
a thermometer
averaging many
readings of the
time taken for a
ball to roll down a
slope
using a linear
scale on an
ammeter
correcting for
a non-zero
reading when a
micrometer screw
gauge is closed
[2]
(b) The measurement of a particular time interval is repeated many times. The readings are
found to vary. The results are shown in Fig. 1.1.
number
8
of readings
0
10.0 10.2 10.4 10.6 10.8
reading of time interval / s
Fig. 1.1
The true value of the time interval is 10.1 s.
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

5
(i) State how the readings on Fig. 1.1 show the presence of For
Examiner’s
1. a systematic error, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. a random error.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State the expected changes to Fig. 1.1 for experimental measurements that are
1. more accurate,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. more precise.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

6
2 A climber is supported by a rope on a vertical wall, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
P
18°
wall R
Fig. 2.1
The weight W of the climber is 520 N. The rope, of negligible weight, is attached to the climber
and to a fixed point P where it makes an angle of 18° to the vertical. The reaction force R
acts at right-angles to the wall.
The climber is in equilibrium.
(a) State the conditions necessary for the climber to be in equilibrium.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Complete Fig. 2.2 by drawing a labelled vector triangle to represent the forces acting on
the climber.
Fig. 2.2
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

7
(c) Resolve forces or use your vector triangle to calculate For

Examiner’s
(i) the tension T in the rope, Use
T = ............................................. N [2]
(ii) the reaction force R.
R = ............................................. N [1]
(d) The climber moves up the wall and the angle the rope makes with the vertical increases.
Explain why the magnitude of the tension in the rope increases.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

8
3 A helicopter has a cable hanging from it towards the sea below, as shown in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
helicopter
cable
sea
Fig. 3.1
A man of mass 80 kg rescues a child of mass 50.5 kg. The two are attached to the cable
and are lifted from the sea to the helicopter. The lifting process consists of an initial uniform
acceleration followed by a period of constant velocity and then completed by a final uniform
deceleration.
(a) Calculate the combined weight of the man and child.
weight = ............................................. N [1]
(b) Calculate the tension in the cable during
(i) the initial acceleration of 0.570 m s–2,
tension = ............................................. N [2]
(ii) the period of constant velocity of 2.00 m s–1.
tension = ............................................. N [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

9
(c) During the final deceleration the tension in the cable is 1240 N. Calculate this For
deceleration. Examiner’s
Use
deceleration = ........................................ m s–2 [2]
(d) (i) Calculate the time over which the man and child are
1. moving with uniform acceleration,
time = .............................................. s [1]

2. moving with uniform deceleration.
time = .............................................. s [1]
(ii) The time over which the man and child are moving with constant velocity is 20 s.
On Fig. 3.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time of the velocity of the
man and child for the complete lifting process.
2.0
velocity
/ m s–1
1.0
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
time / s
Fig. 3.2
[2]

10
4 (a) State Hooke’s Law. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spring is compressed by applying a force. The variation with compression x of the
force F is shown in Fig. 4.1.
60
F/N
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
x / mm
Fig. 4.1
(i) Calculate the spring constant.
spring constant = ....................................... N m–1 [1]
(ii) Show that the work done in compressing the spring by 36 mm is 0.81 J.
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

11
(c) A child’s toy uses the spring in (b) to shoot a small ball vertically upwards. The ball has For
a mass of 25 g. The toy is shown in Fig. 4.2. Examiner’s
Use
ball trigger/release for spring

spring
Fig. 4.2
(i) The spring in the toy is compressed by 36 mm. The spring is released.
Assume all the strain energy in the spring is converted to kinetic energy of the ball.
Using the result in (b)(ii), calculate the speed with which the ball leaves the spring.
speed = ........................................ m s–1 [2]
(ii) Determine the compression of the spring required for the ball to leave the spring
with twice the speed determined in (i).
compression = .......................................... mm [2]
(iii) Determine the ratio
maximum possible height for compression in (i) .

maximum possible height for compression in (ii)
ratio = ................................................. [2]

12
5 (a) (i) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the I – V characteristic for a filament lamp. For
Examiner’s
Use
I/A
0
0
V/V
Fig. 5.1
[2]
(ii) Explain how the resistance of the lamp may be calculated for any voltage from its
I – V characteristic.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Two identical filament lamps are connected first in series, and then in parallel, to a 12 V
power supply that has negligible internal resistance. The circuits are shown in Fig. 5.2
and Fig. 5.3 respectively.
12 V 12 V
Fig. 5.2 Fig. 5.3
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

13
(i) State and explain why the resistance of each lamp when they are connected in For
series is different from the resistance of each lamp when they are connected in Examiner’s
parallel. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) Each lamp is marked with a rating ‘12 V, 50 W’. Calculate the total resistance of the
circuit for the two lamps connected such that each lamp uses this power.
total resistance = ............................................. Ω [3]

14
6 (a) A transverse progressive wave travels along a stretched string from left to right. The For
shape of part of the string at a particular instant is shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
8.0 P
6.0
displacement
/ mm
4.0
2.0
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
–2.0 distance along string / cm
–4.0
–6.0
Q
–8.0
Fig. 6.1
The frequency of the wave is 15 Hz.

For this wave, use Fig. 6.1 to determine
(i) the amplitude,
amplitude = .......................................... mm [1]
(ii) the phase difference between the points P and Q on the string,
phase difference = ................................................. [1]
(iii) the speed of the wave.
speed = ........................................ m s–1 [2]
(b) The period of vibration of the wave is T. The wave moves forward from the position
shown in Fig 6.1 for a time 0.25 T. On Fig. 6.1, sketch the new position of the wave. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

15
(c) Another stretched string is used to form a stationary wave. Part of this wave, at a For
particular instant, is shown in Fig. 6.2. Examiner’s
Use
X Y
Fig. 6.2
The points on the string are at their maximum displacement.
(i) State the phase difference between the particles labelled X and Y.
phase difference = ................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain the following terms used to describe stationary waves on a string:
antinode: ...................................................................................................................
node: ........................................................................................................................
[1]
(iii) State the number of antinodes shown on Fig. 6.2 for this wave.
number of antinodes = ................................................. [1]
(iv) The period of vibration of this wave is τ. On Fig. 6.2, sketch the stationary wave
0.25 τ after the instant shown in Fig. 6.2. [1]

16
7 (a) Explain the difference in densities in solids, liquids and gases using ideas of the spacing For
between molecules. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A hydrogen nucleus (proton) may be assumed to be a sphere of radius 1 × 10–15 m.

Calculate the density of a hydrogen nucleus.
density = ...................................... kg m–3 [3]
(c) The density of hydrogen gas in a pressurised cylinder is 4 kg m–3. Suggest a reason why
this density is much less than your answer in (b).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/23/M/J/11

* 9 2 7 4 8 8 8 2 1 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/31
Advanced Practical Skills 1 May/June 2011
2 hours

Total
DC (KN/CGW) 34136/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11

3

For
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the characteristics of a circuit vary with its
resistance.
(a) Connect the circuit of Fig. 1.1.
You should expect to spend at least 15 minutes setting up your circuit.
V
A B
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Close the switch.
(ii) Adjust the variable resistor until the current reading is at a maximum.
(iii) Measure and record the ammeter reading Ι and the voltmeter reading V.
Ι = .....................................................
V = .....................................................
[2]

4
(c) Adjust the variable resistor and repeat (b)(iii) until you have six sets of values of Ι
For
and V. Include values of 1
– and 1
– in your table. Examiner’s
Ι V Use
Open the switch when you have taken all your readings.
[10]
(d) (i) Plot a graph of 1

– on the y-axis against 1
– on the x-axis. [3]
Ι V
(ii) Draw the straight line of best fit. [1]
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11
5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) It is suggested that the quantities Ι and V are related by the equation
For
Examiner’s
1 3R + k
– = ––– Use
Ι V
where R and k are constants.
Use your answer in (d)(iii) to determine the value of R.

R = ................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11

7

For
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment you will investigate how the motion of a metre rule balanced on a cylinder
depends on the diameter of the cylinder.
(a) Measure and record the thickness t of the metre rule.
t = ................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Measure and record the diameter d of cylinder A.
d = ................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate w, where w = d – t.
w = ................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Use modelling clay to secure cylinder A to the bench and balance the metre rule on
the cylinder, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
metre rule
modelling cylinder A
clay
bench
Fig. 2.1

8
(ii) Move one end of the rule downwards.

For
Release the rule and watch the movement. Examiner’s
The end of the rule will move upwards and then downwards again, completing a Use
swing as shown in Fig. 2.2.
The time taken for each complete swing is T.
one
complete
swing
Fig. 2.2
By timing several of these complete swings, determine an accurate value for T.
T = ................................................. [2]
(d) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of T.
percentage uncertainty = ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11

9
(e) Repeat (b) and (c) for cylinder B.

For
Examiner’s
Use
d = .....................................................
w = .....................................................
T = .....................................................
[4]
(f) It is suggested that the quantities T and w are related by the equation
k
T 2 = ––
w
first value of k = .....................................................
second value of k = .....................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]

10
For
(g) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this Examiner’s
experiment. Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/31/M/J/11

* 5 2 3 4 6 9 2 3 0 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours

Total
DC (NF/SW) 34785/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

3
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the equilibrium position of a pivoted wooden strip Use
changes when a horizontal force is applied.
(a) Thread the string over the pulley and suspend the mass hanger from the end loop of the
string, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
nail
wooden strip
string
H
mass
hanger h
m
bench
Fig. 1.1
(b) Measure and record the height H of the nail above the bench.
H = .......................................... cm [1]
(c) Record the mass m that is suspended from the string.
m = ......................................................
(d) (i) Adjust the height of the pulley until the string is parallel to the bench. Measure and
record the height h of the string above the bench.
h = .......................................... cm [1]
(ii) Calculate the value of (H – h ).
(H – h ) = ................................................ cm

4
(e) By adding masses to the hanger, change the total suspended mass m. Repeat (c) and For
(d) until you have six sets of values for m and h. Examiner’s
Use
In your table of results include columns for the values of m 2 and 1 .

(H – h)2
[10]
(f) (i) Plot a graph of 1 on the y-axis against m 2 on the x-axis. [3]
(H – h)2

gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(g) It is suggested that the quantities h, H and m are related by the equation For
Examiner’s
Use
1 = abm 2 + b
(H – h)2
Using your answers from (f)(iii), determine the values of a and b.

a = ......................................................
b = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

7
BLANK PAGE

8
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment you will investigate the deflection of a metre rule when two loads are Use
placed on it.
(a) (i) Position a metre rule on the two supports as shown in Fig. 2.1, with the supports
15.0 cm from each end of the rule.
h
bench
15.0 cm 15.0 cm
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Determine the distance y between the two supports.
y = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Measure the height h of the bottom edge of the mid-point of the rule above the bench.
h = .................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Position the two 500 g masses on top of the rule, with a mass 5.0 cm from each end
of the rule, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
x
mass mass
h1
bench
5.0 cm 5.0 cm
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Determine the distance x of a mass from its nearest support.
x = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Measure the height h1 of the bottom edge of the mid-point of the rule above the
bench.
h1 = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

9
For
(c) (i) Calculate the deflection d of the mid-point of the rule, where d = h1 – h. Examiner’s
Use
d = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d.
percentage uncertainty = .................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Remove the two 500 g masses and reposition the two supports 25.0 cm from each
end of the rule.
(ii) Repeat (a)(ii) and (a)(iii).
y = ......................................................
h = ......................................................
(e) (i) Position the two 500 g masses on top of the rule, with a mass 15.0 cm from each
end of the rule.
(ii) Repeat (b)(ii), (b)(iii) and (c)(i).
x = ......................................................
h1 = ......................................................
d = ......................................................
[4]

10
(f) (i) It is suggested that the quantities d and y are related by the equation For
Examiner’s
d = ky 2 Use
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

11
(g) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this For
Use
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/32/M/J/11

* 1 3 2 1 6 9 6 9 1 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours

Total
DC (SJF/JG) 34142/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/33/M/J/11

3

For
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the motion of a paper strip depends on its width. Use
(a) (i) Measure and record the width x of the thin paper strip, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
x = .......................................... cm [1]
(ii) Connect the clips to the strip, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
26 cm
clip clip
wooden
rod
Fig. 1.2

4
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus with the top clip supported on the nail, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
For
Examiner’s
Use
nail nail
clip clip
paper strip paper strip
clip clip
wooden rod wooden rod
bench
front view side view
Fig. 1.3
© UCLES 2011 9702/33/M/J/11

5
(ii) Twist the wooden rod through an angle of approximately 45° in a horizontal plane,
For
Use
wooden rod
one
complete
swing
approximately
45°
Fig. 1.4
Release the rod and watch its movement.

The wooden rod completes one swing by twisting one way and then back the other
way, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
The time taken for each complete swing is T.
T = ................................................ [2]

6
(c) By cutting new strips from the graph paper, repeat (a) and (b) until you have six sets of
For
values of x and T. Values of x should be in the range 1 cm ≤ x ≤ 6 cm. Examiner’s
Use
1
Include values of in your table of results.
x
[9]
1
(d) (i) Plot a graph of T on the y-axis against on the x-axis. [3]
x
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/33/M/J/11

7
For
Examiner’s
Use

8
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between T and x is

For
a Examiner’s
T= + b Use
x

a = .....................................................
b = .....................................................
[1]
(f) State one problem with determining an experimental value of T for x = 15 cm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/33/M/J/11

9

For
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment you will investigate the deflection of a metre rule when a mass is suspended Use
from its centre.
(a) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.1 with a distance l between the supports
of approximately 95 cm.
support
metre
rule
h0
block
bench
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Measure and record l.
l = ................................................ [1]
(iii) Midway between the supports, measure and record the height h0 of the bottom of
the rule above the bench.
h0 = ................................................ [1]
(b) (i) Use the small loop of string to suspend the mass from the rule, midway between
the supports.
(ii) Midway between the supports, measure and record the new height h of the bottom
of the rule above the bench.
h = ................................................ [1]

10
(iii) Calculate the deflection d of the beam where d = h0 – h.

For
Examiner’s
Use
d = ................................................ [1]
(c) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d.
percentage uncertainty = ................................................ [1]
(d) Change l to approximately 60 cm. Repeat (a)(ii), (a)(iii) and (b).
l = .....................................................
h0 = .....................................................
h = .....................................................
d = .....................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/33/M/J/11

11
(e) It is suggested that the quantities d and l are related by the equation
For
Examiner’s
d = k l3 Use
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = .....................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]

12
(f) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this
For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/33/M/J/11

* 2 2 8 5 7 8 0 0 1 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/34
2 hours

Total
DC (CW/DJ) 34809/5
2
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the angle through which a loaded beaker rolls as a
turning force is applied.
(a) The apparatus has been assembled as shown in Fig. 1.1.
rails
50 60 70 80 90
40 1
30 00
20
110
10
120
130
0
140 150 160 17

0 18
0
masses
string
loop
Fig. 1.1
(b) Make sure that the beaker is positioned so that the masses do not touch the rails.
(c) Using the set square, measure and record the angle x, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
rail
Fig. 1.2
x = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

3
(d) (i) Hook the mass hanger on the string loop. Record the mass m that is suspended For
from the loop. Examiner’s
Use
m = ......................................................
(ii) Wait for the beaker to stop moving, making sure that the beaker is positioned so
that the masses do not touch the rails.
(iii) Using the set square, measure and record the angle y, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
string
Fig. 1.3
y = .................................................. [1]
(iv) Calculate θ, where θ = y–x.
θ = ......................................................

4
(e) Change m by adding masses to the hanger and repeat (d)(ii), (d)(iii) and (d)(iv). For
Repeat this procedure until you have six sets of values for m (the total suspended mass) Examiner’s
and angle y. Use
Include in your table values for θ (using your answer from (c)) and sinθ.
[9]
(f) (i) Plot a graph of sinθ on the y-axis against m on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(g) (i) Unhook the masses from the string loop and remove the beaker from the rails. For
Examiner’s
(ii) Take measurements to determine the radius r of the beaker. Use
r = .................................................. [1]
(h) It is suggested that the relationship between θ and m is

rm
sinθ = +b
a
Using your answers from (f)(iii) and (g)(ii), determine the value of a. Give an appropriate
unit.
a = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

7
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment you will investigate the motion of a mass suspended from a rubber band.
(a) (i) Suspend the rubber band from the retort stand and hang the 100 g mass hanger
from the rubber band, as shown in Fig. 2.1
rubber band
100 g mass
hanger
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Determine and record the radius R of the suspended mass hanger at its widest
point.
R = .................................................. [2]
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in R.

8
(b) (i) Twist the mass hanger about half a turn and release it so that it turns between For
positions A and B, as shown in Fig. 2.2. Examiner’s
Use
A B
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Take measurements to determine the time T for the mass hanger to rotate from A
to B and back to A.
(This may be determined accurately by using the time for several turns.)
T = .................................................. [2]
(c) For a mass hanger of mass m and radius R, it is suggested that T is related to a quantity
C, where C = mR 2.
Calculate the value of C for this mass hanger. Give an appropriate unit.
C = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

9
(d) (i) Remove the 100 g mass hanger and suspend the 50 g mass hanger from the rubber For
band. Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Repeat (a)(ii), (b) and (c) for this new suspended mass hanger.
R = ......................................................
T = ......................................................
C = ......................................................
[4]
(e) (i) It is suggested that the relationship between T and C is
T2 = k C
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]

10
(ii) Explain whether your results support the suggested relationship in (e)(i). For
Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/34/M/J/11

* 5 5 4 1 7 2 3 9 7 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours

Total
DC (SM/CGW) 34240/3
2
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment you will investigate how the motion of two pendulums depends on the
tension in a spring connecting them.
(a) Measure and record the unstretched length l 0 of the coiled part of the spring as shown
in Fig. 1.1.
l0
Fig. 1.1
l 0 = .................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2.
loop of string
over rod of
clamp
spring
50 cm
bob A bob B at least 5 cm
bench
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Position the stands so that the coiled part of the spring has approximate length
l 0 + 2 cm (so that the spring is extended by approximately 2 cm).
© UCLES 2011 9702/35/M/J/11

3
(iii) Measure and record the length l of the coiled part of the spring. For
Calculate the extension x of the spring, where x = l – l 0. Examiner’s
Use
l = ......................................................
x = ......................................................
(iv) Gently pull bob A towards you. Release the bob and watch the movement of the
two bobs.
Bob A will eventually stop and start moving again. It will then stop for a second
time.
Determine and record the time T between these two stops.
T = .................................................. [2]

4
(c) By moving the stands further apart, repeat (b)(iii) and (b)(iv) until you have six sets of For
readings of l, x and T, with x in the range 2 cm 艋 x 艋 10 cm. Examiner’s
Use
[9]
(d) (i) Plot a graph of T on the y-axis against x on the x-axis. [3]
(iii) Determine the gradient and y -intercept of this line.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/35/M/J/11

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) It is suggested that the quantities T and x are related by the equation For
Examiner’s
T = px + q Use
Use your answers in (d)(iii) to determine the values of p and q.

p = ......................................................
q = ......................................................
[1]
(f) Use your values in (e) to determine the extension x that would be expected to give a
value of T = 75 s.
x = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/35/M/J/11

7
BLANK PAGE

8
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment you will drop a mass onto a rod standing in sand and investigate the
distance that the rod moves into the sand.
(a) You have been provided with two wooden rods of different diameters.
Measure and record the diameter d of the thicker rod.
d = .................................................. [2]
(b) Flatten the surface of the sand. Stand the rod vertically in the sand up to the mark drawn
on the rod, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wooden rod
sand
mark on rod
container
Fig. 2.1
© UCLES 2011 9702/35/M/J/11

9
(c) (i) Hold the mass hanger so that the distance h between its bottom and the top of the For
rod is approximately 10 cm. Examiner’s
The centre of the bottom of the mass hanger should be vertically above the wooden Use
rod, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
mass hanger
wooden rod
sand
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Measure and record the height h.
h = .................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Drop the mass hanger from this height h above the rod.
(ii) Without making a further mark on the rod, determine the new length x of the
rod below the surface of the sand, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
Fig. 2.3
x = .................................................. [1]

10
(iii) Calculate and record the change in depth y of the rod in the sand as a result of the For
impact of the mass hanger. Examiner’s
Use
y = .................................................. [1]
(e) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of y.
(f) Using the thinner rod repeat (a), (b), (c)(i), and (d).
Use the same value of h as in (c)(ii).
d = .......................................................
x = ......................................................
y = ......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/35/M/J/11

11
(g) It is suggested that the quantities y and d are related by the equation For
Examiner’s
Use
k
y =
d2
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
(h) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2011 9702/35/M/J/11

* 5 9 9 0 5 4 1 5 7 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
appropriate units.
2
question.
4
10
11
12
Total
DC (SM/DJ) 29943/3
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = pΔV
gravitational potential, ϕ = – Gm
r
1 Nm 2
V
simple harmonic motion, a = – ω2x

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Newton’s law of gravitation applies to point masses.
(i) State Newton’s law of gravitation.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why, although the planets and the Sun are not point masses, the law also
applies to planets orbiting the Sun.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Gravitational fields and electric fields show certain similarities and certain differences.
State one aspect of gravitational and electric fields where there is
(i) a similarity,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) a difference.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

5
2 (a) State what is meant by the Avogadro constant NA. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A balloon is filled with helium gas at a pressure of 1.1 × 105 Pa and a temperature of
25 °C.
The balloon has a volume of 6.5 × 104 cm3.
Helium may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
Determine the number of gas atoms in the balloon.
number = ................................................ [4]

6
3 (a) Define simple harmonic motion. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A tube, sealed at one end, has a total mass m and a uniform area of cross-section A.
The tube floats upright in a liquid of density ρ with length L submerged, as shown in
Fig. 3.1a.
tube
liquid
L
density ρ L+x
Fig. 3.1a Fig. 3.1b
The tube is displaced vertically and then released. The tube oscillates vertically in the
liquid.
At one time, the displacement is x, as shown in Fig. 3.1b.
Theory shows that the acceleration a of the tube is given by the expression
A ρg
a=– x.
m
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

7
(i) Explain how it can be deduced from the expression that the tube is moving with For
simple harmonic motion. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The tube, of area of cross-section 4.5 cm2, is floating in water of density
1.0 × 103 kg m–3.
Calculate the mass of the tube that would give rise to oscillations of frequency 1.5 Hz.
mass = ............................................. g [4]

8

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two small spherical charged particles P and Q may be assumed to be point charges
located at their centres. The particles are in a vacuum.
Particle P is fixed in position. Particle Q is moved along the line joining the two charges,
particle P particle Q
x
Fig. 4.1
The variation with separation x of the electric potential energy EP of particle Q is shown
in Fig. 4.2.
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
x / 10–10 m
–1
–2
E P / eV
–3
–4
Fig. 4.2
(i) State how the magnitude of the electric field strength is related to potential
gradient.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

9
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to show that the force on particle Q is proportional to the For
gradient of the curve of Fig. 4.2. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The magnitude of the charge on each of the particles P and Q is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the separation of the particles at the point where particle Q has electric
potential energy equal to –5.1 eV.
separation = ............................................ m [4]
(d) By reference to Fig. 4.2, state and explain
(i) whether the two charges have the same, or opposite, sign,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the effect, if any, on the shape of the graph of doubling the charge on particle P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

10
5 (a) State what is meant by a magnetic field. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A charged particle of mass m and charge +q is travelling with velocity v in a vacuum.
It enters a region of uniform magnetic field of flux density B, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
region of
magnetic field
path of
charged particle
Fig. 5.1
The magnetic field is normal to the direction of motion of the particle. The path of the
particle in the field is the arc of a circle of radius r.
(i) Explain why the path of the particle in the field is the arc of a circle.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the radius r is given by the expression

mv
r= .
Bq
[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11
11
(c) A thin metal foil is placed in the magnetic field in (b). For
A second charged particle enters the region of the magnetic field. It loses kinetic energy Examiner’s
as it passes through the foil. The particle follows the path shown in Fig. 5.2. Use
region of
uniform
magnetic field
foil
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, mark with an arrow the direction of travel of the particle. [1]
(ii) The path of the particle has different radii on each side of the foil.
The radii are 7.4 cm and 5.7 cm.
Determine the ratio
final momentum of particle

initial momentum of particle
for the particle as it passes through the foil.
ratio = ................................................ [2]

12
6 A transformer is illustrated in Fig. 6.1. For

Examiner’s
laminated iron Use
core
load
primary secondary
coil coil
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) Explain why the coils are wound on a core made of iron.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why thermal energy is generated in the core.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use Faraday’s law to explain why the potential difference across the load and the
e.m.f. of the supply are not in phase.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

13
(c) Electrical energy is usually transmitted using alternating current. Suggest why the For
transmission is achieved using Examiner’s
Use
(i) high voltages,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) alternating current.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

14
7 Experiments are conducted to investigate the photoelectric effect. For

Examiner’s
(a) It is found that, on exposure of a metal surface to light, either electrons are emitted Use
immediately or they are not emitted at all.
Suggest why this observation does not support a wave theory of light.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Data for the wavelength λ of the radiation incident on the metal surface and the maximum
kinetic energy EK of the emitted electrons are shown in Fig. 7.1.
λ / nm EK / 10–19 J
650 –
240 4.44
Fig. 7.1
(i) Without any calculation, suggest why no value is given for EK for radiation of
wavelength 650 nm.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use data from Fig. 7.1 to determine the work function energy of the surface.
work function energy = ............................................. J [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

15
(c) Radiation of wavelength 240 nm gives rise to a maximum photoelectric current I. For
The intensity of the incident radiation is maintained constant and the wavelength is now Examiner’s
reduced. Use
State and explain the effect of this change on
(i) the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the maximum photoelectric current I.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

16
8 (a) The variation with nucleon number A of the binding energy per nucleon BE of nuclei is For
Use
BE
0
A
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, mark the approximate positions of
(i) iron-56 (label this point Fe), [1]
(ii) zirconium-97 (label this point Zr), [1]
(iii) hydrogen-2 (label this point H). [1]
(b) (i) State what is meant by nuclear fission.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) By reference to Fig. 8.1, explain how fission is energetically possible.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

17
BLANK PAGE
Please turn over for Section B.

18
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) An operational amplifier (op-amp) may be used as a comparator.

State the function of a comparator.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The variation with temperature θ of the resistance R of a thermistor is shown in Fig. 9.1.
4.0
3.0
R / kΩ
2.0
1.0
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
θ / °C
Fig. 9.1
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

19
The thermistor is connected into the circuit of Fig. 9.2. For

Examiner’s
+5 V Use
X 2.0kΩ
+9 V
–9V
2.0kΩ V OUT
Fig. 9.2
The op-amp may be considered to be ideal.
(i) The temperature of the thermistor is 10 °C.

Determine the resistance of the variable resistor X such that the output potential
VOUT is zero.
resistance = ............................................ Ω [2]
(ii) The resistance of the resistor X is now held constant at the value calculated in (i).
Describe the change in the output potential VOUT as the temperature of the
thermistor is changed from 5 °C to 20 °C.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [4]

20
10 (a) State what is meant by the acoustic impedance Z of a medium. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Two media have acoustic impedances Z1 and Z2.

The intensity reflection coefficient α for the boundary between the two media is given
by
(Z2 – Z1)2
α= .
(Z2 + Z1)2
Describe the effect on the transmission of ultrasound through a boundary where there is
a large difference between the acoustic impedances of the two media.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Data for the acoustic impedance Z and the absorption coefficient μ for fat and for muscle
are shown in Fig. 10.1.
Z / kg m–2 s–1 μ / m–1
fat 1.3 × 106 48

muscle 1.7 × 106 23
Fig. 10.1
The thickness x of the layer of fat on an animal, as illustrated in Fig. 10.2, is to be

investigated using ultrasound.
surface S
fat muscle
incident
ultrasound
Fig. 10.2
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

21
The intensity of the parallel ultrasound beam entering the surface S of the layer of fat is I. For
The beam is reflected from the boundary between fat and muscle. Examiner’s
The intensity of the reflected ultrasound detected at the surface S of the fat is 0.012 I. Use
Calculate
(i) the intensity reflection coefficient at the boundary between the fat and the muscle,
coefficient = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the thickness x of the layer of fat.
x = .......................................... cm [3]

22
11 (a) Describe what is meant by frequency modulation (FM ). For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A sinusoidal carrier wave has a frequency of 600 kHz and an amplitude of 5.0 V.
The carrier wave is frequency modulated by a sinusoidal wave of frequency 7.0 kHz and
amplitude 2.0 V.
The frequency deviation of the carrier wave is 20 kHz V–1.
Determine, for the modulated carrier wave,
(i) the amplitude,
amplitude = .............................................. V [1]
(ii) the maximum frequency,
maximum frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
(iii) the minimum frequency,
minimum frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
(iv) the number of times per second that the frequency changes from maximum to
minimum and then back to maximum.
number = ................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

23
12 Many television receivers are connected to an aerial using a coaxial cable. Such a cable is For
illustrated in Fig. 12.1. Examiner’s
Use
copper
wire
polythene
plastic insulator
covering
copper
braid
Fig. 12.1
(a) State two functions of the copper braid.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Suggest two reasons why a coaxial cable is used, rather than a wire pair, to connect the
aerial to the receiver.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A coaxial cable has an attenuation per unit length of 200 dB km–1.
The length of the co-axial cable between an aerial and the receiver is 12 m.
Calculate the ratio
input signal power to coaxial cable .

output signal power from coaxial cable
ratio = ................................................... [3]

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11

* 0 2 0 1 9 1 0 5 9 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
appropriate units.
2
question.
4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/SW) 29944/5
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State what is meant by a field of force.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Gravitational fields and electric fields are two examples of fields of force.
State one similarity and one difference between these two fields of force.
similarity: ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
difference: ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Two protons are isolated in space. Their centres are separated by a distance R.
Each proton may be considered to be a point mass with point charge.
Determine the magnitude of the ratio
force between protons due to electric field

.
force between protons due to gravitational field
ratio = ............................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

5
2 (a) State what is meant by a mole. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two containers A and B are joined by a tube of negligible volume, as illustrated in
Fig. 2.1.
container A container B
3.1 × 103 cm3 4.6 × 103 cm3
17 °C 30 °C
Fig. 2.1
The containers are filled with an ideal gas at a pressure of 2.3 × 105 Pa.
The gas in container A has volume 3.1 × 103 cm3 and is at a temperature of 17 °C.
The gas in container B has volume 4.6 × 103 cm3 and is at a temperature of 30 °C.
Calculate the total amount of gas, in mol, in the containers.
amount = ........................................ mol [4]

6
3 A capacitor consists of two metal plates separated by an insulator, as shown in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
metal plate
insulator
metal plate
Fig. 3.1
The potential difference between the plates is V. The variation with V of the magnitude of the
charge Q on one plate is shown in Fig. 3.2.
20
15
Q / mC
10
0
0 5 10 15
V/V
Fig. 3.2
(a) Explain why the capacitor stores energy but not charge.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

7
(b) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine For

Examiner’s
(i) the capacitance of the capacitor, Use
capacitance = .......................................... μF [2]
(ii) the loss in energy stored in the capacitor when the potential difference V is reduced
from 10.0 V to 7.5 V.
energy = ......................................... mJ [2]

8
(c) Three capacitors X, Y and Z, each of capacitance 10 μF, are connected as shown in For
Use
X
A B
Fig. 3.3
Initially, the capacitors are uncharged.

A potential difference of 12 V is applied between points A and B.
Determine the magnitude of the charge on one plate of capacitor X.
charge = ......................................... μC [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

9
4 (a) The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed in the form For
Examiner’s
ΔU = q + w. Use
Explain the symbols in this expression.
+ ΔU .................................................................................................................................
+ q ....................................................................................................................................
+ w ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) State what is meant by specific latent heat.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Use the first law of thermodynamics to explain why the specific latent heat of
vaporisation is greater than the specific latent heat of fusion for a particular
substance.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]

10
5 A bar magnet is suspended vertically from the free end of a helical spring, as shown in For
Use
helical
spring
magnet
coil
V
Fig. 5.1
One pole of the magnet is situated in a coil. The coil is connected in series with a
high-resistance voltmeter.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the reading V of the voltmeter is shown in Fig. 5.2.
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 t / s
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

11
(ii) Use Faraday’s law to explain why For

Examiner’s
1. there is a reading on the voltmeter, Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
2. this reading varies in magnitude,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
3. the reading has both positive and negative values.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine the frequency f0 of the oscillations of the magnet.
f0 = .......................................... Hz [2]
(c) The magnet is now brought to rest and the voltmeter is replaced by a variable frequency
alternating current supply that produces a constant r.m.s. current in the coil.
The frequency of the supply is gradually increased from 0.7 f0 to 1.3 f0, where f0 is the
frequency calculated in (b).
On the axes of Fig. 5.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with frequency f of the
amplitude A of the new oscillations of the bar magnet.
0
0.7 f0 f0 1.3 f0
f
[2]
Fig. 5.3
12
(d) (i) Name the phenomenon illustrated on your completed graph of Fig. 5.3. For
Examiner’s
............................................................................................................................ [1] Use
(ii) State one situation where the phenomenon named in (i) is useful.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

13
BLANK PAGE

14
6 An alternating current supply is connected in series with a resistor R, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 6.1
The variation with time t (measured in seconds) of the current I (measured in amps) in the
resistor is given by the expression
I = 9.9 sin(380t).
(a) For the current in the resistor R, determine
(i) the frequency,
frequency = .......................................... Hz [2]
(ii) the r.m.s. current.
r.m.s. current = ............................................ A [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

15
(b) To prevent over-heating, the mean power dissipated in resistor R must not exceed For
400 W. Examiner’s
Calculate the minimum resistance of R. Use
resistance = ........................................... Ω [2]

16
7 (a) State what is meant by the de Broglie wavelength. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An electron is accelerated in a vacuum from rest through a potential difference of 850 V.
(i) Show that the final momentum of the electron is 1.6 × 10–23 N s.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of this electron.
wavelength = ........................................... m [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

17
(c) Describe an experiment to demonstrate the wave nature of electrons. For

You may draw a diagram if you wish. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [5]

18
8 (a) State what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the energy equivalence of 1.0 u is 930 MeV.
[3]
(c) Data for the masses of some particles and nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 1.0073
neutron 1.0087
deuterium ( 21H) 2.0141
zirconium ( 97
40Zr) 97.0980
Fig. 8.1
Use data from Fig. 8.1 and information from (b) to determine, in MeV,
(i) the binding energy of deuterium,
binding energy = ....................................... MeV [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

19
(ii) the binding energy per nucleon of zirconium. For

Examiner’s
Use
binding energy per nucleon = ....................................... MeV [3]

20
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Describe the structure of a metal wire strain gauge. You may draw a diagram if you
wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A strain gauge S is connected into the circuit of Fig. 9.1.
+4.5 V
RF
strain
gauge S
+9 V
R
–
R
+
–9 V
V1
VOUT
1.0 kΩ V2 RF
Fig. 9.1
The operational amplifier (op-amp) is ideal.

The output potential VOUT of the circuit is given by the expression
RF
VOUT = × (V2 – V1).
R
RF
(i) State the name given to the ratio
R.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11
21
(ii) The strain gauge S has resistance 125 Ω when not under strain. For
Calculate the magnitude of V1 such that, when the strain gauge S is not strained, Examiner’s
the output VOUT is zero. Use
V1 = ........................................... V [3]
(iii) In a particular test, the resistance of S increases to 128 Ω. V1 is unchanged.

R
The ratio F is 12.
R
Calculate the magnitude of VOUT .
VOUT = ........................................... V [2]

22
10 Explain briefly the main principles of the use of magnetic resonance to obtain diagnostic For
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [8]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

23
11 The use of ionospheric reflection of radio waves for long-distance communication has, to a For
great extent, been replaced by satellite communication. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State and explain two reasons why this change has occurred.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The radio link between a geostationary satellite and Earth may be attenuated by as
much as 190 dB.
Suggest why, as a result of this attenuation, the uplink and downlink frequencies must
be different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

24
12 (a) The signal-to-noise ratio in an optic fibre must not fall below 24 dB. The average noise For
power in the fibre is 5.6 × 10–19 W. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Calculate the minimum effective signal power in the optic fibre.
power = ........................................... W [3]
(ii) The fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 1.9 dB km–1.
Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of fibre for an input signal of power
3.5 mW.
length = ......................................... km [3]
(b) Suggest why infra-red radiation, rather than ultraviolet radiation, is used for long-distance
communication using optic fibres.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/42/M/J/11

* 8 3 5 8 8 8 3 0 1 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/43
2 hours
appropriate units.
2
question.
4
10
11
12
Total
DC (SLM/SW) 42899
2
Data
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State what is meant by a field of force.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Gravitational fields and electric fields are two examples of fields of force.
State one similarity and one difference between these two fields of force.
similarity: ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
difference: ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Two protons are isolated in space. Their centres are separated by a distance R.
Each proton may be considered to be a point mass with point charge.
Determine the magnitude of the ratio
force between protons due to electric field

.
force between protons due to gravitational field
ratio = ............................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

5
2 (a) State what is meant by a mole. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two containers A and B are joined by a tube of negligible volume, as illustrated in
Fig. 2.1.
container A container B
3.1 × 103 cm3 4.6 × 103 cm3
17 °C 30 °C
Fig. 2.1
The containers are filled with an ideal gas at a pressure of 2.3 × 105 Pa.
The gas in container A has volume 3.1 × 103 cm3 and is at a temperature of 17 °C.
The gas in container B has volume 4.6 × 103 cm3 and is at a temperature of 30 °C.
Calculate the total amount of gas, in mol, in the containers.
amount = ........................................ mol [4]

6
3 A capacitor consists of two metal plates separated by an insulator, as shown in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
metal plate
insulator
metal plate
Fig. 3.1
The potential difference between the plates is V. The variation with V of the magnitude of the
charge Q on one plate is shown in Fig. 3.2.
20
15
Q / mC
10
0
0 5 10 15
V/V
Fig. 3.2
(a) Explain why the capacitor stores energy but not charge.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

7
(b) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine For

Examiner’s
(i) the capacitance of the capacitor, Use
capacitance = .......................................... μF [2]
(ii) the loss in energy stored in the capacitor when the potential difference V is reduced
from 10.0 V to 7.5 V.
energy = ......................................... mJ [2]

8
(c) Three capacitors X, Y and Z, each of capacitance 10 μF, are connected as shown in For
Use
X
A B
Fig. 3.3
Initially, the capacitors are uncharged.

A potential difference of 12 V is applied between points A and B.
Determine the magnitude of the charge on one plate of capacitor X.
charge = ......................................... μC [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

9
4 (a) The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed in the form For
Examiner’s
ΔU = q + w. Use
Explain the symbols in this expression.
+ ΔU .................................................................................................................................
+ q ....................................................................................................................................
+ w ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) State what is meant by specific latent heat.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Use the first law of thermodynamics to explain why the specific latent heat of
vaporisation is greater than the specific latent heat of fusion for a particular
substance.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]

10
5 A bar magnet is suspended vertically from the free end of a helical spring, as shown in For
Use
helical
spring
magnet
coil
V
Fig. 5.1
One pole of the magnet is situated in a coil. The coil is connected in series with a
high-resistance voltmeter.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the reading V of the voltmeter is shown in Fig. 5.2.
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 t / s
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

11
(ii) Use Faraday’s law to explain why For

Examiner’s
1. there is a reading on the voltmeter, Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
2. this reading varies in magnitude,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
3. the reading has both positive and negative values.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine the frequency f0 of the oscillations of the magnet.
f0 = .......................................... Hz [2]
(c) The magnet is now brought to rest and the voltmeter is replaced by a variable frequency
alternating current supply that produces a constant r.m.s. current in the coil.
The frequency of the supply is gradually increased from 0.7 f0 to 1.3 f0, where f0 is the
frequency calculated in (b).
On the axes of Fig. 5.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with frequency f of the
amplitude A of the new oscillations of the bar magnet.
0
0.7 f0 f0 1.3 f0
f
[2]
Fig. 5.3
12
(d) (i) Name the phenomenon illustrated on your completed graph of Fig. 5.3. For
Examiner’s
............................................................................................................................ [1] Use
(ii) State one situation where the phenomenon named in (i) is useful.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

13
BLANK PAGE

14
6 An alternating current supply is connected in series with a resistor R, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 6.1
The variation with time t (measured in seconds) of the current I (measured in amps) in the
resistor is given by the expression
I = 9.9 sin(380t).
(a) For the current in the resistor R, determine
(i) the frequency,
frequency = .......................................... Hz [2]
(ii) the r.m.s. current.
r.m.s. current = ............................................ A [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

15
(b) To prevent over-heating, the mean power dissipated in resistor R must not exceed For
400 W. Examiner’s
Calculate the minimum resistance of R. Use
resistance = ........................................... Ω [2]

16
7 (a) State what is meant by the de Broglie wavelength. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An electron is accelerated in a vacuum from rest through a potential difference of 850 V.
(i) Show that the final momentum of the electron is 1.6 × 10–23 N s.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the de Broglie wavelength of this electron.
wavelength = ........................................... m [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

17
(c) Describe an experiment to demonstrate the wave nature of electrons. For

You may draw a diagram if you wish. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [5]

18
8 (a) State what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the energy equivalence of 1.0 u is 930 MeV.
[3]
(c) Data for the masses of some particles and nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 1.0073
neutron 1.0087
deuterium ( 21H) 2.0141
zirconium ( 97
40Zr) 97.0980
Fig. 8.1
Use data from Fig. 8.1 and information from (b) to determine, in MeV,
(i) the binding energy of deuterium,
binding energy = ....................................... MeV [2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

19
(ii) the binding energy per nucleon of zirconium. For

Examiner’s
Use
binding energy per nucleon = ....................................... MeV [3]

20
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Describe the structure of a metal wire strain gauge. You may draw a diagram if you
wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A strain gauge S is connected into the circuit of Fig. 9.1.
+4.5 V
RF
strain
gauge S
+9 V
R
–
R
+
–9 V
V1
VOUT
1.0 kΩ V2 RF
Fig. 9.1
The operational amplifier (op-amp) is ideal.

The output potential VOUT of the circuit is given by the expression
RF
VOUT = × (V2 – V1).
R
RF
(i) State the name given to the ratio
R.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11
21
(ii) The strain gauge S has resistance 125 Ω when not under strain. For
Calculate the magnitude of V1 such that, when the strain gauge S is not strained, Examiner’s
the output VOUT is zero. Use
V1 = ........................................... V [3]
(iii) In a particular test, the resistance of S increases to 128 Ω. V1 is unchanged.

R
The ratio F is 12.
R
Calculate the magnitude of VOUT .
VOUT = ........................................... V [2]

22
10 Explain briefly the main principles of the use of magnetic resonance to obtain diagnostic For
Use
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [8]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

23
11 The use of ionospheric reflection of radio waves for long-distance communication has, to a For
great extent, been replaced by satellite communication. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State and explain two reasons why this change has occurred.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The radio link between a geostationary satellite and Earth may be attenuated by as
much as 190 dB.
Suggest why, as a result of this attenuation, the uplink and downlink frequencies must
be different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]

24
12 (a) The signal-to-noise ratio in an optic fibre must not fall below 24 dB. The average noise For
power in the fibre is 5.6 × 10–19 W. Examiner’s
Use
(i) Calculate the minimum effective signal power in the optic fibre.
power = ........................................... W [3]
(ii) The fibre has an attenuation per unit length of 1.9 dB km–1.
Calculate the maximum uninterrupted length of fibre for an input signal of power
3.5 mW.
length = ......................................... km [3]
(b) Suggest why infra-red radiation, rather than ultraviolet radiation, is used for long-distance
communication using optic fibres.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/M/J/11

* 6 2 2 6 7 6 1 8 3 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (LEO/SW) 29952/3
2
1 When light is incident on the front of a photocell, an e.m.f. is generated in the photocell. For
Examiner’s
A student wishes to investigate the effect of adding various thicknesses of glass in front of Use
a photocell. This may be carried out in the laboratory by varying the number of identical thin
glass sheets between a light source and the front of the photocell.
It is suggested that the e.m.f. V is related to the number n of glass sheets by the equation
V = V0e –αnt
where t is the thickness of one sheet, α is the absorption coefficient of glass and V0 is the
e.m.f. for n = 0.
Design a laboratory experiment to determine the absorption coefficient of glass. You should
draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your equipment. In your account
you should pay particular attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2011 9702/51/M/J/11

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2011 9702/51/M/J/11

5
2 A student is investigating how a volume of nitrogen gas is affected by the pressure exerted For
on it. Examiner’s
Use
A sample of nitrogen gas is trapped in a vertical tube of uniform cross-sectional area by a

small volume of oil. Pressure is applied by a pump. The applied pressure is measured on a
gauge, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
nitrogen
h
pressure gauge
oil
pump
air
Fig. 2.1
The temperature T of the nitrogen is 290 K.
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the height h of nitrogen trapped in the tube
varies with the pressure p.

6
It is suggested that p and h are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
pAh = NkT Use
where A is the cross-sectional area of the tube, k is the Boltzmann constant and N is the
number of molecules of nitrogen gas.
1
(a) A graph is plotted of p on the y-axis against on the x-axis. Express the gradient in
h
terms of N.
gradient = ..................................................[1]
(b) Values of p and h are given in Fig. 2.2.
p / 105 Pa h / 10–3 m
1.10 400 ± 5
1.22 360 ± 5
1.38 320 ± 5
1.57 280 ± 5
1.83 240 ± 5
2.09 210 ± 5
Fig. 2.2
1 1
Calculate and record values of in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute uncertainties in .
h h
[3]
1 –1 1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of p / 105 Pa against / m . Include error bars for . [2]
h h
answer.
gradient = ..................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/51/M/J/11

7
2.1 For
Examiner’s
Use
2.0
1.9
p / 105 Pa
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
1
/ m–1
h

8
(d) In this experiment, A = 3.14 × 10–6 m2 and k = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1. Using your answer in For
(c)(iii), determine the value of N. Include the absolute uncertainty in your value. Examiner’s
Use
N = ............................................................[2]
(e) (i) The pressure is reduced so that p = 1.10 × 105 Pa and the temperature decreases
by 12 ±1 K.
Determine h using the relationship given and your answer in (d).
h = ............................................................[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of h.
percentage uncertainty = ........................................................ % [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/51/M/J/11

* 6 6 5 5 0 6 9 1 7 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (LEO/SW) 29954/2
2
1 A student wishes to investigate projectile motion. For

Examiner’s
A small ball is rolled with velocity v along a horizontal surface. When the ball reaches the Use
end of the horizontal surface, it falls and lands on a lower horizontal surface. The vertical
displacement of the ball is p and the horizontal displacement of the ball is q, as shown in
Fig 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
It is suggested that
gq 2 = 2pv 2
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate how q is related to p and how v may be

determined from the results. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement
of your equipment. In your account you should pay particular attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2011 9702/52/M/J/11

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2011 9702/52/M/J/11

5
2 A student is investigating a non-inverting operational amplifier (op-amp) circuit. For

Examiner’s
The circuit is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1. Use
+18 V
–
E
F
–18 V
V
R
Fig. 2.1
The op-amp is connected to a +18 V and –18 V power supply.
E is the e.m.f. of the cell, which has a value of 1.6 ± 0.1 V.
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the reading V on the voltmeter varies with
resistance R.

6
It is suggested that V and R are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
V= F E+E Use
R
where F is the resistance of the fixed resistor in the circuit.
(a) A graph is plotted of V on the y-axis against 1 on the x-axis. Express the gradient in
terms of F. E R
gradient = ..................................................[1]
(b) Values of R and V are given in Fig. 2.2.
R/Ω V /V 1 V
/ 10–3 Ω–1
R E
150 14.4 ± 0.1
220 10.4 ± 0.1
330 7.4 ± 0.1
470 5.6 ± 0.1
680 4.4 ± 0.1
860 3.8 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
1 V
Calculate and record values of / 10–3 Ω–1 and in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute
V R E
uncertainties in . [3]
E
V 1 V
(c) (i) Plot a graph of against / 10–3 Ω–1. Include error bars for . [2]
E R E
answer.
gradient = ..................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/52/M/J/11

7
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
10
V
E
9
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
/ 10–3 Ω–1
R

8
(d) Using your answer in (c)(iii), determine the value of F. Include the absolute uncertainty For
Use
F = ............................................................[2]
(e) For one measurement, R has a value of 120 Ω ± 5%.
V
(i) Determine the value of using the relationship given and your answer in (d).
E
Include the absolute uncertainty in your answer.
V
= ...........................................................[2]
E
(ii) Determine the expected voltmeter reading.
voltmeter reading = ............................... V [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/52/M/J/11

* 8 8 7 7 3 7 3 3 3 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (LEO/SW) 41845
2
1 A student wishes to investigate projectile motion. For

Examiner’s
A small ball is rolled with velocity v along a horizontal surface. When the ball reaches the Use
end of the horizontal surface, it falls and lands on a lower horizontal surface. The vertical
displacement of the ball is p and the horizontal displacement of the ball is q, as shown in
Fig 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
gq 2 = 2pv 2
Design a laboratory experiment to investigate how q is related to p and how v may be

determined from the results. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement
of your equipment. In your account you should pay particular attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2011 9702/53/M/J/11

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2011 9702/53/M/J/11

5
2 A student is investigating a non-inverting operational amplifier (op-amp) circuit. For

Examiner’s
The circuit is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1. Use
+18 V
–
E
F
–18 V
V
R
Fig. 2.1
E is the e.m.f. of the cell, which has a value of 1.6 ± 0.1 V.
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the reading V on the voltmeter varies with
resistance R.

6
It is suggested that V and R are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
V= F E+E Use
R
where F is the resistance of the fixed resistor in the circuit.
(a) A graph is plotted of V on the y-axis against 1 on the x-axis. Express the gradient in
terms of F. E R
gradient = ..................................................[1]
(b) Values of R and V are given in Fig. 2.2.
R/Ω V /V 1 V
/ 10–3 Ω–1
R E
150 14.4 ± 0.1
220 10.4 ± 0.1
330 7.4 ± 0.1
470 5.6 ± 0.1
680 4.4 ± 0.1
860 3.8 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
1 V
Calculate and record values of / 10–3 Ω–1 and in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute
V R E
uncertainties in . [3]
E
V 1 V
E R E
answer.
gradient = ..................................................[2]
© UCLES 2011 9702/53/M/J/11

7
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
10
V
E
9
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
/ 10–3 Ω–1
R

8
(d) Using your answer in (c)(iii), determine the value of F. Include the absolute uncertainty For
Use
F = ............................................................[2]
(e) For one measurement, R has a value of 120 Ω ± 5%.
V
(i) Determine the value of using the relationship given and your answer in (d).
E
V
= ...........................................................[2]
E
(ii) Determine the expected voltmeter reading.
voltmeter reading = ............................... V [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/53/M/J/11

PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*1413361583*

IB12 06_9702_11/5RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 When a force F moves its point of application through a displacement s in the direction of the
force, the work W done by the force is given by
W = F s.
How many vector quantities and scalar quantities does this equation contain?
A one scalar quantity and two vector quantities

B one vector quantity and two scalar quantities
C three scalar quantities
D three vector quantities
2 What is a possible unit for the product VI, where V is the potential difference across a resistor
and I is the current through the same resistor?
A newton per second (N s–1)

B newton second (N s)
C newton metre (N m)
D newton metre per second (N m s–1)
that takes 10 s?
A 40 J B 400 J C 4000 J D 40 000 J
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

5
4 A light-meter measures the intensity I of the light falling on it. Theory suggests that I varies
inversely as the square of the distance d.
light-meter
A B
I I
0 0
0 d 0 d
C D
I I
0 0
0 d2 0 1
d2
Space for working

6
A 16 ± 1 m s–1
B 16.0 ± 0.2 m s–1
C 16.0 ± 0.4 m s–1
D 16.00 ± 0.36 m s–1
6 In an experiment to determine the acceleration of free fall using a falling body, what would lead to
a value that is too large?
A air resistance
B dimensions of the body are too large
C measured distance longer than true distance
D measured time longer than true time

Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

7
8 The diagram shows a laboratory experiment in which a feather falls from rest in a long evacuated
vertical tube of length L.
feather
L
vacuum
The feather takes time T to fall from the top to the bottom of the tube.
How far will the feather have fallen from the top of the tube in time 0.50 T?
A 0.13 L B 0.25 L C 0.38 L D 0.50 L
9 In the absence of air resistance, a stone is thrown from P and follows a parabolic path in which
the highest point reached is T. The stone reaches point Q just before landing.
Q
P
The vertical component of acceleration of the stone is
A zero at T.
B larger at T than at Q.
C larger at Q than at T.
D the same at Q as at T.
Space for working

8
10 Each option gives a correct word equation involving force.
Which option gives the definition of force?
A force = energy divided by displacement
B force = mass × acceleration
C force = pressure × area

D force = rate of change of momentum
v v
m m

B The total kinetic energy after impact is mv 2.
D The total momentum before impact is 2 mv.
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

9
12 The diagram shows a barrel suspended from a frictionless pulley on a building. The rope
supporting the barrel goes over the pulley and is secured to a stake at the bottom of the building.
barrel
120 kg
18 m
man
80 kg
stake
A man stands close to the stake. The bottom of the barrel is 18 m above the man’s head. The
mass of the barrel is 120 kg and the mass of the man is 80 kg.
The man keeps hold of the rope after untying it from the stake and is lifted upwards as the barrel
falls.
What is the man’s upward speed when his head is level with the bottom of the barrel? (Use
g = 10 m s–2.)
A 6 m s–1 B 8 m s–1 C 13 m s–1 D 19 m s–1
Space for working

10
13 A cylindrical block of wood has cross-sectional area A and weight W. It is totally immersed in
Which expression is equal to the upthrust on the block?
A (pb – pt)A + W
B (pb – pt)
C (pb – pt)A
D (pb – pt)A – W
14 A car of mass m travels at constant speed up a slope at an angle θ to the horizontal, as shown in
the diagram. Air resistance and friction provide a resistive force F.
resistive force F
What force is needed to propel the car at this constant speed?
A mg cos θ
B mg sin θ
C mg cos θ + F
D mg sin θ + F
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

11
15 The diagram shows a crane supporting a load L.
R
x y
W L
A mass provides a balancing load W. The position of the load is such that the system is perfectly
balanced with Wx = Ly. The ground provides a reaction force R. The distance x does not change.
If the load is moved further out so that the distance y increases and the crane does not topple,
which statement is correct?
A B
R R
W L W L
H H
A horizontal force H acts on the base of the A horizontal force H acts on the base of the
support column towards the left. support column towards the right.
C D
R R
W L W L
The reaction force R moves to the left. The reaction force R moves to the right.
Space for working

12
16 A concrete cube of side 0.60 m and uniform density 2.0 × 103 kg m–3 is lifted 5.0 m vertically by a
crane.
A 2.2 kJ B 21 kJ C 59 kJ D 450 kJ
17 The force resisting the motion of a car is taken as being proportional to the square of the car’s
speed. The magnitude of the force at a speed of 20 m s–1 is 800 N.
What effective power is required from the car’s engine to maintain a steady speed of 40 m s–1?
A 32 kW B 64 kW C 128 kW D 512 kW
18 The data below are taken from a test of a petrol engine for a motor car.
power output 150 kW

fuel consumption 20 litres per hour
energy content of fuel 40 MJ per litre
Which expression will evaluate the efficiency of the engine?
150 × 103
A
40 × 10 6 × 20 × 60 × 60
150 × 10 3 × 60 × 60
B
20 × 40 × 10 6
6
150 × 10 3 × 40 × 10 × 20
C
60 × 60
150 × 10 3 × 20
D
40 × 10 3 × 60 × 60
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

13

C It is the energy due to the attractions between the molecules in the object.
D It is the sum of all the microscopic potential and kinetic energies of the molecules in the
object.
20 Each box shows identical molecules of a gas represented by circles with arrows to show the
direction of travel and the speed of the molecule. A longer arrow represents a higher speed.
Which box contains a gas of the highest density and the lowest temperature?
A B
C D
Space for working

14
21 At room temperature, the density of liquid mercury is five times greater than the density of solid
aluminium.
A Aluminium atoms are spaced widely apart.

B Aluminium atoms move more freely than mercury atoms.
C Atoms in a liquid take up less space than atoms in a solid.
D Mercury atoms have greater mass than aluminium atoms.
22 When white sugar granules are heated, they melt. When the melt is cooled quickly, a brittle solid
form of toffee is produced.
How does the structure of the sugar change?
A amorphous to polymeric
B crystalline to amorphous
C crystalline to polymeric
D polymeric to amorphous
23 Which property of a metal wire depends on its Young modulus?
A ductility
B elastic limit
C spring constant
D ultimate tensile stress
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

15
24 The diagram shows a wire of diameter D and length L that is firmly clamped at one end between
two blocks of wood. A load is applied to the wire which causes it to extend by an amount x.
blocks of wood
wire
load
By how much would a wire of the same material, but of diameter 2D and length 3L, extend when
the same load is applied?
2 3 4 3
A 3
x B 4
x C 3
x D 2
x
25 What is represented by the gradient of a graph of force (vertical axis) against extension
(horizontal axis)?
A elastic limit
B spring constant
C stress
D Young modulus
Space for working

16
26 Two waves E and G are shown. The waves have the same speed.
y0 y0
0 0
0 1 2 3 time / ms 0 1 2 3 time / ms
–y0 –y0
E G
A Wave E has a greater amplitude than wave G.

B Wave E has a greater intensity than wave G.
C Wave E has a smaller frequency than wave G.
D Wave E has a smaller wavelength than wave G.
27 The diagram shows a displacement-time graph for a progressive wave.
displacement 5
/ mm
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
time / ms
–5
What are the amplitude and frequency of the wave?
amplitude / mm frequency / Hz
A 5 40
B 5 50
C 10 40
D 10 50
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

17

29 To produce a stationary wave, two waves must travel in opposite directions through the same
space.
Which statement about the properties of the two waves must also be true?
A The waves must have equal frequency, but a different speed and wavelength.
B The waves must have equal speed, but a different wavelength and frequency.
C The waves must have equal speed, frequency and wavelength.
D The waves must have equal wavelength, but a different speed and frequency.
diagram.
grating
first order maximum
light
first order maximum
The spacing of the slits in the grating is 1.00 × 10–6 m. The angle between the first order diffraction
maxima is 70.0 °.
A 287 nm B 470 nm C 574 nm D 940 nm
Space for working

18
31 A dipole is a pair of one negative charge and one positive charge of equal magnitude. The
electric field of a dipole is shown below.
In which direction does the force act on an electron when at point X?
X
A D
B C
– +
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

19
32 Lightning can occur between a charged cloud and the Earth’s surface when the electric field
strength in the intervening atmosphere reaches 25 kN C–1. The diagram shows the electric field
between the base of a cloud and the Earth’s surface.
base of cloud
– – – – – – – –
– – –
2 km
+ + + + + + + +
+ + +
Earth’s surface
What is the minimum potential difference between the Earth and the base of a cloud, 2 km high,
for lightning to occur?
A 12.5 MV B 25 MV C 50 MV D 100 MV
33 There is a current of 10 mA in a conductor for half an hour.
How much charge passes a point in the conductor in this time?
A 0.3 C B 5C C 18 C D 300 C
34 An iron wire has length 8.0 m and diameter 0.50 mm. The wire has resistance R.
A second iron wire has length 2.0 m and diameter 1.0 mm.
What is the resistance of the second wire?
R R R
A B C D R
16 8 2
Space for working

20
35 The diagram shows a simple circuit.
A When switch S is closed, the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery falls because work is
done against the internal resistance of the battery.
B When switch S is closed, the e.m.f. of the battery falls because work is done against the
resistance R.
C When switch S is closed, the potential difference across the battery falls because work is
D When switch S is closed, the potential difference across the battery falls because work is
done against the resistance R.
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

21
36 In the circuit below, the ammeter reading is I and the voltmeter reading is V.
A V
When the switch is closed, which row describes what happens to I and V ?
I V
A decreases decreases to zero

B increases decreases to zero
C increases stays the same
D stays the same increases
Space for working

22
37 A potential divider consists of a light-dependent resistor (LDR) in series with a variable resistor of
resistance R. The resistance of the LDR decreases when the light level increases. The variable
resistor can be set at either high resistance or low resistance.
+10 V
LDR
output
R
voltage
0V
Which situation gives the largest output voltage?
light level at LDR R
A high high
B high low
C low high
D low low
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

23
38 The circuit below has a current I in the resistor R.
S 3A
9Ω 4A
R I
What must be known in order to determine the value of I ?
A e.m.f. of the power supply

B resistance of resistor S
C Kirchhoff’s first law
D Kirchhoff’s second law
39 An experiment in which α-particles were deflected by a gold foil produced new insights into the
structure of the atom.
Which conclusion can be drawn from the results of the experiment?
A Atomic nuclei occupy a very small fraction of the volume of an atom.

B Electrons orbit the atomic nucleus.
C Some atoms of the same element contain different numbers of neutrons.
D The atomic nucleus contains protons and neutrons.
Space for working

24
40 Thorium-234 ( 234
90 Th) decays by β-emission into a daughter product which in turn decays by
further β-emission into a granddaughter product.
Which letter in the diagram represents the granddaughter product?
A B
92
91
proton
90
number
89
C D
88
232 233 234 235 236

nucleon number
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/11/M/J/12

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*5862868475*

IB12 06_9702_12/7RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 What is the unit watt in terms of SI base units?
A J s–1 B m2 kg s–1 C m2 kg s–3 D N m s–1
2 For which quantity is the magnitude a reasonable estimate?
A frequency of a radio wave 500 pHz
B mass of an atom 500 µg

C the Young modulus of a metal 500 kPa
D wavelength of green light 500 nm
3 A vector has magnitude R and perpendicular components P and Q, as shown in the diagram.
vertical component Q
θ
horizontal component P
Which row correctly describes the perpendicular components?
vertical component horizontal component
A Q R sinθ
B R cosθ P
C R cosθ R sinθ
D R sinθ R cosθ
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

5
4 The diameter of a cylindrical metal rod is measured using a micrometer screw gauge.
The diagram below shows an enlargement of the scale on the micrometer screw gauge when
taking the measurement.
40
2 3
30
0.5 mm / rev
What is the cross-sectional area of the rod?
A 3.81 mm2 B 11.4 mm2 C 22.8 mm2 D 45.6 mm2
5 A mass is dropped from rest, and falls through a distance of 2.0 m in a vacuum. An observer
records the time taken for the mass to fall through this distance using a manually operated
stopwatch and repeats the measurements a further two times. The average result of these
measured times, displayed in the table below, was used to determine a value for the acceleration
of free fall. This was calculated to be 9.8 m s–2.
first measurement second measurement third measurement average
time / s 0.6 0.73 0.59 0.64
Which statement best relates to the experiment?
A The measurements are precise and accurate with no evidence of random errors.
B The measurements are not accurate and not always recorded to the degree of precision of
the measuring device but the calculated experimental result is accurate.
C The measurements are not always recorded to the degree of precision of the measuring
device but are accurate. Systematic errors may be present.
D The range of results shows that there were random errors made but the calculated value is
correct so the experiment was successful.
Space for working

6
6 The diagram shows two complete pulses on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope. A grid of
1 cm squares covers the screen. The time-base setting is 1 µs cm–1.
1 cm
How long does each pulse last?
A 2 µs B 3 µs C 4 µs D 6 µs
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

7
7 The graph shows how the velocity v of an object moving in a straight line varies over time t = 0 to
t = T.
0
0 T t
Which graph represents the displacement s of the object in the time t = 0 to t = T ?
A B
s s
0
0 T t
0
0 T t
C D
s s
0 0
0 T t 0 T t
Space for working

8
8 Two markers M1 and M2 are set up a vertical distance h apart.
steel ball
time zero
x
M1 time t1
M2 time t2
A steel ball is released at time zero from a point a distance x above M1. The ball reaches M1 at
time t1 and reaches M2 at time t2. The acceleration of the ball is constant.
Which expression gives the acceleration of the ball?

2h 2h 2h 2h
A 2
B C D
t2 (t 2 + t 1) (t 2 − t 1) 2 (t 2 − t 1 2 )
2
9 A brick is dislodged from a building and falls vertically under gravity.
Which graph best represents the variation of its height h above the ground with time t if air
resistance is negligible?
A B C D
h h h h
0 0 0 0
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

9
10 A projectile is launched at point O and follows the path OPQRS, as shown. Air resistance may be
neglected.
Q
P R
O S
Which statement is true for the projectile when it is at the highest point Q of its path?
A The horizontal component of the projectile’s acceleration is zero.

B The horizontal component of the projectile’s velocity is zero.
C The kinetic energy of the projectile is zero.
D The momentum of the projectile is zero.
11 Which row correctly states whether momentum and kinetic energy are conserved in an inelastic
collision in which there are no external forces?
A conserved conserved
B conserved not conserved
C not conserved conserved
D not conserved not conserved
Space for working

10
12 Two spheres approach each other along the same straight line. Their speeds are u1 and u2
before collision. After the collision, the spheres separate with speeds v1 and v2 in the directions
shown below.
u1 u2 v1 v2
before collision after collision
Which equation must be correct if the collision is perfectly elastic?
A u1 – u2 = v2 + v1
B u1 – u2 = v2 – v1
C u1 + u2 = v2 + v1
D u1 + u2 = v2 – v1
13 A box of mass 8.0 kg rests on a horizontal, rough surface. A string attached to the box passes
over a smooth pulley and supports a 2.0 kg mass at its other end.
box
smooth
8.0 kg pulley
rough surface
2.0 kg
When the box is released, a frictional force of 6.0 N acts on it.
What is the acceleration of the box?
A 1.4 m s–2 B 1.7 m s–2 C 2.0 m s–2 D 2.5 m s–2
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

11
14 A ladder is positioned on icy (frictionless) ground and is leant against a rough wall. At the instant
of release it begins to slide.
Which diagram correctly shows the directions of the forces P, W and R acting on the ladder as it
begins to slide?
A B
P
P
ladder ladder
wall wall
R R
W W
ground ground
C D
P
P
ladder ladder
wall wall
R R
W W
ground ground
Space for working

12
15 The diagram shows a solid cube with weight W and sides of length L. It is supported by a
frictionless spindle that passes through the centres of two opposite vertical faces. One of these
faces is shaded.
L
The spindle is now removed and replaced at a distance to the right of its original position.
4
L
4
When viewing the shaded face, what is the torque of the couple that will now be needed to stop
the cube from toppling?
WL
A anticlockwise
2
WL
B clockwise
2
WL
C anticlockwise
4
WL
D clockwise
4
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

13
16 A sphere is released from rest in a viscous fluid.
Which graph represents the variation with time t of the acceleration a of the sphere?
A B
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
17 Initially, four identical uniform blocks, each of mass m and thickness h, are spread on a table.
h h
How much work is done on the blocks in stacking them on top of one another?
A 3 mgh B 6 mgh C 8 mgh D 10 mgh
Space for working

14
18 The diagram shows the design of a water wheel which drives a generator to produce electrical
energy. The flow rate of the water is 200 kg s–1. The generator supplies a current of 32 A at a
voltage of 230 V.
water
direction of rotation
8.0 m
generator
Ignoring any changes in kinetic energy of the water, what is the efficiency of the system?
A 14 % B 16 % C 22 % D 47 %
19 A car engine exerts an average force of 500 N in moving the car 1.0 km in 200 s.
What is the average power developed by the engine?
A 2.5 W B 2.5 kW C 100 kW D 100 MW
20 A mass of gas enclosed in a cylinder by a piston is heated gently. At the same time, the piston is
moved so that the pressure remains constant.
As a result of this, what will not occur?
A The average velocity of the molecules will increase.

B The mean separation of the molecules will increase.
C The molecules will travel greater distances between collisions.
D The number of collisions per second of the molecules on the piston will increase.
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

15
21 In an experiment to demonstrate Brownian motion, a transparent container is filled with smoke

particles suspended in air.
What can be seen when the contents of the container are strongly illuminated and viewed
through a microscope?
A air molecules that are colliding with smoke particles

B air molecules that are moving in straight lines
C smoke particles that are moving in random zigzag paths
D smoke particles that are moving in straight lines
22 The diagram shows the arrangement of atoms in a particular crystal.
Each atom is at the corner of a cube.
The mass of each atom is 3.5 × 10–25 kg. The density of the crystal is 9.2 × 103 kg m–3.
What is the shortest distance between the centres of two adjacent atoms?
A 3.8 × 10–29 m
B 6.2 × 10–15 m
C 3.4 × 10–10 m
D 3.0 × 10–9 m
Space for working

16
23 A pipe is closed at one end and contains gas, trapped by a column of water.
gas
7.0 m
5.0 m
water
The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of water is 1000 kg m–3.
What is the pressure of the gas? (Use g = 10 m s–2.)
A 0.3 × 105 Pa
B 0.5 × 105 Pa
C 1.5 × 105 Pa
D 1.7 × 105 Pa
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

17
24 The graph is a force-extension graph for a wire that is being stretched.
30
force / N
25
20
15
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
extension / mm
How much work needs to be done by the tensile force, to two significant figures, to cause an
extension of 7.0 mm?
A 0.088 J B 0.12 J C 0.53 J D 120 J
25 A wire stretches 8 mm under a load of 60 N.
A second wire of the same material, with half the diameter and a quarter of the original length of
the first wire, is stretched by the same load.
Assuming that Hooke’s law is obeyed, what is the extension of this wire?
Space for working

18
26 A surveyor’s device emits a laser pulse.
What is the time taken for the pulse to travel from the device to a wall 150 m away, where it is
reflected, and then return to the device?
A 0.05 ns B 0.10 ns C 0.50 µs D 1.0 µs
27 The period of an electromagnetic wave is 1.0 ns.
What are the frequency and wavelength of the wave?
frequency / Hz wavelength / m
A 1.0 3.0 × 108

B 1.0 × 106 300
C 1.0 × 109 0.30
D 1.0 × 1012 3.0 × 10–4
28 X and Y are two points on the surface of water in a ripple tank. A source of waves of constant
frequency begins to generate waves which then travel past X and Y, causing them to oscillate.
waves
Y
water surface
X
What is the phase difference between X and Y?
A 45° B 135° C 180° D 270°
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

19
29 A monochromatic plane wave of speed c and wavelength λ is diffracted at a small aperture.
The diagram illustrates successive wavefronts.
X
P
After what time will some portion of the wavefront XY reach point P?
A 3λ B 2λ C 3λ D 4λ
2c c c c
Space for working

20
30 A standing sound wave is set up between a loudspeaker and a wall.
A microphone is connected to a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) and is moved along a line

directly between the loudspeaker and the wall. The amplitude of the trace on the c.r.o. rises to a
maximum at a position X, falls to a minimum and then rises once again to a maximum at a
position Y.
The distance between X and Y is 33 cm. The speed of sound in air is 330 m s–1.
Which diagram represents the c.r.o. trace of the sound received at X?
A B
time base 0.50 ms / cm 1 cm time base 0.50 ms / cm 1 cm
C D
time base 0.50 ms / cm 1 cm time base 0.50 ms / cm 1 cm
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

21
31 An electric field exists in the space between two charged metal plates.
+
X
Y
–
Which graph shows the variation of electric field strength E with distance d from X along the
line XY?
A B C D
E E E E
0 0 0 0
0 d 0 d 0 d 0 d
32 When will 1 C of charge pass a point in an electrical circuit?
A when 1 A moves through a potential difference of 1 V

B when a power of 1 W is used for 1 s
C when the current is 5 mA for 200 s
D when the current is 10 A for 10 s
Space for working

22
33 Two copper wires of the same length but different diameters carry the same current.
Which statement about the flow of charged particles through the wires is correct?
A Charged particles are provided by the power supply. Therefore the speed at which they
travel depends only on the voltage of the supply.
B The charged particles in both wires move with the same average speed because the current
in both wires is the same.
C The charged particles move faster through the wire with the larger diameter because there is
a greater volume through which to flow.
D The charged particles move faster through the wire with the smaller diameter because it has
a larger potential difference applied to it.
34 A power cable X has resistance R and carries current I.
A second cable Y has resistance 2R and carries current 1 I.

2
power dissipated in Y
What is the ratio ?
power dissipated in X
A 1 B 1 C 2 D 4
4 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

23
35 The diagram shows a circuit with four voltmeter readings V, V1, V2 and V3.
V V1
V V
V2
V
2R
V3
V
Which equation relating the voltmeter readings must be true?
A V = V1 + V2 + V3
B V + V1 = V2 + V3
C V3 = 2(V2)
D V – V1 = V3
Space for working

24
36 A light-dependent resistor (LDR) is connected in series with a resistor R and a battery.
LDR
The resistance of the LDR is equal to the resistance of R when no light falls on the LDR.
When the light intensity falling on the LDR increases, which statement is correct?
A The current in R decreases.

B The current in the LDR decreases.
C The p.d. across R decreases.
D The p.d. across the LDR decreases.
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

25
37 The diagram shows the circuit for a signal to display a green or a red light. It is controlled by the
switch S.
green g G
red R
12 V
black x
The signal is some way from S to which it is connected by a cable with green, red and black
wires. At the signal, the green and red wires are connected to the corresponding lamp and the
black wire is connected to a terminal x to provide a common return. The arrangement is shown
correctly connected and with the switch set to illuminate the red lamp.
During maintenance, the wires at the signal are disconnected and, when reconnected, the black
wire is connected in error to the green lamp (terminal g) instead of terminal x. The red wire is
connected correctly to its lamp and connections at S remain as in the diagram.
black
g G
green
red R
12 V
When the system is tested with the switch connection to the red wire, what does the signal show?
A the green lamp illuminated normally

B the red lamp illuminated normally
C the red and green lamps both illuminated normally
D the red and green lamps both illuminated dimly
Space for working

26
38 Four identical resistors are connected in the three networks below.
1 2 3
Which arrangement has the highest total resistance and which has the lowest?
highest lowest
A 1 2
B 1 3
C 3 1
D 3 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

27
39 Nuclear decay is both spontaneous and random in nature.
Which row gives the correct experimental evidence for these properties?
spontaneous nature of decay random nature of decay
A the decay rate is not affected by the decay rate is not affected by
pressure temperature
B the decay rate is not affected by the rate at which radiation is received
pressure at a counter fluctuates
C the decay rate is not affected by the decay rate is not affected by
temperature pressure
D the rate at which radiation is received the decay rate is not affected by
at a counter fluctuates pressure
222 214
40 Radon 86 Rn is the start of a decay chain that forms bismuth 83 Bi by alpha and beta emission.
For the decay of each nucleus of radon, how many α−particles and β−particles are emitted?
α−particles β−particles
A 1 1
B 2 1
C 1 2
D 2 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/12/M/J/12

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*0311107490*

IB12 06_9702_13/RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω x 02 − x 2
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
that takes 10 s?
A 40 J B 400 J C 4000 J D 40 000 J
2 When a force F moves its point of application through a displacement s in the direction of the
force, the work W done by the force is given by
W = F s.
How many vector quantities and scalar quantities does this equation contain?
A one scalar quantity and two vector quantities

B one vector quantity and two scalar quantities
C three scalar quantities
D three vector quantities
3 What is a possible unit for the product VI, where V is the potential difference across a resistor
and I is the current through the same resistor?
A newton per second (N s–1)

B newton second (N s)
C newton metre (N m)
D newton metre per second (N m s–1)
A 16 ± 1 m s–1
B 16.0 ± 0.2 m s–1
C 16.0 ± 0.4 m s–1
D 16.00 ± 0.36 m s–1
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

5
5 A light-meter measures the intensity I of the light falling on it. Theory suggests that I varies
inversely as the square of the distance d.
light-meter
A B
I I
0 0
0 d 0 d
C D
I I
0 0
0 d2 0 1
d2
Space for working

6

7 In an experiment to determine the acceleration of free fall using a falling body, what would lead to
a value that is too large?
A air resistance
B dimensions of the body are too large
C measured distance longer than true distance
D measured time longer than true time
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

7
8 In the absence of air resistance, a stone is thrown from P and follows a parabolic path in which
the highest point reached is T. The stone reaches point Q just before landing.
Q
P
The vertical component of acceleration of the stone is
A zero at T.
B larger at T than at Q.
C larger at Q than at T.
D the same at Q as at T.
9 The diagram shows a laboratory experiment in which a feather falls from rest in a long evacuated
vertical tube of length L.
feather
L
vacuum
The feather takes time T to fall from the top to the bottom of the tube.
How far will the feather have fallen from the top of the tube in time 0.50 T?
A 0.13 L B 0.25 L C 0.38 L D 0.50 L
Space for working

8
10 The diagram shows a barrel suspended from a frictionless pulley on a building. The rope
supporting the barrel goes over the pulley and is secured to a stake at the bottom of the building.
barrel
120 kg
18 m
man
80 kg
stake
A man stands close to the stake. The bottom of the barrel is 18 m above the man’s head. The
mass of the barrel is 120 kg and the mass of the man is 80 kg.
The man keeps hold of the rope after untying it from the stake and is lifted upwards as the barrel
falls.
What is the man’s upward speed when his head is level with the bottom of the barrel? (Use
g = 10 m s–2.)
A 6 m s–1 B 8 m s–1 C 13 m s–1 D 19 m s–1
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

9
11 Each option gives a correct word equation involving force.
Which option gives the definition of force?
A force = energy divided by displacement
B force = mass × acceleration
C force = pressure × area

D force = rate of change of momentum
v v
m m

B The total kinetic energy after impact is mv 2.
D The total momentum before impact is 2 mv.
Space for working

10
13 The diagram shows a crane supporting a load L.
R
x y
W L
A mass provides a balancing load W. The position of the load is such that the system is perfectly
balanced with Wx = Ly. The ground provides a reaction force R. The distance x does not change.
If the load is moved further out so that the distance y increases and the crane does not topple,
which statement is correct?
A B
R R
W L W L
H H
A horizontal force H acts on the base of the A horizontal force H acts on the base of the
support column towards the left. support column towards the right.
C D
R R
W L W L
The reaction force R moves to the left. The reaction force R moves to the right.
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

11
14 A cylindrical block of wood has cross-sectional area A and weight W. It is totally immersed in
Which expression is equal to the upthrust on the block?
A (pb – pt)A + W
B (pb – pt)
C (pb – pt)A
D (pb – pt)A – W
15 A car of mass m travels at constant speed up a slope at an angle θ to the horizontal, as shown in
the diagram. Air resistance and friction provide a resistive force F.
resistive force F
What force is needed to propel the car at this constant speed?
A mg cos θ
B mg sin θ
C mg cos θ + F
D mg sin θ + F
Space for working

12
16 The force resisting the motion of a car is taken as being proportional to the square of the car’s
speed. The magnitude of the force at a speed of 20 m s–1 is 800 N.
What effective power is required from the car’s engine to maintain a steady speed of 40 m s–1?
A 32 kW B 64 kW C 128 kW D 512 kW
17 A concrete cube of side 0.60 m and uniform density 2.0 × 103 kg m–3 is lifted 5.0 m vertically by a
crane.
A 2.2 kJ B 21 kJ C 59 kJ D 450 kJ

C It is the energy due to the attractions between the molecules in the object.
D It is the sum of all the microscopic potential and kinetic energies of the molecules in the
object.
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

13
19 The data below are taken from a test of a petrol engine for a motor car.
power output 150 kW

fuel consumption 20 litres per hour
energy content of fuel 40 MJ per litre
Which expression will evaluate the efficiency of the engine?
150 × 103
A
40 × 10 6 × 20 × 60 × 60
150 × 10 3 × 60 × 60
B
20 × 40 × 10 6
6
150 × 10 3 × 40 × 10 × 20
C
60 × 60
150 × 10 3 × 20
D
40 × 10 3 × 60 × 60
20 What is represented by the gradient of a graph of force (vertical axis) against extension
(horizontal axis)?
A elastic limit
B spring constant
C stress
D Young modulus
Space for working

14
21 The diagram shows a wire of diameter D and length L that is firmly clamped at one end between
two blocks of wood. A load is applied to the wire which causes it to extend by an amount x.
blocks of wood
wire
load
By how much would a wire of the same material, but of diameter 2D and length 3L, extend when
the same load is applied?
2 3 4 3
A 3
x B 4
x C 3
x D 2
x
22 Which property of a metal wire depends on its Young modulus?
A ductility
B elastic limit
C spring constant
D ultimate tensile stress
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

15
23 When white sugar granules are heated, they melt. When the melt is cooled quickly, a brittle solid
form of toffee is produced.
How does the structure of the sugar change?
A amorphous to polymeric
B crystalline to amorphous
C crystalline to polymeric
D polymeric to amorphous
24 At room temperature, the density of liquid mercury is five times greater than the density of solid
aluminium.
A Aluminium atoms are spaced widely apart.

B Aluminium atoms move more freely than mercury atoms.
C Atoms in a liquid take up less space than atoms in a solid.
D Mercury atoms have greater mass than aluminium atoms.
Space for working

16
25 Each box shows identical molecules of a gas represented by circles with arrows to show the
direction of travel and the speed of the molecule. A longer arrow represents a higher speed.
Which box contains a gas of the highest density and the lowest temperature?
A B
C D
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

17
26 The diagram shows a displacement-time graph for a progressive wave.
displacement 5
/ mm
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
time / ms
–5
What are the amplitude and frequency of the wave?
amplitude / mm frequency / Hz
A 5 40
B 5 50
C 10 40
D 10 50
27 Two waves E and G are shown. The waves have the same speed.
y0 y0
0 0
0 1 2 3 time / ms 0 1 2 3 time / ms
–y0 –y0
E G
A Wave E has a greater amplitude than wave G.

B Wave E has a greater intensity than wave G.
C Wave E has a smaller frequency than wave G.
D Wave E has a smaller wavelength than wave G.
Space for working

18
diagram.
grating
first order maximum
light
first order maximum
The spacing of the slits in the grating is 1.00 × 10–6 m. The angle between the first order diffraction
maxima is 70.0 °.
A 287 nm B 470 nm C 574 nm D 940 nm

Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

19
30 To produce a stationary wave, two waves must travel in opposite directions through the same
space.
Which statement about the properties of the two waves must also be true?
A The waves must have equal frequency, but a different speed and wavelength.
B The waves must have equal speed, but a different wavelength and frequency.
C The waves must have equal speed, frequency and wavelength.
D The waves must have equal wavelength, but a different speed and frequency.
31 A dipole is a pair of one negative charge and one positive charge of equal magnitude. The
electric field of a dipole is shown below.
In which direction does the force act on an electron when at point X?
X
A D
B C
– +
Space for working

20
32 An iron wire has length 8.0 m and diameter 0.50 mm. The wire has resistance R.
A second iron wire has length 2.0 m and diameter 1.0 mm.
What is the resistance of the second wire?
R R R
A B C D R
16 8 2
33 Lightning can occur between a charged cloud and the Earth’s surface when the electric field
strength in the intervening atmosphere reaches 25 kN C–1. The diagram shows the electric field
between the base of a cloud and the Earth’s surface.
base of cloud
– – – – – – – –
– – –
2 km
+ + + + + + + +
+ + +
Earth’s surface
What is the minimum potential difference between the Earth and the base of a cloud, 2 km high,
for lightning to occur?
A 12.5 MV B 25 MV C 50 MV D 100 MV
34 There is a current of 10 mA in a conductor for half an hour.
How much charge passes a point in the conductor in this time?
A 0.3 C B 5C C 18 C D 300 C
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

21
35 In the circuit below, the ammeter reading is I and the voltmeter reading is V.
A V
When the switch is closed, which row describes what happens to I and V ?
I V
A decreases decreases to zero

B increases decreases to zero
C increases stays the same
D stays the same increases
Space for working

22
resistance R.
done against the resistance R.
37 The circuit below has a current I in the resistor R.
S 3A
9Ω 4A
R I
What must be known in order to determine the value of I ?
A e.m.f. of the power supply

B resistance of resistor S
C Kirchhoff’s first law
D Kirchhoff’s second law
Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

23
38 A potential divider consists of a light-dependent resistor (LDR) in series with a variable resistor of
resistance R. The resistance of the LDR decreases when the light level increases. The variable
resistor can be set at either high resistance or low resistance.
+10 V
LDR
output
R
voltage
0V
Which situation gives the largest output voltage?
light level at LDR R
A high high
B high low
C low high
D low low
Space for working

24
39 Thorium-234 ( 234
90 Th) decays by β-emission into a daughter product which in turn decays by
further β-emission into a granddaughter product.
A B
92
91
proton
90
number
89
C D
88
232 233 234 235 236

nucleon number

Space for working
© UCLES 2012 9702/13/M/J/12

* 6 0 8 7 2 5 2 2 3 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour

The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or For Examiner’s Use
part question.
1
Total
DC (SJF/SW) 42132/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas, W = p ΔV
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

5

Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) (i) State the SI base units of volume.
base units of volume ................................................. [1]
(ii) Show that the SI base units of pressure are kg m–1 s–2.
[1]
(b) The volume V of liquid that flows through a pipe in time t is given by the equation
V
=
π Pr 4
t 8Cl
where P is the pressure difference between the ends of the pipe of radius r and length l.
The constant C depends on the frictional effects of the liquid.
Determine the base units of C.
base units of C ................................................. [3]

6
2 A ball is thrown vertically down towards the ground with an initial velocity of 4.23 m s–1. The For
ball falls for a time of 1.51 s before hitting the ground. Air resistance is negligible. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) Show that the downwards velocity of the ball when it hits the ground is 19.0 m s–1.
[2]
(ii) Calculate, to three significant figures, the distance the ball falls to the ground.
distance = ............................................. m [2]
(b) The ball makes contact with the ground for 12.5 ms and rebounds with an upwards
velocity of 18.6 m s–1. The mass of the ball is 46.5 g.
(i) Calculate the average force acting on the ball on impact with the ground.
magnitude of force = .................................................. N
direction of force ......................................................

[4]
(ii) Use conservation of energy to determine the maximum height the ball reaches
after it hits the ground.
height = ............................................. m [2]
(c) State and explain whether the collision the ball makes with the ground is elastic or
inelastic.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

7
3 One end of a spring is fixed to a support. A mass is attached to the other end of the spring. For
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
mass
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass is in equilibrium. Explain, by reference to the forces acting on the mass, what
is meant by equilibrium.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The mass is pulled down and then released at time t = 0. The mass oscillates up and
down. The variation with t of the displacement of the mass d is shown in Fig. 3.2.
6.0
d / 10–2 m
4.0
2.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
t /s
–2.0
–4.0
–6.0
Fig. 3.2
Use Fig. 3.2 to state a time, one in each case, when
(i) the mass is at maximum speed,
time = .............................................. s [1]
(ii) the elastic potential energy stored in the spring is a maximum,
time = .............................................. s [1]
(iii) the mass is in equilibrium.
time = .............................................. s [1]

8
(c) The arrangement shown in Fig. 3.3 is used to determine the length l of a spring when For
different masses M are attached to the spring. Examiner’s
Use
mass
Fig. 3.3
The variation with mass M of l is shown in Fig. 3.4.
35
30
25
l / 10–2 m
20
15
10
0
0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50
M / kg
Fig. 3.4
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

9
(i) State and explain whether the spring obeys Hooke’s law. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the force constant of the spring is 26 N m–1.
[2]
(iii) A mass of 0.40 kg is attached to the spring. Calculate the energy stored in the
spring.
energy = .............................................. J [3]

10
4 (a) The output of a heater is 2.5 kW when connected to a 220 V supply. For
Examiner’s
(i) Calculate the resistance of the heater. Use
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
(ii) The heater is made from a wire of cross-sectional area 2.0 × 10–7 m2 and resistivity
1.1 × 10–6 Ω m.
Use your answer in (i) to calculate the length of the wire.
length = ............................................. m [3]
(b) The supply voltage is changed to 110 V.
(i) Calculate the power output of the heater at this voltage, assuming there is no
change in the resistance of the wire.
power = ............................................. W [1]
(ii) State and explain quantitatively one way that the wire of the heater could be
changed to give the same power as in (a).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

11
5 (a) (i) State Kirchhoff’s second law. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Kirchhoff’s second law is linked to the conservation of a certain quantity. State this
quantity.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 5.1 is used to compare potential differences.
cell A
2.0 V
0.50 Ω
C D
I
R
0.90 m
X
J Y
E r
uniform resistance wire
length 1.00 m
cell B
Fig. 5.1
The uniform resistance wire XY has length 1.00 m and resistance 4.0 Ω. Cell A has
e.m.f. 2.0 V and internal resistance 0.50 Ω. The current through cell A is I. Cell B has
e.m.f. E and internal resistance r.
The current through cell B is made zero when the movable connection J is adjusted so
that the length of XJ is 0.90 m. The variable resistor R has resistance 2.5 Ω.
(i) Apply Kirchhoff’s second law to the circuit CXYDC to determine the current I.
I = .............................................. A [2]

12
(ii) Calculate the potential difference across the length of wire XJ. For
Examiner’s
Use
potential difference = .............................................. V [2]
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) to state the value of E.
E = .............................................. V [1]
(iv) State why the value of the internal resistance of cell B is not required for the
determination of E.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

13
6 (a) A laser is used to produce an interference pattern on a screen, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
P2
P1
laser light
0.450 mm
wavelength 630 nm
screen
double slit 1.50 m
The laser emits light of wavelength 630 nm. The slit separation is 0.450 mm. The distance
between the slits and the screen is 1.50 m. A maximum is formed at P1 and a minimum
is formed at P2.
Interference fringes are observed only when the light from the slits is coherent.
(i) Explain what is meant by coherence.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain how an interference maximum is formed at P1.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Explain how an interference minimum is formed at P2.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) Calculate the fringe separation.
fringe separation = ............................................. m [3]

14
(b) State the effects, if any, on the fringes when the amplitude of the waves incident on the For
double slits is increased. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

15
7 (a) The spontaneous decay of polonium is shown by the nuclear equation For
Examiner’s
210
84 Po ➞ 206
82 Pb + X .
Use
(i) State the composition of the nucleus of X.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The nuclei X are emitted as radiation. State two properties of this radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The mass of the polonium (Po) nucleus is greater than the combined mass of the nuclei
of lead (Pb) and X. Use a conservation law to explain qualitatively how this decay is
possible.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/21/M/J/12

* 9 9 6 7 0 8 3 2 7 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

appropriate units.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. For Examiner’s Use
part question. 1
Total
DC (SJF/SW) 42071/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

5

Examiner’s
1 The volume V of liquid flowing in time t through a pipe of radius r is given by the equation Use
V
=
π Pr 4
t 8Cl
where P is the pressure difference between the ends of the pipe of length l, and C depends
on the frictional effects of the liquid.
An experiment is performed to determine C. The measurements made are shown in Fig. 1.1.
V
/ 10–6 m3 s–1 P / 103 N m–2 r / mm l /m
t
1.20 ± 0.01 2.50 ± 0.05 0.75 ± 0.01 0.250 ± 0.001
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the value of C.
C = ..................................... N s m–2 [2]
(b) Calculate the uncertainty in C.
uncertainty = ..................................... N s m–2 [3]
(c) State the value of C and its uncertainty to the appropriate number of significant figures.
C = ........................................... ± ........................................... N s m–2 [1]

6
2 (a) A ball is thrown vertically down towards the ground and rebounds as illustrated in For
Use
ball passing point A
A
8.4 m s–1
ball at maximum
5.0 m height after rebound
B
h
Fig. 2.1
As the ball passes A, it has a speed of 8.4 m s–1. The height of A is 5.0 m above the
ground. The ball hits the ground and rebounds to B. Assume that air resistance is
negligible.
(i) Calculate the speed of the ball as it hits the ground.
speed = ........................................ m s–1 [2]
(ii) Show that the time taken for the ball to reach the ground is 0.47 s.
[1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

7
(b) The ball rebounds vertically with a speed of 4.2 m s–1 as it leaves the ground. The time For
the ball is in contact with the ground is 20 ms. The ball rebounds to a maximum height h. Examiner’s
Use
The ball passes A at time t = 0. On Fig. 2.2, plot a graph to show the variation with time
t of the velocity v of the ball. Continue the graph until the ball has rebounded from the
ground and reaches B.
v / m s–1
0
0 t /s
Fig. 2.2 [3]
(c) The ball has a mass of 0.050 kg. It moves from A and reaches B after rebounding.
(i) For this motion, calculate the change in

1. kinetic energy,
change in kinetic energy = .............................................. J [2]

2. gravitational potential energy.
change in potential energy = .............................................. J [3]

8
(ii) State and explain the total change in energy of the ball for this motion. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

9
3 (a) State Newton’s first law. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A log of mass 450 kg is pulled up a slope by a wire attached to a motor, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
motor
log wire
12°
Fig. 3.1
The angle that the slope makes with the horizontal is 12°. The frictional force acting on
the log is 650 N. The log travels with constant velocity.
(i) With reference to the motion of the log, discuss whether the log is in equilibrium.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the tension in the wire.
tension = ............................................. N [3]
(iii) State and explain whether the gain in the potential energy per unit time of the log is
equal to the output power of the motor.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

10
4 A battery of electromotive force 12 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to two For
resistors and a light-dependent resistor (LDR), as shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
8.0 kΩ
12 V S
X
12 kΩ
A
Y
Fig. 4.1
An ammeter is connected in series with the battery. The LDR and switch S are connected
across the points XY.
(a) The switch S is open. Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across XY.
p. d. = .............................................. V [3]
(b) The switch S is closed. The resistance of the LDR is 4.0 kΩ. Calculate the current in the
ammeter.
current = .............................................. A [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

11
(c) The switch S remains closed. The intensity of the light on the LDR is increased. State For
and explain the change to Examiner’s
Use
(i) the ammeter reading,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the p.d. across XY.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

12
5 (a) Define the Young modulus. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A load F is suspended from a fixed point by a steel wire. The variation with extension x
of F for the wire is shown in Fig. 5.1.
6.0
5.0
4.0
F / N 3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 0.10 0.20 0.30
x / mm
Fig. 5.1
(i) State two quantities, other than the gradient of the graph in Fig. 5.1, that are
required in order to determine the Young modulus of steel.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
[1]
(ii) Describe how the quantities you listed in (i) may be measured.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

13
(iii) A load of 3.0 N is applied to the wire. Use Fig. 5.1 to calculate the energy stored in For
the wire. Examiner’s
Use
energy = .............................................. J [2]
(c) A copper wire has the same original dimensions as the steel wire. The Young modulus
for steel is 2.2 × 1011 N m–2 and for copper is 1.1 × 1011 N m–2.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch the variation with x of F for the copper wire for extensions up to
0.25 mm. The copper wire is not extended beyond its limit of proportionality. [2]

14
6 (a) Use the principle of superposition to explain the formation of a stationary wave. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Describe an experiment to determine the wavelength of sound in air using stationary
waves. Include a diagram of the apparatus in your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

15
(c) The variation with distance x of the intensity I of a stationary sound wave is shown in For
Use
1.0
I / arbitrary
units
0.5
0
0 20 40 60
x / cm
Fig. 6.1
(i) On the x-axis of Fig. 6.1, indicate the positions of all the nodes and antinodes of the
stationary wave. Label the nodes N and the antinodes A. [1]
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 340 m s–1.

Use Fig. 6.1 to determine the frequency of the sound wave.
frequency = ............................................ Hz [3]

16
7 (a) A nuclear reaction occurs when a uranium-235 nucleus absorbs a neutron. The reaction For
may be represented by the equation: Examiner’s
Use
235 W 93 141
92 U + Xn 37 Rb + Z Cs + YW
Xn
State the number represented by the letter
W .............................................................
X ..............................................................
Y ..............................................................
Z ...............................................................
[3]
(b) The sum of the masses on the left-hand side of the equation in (a) is not the same as
the sum of the masses on the right-hand side.
Explain why mass seems not to be conserved.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/22/M/J/12

* 9 3 0 3 0 4 9 9 8 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour

part question.
1
Total
DC (SJF/SW) 42070/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4

Examiner’s
1 (a) Explain the differences between the quantities distance and displacement. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State Newton’s first law.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Two tugs pull a tanker at constant velocity in the direction XY, as represented in Fig. 1.1.
tug 1
T1
X 25.0°
tanker Y
15.0°
T2
tug 2
Fig. 1.1
Tug 1 pulls the tanker with a force T1 at 25.0° to XY. Tug 2 pulls the tanker with a force
of T2 at 15.0° to XY. The resultant force R due to the two tugs is 25.0 × 103 N in the
direction XY.
(i) By reference to the forces acting on the tanker, explain how the tanker may be
described as being in equilibrium.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

5
(ii) 1. Complete Fig. 1.2 to draw a vector triangle for the forces R, T1 and T2. [2] For
Examiner’s
Use
25.0 × 103 N
Fig. 1.2
2. Use your vector triangle in Fig. 1.2 to determine the magnitude of T1 and of T2.
T1 = ................................................... N
T2 = .................................................. N
[2]

6
2 A motor drags a log of mass 452 kg up a slope by means of a cable, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
m
10.0 motor
start and finish cable

P
position
of log
14.0°
S
Fig. 2.1
The slope is inclined at 14.0° to the horizontal.
(a) Show that the component of the weight of the log acting down the slope is 1070 N.
[1]
(b) The log starts from rest. A constant frictional force of 525 N acts on the log. The log
accelerates up the slope at 0.130 m s–2.
(i) Calculate the tension in the cable.
tension = ............................................. N [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

7
(ii) The log is initially at rest at point S. It is pulled through a distance of 10.0 m to For
point P. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate, for the log,
1. the time taken to move from S to P,
time = .............................................. s [2]
2. the magnitude of the velocity at P.
velocity = ........................................ m s–1 [1]
(c) The cable breaks when the log reaches point P. On Fig. 2.2, sketch the variation with
time t of the velocity v of the log. The graph should show v from the start at S until the
log returns to S. [4]
0
0 t
Fig. 2.2

8
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

9
3 (a) Show that the pressure P due to a liquid of density ρ is proportional to the depth h below For
the surface of the liquid. Examiner’s
Use
[4]
(b) The pressure of the air at the top of a mountain is less than that at the foot of the
mountain. Explain why the difference in air pressure is not proportional to the difference
in height as suggested by the relationship in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
4 (a) Define electric field strength. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A uniform electric field is produced by applying a potential difference of 1200 V across
two parallel metal plates in a vacuum, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
1200 V 14 mm metal plates
Fig. 4.1
The separation of the plates is 14 mm. A particle P with charge 3.2 × 10–19 C and mass
6.6 × 10–27 kg starts from rest at the lower plate and is moved vertically to the top plate
by the electric field.
Calculate
(i) the electric field strength between the plates,
electric field strength = ....................................... V m–1 [2]
(ii) the work done on P by the electric field,
work done = .............................................. J [2]
(iii) the gain in gravitational potential energy of P,
gain in potential energy = .............................................. J [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

11
(iv) the gain in kinetic energy of P, For

Examiner’s
Use
gain in kinetic energy = .............................................. J [1]
(v) the speed of P when it reaches the top plate.
speed = ........................................ m s–1 [2]

12
5 (a) (i) State Kirchhoff’s first law. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Kirchhoff’s first law is linked to the conservation of a certain quantity. State this
quantity.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A variable resistor of resistance R is used to control the current in a circuit, as shown in
Fig. 5.1.
20 V
+ 0.50 Ω
–
G
R
12 V
0.10 Ω
Fig. 5.1
The generator G has e.m.f. 20 V and internal resistance 0.50 Ω. The battery has e.m.f.
12 V and internal resistance 0.10 Ω. The current in the circuit is 2.0 A.
(i) Apply Kirchhoff’s second law to the circuit to determine the resistance R.
R = ............................................. Ω [2]
(ii) Calculate the total power generated by G.
power = ............................................. W [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

13
(iii) Calculate the power loss in the total resistance of the circuit. For
Examiner’s
Use
power = ............................................. W [2]
(iv) The circuit is used to supply energy to the battery from the generator. Determine
the efficiency of the circuit.
efficiency = ................................................. [2]

14
6 (a) Monochromatic light is diffracted by a diffraction grating. By reference to this, explain For
what is meant by Examiner’s
Use
(i) diffraction,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) coherence,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) superposition.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A parallel beam of red light of wavelength 630 nm is incident normally on a diffraction
grating of 450 lines per millimetre.
Calculate the number of diffraction orders produced.
number of orders = ................................................. [3]
(c) The red light in (b) is replaced with blue light. State and explain the effect on the
diffraction pattern.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12
15
7 A radioactive source emits α-radiation and γ-radiation. For

Examiner’s
Explain how it may be shown that the source does not emit β-radiation using Use
(a) the absorption properties of the radiation,
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) the effects of a magnetic field on the radiation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/23/M/J/12

* 6 0 3 2 9 8 6 3 4 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours

Total
DC (AC/SW) 48427/6
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/31/M/J/12

3
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the motion of a pendulum whose swing is
interrupted depends on its length.
(a) (i) Lay the pendulum next to the rule and use the pen to make a mark on the string so
that the distance L is 0.180 m, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
mark bob
string L = 0.180 m
metre rule
Fig. 1.1

4
(ii) Set up the apparatus, fixing the string in the split bung so that the string is just For
touching the wooden rod at the mark you have made. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 1.2 shows a side view and a front view of the apparatus.
split bung in clamp
stand
string
x
wooden rod
x
mark
L L
bob
5 cm
bench
side view front view

Fig. 1.2
The centre of the bob should be approximately 5 cm above the bench.
The distance x between the bottom of the bung and the centre of the bob should be
approximately 55 cm.
The mark on the string should be level with the centre of the rod.
(iii) Measure and record the distance x.
x = ............................................. m [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/31/M/J/12

5
(b) (i) Move the bob sideways through a distance of approximately 5 cm, as shown in For
Use
wooden rod
5 cm
Fig. 1.3
(ii) Release the bob and watch its movement. The bob will move to the right and then
to the left again completing a swing, as shown in Fig. 1.4. Let the pendulum swing
to and fro, counting the number of swings.
one complete swing
Fig. 1.4
Measure and record the time for at least 10 consecutive swings.
Record enough readings to determine an accurate value for the time T taken for
one complete swing.
T = .................................................. [2]

6
(c) Reduce the distance x. Keep L constant, by adjusting the height of the wooden rod if For
necessary. Repeat (a)(iii) and (b) until you have six sets of values of x and T. Examiner’s
Use
Include values of x in your table.
[9]
(d) (i) Plot a graph of T on the y-axis against x on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/31/M/J/12

7
For
Examiner’s
Use

8
(e) The quantities T and x are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
T= P x +Q Use
Using your answers from (d)(iii), determine the values of P and Q.
P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/31/M/J/12

9
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the force required to pull a block up an inclined
plane depends on the angle between the inclined plane and the bench.
(a) (i) Place the board on the bench.
(ii) Place the block with attached masses on the board, and attach the newton-meter
masses
newton-meter
block
board
bench
Fig. 2.1
(iii) Gently pull the newton-meter until the block just starts to move.
Measure and record the reading F0 on the newton-meter, at the instant the block
just starts to move.
F0 = ................................................. [2]
(iv) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of F0.
F0
(v) Calculate μ where μ = .
W
W is the value of the weight of the block and masses written on the card.
μ = ................................................. [1]
10
(b) (i) Place the board and supporting block as shown in Fig. 2.2. The longer edge of the For
supporting block should be vertical. Examiner’s
Use
board longer edge

of supporting
block
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Using the protractor, measure and record the angle θ between the board and the
bench.
θ = ................................................ [1]
(iii) Using your values from (a)(v) and (b)(ii), calculate (sin θ + μ cos θ ).
(sin θ + μ cos θ ) = ................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Place the block with masses on the board and attach it to the newton-meter, as
shown in Fig. 2.3.
Fig. 2.3
(ii) Pull the newton-meter until the block just starts to move.
Measure and record the reading F on the newton-meter.
F = ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/31/M/J/12

11
(d) Place the supporting block as shown in Fig. 2.4 with a shorter edge vertical. For
Examiner’s
Repeat (b)(ii), (b)(iii) and (c). Use
Fig. 2.4
θ = ......................................................
(sin θ + μ cos θ ) = ......................................................
F = ......................................................
[3]
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between F and θ is
F = k (sin θ + μ cos θ )
where k is a constant and μ is the value calculated in (a)(v).
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
(f) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/31/M/J/12

* 4 4 0 0 9 3 1 1 0 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours

Total
DC (LEO/SW) 48999/4
2
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the equilibrium position of a suspended mass. Use
The apparatus has been set up as shown in Fig. 1.1.
nail with
cardboard disc
spring
nail
string
plumb-line
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) Measure and record the distance L between the two nails.
L = ............................................. m [1]
(b) (i) Attach the crocodile clip to the string so that the string passes through the gap
between the jaws of the crocodile clip, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
string gap
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12

3
Suspend the mass hanger and masses from the loop attached to the crocodile clip. For
Adjust the position of the crocodile clip so that the distance d from the plumb-line to the Examiner’s
string loop is about 30 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.3. Use
nail
d crocodile
clip
plumb-line
h0
bench
Fig. 1.3
(ii) Measure and record d.
d = .................................................. m
(iii) Measure and record the initial height h0 of the bottom of the mass above the bench,
h0 = ............................................. m [1]

4
(c) Reduce d by moving the crocodile clip closer to the plumb-line, ensuring that the string For
passes through the gap as shown in Fig. 1.2. Measure and record d and the new height Examiner’s
h of the bottom of the mass above the bench. Repeat until you have six sets of values Use
for d and h, with d in the range 5 cm to 30 cm.
冢L2 – d 冣
2
Include values of and (h – h0) in your table.
[10]
冢L2 – d 冣
2
(d) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against (h – h0) on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12
5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) The relationship between d and h is For

Examiner’s
冢L2 – d 冣
2
= a(h – h0) + b Use

a = .......................................................
b = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12

7
BLANK PAGE

8
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the adhesive strength of Blu-Tack. Use
(a) (i) You have been provided with two plastic rulers, one with a loop of string attached.
Take the ruler without string and clamp it along the edge of the bench with a flat
face uppermost.
(ii) Use some of the Blu-Tack to make a ball of diameter about 8 mm.
(iii) Using the calipers provided, measure and record the diameter of the ball.
ball diameter = ......................................................
(iv) Place the ball of Blu-Tack on the clamped ruler with a thin rod each side of it. Press
the flat face of the second ruler on to the Blu-Tack until the ruler touches the rods.
The Blu-Tack will form a disc, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
G-clamp disc of
rod Blu-Tack
ruler
rod
ruler
string
loop
bench
Fig. 2.1
(b) (i) Measure and record the diameter d of the disc of Blu-Tack.
d = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12

9
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in d. For

Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Calculate the contact area A using A =

πd 2.
4
A = ................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Attach the newton-meter to the string loop and lay it horizontally on the bench.
(ii) Pull the newton-meter horizontally (parallel to the rulers). Measure and record the
force F when the top ruler detaches.
F = ................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Remove the Blu-Tack from the rulers.
(ii) Make a ball with a slightly different diameter and repeat (a)(iii), (a)(iv), (b)(i), (b)(iii)
and (c).
You should be aware that a large change in diameter could result in a reading
outside the range of the newton-meter.
ball diameter = ......................................................
d = ................................................. [1]
A = ................................................. [1]
F = ................................................. [2]

10
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between F and A is For

Examiner’s
F = kA Use
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12

11
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/32/M/J/12

* 4 0 0 9 3 6 2 4 0 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours

Total
DC (LEO/SW) 48424/4
2
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the extension of an arrangement of springs Use
depends on the loads applied to it.
(a) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.1.
stands
rod of clamp A
boss
two rod of clamp B

springs
single
spring
wooden
rod
65 cm
h0
strings with
loops
bench
Fig. 1.1
Place the rod of clamp A, supporting the two springs, approximately 65 cm above
the bench.
Once fixed do not change the position of the rod of clamp A throughout the
experiment.
Suspend the wooden rod, with strings attached, using the springs as shown. Adjust
the position of the rod of clamp B until the wooden rod is horizontal.
Ensure the springs hang vertically.
(ii) Measure and record the distance h0 between the centre of the rod of clamp B
(supporting the single spring) and the bench.
h0 = .............................................. m [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

3
(b) (i) Add masses to the wooden rod as shown in Fig. 1.2. The 100 g mass hanger should For
be attached to the longer, central string. Examiner’s
Use
wooden rod
total mass
m = 150 g 100 g mass hanger
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Adjust the height of the rod of clamp B until the wooden rod is horizontal.
(iii) Measure and record the distance h between the centre of the rod of clamp B and
the bench, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
Fig. 1.3
h = .................................................. [1]

4
(iv) Calculate the value of (h0 – h). For

Examiner’s
Use
(h0 – h) = ......................................................
(c) By increasing the mass m, repeat (b)(ii), (b)(iii) and (b)(iv) until you have five sets of
values of m and h. Do not change the mass attached to the longer, central string.
(h0 – h)
Include values of and 1 in your table.
m m
[10]
(h0 – h)
(d) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against 1 on the x-axis. [3]
m m
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) The quantities h and m are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
(h0 – h) P Use
= +Q
m m
Use your answers in (d)(iii) to determine the values of P and Q.

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

7
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the cooling rate of a hot liquid depends on the Use
surface area of the liquid exposed to air.
(a) (i) Pour cold water into the beaker up to the 200 ml mark.
(ii) Pour the water into the cup and use the pen to place a mark on the inside surface
of the cup, level with the water surface.
(iii) Empty out the cold water.
(iv) Repeat (a)(i), (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) for the bowl.
(b) (i) Pour boiling water into the cup up to the mark.
(ii) When the temperature of the water falls to approximately 75 °C, start the stopwatch.
Record this starting temperature θ0.
θ0 = .................................................. [1]
(iii) After two minutes, measure and record the temperature θ.
θ = .................................................. [1]
(iv) Calculate the change in temperature Δθ = (θ0 – θ ).
Δθ = ................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Measure and record the diameter d of the water surface.
d = .................................................. [1]

8
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d. For

Examiner’s
Use
(d) Repeat (b) and (c)(i) for the bowl.
θ0 = ......................................................
θ = ......................................................
Δθ = (θ0 – θ ) = ......................................................
d = ......................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

9
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between Δθ and d is For

Examiner’s
Δθ = k d 2 Use
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
(ii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your values of k.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Explain whether your results in (e)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

10
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/33/M/J/12

* 8 2 0 0 1 0 9 3 3 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/34
2 hours

Total
DC (CW/SW) 49108/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

3
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the change in current in a circuit as its resistance is
changed.
(a) (i) Assemble the circuit of Fig. 1.1.
3 V d.c. supply
X Y
crocodile clip
component holder
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Close the switch.

(iii) Record the ammeter reading I0.
I0 = ................................................. [1]
(iv) Open the switch.
(b) (i) Select one of the resistors labelled with a numerical value and connect it between
the crocodile clips on the component holder. Record the resistance R of your
selected resistor.
R = ................................................ kΩ
(ii) Close the switch and record the ammeter reading I.

Open the switch.
I = ................................................. [1]

4
(c) Repeat (b) using different labelled resistors until you have six sets of values of R and I. For
1 Examiner’s
Include values of in your table. Use
R
[10]
1
(d) (i) Plot a graph of I on the y-axis against on the x-axis. [3]
R
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) The quantities I and R are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
a a
I= + Use
R b

a = ......................................................
b = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

7
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the amount of energy needed to bend a copper
wire depends on its diameter.
(a) You are provided with a pendulum which can be used to hit and bend a wire specimen.
Attach the wooden pointer to the pendulum using Blu-Tack. Align the pointer with the
90° position on the protractor when the pendulum is hanging freely, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Check that the pendulum swings freely.
80 90 100 11
70 01
60 20
13
50 0
14
40
0
15
30
01
0
60 17
10 2
0 180
0
wooden
pointer
Blu-Tack protractor
pendulum
Fig. 2.1
(b) You are provided with copper wire specimens of two different diameters. Using the
micrometer, measure and record the diameter d of one of the thicker wires.
d = ................................................. [2]
(c) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d.

8
(d) (i) Fit the wire fully into the hole in the wooden block. The wire should project about For
2 cm above the surface of the block. Examiner’s
Use
(ii) Position the wooden block so that the wire just touches the edge of the pendulum,
pendulum
wire
base of
wooden stand
block
Fig. 2.2
(iii) Lift the pendulum so that the pointer is aligned with the 0° position on the protractor.
(iv) While holding the block in position, release the pendulum and record the maximum
angle θ reached by the pointer after the pendulum has bent the wire.
θ = ................................................. [2]
(v) The energy used to bend the wire is proportional to the value of sin (180°– θ).
Calculate this value, giving your answer to an appropriate number of significant
figures.
sin (180°– θ) = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

9
(e) Repeat (b) and (d) using the thinner wire specimens. For
Examiner’s
Use
d = ......................................................
θ = ......................................................
sin (180°– θ) = ......................................................

[3]
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between θ and d is
sin (180°– θ) = kd 2
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]

10
(ii) Explain whether your results support the suggested relationship. For
Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(g) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

11
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/34/M/J/12

* 6 2 1 5 3 5 7 6 1 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours

Total
DC (CW/SW) 48458/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

3
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the current in a circuit depends on the resistance
of the circuit.
(a) Set up the circuit as shown in Fig. 1.1. The crocodile clip should be positioned so that
three of the resistors from the chain are included in the circuit.
crocodile clip
chain of resistors
Fig. 1.1
All the resistors have the same value of resistance R.

(ii) Record the ammeter reading I and the number n of resistors from the chain
included in the circuit.
I = .....................................................
n = .....................................................
[1]
(iii) Open the switch.

4
(c) By attaching the crocodile clip to different junctions and terminals on the chain of For
resistors, repeat (b) until you have six sets of readings of I and n. Examiner’s
Use
(n + 1)
Include values of in your table.
I
[10]
(n + 1)
(d) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against n on the x-axis. [3]
I
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between I and n is For

Examiner’s
(n + 1) Use
= Pn + Q
I
Use your answers in (d)(iii) to determine values for P and Q.

.
P = .....................................................
Q = .....................................................
[1]
(f) Disconnect the circuit.

Connect the voltmeter across the cell.
Measure and record the voltage V across the cell.
V = ............................................. V [1]
(g) The constant P is related to R and V by

2R
P= .
V
Using your answers in (e) and (f), calculate a value for R.
R = ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

7
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the rotational motion of an object depends on its
mass.
(a) Mould the modelling clay into a solid disc that is identical in shape to that of the 100 g
slotted mass. You will not need to use all of the modelling clay.
The modelling clay should keep this shape throughout the experiment.
(b) (i) Place the metre rule on the pivot so that it balances, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
x
pivot metre rule
bench
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Record the metre rule reading x at the pivot.
x = ................................................. [1]
(iii) Remove the metre rule from the pivot and lay it flat on the bench.
(c) (i) Place the disc you made in (a) at the 100 cm end of the metre rule as shown in
Fig. 2.2.
x1
disc
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Record the metre rule reading x1 at the centre of the disc.
x1 = ................................................. [1]
(iii) Calculate the distance d1, where d1 = (x1 – x).
d1 = ................................................. [1]

8
(iv) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d1. For

Examiner’s
Use
(d) (i) With the disc still at x1, carefully place the metre rule so that the pivot is again
under your value of x on the metre rule from (b)(ii). Use the 100 g mass to balance
the rule, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
x2 x x1
100 g mass d2 d1
Fig. 2.3
(ii) Record the metre rule reading x2 at the centre of the 100 g mass.
x2 = ................................................. [1]
(iii) Calculate the distance d2, where d2 = (x – x2).
d2 = .....................................................
(iv) Carefully remove the 100 g mass and disc from the rule.
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

9
(e) (i) Place the 100 g mass on the wire hanger and suspend it from the rubber band, as For
Use
rod of clamp
boss
rubber band stand
wire hanger
100 g mass
Fig. 2.4
(ii) Hold the 100 g mass and slowly twist it horizontally through 90°.
(iii) Release the 100 g mass and watch its movement.
The mass completes one oscillation by moving as shown in Fig. 2.5.
top view
one
complete
oscillation
Fig. 2.5
The time taken for one complete oscillation is T.

By timing several of these complete oscillations, determine an accurate value for T.
T = .............................................. s [2]

10
(f) Repeat (e) using the disc. For

Examiner’s
Use
T = .............................................. s [2]
(g) For an oscillating mass it is suggested that the relationship between T and d is
k
T2=
d
(i) Using your data, complete the table in Fig. 2.6 and calculate two values of k.
object distance from pivot T/s k
disc
d1 = ........................... ................................. .................................
100 g mass
d2 = ........................... ................................. .................................
Fig. 2.6
[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Explain whether your results in (g)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

11
(h) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/35/M/J/12

* 0 5 5 9 5 8 5 0 5 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
appropriate units.
2
3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
13
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 42044/5
2
Data
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The gravitational potential φ at distance r from point mass M is given by the expression
GM
φ = –
r
where G is the gravitational constant.
Explain the significance of the negative sign in this expression.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A spherical planet may be assumed to be an isolated point mass with its mass
concentrated at its centre. A small mass m is moving near to, and normal to, the surface
of the planet. The mass moves away from the planet through a short distance h.
State and explain why the change in gravitational potential energy ΔEP of the mass is
given by the expression
ΔEP = mgh
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

5
(d) The planet in (c) has mass M and diameter 6.8 × 103 km. The product GM for this planet For
is 4.3 × 1013 N m2 kg–1. Examiner’s
Use
A rock, initially at rest a long distance from the planet, accelerates towards the planet.
Assuming that the planet has negligible atmosphere, calculate the speed of the rock as
it hits the surface of the planet.
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

6
2 (a) The kinetic theory of gases is based on some simplifying assumptions. For
The molecules of the gas are assumed to behave as hard elastic identical spheres. Examiner’s
State the assumption about ideal gas molecules based on Use
(i) the nature of their movement,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) their volume.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

7
(b) A cube of volume V contains N molecules of an ideal gas. Each molecule has a For
component cX of velocity normal to one side S of the cube, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
side S
cx
Fig. 2.1
The pressure p of the gas due to the component cX of velocity is given by the expression
pV = NmcX2
where m is the mass of a molecule.
Explain how the expression leads to the relation
pV = 13 Nm<c 2>
where <c 2> is the mean square speed of the molecules.
[3]
(c) The molecules of an ideal gas have a root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of 520 m s–1 at a
temperature of 27 °C.
Calculate the r.m.s. speed of the molecules at a temperature of 100 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

8
3 (a) Define specific latent heat. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The heater in an electric kettle has a power of 2.40 kW.

When the water in the kettle is boiling at a steady rate, the mass of water evaporated in
2.0 minutes is 106 g.
The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2260 J g–1.
Calculate the rate of loss of thermal energy to the surroundings of the kettle during the
boiling process.
rate of loss = ............................................ W [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

9
4 A small metal ball is suspended from a fixed point by means of a string, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
string
ball
Fig. 4.1
The ball is pulled a small distance to one side and then released. The variation with time t of
the horizontal displacement x of the ball is shown in Fig. 4.2.
6
x / cm
4
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 t /s 1.0
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 4.2
The motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
(a) Use data from Fig. 4.2 to determine the horizontal acceleration of the ball for a
displacement x of 2.0 cm.
acceleration = ....................................... m s–2 [3]

10
(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the ball is EK. For

On the axes of Fig. 4.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the kinetic Examiner’s
energy of the ball for the first 1.0 s of its motion. Use
kinetic
energy
EK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 t /s 1.0
Fig. 4.3
[3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

11

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An isolated metal sphere is to be used to store charge at high potential. The charge
stored may be assumed to be a point charge at the centre of the sphere. The sphere has
a radius of 25 cm. Electrical breakdown (a spark) occurs in the air surrounding the sphere
when the electric field strength at the surface of the sphere exceeds 1.8 × 104 V cm–1.
(i) Show that the maximum charge that can be stored on the sphere is 12.5 μC.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the potential of the sphere for this maximum charge.
potential = ............................................. V [2]

12
6 A sinusoidal alternating voltage supply is connected to a bridge rectifier consisting of four For
ideal diodes. The output of the rectifier is connected to a resistor R and a capacitor C as Examiner’s
shown in Fig. 6.1. Use
C
R
Fig. 6.1
The function of C is to provide some smoothing to the potential difference across R.

The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the resistor R is shown in Fig. 6.2.
6
V/V
4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
t / ms
Fig. 6.2
(a) Use Fig. 6.2 to determine, for the alternating supply,
peak voltage = ............................................. V [1]
(ii) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) voltage,
r.m.s. voltage = ............................................. V [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

13
(iii) the frequency. Show your working. For

Examiner’s
Use
frequency = ........................................... Hz [2]
(b) The capacitor C has capacitance 5.0 μF.

For a single discharge of the capacitor through the resistor R, use Fig. 6.2 to
(i) determine the change in potential difference,
change = ............................................. V [1]
(ii) determine the change in charge on each plate of the capacitor,
change = ............................................ C [2]
(iii) show that the average current in the resistor is 1.1 × 10–3 A.
[2]

14
(c) Use Fig. 6.2 and the value of the current given in (b)(iii) to estimate the resistance of For
Use
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

15
7 Two long straight parallel copper wires A and B are clamped vertically. The wires pass For
through holes in a horizontal sheet of card PQRS, as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
wire A wire B
S R
P Q
Fig. 7.1
(a) There is a current in wire A in the direction shown on Fig. 7.1.

On Fig. 7.1, draw four field lines in the plane PQRS to represent the magnetic field due
to the current in wire A. [3]
(b) A direct current is now passed through wire B in the same direction as that in wire A.
The current in wire B is larger than the current in wire A.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow in the plane PQRS to show the direction of the force on
wire B due to the magnetic field produced by the current in wire A. [1]
(ii) Wire A also experiences a force. State and explain which wire, if any, will experience
the larger force.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The direct currents in wires A and B are now replaced by sinusoidal alternating currents
of equal peak values. The currents are in phase.
Describe the variation, if any, of the force experienced by wire B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
16
8 (a) Explain what is meant by a photon. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) An emission spectrum is seen as a series of differently coloured lines on a black

background.
Suggest how this observation provides evidence for discrete electron energy levels in
atoms.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

17
9 (a) (i) State what is meant by the decay constant of a radioactive isotope. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the decay constant λ and the half-life t of an isotope are related by the
expression
λt = 0.693.
[3]
(b) In order to determine the half-life of a sample of a radioactive isotope, a student

measures the count rate near to the sample, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
to
counter
detector
shielding
sample of
radioactive
material
Fig. 9.1

18
Initially, the measured count rate is 538 per minute. After a time of 8.0 hours, the For
measured count rate is 228 per minute. Examiner’s
Use
Use these data to estimate the half-life of the isotope.
half-life = ...................................... hours [3]
(c) The accepted value of the half-life of the isotope in (b) is 5.8 hours.
The difference between this value for the half-life and that calculated in (b) cannot be
explained by reference to faulty equipment.
Suggest two possible reasons for this difference.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

19
Section B For
Examiner’s
10 A student designs an electronic sensor that is to be used to switch on a lamp when the light
intensity is low. Part of the circuit is shown in Fig. 10.1.
+5 V
+5 V
X –
–5 V 240 V
sensing device processing unit output

device
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the name of the component labelled X on Fig. 10.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 10.1, draw the symbols for
(i) two resistors to complete the circuit for the sensing device, [2]
(ii) a relay to complete the circuit for the processing unit. [2]
(c) (i) State the purpose of the relay.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why the diode is connected to the output of the operational amplifier
(op-amp) in the direction shown.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

20
11 High-speed electrons are incident on a metal target. The spectrum of the emitted X-ray For
radiation is shown in Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
intensity
0
wavelength
Fig. 11.1
(a) Explain why
(i) there is a continuous distribution of wavelengths,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) there is a sharp cut-off at short wavelength.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State
(i) what is meant by the hardness of an X-ray beam,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) how hardness is controlled.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

21
(c) (i) Suggest why, when producing an X-ray image, long-wavelength X-ray radiation For
poses a greater hazard to health than short-wavelength radiation. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest how this hazard is minimised.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

22
12 A person is to be investigated using a magnetic resonance (MR) scanner. For

Examiner’s
(a) This technique involves the use of two superimposed magnetic fields. Use
Describe the functions of these two magnetic fields.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The frequency f of the electromagnetic waves emitted by protons on relaxation in an MR

scanner is given by the equation
f = 2cB
where B is the total magnetic flux density and c is a constant equal to 1.34 × 108 s–1 T –1.
The magnetic flux density changes by 2.0 × 10–4 T for each 1.0 cm thickness of tissue in
a section.
The scanner is adjusted so that the thickness of each section is 3.0 mm.
Calculate, for corresponding points in neighbouring sections,
(i) the difference in magnetic flux density,
difference in flux density = .............................................. T [1]
(ii) the change in emitted frequency.
frequency change = ........................................... Hz [2]

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12
23
13 (a) In a mobile phone system, the area covered by the system is divided into a number of For
cells. Examiner’s
For this system, explain why Use
(i) neighbouring cells use different carrier frequencies,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) each cell has a limited area, even in sparsely populated regions.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mobile phone handset is left switched on.

Explain why, although a call is not being made, the computer at the cellular exchange is
still operating for this phone.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12

* 0 0 2 1 2 3 9 3 0 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
appropriate units.
2
question.
4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NH/SW) 42210/4
2
Data
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State Newton’s law of gravitation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The Earth and the Moon may be considered to be isolated in space with their masses
concentrated at their centres.
The orbit of the Moon around the Earth is circular with a radius of 3.84 × 105 km. The
period of the orbit is 27.3 days.
Show that
(i) the angular speed of the Moon in its orbit around the Earth is 2.66 × 10–6 rad s–1,
[1]
(ii) the mass of the Earth is 6.0 × 1024 kg.
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

5
(c) The mass of the Moon is 7.4 × 1022 kg. For

Examiner’s
(i) Using data from (b), determine the gravitational force between the Earth and the Use
Moon.
force = .............................................. N [2]
(ii) Tidal action on the Earth’s surface causes the radius of the orbit of the Moon to
increase by 4.0 cm each year.
Use your answer in (i) to determine the change, in one year, of the gravitational
potential energy of the Moon. Explain your working.
energy change = ............................................... J [3]

6
2 A ball of mass 37 g is held between two fixed points A and B by two stretched helical springs, For
Use
ball
mass 37 g
A B
Fig. 2.1
The ball oscillates along the line AB with simple harmonic motion of frequency 3.5 Hz and
amplitude 2.8 cm.
(a) Show that the total energy of the oscillations is 7.0 mJ.
[2]
(b) At two points in the oscillation of the ball, its kinetic energy is equal to the potential
energy stored in the springs.
Calculate the magnitude of the displacement at which this occurs.
displacement = ............................................ cm [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

7
(c) On the axes of Fig. 2.2 and using your answers in (a) and (b), sketch a graph to show For
the variation with displacement x of Examiner’s
Use
(i) the total energy of the system (label this line T), [1]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the ball (label this line K), [2]
(iii) the potential energy stored in the springs (label this line P). [2]
energy
/ mJ
4
0
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3
x / cm
Fig. 2.2
(d) The arrangement in Fig. 2.1 is now rotated through 90° so that the line AB is vertical
and the ball oscillates in a vertical plane.
Suggest one form of energy, other than those in (c), that must be taken into consideration
when plotting new graphs to show energy changes with displacement.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

8
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

9
3 (a) State what is meant by the internal energy of a system. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain qualitatively the change, if any, in the internal energy of the following
systems:
(i) a lump of ice at 0 °C melts to form liquid water at 0 °C,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) a cylinder containing gas at constant volume is in sunlight so that its temperature
rises from 25 °C to 35 °C.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]

10
4 A charged point mass is situated in a vacuum. A proton travels directly towards the mass, as For
illustrated in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
charged
proton
point mass
Fig. 4.1
When the separation of the mass and the proton is r, the electric potential energy of the
system is UP .
The variation with r of the potential energy UP is shown in Fig. 4.2.
r / cm
0 2 4 6 8 10
0
–10
UP / 10–26 J
–20
–30
–40
–50
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

11
(a) (i) Use Fig. 4.2 to state and explain whether the mass is charged positively or For
negatively. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The gradient at a point on the graph of Fig. 4.2 is G.

Show that the electric field strength E at this point due to the charged point mass is
Eq = G
where q is the charge at this point.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Use the expression in (a)(ii) and Fig. 4.2 to determine the electric field strength at a
distance of 4.0 cm from the charged point mass.
field strength = ........................................ V m–1 [4]

12

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A horseshoe magnet is placed on a balance. A stiff metal wire is clamped horizontally
between the poles, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
horseshoe
magnet
stiff metal
wire
balance pan
Fig. 5.1
The magnetic flux density in the space between the poles of the magnet is uniform and
is zero outside this region.
The length of the metal wire normal to the magnetic field is 6.4 cm.
When a current in the wire is switched on, the reading on the balance increases by 2.4 g.
The current in the wire is 5.6 A.
(i) State and explain the direction of the force on the wire due to the current.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

13
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic flux density between the poles of the For
magnet. Examiner’s
Use
flux density = ...............................................T [2]
(c) A low frequency alternating current is now passed through the wire in (b).
The root-mean-square (r.m.s.) value of the current is 5.6 A.
Describe quantitatively the variation of the reading seen on the balance.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
6 (a) Describe the main principles of the determination of the charge on an oil drop by For
Millikan’s experiment. You may draw a diagram if you wish. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [7]
(b) In an experiment to determine the fundamental charge, values of charge on oil drops
were found by a student to be as shown below.
3.2 × 10–19 C; 6.4 × 10–19 C; 16 × 10–19 C; 9.7 × 10–19 C;
12.8 × 10–19 C; 3.1 × 10–19 C; 6.3 × 10–19 C.
State the value, to two significant figures, of the fundamental charge that is suggested
by these values of charge on oil drops.
fundamental charge = .............................................. C [1]

© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12
15
7 The photoelectric effect may be represented by the equation For

Examiner’s
photon energy = work function energy + maximum kinetic energy of electron. Use
(a) State what is meant by work function energy.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy EK of photoelectrons
emitted from the surface of sodium metal is shown in Fig. 7.1.
0.8
0.6
EK / eV
0.4
0.2
0
4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0
14
f / 10 Hz
Fig. 7.1
Use the gradient of the graph of Fig. 7.1 to determine a value for the Planck constant h.
Show your working.
h = ............................................. J s [2]

16
(c) The sodium metal in (b) has a work function energy of 2.4 eV. The sodium is replaced by For
calcium which has a work function energy of 2.9 eV. Examiner’s
Use
On Fig. 7.1, draw a line to show the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic
energy EK of photoelectrons emitted from the surface of calcium. [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

17
8 The element strontium has at least 16 isotopes. One of these isotopes is strontium-89. This For
isotope has a half-life of 52 days. Examiner’s
Use
(a) State what is meant by isotopes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the probability per second of decay of a nucleus of strontium-89.
probability = ............................................ s–1 [3]
(c) A laboratory prepares a strontium-89 source.

The activity of this source is measured 21 days after preparation of the source and is
found to be 7.4 × 106 Bq.
Determine, for the strontium-89 source at the time that it was prepared,
(i) the activity,
activity = ............................................ Bq [2]
(ii) the mass of strontium-89.
mass = ............................................... g [2]

18
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 An operational amplifier (op-amp) may be used as part of the processing unit in an electronic
sensor.
(a) State four properties of an ideal operational amplifier.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
4. ......................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A comparator circuit incorporating an ideal op-amp is shown in Fig. 9.1.
+5 V
+
VIN
–5 V VOUT
Fig. 9.1
The variation with time t of the input potential VIN is shown in Fig. 9.2.
6
potential
/V 4
2
VIN
0
t
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 9.2
On the axes of Fig. 9.2, draw a graph to show the variation with time t of the output
potential VOUT . [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

19
(c) The output potential VOUT is to be displayed using two light-emitting diodes (LEDs). A For
diode emitting red light is to indicate when VOUT is positive and a diode emitting green Examiner’s
light is to be used to indicate when VOUT is negative. Use
Complete Fig. 9.3 to show the connections of the two LEDs to the output of the op-amp.
Label each LED with the colour of light that it emits.
VOUT
Fig. 9.3
[3]

20
10 (a) An aluminium block is placed near to a small source of X-ray radiation, as shown in For
Use
aluminium
block
X-ray A B
source
Fig. 10.1
X-rays from the source are detected at point A and at point B.
State two reasons why the intensity of the X-ray beam at point B is not as great as the
intensity at point A.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A cross-section through a model of a finger is shown in Fig. 10.2.
2.4 cm
1.1 cm bone
C D
A B
soft
tissue
Fig. 10.2
The thickness of the model is 2.4 cm and that of the bone in the model is 1.1 cm.
Parallel beams of X-rays are incident on the model in the directions AB and CD, as
shown in Fig. 10.2.
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

21
Data for the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ for the bone and the soft tissue For
in the model are given in Fig. 10.3. Examiner’s
Use
μ / cm–1
bone 3.00
soft tissue 0.27
Fig. 10.3
Calculate the ratio
intensity of X-ray beam incident on the model

intensity of X-ray beam emergent from the model
for
(i) the beam AB,
ratio = .................................................. [2]
(ii) the beam CD.
ratio = .................................................. [2]
(c) Use your answers in (b) to suggest why, for this model, an X-ray image with good
contrast may be obtained.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

22
11 A signal that is transmitted over a long distance will be attenuated and it will pick up noise. For
Examiner’s
(a) State what is meant by Use
(i) attenuation,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) noise.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain why regenerator amplifiers do not amplify the noise that has been picked up on
digital signals.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A transmitter on Earth produces a signal of power 2.4 kW. This signal, when received by
a satellite, is attenuated by 195 dB.
Calculate the signal power received by the satellite.
power = ............................................. W [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

23
12 An incomplete simplified block diagram of the circuitry for a mobile-phone handset is shown For
Use
aerial
switch
tuning
circuit
amplifier amplifier
X oscillator demodulator
parallel-
to-serial Y
converter
ADC DAC
amplifier amplifier
microphone loudspeaker
Fig. 12.1
(a) State the name of the block labelled
(i) X,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Y.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
Question 12 continues on page 24.

24
(b) Explain the purpose of For

Examiner’s
(i) the switch, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the parallel-to-serial converter.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12

* 8 0 5 5 0 0 9 3 3 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/43
2 hours
appropriate units.
2
3
question. 4
10
11
12
13
Total
DC (KN/CGW) 56773
2
Data
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The gravitational potential φ at distance r from point mass M is given by the expression
GM
φ = –
r
Explain the significance of the negative sign in this expression.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A spherical planet may be assumed to be an isolated point mass with its mass
concentrated at its centre. A small mass m is moving near to, and normal to, the surface
of the planet. The mass moves away from the planet through a short distance h.
State and explain why the change in gravitational potential energy ΔEP of the mass is
ΔEP = mgh
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

5
(d) The planet in (c) has mass M and diameter 6.8 × 103 km. The product GM for this planet For
is 4.3 × 1013 N m2 kg–1. Examiner’s
Use
A rock, initially at rest a long distance from the planet, accelerates towards the planet.
Assuming that the planet has negligible atmosphere, calculate the speed of the rock as
it hits the surface of the planet.
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

6
2 (a) The kinetic theory of gases is based on some simplifying assumptions. For
The molecules of the gas are assumed to behave as hard elastic identical spheres. Examiner’s
State the assumption about ideal gas molecules based on Use
(i) the nature of their movement,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) their volume.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

7
(b) A cube of volume V contains N molecules of an ideal gas. Each molecule has a For
component cX of velocity normal to one side S of the cube, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
side S
cx
Fig. 2.1
The pressure p of the gas due to the component cX of velocity is given by the expression
pV = NmcX2
where m is the mass of a molecule.
Explain how the expression leads to the relation
pV = 13 Nm<c 2>
where <c 2> is the mean square speed of the molecules.
[3]
(c) The molecules of an ideal gas have a root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of 520 m s–1 at a
temperature of 27 °C.
Calculate the r.m.s. speed of the molecules at a temperature of 100 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

8
3 (a) Define specific latent heat. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The heater in an electric kettle has a power of 2.40 kW.

When the water in the kettle is boiling at a steady rate, the mass of water evaporated in
2.0 minutes is 106 g.
The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2260 J g–1.
Calculate the rate of loss of thermal energy to the surroundings of the kettle during the
boiling process.
rate of loss = ............................................ W [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

9
4 A small metal ball is suspended from a fixed point by means of a string, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
string
ball
Fig. 4.1
The ball is pulled a small distance to one side and then released. The variation with time t of
the horizontal displacement x of the ball is shown in Fig. 4.2.
6
x / cm
4
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 t /s 1.0
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 4.2
The motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
(a) Use data from Fig. 4.2 to determine the horizontal acceleration of the ball for a
displacement x of 2.0 cm.
acceleration = ....................................... m s–2 [3]

10
(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the ball is EK. For

On the axes of Fig. 4.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the kinetic Examiner’s
energy of the ball for the first 1.0 s of its motion. Use
kinetic
energy
EK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 t /s 1.0
Fig. 4.3
[3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

11

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An isolated metal sphere is to be used to store charge at high potential. The charge
stored may be assumed to be a point charge at the centre of the sphere. The sphere has
a radius of 25 cm. Electrical breakdown (a spark) occurs in the air surrounding the sphere
when the electric field strength at the surface of the sphere exceeds 1.8 × 104 V cm–1.
(i) Show that the maximum charge that can be stored on the sphere is 12.5 μC.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the potential of the sphere for this maximum charge.
potential = ............................................. V [2]

12
6 A sinusoidal alternating voltage supply is connected to a bridge rectifier consisting of four For
ideal diodes. The output of the rectifier is connected to a resistor R and a capacitor C as Examiner’s
shown in Fig. 6.1. Use
C
R
Fig. 6.1
The function of C is to provide some smoothing to the potential difference across R.

The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the resistor R is shown in Fig. 6.2.
6
V/V
4
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
t / ms
Fig. 6.2
(a) Use Fig. 6.2 to determine, for the alternating supply,
peak voltage = ............................................. V [1]
(ii) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) voltage,
r.m.s. voltage = ............................................. V [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

13
(iii) the frequency. Show your working. For

Examiner’s
Use
frequency = ........................................... Hz [2]
(b) The capacitor C has capacitance 5.0 μF.

For a single discharge of the capacitor through the resistor R, use Fig. 6.2 to
(i) determine the change in potential difference,
change = ............................................. V [1]
(ii) determine the change in charge on each plate of the capacitor,
change = ............................................ C [2]
(iii) show that the average current in the resistor is 1.1 × 10–3 A.
[2]

14
(c) Use Fig. 6.2 and the value of the current given in (b)(iii) to estimate the resistance of For
Use
resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

15
7 Two long straight parallel copper wires A and B are clamped vertically. The wires pass For
through holes in a horizontal sheet of card PQRS, as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
wire A wire B
S R
P Q
Fig. 7.1
(a) There is a current in wire A in the direction shown on Fig. 7.1.

On Fig. 7.1, draw four field lines in the plane PQRS to represent the magnetic field due
to the current in wire A. [3]
(b) A direct current is now passed through wire B in the same direction as that in wire A.
The current in wire B is larger than the current in wire A.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow in the plane PQRS to show the direction of the force on
wire B due to the magnetic field produced by the current in wire A. [1]
(ii) Wire A also experiences a force. State and explain which wire, if any, will experience
the larger force.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The direct currents in wires A and B are now replaced by sinusoidal alternating currents
of equal peak values. The currents are in phase.
Describe the variation, if any, of the force experienced by wire B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
16
8 (a) Explain what is meant by a photon. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) An emission spectrum is seen as a series of differently coloured lines on a black

background.
Suggest how this observation provides evidence for discrete electron energy levels in
atoms.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

17
9 (a) (i) State what is meant by the decay constant of a radioactive isotope. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Show that the decay constant λ and the half-life t of an isotope are related by the
expression
λt = 0.693.
[3]
(b) In order to determine the half-life of a sample of a radioactive isotope, a student

measures the count rate near to the sample, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
to
counter
detector
shielding
sample of
radioactive
material
Fig. 9.1

18
Initially, the measured count rate is 538 per minute. After a time of 8.0 hours, the For
measured count rate is 228 per minute. Examiner’s
Use
Use these data to estimate the half-life of the isotope.
half-life = ...................................... hours [3]
(c) The accepted value of the half-life of the isotope in (b) is 5.8 hours.
The difference between this value for the half-life and that calculated in (b) cannot be
explained by reference to faulty equipment.
Suggest two possible reasons for this difference.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

19
Section B For
Examiner’s
10 A student designs an electronic sensor that is to be used to switch on a lamp when the light
intensity is low. Part of the circuit is shown in Fig. 10.1.
+5 V
+5 V
X –
–5 V 240 V
sensing device processing unit output

device
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the name of the component labelled X on Fig. 10.1.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 10.1, draw the symbols for
(i) two resistors to complete the circuit for the sensing device, [2]
(ii) a relay to complete the circuit for the processing unit. [2]
(c) (i) State the purpose of the relay.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest why the diode is connected to the output of the operational amplifier
(op-amp) in the direction shown.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

20
11 High-speed electrons are incident on a metal target. The spectrum of the emitted X-ray For
radiation is shown in Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
intensity
0
wavelength
Fig. 11.1
(a) Explain why
(i) there is a continuous distribution of wavelengths,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) there is a sharp cut-off at short wavelength.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State
(i) what is meant by the hardness of an X-ray beam,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) how hardness is controlled.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

21
(c) (i) Suggest why, when producing an X-ray image, long-wavelength X-ray radiation For
poses a greater hazard to health than short-wavelength radiation. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest how this hazard is minimised.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

22
12 A person is to be investigated using a magnetic resonance (MR) scanner. For

Examiner’s
(a) This technique involves the use of two superimposed magnetic fields. Use
Describe the functions of these two magnetic fields.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) The frequency f of the electromagnetic waves emitted by protons on relaxation in an MR

scanner is given by the equation
f = 2cB
where B is the total magnetic flux density and c is a constant equal to 1.34 × 108 s–1 T –1.
The magnetic flux density changes by 2.0 × 10–4 T for each 1.0 cm thickness of tissue in
a section.
The scanner is adjusted so that the thickness of each section is 3.0 mm.
Calculate, for corresponding points in neighbouring sections,
(i) the difference in magnetic flux density,
difference in flux density = .............................................. T [1]
(ii) the change in emitted frequency.
frequency change = ........................................... Hz [2]

© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12
23
13 (a) In a mobile phone system, the area covered by the system is divided into a number of For
cells. Examiner’s
For this system, explain why Use
(i) neighbouring cells use different carrier frequencies,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) each cell has a limited area, even in sparsely populated regions.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mobile phone handset is left switched on.

Explain why, although a call is not being made, the computer at the cellular exchange is
still operating for this phone.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/M/J/12

* 9 1 5 4 6 8 2 3 6 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (KN/SW) 42262/1
2
1 A fairground ride carries passengers in chairs which are attached by metal rods to a rotating For
central pole, as shown in Fig 1.1. When the pole rotates with angular velocity ω, the rods Examiner’s
make an angle θ to the vertical. Use
θ
rotating pole
metal rod
Fig 1.1
It is suggested that cos θ is inversely proportional to ω2.
Design a laboratory experiment, using a small object to represent an occupied chair, to

test the relationship between θ and ω. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the
arrangement of your equipment. In your account you should pay particular attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2012 9702/51/M/J/12

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2012 9702/51/M/J/12

5
2 A current-carrying wire is clamped at each end, as shown in Fig 2.1. A student investigates For
how the deflection y at the centre of the wire varies with the current I. Examiner’s
Use
to
to I
circuit
circuit
Fig. 2.1
For different currents, the deflection is recorded.

6
It is suggested that y and I are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
y = sI r Use
where r and s are constants.
(a) A graph is plotted of lg y on the y-axis against lg I on the x-axis. Determine expressions
for the gradient and y-intercept in terms of r and s.
gradient = ..................................................
y-intercept = ..................................................
[1]
(b) Values of I and y are given in Fig. 2.2.
I / 10–2 A y / mm lg (I / 10–2 A) lg (y / mm)
50 2.6 ± 0.2
60 3.4 ± 0.2
70 4.4 ± 0.2
80 5.4 ± 0.2
90 6.6 ± 0.2
95 7.2 ± 0.2
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of lg (I / 10–2 A) and lg (y / mm) in Fig. 2.2. Include the
absolute uncertainties in lg (y / mm). [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of lg (y / mm) against lg (I / 10–2 A). Include error bars for lg (y / mm).[2]
(iii) Determine the gradient of the line of best fit. Include the uncertainty in your answer.
gradient = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/51/M/J/12

7
0.90 For
Examiner’s
Use
0.85
0.80
lg (y / mm)
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00
lg (I / 10–2A)

8
(iv) Determine the y-intercept of the line of best fit. Include the uncertainty in your For
answer. Examiner’s
Use
y-intercept = .................................................. [2]
(d) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine values for r and s. Include the
uncertainties in your answers. You need not be concerned with the units of r and s.
r = ..................................................
s = ..................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/51/M/J/12

* 8 2 5 6 4 9 4 0 3 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (KN/SW) 42263/3
2
1 A hot air balloon is tied to the ground using a rope. As the wind blows with speed v, the rope For
makes an angle θ to the horizontal, as shown in Fig 1.1. Examiner’s
Use
wind with speed v
rope
ground
Fig 1.1
It is suggested that tan θ is inversely proportional to v 2.
To model the hot air balloon in the laboratory, a balloon filled with helium is used. Design a
laboratory experiment using a small helium-filled balloon to test the relationship between θ
and v. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your equipment.

[15]
© UCLES 2012 9702/52/M/J/12

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2012 9702/52/M/J/12

5
2 A student investigates how the resonant length L of a loaded wire varies with frequency f. For
Examiner’s
Use
wire
signal
generator
30 N
Fig. 2.1
For six different frequencies, the student records the length L.

6
It is suggested that f and L are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
f= 1 T Use
2L μ
where T is the tension in the wire and μ is a constant.
(a) A graph is plotted of f on the y-axis against 1 / L on the x-axis. Determine an expression
for the gradient in terms of T and μ.
gradient = .................................................. [1]
(b) Values of f and L are given in Fig. 2.2.
f / Hz L / 10–2 m
256 54.5 ± 0.5
294 48.0 ± 0.5
330 42.5 ± 0.5
350 40.0 ± 0.5
396 35.5 ± 0.5
440 32.0 ± 0.5
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of (1 / L) / m–1 in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute uncertainties
in 1 / L. [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of f / Hz against (1 / L) / m–1. Include error bars for 1 / L. [2]
gradient = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/52/M/J/12

7
450 For
Examiner’s
Use
430
f / Hz
410
390
370
350
330
310
290
270
250
1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2
(1 / L) / m–1

8
(d) (i) The tension T in the wire is 30 ± 3 N. Using your answer to (c)(iii), determine the For
value of μ. Include an appropriate unit in your answer. Examiner’s
Use
μ = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in μ.
percentage uncertainty = ..................................................% [1]
(e) An expression for μ is
μ = ρ πr 2
where the density ρ of the wire is 8800 kg m–3 and r is the radius of the wire.
(i) Using your answer to (d)(i), determine a value for r.
r = ..................................................m [1]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of r.
percentage uncertainty = ..................................................% [1]
© UCLES 2012 9702/52/M/J/12

* 1 9 3 5 2 3 9 1 1 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

Total
DC (KN/SW) 56772
2
1 A fairground ride carries passengers in chairs which are attached by metal rods to a rotating For
central pole, as shown in Fig 1.1. When the pole rotates with angular velocity ω, the rods Examiner’s
make an angle θ to the vertical. Use
θ
rotating pole
metal rod
Fig 1.1
It is suggested that cos θ is inversely proportional to ω2.
Design a laboratory experiment, using a small object to represent an occupied chair, to

test the relationship between θ and ω. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the

[15]
© UCLES 2012 9702/53/M/J/12

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2012 9702/53/M/J/12

5
2 A current-carrying wire is clamped at each end, as shown in Fig 2.1. A student investigates For
how the deflection y at the centre of the wire varies with the current I. Examiner’s
Use
to
to I
circuit
circuit
Fig. 2.1
For different currents, the deflection is recorded.

6
It is suggested that y and I are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
y = sI r Use
where r and s are constants.
(a) A graph is plotted of lg y on the y-axis against lg I on the x-axis. Determine expressions
for the gradient and y-intercept in terms of r and s.
gradient = ..................................................
y-intercept = ..................................................
[1]
(b) Values of I and y are given in Fig. 2.2.
I / 10–2 A y / mm lg (I / 10–2 A) lg (y / mm)
50 2.6 ± 0.2
60 3.4 ± 0.2
70 4.4 ± 0.2
80 5.4 ± 0.2
90 6.6 ± 0.2
95 7.2 ± 0.2
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of lg (I / 10–2 A) and lg (y / mm) in Fig. 2.2. Include the
absolute uncertainties in lg (y / mm). [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of lg (y / mm) against lg (I / 10–2 A). Include error bars for lg (y / mm).[2]
gradient = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/53/M/J/12

7
0.90 For
Examiner’s
Use
0.85
0.80
lg (y / mm)
0.75
0.70
0.65
0.60
0.55
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.35
1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00
lg (I / 10–2A)

8
Use
y-intercept = .................................................. [2]
(d) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine values for r and s. Include the
uncertainties in your answers. You need not be concerned with the units of r and s.
r = ..................................................
s = ..................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2012 9702/53/M/J/12

PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*1388964283*

Electronic calculators may be used.
IB13 06_9702_11/7RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which pair of quantities contains one vector and one scalar quantity?
A displacement; force
B kinetic energy; power
C acceleration; momentum
D velocity; distance
2 One property Q of a material is used to describe the behaviour of sound waves in the material.
Q is defined as the pressure P of the sound wave divided by the speed v of the wave and the
surface area A of the material through which the wave travels:
Q= P .
vA
What are the SI base units of Q?
A kg m2 s–3 B kg m–3 s–1 C kg m–4 s–1 D kg m–2 s–2
3 A cannon fires a cannonball with an initial speed v at an angle α to the horizontal.
v
H
α
Which equation is correct for the maximum height H reached?
H = g sinα H = g sinα
2
H = v sinα H = (v sinα )
2
A B C D
2g 2v 2g 2v
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

5
4 A wave has a frequency of 5 GHz.
What is the period of the wave?
A 20 000 µs
B 20 ns
C 2 ns
D 200 ps
5 In an experiment to determine the acceleration of free fall g, the period of oscillation T and length
l of a simple pendulum were measured. The uncertainty in the measurement of l is estimated to
be 4%, and the uncertainty in the measurement of T is estimated to be 1%.
The value of g is determined using the formula
4π 2l
g= .
T2
What is the uncertainty in the calculated value for g ?
A 2% B 3% C 5% D 6%
Space for working

6
6 The Y-input terminals of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) are connected to a supply of

amplitude 5.0 V and frequency 50 Hz. The time-base is set at 10 ms per division and the Y-gain at
5.0 V per division.
Which trace is obtained?
A B
C D
7 A body is released from rest and falls vertically in air of constant density.
Which statement about the motion of the falling body is correct?
A As it accelerates, its weight decreases so that its acceleration decreases until it travels with
constant velocity.
B It accelerates initially at 9.8 m s–2 but the drag force increases so its acceleration decreases.
C Its velocity increases at a constant rate until its velocity becomes constant.
D The drag force of the air increases continually and eventually the velocity decreases.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

7
8 A goods train passes through a station at a steady speed of 10 m s–1. An express train is at rest at
the station. The express train leaves the station with a uniform acceleration of 0.5 m s–2 just as the
goods train goes past. Both trains move in the same direction on straight, parallel tracks.
How much time passes before the express train overtakes the goods train?
A 6s B 10 s C 20 s D 40 s
9 A car is stationary at traffic lights. When the traffic lights go green, the driver presses down
sharply on the accelerator. The resultant horizontal force acting on the car varies with time as
shown.
force
0
0 time
Which graph shows the variation with time of the speed of the car?
A B
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
speed speed
0 0
0 time 0 time
Space for working

8
10 Which of the following is a statement of the principle of conservation of momentum?
A In an elastic collision momentum is constant.

B Momentum is the product of mass and velocity.
C The force acting on a body is proportional to its rate of change of momentum.
D The momentum of an isolated system is constant.
11 A 2.0 kg mass travelling at 3.0 m s–1 on a frictionless surface collides head-on with a stationary
1.0 kg mass. The masses stick together on impact.
2.0 kg 1.0 kg
3.0 m s–1
at rest
How much kinetic energy is lost on impact?
A zero B 2.0 J C 2.4 J D 3.0 J
12 A car of mass 750 kg has a horizontal driving force of 2.0 kN acting on it. It has a forward
horizontal acceleration of 2.0 m s–2.
resistive force
driving force
What is the resistive force acting horizontally?
A 0.50 kN B 1.5 kN C 2.0 kN D 3.5 kN
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

9
13 A small water droplet of mass 3.0 µg carries a charge of –6.0 × 10–11 C. The droplet is situated in
the Earth’s gravitational field between two horizontal metal plates. The potential of the upper plate
is +500 V and the potential of the lower plate is –500 V.
+500 V
water droplet
– 2.0 mm
with negative charge
–500 V
What is the motion of the droplet?
A It accelerates downwards.
B It remains stationary.
C It accelerates upwards.
D It moves upwards at a constant velocity.
14 A horizontal bar is supported on a pivot at its centre of gravity. A fixed load is attached to one end
of the bar. To keep the bar in equilibrium, a force F is applied at a distance x from the pivot.
fixed
load F
How does F vary with x?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
Space for working

10
15 The diagram represents a sphere under water. P, Q, R and S are forces acting on the sphere,
due to the pressure of the water.
water surface
S Q
Each force acts perpendicularly to the sphere’s surface. P and R act in opposite directions
vertically. Q and S act in opposite directions horizontally.
Which information about the magnitudes of the forces is correct?
A P < R and S = Q
B P > R and S = Q
C P = R and S = Q and P ≠ S
D P = R and S = Q and P = S
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

11
16 A hinged trapdoor is held closed in the horizontal position by a cable.
Three forces act on the trapdoor: the weight W of the door, the tension T in the cable and the
force H at the hinge.
cable
wall T
trapdoor
hinge
H
W
Which list gives the three forces in increasing order of magnitude?
A H,T,W B T,H,W C W,H,T D W,T,H
Space for working

12
17 A solid rubber ball has a diameter of 8.0 cm. It is released from rest with the top of the ball 80 cm
above a horizontal surface. It falls vertically and then bounces back up so that the maximum
height reached by the top of the ball is 45 cm, as shown.
80
60
40
20
If the kinetic energy of the ball is 0.75 J just before it strikes the surface, what is its kinetic energy
just after it leaves the surface?
A 0.36 J B 0.39 J C 0.40 J D 0.42 J
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

13
18 A wind turbine has blades that sweep an area of 2000 m2. It converts the power available in the
wind to electrical power with an efficiency of 50%.
What is the electrical power generated if the wind speed is 10 m s–1? (The density of air is
1.3 kg m–3.)
A 130 kW B 650 kW C 1300 kW D 2600 kW
19 The diagram shows a wheel of circumference 0.30 m. A rope is fastened at one end to a force
meter. The rope passes over the wheel and supports a freely hanging load of 100 N. The wheel is
driven by an electric motor at a constant rate of 50 revolutions per second.
When the wheel is turning at this rate, the force meter reads 20 N.
50 rev s–1 wheel of

circumference 0.30 m
force
meter 25
20 load 100 N
15
N 10
5
0
What is the output power of the motor?
A 0.3 kW B 1.2 kW C 1.8 kW D 3.8 kW
Space for working

14
20 Which row correctly states the characteristics of the process of evaporation?
requires occurs only at a can cause a change

heat energy particular temperature of temperature
A
B
C
D
21 A bore-hole of depth 2000 m contains both oil and water as shown. The pressure due to the
liquids at the bottom of the bore-hole is 17.5 MPa. The density of the oil is 830 kg m–3 and the
density of the water is 1000 kg m–3.
oil x
2000 m
water
What is the depth x of the oil?
A 907 m B 1000 m C 1090 m D 1270 m
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

15
22 The stress-strain graphs for four different materials are shown below.
Which diagram shows the stress-strain graph for a ductile metal?
A B
stress stress
0 0
0 strain 0 strain
C D
stress stress
0 0
0 strain 0 strain
Space for working

16
23 A number of identical springs, each having the same spring constant, are joined in four
arrangements. A different load is applied to each arrangement.
Which arrangement has the largest extension?
A B C D
6N 8N
2N
1N
24 A light wave of amplitude A is incident normally on a surface of area S. The power per unit area
reaching the surface is P.
The amplitude of the light wave is increased to 2A. The light is then focussed on to a smaller
1
area 3
S.
What is the power per unit area on this smaller area?
A 36P
B 18P
C 12P
D 6P
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

17
25 A wave has a speed of 340 m s–1 and a period of 0.28 ms.
What is its wavelength?
A 0.095 m B 95 m C 1.2 × 103 m D 1.2 × 106 m
26 Which line in the table summarises the change in wave characteristics on going from infra-red to
ultraviolet in the electromagnetic spectrum?
speed in a
frequency
vacuum
B decreases remains constant
C increases remains constant
27 Light of wavelength 600 nm is incident on a pair of slits. Fringes with a spacing of 4.0 mm are
formed on a screen.
What will be the fringe spacing when the wavelength of the light is changed to 400 nm and the
separation of the slits is doubled?
A 1.3 mm
B 3.0 mm
C 5.3 mm
D 12 mm
Space for working

18
28 The speed of a transverse wave on a stretched string can be changed by adjusting the tension of
the string. A stationary wave pattern is set up on a stretched string using an oscillator set at a
frequency of 650 Hz.
fixed
point
oscillator
How must the wave be changed to maintain the same stationary wave pattern if the applied
frequency is increased to 750 Hz?
A Decrease the speed of the wave on the string.

B Decrease the wavelength of the wave on the string.
C Increase the speed of the wave on the string.
D Increase the wavelength of the wave on the string.
29 Noise reduction headphones actively produce their own sound waves in order to cancel out
external sound waves.
A microphone in the headphones receives waves of one frequency. A loudspeaker in the

headphones then produces a wave of that frequency but of a different phase.
What is the phase difference between the external sound wave and the wave produced by the
loudspeaker in the headphones?
A 90° B 180° C 270° D 360°
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

19
30 A beam of electrons is directed into an electric field and is deflected by it.
Diagram 1 represents an electric field in the plane of the paper.

Diagram 2 represents an electric field directed perpendicular to the plane of the paper.
The lines A, B, C and D represent possible paths of the electron beam. All paths are in the plane
of the paper.
Which line best represents the path of the electrons inside the field?
diagram 1 diagram 2
A B C D
electric field electric field

in the plane perpendicular to the
of the paper plane of the paper
electrons electrons
Space for working

20
_ +
plate?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
32 A power supply of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V and internal resistance 2.0 Ω is connected in
series with a 13 Ω resistor.
12 V
2.0 Ω
13 Ω
What is the power dissipated in the 13 Ω resistor?
A 8.3 W B 9.6 W C 10 W D 11 W
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

21
33 When a battery is connected to a resistor, the battery gradually becomes warm. This causes the
internal resistance of the battery to increase whilst its e.m.f. stays unchanged.
As the internal resistance of the battery increases, how do the terminal potential difference and
the output power change, if at all?
terminal potential
output power
difference
A decrease decrease
B decrease unchanged
C unchanged decrease
D unchanged unchanged
34 The principles of conservation of which two quantities are associated with Kirchhoff’s first and
second laws?
first law second law
A charge energy
B charge voltage
C energy charge
D voltage charge
Space for working

22
35 A circuit is set up as shown, supplied by a 3 V battery. All resistances are 1 kΩ.
3V
What will be the reading on the voltmeter?
A 0 B 0.5 V C 1.0 V D 1.5 V
36 The diagram shows an incorrectly connected circuit. The ammeter has a resistance of 0.1 Ω and
the voltmeter has a resistance of 1 MΩ.
0.1 Ω
A
1 MΩ 1 kΩ
V
2V
A The ammeter reads 2 mA.

B The ammeter reads 20 A.
C The voltmeter reads zero.
D The voltmeter reads 2 V.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

23
37 A 12 V battery is in series with an ammeter, a 2 Ω fixed resistor and a 0 – 10 Ω variable resistor. A

high-resistance voltmeter is connected across the variable resistor.
12 V
2Ω
0 – 10 Ω
The resistance of the variable resistor is changed from zero to its maximum value.
Which graph shows how the potential difference (p.d.) measured by the voltmeter varies with the
current measured by the ammeter?
A B C D
p.d. p.d. p.d. p.d.
0 0 0 0
0 current 0 current 0 current 0 current
38 A nickel nucleus 59
28 Ni can be transformed by a process termed K-capture. In this process the
nucleus absorbs an orbital electron.
If no other process is involved, what is the resulting nucleus?

58 58 59 59
A 28 Ni B 27 Co C 27 Co D 29 Cu
Space for working

24
39 It was once thought that the mass of an atom is spread uniformly through the volume of the atom.
When α-particles are directed at a piece of gold foil, the results led scientists to believe instead
that nearly all the mass of the gold atom is concentrated at a point inside the atom.
Which effect is possible only if nearly all the mass of the gold atom is concentrated at a point?
A a few α-particles bounce back
B most α-particles are only slightly deflected
C some α-particles pass through without any deflection
D some α-particles are absorbed
40 Which pair of nuclei are isotopes of one another?
nucleon number of
number neutrons
A 186 112
180 118
B 186 112
182 108
C 184 110
187 110
D 186 110
186 112
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/11/M/J/13

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*3072660610*

IB13 06_9702_12/7RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which pair includes a vector quantity and a scalar quantity?
A displacement; acceleration
B force; kinetic energy
C power; speed
D work; potential energy
2 The unit of resistivity, expressed in terms of base units, is given by
kg x3 y–2 z–3 .
Which base units are x, y and z?
x y z
A ampere metre second

B metre ampere second
C metre second ampere
D second ampere metre
3 Two forces act on a circular disc as shown.
3N
4N
Which diagram shows the line of action of the resultant force?
A B C D
5N
5N 5N 5N
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

5
4 A student carried out an experiment in which an electric current was known to decrease with
time. The readings he found, from first to last, were 3.62 mA, 2.81 mA, 1.13 mA, 1.76 mA and
0.90 mA.
Which statement could not explain the anomalous 1.13 mA reading?
A He has reversed the third and fourth readings in the results table.
B He read the ammeter incorrectly; the reading should have been 2.13 mA.
C He took the current reading at the wrong time.
D There was a systematic error in the readings from the ammeter.
5 The diagram shows a calibration curve for a thermistor, drawn with an unusual scale on the
vertical axis.
100 000
resistance / Ω
10 000
1000
100
0 10 20 30 40 50
temperature / °C
What is the thermistor resistance corresponding to a temperature of 40 °C?
A 130 Ω B 150 Ω C 400 Ω D 940 Ω
Space for working

6
6 A sky diver falls vertically from a stationary balloon. She leaves the balloon at time t = 0. At time
t = T, she reaches terminal velocity. Beyond the time shown in the graphs, she opens her
parachute.
Which graph shows the variation with time t of the force F due to air resistance?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 T t 0 T t 0 T t 0 T t
7 The diagram shows an arrangement to stop trains that are travelling too fast.
speed 50 m s–1
direction maximum speed
of travel 10 m s–1
train marker 1 marker 2
Trains coming from the left travel at a speed of 50 m s–1. At marker 1, the driver must apply the
brakes so that the train decelerates uniformly in order to pass marker 2 at no more than 10 m s –1.
The train carries a detector that notes the times when the train passes each marker and will apply
an emergency brake if the time between passing marker 1 and marker 2 is less than
20 s.
How far from marker 2 should marker 1 be placed?
A 200 m B 400 m C 500 m D 600 m
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

7
8 A ball is released from rest above a horizontal surface and bounces several times.
The graph shows how, for this ball, a quantity y varies with time.
0
0 time
What is the quantity y ?
A acceleration
B displacement
C kinetic energy
D velocity
9 A strong wind of speed 33 m s–1 blows against a wall. The density of the air is 1.2 kg m–3. The wall
has an area of 12 m2 at right angles to the wind velocity. The air has its speed reduced to zero
when it hits the wall.
What is the approximate force exerted by the air on the wall?
A 330 N B 400 N C 480 N D 16 000 N
Space for working

8
10 Two bodies travelling in a straight line collide in a perfectly elastic collision. Which of the following
statements must be correct?
A The initial speed of one body will be the same as the final speed of the other body.
B The relative speed of approach between the two bodies equals their relative speed of
separation.
C The total momentum is conserved but the total kinetic energy will be reduced.
D One of the bodies will be stationary at one instant.
11 A submarine is in equilibrium in a fully submerged position.
sea
steel water
air
What causes the upthrust on the submarine?
A The air in the submarine is less dense than sea water.

B The sea water exerts a greater upward force on the submarine than the weight of the steel.
C The submarine displaces its own volume of sea water.
D There is a difference in water pressure acting on the top and on the bottom of the submarine.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

9
12 A vehicle is at rest on a slope. It is considered to have three forces acting on it to keep it in

equilibrium.
They are its weight W, a normal reaction force R and a frictional force F.
Which triangle of forces is correct?
A B C D
F F
R R
W W W W
R R
F F
13 All external forces on a body cancel out.
Which statement must be correct?
A The body does not move.

B The momentum of the body remains unchanged.
C The speed of the body remains unchanged.
D The total energy (kinetic and potential) of the body remains unchanged.
Space for working

10
14 A uniform beam of mass 1.4 kg is pivoted at P as shown. The beam has a length of 0.60 m and P
is 0.20 m from one end. Loads of 3.0 kg and 6.0 kg are suspended 0.35 m and 0.15 m from the
pivot as shown.
0.40 m 0.20 m
0.35 m 0.15 m
3.0 kg P 6.0 kg
centre of beam
of mass 1.4 kg
What torque must be applied to the beam in order to maintain it in equilibrium?
A 0.010 N m B 0.10 N m C 0.29 N m D 2.8 N m
15 A ball is thrown vertically upwards.
Neglecting air resistance, which statement is correct?
A The kinetic energy of the ball is greatest at the greatest height attained.
B By the principle of conservation of energy, the total energy of the ball is constant throughout
its motion.
C By the principle of conservation of momentum, the momentum of the ball is constant
throughout its motion.
D The potential energy of the ball increases uniformly with time during its ascent.
16 A bow of mass 400 g shoots an arrow of mass 120 g vertically upwards. The potential energy
stored in the bow just before release is 80 J. The system has an efficiency of 28%.
What is the height reached by the arrow when air resistance is neglected?
A 4m B 19 m C 187 m D 243 m
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

11
17 A train on a mountain railway is carrying 200 people of average mass 70 kg up a slope at an

angle of 30° to the horizontal and at a speed of 6.0 m s–1. The train itself has a mass of 80 000 kg.
The percentage of the power from the engine which is used to raise the passengers and the train
is 40 %.
What is the power of the engine?
A 1.1 MW B 2.8 MW C 6.9 MW D 14 MW
18 A gas is enclosed inside a cylinder which is fitted with a frictionless piston.
V1
p p
heat gas
V2
Initially, the gas has a volume V1 and is in equilibrium with an external pressure p. The gas is
then heated slowly so that it expands, pushing the piston back until the volume of the gas has
increased to V2.
How much work is done by the gas during this expansion?
1 1
A p(V2 – V1) B p(V2 – V1) C p(V2 + V1) D p(V2 + V1)
2 2
Space for working

12
19 The diagram shows an ice cube floating in water.
ice
Both the ice cube and the water are at 0 °C.
Which statement correctly compares the molecular properties of the ice and those of the water?
A The mean inter-molecular potential energies are the same for both the ice molecules and the
water molecules.
B The mean inter-molecular separations are the same for both the ice and the water.
C The mean kinetic energies are the same for both the ice molecules and the water molecules.
D The mean total energies are the same for both the ice molecules and the water molecules.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

13
20 Two bulbs X and Y containing air at different pressures are connected by a tube P which contains
two mercury threads.
air pressure air pressure

16 000 Pa 8000 Pa
P
X Y
h1 and h2 are
h1
h2 not to scale
mercury threads
The density of mercury is 13 600 kg m–3.
Which pair of values of h1 and h2 is possible?
h1 / cm h2 / cm
A 4.0 2.0
B 6.0 6.0
C 12.0 18.0
D 18.0 12.0
21 What is the unit of the Young modulus?
A N m–1 B Nm C N m–2 D N m2
Space for working

14
22 A rubber cord hangs from a rigid support. A weight attached to its lower end is gradually
increased from zero, and then gradually reduced to zero.
force
stretching
rubber
cord
contraction
weight
0
0 extension
The force-extension curve for contraction is below the force-extension curve for stretching.
What does the shaded area between the curves represent?
A the amount of elastic energy stored in the rubber

B the amount of thermal energy dissipated in the rubber
C the work done on the rubber cord during stretching
D the work done by the rubber cord during contraction
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

15
23 The diagram shows a large crane on a construction site lifting a cube-shaped load.
cable
crane
load
A model is made of the crane, its load and the cable supporting the load.
The material used for each part of the model is the same as that in the full-size crane, cable and
load. The model is one tenth full-size in all linear dimensions.
What is the ratio stress in the cable on the full- size crane ?
stress in the cable on the model crane
A 100 B 101 C 102 D 103
24 The order of magnitude of the frequency of the shortest wavelength of visible light waves can be
expressed as 10x Hz.
What is the value of x?
A 12 B 13 C 14 D 15
Space for working

16
25 The diagram shows two waves X and Y.
displacement
wave X
0
0 time
wave Y
Wave X has amplitude 8 cm and frequency 100 Hz.
What are the amplitude and the frequency of wave Y?
amplitude / cm frequency / Hz
A 2 33
B 2 300
C 4 33
D 4 300
26 What is correct for all transverse waves?
A They are all electromagnetic.

B They can all be polarised.
C They can all travel through a vacuum.
D They all involve the oscillation of atoms.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

17
27 A transmitter of electromagnetic waves is placed 45 cm from a reflective surface.
reflective surface
transmitter
45 cm
The emitted waves have a frequency of 1.00 GHz. A stationary wave is produced with a node at
the transmitter and a node at the surface.
How many antinodes are in the space between the transmitter and the surface?
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
28 A teacher sets up the apparatus shown to demonstrate a two-slit interference pattern on the
screen.
double screen
single
slit
slit
source
of light q
p r
Which change to the apparatus will increase the fringe spacing?
A decreasing the distance p

B decreasing the distance q
C decreasing the distance r
D decreasing the wavelength of the light
Space for working

18
29 Monochromatic light of wavelength 5.30 × 10–7 m is incident normally on a diffraction grating. The
first order maximum is observed at an angle of 15.4° to the direction of the incident light.
What is the angle between the first and second order diffraction maxima?
A 7.6° B 15.4° C 16.7° D 32.0°
30 Two conducting layers of a liquid crystal display of a calculator are 8 µm apart. A 1.5 V cell is
connected across the conducting layers when the calculator is switched on.
What is the electric field strength between the layers?
A 1.2 × 10–5 V m–1

B 0.19 V m–1
C 12 V m–1
D 1.9 × 105 V m–1
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

19
31 A positively-charged particle is projected into a uniform electric field.
Which diagram represents the path of the particle in the electric field?
A B
electric field in plane of the paper electric field in plane of the paper
+ +
C D
electric field into paper electric field into paper
+ +
32 A power cable has length 2000 m. The cable is made of twelve parallel strands of copper wire,
each with diameter 0.51 mm.
What is the resistance of the cable? (resistivity of copper = 1.7 × 10–8 Ω m)
A 0.014 Ω B 3.5 Ω C 14 Ω D 166 Ω
33 A low-voltage supply with an e.m.f. of 20 V and an internal resistance of 1.5 Ω is used to supply
power to a heater of resistance 6.5 Ω in a fish tank.
What is the power supplied to the water in the fish tank?
A 41 W B 50 W C 53 W D 62 W
Space for working

20
34 A filament lamp has a resistance of 180 Ω when the current in it is 500 mA.
What is the power transformed in the lamp?
A 45 W B 50 W C 90 W D 1400 W
35 Two wires P and Q made of the same material are connected to the same electrical supply.
P has twice the length of Q and one-third of the diameter of Q, as shown in the diagram.
P d
2l
Q 3d
current in P
What is the ratio ?
current in Q
2 2 1 1
A B C D
3 9 6 18
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

21
36 A 12 V battery is in series with an ammeter, a 2 Ω fixed resistor and a 0 – 10 Ω variable resistor.

High-resistance voltmeters P and Q are connected across the variable resistor and the fixed
resistor respectively, as shown.
12 V
A
0 – 10 Ω
2Ω
V V
P Q
The resistance of the variable resistor is changed from its maximum value to zero.
Which graph shows the variation with current of the voltmeter readings?
A B
voltmeter P voltmeter Q
reading reading
Q P
0 0
0 current 0 current
C D
voltmeter voltmeter
reading P reading Q
Q P
0 0
0 current 0 current
Space for working

22
37 Five resistors are connected as shown.
20 Ω 8.0 Ω
6.0 Ω 8.0 Ω
P Q
7.0 Ω
What is the total resistance between P and Q?
A 0.25 Ω B 0.61 Ω C 4.0 Ω D 16 Ω
38 In the circuit below, the reading VT on the voltmeter changes from high to low as the temperature
of the thermistor changes. The reading VL on the voltmeter changes from high to low as the level
of light on the light-dependent resistor (LDR) changes.
VT VL
V V
The readings VT and VL are both high.
What are the conditions of temperature and light level?
temperature light level
A low low
B low high
C high low
D high high
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

23
39 What is the approximate mass of an alpha particle?
A 10–28 kg
B 10–26 kg
C 10–24 kg
D 10–22 kg
40 An actinium nucleus has a nucleon number of 227 and a proton number of 89. It decays to form a
radium nucleus, emitting a beta particle and an alpha particle in the process.
What are the nucleon number and the proton number of this radium nucleus?
A 223 87
B 223 88
C 224 87
D 225 86
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

24
BLANK PAGE
Copyright Acknowledgements:
Question 5 © Ian Kemp; Sample AS Question; www.ikes.freeserve.co.uk.
© UCLES 2013 9702/12/M/J/13

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*2711856231*

IB13 06_9702_13/6RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 The diagram shows a displacement vector.
5.0 km
53°
What is the vertical component of this displacement vector?
A 3.0 km B 4.0 km C 5.0 km D 6.6 km
2 What is the unit of power, expressed in SI base units?
A kg m2 s–3 B kg m s–3 C kg m s–2 D kg m2 s–1
3 Which statement is incorrect by a factor of 100 or more?
A Atmospheric pressure is about 1 × 105 Pa.
B Light takes 5 × 102 s to reach us from the Sun.
C The frequency of ultra-violet light is 3 × 1012 Hz.
D The life-span of a man is about 2 × 109 s.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

5
4 A cyclist is travelling due south with velocity u. The wind is blowing from the north-east with
velocity w.
cyclist wind
u w
The wind has a velocity v relative to the cyclist, where v = w – u.
Which vector diagram shows the magnitude and direction of velocity v?
A B C D
v v v
v
5 A student takes measurements of the current in a resistor of constant resistance and the potential
difference (p.d.) across it. The readings are then used to plot a graph of current against p.d.
There is a systematic error in the current readings.
How could this be identified from the graph?
A At least one anomalous data point can be identified.

B The data points are scattered about the straight line of best fit.
C The graph is a curve, not a straight line.
D The straight line graph does not pass through the origin.
Space for working

6
6 The diagram shows the stem of a Celsius thermometer, marked to show initial and final
temperature values.
initial final
temperature temperature
–10 –5 0 +5 +10 +15
What is the temperature change expressed to an appropriate number of significant figures?
A 14 °C B 20.5 °C C 21 °C D 22.0 °C
7 A double-ended launching device fires two identical steel balls X and Y at exactly the same time.
The diagram shows the initial velocities of the balls. They are both launched horizontally, but Y
has greater speed.
launching device
X Y
Which statement explains what an observer would see?
A Both X and Y reach the ground simultaneously, because air resistance will cause both to
have the same final speed.
B Both X and Y reach the ground simultaneously, because gravitational acceleration is the
same for both.
C X reaches the ground before Y, because X lands nearer to the launcher.
D Y reaches the ground before X, because Y has greater initial speed.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

7
8 At time t = 0, a body moves from rest with constant acceleration in a straight line. At time t, the
body is distance s from its rest position.
A graph is drawn of s against t 2, as shown.
0
0 t2
Which statement describes the acceleration of the body?
A It is equal to half the value of the gradient of the graph.

B It is equal to the value of the gradient of the graph.
C It is equal to twice the value of the gradient of the graph.
D It is equal to the reciprocal of the gradient of the graph.
Space for working

8
9 A lift (elevator) consists of a passenger car supported by a cable which runs over a light,
frictionless pulley to a balancing weight. The balancing weight falls as the passenger car rises.
not to scale
balancing
weight
passenger car
Some masses are shown in the table.
mass /
kg
passenger car 520
balancing weight 640
passenger 80
What is the magnitude of the acceleration of the car when carrying just one passenger and when
the pulley is free to rotate?
A 0.032 m s–2 B 0.32 m s–2 C 0.61 m s–2 D 0.65 m s–2
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

9
10 A stationary nucleus has nucleon number A.
The nucleus decays by emitting a proton with speed v to form a new nucleus with speed u. The
new nucleus and the proton move away from one another in opposite directions.
Which equation gives v in terms of A and u?
A v = ( A – 1)u
4
B v = (A – 1)u
C v = Au
D v = (A + 1)u
11 Two spheres travel along the same line with velocities u1 and u2. They collide and after collision
their velocities are v1 and v2.
before collision u1 before collision u2
after collision v1 after collision v2
Which collision is not elastic?
u1 / m s–1 u2 / m s–1 v1 / m s–1 v2 / m s–1
A 2 –5 –5 –2
B 3 –3 0 6
C 3 –2 1 6
D 5 2 3 6
Space for working

10
12 The diagrams show a negative electric charge situated in a uniform electric field and a mass
situated in a uniform gravitational field.
– charge mass
uniform electric field uniform gravitational field
Which row shows the directions of the forces acting on the charge and on the mass?
charge mass
A –
B –
C –
D –
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

11
13 A wooden block rests on a rough board. The end of the board is then raised until the block slides
down the plane of the board at constant velocity v.
block
v
board
Which row describes the forces acting on the block when sliding with constant velocity?
frictional force on block resultant force on block
A down the plane down the plane

B down the plane zero
C up the plane down the plane
D up the plane zero
14 A ball of mass m is thrown up to height h in air with an initial velocity v, as shown.
v
h
P Q
Air resistance is considered negligible. The acceleration of free fall is g.
What is the total work done by the gravitational force on the ball during its flight from P to Q?
A zero B ½mv 2 C mgh D 2mgh
15 A spring of unextended length 40 mm is suspended from a fixed point. A load of 16 N is applied to

the free end of the spring. This causes the spring to extend so that its final length is five times its
original length. The spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
What is the energy stored in the spring due to this extension?
A 1.3 J B 1.6 J C 2.6 J D 3.2 J
Space for working

12
16 The diagram shows an arrangement used to find the output power of an electric motor.
The wheel attached to the motor’s axle has a circumference of 0.5 m and the belt which passes
over it is stationary when the weights have the values shown.
motor
wheel
20 N
50 N
If the wheel is making 20 revolutions per second, what is the output power of the motor?
A 300 W B 500 W C 600 W D 700 W
17 Ice at a temperature of 0 °C is a rare example of a solid that floats on its liquid form, in this case
water, when they are both at the same temperature.
What is the explanation for this?
A The average speed of the molecules in the ice is greater than the average speed of the
molecules in the water.
B The average speed of the molecules in the water is greater than the average speed of the
molecules in the ice.
C The mean separation of the molecules in the ice is greater than the mean separation of the
molecules in the water.
D The mean separation of the molecules in the water is greater than the mean separation of
the molecules in the ice.
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

13
18 The formula for hydrostatic pressure is p = ρ gh.
mass
A density =
volume
19 The diagram shows a large crane on a construction site lifting a cube-shaped load.
cable
crane
load
A model is made of the crane, its load and the cable supporting the load.
The material used for each part of the model is the same as that in the full-size crane, cable and
load. The model is one tenth full-size in all linear dimensions.
What is the ratio extension of the cable on the full -size crane ?
extension of the cable on the model crane
A 100 B 101 C 102 D 103
Space for working

14
A B
force force
0 0
C D
force force
0 0
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

15
21 A spring is stretched over a range within which elastic deformation occurs. Its spring constant is
3.0 N cm–1.
Which row, for the stated applied force, gives the correct extension and strain energy?
force extension strain energy

/N / cm / mJ
A 3.0 1.0 1.5

B 6.0 2.0 120
C 12.0 3.0 180
D 24.0 8.0 960
22 Which statement about different types of electromagnetic wave is correct?
A The frequency of infra-red waves is less than the frequency of blue light.
B The frequency of radio waves is greater than the frequency of gamma rays.
C The wavelength of red light is less than the wavelength of ultraviolet waves.
D The wavelength of X-rays is greater than the wavelength of microwaves.
23 Orange light has a wavelength of 600 nm.
What is the frequency of this light?
A 180 GHz B 180 Hz C 500 THz D 500 kHz
Space for working

16
24 Electromagnetic waves of wavelength λ and frequency f travel at speed c in a vacuum.
What describes the wavelength and speed of electromagnetic waves of frequency f / 2?
speed in a
wavelength
vacuum
A λ/2 c/2
B λ/2 c
C 2λ c
D 2λ 2c
25 When the liquid crystal display of a calculator is observed through a polarising film, the display
changes as the film is rotated.
Which property describes the radiation from the calculator display?
A unpolarised
B a longitudinal wave
C a transverse wave
D a wave with a 3 cm wavelength
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

17
26 A sound wave has displacement y at distance x from its source at time t.
Which graph correctly shows the amplitude a and the wavelength λ of the wave?
A B
y y
λ λ
a a
0 0
0 distance x 0 distance x
C D
y y
λ λ
a a
0 0
0 time t 0 time t
27 A parallel beam of red light of wavelength 700 nm is incident normally on a diffraction grating that
has 400 lines per millimetre.
What is the total number of transmitted maxima?
A 3 B 4 C 6 D 7
Space for working

18
28 The diagram shows a standing wave on a string. The standing wave has three nodes N1, N2 and
N3.
N1 N2 N3
A All points on the string vibrate in phase.

B All points on the string vibrate with the same amplitude.
C Points equidistant from N2 vibrate with the same frequency and in phase.
D Points equidistant from N2 vibrate with the same frequency and the same amplitude.
29 Two metal plates are held horizontal and parallel, 5.0 cm apart. The plates are at potentials of
+100 V and +20 V.
+100 V
5.0 cm
+20 V
What is the force experienced by an electron in the electric field between the plates?
A 2.6 × 10–18 N
B 3.8 × 10–18 N
C 2.6 × 10–16 N
D 3.8 × 10–16 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

19
30 The diagram shows the path of a charged particle through a uniform electric field, having vertical
field lines.
electric path of
field lines particle
What could give a path of this shape?
A a positive charge travelling left to right in a field directed downwards

B a positive charge travelling right to left in a field directed downwards
C a negative charge travelling right to left in a field directed upwards
D a negative charge travelling left to right in a field directed downwards
31 Two cells X and Y are connected in series with a resistor of resistance 9.0 Ω, as shown.
9.0 Ω
X Y
Cell X has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 1.0 V and an internal resistance of 1.0 Ω. Cell Y has
an e.m.f. of 2.0 V and an internal resistance of 2.0 Ω.
What is the current in the circuit?
A 0.25 A B 0.17 A C 0.10 A D 0.083 A
Space for working

20
32 The circular cross-sectional area of a metal wire varies along its length. There is a current in the
wire. The narrow end of the wire is at a reference potential of zero.
current current
zero
potential
x
Which graph best represents the variation with distance x along the wire of the potential
difference V relative to the reference zero?
A B
V V
0 0
0 x 0 x
C D
V V
0 0
0 x 0 x
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

21
33 The graph shows how current I varies with voltage V for a filament lamp.
5
I/A
4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
V/V
Since the graph is not a straight line, the resistance of the lamp varies with V.
Which row gives the correct resistance at the stated value of V ?
V/V R/Ω
A 2.0 1.5
B 4.0 3.2
C 6.0 1.9
D 8.0 0.9
Space for working

22
34 An electric power cable consists of six copper wires c surrounding a steel core s.
c
c c
s
c c
c
A length of 1.0 km of one of the copper wires has a resistance of 10 Ω and 1.0 km of the steel core
has a resistance of 100 Ω.
What is the approximate resistance of a 1.0 km length of the power cable?
A 0.61 Ω B 1.6 Ω C 160 Ω D 610 Ω
35 The diagram shows a length of track from a model railway connected to a battery, a resistor and
a relay coil.
resistor
relay coil railway track
With no train present, there is a current in the relay coil which operates a switch to turn on a light.
When a train occupies the section of track, most of the current flows through the wheels and
axles of the train in preference to the relay coil. The switch in the relay turns off the light.
Why is a resistor placed between the battery and the track?
A to limit the heating of the wheels of the train

B to limit the energy lost in the relay coil when a train is present
C to prevent a short circuit of the battery when a train is present
D to protect the relay when a train is present
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

23
36 A 12 V battery is in series with an ammeter, a 2 Ω fixed resistor and a 0 – 10 Ω variable resistor. A

high-resistance voltmeter is connected across the fixed resistor.
12 V
A
2Ω
0 – 10 Ω
V
The resistance of the variable resistor is changed from zero to its maximum value.
Which graph shows how the potential difference (p.d.) measured by the voltmeter varies with the
current measured by the ammeter?
A B C D
p.d. p.d. p.d. p.d.
0 0 0 0
0 current 0 current 0 current 0 current
Space for working

24
37 In the circuit shown, the battery and ammeter each have negligible resistance.
12 V
A
X Y
The following combinations of resistors are placed in turn between the terminals X and Y of the
circuit.
Which combination would give an ammeter reading of 8 A?
A B
2Ω 1Ω
1Ω 2Ω
3Ω 3Ω
C D
2Ω
1Ω 2Ω
1Ω
3Ω
3Ω
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

25
38 Scientists investigating the count rate from a radioactive source observed that the count rate
fluctuates.
What do these fluctuations imply about the nature of radioactive decay?
A It involves atomic nuclei.

B It is predictable.
C It is random.
D It is spontaneous.
39 The decay of a nucleus of neptunium is accompanied by the emission of a β-particle and

γ-radiation.
What effect (if any) does this decay have on the proton number and on the nucleon number of the
nucleus?
A increases decreases
C unchanged decreases
D increases unchanged
Space for working

26
40 A radioactive nucleus is formed by β-decay. This nucleus then decays by α-emission.
Which graph of nucleon number N plotted against proton number Z shows the β-decay followed
by the α-emission?
A B
236 236
N N
234 234
232 232
230 230
88 90 92 94 88 90 92 94
Z Z
C D
236 236
N N
234 234
232 232
230 230
88 90 92 94 88 90 92 94
Z Z
Space for working
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

27
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/13/M/J/13

* 5 1 9 4 8 2 7 8 2 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

1
part question.
2
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 57978/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

5

Examiner’s
Use
1 Energy is stored in a metal wire that is extended elastically.
(a) Explain what is meant by extended elastically.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the SІ units of energy per unit volume are kg m–1 s–2.
[2]
(c) For a wire extended elastically, the elastic energy per unit volume X is given by
X = Cε 2E
where C is a constant,
ε is the strain of the wire,
and E is the Young modulus of the wire.
Show that C has no units.
[3]

6
2 (a) Distinguish between mass and weight. For

Examiner’s
mass: ............................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
weight: ..............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An object O of mass 4.9 kg is suspended by a rope A that is fixed at point P. The object
is pulled to one side and held in equilibrium by a second rope B, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
rope A
O rope B
Fig. 2.1
Rope A is at an angle θ to the horizontal and rope B is horizontal. The tension in rope A
is 69 N and the tension in rope B is T.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw arrows to represent the directions of all the forces acting on
object O. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

7
(ii) Calculate For

Examiner’s
1. the angle θ, Use
θ = ................................................° [3]
2. the tension T.
T = .............................................. N [2]

8
3 (a) An object falls vertically from rest through air. State and explain the energy conversions For
that occur as the object falls. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A ball of mass 150 g is thrown vertically upwards with an initial speed of 25 m s–1.
(i) Calculate the initial kinetic energy of the ball.
kinetic energy = .............................................. J [3]
(ii) The ball reaches a height of 21 m above the point of release.
For the ball rising to this height, calculate
1. the loss of energy of the ball to air resistance,
energy loss = ............................................... J [3]
2. the average force due to the air resistance.
force = .............................................. N [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

9
4 (a) Define pressure. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Use the kinetic model to explain the pressure exerted by a gas.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(c) Explain whether the collisions between the molecules of an ideal gas are elastic or
inelastic.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
5 (a) State three conditions required for maxima to be formed in an interference pattern For
produced by two sources of microwaves. Examiner’s
Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A microwave source M emits microwaves of frequency 12 GHz. Show that the wavelength
of the microwaves is 0.025 m.
[3]
(c) Two slits S1 and S2 are placed in front of the microwave source M described in (b), as
shown in Fig 5.1.
m
0.75
S1 0m
0.9
O
M
microwave
detector
S2
The distances S1O and S2O are equal. A microwave detector is moved from O to P. The
distance S1P is 0.75 m and the distance S2P is 0.90 m.
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13
11
The microwave detector gives a maximum reading at O. For

Examiner’s
State the variation in the readings on the microwave detector as it is moved slowly along Use
the line from O to P.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) The microwave source M is replaced by a source of coherent light.
State two changes that must be made to the slits in Fig. 5.1 in order to observe an
interference pattern.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]

12
6 Two resistors A and B have resistances R1 and R2 respectively. The resistors are connected For
in series with a battery, as shown in Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
A B
R1 R2
Fig. 6.1
The battery has electromotive force (e.m.f.) E and zero internal resistance.
(a) State the energy transformation that occurs in
(i) the battery,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the resistors.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The current in the circuit is Ι.
State the rate of energy transformation in
(i) the battery,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the resistor A.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

13
(c) The resistors are made from metal wires. Data for the resistors are given in Fig. 6.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
resistor A B
resistivity of metal ρ ρ /2
length of wire l l
diameter of wire d 2d
Fig. 6.2
Use information from Fig. 6.2 to determine the ratio
power dissipated in A
.
power dissipated in B
ratio = .................................................. [3]
(d) The resistors A and B are connected in parallel across the same battery of e.m.f. E.
Determine the ratio
power dissipated in A
.
power dissipated in B
ratio = .................................................. [2]

14
7 (a) Describe the two main results of the α-particle scattering experiment. For
Examiner’s
result 1: ............................................................................................................................ Use
..........................................................................................................................................
result 2: ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Relate each of the results in (a) with the conclusions that were made about the nature of
atoms.
result 1: ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
result 2: ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/21/M/J/13

* 4 8 3 5 7 2 7 6 4 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

1
question.
2
Total
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4

Examiner’s
1 (a) Determine the SI base units of power. Use
SI base units of power ................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a turbine that is used to generate electrical power from the wind.
L
wind turbine
speed v
Fig. 1.1
The power P available from the wind is given by
P = CL2ρv 3
where L is the length of each blade of the turbine,

ρ is the density of air,
v is the wind speed,
C is a constant.
(i) Show that C has no units.
[3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

5
(ii) The length L of each blade of the turbine is 25.0 m and the density ρ of air is 1.30 in For
SI units. The constant C is 0.931. Examiner’s
The efficiency of the turbine is 55% and the electric power output P is 3.50 × 105 W. Use
Calculate the wind speed.
wind speed = ........................................ m s–1 [3]
(iii) Suggest two reasons why the electrical power output of the turbine is less than the
power available from the wind.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

6
2 (a) Define force. For

Examiner’s
..................................................................................................................................... [1] Use
(b) A resultant force F acts on an object of mass 2.4 kg. The variation with time t of F is
shown in Fig. 2.1.
10.0
8.0
F/N
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
t /s
Fig. 2.1
The object starts from rest.
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

7
(i) On Fig. 2.2, show quantitatively the variation with t of the acceleration a of the For
object. Include appropriate values on the y-axis. Examiner’s
Use
a / m s–2
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
t /s
Fig. 2.2
[4]
(ii) On Fig. 2.3, show quantitatively the variation with t of the momentum p of the object.
Include appropriate values on the y-axis.
p/Ns
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
t /s
Fig. 2.3
[5]
8
3 (a) Define centre of gravity. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A uniform rod AB is attached to a vertical wall at A. The rod is held horizontally by a
string attached at B and to point C, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
string
T
wall
1.2 m
50°
A B
O
8.5 N mass M
Fig. 3.1
The angle between the rod and the string at B is 50°. The rod has length 1.2 m and
weight 8.5 N. An object O of mass M is hung from the rod at B. The tension T in the
string is 30 N.
(i) Use the resolution of forces to calculate the vertical component of T.
vertical component of T = ............................................. N [1]
(ii) State the principle of moments.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

9
(iii) Use the principle of moments and take moments about A to show that the weight of For
the object O is 19 N. Examiner’s
Use
[3]
(iv) Hence determine the mass M of the object O.
M = ............................................ kg [1]
(c) Use the concept of equilibrium to explain why a force must act on the rod at A.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

11
4 (a) Describe apparatus that demonstrates Brownian motion. Include a diagram. For
Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe the observations made using the apparatus in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State and explain two conclusions about the properties of molecules of a gas that follow
from the observations in (b).
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]

12
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a string stretched between two fixed points P and Q. For
Examiner’s
Use
string
P Q
vibrator wall
Fig. 5.1
A vibrator is attached near end P of the string. End Q is fixed to a wall. The vibrator has a
frequency of 50 Hz and causes a transverse wave to travel along the string at a speed of
40 m s–1.
(a) (i) Calculate the wavelength of the transverse wave on the string.
wavelength = ............................................. m [2]
(ii) Explain how this arrangement may produce a stationary wave on the string.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The stationary wave produced on PQ at one instant of time t is shown on Fig. 5.2.
Each point on the string is at its maximum displacement.
P Q
(i) On Fig. 5.2, label all the nodes with the letter N and all the antinodes with the
letter A. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

13
(ii) Use your answer in (a)(i) to calculate the length of string PQ. For
Examiner’s
Use
length = ............................................. m [1]
(iii) On Fig. 5.2, draw the stationary wave at time (t + 5.0 ms). Explain your answer.
.............................................................................................................................. [3]

14
6 (a) Define charge. For

Examiner’s
...................................................................................................................................... [1] Use
(b) A heater is made from a wire of resistance 18.0 Ω and is connected to a power supply of
240 V. The heater is switched on for 2.60 Ms.
Calculate
(i) the power transformed in the heater,
power = ............................................. W [2]
(ii) the current in the heater,
current = .............................................. A [1]
(iii) the charge passing through the heater in this time,
charge = ............................................. C [2]
(iv) the number of electrons per second passing a given point in the heater.
number = ........................................... s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

15
7 A polonium nucleus 210 84Po is radioactive and decays with the emission of an α-particle. The For
nuclear reaction for this decay is given by Examiner’s
Use
210 W Y
84Po XQ + Z α.
(a) (i) State the values of W ...............
X ...............
Y ...............
Z ...............
[2]
(ii) Explain why mass seems not to be conserved in the reaction.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The reaction is spontaneous. Explain the meaning of spontaneous.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/22/M/J/13

* 4 2 5 4 4 3 1 8 1 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour

1
part question.
2
Total
DC (SJF/CGW) 57980/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4

Examiner’s
1 (a) State the SI base units of force. Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Two wires each of length l are placed parallel to each other a distance x apart, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
Each wire carries a current I. The currents give rise to a force F on each wire given by
K I 2l
F=
x
where K is a constant.
(i) Determine the SI base units of K.
units of K ................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the variation with x of F. The quantities I and l remain constant.
0
0 x
Fig. 1.2 [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

5
(iii) The current I in both of the wires is varied. For

Examiner’s
On Fig. 1.3, sketch the variation with I of F. The quantities x and l remain constant. Use
0
0 I
Fig. 1.3 [1]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

7
2 (a) A student walks from A to B along the path shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
Fig. 2.1
The student takes time t to walk from A to B.
(i) State the quantity, apart from t, that must be measured in order to determine the
average value of
1. speed,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. velocity.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Define acceleration.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

8
(b) A girl falls vertically onto a trampoline, as shown in Fig. 2.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
springy material
Fig. 2.2
The trampoline consists of a central section supported by springy material. At time

t = 0 the girl starts to fall. The girl hits the trampoline and rebounds vertically. The
variation with time t of velocity v of the girl is illustrated in Fig. 2.3.
10.0
8.0
6.0
v / m s–1
4.0
2.0
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
t /s
– 2.0
– 4.0
– 6.0 rebound
time
– 8.0
Fig. 2.3
For the motion of the girl, calculate
(i) the distance fallen between time t = 0 and when she hits the trampoline,
distance = ............................................. m [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

9
(ii) the average acceleration during the rebound. For

Examiner’s
Use
acceleration = ........................................ m s–2 [2]
(c) (i) Use Fig. 2.3 to compare, without calculation, the accelerations of the girl before
and after the rebound. Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use Fig. 2.3 to compare, without calculation, the potential energy of the girl at
t = 0 and t = 1.85 s. Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

10
3 (a) (i) State the principle of conservation of momentum. For

Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) State the difference between an elastic and an inelastic collision.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An object A of mass 4.2 kg and horizontal velocity 3.6 m s–1 moves towards object B as
shown in Fig. 3.1.
A B
3.6 m s–1 1.2 m s–1
4.2 kg 1.5 kg before collision
Fig. 3.1
Object B of mass 1.5 kg is moving with a horizontal velocity of 1.2 m s–1 towards
object A.
The objects collide and then both move to the right, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
A B
v 3.0 m s–1
4.2 kg 1.5 kg after collision
Fig. 3.2
Object A has velocity v and object B has velocity 3.0 m s–1.
(i) Calculate the velocity v of object A after the collision.
velocity = ........................................ m s–1 [3]
(ii) Determine whether the collision is elastic or inelastic.
[3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13
11
4 (a) Define For

Examiner’s
(i) stress, Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) strain.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The Young modulus of the metal of a wire is 0.17 TPa. The cross-sectional area of the
wire is 0.18 mm2.
The wire is extended by a force F. This causes the length of the wire to be increased by
0.095 %.
Calculate
(i) the stress,
stress = ............................................ Pa [4]
(ii) the force F.
F = ............................................. N [2]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

13
5 (a) Explain the principle of superposition. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Sound waves travel from a source S to a point X along two paths SX and SPX, as
shown in Fig. 5.1.
P reflecting surface
0m
4.
3.
0m
S
X
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the phase difference between these waves at X for this to be the position of
1. a minimum,
phase difference = .................................................. unit .............................. [1]
2. a maximum.
phase difference = .................................................. unit .............................. [1]
(ii) The frequency of the sound from S is 400 Hz and the speed of sound is 320 m s–1.
Calculate the wavelength of the sound waves.
wavelength = ............................................. m [2]
(iii) The distance SP is 3.0 m and the distance PX is 4.0 m. The angle SPX is 90°.
Suggest whether a maximum or a minimum is detected at point X. Explain your
answer.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

14
6 (a) Define potential difference (p.d.). For

Examiner’s
...................................................................................................................................... [1] Use
(b) A battery of electromotive force 20 V and zero internal resistance is connected in series
with two resistors R1 and R2, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
20 9
R1 R2
0 – 400 1 600 1
Fig. 6.1
The resistance of R2 is 600 Ω. The resistance of R1 is varied from 0 to 400 Ω.
Calculate
(i) the maximum p.d. across R2,
maximum p.d. = .............................................. V [1]
(ii) the minimum p.d. across R2.
minimum p.d. = .............................................. V [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

15
(c) A light-dependent resistor (LDR) is connected in parallel with R2, as shown in Fig. 6.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
20 9
R1 R2
LDR
R2
0 – 400 1
600 1
Fig. 6.2
When the light intensity is varied, the resistance of the LDR changes from 5.0 kΩ to
1.2 kΩ.
(i) For the maximum light intensity, calculate the total resistance of R2 and the LDR.
total resistance = ............................................. Ω [2]
(ii) The resistance of R1 is varied from 0 to 400 Ω in the circuits of Fig. 6.1 and
Fig. 6.2. State and explain the difference, if any, between the minimum p.d. across
R2 in each circuit. Numerical values are not required.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

16
7 (a) Two isotopes of uranium are uranium-235 ( 235 238

92U) and uranium-238 ( 92U). For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) Describe in detail an atom of uranium-235.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [4]
(ii) With reference to the two forms of uranium, explain the term isotopes.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) When a uranium-235 nucleus absorbs a neutron, the following reaction may occur:
235 Wn 148 Z
92 U + X 57 La + YQ + 3W
Xn
(i) Determine the values of Y and Z.
Y = ............................
Z = ............................
[2]
(ii) Explain why the sum of the masses of the uranium nucleus and of the neutron does
not equal the total mass of the products of the reaction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2013 9702/23/M/J/13

* 3 4 7 9 4 9 0 3 6 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours


Total
DC (LEG/SW) 63023/5
2
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate a system in equilibrium due to several turning forces.
(a) Measure and record the distance L between the two holes in the wooden strip as shown
in Fig. 1.1.
wooden strip loop of string
Fig. 1.1
L = ............................................. m [1]
(b) Write down the mass M given on the card.
M = ................................................. kg
© UCLES 2013 9702/31/M/J/13

3
(c) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2, with mass m = 0.040 kg. For
Examiner’s
Use
stand
rod of clamp
in boss
loop of string
wooden strip
mass M mass m
bench
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Adjust the position of the wooden strip until it balances.
Measure and record the distance d, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
d = ............................................. m [1]

4
(d) Vary m and repeat (c)(ii) until you have six sets of readings of m and d. For
Examiner’s
1 Use
d
[10]
1
(e) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against m on the x-axis. [3]
d
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/31/M/J/13

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(f) The quantities d and m are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
1 Use
= Pm + Q
d
Using your answers in (e)(iii), determine the values of P and Q.

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[1]
(g) The constant P is related to L and M by

1
P=
kML
Using your answers in (a), (b) and (f), calculate a value for k.
You need not include units for k.
k = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/31/M/J/13

7
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a wooden rod supported by a string.
(a) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.1 with height h approximately 40 cm.
10 cm
boss
clamp
short wooden rod
string
stand
h
long wooden rod
bracket
nail
bench
Fig. 2.1
The short wooden rod should be held firmly in the clamp.
Place the bracket on the base of the stand and rest the head of the nail in the
centre of the bracket.

8
(ii) Measure and record the angle θ between the string and the long wooden rod as For
Use
θ = .................................................. [2]
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of θ.
(iv) Calculate sin θ.
sin θ = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/31/M/J/13

9
(b) Gently displace the end of the long wooden rod to the left as shown in Fig. 2.2 (top For
view). Examiner’s
Use
bracket
nail
short wooden rod
clamp
top view
string
long wooden rod
one complete
swing
Fig. 2.2
Release the rod and watch the movement.

The rod will move to the right and back towards the left, completing a swing.
The time taken for one complete swing is T.
T = .................................................. [2]

10
(c) (i) Reduce h to approximately 20 cm. For

Examiner’s
(ii) Repeat (a)(ii), (a)(iv) and (b). Use
θ = ......................................................
sin θ = ......................................................
T = ......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/31/M/J/13

11
(d) It is suggested that the relationship between T and θ is For

Examiner’s
T 2 = k sin θ Use
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Explain whether your results in (d)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
(e) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this For
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2013 9702/31/M/J/13

* 4 5 8 3 0 2 8 8 4 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours


Total
DC (NH/SW) 63018/3
2
Examiner’s
1 In this experiment, you will determine the resistivity of a metal in the form of a wire. Use
(a) (i) Measure and record the diameter d of the short sample of wire that is attached to
the card. You may remove the wire from the card.
d = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Calculate the cross-sectional area A of the wire, in m2, using the formula
πd 2
A= .
4
A = ................................................. m2
(b) (i) Using the wire attached to the metre rule, set up the circuit shown in Fig. 1.1.
– +
wire
P Q
l metre rule
Fig. 1.1
There are two crocodile clips labelled P and Q.

P will remain in the same position throughout the experiment.
Q can be moved to different positions along the wire.
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13
3
(ii) Position the slider approximately half-way along the rheostat (variable resistor). For
Examiner’s
(iii) Attach Q approximately half-way along the wire. Use
(iv) Switch on the power supply.
(v) Measure and record the length l of wire between P and Q.

Record the voltmeter reading V.
l = .................................................. m
V = ................................................... V
[1]
(vi) Record the ammeter reading I.

(1 mA = 0.001 A)
I = ................................................... A
(vii) Switch off the power supply.
(c) (i) Reposition Q at a new distance l from P.
(ii) Switch on the power supply.
(iii) Adjust the slider on the rheostat until the ammeter reading is the same value as in
(b)(vi).
(iv) Measure and record the length l of wire between P and Q.

Record the voltmeter reading V.
l = .................................................. m
V = ................................................... V
(v) Switch off the power supply.

4
(d) Repeat (c) until you have six sets of readings of l and V. For
Examiner’s
For each value of l, adjust the slider on the rheostat so that the ammeter reading Use
I remains constant at the value in (b)(vi).
You may find it helpful to copy your value from (b)(vi) here.
I = ................................................... A
V 1
Include values of and in your table.
l l
[10]
V 1
(e) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against on the x-axis. [3]
l l
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13
5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(f) The quantities V and l are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
V M Use
= –N
l l
where M and N are constants.
(i) Use your answers in (e)(iii) to determine values for M and N.
M = ................................................... V
N = ............................................. V m–1
[1]
(ii) The resistivity ρ of the material of the wire, in Ω m, can be found using the
relationship
ρ = NA.
I
Using your answers in (a)(ii), (b)(vi) and (f)(i), calculate a value for ρ.
ρ = .......................................... Ω m [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13

7
Examiner’s
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the loss of gravitational potential energy of a Use
rolling ball depends on its initial height.
(a) (i) Set up the two runways as shown in Fig. 2.1.
stand
boss and
clamp runway
bench
Fig. 2.1
One end of each runway should be resting on the bench. The other end should be
clamped firmly at a height H approximately 15 cm above the bench.
The runways should be lined up so that a ball rolling down one would roll up the
other.
(ii) Measure and record H.
H = .................................................. [1]

8
(b) (i) Place the ball close to the top of one of the runways as shown in Fig. 2.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
ball
h1
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Measure and record the height h1 of the bottom of the ball above the bench.
h1 = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of h1.
(c) (i) Place the ball on the runway at the height given in (b)(ii).
(ii) Release the ball.
(iii) The ball should roll down one runway and up the other one, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
h2
Fig. 2.3
Measure and record the maximum height h2 of the bottom of the ball above the
bench.
h2 = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13

9
(d) Calculate the fractional loss of energy F, where For

Examiner’s
(h1 – h2) Use
F= .
h1
F = .................................................. [1]
(e) Place the ball at a lower starting position so that the height h1 is approximately half the
value in (b)(ii).
Repeat (b)(ii), (c)(ii), (c)(iii) and (d).
h1 = ......................................................
h2 = ......................................................
F = ......................................................
[3]

10
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between F and h1 is For

Examiner’s
F3 = k Use
h1
first value of k = .......................................................
second value of k = .......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Explain whether your results in (f)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13

11
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/33/M/J/13

* 2 3 1 5 6 7 3 3 2 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours


Total
DC (AC/SW) 63019/2
2
Examiner’s
Use
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the motion of an oscillating system depends on
the mass attached to the system.
stands
bosses
clamps metre rule
string
loops
20 cm
end A end B
string loop metre rule
mass m
bench
Fig. 1.1
Slide the two longer loops of string onto a rule and fix this rule in the clamps.
Adjust the clamps until the rule is parallel to the bench.
Slide the shorter loop onto the second rule and use the longer loops to support this
second rule.
Both rules should have their markings facing you. The strings should be vertical,
20 cm apart and equal distances from the centre of the second rule.
Use the shorter loop of string to suspend a mass m at the 50 cm mark on the
second rule, where m = 0.500 kg.
© UCLES 2013 9702/35/M/J/13

3
(ii) Move the end A of the lower rule towards you and the end B away from you. For
Release the rule and watch the movement. Examiner’s
End A will move away from you and back towards you, completing a swing. Use
The time taken for one complete swing is T.

T = ............................................... s [2]

4
(b) Change m and repeat (a)(ii) until you have six sets of values of m and T. For
Examiner’s
1 Use
T2
[10]
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against m on the x-axis. [3]
T2
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/35/M/J/13

5
For
Examiner’s
Use

6
(d) The quantities m and T are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
1 Use
= Pm + Q
T2
Using your answers in (c)(iii), determine the values of P and Q.

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/35/M/J/13

7
Examiner’s
Use
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the force acting on a straight wire in water
depends on its length.
(a) (i) Measure the length L of the shorter wire as shown in Fig. 2.1.
string
wire
Fig. 2.1
L = ................................................... [1]
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of L.
percentage uncertainty = ................................................... [1]

8
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus using the shorter wire as shown in Fig. 2.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
stand boss and clamp
pulley
string
loop
loop
open paper clip
(to be used as a hook)
string
wire
bench
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Gently add paper clips to the hook until the wire moves upwards.
(iii) Count and record the number N1 of paper clips you have added in (ii).
Do not include the open paper clip which is used as a hook.
N1 = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/35/M/J/13

9
(c) (i) You have been provided with a tray containing water. For
Set up the apparatus so that it is the same as in Fig. 2.2 but with the wire in the Examiner’s
water. It may be necessary to adjust the position of the pulley. Use
(ii) Gently add paper clips to the hook until the wire rises out of the water.
(iii) Count and record the number N2 of paper clips you have added in (ii).
N2 = .................................................. [2]
(d) Calculate the force F needed to remove the wire from the water using
F = (N2 – N1) mg
where the mass m of one paper clip is 4.0 × 10−4 kg, and g = 9.8 N kg−1.
F = ............................................... N [1]

10
(e) Repeat (a)(i), (b), (c) and (d) for the longer wire. For
Examiner’s
Use
L = ......................................................
N1 = .......................................................
N2 = .......................................................
F = .................................................... N
[3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/35/M/J/13

11
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between F and L is For

Examiner’s
F = k L Use
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = .......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
Use
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2013 9702/35/M/J/13

* 0 1 4 7 4 4 8 5 9 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours

appropriate units.
2
3
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (SJF/JG) 58174/1
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State what is meant by a gravitational field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In the Solar System, the planets may be assumed to be in circular orbits about the Sun.
Data for the radii of the orbits of the Earth and Jupiter about the Sun are given in
Fig. 1.1.
radius of orbit
/ km
Earth 1.50 × 108
Jupiter 7.78 × 108
Fig. 1.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) Use Newton’s law to determine the ratio
gravitational field strength due to the Sun at orbit of Earth

.
gravitational field strength due to the Sun at orbit of Jupiter
ratio = ................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

5
(c) The orbital period of the Earth about the Sun is T. For
Examiner’s
(i) Use ideas about circular motion to show that the mass M of the Sun is given by Use
4π2R 3
M=
GT 2
where R is the radius of the Earth’s orbit about the Sun and G is the gravitational
constant.
[3]
(ii) The orbital period T of the Earth about the Sun is 3.16 × 107 s.
The radius of the Earth’s orbit is given in Fig. 1.1.
Use the expression in (i) to determine the mass of the Sun.
mass = ............................................ kg [2]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by an ideal gas. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Two cylinders A and B are connected by a tube of negligible volume, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
cylinder A
cylinder B
tap T
2.5 × 103 cm3
3.4 × 105 Pa 1.6 × 103 cm3
300 K 4.9 × 105 Pa
tube
Fig. 2.1
Initially, tap T is closed. The cylinders contain an ideal gas at different pressures.
(i) Cylinder A has a constant volume of 2.5 × 103 cm3 and contains gas at pressure
3.4 × 105 Pa and temperature 300 K.
Show that cylinder A contains 0.34 mol of gas.
[1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

7
(ii) Cylinder B has a constant volume of 1.6 × 103 cm3 and contains 0.20 mol of gas. For
When tap T is opened, the pressure of the gas in both cylinders is 3.9 × 105 Pa. Examiner’s
No thermal energy enters or leaves the gas. Use
Determine the final temperature of the gas.
temperature = .............................................. K [2]
(c) By reference to work done and change in internal energy, suggest why the temperature
of the gas in cylinder A has changed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

8
3 A ball is held between two fixed points A and B by means of two stretched springs, as shown For
Use
A B
ball
Fig. 3.1
The ball is free to oscillate along the straight line AB. The springs remain stretched and the
motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
The variation with time t of the displacement x of the ball from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.2.
2.0
x / cm
1.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 t /s 1.2
–1.0
–2.0
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine, for the oscillations of the ball,
1. the amplitude,
amplitude = ........................................... cm [1]
2. the frequency.
frequency = ............................................ Hz [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

9
(ii) Show that the maximum acceleration of the ball is 5.2 m s–2. For
Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(b) Use your answers in (a) to plot, on the axes of Fig. 3.3, the variation with displacement x
of the acceleration a of the ball.
a / m s–2
0
0 x / 10–2 m
Fig. 3.3 [2]

10
(c) Calculate the displacement of the ball at which its kinetic energy is equal to one half of For
the maximum kinetic energy. Examiner’s
Use
displacement = ........................................... cm [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

11

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A charged particle is accelerated from rest in a vacuum through a potential difference V.
Show that the final speed v of the particle is given by the expression
⎛2Vq ⎞
v= ⎜ ⎟
⎝ m ⎠
q
where is the ratio of the charge to the mass (the specific charge) of the particle.
m
[2]
(c) A particle with specific charge +9.58 × 107 C kg–1 is moving in a vacuum towards a fixed
metal sphere, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
metal sphere
2.5 × 105 m s–1 potential +470 V
particle
specific charge
+9.58 × 107 C kg–1
Fig. 4.1
The initial speed of the particle is 2.5 × 105 m s–1 when it is a long distance from the
sphere.
The sphere is positively charged and has a potential of +470 V.
Use the expression in (b) to determine whether the particle will reach the surface of the
sphere.
[3]
12

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A long solenoid has an area of cross-section of 28 cm2, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
solenoid
area of cross-section
28 cm2
coil C
160 turns
Fig. 5.1
A coil C consisting of 160 turns of insulated wire is wound tightly around the centre of
the solenoid.
The magnetic flux density B at the centre of the solenoid is given by the expression
B = μ0n I
where I is the current in the solenoid, n is a constant equal to 1.5 × 103 m–1 and μ0 is
the permeability of free space.
Calculate, for a current of 3.5 A in the solenoid,
(i) the magnetic flux density at the centre of the solenoid,
flux density = .............................................. T [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

13
(ii) the flux linkage in the coil C. For

Examiner’s
Use
flux linkage = ........................................... Wb [2]
(c) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The current in the solenoid in (b) is reversed in direction in a time of 0.80 s.
Calculate the average e.m.f. induced in coil C.
e.m.f. = .............................................. V [2]

14
6 A simple transformer is illustrated in Fig. 6.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
load
input
resistor
primary secondary
coil coil
laminated
iron core
Fig. 6.1
(a) State
(i) why the iron core is laminated,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) what is meant by an ideal transformer.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An ideal transformer has 300 turns on the primary coil and 8100 turns on the secondary
coil.
The root-mean-square input voltage to the primary coil is 9.0 V.
Calculate the peak voltage across the load resistor connected to the secondary coil.
peak voltage = .............................................. V [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

15
7 Some data for the work function energy Φ and the threshold frequency f0 of some metal For
surfaces are given in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
metal Φ / 10–19 J f0 / 1014 Hz

sodium 3.8 5.8
zinc 5.8 8.8
platinum 9.0
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) State what is meant by the threshold frequency.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the threshold frequency for platinum.
threshold frequency = ............................................ Hz [2]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation having a continuous spectrum of wavelengths between

300 nm and 600 nm is incident, in turn, on each of the metals listed in Fig. 7.1.
Determine which metals, if any, will give rise to the emission of electrons.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When light of a particular intensity and frequency is incident on a metal surface,
electrons are emitted.
State and explain the effect, if any, on the rate of emission of electrons from this surface
for light of the same intensity and higher frequency.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
16
8 (a) State what is meant by a nuclear fusion reaction. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) One nuclear reaction that takes place in the core of the Sun is represented by the
equation
2 1 3
1H + 1H 2 He + energy.
Data for the nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 11 H 1.00728
2
deuterium 1H 2.01410
helium 32 He 3.01605
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the energy, in joules, released in this reaction.
energy = .............................................. J [3]
(ii) The temperature in the core of the Sun is approximately 1.6 × 107 K.
Suggest why such a high temperature is necessary for this reaction to take place.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

17
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Suggest electrical sensing devices, one in each case, that may be used to monitor
changes in
(i) light intensity,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the width of a crack in a welded joint,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) the intensity of an ultrasound beam.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

18
(b) A student designs the circuit of Fig. 9.1 to detect changes in temperature in the range For
0 °C to 100 °C. Examiner’s
Use
+V
thermistor,
resistance RT
resistor,
constant resistance R VOUT
Fig. 9.1
The resistance of the thermistor is RT and that of the resistor is R.

The student monitors the potential difference VOUT.
State and explain
(i) whether VOUT increases or decreases as the temperature of the thermistor

increases,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) whether the change in VOUT varies linearly with the change in temperature of the
thermistor.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

19
10 (a) Distinguish between sharpness and contrast in X-ray imaging. For

Examiner’s
sharpness: ....................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
contrast: ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two causes of loss of sharpness of an X-ray image.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Data for the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ of X-ray photons are given in
Fig. 10.1.
μ / cm–1
bone 2.85
muscle 0.95
Fig. 10.1
A parallel beam of X-rays is incident, separately, on a thickness of 3.5 cm of bone and

on a muscle of thickness 8.0 cm.
(i) Calculate the ratio
intensity of X-ray beam transmitted through bone

.
intensity of X-ray beam transmitted through muscle
ratio = ................................................. [3]

20
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to suggest whether an X-ray image of the bone and muscle For
would show good or poor contrast. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

21
11 A radio station emits an amplitude-modulated wave for the transmission of music. For
Examiner’s
(a) (i) State what is meant by an amplitude-modulated (AM) wave. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Give two reasons why the transmitted wave is modulated, rather than transmitting
the information signal directly as a radio wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

22
(b) The variation with frequency f of the amplitude A of the transmitted wave is shown in For
Use
0
900 909 918
f / kHz
Fig. 11.1
For this transmission, determine
(i) the wavelength of the carrier wave,
wavelength = ............................................. m [2]
(ii) the bandwidth,
bandwidth = .......................................... kHz [1]
(iii) the maximum frequency, in Hz, of the transmitted audio signal.
frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

23
12 An optic fibre is used for the transmission of digital telephone signals. The power input to the For
optic fibre is 9.8 mW. The effective noise level in the receiver circuit is 0.36 μW, as illustrated Examiner’s
in Fig. 12.1. Use
85 km
receiver
input circuit,
9.8 mW
circuit optic fibre noise
0.36 +W
Fig. 12.1
The signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver must not fall below 28 dB.
For this transmission without any repeater amplifiers, the maximum length of the optic fibre
is 85 km.
(a) Calculate the minimum input signal power to the receiver.
power = ............................................. W [2]
(b) Use your answer in (a) to calculate the attenuation in the fibre.
attenuation = ............................................ dB [2]
(c) Determine the attenuation per unit length of the fibre.
attenuation per unit length = ............................................ dB km–1 [1]

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13

* 3 3 2 1 7 6 0 6 7 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
1
appropriate units.
3
question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 58189/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Explain what is meant by a geostationary orbit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A satellite of mass m is in a circular orbit about a planet.

The mass M of the planet may be considered to be concentrated at its centre.
Show that the radius R of the orbit of the satellite is given by the expression
R3 =
冢 GMT 2
4π2 冣
where T is the period of the orbit of the satellite and G is the gravitational constant.
[4]
(c) The Earth has mass 6.0 × 1024 kg. Use the expression given in (b) to determine the
radius of the geostationary orbit about the Earth.
radius = ............................................. m [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

5
2 (a) The volume of an ideal gas in a cylinder is 1.80 × 10–3 m3 at a pressure of 2.60 × 105 Pa For
and a temperature of 297 K, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
ideal gas
1.80 × 10–3 m3
2.60 × 105 Pa
297 K
Fig. 2.1
The thermal energy required to raise the temperature by 1.00 K of 1.00 mol of the gas at
constant volume is 12.5 J.
The gas is heated at constant volume such that the internal energy of the gas increases
by 95.0 J.
(i) Calculate
1. the amount of gas, in mol, in the cylinder,
amount = ........................................... mol [2]
2. the rise in temperature of the gas.
temperature rise = .............................................. K [2]

6
(ii) Use your answer in (i) part 2 to show that the final pressure of the gas in the For
cylinder is 2.95 × 105 Pa. Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(b) The gas is now allowed to expand. No thermal energy enters or leaves the gas.
The gas does 120 J of work when expanding against the external pressure.
State and explain whether the final temperature of the gas is above or below 297 K.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

7
3 A mass of 78 g is suspended from a fixed point by means of a spring, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
spring
mass
78 g
Fig. 3.1
The stationary mass is pulled vertically downwards through a distance of 2.1 cm and then
released.
The mass is observed to perform simple harmonic motion with a period of 0.69 s.
(a) The mass is released at time t = 0.
For the oscillations of the mass,
(i) calculate the angular frequency ω,
ω = ...................................... rad s–1 [2]
(ii) determine numerical equations for the variation with time t of
1. the displacement x in cm,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. the speed v in m s–1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

8
(b) Calculate the total energy of oscillation of the mass. For

Examiner’s
Use
energy = ............................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

9
4 (a) An insulated metal sphere of radius R is situated in a vacuum. The charge q on the For
sphere may be considered to be a point charge at the centre of the sphere. Examiner’s
Use
(i) State a formula, in terms of R and q, for the potential V on the surface of the sphere.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Define capacitance and hence show that the capacitance C of the sphere is given
by the expression
C = 4πε0R.
[1]
(b) An isolated metal sphere has radius 45 cm.
(i) Use the expression in (a)(ii) to calculate the capacitance, in picofarad, of the sphere.
capacitance = ............................................ pF [2]
(ii) The sphere is charged to a potential of 9.0 × 105 V.

A spark occurs, partially discharging the sphere so that its potential is reduced to
3.6 × 105 V.
Determine the energy of the spark.
energy = ............................................... J [3]

10

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two long straight vertical wires X and Y are separated by a distance of 4.5 cm, as
4.5 cm
wire X wire Y
Q R
P S
6.3 A
Fig. 5.1
The wires pass through a horizontal card PQRS.

The current in wire X is 6.3 A in the upward direction. Initially, there is no current in wire Y.
(i) On Fig. 5.1, sketch, in the plane PQRS, the magnetic flux pattern due to the current
in wire X. Show at least four flux lines. [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

11
(ii) The magnetic flux density B at a distance x from a long straight current-carrying For
wire is given by the expression Examiner’s
Use
μ 0I
B =
2πx
where I is the current in the wire and μ0 is the permeability of free space.
Calculate the magnetic flux density at wire Y due to the current in wire X.
flux density = .............................................. T [2]
(iii) A current of 9.3 A is now switched on in wire Y. Use your answer in (ii) to calculate
the force per unit length on wire Y.
force per unit length = ....................................... N m–1 [2]
(c) The currents in the two wires in (b)(iii) are not equal.
Explain whether the force per unit length on the two wires will be the same, or different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

12
6 (a) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The output of an ideal transformer is connected to a bridge rectifier, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
240 V r.m.s.
load
resistor
Fig. 6.1
The input to the transformer is 240 V r.m.s. and the maximum potential difference across
the load resistor is 9.0 V.
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark with the letter P the positive output from the rectifier. [1]
(ii) Calculate the ratio
number of turns on primary coil

.
number of turns on secondary coil
ratio = .................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

13
(c) The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the load resistor in (b) is For
Use
0
t
Fig. 6.2
A capacitor is now connected in parallel with the load resistor to produce some
smoothing.
(i) Explain what is meant by smoothing.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the variation with time t of the smoothed output potential
difference. [2]

14
7 (a) The emission spectrum of atomic hydrogen consists of a number of discrete wavelengths. For
Explain how this observation leads to an understanding that there are discrete electron Examiner’s
energy levels in atoms. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Some electron energy levels in atomic hydrogen are illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
–0.54 eV
–0.85 eV
–1.5 eV
energy
–3.4 eV
Fig. 7.1
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

15
The longest wavelength produced as a result of electron transitions between two of the For
energy levels shown in Fig. 7.1 is 4.0 × 10–6 m. Examiner’s
Use
(i) On Fig. 7.1,
1. draw, and mark with the letter L, the transition giving rise to the wavelength of
4.0 × 10–6 m, [1]
2. draw, and mark with the letter S, the transition giving rise to the shortest
wavelength. [1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength for the transition you have shown in (i) part 2.
wavelength = ............................................. m [3]
(c) Photon energies in the visible spectrum vary between approximately 3.66 eV and
1.83 eV.
Determine the energies, in eV, of photons in the visible spectrum that are produced by
transitions between the energy levels shown in Fig. 7.1.
photon energies .................................................................................... eV [2]

16
8 (a) Explain why the mass of an α-particle is less than the total mass of two individual For
protons and two individual neutrons. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An equation for one possible nuclear reaction is
4He + 14N 17O + 1p.

2 7 8 1
Data for the masses of the nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 1p 1.00728
1
helium-4 4He 4.00260
2
nitrogen-14 14N 14.00307
7
oxygen-17 17O 16.99913
8
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the mass change, in u, associated with this reaction.
mass change = .............................................. u [2]
(ii) Calculate the energy, in J, associated with the mass change in (i).
energy = ............................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

17
(iii) Suggest and explain why, for this reaction to occur, the helium-4 nucleus must have For
a minimum speed. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]

18
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 The volume of fuel in the fuel tank of a car is monitored using a sensing device. The device
gives a voltage output that is measured using a voltmeter. The variation of voltmeter reading
with the volume of fuel in the tank is shown in Fig. 9.1.
voltmeter 3
reading
/V 2
0
0 20 40 60 80
empty full
volume / litres
Fig. 9.1
(a) Use Fig. 9.1 to determine the range of volume over which the volume has a linear
relationship to the voltmeter reading.
from .................................. litres to .................................. litres [1]
(b) Suggest why, comparing values from Fig. 9.1,
(i) when the tank is nearly full, the voltmeter readings give the impression that fuel
consumption is low,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) when the voltmeter first indicates that the tank is nearly empty, there is more fuel
remaining than is expected.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

19
10 (a) By reference to ultrasound waves, state what is meant by acoustic impedance. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An ultrasound wave is incident on the boundary between two media. The acoustic
impedances of the two media are Z1 and Z2, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
boundary
Z1 Z2
incident
wave
Fig. 10.1
Explain the importance of the difference between Z1 and Z2 for the transmission of
ultrasound across the boundary.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Ultrasound frequencies as high as 10 MHz are used in medical diagnosis.

State and explain one advantage of the use of high-frequency ultrasound compared
with lower-frequency ultrasound.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

21
11 (a) Explain how the hardness of an X-ray beam is controlled by the accelerating voltage in For
the X-ray tube. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The attenuation of a parallel beam of X-ray radiation is given by the expression
I
= e–μ x
I0
where μ is the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient and x is the thickness of the
material through which the beam passes.
(i) State
1. what is meant by attenuation,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. why the expression applies only to a parallel beam.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The linear attenuation coefficients for X-rays in bone and in soft tissue are 2.9 cm–1
and 0.95 cm–1 respectively.
Calculate, for a parallel X-ray beam, the ratio
fraction I of intensity transmitted through bone of thickness 2.5 cm

I0
.
fraction I of intensity transmitted through soft tissue of thickness 6.0 cm
I0
ratio = .................................................. [2]

22
12 The digital transmission of speech may be represented by the block diagram of Fig. 12.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
parallel- serial-
to- to-
ADC DAC
serial parallel
converter converter
Fig. 12.1
(a) State the purpose of the parallel-to-serial converter.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Part of the signal from the microphone is shown in Fig. 12.2.
16
14
12
10
microphone
output 8
/ mV
6
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / ms
Fig. 12.2
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

23
The ADC (analogue-to-digital converter) samples the analogue signal at a frequency For
of 5.0 kHz. Examiner’s
Each sample from the ADC is a four-bit digital number where the smallest bit represents Use
1.0 mV.
The first sample is taken at time zero.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine the four-bit digital number produced by the ADC at times
(i) 0.4 ms,
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) 0.8 ms.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The digital signal is transmitted and then converted to an analogue form by the DAC
(digital-to-analogue converter).
Using data from Fig. 12.2, draw, on the axes of Fig. 12.3, the output level of the
transmitted analogue signal for time zero to time 1.2 ms.
16
14
output
level 12
10
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / ms
[4]
Fig. 12.3
(d) State and explain the effect on the transmitted analogue waveform of increasing, for the
ADC and the DAC, both the sampling frequency and the number of bits in each sample.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

* 3 1 4 1 6 0 9 9 5 0 *
PHYSICS 9702/43
2 hours

appropriate units.
2
3
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/JG) 73265
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r
0.693
t

4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State what is meant by a gravitational field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In the Solar System, the planets may be assumed to be in circular orbits about the Sun.
Data for the radii of the orbits of the Earth and Jupiter about the Sun are given in
Fig. 1.1.
radius of orbit
/ km
Earth 1.50 × 108
Jupiter 7.78 × 108
Fig. 1.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) Use Newton’s law to determine the ratio
gravitational field strength due to the Sun at orbit of Earth

.
gravitational field strength due to the Sun at orbit of Jupiter
ratio = ................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

5
(c) The orbital period of the Earth about the Sun is T. For
Examiner’s
(i) Use ideas about circular motion to show that the mass M of the Sun is given by Use
4π2R 3
M=
GT 2
where R is the radius of the Earth’s orbit about the Sun and G is the gravitational
constant.
[3]
(ii) The orbital period T of the Earth about the Sun is 3.16 × 107 s.
The radius of the Earth’s orbit is given in Fig. 1.1.
Use the expression in (i) to determine the mass of the Sun.
mass = ............................................ kg [2]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by an ideal gas. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Two cylinders A and B are connected by a tube of negligible volume, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
cylinder A
cylinder B
tap T
2.5 × 103 cm3
3.4 × 105 Pa 1.6 × 103 cm3
300 K 4.9 × 105 Pa
tube
Fig. 2.1
Initially, tap T is closed. The cylinders contain an ideal gas at different pressures.
(i) Cylinder A has a constant volume of 2.5 × 103 cm3 and contains gas at pressure
3.4 × 105 Pa and temperature 300 K.
Show that cylinder A contains 0.34 mol of gas.
[1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

7
(ii) Cylinder B has a constant volume of 1.6 × 103 cm3 and contains 0.20 mol of gas. For
When tap T is opened, the pressure of the gas in both cylinders is 3.9 × 105 Pa. Examiner’s
No thermal energy enters or leaves the gas. Use
Determine the final temperature of the gas.
temperature = .............................................. K [2]
(c) By reference to work done and change in internal energy, suggest why the temperature
of the gas in cylinder A has changed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

8
3 A ball is held between two fixed points A and B by means of two stretched springs, as shown For
Use
A B
ball
Fig. 3.1
The ball is free to oscillate along the straight line AB. The springs remain stretched and the
motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
The variation with time t of the displacement x of the ball from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.2.
2.0
x / cm
1.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 t /s 1.2
–1.0
–2.0
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine, for the oscillations of the ball,
1. the amplitude,
amplitude = ........................................... cm [1]
2. the frequency.
frequency = ............................................ Hz [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

9
(ii) Show that the maximum acceleration of the ball is 5.2 m s–2. For
Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(b) Use your answers in (a) to plot, on the axes of Fig. 3.3, the variation with displacement x
of the acceleration a of the ball.
a / m s–2
0
0 x / 10–2 m
Fig. 3.3 [2]

10
(c) Calculate the displacement of the ball at which its kinetic energy is equal to one half of For
the maximum kinetic energy. Examiner’s
Use
displacement = ........................................... cm [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

11

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A charged particle is accelerated from rest in a vacuum through a potential difference V.
Show that the final speed v of the particle is given by the expression
⎛2Vq ⎞
v= ⎜ ⎟
⎝ m ⎠
q
where is the ratio of the charge to the mass (the specific charge) of the particle.
m
[2]
(c) A particle with specific charge +9.58 × 107 C kg–1 is moving in a vacuum towards a fixed
metal sphere, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
metal sphere
2.5 × 105 m s–1 potential +470 V
particle
specific charge
+9.58 × 107 C kg–1
Fig. 4.1
The initial speed of the particle is 2.5 × 105 m s–1 when it is a long distance from the
sphere.
The sphere is positively charged and has a potential of +470 V.
Use the expression in (b) to determine whether the particle will reach the surface of the
sphere.
[3]
12

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A long solenoid has an area of cross-section of 28 cm2, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
solenoid
area of cross-section
28 cm2
coil C
160 turns
Fig. 5.1
A coil C consisting of 160 turns of insulated wire is wound tightly around the centre of
the solenoid.
The magnetic flux density B at the centre of the solenoid is given by the expression
B = μ0n I
where I is the current in the solenoid, n is a constant equal to 1.5 × 103 m–1 and μ0 is
the permeability of free space.
Calculate, for a current of 3.5 A in the solenoid,
(i) the magnetic flux density at the centre of the solenoid,
flux density = .............................................. T [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

13
(ii) the flux linkage in the coil C. For

Examiner’s
Use
flux linkage = ........................................... Wb [2]
(c) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The current in the solenoid in (b) is reversed in direction in a time of 0.80 s.
Calculate the average e.m.f. induced in coil C.
e.m.f. = .............................................. V [2]

14
6 A simple transformer is illustrated in Fig. 6.1. For

Examiner’s
Use
load
input
resistor
primary secondary
coil coil
laminated
iron core
Fig. 6.1
(a) State
(i) why the iron core is laminated,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) what is meant by an ideal transformer.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) An ideal transformer has 300 turns on the primary coil and 8100 turns on the secondary
coil.
The root-mean-square input voltage to the primary coil is 9.0 V.
Calculate the peak voltage across the load resistor connected to the secondary coil.
peak voltage = .............................................. V [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

15
7 Some data for the work function energy Φ and the threshold frequency f0 of some metal For
surfaces are given in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
metal Φ / 10–19 J f0 / 1014 Hz

sodium 3.8 5.8
zinc 5.8 8.8
platinum 9.0
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i) State what is meant by the threshold frequency.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Calculate the threshold frequency for platinum.
threshold frequency = ............................................ Hz [2]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation having a continuous spectrum of wavelengths between

300 nm and 600 nm is incident, in turn, on each of the metals listed in Fig. 7.1.
Determine which metals, if any, will give rise to the emission of electrons.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When light of a particular intensity and frequency is incident on a metal surface,
electrons are emitted.
State and explain the effect, if any, on the rate of emission of electrons from this surface
for light of the same intensity and higher frequency.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
16
8 (a) State what is meant by a nuclear fusion reaction. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) One nuclear reaction that takes place in the core of the Sun is represented by the
equation
2 1 3
1H + 1H 2 He + energy.
Data for the nuclei are given in Fig. 8.1.
mass / u
proton 11 H 1.00728
2
deuterium 1H 2.01410
helium 32 He 3.01605
Fig. 8.1
(i) Calculate the energy, in joules, released in this reaction.
energy = .............................................. J [3]
(ii) The temperature in the core of the Sun is approximately 1.6 × 107 K.
Suggest why such a high temperature is necessary for this reaction to take place.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

17
Section B For
Examiner’s
9 (a) Suggest electrical sensing devices, one in each case, that may be used to monitor
changes in
(i) light intensity,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the width of a crack in a welded joint,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) the intensity of an ultrasound beam.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

18
(b) A student designs the circuit of Fig. 9.1 to detect changes in temperature in the range For
0 °C to 100 °C. Examiner’s
Use
+V
thermistor,
resistance RT
resistor,
constant resistance R VOUT
Fig. 9.1
The resistance of the thermistor is RT and that of the resistor is R.

The student monitors the potential difference VOUT.
State and explain
(i) whether VOUT increases or decreases as the temperature of the thermistor

increases,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) whether the change in VOUT varies linearly with the change in temperature of the
thermistor.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

19
10 (a) Distinguish between sharpness and contrast in X-ray imaging. For

Examiner’s
sharpness: ....................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
contrast: ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two causes of loss of sharpness of an X-ray image.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Data for the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient μ of X-ray photons are given in
Fig. 10.1.
μ / cm–1
bone 2.85
muscle 0.95
Fig. 10.1
A parallel beam of X-rays is incident, separately, on a thickness of 3.5 cm of bone and

on a muscle of thickness 8.0 cm.
intensity of X-ray beam transmitted through bone

.
intensity of X-ray beam transmitted through muscle
ratio = ................................................. [3]

20
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to suggest whether an X-ray image of the bone and muscle For
would show good or poor contrast. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

21
11 A radio station emits an amplitude-modulated wave for the transmission of music. For
Examiner’s
(a) (i) State what is meant by an amplitude-modulated (AM) wave. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Give two reasons why the transmitted wave is modulated, rather than transmitting
the information signal directly as a radio wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]

22
(b) The variation with frequency f of the amplitude A of the transmitted wave is shown in For
Use
0
900 909 918
f / kHz
Fig. 11.1
For this transmission, determine
(i) the wavelength of the carrier wave,
wavelength = ............................................. m [2]
(ii) the bandwidth,
bandwidth = .......................................... kHz [1]
(iii) the maximum frequency, in Hz, of the transmitted audio signal.
frequency = ............................................ Hz [1]
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

23
12 An optic fibre is used for the transmission of digital telephone signals. The power input to the For
optic fibre is 9.8 mW. The effective noise level in the receiver circuit is 0.36 μW, as illustrated Examiner’s
in Fig. 12.1. Use
85 km
receiver
input circuit,
9.8 mW
circuit optic fibre noise
0.36 +W
Fig. 12.1
The signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver must not fall below 28 dB.
For this transmission without any repeater amplifiers, the maximum length of the optic fibre
is 85 km.
(a) Calculate the minimum input signal power to the receiver.
power = ............................................. W [2]
(b) Use your answer in (a) to calculate the attenuation in the fibre.
attenuation = ............................................ dB [2]
(c) Determine the attenuation per unit length of the fibre.
attenuation per unit length = ............................................ dB km–1 [1]

© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13
24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/M/J/13

* 0 9 6 4 8 7 9 6 5 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (SM/JG) 61224/3
2
1 A student is investigating the flow of water through a horizontal tube. For

Examiner’s
The rate Q (volume per unit time) at which water flows through a tube depends on the Use
pressure difference per unit length across the tube.
The student has the use of a metal can with two holes. A narrow horizontal tube goes through
the hole in the side of the can. The can is continuously supplied with water from a tap.
The level of water in the can is kept constant by the position of a wide vertical tube which
passes through the hole in the bottom of the can as shown in Fig. 1.1. Both tubes may be
moved along the holes.
to tap
metal can
water h
flow rate Q
wide tube narrow tube
overflow
Fig. 1.1
It is suggested that the relationship between the flow rate Q of water through the narrow
horizontal tube and the vertical height h is
2πρghd 4
Q=
lη
where ρ is the density of water, g is the acceleration of free fall, d is the internal diameter of
the tube, l is the length of the tube and η is a constant.
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between Q and h and determine
a value for η . You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your

[15]
© UCLES 2013 9702/51/M/J/13
3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2013 9702/51/M/J/13

5
2 A student is investigating the discharge of capacitors. For

Examiner’s
A capacitor of capacitance W is charged by connecting it to a power supply of e.m.f. E. The Use
charge is then shared with another capacitor of capacitance C, which is initially uncharged.
A voltmeter is used to measure the maximum voltage V across the second capacitor, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
For different values of C, the maximum voltage V is recorded.

6
It is suggested that C and V are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
E C Use
=1+ .
V W
(a) A graph is plotted of 1 / V on the y-axis against C on the x-axis. Determine expressions
for the gradient and y-intercept in terms of E and W.
gradient = ..................................................
y-intercept = ..................................................
[1]
(b) Values of C and V are given in Fig. 2.2.
C / 10–3 F V/ V
0.69 ± 0.09 5.1
1.00 ± 0.20 4.5
1.47 ± 0.29 4.0
2.20 ± 0.44 3.3
2.67 ± 0.54 3.0
3.20 ± 0.64 2.7
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of 1 / V in Fig. 2.2. [2]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of (1 / V ) / V–1 against C / 10–3 F. Include error bars for C. [2]
gradient = .................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/51/M/J/13
7
For
Examiner’s
Use
0.38
0.36
(1 / V ) / V–1
0.34
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
C / 10–3 F

8
Use
y-intercept = .................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answer to (c)(iv), determine a value for E. Include an appropriate unit in
your answer. Include the absolute uncertainty in E.
E = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (d)(i), determine a value for W. Include an
appropriate unit in your answer.
W = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of W.
© UCLES 2013 9702/51/M/J/13

* 4 5 7 0 8 9 7 8 2 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (AC/JG) 61225/3
2
1 A student is investigating how the peak alternating current I0 varies with frequency f in a For
circuit containing a coil of wire. Examiner’s
Use
2
V0
= R 2 + 4π 2f 2L2
I0
where R is the resistance of the coil, V0 is the peak voltage and L is a constant.
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between I0 and f and determine
a value for L. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your

[15]
© UCLES 2013 9702/52/M/J/13

3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2013 9702/52/M/J/13

5
2 An electron beam is accelerated by a voltage V before entering a uniform electric field of For
electric field strength E between two parallel plates. Examiner’s
Use
The electron beam travels a horizontal distance a parallel to the plates before hitting the top
plate after being deflected through a vertical distance b. The path of the electrons is shown in
Fig. 2.1.
b
electron beam
a
Fig. 2.1
For different values of V, the horizontal distance a is recorded.

6
It is suggested that V and a are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
a= 4Vb . Use
E
(a) A graph is plotted of a 2 on the y-axis against V on the x-axis. Determine an expression
for the gradient in terms of E.
gradient = .................................................. [1]
(b) Values of V and a are given in Fig. 2.2.
V/ V a / 10−2 m
1000 6.6 ± 0.1
1200 7.2 ± 0.1
1400 7.8 ± 0.1
1600 8.4 ± 0.1
1800 8.9 ± 0.1
2000 9.4 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of a 2 / 10−4 m2 in Fig. 2.2. Include the absolute uncertainties
in a 2. [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of a 2 / 10−4 m2 against V / V. Include error bars for a 2. [2]
gradient = ................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/52/M/J/13
7
95 For
Examiner’s
Use
90
a 2 / 10–4 m2
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
V/V

8
(d) (i) Using your answer to (c)(iii), determine a value for E. Include an appropriate unit in For
your answer. Examiner’s
Use
Data: b = (4.0 ± 0.1) × 10−2 m
E = ................................................... [2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of E.
percentage uncertainty = ..............................................% [1]
(e) Using your answers to (d), determine a value for V to give a distance a = 5.0 ± 0.1 cm.
V = ...............................................V [2]
© UCLES 2013 9702/52/M/J/13

* 1 8 6 9 1 3 8 0 1 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/JG) 74377
2
1 A student is investigating the flow of water through a horizontal tube. For

Examiner’s
The rate Q (volume per unit time) at which water flows through a tube depends on the Use
pressure difference per unit length across the tube.
The student has the use of a metal can with two holes. A narrow horizontal tube goes through
the hole in the side of the can. The can is continuously supplied with water from a tap.
The level of water in the can is kept constant by the position of a wide vertical tube which
passes through the hole in the bottom of the can as shown in Fig. 1.1. Both tubes may be
moved along the holes.
to tap
metal can
water h
flow rate Q
wide tube narrow tube
overflow
Fig. 1.1
It is suggested that the relationship between the flow rate Q of water through the narrow
horizontal tube and the vertical height h is
2πρghd 4
Q=
lη
where ρ is the density of water, g is the acceleration of free fall, d is the internal diameter of
the tube, l is the length of the tube and η is a constant.
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between Q and h and determine
a value for η . You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your

[15]
© UCLES 2013 9702/53/M/J/13
3
Diagram For
Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
For
......................................................................................................................................................... Examiner’s
Use
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

Examiner’s
Use
© UCLES 2013 9702/53/M/J/13

5
2 A student is investigating the discharge of capacitors. For

Examiner’s
A capacitor of capacitance W is charged by connecting it to a power supply of e.m.f. E. The Use
charge is then shared with another capacitor of capacitance C, which is initially uncharged.
A voltmeter is used to measure the maximum voltage V across the second capacitor, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
For different values of C, the maximum voltage V is recorded.

6
It is suggested that C and V are related by the equation For

Examiner’s
E C Use
=1+ .
V W
(a) A graph is plotted of 1 / V on the y-axis against C on the x-axis. Determine expressions
for the gradient and y-intercept in terms of E and W.
gradient = ..................................................
y-intercept = ..................................................
[1]
(b) Values of C and V are given in Fig. 2.2.
C / 10–3 F V/ V
0.69 ± 0.09 5.1
1.00 ± 0.20 4.5
1.47 ± 0.29 4.0
2.20 ± 0.44 3.3
2.67 ± 0.54 3.0
3.20 ± 0.64 2.7
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of 1 / V in Fig. 2.2. [2]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of (1 / V ) / V–1 against C / 10–3 F. Include error bars for C. [2]
gradient = .................................................. [2]

© UCLES 2013 9702/53/M/J/13
7
For
Examiner’s
Use
0.38
0.36
(1 / V ) / V–1
0.34
0.32
0.30
0.28
0.26
0.24
0.22
0.20
0.18
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
C / 10–3 F

8
Use
y-intercept = .................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answer to (c)(iv), determine a value for E. Include an appropriate unit in
your answer. Include the absolute uncertainty in E.
E = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (d)(i), determine a value for W. Include an
appropriate unit in your answer.
W = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of W.
© UCLES 2013 9702/53/M/J/13

Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level
PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*7423041143*

Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
IB14 06_9702_11/5RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which pair of units contains one derived unit and one SI base unit?
A ampere coulomb
B kilogram kelvin
C metre second
D newton pascal
2 What is equivalent to 2000 microvolts?
A 2 µJ C–1 B 2 mV C 2 pV D 2000 mV
3 The speed v of a liquid leaving a tube depends on the change in pressure ∆P and the density ρ of
the liquid. The speed is given by the equation
 ∆P n
v = k  

 ρ 
where k is a constant that has no units.
What is the value of n ?

1 3
A 2
B 1 C 2
D 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

5
4 An experiment is carried out to measure the resistance of a wire.
The current in the wire is (1.0 ± 0.2) A and the potential difference across the wire is (8.0 ± 0.4) V.
What is the resistance of the wire and its uncertainty?
A (8.0 ± 0.2) Ω
B (8.0 ± 0.6) Ω
C (8 ± 1) Ω
D (8 ± 2) Ω
5 The Young modulus of the material of a wire is to be found. The Young modulus E is given by the
equation below.
4Fl
E=
πd 2 x
The wire is extended by a known force and the following measurements are made.
Which measurement has the largest effect on the uncertainty in the value of the calculated
Young modulus?
measurement symbol value
A length of wire before force applied l 2.043 ± 0.002 m

B diameter of wire d 0.54 ± 0.02 mm
C force applied F 19.62 ± 0.01 N
D extension of wire with force applied x 5.2 ± 0.2 mm
Space for working

6
6 A tennis ball is thrown horizontally in air from the top of a tall building.
If the effect of air resistance is not negligible, what happens to the horizontal and vertical
components of the ball’s velocity?

of velocity of velocity
A constant constant
B constant increases at a constant rate
C decreases to zero increases at a constant rate
D decreases to zero increases to a maximum value
7 An object is thrown with velocity 5.2 m s–1 vertically upwards on the Moon. The acceleration due
to gravity on the Moon is 1.62 m s–2.
What is the time taken for the object to return to its starting point?
A 2.5 s B 3.2 s C 4.5 s D 6.4 s
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

7
acceleration
0
0 time
The object starts from rest.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the velocity of the object over the same time
interval?
A B
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
velocity velocity
0
0
time
0
0 time
Space for working

8
9 An object of mass 4.0 kg moving with a speed of 3.0 m s–1 strikes a stationary object in an
inelastic collision.
A After collision, the total kinetic energy is 18 J.

B After collision, the total kinetic energy is less than 18 J.
C Before collision, the total kinetic energy is 12 J.
D Before collision, the total kinetic energy is less than 12 J.
10 The graph shows how the momentum of a motorcycle changes with time.
500
momentum
/ kg m s–1
0
0 10
time / s
What is the resultant force on the motorcycle?
A 50 N B 500 N C 2500 N D 5000 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

9
11 The diagrams show two ways of hanging the same picture.
nail R2
nail R1
T2 T2
T1 T1
diagram 1 diagram 2
In both cases, a string is attached to the same points on the picture and looped symmetrically
over a nail in a wall. The forces shown are those that act on the nail.
In diagram 1, the string loop is shorter than in diagram 2.
Which information about the magnitude of the forces is correct?
A R1 = R2 T1 = T2
B R1 = R2 T1 > T2
C R1 > R2 T1 < T2
D R1 < R2 T1 = T2
Space for working

10
12 A man holds a 100 N load stationary in his hand. The combined weight of the forearm and hand is
20 N. The forearm is held horizontal, as shown.
biceps
forearm
4 cm
10 cm
20 N
32 cm
100 N
What is the vertical force F needed in the biceps?
A 750 N B 800 N C 850 N D 900 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

11
13 A spindle is attached at one end to the centre of a lever of length 1.20 m and at its other end to
the centre of a disc of radius 0.20 m. A string is wrapped round the disc, passes over a pulley and
is attached to a 900 N weight.
1.20 m F
F spindle
0.20 m
lever
disc
pulley
string
900 N
What is the minimum force F, applied to each end of the lever, that could lift the weight?
A 75 N B 150 N C 300 N D 950 N
Space for working

12
14 What is the average power output of a laser that can deliver 0.20 J of energy in 10 ns?
A 2 nW B 20 mW C 200 kW D 20 MW
15 A weight W hangs from a trolley that runs along a rail. The trolley moves horizontally through a
distance p and simultaneously raises the weight through a height q.
trolley
rail
Y
r q
X
weight W p
As a result, the weight moves through a distance r from X to Y. It starts and finishes at rest.
How much work is done on the weight during this process?
A Wp B W(p + q) C Wq D Wr
16 The engine of a car exerts a force of 600 N in moving the car 1.0 km in 150 seconds.
What is the average output power of the engine?
A 4.0 W B 4.0 kW C 90 kW D 90 MW
17 Which statement about boiling and evaporation is correct?
A Boiling can only occur at the surface of a liquid.

B Evaporation can only occur at a fixed temperature.
C Only boiling involves a change of phase.
D When some of a liquid evaporates, the rest of the liquid becomes cooler.
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

13
18 There is one temperature, about 0.01 °C, at which water, water vapour and ice can co-exist in
equilibrium.
Which statement about the properties of the molecules at this temperature is correct?
A Ice molecules are closer to one another than water molecules.

B The mean kinetic energy of water molecules is greater than the mean kinetic energy of ice
molecules.
C Water vapour molecules are less massive than water molecules.
D Water vapour molecules have the same mean speed as both ice and water molecules.
19 A crystalline solid is heated at a constant rate and the change of temperature with time is shown
in the graph below.
temperature
P Q R S time
Which statement about the particles in the material is correct?
A In the time from P to Q, the particles are arranged randomly.

B In the time from Q to R, some particles are arranged regularly and some particles are
arranged randomly.
C In the time from R to S, the particles are widely spaced.
D The arrangement of the particles is the same in the time from P to S.
Space for working

14
20 The stress-strain graphs for three different materials are shown, not drawn to the same scales.
1 2 3
stress stress stress
0 0 0
0 strain 0 strain 0 strain
The three materials are copper, rubber and glass.
Which materials are represented by the graphs?
1 2 3
A copper glass rubber

B copper rubber glass
C glass copper rubber
D glass rubber copper
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

15
21 The graph is a load-extension graph for a wire undergoing elastic deformation.
load / kg
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
extension / mm
How much work is done on the wire to increase the extension from 10 mm to 20 mm?
A 0.028 J B 0.184 J C 0.28 J D 0.37 J
22 Which statement about longitudinal waves is correct?
A Longitudinal waves include radio waves travelling through air.

B Particles in a longitudinal wave vibrate at right-angles to the direction of transfer of wave
energy.
C Some types of longitudinal wave can be polarised.
D Stationary waves can be produced by the superposition of longitudinal waves.
23 The order of magnitude of the frequency of the longest-wavelength ultraviolet waves can be
expressed as 10x Hz.
What is the value of x?
A 13 B 15 C 17 D 19
Space for working

16
24 The speed v of waves in deep water is given by the equation
gλ
v2 =
2π
where λ is the wavelength of the waves and g is the acceleration of free fall.
A student measures the wavelength λ and the frequency f of a number of these waves.
Which graph should he plot to give a straight line through the origin?
A f 2 against λ
B f against λ2
C f against 1
λ
D f 2 against 1
λ
25 A stationary wave on a stretched string is set up between two points P and T.
Q S
P
T
vibrator
Which statement about the wave is correct?
A Point R is at a node.
B Points Q and S vibrate in phase.
C The distance between P and T is three wavelengths.
D The wave shown has the lowest possible frequency.
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

17
26 A parallel beam of white light passes through a diffraction grating. Orange light of wavelength
600 nm in the fourth order diffraction maximum coincides with blue light in the fifth order
diffraction maximum.
What is the wavelength of the blue light?
A 450 nm B 480 nm C 500 nm D 750 nm
mouthpiece bell
horn
For any note produced by the horn, a node is formed at the mouthpiece and an antinode is
formed at the bell. The frequency of the lowest note is 75 Hz.

/ Hz / Hz
A 113 150
B 150 225
C 150 300
D 225 375
Space for working

18
28 A horizontal beam of electrons is passed between two horizontal parallel plates, 2.0 cm apart, as
shown.
+4.0 V
electron
beam 2.0 cm
– 4.0 V
The upper plate has an electrical potential of +4.0 V, and the lower plate has an electrical
potential of – 4.0 V.
What is the force on each electron when between the plates?
A 3.2 × 10–17 N downwards
B 3.2 × 10–19 N upwards
C 6.4 × 10–19 N downwards
D 6.4 × 10–17 N upwards
29 The diagram shows two points P and Q which lie 90° apart on a circle of radius r.
and Q.
+
Q
r
 πr 
A 0 B E×r C E×   D E × (πr )
 2
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

19
30 Two electrically-conducting cylinders X and Y are made from the same material.
Their dimensions are as shown.
X Y
D 2D
L
2L
The resistance between the ends of each cylinder is measured.
What is the ratio resistance of X ?

resistance of Y
A 2 B 1 C 1 D 1
1 1 2 4
31 A battery, with a constant internal resistance, is connected to a resistor of resistance 250 Ω, as

shown.
250 Ω
The current in the resistor is 40 mA for a time of 60 s. During this time 6.0 J of energy is lost in the
internal resistance.
What are the energy supplied to the external resistor during the 60 s and the e.m.f. of the battery?
energy / J e.m.f. / V
A 2.4 2.4
B 2.4 7.5
C 24 10.0
D 24 12.5
Space for working

20
32 Which symbol represents a component whose resistance is designed to change with

temperature?
A B C D
33 In the circuit below, a voltmeter of resistance RV and an ammeter of resistance RA are used to
measure the resistance R of the fixed resistor.
V R
Which condition is necessary for an accurate value to be obtained for R?
A R is much smaller than RV.

B R is much smaller than RA.
C R is much greater than RV.
D R is much greater than RA.
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

21
34 In the circuit shown, all the resistors are identical and all the ammeters have negligible
resistance.
A1 A2 A3 A4
The reading on ammeter A1 is 0.6 A.
What are the readings on the other ammeters?
reading on reading on reading on

ammeter A2 / A ammeter A3 / A ammeter A4 / A
A 1.0 0.3 0.1

B 1.4 0.6 0.2
C 1.8 0.9 0.3
D 2.2 1.2 0.4
35 The potential difference across a component in a circuit is 2.0 V.
How many electrons must flow through this component in order for it to be supplied with 4.8 J of
energy?
A 2.6 × 1018 B 1.5 × 1019 C 3.0 × 1019 D 6.0 × 1019
Space for working

22
36 What is the total resistance between points P and Q in this network of resistors?
8Ω 8Ω
Q
16 Ω
16 Ω 16 Ω
8Ω 8Ω
P
A 8Ω B 16 Ω C 24 Ω D 32 Ω
37 Alpha, beta and gamma radiations have various depths of penetration in matter and different
charges.
Which row best summarises the penetration and charge of each radiation?
alpha beta gamma
A absorbed by a absorbed by several not fully absorbed by

sheet of card mm of aluminium several cm of lead
negative charge no charge no charge
B absorbed by a absorbed by several not fully absorbed by

negative charge positive charge no charge
C absorbed by a absorbed by several not fully absorbed by

positive charge negative charge no charge
D absorbed by several not fully absorbed by absorbed by a

mm of aluminium several cm of lead sheet of card
positive charge negative charge no charge
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

23
45
38 In 2002, two-proton radioactive decay of an isotope of iron, 26 Fe, was observed.
What could be the resulting product?

43 43 45 47
A 26 Fe B 24 Cr C 24 Cr D 28 Ni
39 U++ is a doubly-ionised uranium atom. The uranium atom has a nucleon number of 235 and a
proton number of 92.
In a simple model of the atom, how many particles are in this ionised atom?
A 235 B 325 C 327 D 329
4 A B
number of
protons
6 7 8
3 3 Li 3 Li 3 Li
3 4
2 2 He 2 He C D
1 2
1 1H 1H
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
number of neutrons
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

24
BLANK PAGE
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2014 9702/11/M/J/14

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*3571683968*

IB14 06_9702_12/4RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 The maximum theoretical power P of a wind turbine is given by the equation
P = kρAv n
where ρ is the density of air, A is the area swept by the turbine blades, v is the speed of the air
and k is a constant with no units.
A 1 B 2 C 3 D 4
2 What is the unit of resistance when expressed in SI base units?
A kg m2 s–2 A–1
B kg m2 s–3 A–2
C kg m s–2 A–1
D kg m s–3 A–1
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

5
3 A cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) is connected to an alternating voltage. The following trace is

produced on the screen.
1 cm
1 cm
The oscilloscope time-base setting is 0.5 ms cm–1 and the Y-plate sensitivity is 2 V cm–1.
Which statement about the alternating voltage is correct?
A The amplitude is 3.5 cm.

B The frequency is 0.5 kHz.
C The period is 1 ms.
D The wavelength is 4 cm.
Space for working

6
4 A quantity y is to be determined from the equation shown.
px
y=
q2
The percentage uncertainties in p, x and q are shown.
percentage
uncertainty
p 6%
x 2%
q 4%
What is the percentage uncertainty in y?
A 0.5 % B 1% C 16 % D 192 %
5 A thermometer can be read to an accuracy of ± 0.5 °C. This thermometer is used to measure a
temperature rise from 40 °C to 100 °C.
What is the percentage uncertainty in the measurement of the temperature rise?
A 0.5 % B 0.8 % C 1.3 % D 1.7 %
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

7
6 A radio-controlled toy car travels along a straight line for a time of 15 s.
The variation with time t of the velocity v of the car is shown below.
6.0
v / m s–1
3.0
0
0 5 10 15 t/s
–3.0
–6.0
What is the average velocity of the toy car for the journey shown by the graph?
A –1.5 m s–1 B 0.0 m s–1 C 4.0 m s–1 D 4.5 m s–1
7 Two train carriages each of mass 5000 kg roll toward one another on a level track. One is
travelling at 2.00 m s–1 and the other at 1.00 m s–1, as shown.
2.00 m s–1 1.00 m s–1
5000 kg 5000 kg
They collide and join together.
What is the kinetic energy lost during the collision?
A 1250 J B 7500 J C 11 250 J D 12 500 J
Space for working

8
8 A resultant force causes a body to accelerate.
What is equal to the resultant force?
A the acceleration of the body per unit mass

B the change in kinetic energy of the body per unit time
C the change in momentum of the body per unit time
D the change in velocity of the body per unit time
9 A ship of mass 8.4 × 107 kg is approaching a harbour with speed 16.4 m s–1. By using reverse
thrust it can maintain a constant total stopping force of 920 000 N.
How long will it take to stop?
A 15 seconds
B 150 seconds
C 25 minutes
D 250 minutes
10 A tractor of mass 1000 kg is connected by a tow-bar to a trailer of mass 1000 kg. The total
resistance to motion has a constant value of 4000 N. One quarter of this resistance acts on the
trailer.
When the tractor and trailer are moving along horizontal ground at a constant speed of 6 m s–1,
what is the force exerted on the tractor by the tow-bar?
A 0N B 1000 N C 3000 N D 4000 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

9
11 The graph shows the variation with time of the speed of a raindrop falling vertically through air.
speed
0
0 time
A The acceleration decreases to produce a steady speed.

B The acceleration increases as the speed increases.
C The air resistance decreases as the speed increases.
D The resultant force increases as the speed increases.
12 A tiny oil droplet with mass 6.9 × 10–13 kg is at rest in an electric field of electric field strength
2.1 × 107 N C–1, as shown.
horizontal
plate
oil droplet
The weight of the droplet is exactly balanced by the electrical force on the droplet.
What is the charge on the droplet?
A 3.3 × 10–20 C
B –3.3 × 10–20 C
C 3.2 × 10–19 C
D –3.2 × 10–19 C
Space for working

10
45 N
30 N
30 N
45 N
Which of the following describes the resultant force and resultant torque on the object?
A non-zero non-zero
B non-zero zero
C zero non-zero
D zero zero
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

11
14 A mass at point X inside a uniform gravitational field experiences a gravitational force of 0.200 N.
It has 1.00 J of gravitational potential energy.
30 cm
X
uniform
50 cm gravitational
field
The mass is then moved to point Y.
What is its new gravitational potential energy?
A 0.90 J B 0.94 J C 1.06 J D 1.10 J
Space for working

12
15 A small mass is placed at point P on the inside surface of a smooth hemisphere. It is then
released from rest. When it reaches the lowest point T, its speed is 4.0 m s–1.
The diagram (not to scale) shows the speed of the mass at other points Q, R and S as it slides
down. Air resistance is negligible.
1.0 m s–1 Q
not to
smooth –1 scale
2.0 m s R
hemisphere
3.0 m s–1
S
4.0 m s–1
The mass loses potential energy E in falling from P to T.
E
At which point has the mass lost potential energy ?
4
A Q
B R
C S
D none of these
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

13
16 An escalator is 60 m long and lifts passengers through a vertical height of 30 m, as shown.
30 m
60 m
To drive the escalator against the forces of friction when there are no passengers requires a
power of 2.0 kW.
The escalator is used by passengers of average mass 60 kg and the power to overcome friction
remains constant.
How much power is required to drive the escalator when it is carrying 20 passengers and is
travelling at 0.75 m s–1?
A 4.4 kW B 6.4 kW C 8.8 kW D 10.8 kW
17 If the Universe was such that the speed of the molecules in a substance increased with
temperature but at any particular temperature the speed of all the molecules in a substance was
the same, which process would not occur?
A boiling
B condensation
C evaporation
D melting
Space for working

14
18 Liquid Q has twice the density of liquid R.
At depth x in liquid R, the pressure due to the liquid is 4 kPa.
At what depth in liquid Q is the pressure due to the liquid 7 kPa?
A 2x B 7x C 8x D 7x
7 8 7 2
19 A sample of metal is subjected to a force which increases to a maximum value and then
decreases back to zero. A force-extension graph for the sample is shown.
force
Y
0
0
extension
When the sample contracts it follows the same force-extension curve as when it was being
stretched.
What is the behaviour of the metal between X and Y?
A both elastic and plastic

B not elastic and not plastic
C plastic but not elastic
D elastic but not plastic
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

15
20 The graph shows the length of a spring as it is stretched by an increasing load.
15
length / cm
10
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
load / N
What is the spring constant?
A 8.0 N m–1 B 2.7 N m–1 C 0.13 N m–1 D 0.080 N m–1
Space for working

16
21 A composite rod is made by attaching a glass-reinforced plastic rod and a nylon rod end to end,
as shown.
1.00 m 1.00 m
glass-reinforced plastic nylon

Ep = 40 GPa En = 2.0 GPa
The rods have the same cross-sectional area and each rod is 1.00 m in length. The Young
modulus Ep of the plastic is 40 GPa and the Young modulus En of the nylon is 2.0 GPa.
The composite rod will break when its total extension reaches 3.0 mm.
What is the greatest tensile stress that can be applied to the composite rod before it breaks?
A 7.1 × 10–14 Pa
B 7.1 × 10–2 Pa
C 5.7 × 106 Pa
D 5.7 × 109 Pa
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

17
22 What, to two significant figures, are the period, the frequency and the amplitude of the wave
represented by the graph?
10
displacement
/ mm
0 time / ms
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
–10
period frequency amplitude

/s / Hz /m
A 0.0027 370 0.0067

B 0.0031 320 0.013
C 0.0035 290 0.0067
D 0.0042 240 0.013
Space for working

18
23 A sound wave consists of a series of moving pressure variations from the normal, constant air
pressure.
The graph shows these pressure variations for two waves at one instant in time.
pressure
variation wave 2
/ 10–2 Pa wave 1
3.0
2.0
1.0
0 distance
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 /m
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
Wave 1 has an intensity of 1.6 × 10–6 W m–2.
What is the intensity of wave 2?
A 2.4 × 10–6 W m–2
B 3.0 × 10–6 W m–2
C 3.6 × 10–6 W m–2
D 4.5 × 10–6 W m–2
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

19
24 The diagram shows a vertical cross-section through a water wave moving from left to right.
At which point is the water moving upwards with maximum speed?
A C
25 The principle of superposition states that a certain quantity is added when two or more waves
meet at a point.
What is this quantity?
A amplitude
B displacement
C intensity
D wavelength
Space for working

20
26 Light passes through a diffraction grating ruled at 1000 lines per cm and the same wavelength of
light also passes through two narrow slits 0.5 mm apart. Both situations produce intensity maxima
and minima on a screen.
Which statement about the separation of the maxima on the screen and the sharpness of the
maxima is correct?
A The diffraction grating maxima are less widely spaced and are less sharp than the two-slit
maxima.
B The diffraction grating maxima are less widely spaced and are sharper than the two-slit
maxima.
C The diffraction grating maxima are more widely spaced and are less sharp than the two-slit
maxima.
D The diffraction grating maxima are more widely spaced and are sharper than the two-slit
maxima.
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

21
27 The diagram shows an experiment which has been set up to demonstrate two-source
interference. Microwaves of wavelength λ pass through two slits S1 and S2.
S1
O
S2
microwave microwave
transmitter metal plate detector
with two slits
The detector is moved from point O in the direction of the arrow. The signal detected decreases
until the detector reaches point X, and then starts to increase again as the detector moves
beyond X.
Which equation correctly determines the position of X?
A OX = λ
B OX = λ / 2
C S2X – S1X = λ
D S2X – S1X = λ / 2
Space for working

22
28 Two positive charges and one negative charge, all of equal magnitude, are set at the corners of
an equilateral triangle.
Which diagram best represents the electric field surrounding the charges?
A B
– –
+ + + +
C D
– –
+ + + +
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

23
29 Two oppositely-charged horizontal metal plates are placed in a vacuum. A positively-charged

particle starts from rest and moves from one plate to the other plate, as shown.
+
+
Which graph shows how the kinetic energy EK of the particle varies with the distance x moved
from the positive plate?
A B C D
EK EK EK EK
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
Space for working

24
30 A battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) V and negligible internal resistance is connected to a 1 kΩ

resistor, as shown.
1 kΩ
P
V
Q
A student attempts to measure the potential difference (p.d.) between points P and Q using two
voltmeters, one at a time. The first voltmeter has a resistance of 1 kΩ and the second voltmeter
has a resistance of 1 MΩ.
What are the readings of the voltmeters?
reading on voltmeter reading on voltmeter

with 1 kΩ resistance with 1 MΩ resistance
A V V
2 2
B V V
2
C V V
2
D V V
31 A copper wire is to be replaced by an aluminium alloy wire of the same length and resistance.
Copper has half the resistivity of the alloy.
diameter of alloy wire

What is the ratio ?
diameter of copper wire
A 2 B 2 C 2 2 D 4
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

25
32 The diagram shows an electric pump for a garden fountain connected by an 18 m cable to a
230 V mains electrical supply.
230 V M pump
mains
18 m
The performance of the pump is acceptable if the potential difference (p.d.) across it is at least
218 V. The current through it is then 0.83 A.
What is the maximum resistance per metre of each of the two wires in the cable if the pump is to
perform acceptably?
A 0.40 Ω m–1 B 0.80 Ω m–1 C 1.3 Ω m–1 D 1.4 Ω m–1
33 Cell X has an e.m.f. of 2.0 V and an internal resistance of 2.0 Ω. Cell Y has an e.m.f. of 1.6 V and
an internal resistance of 1.2 Ω. These two cells are connected to a resistor of resistance 0.8 Ω, as
shown.
cell X
2.0 V
2.0 Ω
0.8 Ω
1.6 V
1.2 Ω
cell Y
What is the current in cell X?
A 0.10 A B 0.50 A C 0.90 A D 1.0 A
Space for working

26
34 In the circuit shown, a light-dependent resistor (LDR) is connected to two resistors R1 and R2.
The potential difference (p.d.) across R1 is V1 and the p.d. across R2 is V2. The current in the
circuit is I.
I
R1 V1
R2 V2
Which statement about this circuit is correct?
A The current I increases when the light intensity decreases.

B The LDR is an ohmic conductor.
C The p.d. V2 increases when the light intensity decreases.
V1
D The ratio is independent of light intensity.
V2
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

27
35 A power supply and a solar cell are compared using the potentiometer circuit shown.
power supply
2.000 V
+ – R
S
P Q
40.0 cm
galvanometer
solar cell
The e.m.f. produced by the solar cell is measured on the potentiometer.
The potentiometer wire PQ is 100.0 cm long and has a resistance of 5.00 Ω. The power supply
has an e.m.f. of 2.000 V and the solar cell has an e.m.f. of 5.00 mV.
Which resistance R must be used so that the galvanometer reads zero when PS = 40.0 cm?
A 395 Ω B 795 Ω C 995 Ω D 1055 Ω
Space for working

28
36 In the circuit shown, all the resistors are identical.
V1
V4
V2
V3
The reading on voltmeter V1 is 8.0 V and the reading on voltmeter V2 is 1.0 V.
What are the readings on the other voltmeters?
reading on reading on
voltmeter V3 / V voltmeter V4 / V
A 1.5 1.0
B 3.0 2.0
C 4.5 3.0
D 6.0 4.0
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

29
37 The diagram shows a light-dependent resistor (LDR) and a thermistor forming a potential divider.
Under which set of conditions will the potential difference across the thermistor have the greatest
value?
illumination temperature
A low low
B high low
C low high
D high high
38 A nucleus X decays into a nucleus Y by emitting an alpha particle followed by two beta particles.
Which statement about this nuclear decay is correct?
A Beta particle decay occurs when a proton changes into a neutron.

B Nucleus Y has the same nucleon number as nucleus X.
C Nucleus Y is an isotope of nucleus X.
D The total mass of the products is equal to the mass of the initial nucleus X.
Space for working

30
39 A slow-moving neutron collides with a nucleus of uranium-235. This results in a nuclear reaction
that is represented by the following nuclear equation
235 1 154 80
92 U + 0n → 60 Nd + 32 Ge + x
where x represents one or more particles.
What does x represent?
A one neutron
B two electrons
C two neutrons
D two protons
27
30
A an α-particle
B a β-particle
C a neutron
D a proton
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

31
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

32
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/12/M/J/14

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*1433926462*

IB14 06_9702_13/3RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which quantity can be measured in electronvolts (eV)?
A electric charge
B electric potential
C energy
D power
2 The unit of specific heat capacity is J kg–1 K–1.
What is its equivalent in terms of SI base units?
A kg–1 m2 K–1 B m s–1 K–1 C m s–2 K–1 D m2 s–2 K–1
3 What is the vertical component of this displacement vector?
5.0 km
37°
horizontal
A 3.0 km B 3.8 km C 4.0 km D 5.0 km
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

5
4 The resistance of a lamp is calculated from the value of the potential difference (p.d.) across it
and the value of the current passing through it.
Which statement correctly describes how to combine the uncertainties in the p.d. and in the
current?
A Add together the actual uncertainty in the p.d. and the actual uncertainty in the current.
B Add together the percentage uncertainty in the p.d. and the percentage uncertainty in the
current.
C Subtract the actual uncertainty in the current from the actual uncertainty in the p.d.
D Subtract the percentage uncertainty in the current from the percentage uncertainty in the p.d.
5 The display on a cathode-ray oscilloscope shows the signal produced by an electronic circuit.
The time-base is set at 5.0 ns per division and the Y-gain at 10 V per division.
What is the frequency of the signal?
A 2.0 × 10–8 Hz
B 2.5 × 10–2 Hz
C 5.0 × 107 Hz
D 3.1 × 108 Hz
Space for working

6
6 A digital caliper is used to measure the 28.50 mm width of a plastic ruler. The digital caliper reads
to the nearest 0.01 mm.
What is the correct way to record this reading?
A 0.02850 ± 0.01 m
B 0.0285 ± 0.001 m
C (2.850 ± 0.001) × 10–2 m
D (2.850 ± 0.001) × 10–3 m
7 An experiment is performed to measure the acceleration of free fall g. A body falls between two
fixed points. The four measurements shown below are taken.
Which measurement is not required for the calculation of g ?
A the distance fallen by the body

B the initial velocity of the body
C the mass of the body
D the time taken for the body to fall
8 In a cathode-ray tube, an electron is accelerated uniformly in a straight line from a speed of

4 × 103 m s–1 to 2 × 107 m s–1 over a distance of 10 mm.
What is the acceleration of the electron?
A 2 × 103 m s–2
B 2 × 106 m s–2
C 2 × 1013 m s–2
D 2 × 1016 m s–2
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

7
9 The graph shows how the speed v of a sprinter changes with time t during a 100 m race.
12
v / m s–1
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
t/s
What is the best estimate of the maximum acceleration of the sprinter?
A 0.5 m s–2 B 1 m s–2 C 3 m s–2 D 10 m s–2
10 A tennis ball is dropped onto a table and bounces back up. The table exerts a force F on the ball.
Which graph best shows the variation with time t of the force F while the ball is in contact with the
table?
A B C D
F F F F
0 0 0 0
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
Space for working

8
11 A resultant force of 10 N acts on a body for a time of 2.0 s.
Which graph could show the variation with time t of the momentum p of the body?
20
–1
p / kg m s
15
A
10 B
C
5 D
0
0 1.0 2.0
t/s
12 A stationary body explodes into two components of masses m and 2m.
The components gain kinetic energies X and Y respectively.
m 2m
moves with moves with
kinetic energy X kinetic energy Y
X
Y
1 1 2 4
A B C D
4 2 1 1
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

9
13 What is the condition for an object to be in equilibrium?
A The object’s velocity and the resultant torque on it must both be zero.
B The object’s velocity must be zero.
C The resultant force and the resultant torque on the object must both be zero.
D The resultant force on the object must be zero.
14 A uniform solid cuboid of concrete of dimensions 0.50 m × 1.20 m × 0.40 m and weight 4000 N
rests on a flat surface with the 1.20 m edge vertical as shown in diagram 1.
0.40 m
0.40 m
1.20 m
0.50 m
0.50 m 1.20 m
diagram 1 diagram 2
What is the minimum energy required to roll the cuboid through 90° to the position shown in
diagram 2 with the 0.50 m edge vertical?
A 200 J B 400 J C 1400 J D 2600 J
Space for working

10
15 A uniform beam is pivoted at P as shown. Weights of 10 N and 20 N are attached to its ends.
The length of the beam is marked at 0.1 m intervals. The weight of the beam is 100 N.
At which point should a further weight of 20 N be attached to achieve equilibrium?
0.6 m 0.4 m
0.1 m
A B C D
P
10 N 20 N
16 An electric motor has an input power Pin, useful output power Pout and efficiency η.
input power electric motor output power

Pin of efficiency η Pout
power lost
How much power is lost by the motor?

1  1 
A ηPin B  −1 Pin C ηPout D  −1 Pout
η  η 
17 A shot-put champion accelerates a 7.0 kg metal ball in a straight line. The ball moves from rest to
a speed of 12 m s–1 in a distance of 1.2 m.
What is the average resultant force on the metal ball?
A 70 N B 210 N C 420 N D 840 N
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

11
18 A ball drops onto a horizontal surface and bounces elastically.
What happens to the kinetic energy of the ball during the very short time that it is in contact with
the surface?
A Most of the kinetic energy is lost as heat and sound energy.

B The kinetic energy decreases to zero and then returns to its original value.
C The kinetic energy remains constant because it is an elastic collision.
D The kinetic energy remains constant in magnitude but changes direction.
19 When the water in a pond freezes, it changes from a liquid to a solid. When this occurs, it
changes volume and exchanges energy with the surroundings.
change of volume energy exchange
A contracts gives out energy to the surroundings

B contracts takes in energy from the surroundings
C expands gives out energy to the surroundings
D expands takes in energy from the surroundings
A boiling
B evaporation
C freezing
D melting
Space for working

12
21 The graph shows the distribution of speeds for the molecules of a gas at a particular temperature.
the number
of molecules
with speed v
0
0 speed v
A All the molecules have the same kinetic energy.

B The commonest value of speed is also the average speed.
C The graph shows that the molecules of a gas are widely spaced apart.
D The peak value of the graph would move to the right if the temperature is increased.
22 The Mariana Trench in the Pacific Ocean has a depth of about 10 km.
Assuming that sea water is incompressible and has a density of about 1020 kg m–3, what would
be the approximate pressure at that depth?
A 105 Pa B 106 Pa C 107 Pa D 108 Pa
23 An elastic material with a Young modulus E is subjected to a tensile stress S. Hooke’s Law is
obeyed.
What is the expression for the elastic energy stored per unit volume of the material?
S2 S2 E 2E
A B C D
2E E 2S 2 S2
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

13
24 Cylindrical samples of steel, glass and rubber are each subjected to a gradually increasing tensile
force F. The extensions e are measured and graphs are plotted as shown below.
F F F
0 0 0
0 e 0 e 0 e
Which row correctly relates the graphs to the materials?
steel glass rubber
A X Y Z
B X Z Y
C Y X Z
D Y Z X
25 A cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) displays a waveform corresponding to a sound wave.
In order to determine the frequency of the sound wave, which part of the displayed waveform
must be measured and which c.r.o. setting must be known?
on-screen
c.r.o. setting
measurement
A amplitude time-base
B amplitude Y-gain
C wavelength time-base
D wavelength Y-gain
Space for working

14
26 What is the approximate range of frequencies of infra-red radiation?
A 1 × 103 Hz to 1 × 109 Hz
B 1 × 109 Hz to 1 × 1011 Hz
C 1 × 1011 Hz to 1 × 1014 Hz
D 1 × 1014 Hz to 1 × 1017 Hz
27 A small source emits spherical waves.
P
r
source
The wave intensity I at any point P, a distance r from the source, is inversely proportional to r 2.
What is the relationship between the wave amplitude a and the distance r ?
A a2 ∝ 1 B a∝ 1 C a ∝ 12 D a ∝ 14
r r r r
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

15
28 A student attempts to show the interference of light using two identical green LEDs.
Which statement explains why the experiement will not succeed?
A The light waves from the sources are not coherent.

B The light waves from the sources do not have the same amplitude.
C The light waves from the sources have a range of wavelengths.
D The light waves from the sources are not monochromatic.
29 A stationary wave is set up on a stretched string, as shown.
Q
S
P
R
Which statement about the points on the string is correct?
A Point Q vibrates with the largest amplitude.

B Points P and R vibrate in phase.
C Point S is an antinode.
D The horizontal distance between R and S is half the wavelength.
30 Monochromatic light is incident on a diffraction grating and a diffraction pattern is observed.
Which line of the table gives the effect of replacing the grating with one that has more lines per
metre?
number of orders of angle between first and

diffraction visible second orders of diffraction
Space for working

16
31 An electron enters a region of space where there is a uniform electric field E as shown.
path of
E
electron
Initially, the electron is moving parallel to, and in the direction of, the electric field.
What is the subsequent path and change of speed of the electron?
path of electron speed of electron
A linear decreases
B linear increases
C parabolic decreases
D parabolic increases
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

17
32 Two parallel plates X and Y are separated by a distance d in a vacuum. There is a potential
difference between the plates so that a uniform electric field is produced.
plate X plate Y
–q
A charge –q moves from rest from the surface of plate X and travels towards plate Y.
When the charge reaches plate Y it has kinetic energy K.
Which expression gives the electric field strength between the plates?
q qd K Kd
A B C D
Kd K qd q
Space for working

18
33 Two wires P and Q made of the same material and of the same length are connected in parallel
to the same voltage supply. Wire P has diameter 2 mm and wire Q has diameter 1 mm.
What is the ratio current in P ?

current in Q
1 1 2 4
A B C D
4 2 1 1
34 A cell has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 6 V and internal resistance R. An external resistor,
also of resistance R, is connected across this cell, as shown.
cell
6V
R
Power P is dissipated by the external resistor.
The cell is replaced by a different cell that has an e.m.f. of 6 V and negligible internal resistance.
What is the new power that is dissipated in the external resistor?
A 0.5P B P C 2P D 4P
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

19
35 The diagram shows a low-voltage circuit for heating the water in a fish tank.
power
heater
supply
The heater has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. The power supply has an e.m.f. of 12 V and an internal
resistance of 1.0 Ω.
At which rate is energy supplied to the heater?
A 27 W B 36 W C 48 W D 64 W
Space for working

20
36 The diagrams show the same cell, ammeter, potentiometer and fixed resistor connected in
different ways.
W X
d d
A A
Y Z
d
d
A A
The distance d between the sliding contact and a particular end of the potentiometer is varied.
The current measured is then plotted against the distance d.
For which two circuits will the graphs be identical?
A W and X B W and Y C X and Y D Y and Z
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

21
37 What is the current in the 40 Ω resistor of the circuit shown?
20 Ω 20 Ω
40 Ω
20 Ω 20 Ω
10 V
A zero B 0.13 A C 0.25 A D 0.50 A
38 A battery of negligible internal resistance is connected to a resistor network, an ammeter and a

switch S, as shown.
4.8 Ω 7.2 Ω
S 2.8 Ω
When S is open, the reading on the ammeter is 250 mA.
When S is closed, what is the change in the reading on the ammeter?
A 1.07 A B 1.32 A C 190 mA D 440 mA
Space for working

22
39 An isotope of thorium has a nucleon number of 232 and a proton number of 90. It decays to form
another isotope of thorium with a nucleon number of 228.
How many alpha particles and beta particles are emitted by a nucleus of thorium during this
decay?
alpha particles beta particles
A 0 4
B 1 0
C 1 2
D 2 1
40 Four nuclei are represented below.
28 25 25 24
14 E 15 G 12 M 13 Q
Which statement about these nuclei is correct?
A An uncharged atom of element Q has 24 orbital electrons.

B Nucleus M could transform into Q by emitting a beta particle.
C Nuclei G and M are isotopes of the same element.
D When E absorbs a neutron and then emits an alpha particle, nucleus E transforms into M.
Space for working
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/13/M/J/14

* 6 5 0 0 2 5 8 8 8 0 *
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.

DC (NF/SW) 75240/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
1 (a) (i) Define velocity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Distinguish between speed and velocity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A car of mass 1500 kg moves along a straight, horizontal road. The variation with time t of the
velocity v for the car is shown in Fig. 1.1.
40
30
v / m s–1
20
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
t /s
Fig. 1.1
The brakes of the car are applied from t = 1.0 s to t = 3.5 s.

For the time when the brakes are applied,
(i) calculate the distance moved by the car,
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14

5
(ii) calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the car.
resultant force = ....................................................... N [3]
(c) The direction of motion of the car in (b) at time t = 2.0 s is shown in Fig. 1.2.
direction of motion
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, show with arrows the directions of the acceleration (label this arrow A) and the
resultant force (label this arrow F). [1]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14

7
2 (a) (i) Define power.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Use your definition in (i) to show that power may also be expressed as the product of
force and velocity.
[2]
(b) A lorry moves up a road that is inclined at 9.0° to the horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
8.5 m s–1
road
9.0°
Fig. 2.1
The lorry has mass 2500 kg and is travelling at a constant speed of 8.5 m s−1. The force due to
air resistance is negligible.
(i) Calculate the useful power from the engine to move the lorry up the road.
power = ................................................... kW [3]
(ii) State two reasons why the rate of change of potential energy of the lorry is equal to the
power calculated in (i).
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

8
3 A uniform plank AB of length 5.0 m and weight 200 N is placed across a stream, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
FA FB
plank
A B
880 N
200 N
x
5.0 m
stream
Fig. 3.1
A man of weight 880 N stands a distance x from end A. The ground exerts a vertical force FA on
the plank at end A and a vertical force FB on the plank at end B.
As the man moves along the plank, the plank is always in equilibrium.
(a) (i) Explain why the sum of the forces FA and FB is constant no matter where the man stands
on the plank.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The man stands a distance x = 0.50 m from end A. Use the principle of moments to
calculate the magnitude of FB.
FB = ...................................................... N [4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14
9
(b) The variation with distance x of force FA is shown in Fig. 3.2.
1000
force / N
FA
500
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
x /m
Fig. 3.2
On the axes of Fig. 3.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with x of force FB. [3]

10
4 A metal ball of mass 40 g falls vertically onto a spring, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
metal ball
spring
spring
support
The spring is supported and stands vertically. The ball has a speed of 2.8 m s−1 as it makes contact
with the spring. The ball is brought to rest as the spring is compressed.
(a) Show that the kinetic energy of the ball as it makes contact with the spring is 0.16 J.
[2]
(b) The variation of the force F acting on the spring with the compression x of the spring is
shown in Fig. 4.2.
20
F/N
10
0
0 XB
x
Fig. 4.2
The ball produces a maximum compression XB when it comes to rest. The spring has a spring
constant of 800 N m−1.
Use Fig. 4.2 to
(i) calculate the compression XB,
XB = ...................................................... m [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14
11
(ii) show that not all the kinetic energy in (a) is converted into elastic potential energy in the
spring.
[2]

12
5 (a) Explain what is meant by the following quantities for a wave on the surface of water:
(i) displacement and amplitude,
displacement .....................................................................................................................
amplitude ...........................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) frequency and time period.
frequency ..........................................................................................................................
time period ........................................................................................................................

[2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 represents waves on the surface of water in a ripple tank at one particular instant of
time.
direction of travel of waves

vibrator
25 cm
15 mm
12 mm water
side view
ripple tank
A vibrator moves the surface of the water to produce the waves of frequency f. The speed of
the waves is 7.5 cm s−1. Where the waves travel on the water surface, the maximum depth of
the water is 15 mm and the minimum depth is 12 mm.
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14

13
(i) Calculate, for the waves,
1. the amplitude,
amplitude = .................................................. mm [1]
2. the wavelength.
wavelength = ..................................................... m [2]
(ii) Calculate the time period of the oscillations of the vibrator.
time period = ...................................................... s [2]
(c) State and explain whether the waves on the surface of the water shown in Fig. 5.1 are
(i) progressive or stationary,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) transverse or longitudinal.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
6 (a) Distinguish between electromotive force (e.m.f.) and potential difference (p.d.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A battery of e.m.f. 12 V and internal resistance 0.50 Ω is connected to two identical lamps, as
shown in Fig. 6.1.
12 V
0.50 1
Fig. 6.1
Each lamp has constant resistance. The power rating of each lamp is 48 W when connected
across a p.d. of 12 V.
(i) Explain why the power dissipated in each lamp is not 48 W when connected as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the resistance of one lamp.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14

15
(iii) Calculate the current in the battery.
current = ...................................................... A [2]
(iv) Calculate the power dissipated in one lamp.
power = ..................................................... W [2]
(c) A third identical lamp is placed in parallel with the battery in the circuit of Fig. 6.1. Describe
and explain the effect on the terminal p.d. of the battery.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

16
7 (a) State what is meant by
α-particle: ..................................................................................................................................
β-particle: ..................................................................................................................................
γ-radiation: ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Describe the changes to the proton number and the nucleon number of a nucleus when
emission occurs of
(i) an α-particle,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a β-particle,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) γ-radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/21/M/J/14

* 3 0 7 8 6 8 9 3 0 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

DC (LK/SW) 75237/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
1 (a) Show that the SІ base units of power are kg m2 s–3.
[3]
Q
(b) The rate of flow of thermal energy in a material is given by
t
Q CAT
=
t x
where A is the cross-sectional area of the material,

T is the temperature difference across the thickness of the material,
x is the thickness of the material,
C is a constant.
Determine the SІ base units of C.
base units .......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

5
2 A coin is made in the shape of a thin cylinder, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
diameter
thickness
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2 shows the measurements made in order to determine the density ρ of the material used to
make the coin.

mass 9.6 g ± 0.5 g
thickness 2.00 mm ± 0.01 mm
diameter 22.1 mm ± 0.1 mm
Fig. 2.2
(a) Calculate the density ρ in kg m–3.
ρ = ...............................................kg m–3 [3]
(b) (i) Calculate the percentage uncertainty in ρ.
percentage uncertainty = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) State the value of ρ with its actual uncertainty.
ρ = ........................................................ ± ........................................... kg m–3 [1]

6
3 (a) State Newton’s first law of motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A box slides down a slope, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
box
20° horizontal
Fig. 3.1
The angle of the slope to the horizontal is 20°. The box has a mass of 65 kg. The total resistive
force R acting on the box is constant as it slides down the slope.
(i) State the names and directions of the other two forces acting on the box.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The variation with time t of the velocity v of the box as it moves down the slope is shown
in Fig. 3.2.
8.0
6.0
v / m s–1
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0
t /s
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

7
1. Use data from Fig. 3.2 to show that the acceleration of the box is 2.6 m s–2.
[2]
2. Calculate the resultant force on the box.
resultant force = ...................................................... N [1]
3. Determine the resistive force R on the box.
R = ...................................................... N [3]

8
4 (a) Explain what is meant by gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy.
gravitational potential energy: .................................................................................... ..............
.…................................................................................................................................ ..............
kinetic energy: ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A ball of mass 400 g is thrown with an initial velocity of 30.0 m s–1 at an angle of 45.0° to the
horizontal, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
path of ball
30.0 m s–1 H
ball
45.0°
Fig. 4.1
Air resistance is negligible. The ball reaches a maximum height H after a time of 2.16 s.
(i) Calculate
1. the initial kinetic energy of the ball,
kinetic energy = ............................................... J [3]
2. the maximum height H of the ball,
H = .............................................. m [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

9
3. the gravitational potential energy of the ball at height H.
potential energy = ....................................................... J [2]
(ii) 1. Determine the kinetic energy of the ball at its maximum height.
kinetic energy = ....................................................... J [1]
2. Explain why the kinetic energy of the ball at maximum height is not zero.
......................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. [1]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

11
5 (a) Define the Young modulus.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Two wires P and Q of the same material and same original length l0 are fixed so that they
hang vertically, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
l0 l0
P Q
F F
The diameter of P is d and the diameter of Q is 2d. The same force F is applied to the lower
end of each wire.
Show your working and determine the ratio
(i) stress in P ,
stress in Q
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) strain in P .
strain in Q
ratio = ......................................................... [2]

12
6 A battery is connected in series with resistors X and Y, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
24 V
I
X B Y
A C
6.0 1
Fig. 6.1
The resistance of X is constant. The resistance of Y is 6.0 Ω. The battery has electromotive force
(e.m.f.) 24 V and zero internal resistance. A variable resistor of resistance R is connected in parallel
with X.
The current І from the battery is changed by varying R from 5.0 Ω to 20 Ω. The variation with R of
І is shown in Fig. 6.2.
2.5
I/A
2.0
1.5
5 10 15 20
R /1
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

13
(a) Explain why the potential difference (p.d.) between points A and C is 24 V for all values of R.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Use Fig. 6.2 to state and explain the variation of the p.d. across resistor Y as R is
increased. Numerical values are not required.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) For R = 6.0 Ω,
(i) show that the p.d. between points A and B is 9.6 V,
[2]
(ii) calculate the resistance of X,
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
(iii) calculate the power provided by the battery.
power = ..................................................... W [2]
(d) State and explain qualitatively how the power provided by the battery changes as the
resistance R is increased.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
14
7 A laser is placed in front of a double slit, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
double slit
12 mm
laser
Q
bright fringes
2.8 m screen
The laser emits light of frequency 670 THz. Interference fringes are observed on the screen.
(a) Explain how the interference fringes are formed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Show that the wavelength of the light is 450 nm.
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

15
(c) The separation of the maxima P and Q observed on the screen is 12 mm. The distance
between the double slit and the screen is 2.8 m.
Calculate the separation of the two slits.
separation = ..................................................... m [3]
(d) The laser is replaced by a laser emitting red light. State and explain the effect on the
interference fringes seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/22/M/J/14

* 7 6 0 1 8 5 0 9 1 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour

DC (RW/CGW) 75192/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

5
1 (a) Underline all the base quantities in the following list.
ampere charge current mass second temperature weight [2]
(b) The potential energy EP stored in a stretched wire is given by
EP = ½Cσ 2V
where C is a constant,
σ is the strain,
V is the volume of the wire.
Determine the SІ base units of C.
base units ...........................................................[3]

6
2 (a) Explain what is meant by a scalar quantity and by a vector quantity.
scalar: .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
vector: .......................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A ball leaves point P at the top of a cliff with a horizontal velocity of 15 m s–1, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
ball
P
15 m s–1
path of ball
25 m cliff
Q
ground
Fig. 2.1
The height of the cliff is 25 m. The ball hits the ground at point Q.
(i) Calculate the vertical velocity of the ball just before it makes impact with the ground at Q.
vertical velocity = ................................................. m s–1 [2]
(ii) Show that the time taken for the ball to fall to the ground is 2.3 s.
[1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

7
(iii) Calculate the magnitude of the displacement of the ball at point Q from point P.
displacement = ...................................................... m [4]
(iv) Explain why the distance travelled by the ball is different from the magnitude of the
displacement of the ball.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

8
3 (a) Explain what is meant by work done.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A boy on a board B slides down a slope, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
boy on board B
30°
horizontal
Fig. 3.1
The angle of the slope to the horizontal is 30°. The total resistive force F acting on B is
constant.
(i) State a word equation that links the work done by the force F on B to the changes in
potential and kinetic energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The boy on the board B moves with velocity v down the slope. The variation with time t of
v is shown in Fig. 3.2.
8.0
6.0
v / m s–1 4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
t/s
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

9
The total mass of B is 75 kg.

For B, from t = 0 to t = 2.5 s,
1. show that the distance moved down the slope is 9.3 m,
[2]
2. calculate the gain in kinetic energy,
gain in kinetic energy = ....................................................... J [3]
3. calculate the loss in potential energy,
loss in potential energy = ....................................................... J [3]
4. calculate the resistive force F.
F = ...................................................... N [3]

10
4 A spring hangs vertically from a point P, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
P
metre rule spring
mass M
reading x
Fig. 4.1
A mass M is attached to the lower end of the spring. The reading x from the metre rule is taken, as
shown in Fig. 4.1. Fig. 4.2 shows the relationship between x and M.
0.60
0.40
M / kg
0.20
0
20 22 24 26 28 30 32
x / cm
Fig. 4.2
(a) Explain how the apparatus in Fig. 4.1 may be used to determine the load on the spring at the
elastic limit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State and explain whether Fig. 4.2 suggests that the spring obeys Hooke’s law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

11
(c) Use Fig. 4.2 to determine the spring constant, in N m–1, of the spring.
spring constant = ................................................ N m–1 [3]

12
5 (a) Explain why the terminal potential difference (p.d.) of a cell with internal resistance may be
less than the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cell.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A battery of e.m.f. 4.5 V and internal resistance r is connected in series with a resistor of
resistance 6.0 Ω, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
battery
4.5V
r
6.0 1
Fig. 5.1
The current I in the circuit is 0.65 A.
Determine
(i) the internal resistance r of the battery,
r = ...................................................... Ω [2]
(ii) the terminal p.d. of the battery,
p.d. = ....................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

13
(iii) the power dissipated in the resistor,
power = ..................................................... W [2]
(iv) the efficiency of the battery.
efficiency = .......................................................... [2]
(c) A second resistor of resistance 20 Ω is connected in parallel with the 6.0 Ω resistor in Fig. 5.1.
Describe and explain qualitatively the change in the heating effect within the battery.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]

14
6 A hollow tube is used to investigate stationary waves. The tube is closed at one end and open at
the other end. A loudspeaker connected to a signal generator is placed near the open end of the
tube, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
L
loudspeaker
Q
signal P
generator
hollow tube
Fig. 6.1
The tube has length L. The frequency of the signal generator is adjusted so that the loudspeaker
produces a progressive wave of frequency 440 Hz. A stationary wave is formed in the tube. A
representation of this stationary wave is shown in Fig. 6.1.
Two points P and Q on the stationary wave are labelled.
(a) (i) Describe, in terms of energy transfer, the difference between a progressive wave and a
stationary wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how the stationary wave is formed in the tube.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) State the direction of the oscillations of an air particle at point P.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1 label, with the letter N, the nodes of the stationary wave. [1]
(c) State the phase difference between points P and Q on the stationary wave.
phase difference = .......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

15
(d) The speed of sound in the tube is 330 m s–1.
Calculate
(i) the wavelength of the sound wave,
wavelength = ...................................................... m [2]
(ii) the length L of the tube.
length = ...................................................... m [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/23/M/J/14

* 5 0 5 3 5 7 2 5 8 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours


Total
DC (AC/CGW) 75194/2
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate a system in equilibrium due to several forces.
(a) Measure and record the distance L0 between the ends of the spring, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Note that this distance includes the two loops at the ends.
L0
loop
Fig. 1.1
L0 = .............................................. m [1]
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2. Mass m should be 0.200 kg.
Do not change the height of the pulley or the clamp.
rod of pulley
clamp L
θ
spring
knot mass m
string
stand
mass X
bench
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/31/M/J/14

3
(ii) Adjust the apparatus until the angle θ is 90°.
You may move the stands sideways or slide the knot along the string.
(iii) Measure and record the distance L between the ends of the spring loops.
L = .............................................. m [1]
(iv) Calculate the extension e of the spring using e = L – L0.
e = ................................................... m

4
(c) Vary m and repeat (b)(ii), (b)(iii) and (b)(iv) until you have six sets of readings of m
and L.
Include values of m 2, e and e 2 in your table.
[10]
(d) (i) Plot a graph of e 2 on the y-axis against m 2 on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/31/M/J/14
5

6
(e) The quantities e and m are related by the equation
e 2 = – P m 2 + Q
Use your answers in (d)(iii) to determine the values of P and Q.

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[1]
(f) The mass M of X is given by

Q
M= .
P
Use your answers in (e) to determine the value of M.

Include a unit for M.
M = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/31/M/J/14

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a hacksaw blade supported by a
G-clamp.
(a) Using the Blu-Tack, attach the two slotted masses as close as possible to one end of
the hacksaw blade, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Blu-tack
hacksaw blade
mass
mass
Fig. 2.1
masses
hacksaw blade
x
jaw of G-clamp
bench
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Measure and record the distance x between the top of the jaw of the G-clamp and
the centre of the masses, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
x = ................................................. [2]

8
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of x.
© UCLES 2014 9702/31/M/J/14

9
(c) (i) Gently displace the top end of the hacksaw blade to the left.
Release the blade and watch the movement.
The blade will move to the right and back towards the left, completing a swing as
shown in Fig. 2.3.
one complete swing
bench
Fig. 2.3
(ii) The time taken for one complete swing is T.

T = .................................................. [2]
1
(iii) Calculate the frequency f of the swings where f = T .
f = .............................................Hz [1]

10
(d) (i) Reduce x by attaching the masses to another position on the hacksaw blade.
(ii) Repeat (b)(ii) and (c).
x = ......................................................
T = ......................................................
f = ..................................................Hz
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/31/M/J/14

11
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between f and x is

k
f2=
x3
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/31/M/J/14

* 6 2 0 0 9 2 4 7 7 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours


Total
DC (NH/SW) 75195/2
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the equilibrium of a rod supported by a spring.
(a) The apparatus has been assembled for you as shown in Fig. 1.1.
stand
boss
nail A
plumb-line
string
boss
spring
nail B
clamp
string loop
wooden rod
bench
Fig. 1.1
(i) Lift the end of the rod attached to the spring so that there is no tension in the spring.
Measure and record the unstretched length l 0 of the spring, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
l0
Fig. 1.2
l 0 = ............................................ cm [1]
(ii) Release the end of the rod. Suspend the mass M from the string loop.
© UCLES 2014 9702/32/M/J/14

3
(b) (i) Move the string in the clamp to make the rod horizontal.
(ii) Use the plumb-line to ensure that nail B is vertically below nail A, as shown in
Fig. 1.3.
nail A
plumb-line
h
l
nail B
clamp
holding mass M
string
bench
Fig. 1.3
(iii) Measure and record the distance h between the two nails, and the length l of the
spring, as shown in Fig. 1.3.
h = ................................................. cm
l = ................................................. cm
[1]

4
(c) Raise nail B and repeat (b) until you have six sets of values of h and l.
1
Include values for h 2 and (l – l 0)2 in your table.
[10]
1
(d) (i) Plot a graph of (l – l 0)2 on the y-axis against on the x-axis. [3]
h2
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/32/M/J/14

5

6
(e) The quantities l and h are related by the equation

p
(l – l0)2 = +q
h2
Using your answers from (d)(iii), determine the values of p and q.

p = ......................................................
q = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/32/M/J/14

7

8
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a mass and a spring.
(a) You are provided with a spring.
(i) Measure and record the diameter d of the coiled section of the spring as shown in
Fig. 2.1. Record the number n of turns in the coiled section.
Fig. 2.1
d = ................................................. cm
n = ......................................................
[1]
(ii) Calculate the length l of wire used to make the coiled section of the spring using
the relationship l = πnd.
l = ............................................ cm [1]
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.2 with mass 1 suspended from the spring
and secured with Blu-Tack.
boss
bolt
stand
spring
Blu-Tack
mass
one vertical
oscillation
bench
Fig. 2.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/32/M/J/14
9
(ii) Pull the mass down approximately 2 cm and release it.

One vertical oscillation is shown in Fig. 2.2. Measure and record the time t for the
mass to make 10 vertical oscillations.
t = .................................................. [2]
(c) (i) Lower the bolt until the bottom of the stationary mass is approximately 6 cm above
the bench, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
bolt
mass
6 cm (approximately)
bench
Fig. 2.3
(ii) Pull the mass down until it touches the bench.

Release the mass and watch the loop on the bolt, looking to see if the loop rises
above the bolt producing a gap as shown in Fig. 2.4.
gap between loop and bolt
bolt
loop
Fig. 2.4

10
(iii) Keep raising the bolt and repeating (ii) until the loop just rises above the bolt at the
top of the first oscillation.
With the mass stationary, measure and record the distance A from the bottom of
the mass to the bench.
A = .................................................. [1]
(d) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of A.
(e) Detach the mass from the spring. Repeat (b) and (c) using mass 2.
t = ......................................................
A = ......................................................
[2]
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between A, t and l is
A = kt 2l
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/32/M/J/14

11
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/32/M/J/14

* 1 3 4 9 2 9 1 6 0 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours


Total
DC (AC/CGW) 75245/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the current in a circuit varies as the resistance of
the circuit is changed.
(a) Measure and record the length L of wire between the crocodile clips on the wire
labelled F.
L = .................................................. [1]
(b) Set up the circuit as shown in Fig. 1.1.
+ −
A crocodile clip
metre rule
wire crocodile clip

Fig. 1.1
(c) (i) Attach wire F to the wire on the metre rule as shown in Fig. 1.2.
+ −
A
x
F
Fig. 1.2
The distance x between the crocodile clips should be approximately 50 cm.
(ii) Measure and record x.
x = ......................................................

4
(d) (i) Close the switch.
(ii) Record the ammeter reading I.
I = .................................................. [1]
(e) Change x and repeat (c)(ii) and (d) until you have six sets of readings of x and I.
x2 1
Include values of (x + L) and I in your table.
[10]
1 x2
(f) (i) Plot a graph of I on the y-axis against (x + L) on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14
5

6
(g) The quantities I, x and L are related by the equation

1 Px 2
I = - (x + L) + Q
Using your answers in (f)(iii), determine values for P and Q.

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the motion of a sphere on a track depends on the
radius of the track.
(a) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.1.
boss
clamp clamp
boss
track y
x
stand
stand
G-clamp bench G-clamp side view
Fig. 2.1
The distance x is the horizontal distance between the ends of the track.
The distance y is the vertical distance between the top and bottom of the track.
The distance y should be approximately 10 cm.
(b) (i) Measure and record the distance y as shown in Fig. 2.1.
y = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of y.

8
(iii) Measure and record the distance x as shown in Fig. 2.1.
x = .................................................. [1]
(iv) Calculate the radius R of the track where R is given by
x2 y
R = 8y + 2 .
R = .................................................. [1]
(c) (i) Place a sphere on the track as shown in Fig. 2.2.
sphere
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Release the sphere and watch the movement.

The sphere will move down one side of the track and up the other side before
returning, completing a cycle as shown in Fig. 2.3.
one
complete
cycle
Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14

9
(iii) The time taken for one complete cycle is T.

By timing several of these complete cycles, determine an accurate value for T.
T = .................................................. [2]
(d) Reduce x by approximately 5 cm and repeat (b)(i), (b)(iii), (b)(iv) and (c).
y = ......................................................
x = ......................................................
R = ......................................................
T = ......................................................
[3]

10
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between T and R is
T 2 = kR
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14

11
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/33/M/J/14

* 7 2 1 4 7 7 2 1 1 8 *
PHYSICS 9702/34
2 hours


Total
DC (LK/CGW) 75198/4
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a system of masses as its shape is
changed.
(a) You are provided with a length of wire, bent into two arms, with a mass attached at the
end of each arm as shown in Fig. 1.1.
wire
tape
mass
Fig. 1.1
(i) Measure and record the angle i between the two arms.
i = .................................................. [1]
i
(ii) Calculate sin 2 c m , where
2
i i i
sin 2 c m = sin c m # sin c m .
2 2 2
i
sin 2 c m = .......................................................
2
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14

3
(b) You are provided with a spring suspended from a stand. A hook is suspended from the
bottom of the spring.
Hang the wire from the upper part of the hook and hang the mass hanger from the lower
part of the hook as shown in Fig. 1.2.
clamp
spring
hook
wire
mass hanger
stand
bench
Fig. 1.2
(i) Twist the mass hanger through about 45° and release it so that the mass hanger
and wire rotate back and forth as shown in Fig. 1.3.
wire
one complete
swing mass hanger
Fig. 1.3 (top view)
(ii) Measure and record the time t for the mass hanger and wire to make 5 complete
swings.
t = .................................................. [2]

4
(c) Remove the wire from its hook. Bend the wire to change the angle q. The arms of the
wire must remain straight.
Repeat (a) and (b) until you have five sets of readings for q and t.
i
Include values for t 2 and sin 2 c m in your table.
2
[9]
i
(d) (i) Plot a graph of t 2 on the y-axis against sin 2 c m on the x-axis. [3]
2
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14
5

6
(e) The quantities t and q are related by the equation

i
t 2 = p + q sin 2 c m
2
Using your answers from (d)(iii), determine the values of p and q.

p = .......................................................
q = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the collision between two spheres.
(a) You are provided with two spheres. Take measurements to find the average radius r of
the spheres.
r = .......................................... mm [1]
(b) You are provided with a flat board, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wooden strip
sticky surface
l
small hole
board
BA
centre line
Fig. 2.1
A wooden strip with a sticky surface is attached to the board, and there is a small
hole in the board.
(i) Measure and record the distance l between the small hole and the sticky surface.
l = .......................................... mm [1]
(ii) Measure and record the perpendicular distance e between the centre line and the
line labelled A.
e = .......................................... mm [1]
8
(c) (i) You are provided with a ramp with a groove in it.
Position the ramp on the board with the centre of the groove along line A, and
position one of the spheres in the hole, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
ramp sphere
positioned in
hole
centre of
groove aligned
with line A
BA
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Place the second sphere on the groove and release it so that it rolls down and hits
the sphere in the hole. Both spheres will roll forward and hit the wooden strip.
Measure and record the distance x between the centre of the right-hand sphere
and the centre line, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
x
position of
sphere hitting
the wooden
strip
BA
Fig. 2.3
x = .......................................... mm [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14
9
(iv) Before the sphere hits the wooden strip, its path makes an angle i with the centre
line. Calculate i using the relationship
tan i = ` j.
x
l–r
i = ................................................. [2]
(d) Repeat (b)(ii), (c)(i), (c)(ii) and (c)(iv) with the distance e measured to line B and the
centre of the groove along line B.
e = ................................................ mm
x = ................................................ mm
i = ......................................................
[1]

10
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between i , e and r is

ke
sin i =
2r
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14

11
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/34/M/J/14

* 4 2 4 1 3 0 3 4 9 0 *
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours


Total
DC (KN/SW) 75241/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate a system in equilibrium due to several forces.
(a) You have been provided with a wooden beam with 11 holes.
Measure and record the distance k along the wooden beam between the centres of
hole 1 and hole 5 as shown in Fig. 1.1.
k wooden beam
string
spring
Fig. 1.1
k = .....................................................
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2 with the nail through hole 6 of the wooden
beam.
boss
rod of clamp
stand
spring
15 cm nail boss
hole 1 hole 6
string wooden beam
stand
mass m
bench
Fig. 1.2
The mass m is 300 g. Position the mass m approximately 15 cm from hole 1.

4
(ii) Adjust the apparatus so that the spring is vertical and the wooden beam is
horizontal.
The distance a is the distance between the nail and the string attached to the
spring.
The distance b is the distance between the nail and the string attached to the mass
bench
Fig. 1.3
(iii) Measure and record a and b.
a = .....................................................
b = .....................................................
[1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

5
(iv) Measure and record the length L of the stretched spring as shown in Fig. 1.4.
spring L
string supporting wooden beam
Fig. 1.4
L = ................................................. [1]
(c) Vary a by moving the nail to a different hole.
Adjust b until the value of L is the same as in (b)(iv).
Ensure that the spring is vertical and the beam is horizontal.
Measure and record a and b.
a = .....................................................
b = .....................................................

6
(d) Repeat (c) until you have six sets of readings of a and b.
1 a
b b
[10]
1 a
b b
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

7

8
(f) The quantities a and b are related by the equation

1 Pa
=– +Q
b b
Use your answers in (e)(iii) to determine the values of P and Q.

P = .....................................................
Q = .....................................................
[1]
(g) The mass M of the wooden beam is given by
m
M= .
kQ
Use values in (a), (b)(i) and (f) to determine the value of M.
Include a unit for M.
M = ................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

9
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the extension of a Plasticine cylinder under an
applied load depends on the diameter of the cylinder.
(a) (i) Use the boards to roll the Plasticine into a cylinder of uniform diameter and
approximate length 20 cm as shown in Fig. 2.1.
20 cm
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Use the micrometer to measure the diameter d of the cylinder as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Record d.
d = ................................................. [3]
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d.

10
(b) (i) Make two shallow marks on the Plasticine cylinder as shown in Fig. 2.2. The
distance x between the marks should be approximately 10 cm.
Fig. 2.2
The marks should not be deep enough to affect the strength of the cylinder.
x = .....................................................
(c) (i) Attach the clip to one end of the cylinder. Hold the other end of the cylinder so that
it hangs vertically as shown in Fig. 2.3.
cylinder
clip
Fig. 2.3
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

11
(ii) Suspend a mass of 400 g from the clip as shown in Fig. 2.4 for a time of 60 s.
If the cylinder breaks within this time, repeat (a), (b) and (c)(i) and suspend a
mass of 300 g for 60 s. If necessary, cross out your answers and write in your new
answers. You will not be penalised for this.
cylinder
clip
handle
400 g mass
Fig. 2.4
(iii) Carefully remove the mass and clip from the cylinder.
(iv) Measure and record the distance x1 between the two marks on the cylinder.
x1 = ................................................. [1]
(v) Calculate the extension e of the cylinder between the marks using
e = x1 – x.
e = ................................................. [1]

12
(d) (i) Use the boards to roll all the Plasticine into a cylinder of uniform diameter and
approximate length 15 cm.
(ii) Using the same mass, repeat (a)(ii), (b) and (c).
d = .....................................................
x = .....................................................
x1 = .....................................................
e = .....................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

13
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between e and d is

k
e=
d4
first value of k = .....................................................
second value of k = .....................................................

[1]
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]


14
experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/35/M/J/14

Cambridge International Advanced Level
* 1 9 0 6 7 1 1 5 3 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
1
part question. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 77049/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A stone of mass m has gravitational potential energy EP at a point X in a gravitational field.
The magnitude of the gravitational potential at X is φ.
State the relation between m, EP and φ.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) An isolated spherical planet of radius R may be assumed to have all its mass concentrated at
its centre. The gravitational potential at the surface of the planet is − 6.30 × 107 J kg−1.
A stone of mass 1.30 kg is travelling towards the planet such that its distance from the centre
of the planet changes from 6R to 5R.
Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the stone.
change in energy = ..................................................... J [4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

5
2 (a) Explain what is meant by the Avogadro constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Argon-40 ( 40
18Ar) may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
A mass of 3.2 g of argon-40 has a volume of 210 cm3 at a temperature of 37 °C.
Determine, for this mass of argon-40 gas,
(i) the amount, in mol,
amount = ................................................. mol [1]
(ii) the pressure,
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]
(iii) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of an argon atom.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

7
3 The volume of 1.00 kg of water in the liquid state at 100 °C is 1.00 × 10−3 m3. The volume of 1.00 kg
of water vapour at 100 °C and atmospheric pressure 1.01 × 105 Pa is 1.69 m3.
(a) Show that the work done against the atmosphere when 1.00 kg of liquid water becomes water
vapour is 1.71 × 105 J.
[2]
(b) (i) The first law of thermodynamics may be given by the expression
ΔU = + q + w
where ΔU is the increase in internal energy of the system.
State what is meant by
1. + q,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. + w.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water at 100 °C is 2.26 × 106 J kg−1.
A mass of 1.00 kg of liquid water becomes water vapour at 100 °C.
Determine, using your answer in (a), the increase in internal energy of this mass of water
during vaporisation.
increase in internal energy = ..................................................... J [2]

8
4 A student investigates the energy changes of a mass oscillating on a vertical spring, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
spring
mass
Fig. 4.1
The student draws a graph of the variation with displacement x of energy E of the oscillation, as
shown in Fig. 4.2.
2.5
2.0
E / mJ
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
– 1.5 – 1.0 – 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5
x / cm
Fig. 4.2
(a) State whether the energy E represents the total energy, the potential energy or the kinetic
energy of the oscillations.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

9
(b) The student repeats the investigation but with a smaller amplitude. The maximum value of E
is now found to be 1.8 mJ.
Use Fig. 4.2 to determine the change in the amplitude. Explain your working.
change in amplitude = .................................................. cm [3]

10
5 An isolated solid metal sphere of radius r is given a positive charge. The distance from the centre
of the sphere is x.
(a) The electric potential at the surface of the sphere is V0.
On the axes of Fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show the variation with distance x of the electric
potential due to the charged sphere, for values of x from x = 0 to x = 4r.
1.00 V0
0.75 V0
potential
0.50 V0
0.25 V0
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
distance x
Fig. 5.1
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

11
(b) The electric field strength at the surface of the sphere is E0.
field strength due to the charged sphere, for values of x from x = 0 to x = 4r.
1.00 E0
0.75 E0
field
strength
0.50 E0
0.25 E0
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
distance x
Fig. 5.2
[3]

12
6 An uncharged capacitor is connected in series with a battery, a switch and a resistor, as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
9.0 V
4700 +F
Fig. 6.1
The battery has e.m.f. 9.0 V and negligible internal resistance. The capacitance of the capacitor is
4700 μF.
The switch is closed at time t = 0.
During the time interval t = 0 to t = 4.0 s, the charge passing through the resistor is 22 mC.
(a) (i) Calculate the energy transfer in the battery during the time interval t = 0 to t = 4.0 s.
energy transfer = ..................................................... J [2]
(ii) Determine, for the capacitor at time t = 4.0 s,
1. the potential difference V across the capacitor,
V = ..................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

13
2. the energy stored in the capacitor.
energy = ..................................................... J [2]
(b) Suggest why your answers in (a)(i) and (a)(ii) part 2 are different.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

14
7 A solenoid is connected in series with a battery and a switch. A Hall probe is placed close to one
end of the solenoid, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
solenoid
Hall probe
Fig. 7.1
The current in the solenoid is switched on. The Hall probe is adjusted in position to give the
maximum reading. The current is then switched off.
(a) The current in the solenoid is now switched on again. Several seconds later, it is switched off.
The Hall probe is not moved.
On the axes of Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the Hall voltage VH.
VH
0
t
current current
switched on switched off
Fig. 7.2
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

15
(b) The Hall probe is now replaced by a small coil. The plane of the coil is parallel to the end of
the solenoid.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 7.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E
induced in the coil when the current in the solenoid is switched on and then switched off.
0
t
current current
Fig. 7.3
[3]

16
8 (a) State what is meant by quantisation of charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the elementary charge.

A charged oil drop is positioned between two horizontal metal plates, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
+ 680 V
oil drop
7.0 mm
Fig. 8.1
The plates are separated by a distance of 7.0 mm. The lower plate is earthed.
The potential of the upper plate is gradually increased until the drop is held stationary. The
potential for the drop to be stationary is 680 V.
The weight of the oil drop, allowing for the upthrust of the air, is 4.8 × 10−14 N.
Calculate the value for the charge on the oil drop.
charge = ..................................................... C [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

17
(c) The student repeats the experiment and determines the following values for the charge on oil
drops.
3.3 × 10−19 C 4.9 × 10−19 C 9.7 × 10−19 C 3.4 × 10−19 C
Use these values to suggest a value for the elementary charge. Explain your working.
elementary charge = ..................................................... C [2]

18
9 For a particular metal surface, it is observed that there is a minimum frequency of light below
which photoelectric emission does not occur. This observation provides evidence for a particulate
nature of electromagnetic radiation.
(a) State three further observations from photoelectric emission that provide evidence for a
particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Some data for the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy EMAX of electrons
emitted from a metal surface are shown in Fig. 9.1.
0.6
0.5
E MAX
/ eV
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
f / 1014 Hz
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain why emitted electrons may have kinetic energy less than the maximum at any
particular frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

19
(ii) Use Fig. 9.1 to determine
1. the threshold frequency,
threshold frequency = ................................................... Hz [1]
2. the work function energy, in eV, of the metal surface.
work function energy = ................................................... eV [3]

20
10 (a) Explain what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Data for the masses of some particles are given in Fig. 10.1.
mass / u
proton 1.00728
neutron 1.00867
tritium ( 31H) nucleus 3.01551
polonium ( 210 84Po) nucleus
209.93722
Fig. 10.1
The energy equivalent of 1.0 u is 930 MeV.
(i) Calculate the binding energy, in MeV, of a tritium ( 31H) nucleus.
binding energy = ................................................ MeV [3]
(ii) The total mass of the separate nucleons that make up a polonium-210 ( 210
84Po) nucleus is
211.70394 u.
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of polonium-210.
binding energy per nucleon = ................................................ MeV [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

21
(c) One possible fission reaction is
235U + 1n 141Ba + 92Kr + 3 10n .

92 0 56 36
By reference to binding energy, explain, without any calculation, why this fission reaction is
energetically possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

22
Section B
11 (a) A circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in Fig. 11.1.
P
–
+
V IN V OUT
Fig. 11.1
(i) State the name of this circuit.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the point P is referred to as a virtual earth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The circuit of Fig. 11.1 is modified, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
RC
C
RB
B
RA
A
1.0 k1
–
+
V IN V
Fig. 11.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14
23
The voltmeter has infinite resistance and its full-scale deflection is 1.0 V.
The input potential to the circuit is VIN.
The switch position may be changed in order to have different values of resistance in the
circuit.
(i) The input potential VIN and the switch position are varied.
For each switch position, the reading of the voltmeter is 1.0 V.
Complete Fig. 11.3 for the switch positions shown.
switch position VIN / mV resistance
A 10 RA = ..............................................
B 100 RB = ..............................................
C ............................... RC = 1.0 kΩ
Fig. 11.3
[3]
(ii) By reference to your answers in (i), suggest a use for the circuit of Fig. 11.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

24
12 (a) Outline briefly the principles of CT scanning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

25
(b) In a model for CT scanning, a section is divided into four voxels. The pixel numbers P, Q, R
and S of the voxels are shown in Fig. 12.1.
D3
D2
D4
P Q
D1
S R
Fig. 12.1
The section is viewed from the four directions D1, D2, D3 and D4.
The detector readings for each direction are noted.
The detector readings are summed as shown in Fig. 12.2.
49 61
73 55
Fig. 12.2
The background reading is 34.
Determine the pixel numbers P, Q, R and S as shown in Fig. 12.3.
P Q
S R
Fig. 12.3
P = ............................................................... Q = ...............................................................
S = ............................................................... R = ...............................................................
[4]

26
13 The signal from a microphone is to be transmitted in digital form. A block diagram of part of the
transmission system is shown in Fig. 13.1.
parallel-to
ADC -serial
converter
Fig. 13.1
(a) Suggest two advantages of the transmission of a signal in digital form rather than in analogue
form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the function of the parallel-to-serial converter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In a particular telephone system, the sampling frequency is 8 kHz. In the manufacture of a
compact disc, the sampling frequency is approximately 44 kHz.
Suggest and explain why the sampling frequency is much higher for the compact disc.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

27
14 (a) State what is meant by the attenuation of a signal.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A transmission cable has a length of 30 km. The attenuation per unit length of the cable is
2.4 dB km−1.
Calculate, for a signal being transmitted along the cable,
(i) the total attenuation, in dB,
attenuation = ................................................... dB [1]
(ii) the ratio
input power of signal

.
output power of signal
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
(c) By reference to your answers in (b), suggest why the attenuation of transmitted signals is
usually expressed in dB.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14

* 6 1 0 6 2 1 0 2 9 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
1
appropriate units.
3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 77047/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A
1 The mass M of a spherical planet may be assumed to be a point mass at the centre of the planet.
(a) A stone, travelling at speed v, is in a circular orbit of radius r about the planet, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
stone
planet
Fig. 1.1
Show that the speed v is given by the expression
v = 冢 GM
r 冣

[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

5
(b) A second stone, initially at rest at infinity, travels towards the planet, as illustrated in Fig. 1.2.
stone
V0
planet
x
The stone does not hit the surface of the planet.
(i) Determine, in terms of the gravitational constant G and the mass M of the planet, the
speed V0 of the stone at a distance x from the centre of the planet. Explain your working.
You may assume that the gravitational attraction on the stone is due only to the planet.
[3]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) and the expression in (a) to explain whether this stone could enter
a circular orbit about the planet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

6
2 A constant mass of an ideal gas has a volume of 3.49 × 103 cm3 at a temperature of 21.0 °C.
When the gas is heated, 565 J of thermal energy causes it to expand to a volume of 3.87 × 103 cm3
at 53.0 °C. This is illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
3.49 × 103 cm3 3.87 × 103 cm3

565 J
21.0 °C 53.0 °C
Fig. 2.1
(a) Show that the initial and final pressures of the gas are equal.
[2]
(b) The pressure of the gas is 4.20 × 105 Pa.
For this heating of the gas,
(i) calculate the work done by the gas,
work done = ..................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

7
(ii) use the first law of thermodynamics and your answer in (i) to determine the change in
internal energy of the gas.
change in internal energy = ..................................................... J [2]
(c) Explain why the change in kinetic energy of the molecules of this ideal gas is equal to the
change in internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]

8
3 A microwave cooker uses electromagnetic waves of frequency 2450 MHz.

The microwaves warm the food in the cooker by causing water molecules in the food to oscillate
with a large amplitude at the frequency of the microwaves.
(a) State the name given to this phenomenon.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The effective microwave power of the cooker is 750 W.

The temperature of a mass of 280 g of water rises from 25 °C to 98 °C in a time of 2.0 minutes.
Calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of the water.
specific heat capacity = ....................................... J kg−1 K−1 [3]
(c) The value of the specific heat capacity determined from the data in (b) is greater than the
accepted value.
A student gives as the reason for this difference: ‘heat lost to the surroundings’.
Suggest, in more detail than that given by the student, a possible reason for the difference.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

9
4 A helium nucleus contains two protons.
In a model of the helium nucleus, each proton is considered to be a charged point mass.
The separation of these point masses is assumed to be 2.0 × 10−15 m.
(a) For the two protons in this model, calculate
(i) the electrostatic force,
electrostatic force = ..................................................... N [2]
(ii) the gravitational force.
gravitational force = ..................................................... N [2]
(b) Using your answers in (a), suggest why
(i) there must be some other force between the protons in the nucleus,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) this additional force must have a short range.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
5 A Hall probe is placed a distance d from a long straight current-carrying wire, as illustrated in
Fig. 5.1.
current-carrying 4.0 A
wire
Hall probe
X Y
Fig. 5.1
The direct current in the wire is 4.0 A. Line XY is normal to the wire.
The Hall probe is rotated about the line XY to the position where the reading VH of the Hall probe
is maximum.
(a) The Hall probe is now moved away from the wire, along the line XY.
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph to show the variation of the Hall voltage VH with
distance x of the probe from the wire. Numerical values are not required on your sketch.
VH
0
0 d x
Fig. 5.2
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

11
(b) The Hall probe is now returned to its original position, a distance d from the wire.
At this point, the magnetic flux density due to the current in the wire is proportional to the
current.
For a direct current of 4.0 A in the wire, the reading of the Hall probe is 3.5 mV.
The direct current is now replaced by an alternating current of root-mean-square (r.m.s.)
value 4.0 A. The period of this alternating current is T.
On the axes of Fig. 5.3, sketch the variation with time t of the reading of the Hall voltage VH for
two cycles of the alternating current. Give numerical values for VH, where appropriate.
6
VH / mV
4
0
0 T 2T t
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 5.3
[3]
(c) A student suggests that the Hall probe in (a) is replaced with a small coil connected in series
with a millivoltmeter. The constant current in the wire is 4.0 A.
In order to obtain data to plot a graph showing the variation with distance x of the magnetic
flux density, the student suggests that readings of the millivoltmeter are taken when the coil is
held in position at different values of x.
Comment on this suggestion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

12
6 (a) Explain the use of a uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field for the selection of the
velocity of a charged particle. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Ions, all of the same isotope, are travelling in a vacuum with a speed of 9.6 × 104 m s−1.
The ions are incident normally on a uniform magnetic field of flux density 640 mT. The ions
follow semicircular paths A and B before reaching a detector, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
detector
A B vacuum
uniform magnetic
field, flux density
640 mT
Fig. 6.1
Data for the diameters of the paths are shown in Fig. 6.2.
path diameter / cm
A 6.2
B 12.4
Fig. 6.2
The ions in path B each have charge +1.6 × 10−19 C.
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

13
(i) Determine the mass, in u, of the ions in path B.
mass = ..................................................... u [4]
(ii) Suggest and explain quantitatively a reason for the difference in radii of the paths A and
B of the ions.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

14
7 (a) Define the radian.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A telescope gives a clear view of a distant object when the angular displacement between the
edges of the object is at least 9.7 × 10−6 rad.
(i) The Moon is approximately 3.8 × 105 km from Earth.

Estimate the minimum diameter of a circular crater on the Moon’s surface that can be
seen using the telescope.
diameter = .................................................. km [2]
(ii) Suggest why craters of the same diameter as that calculated in (i) but on the surface of
Mars are not visible using this telescope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

15
8 Light of wavelength 590 nm is incident normally on a surface, as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.
light surface
wavelength 590 nm
Fig. 8.1
The power of the light is 3.2 mW. The light is completely absorbed by the surface.
(a) Calculate the number of photons incident on the surface in 1.0 s.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Use your answer in (a) to determine
(i) the total momentum of the photons arriving at the surface in 1.0 s,
momentum = ........................................... kg m s−1 [3]
(ii) the force exerted on the surface by the light.
force = ..................................................... N [1]

16
9 Some water becomes contaminated with radioactive iodine-131 ( 131 53I).

The activity of the iodine-131 in 1.0 kg of this water is 460 Bq.
The half-life of iodine-131 is 8.1 days.
(a) Define radioactive half-life.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) Calculate the number of iodine-131 atoms in 1.0 kg of this water.
number = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) An amount of 1.0 mol of water has a mass of 18 g.
Calculate the ratio
number of molecules of water in 1.0 kg of water

.
number of atoms of iodine-131 in 1.0 kg of contaminated water
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

17
(c) An acceptable limit for the activity of iodine-131 in water has been set as 170 Bq kg−1.
Calculate the time, in days, for the activity of the contaminated water to be reduced to this
acceptable level.
time = ................................................ days [3]

18
Section B
10 (a) State the function of a comparator circuit incorporating an operational amplifier (op-amp).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) An ideal op-amp is incorporated into the circuit of Fig. 10.1.
+1.5 V
1.2 k1 +5 V
–
+
G
V IN –5 V
2.4 k1
R
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw a circle around the part of the circuit that is being used as an output
device. [1]
(ii) Show that the potential at the non-inverting input of the op-amp is 1.0 V.
[1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

19
(iii) The variation with time t of the potential VIN at the inverting input of the op-amp is shown
in Fig. 10.2.
6
potential
/V 4
VIN
2
+1.0
0
t1 t2 time t
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 10.2
1. On the axes of Fig. 10.2, draw the variation with time t of the output potential of the
op-amp. [3]
2. State whether each diode is emitting light or is not emitting light at time t1 and at
time t 2.
At time t1, diode R will ................................. and diode G will ................................. .
At time t 2, diode R will ................................. and diode G will ................................. .

[2]

20
11 (a) Distinguish between an X-ray image of a body structure and a CT scan.
X-ray image: ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
CT scan: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Data for the linear absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ of X-ray radiation of energy 80 keV
are given in Fig. 11.1.
metal μ / mm−1
aluminium 0.46
copper 0.69
Fig. 11.1
A parallel X-ray beam is incident on a copper filter, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
copper
filter
incident beam emergent

intensity I0 beam
Fig. 11.2
The intensity of the incident beam is I0.
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

21
(i) Calculate the thickness of copper required to reduce the intensity of the emergent beam
to 0.25 I0.
thickness = ................................................. mm [2]
(ii) An aluminium filter of thickness 2.4 mm is now placed in the X-ray beam, together with
the copper filter in (i).
Calculate the fraction of the incident intensity that emerges after passing through the two
filters.
fraction = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Express your answer in (ii) as a gain in decibels (dB).
gain = ................................................... dB [3]

22
12 Two people, living in different regions of the Earth, communicate either using a link provided by a
geostationary satellite or using optic fibres.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by a geostationary satellite.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The uplink frequency for communication with the satellite is 6 GHz and the downlink has
a frequency of 4 GHz.
Explain why the frequencies are different.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Comment on the time delays experienced by the two people when communicating either
using geostationary satellites or using optic fibres. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

* 1 5 5 1 1 0 1 2 5 0 *
PHYSICS 9702/43
2 hours
1
part question. 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Total
DC (LK/CGW) 90046
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A stone of mass m has gravitational potential energy EP at a point X in a gravitational field.
The magnitude of the gravitational potential at X is φ.
State the relation between m, EP and φ.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) An isolated spherical planet of radius R may be assumed to have all its mass concentrated at
its centre. The gravitational potential at the surface of the planet is − 6.30 × 107 J kg−1.
A stone of mass 1.30 kg is travelling towards the planet such that its distance from the centre
of the planet changes from 6R to 5R.
Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the stone.
change in energy = ..................................................... J [4]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

5
2 (a) Explain what is meant by the Avogadro constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Argon-40 ( 40
18Ar) may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
A mass of 3.2 g of argon-40 has a volume of 210 cm3 at a temperature of 37 °C.
Determine, for this mass of argon-40 gas,
(i) the amount, in mol,
amount = ................................................. mol [1]
(ii) the pressure,
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]
(iii) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of an argon atom.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

7
3 The volume of 1.00 kg of water in the liquid state at 100 °C is 1.00 × 10−3 m3. The volume of 1.00 kg
of water vapour at 100 °C and atmospheric pressure 1.01 × 105 Pa is 1.69 m3.
(a) Show that the work done against the atmosphere when 1.00 kg of liquid water becomes water
vapour is 1.71 × 105 J.
[2]
(b) (i) The first law of thermodynamics may be given by the expression
ΔU = + q + w
where ΔU is the increase in internal energy of the system.
State what is meant by
1. + q,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. + w.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water at 100 °C is 2.26 × 106 J kg−1.
A mass of 1.00 kg of liquid water becomes water vapour at 100 °C.
Determine, using your answer in (a), the increase in internal energy of this mass of water
during vaporisation.
increase in internal energy = ..................................................... J [2]

8
4 A student investigates the energy changes of a mass oscillating on a vertical spring, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
spring
mass
Fig. 4.1
The student draws a graph of the variation with displacement x of energy E of the oscillation, as
shown in Fig. 4.2.
2.5
2.0
E / mJ
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
– 1.5 – 1.0 – 0.5 0 0.5 1.0 1.5
x / cm
Fig. 4.2
(a) State whether the energy E represents the total energy, the potential energy or the kinetic
energy of the oscillations.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

9
(b) The student repeats the investigation but with a smaller amplitude. The maximum value of E
is now found to be 1.8 mJ.
Use Fig. 4.2 to determine the change in the amplitude. Explain your working.
change in amplitude = .................................................. cm [3]

10
5 An isolated solid metal sphere of radius r is given a positive charge. The distance from the centre
of the sphere is x.
(a) The electric potential at the surface of the sphere is V0.
potential due to the charged sphere, for values of x from x = 0 to x = 4r.
1.00 V0
0.75 V0
potential
0.50 V0
0.25 V0
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
distance x
Fig. 5.1
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

11
(b) The electric field strength at the surface of the sphere is E0.
field strength due to the charged sphere, for values of x from x = 0 to x = 4r.
1.00 E0
0.75 E0
field
strength
0.50 E0
0.25 E0
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
distance x
Fig. 5.2
[3]

12
6 An uncharged capacitor is connected in series with a battery, a switch and a resistor, as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
9.0 V
4700 +F
Fig. 6.1
The battery has e.m.f. 9.0 V and negligible internal resistance. The capacitance of the capacitor is
4700 μF.
The switch is closed at time t = 0.
During the time interval t = 0 to t = 4.0 s, the charge passing through the resistor is 22 mC.
(a) (i) Calculate the energy transfer in the battery during the time interval t = 0 to t = 4.0 s.
energy transfer = ..................................................... J [2]
(ii) Determine, for the capacitor at time t = 4.0 s,
1. the potential difference V across the capacitor,
V = ..................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

13
2. the energy stored in the capacitor.
energy = ..................................................... J [2]
(b) Suggest why your answers in (a)(i) and (a)(ii) part 2 are different.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]

14
7 A solenoid is connected in series with a battery and a switch. A Hall probe is placed close to one
end of the solenoid, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
solenoid
Hall probe
Fig. 7.1
The current in the solenoid is switched on. The Hall probe is adjusted in position to give the
maximum reading. The current is then switched off.
(a) The current in the solenoid is now switched on again. Several seconds later, it is switched off.
The Hall probe is not moved.
On the axes of Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the Hall voltage VH.
VH
0
t
current current
Fig. 7.2
[3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

15
(b) The Hall probe is now replaced by a small coil. The plane of the coil is parallel to the end of
the solenoid.
(i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) On the axes of Fig. 7.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the e.m.f. E
induced in the coil when the current in the solenoid is switched on and then switched off.
0
t
current current
Fig. 7.3
[3]

16
8 (a) State what is meant by quantisation of charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the elementary charge.

A charged oil drop is positioned between two horizontal metal plates, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
+ 680 V
oil drop
7.0 mm
Fig. 8.1
The plates are separated by a distance of 7.0 mm. The lower plate is earthed.
The potential of the upper plate is gradually increased until the drop is held stationary. The
potential for the drop to be stationary is 680 V.
The weight of the oil drop, allowing for the upthrust of the air, is 4.8 × 10−14 N.
Calculate the value for the charge on the oil drop.
charge = ..................................................... C [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

17
(c) The student repeats the experiment and determines the following values for the charge on oil
drops.
3.3 × 10−19 C 4.9 × 10−19 C 9.7 × 10−19 C 3.4 × 10−19 C
Use these values to suggest a value for the elementary charge. Explain your working.
elementary charge = ..................................................... C [2]

18
9 For a particular metal surface, it is observed that there is a minimum frequency of light below
which photoelectric emission does not occur. This observation provides evidence for a particulate
nature of electromagnetic radiation.
(a) State three further observations from photoelectric emission that provide evidence for a
particulate nature of electromagnetic radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Some data for the variation with frequency f of the maximum kinetic energy EMAX of electrons
emitted from a metal surface are shown in Fig. 9.1.
0.6
0.5
E MAX
/ eV
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5
f / 1014 Hz
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain why emitted electrons may have kinetic energy less than the maximum at any
particular frequency.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

19
(ii) Use Fig. 9.1 to determine
1. the threshold frequency,
threshold frequency = ................................................... Hz [1]
2. the work function energy, in eV, of the metal surface.
work function energy = ................................................... eV [3]

20
10 (a) Explain what is meant by the binding energy of a nucleus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Data for the masses of some particles are given in Fig. 10.1.
mass / u
proton 1.00728
neutron 1.00867
tritium ( 31H) nucleus 3.01551
polonium ( 210 84Po) nucleus
209.93722
Fig. 10.1
The energy equivalent of 1.0 u is 930 MeV.
(i) Calculate the binding energy, in MeV, of a tritium ( 31H) nucleus.
binding energy = ................................................ MeV [3]
(ii) The total mass of the separate nucleons that make up a polonium-210 ( 210
84Po) nucleus is
211.70394 u.
Calculate the binding energy per nucleon of polonium-210.
binding energy per nucleon = ................................................ MeV [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

21
(c) One possible fission reaction is
235U + 1n 141Ba + 92Kr + 3 10n .

92 0 56 36
By reference to binding energy, explain, without any calculation, why this fission reaction is
energetically possible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

22
Section B
11 (a) A circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown in Fig. 11.1.
P
–
+
V IN V OUT
Fig. 11.1
(i) State the name of this circuit.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain why the point P is referred to as a virtual earth.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The circuit of Fig. 11.1 is modified, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
RC
C
RB
B
RA
A
1.0 k1
–
+
V IN V
Fig. 11.2
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14
23
The voltmeter has infinite resistance and its full-scale deflection is 1.0 V.
The input potential to the circuit is VIN.
The switch position may be changed in order to have different values of resistance in the
circuit.
(i) The input potential VIN and the switch position are varied.
For each switch position, the reading of the voltmeter is 1.0 V.
Complete Fig. 11.3 for the switch positions shown.
switch position VIN / mV resistance
A 10 RA = ..............................................
B 100 RB = ..............................................
C ............................... RC = 1.0 kΩ
Fig. 11.3
[3]
(ii) By reference to your answers in (i), suggest a use for the circuit of Fig. 11.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

24
12 (a) Outline briefly the principles of CT scanning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

25
(b) In a model for CT scanning, a section is divided into four voxels. The pixel numbers P, Q, R
and S of the voxels are shown in Fig. 12.1.
D3
D2
D4
P Q
D1
S R
Fig. 12.1
The section is viewed from the four directions D1, D2, D3 and D4.
The detector readings for each direction are noted.
The detector readings are summed as shown in Fig. 12.2.
49 61
73 55
Fig. 12.2
The background reading is 34.
Determine the pixel numbers P, Q, R and S as shown in Fig. 12.3.
P Q
S R
Fig. 12.3
P = ............................................................... Q = ...............................................................
S = ............................................................... R = ...............................................................
[4]

26
13 The signal from a microphone is to be transmitted in digital form. A block diagram of part of the
transmission system is shown in Fig. 13.1.
parallel-to
ADC -serial
converter
Fig. 13.1
(a) Suggest two advantages of the transmission of a signal in digital form rather than in analogue
form.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the function of the parallel-to-serial converter.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In a particular telephone system, the sampling frequency is 8 kHz. In the manufacture of a
compact disc, the sampling frequency is approximately 44 kHz.
Suggest and explain why the sampling frequency is much higher for the compact disc.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

27
14 (a) State what is meant by the attenuation of a signal.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A transmission cable has a length of 30 km. The attenuation per unit length of the cable is
2.4 dB km−1.
Calculate, for a signal being transmitted along the cable,
(i) the total attenuation, in dB,
attenuation = ................................................... dB [1]
(ii) the ratio
input power of signal

.
output power of signal
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
(c) By reference to your answers in (b), suggest why the attenuation of transmitted signals is
usually expressed in dB.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

28
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14

* 5 8 5 8 6 2 1 2 8 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/SW) 77042/3
2
1 A ball rolls forwards and backwards on a curved track as shown in Fig. 1.1.
flexible track
ball
Fig. 1.1
It is suggested that the period T of the oscillations is related to the radius r of the ball and the
radius of curvature C of the track by the relationship
28p2
T2 = (C – r )
5g
You are provided with a flexible track. Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship
between T and r. Explain how your results could be used to determine a value for C. You
should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your equipment. In your
account you should pay particular attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2014 9702/51/M/J/14

3
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

problem data collection analysis considerations detail
© UCLES 2014 9702/51/M/J/14

5
2 A student is investigating a circuit containing an operational amplifier (op-amp).
The circuit is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1.
P +15 V
–
Q +
E
–15 V V
Fig. 2.1
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the reading V on the voltmeter varies with the
resistance Q of resistor Q.
It is suggested that V and Q are related by the equation

J1 1 N
V = –ER K + O
LP QP
where E is the e.m.f. of the cell, P is the resistance of resistor P and R is the resistance of
resistor R.
V 1
(a) A graph is plotted of on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
E Q
Determine expressions for the gradient and the y-intercept in terms of P and R.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[1]

6
(b) The e.m.f. E of the cell has a value of 1.6 ± 0.1 V.
Values of V and Q are given in Fig. 2.2.
Q / 103 Ω V /V 1 V
/ 10–3 Ω–1
Q E
0.15 –8.2 ± 0.1
0.22 –6.0 ± 0.1
0.33 –4.4 ± 0.1
0.50 –3.3 ± 0.1
0.66 –2.8 ± 0.1
0.90 –2.4 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
1 V
Calculate and record values of / 10–3 Ω–1 and in Fig. 2.2.
Q E
V
Include the absolute uncertainties in . [3]
E
V 1 V
E Q E
gradient = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/51/M/J/14

7
1
/ 10–3 Ω–1
Q
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
–1.0
–1.5
V
E
–2.0
–2.5
–3.0
–3.5
–4.0
–4.5
–5.0
–5.5
–6.0

8
(iv) Determine the y-intercept of the line of best fit. Include the uncertainty in your
answer.
y-intercept = .................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine the values of P and R. Include
appropriate units.
P = ......................................................
R = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in P.
© UCLES 2014 9702/51/M/J/14

* 8 8 8 7 0 2 8 0 5 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 76986/2
2
1 Two identical coils are connected together and arranged as shown in Fig. 1.1.
coil
coil
r
Fig. 1.1
The coils are in the vertical plane and are parallel to each other. When the coils are connected
to a power supply, there is a magnetic field between them.
It is suggested that the magnetic flux density B of the field at the point X is related to the
radius r of the coils by the relationship
0.72μ0NI
B=
r
where N is the number of turns on each coil, I is the current in the coils and μ0 is the
permeability of free space.
Design a laboratory experiment that uses a Hall probe to test the relationship between B
and r and determine a value for μ0. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the

[15]
© UCLES 2014 9702/52/M/J/14

3
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
Defining the Methods of data Method of Safety Additional

problem collection analysis considerations detail
© UCLES 2014 9702/52/M/J/14

5
2 A student investigates the oscillations of a simple pendulum attached to a pole on the side of
a building, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
le
po
building pendulum
bob
d
Fig. 2.1
The student records the distance d from the ground to the centre of the pendulum bob and
the time t for the pendulum to complete 10 oscillations.
It is suggested that the period T of the oscillations and the distance d are related by the
equation
4π2
T2 = (k − d )
g
where g is the acceleration of free fall and k is a constant.
(a) A graph is plotted of T 2 on the y-axis against d on the x-axis. Determine expressions for
the gradient and the y-intercept in terms of g and k.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[1]

6
(b) For each value of d the measurement of t is repeated. Values of d and t are given in
Fig. 2.2.
d/m t /s t /s
0.45 ± 0.05 56.4 56.4
0.70 ± 0.05 55.4 55.6
1.00 ± 0.05 54.6 54.2
1.20 ± 0.05 53.4 53.8
1.45 ± 0.05 52.9 52.5
1.65 ± 0.05 51.6 52.0
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of mean t / s, T / s and T 2 / s2 in Fig. 2.2. [2]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of T 2 / s2 against d / m. Include error bars for d. [2]
gradient = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/52/M/J/14

7
32.0
31.5
T 2 / s2
31.0
30.5
30.0
29.5
29.0
28.5
28.0
27.5
27.0
26.5
0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8
d/m

8
answer.
y-intercept = ................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine values for g and k. Include
appropriate units.
g = ......................................................
k = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainties in g and k.
percentage uncertainty in g = ...................................................%
percentage uncertainty in k = ...................................................%

[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/52/M/J/14

* 9 4 0 4 7 4 2 7 3 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SW) 92399
2
1 A ball rolls forwards and backwards on a curved track as shown in Fig. 1.1.
flexible track
ball
Fig. 1.1
It is suggested that the period T of the oscillations is related to the radius r of the ball and the
radius of curvature C of the track by the relationship
28π2
T2 = (C – r )
5g
You are provided with a flexible track. Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship
between T and r. Explain how your results could be used to determine a value for C. You
should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your equipment. In your
account you should pay particular attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2014 9702/53/M/J/14

3
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2014 9702/53/M/J/14

5
2 A student is investigating a circuit containing an operational amplifier (op-amp).
P +15 V
–
Q +
E
–15 V V
Fig. 2.1
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the reading V on the voltmeter varies with the
resistance Q of resistor Q.
It is suggested that V and Q are related by the equation

J1 1 N
V = –ER K + O
LP QP
where E is the e.m.f. of the cell, P is the resistance of resistor P and R is the resistance of
resistor R.
V 1
(a) A graph is plotted of on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
E Q
Determine expressions for the gradient and the y-intercept in terms of P and R.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[1]

6
(b) The e.m.f. E of the cell has a value of 1.6 ± 0.1 V.
Values of V and Q are given in Fig. 2.2.
Q / 103 Ω V /V 1 V
/ 10–3 Ω–1
Q E
0.15 –8.2 ± 0.1
0.22 –6.0 ± 0.1
0.33 –4.4 ± 0.1
0.50 –3.3 ± 0.1
0.66 –2.8 ± 0.1
0.90 –2.4 ± 0.1
Fig. 2.2
1 V
Calculate and record values of / 10–3 Ω–1 and in Fig. 2.2.
Q E
V
Include the absolute uncertainties in . [3]
E
V 1 V
E Q E
gradient = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/53/M/J/14

7
1
/ 10–3 1–1
Q
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
–1.0
–1.5
V
E
–2.0
–2.5
–3.0
–3.5
–4.0
–4.5
–5.0
–5.5
–6.0

8
answer.
y-intercept = .................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answers to (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine the values of P and R. Include
appropriate units.
P = ......................................................
R = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in P.
© UCLES 2014 9702/53/M/J/14

PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*9704770522*

IB15 06_9702_11/4RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which is an SI base unit?
A current
B gram
C kelvin
D volt
2 Which pair contains one vector and one scalar quantity?
A displacement acceleration
B force kinetic energy
C momentum velocity
D power speed
3 When a constant braking force is applied to a vehicle moving at speed v, the distance d moved
by the vehicle in coming to rest is given by the expression
d = kv 2
When d is measured in metres and v is measured in metres per second, the constant has a value
of k1.
What is the value of the constant when the distance is measured in metres, and the speed is
measured in kilometres per hour?
A 0.0772 k1 B 0.278 k1 C 3.60 k1 D 13.0 k1
4 A whale produces sound waves of frequency 5 Hz. The waves are detected by a microphone and
displayed on an oscilloscope.
What is the time-base setting on the oscilloscope?
A 0.1 ms div–1 B 1 ms div–1 C 10 ms div–1 D 100 ms div–1
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

5
5 The angular deflection of the needle of an ammeter varies with the current in the ammeter as
shown in the graph.
angular
deflection
0
0
current
Which diagram could represent the appearance of the scale on this meter?
A B
2 3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7
1 7 8 2 3 8
0 9 01 9
C D
3 456 7 4 5 6
1 2 8 2 3 7 8
0 9 01 9
6 The strain energy W of a spring is determined from its spring constant k and extension x. The
spring obeys Hooke’s law and the value of W is calculated using the equation shown.
1
W= 2
kx 2
The spring constant is 100 ± 2 N m–1 and the extension is 0.050 ± 0.002 m.
What is the percentage uncertainty in the calculated value of W ?
A 6% B 10% C 16% D 32%

6
7 A sphere is released and falls. Its initial acceleration reduces until it eventually begins to travel at
constant terminal velocity. Which displacement-time graph best represents the motion of the
sphere?
A B
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
0 0
0 time 0 time
8 An insect jumps with an initial vertical velocity of 1.0 m s–1, reaching a maximum height of
3.5 × 10–2 m. Assume the deceleration is uniform.
What is the magnitude of the deceleration?
A 3.6 m s–2 B 9.8 m s–2 C 14 m s–2 D 29 m s–2
9 A body having uniform acceleration a increases its velocity from u to v in time t.
Which expression would not give a correct value for the body’s displacement during time t ?
1
A ut + 2
at 2
1
B vt – 2
at 2
(v + u )(v − u )
C
2a
(v − u )t
D
2
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

7
10 What is a reasonable estimate of the average gravitational force acting on a fully grown woman
standing on the Earth?
A 60 N B 250 N C 350 N D 650 N
11 A molecule of mass m travelling at speed v hits a wall in a direction perpendicular to the wall. The
collision is elastic.
What are the changes in the momentum and in the kinetic energy of the molecule caused by the
collision?
change in change in
A 0 0
B 0 mv 2
C 2mv 0
D mv 2 0
12 A child on a sledge slides down a hill with acceleration a. The hill makes an angle θ with the
horizontal.
The total mass of the child and the sledge is m. The acceleration of free fall is g.
What is the friction force F ?
A m(g cosθ – a)
B m(g cosθ + a)
C m(g sinθ – a)
D m(g sinθ + a)

8
13 A box of mass 8.0 kg rests on a horizontal rough surface. A string attached to the box passes
over a smooth pulley and supports a 2.0 kg mass at its other end.
box
smooth
8.0 kg pulley
rough surface
2.0 kg
When the box is released, a frictional force of 6.0 N acts on it.
What is the acceleration of the box?
A 1.4 m s–2 B 1.7 m s–2 C 2.0 m s–2 D 2.6 m s–2
14 What is the definition of the force on a body?
A the mass of the body multiplied by its acceleration

B the power input to the body divided by its velocity
C the rate of change of momentum of the body
D the work done on the body divided by its displacement
15 A uniform metre rule is pivoted at the 34.0 cm mark, as shown.
metre rule
4.0 cm
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
34.0 cm
64 g
The rule balances when a 64 g mass is hung from the 4.0 cm mark.
What is the mass of the metre rule?
A 38 g B 44 g C 120 g D 136 g
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

9
16 A team of nine dogs can pull a sledge with a combined force of 800 N at a speed of 1.5 m s–1 for
360 minutes.
What is the average work done by each dog during this time?
A 4.8 × 104 J B 4.3 × 105 J C 2.9 × 106 J D 2.6 × 107 J
17 Which statement is correct?
A A ball lands on the ground and bounces. The kinetic energy changes sign, because the ball
changes direction.
B A car drives up a slope at a steady speed. The power generated by the engine equals the
potential energy gained per unit time.
C An electric heater can be 100% efficient.
D It is impossible for momentum to be conserved in a collision.
18 The diagram shows a pump called a hydraulic ram.
small high tank

to be filled
large reservoir (lake) lift
height
long inclined
approach pipe
pump
In one such pump the long approach pipe holds 500 kg of water. A valve shuts when the speed of
this water reaches 2.0 m s–1 and the kinetic energy of this water is used to lift a small quantity of
water by a height of 15 m.
The efficiency of the pump is 10%.
Which mass of water could be lifted 15 m?
A 0.15 kg B 0.68 kg C 1.5 kg D 6.8 kg
19 A conveyor belt is driven at velocity v by a motor. Sand drops vertically on to the belt at a rate of
m kg s–1.
What is the additional power needed to keep the conveyor belt moving at a steady speed when
the sand starts to fall on it?
1 1
A 2
mv B mv C 2
mv 2 D mv 2

10
20 Descriptions of three different types of material are listed.
1 a polycrystalline material made up of large numbers of small crystals

2 an amorphous material with little or no ordered arrangement of molecules
3 a polymeric material consisting of long chains of molecules
Which row correctly matches the descriptions to nylon, copper and glass?
1 2 3
A copper glass nylon

B copper nylon glass
C glass nylon copper
D nylon copper glass
21 The diagram shows the arrangement of atoms in a particular crystal.
Each atom is at the corner of a cube.
The mass of each atom is 3.5 × 10–25 kg. The density of the crystal is 9.2 × 103 kg m–3.
What is the shortest distance between the centres of two adjacent atoms?
A 3.8 × 10–29 m
B 6.2 × 10–15 m
C 3.4 × 10–10 m
D 3.0 × 10–9 m
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

11
22 The graph shown was plotted in an experiment on a metal wire.
0
0 X
The shaded area represents the total strain energy stored in stretching the wire.
How should the axes be labelled?
Y X
A force extension
B mass extension
C strain energy
D stress strain
23 The variation with applied force of the extension of a spring is shown in the graph.
8.0
force / N
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
extension / cm
When there is no force applied to the spring, it has a length of 1.0 cm.
What is the increase in the strain energy stored in the spring when its length is increased from
2.0 cm to 3.0 cm?
A 0.020 J B 0.030 J C 0.040 J D 0.050 J

12
24 A sound wave moves with a speed of 320 m s–1 through air. The variation with time of the
displacement of an air particle due to this wave is shown in the graph.
displacement 0.2
/ mm
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 time / ms
–0.2
Which statement about the sound wave is correct?
A The frequency of the wave is 500 Hz.

B The graph shows that sound is a transverse wave.
C The intensity of the wave will be doubled if its amplitude is increased to 0.4 mm.
D The wavelength of the sound wave is 1.28 m.
25 A wave of frequency 15 Hz travels at 24 m s–1 through a medium.
What is the phase difference between two points 2 m apart?
A There is no phase difference.

B They are out of phase by a quarter of a cycle.
C They are out of phase by half a cycle.
D They are out of phase by 0.8 of a cycle.
26 A wave of amplitude a has an intensity of 3.0 Wm –2.
What is the intensity of a wave of the same frequency that has an amplitude 2a?
A 4.2 Wm –2 B 6.0 Wm –2 C 9.0 Wm –2 D 12 Wm –2
27 An electromagnetic wave has a wavelength that is numerically of the same order of magnitude as
the diameter of a nucleus.
In which region of the electromagnetic spectrum does the wave occur?
A gamma ray
B X-ray
C visible light
D infra-red
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

13
28 The diagram shows a stationary wave on a string at two instants of maximum vertical
displacement.
90 cm
The frequency of the wave is 12 Hz.
What is the speed of the wave?
A 3.6 m s–1 B 7.2 m s–1 C 360 m s–1 D 720 m s–1
29 A loudspeaker emitting sound of frequency f is placed at the open end of a pipe of length l which
is closed at the other end. A standing wave is set up in the pipe.
l
loudspeaker
A series of pipes are then set up with either one or two loudspeakers of frequency f. The pairs of
loudspeakers vibrate in phase with each other.
Which pipe contains a standing wave?
2l
2l

14
30 In a double-slit experiment the distance between the fringes, on a screen, was too small to
measure.
What would increase the distance between the fringes?
A increasing the distance between the light source and the slits
B increasing the distance between the slits and the screen
C increasing the distance between the slits
D increasing the frequency of the light source
31 Two parallel metal plates, a distance of 2 mm apart, have a potential difference of 1000 V across
them.
What is the electric field strength between the plates?
A 500 V m–1 B 50 000 V m–1 C 50 000 N C–1 D 500 000 N C–1
32 An oil droplet has charge –q and is situated between two horizontal metal plates as shown in the
diagram.
+V
d –q
–V
The separation of the plates is d. The droplet is observed to be stationary when the upper plate is
at potential +V and the lower plate is at potential –V.
For this to occur, what is the weight of the droplet?
Vq 2Vq Vd 2Vd
A B C D
d d q q
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

15
33 The diagrams show two different circuits.
R R R
The cells in each circuit have the same electromotive force and zero internal resistance. The
three resistors each have the same resistance R.
In the circuit on the left, the power dissipated in the resistor is P.
What is the total power dissipated in the circuit on the right?
P P
A B C P D 2P
4 2
34 Which equation that links some of the following terms is correct?
potential difference (p.d.) V
current I
resistance R
charge Q
energy E
power P
time t
Q 2R
A P=
t
B ER 2 = V 2t
VI
C =t
P
D PQ = EI
35 The charge that an electric battery can deliver is specified in ampere-hours.
For example, a battery of capacity 40 ampere-hours could supply, when fully charged, 0.2 A for
200 hours.
What is the maximum energy that a fully charged 12 V, 40 ampere-hour battery could supply?
A 1.7 kJ B 29 kJ C 1.7 MJ D 29 MJ

16
36 A battery with e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected in series with a variable external
resistor.
E
r
The value of the external resistance R is slowly increased from zero.
Which statement is correct? (Ignore any temperature effects.)
A The potential difference across the external resistance decreases.

B The potential difference across the internal resistance increases.
C The power dissipated in r increases and then decreases.
D The power dissipated in R increases and then decreases.
37 A battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0 V and negligible internal resistance is connected in
series with a resistor of resistance 6.0 Ω and a variable resistor of resistance from zero to 4.0 Ω. A
voltmeter is connected across the variable resistor. The resistance of the variable resistor is
changed.
6.0 V
6.0 Ω 0 – 4.0 Ω
What is the range of the voltmeter reading?
A 0 V – 2.4 V
B 0 V – 3.6 V
C 2.4 V – 6.0 V
D 3.6 V – 6.0 V
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

17
38 A wire RST is connected to another wire XY as shown.
X R T Y
50 cm
Each wire is 100 cm long with a resistance per unit length of 10 Ω m–1.
What is the total resistance between X and Y?
A 3.3 Ω B 5.0 Ω C 8.3 Ω D 13.3 Ω
39 When α-particles are directed at gold leaf
1 almost all α-particles pass through without deflection,
2 a few α-particles are deviated through large angles.
What are the reasons for these effects?
1 2
A most α-particles have enough energy gold is very dense so a few low energy
to pass right through the gold leaf α-particles bounce back from the gold surface
B most α-particles miss all gold atoms a few α-particles bounce off gold atoms
C the gold nucleus is very small so occasionally the path of an α-particle is
most α-particles miss all nuclei close to a nucleus
D the positive charge in an atom is not occasionally an α-particle experiences many
concentrated enough to deflect an α-particle small deflections in the same direction
222 206
40 The nuclide 86 Rn decays in a sequence of stages to form the nuclide 82 Pb .
Four of the nuclides formed in the sequence are α-particle emitters. The others are β-particle
emitters.
How many nuclides formed in the decay sequence are β-particle emitters?
A 2 B 4 C 8 D 12
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

20
BLANK PAGE
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
© UCLES 2015 9702/11/M/J/15

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*0592782383*

IB15 06_9702_12/3RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4

2 The average kinetic energy E of a gas molecule is given by the equation
3
E= 2
kT
where T is the absolute (kelvin) temperature.
What are the SI base units of k ?
A kg–1 m–1 s2 K
B kg–1 m–2 s2 K
C kg m s–2 K–1
D kg m2 s–2 K–1
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

5
3 An analogue ammeter has a pointer which moves over a scale. Following prolonged use, the
pointer does not return fully to zero when the current is turned off and the meter has become less
sensitive at higher currents than it is at lower currents.
Which diagram best represents the calibration graph needed to obtain an accurate current
reading?
A B
scale scale
reading reading
0 0
0 true current 0 true current
C D
scale scale
reading reading
0 0
0 true current 0 true current

6
4 The arrow represents the vector R.
Which diagram does not represent R as two perpendicular components?
A B
C D
5 A power supply of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 50 V and negligible internal resistance is connected
in series with resistors of resistance 100 Ω and 5 Ω, as shown.
100 Ω 5Ω
V
50 V
A voltmeter measures the potential difference (p.d.) across the 5 Ω resistor and an ammeter
measures the current in the circuit.
What are suitable ranges for the ammeter and for the voltmeter?
ammeter voltmeter
range / A range / V
A 0 – 0.1 0–1
B 0 – 0.1 0–3
C 0 – 1.0 0–1
D 0 – 1.0 0–3
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

7
6 A single sheet of aluminium foil is folded twice to produce a stack of four sheets. The total
thickness of the stack of sheets is measured to be (0.80 ± 0.02) mm. This measurement is made
using a digital caliper with a zero error of (−0.20 ± 0.02) mm.
What is the percentage uncertainty in the calculated thickness of a single sheet?
A 1.0% B 2.0% C 4.0% D 6.7%
7 In an experiment to determine the acceleration of free fall g, a ball bearing is held by an

electromagnet. When the current to the electromagnet is switched off, a clock starts and the ball
bearing falls. After falling a distance h, the ball bearing strikes a switch to stop the clock which
measures the time t of the fall.
If systematic errors cause t and h to be measured incorrectly, which error must cause g to
appear greater than 9.81 m s–2?
A h measured as being smaller than it actually is and t is measured correctly

B h measured as being smaller than it actually is and t measured as being larger than it
actually is
C h measured as being larger than it actually is and t measured as being larger than it actually
is
D h is measured correctly and t measured as being smaller than it actually is
8 A stone is thrown horizontally from the top of a cliff. Air resistance is negligible.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the vertical component of the stone’s velocity?
A B
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time

8
9 A sprinter runs a 100 m race in a straight line. He accelerates from the starting block at a constant
acceleration of 2.5 m s–2 to reach his maximum speed of 10 m s–1. He maintains this speed until he
crosses the finish line.
Which time does it take the sprinter to run the race?
A 4s B 10 s C 12 s D 20 s
10 A firework rocket is fired vertically upwards. The fuel burns and produces a constant upwards
force on the rocket. After 5 seconds there is no fuel left. Air resistance is negligible.
What is the acceleration before and after 5 seconds?
before 5 seconds after 5 seconds
A constant constant
B constant zero
C increasing constant
D increasing zero
11 Trolley X, moving along a horizontal frictionless track, collides with a stationary trolley Y. The two
trolleys become attached and move off together.
Which statement about this interaction is correct?
A Some of the kinetic energy of trolley X is changed to momentum in the collision.

B Some of the momentum of trolley X is changed to kinetic energy in the collision.
C Trolley X loses some of its momentum as heat in the collision.
D Trolley X shares its momentum with trolley Y but some of its kinetic energy is lost.
12 An astronaut throws a stone with a horizontal velocity near to the Moon’s surface.
Which row describes the horizontal and vertical forces acting on the stone after release?
horizontal force vertical force
A constant constant
B constant decreasing
C zero constant
D zero decreasing
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

9
13 Newton’s third law of motion is often summarised as ‘Every action (force) has an equal and
opposite reaction.’
A book rests on a table.
If the weight of the book is the ‘action’ force, what is the ‘reaction’ force?
A the pull of the book on the Earth

B the pull of the Earth on the book
C the push of the book on the table
D the push of the table on the book
14 A ladder is positioned on icy (frictionless) ground and is leant against a rough wall. At the instant
of release it begins to slide.
Which diagram correctly shows the directions of the forces P, W and R acting on the ladder as it
slides?
A B
P
P
ladder ladder
wall wall
R R
W W
ground ground
C D
P
P
ladder ladder
wall wall
R R
W W
ground ground

10
15 A uniform solid block has weight 500 N, width 0.4 m and height 0.6 m. The block rests on the edge
of a step of depth 0.8 m, as shown.
0.4 m
0.6 m
0.8 m
0.4 m
The block is knocked over the edge of the step and rotates through 90° before coming to rest with
the 0.6 m edge horizontal.
What is the change in gravitational potential energy of the block?
A 300 J B 400 J C 450 J D 550 J
16 The diagram shows a hydroelectric power station.
The reservoir is linked to the turbines by a pipe of uniform cross-sectional area.
reservoir
turbine house
Y
Water flows from X to Y at constant speed. Which statement about the change of energy of the
water as it moves from X to Y is correct?
A It gains both gravitational potential energy and kinetic energy.

B It loses both elastic potential energy and kinetic energy.
C It loses both elastic potential energy and gravitational potential energy.
D It loses gravitational potential energy and gains elastic potential energy.
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

11
17 A fisherman lifts a fish of mass 250 g from rest through a vertical height of 1.8 m. The fish gains a
speed of 1.1 m s–1.
What is the energy gained by the fish?
A 0.15 J B 4.3 J C 4.4 J D 4.6 J
18 Water from a reservoir is fed to the turbine of a hydroelectric system at a rate of 500 kg s–1. The
reservoir is 300 m above the level of the turbine.
The electrical output from the generator driven by the turbine is 200 A at a potential difference of
6000 V.
What is the efficiency of the system?
A 8.0% B 8.2% C 80% D 82%
19 Which row correctly describes the ordering and motion of the molecules in liquid water and in ice
when both are at a temperature of 0 °C?
ordering motion
A a regular pattern molecules in both ice
of molecules in ice and water have the
but not in water same average speed
B a regular pattern molecules in ice
of molecules in ice travel more slowly
but not in water than those in water
C a regular pattern molecules in ice
of molecules in both travel more slowly
ice and water than those in water
D a regular pattern molecules in both ice
of molecules in both and water have the
ice and water same average speed
20 The maximum pressure that granite rock can withstand is 2.0 × 108 N m–2. Above this pressure,
the rock begins to flow like a liquid. The density of granite is 2.7 × 103 kg m–3.
What would be the height of a pure granite mountain whose base is just beginning to flow?
A 3.8 × 103 m B 7.6 × 103 m C 3.7 × 104 m D 7.4 × 104 m

12
21 To determine the Young modulus of a wire, several measurements are taken.
In which row can the measurement not be taken directly with the stated apparatus?
measurement apparatus
A area of cross-section of wire micrometer screw gauge

B extension of wire vernier scale
C mass of load applied to wire electronic balance
D original length of wire metre rule
force T
S
0
0 extension

B just beyond point S
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

13
23 The diagram represents a steel tube with wall thickness w which is small in comparison with the
diameter of the tube.
The tube is under tension, caused by a force T, parallel to the axis of the tube. To reduce the
stress in the material of the tube, it is proposed to thicken the wall.
The tube diameter and the tension being constant, which wall thickness gives half the stress?
w
A B 2w C 2w D 4w
2
24 Two light waves of the same frequency are represented by the diagram.
displacement
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 phase angle / °
What could be the phase difference between the two waves?
A 150° B 220° C 260° D 330°
25 A sound wave has a speed of 330 m s–1 and a frequency of 50 Hz.
What is a possible distance between two points on the wave that have a phase difference of 60°?
A 0.03 m B 1.1 m C 2.2 m D 6.6 m

14
26 What is not an essential condition for an observable interference pattern to occur between the
waves from two sources?
A The frequencies of the two sources must be equal.

B The sources must be coherent.
C The sources must emit waves of equal amplitude.
D The waves from the two sources must overlap.
27 Source S emits microwaves with a constant amplitude. The microwaves hit a metal screen P and
are reflected. A stationary wave is formed between S and P. The wavelength of the microwaves
is much smaller than the distance between S and P.
S P
A detector Q is moved at a slow, constant speed from S to P.
What happens to the amplitude of the signal detected by Q?
A decreases steadily
B increases and decreases regularly
C increases steadily
D remains constant
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

15
28 A pattern of waves was observed without being able to view the source of the waves. The pattern
is represented in the diagram.
region of minimum intensity
region of maximum intensity
What can cause this pattern?
A coherence only
B diffraction and interference
C diffraction only
D interference only

16
29 A positive charge and a negative charge of equal magnitude are placed a short distance apart.
Which diagram best represents the associated electric field?
A B
+ – + –
C D
+ – + –
30 A charged oil drop of mass m, with n excess electrons, is held stationary in the uniform electric
field between two horizontal plates separated by a distance d.
V m d
The voltage between the plates is V, the elementary charge is e and the acceleration of free fall
is g.

eV mgd meV gd
A B C D
mgd eV gd meV
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

17
31 Which unit is not used in either the definition of the coulomb or the definition of the volt?
A ampere
B joule
C ohm
D second
32 When a thin metal wire is stretched, it becomes longer and thinner. This causes a change in the
resistance of the wire. The volume of the wire remains constant.
Which graph could represent the variation with extension x of the resistance R of the wire?
A B C D
R R R R
0 0 0 0
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
33 Which statement is not valid?
A Current is the speed of the charged particles that carry it.

B Electromotive force (e.m.f.) is the energy converted to electrical energy from other forms per
unit charge.
C The potential difference (p.d.) between two points is the work done per unit charge when
moving charge from one point to the other.
D The resistance between two points is the p.d. between the two points per unit current.
34 A cell of e.m.f. E delivers a charge Q to an external circuit.
A The energy dissipation in the external circuit is EQ.

B The energy dissipation within the cell is EQ.
C The external resistance is EQ.
D The total energy dissipation in the cell and the external circuit is EQ.

18
35 Each of Kirchhoff's two laws presumes that some quantity is conserved.
Which row states Kirchhoff's first law and names the quantity that is conserved?
statement quantity
the algebraic sum of
A currents into a junction is charge
zero
the algebraic sum of

B currents into a junction is energy
zero
the e.m.f. in a loop is

equal to the algebraic sum
C of the product of current charge
and resistance round the
loop
the e.m.f. in a loop is
equal to the algebraic sum
D of the product of current energy
and resistance round the
loop
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

19
36 A potential divider circuit consists of fixed resistors of resistance 2.0 Ω and 4.0 Ω connected in
series with a 3.0 Ω resistor fitted with a sliding contact. These are connected across a battery of
e.m.f. 9.0 V and zero internal resistance, as shown.
4.0 Ω
9.0 V 3.0 Ω
output
2.0 Ω voltage
What are the maximum and the minimum output voltages of this potential divider circuit?
maximum minimum
voltage / V voltage / V
A 4.0 2.0
B 5.0 2.0
C 9.0 0
D 9.0 2.0
37 A cell of e.m.f. 2.0 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to a network of resistors as
shown.
2.0 V
2.0 Ω
4.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
I 4.0 Ω
What is the current I ?
A 0.25 A B 0.33 A C 0.50 A D 1.5 A

20

39 A radioactive substance contains a number of identical nuclei that emit β-particles.
Which property of these nuclei remains unaltered by the emission?
A charge
B neutron number
C nucleon number
D proton number
238 234
40 A uranium-238 nucleus, 92 U , undergoes nuclear decays to form uranium-234, 92 U .
Which series of decays could give this result?
A emission of four β-particles
B emission of four γ-rays
C emission of one α-particle and two β-particles
D emission of two α-particles and eight β-particles
© UCLES 2015 9702/12/M/J/15

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour
Soft clean eraser
*6025519110*

IB15 06_9702_13/3RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V
v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
4 πε 0r
1
QV

t1
2

4
1 Which statement includes a correct unit?
A energy = 7.8 N s
B force = 3.8 N s
C momentum = 6.2 N s
D torque = 4.7 N s
2 What is the joule (J) in SI base units?
A kg m s–1 B kg m2 s–1 C kg m s–2 D kg m2 s–2
3 The speed of an aeroplane in still air is 200 km h–1. The wind blows from the west at a speed of
85.0 km h–1.
In which direction must the pilot steer the aeroplane in order to fly due north?
A 23.0° east of north
B 23.0° west of north
C 25.2° east of north
D 25.2° west of north
4 A student is given a reel of wire of diameter less than 0.2 mm and is asked to find the density of
the metal.
Which pair of instruments would be most suitable for finding the volume of the wire?
A balance and micrometer

B metre rule and micrometer
C metre rule and vernier calipers
D micrometer and vernier calipers
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

5
5 Four different students use a ruler to measure the length of a 15.0 cm pencil. Their
measurements are recorded on four different charts.
Which chart shows measurements that are precise but not accurate?
A B C D
15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4
15.2 15.2 15.2 15.2
15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
length / cm
length / cm
length / cm
length / cm
14.8 14.8 14.8 14.8
14.6 14.6 14.6 14.6
14.4 14.4 14.4 14.4
14.2 14.2 14.2 14.2
14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0
13.8 13.8 13.8 13.8
6 In a simple electrical circuit, the current in a resistor is measured as (2.50 ± 0.05) mA. The
resistor is marked as having a value of 4.7 Ω ± 2 %.
If these values were used to calculate the power dissipated in the resistor, what would be the
percentage uncertainty in the value obtained?
A 2% B 4% C 6% D 8%
7 A raindrop falls vertically from rest in air. The variation with time of the speed of the raindrop is
shown in the graph.
speed
Y Z
X
0
0 time
Which statement about the raindrop is correct?
A At point X, the raindrop has an acceleration of 9.81 m s–2.

B At point Z, the force on the raindrop due to air resistance has reached its maximum value
and so the acceleration of the raindrop has also reached its maximum value.
C At point Z, the force due to air resistance is equal and opposite to the weight of the raindrop
and so the speed of the raindrop is zero.
D The resultant force on the raindrop at point Y is less than the resultant force on the raindrop
at point X.

6
8 The velocity of an electric car changes as shown.
150
velocity
/ km h–1
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car?
A 210 m s–2 B 58 m s–2 C 26 m s–2 D 7.3 m s–2
9 A body falling in a uniform gravitational field encounters air resistance. The air resistance
increases until terminal velocity is reached.
Which factor does not affect its terminal velocity?
A the density of the air

B the height from which the body falls
C the mass of the body
D the shape of the body
10 Which of the following is a statement of the principle of conservation of momentum?
A Momentum is the product of mass and velocity.

B In an elastic collision, momentum is constant.
C The momentum of an isolated system is constant.
D The force acting on a body is proportional to its rate of change of momentum.
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

7
11 A moving object strikes a stationary object. The collision is inelastic. The objects move off
together.
Which row shows the possible values of total momentum and total kinetic energy for the system
before and after the collision?
total momentum total momentum total kinetic total kinetic

before collision after collision energy before energy after
/ kg m s–1 / kg m s–1 collision / J collision / J
A 6 2 90 30
B 6 6 30 90
C 6 6 90 30
D 6 6 90 90
12 Two balls X and Y are moving towards each other with speeds of 5 m s–1 and 15 m s–1
respectively.
5 m s–1 15 m s–1
X Y
They make a perfectly elastic head-on collision and ball Y moves to the right with a speed
of 7 m s–1.
What is the speed and direction of ball X after the collision?
A 3 m s–1 to the left

B 13 m s–1 to the left
C 3 m s–1 to the right
D 13 m s–1 to the right

8
13 A wooden block is freely supported on brackets at a height of 4.0 m above the ground, as shown.
wooden block
of mass 95 g
impact bracket
velocity
4.0 m 200 m s–1
bullet
of mass 5.0 g
A bullet of mass 5.0 g is shot vertically upwards into the wooden block of mass 95 g. It embeds
itself in the block. The impact causes the block to rise above its supporting brackets.
The bullet hits the block with a velocity of 200 m s–1. How far above the ground will the block be at
the maximum height of its path?
A 5.1 m B 5.6 m C 9.1 m D 9.6 m
14 Four cuboids with identical length, breadth and height are immersed in water. The cuboids are
held at the same depth and in identical orientations by vertical rods, as shown.
W X Y Z
4ρ 2ρ ρ 0.5ρ
Water has density ρ.

Cuboid W is made of material of density 4ρ.
Cuboid X is made of material of density 2ρ.
Cuboid Y is made of material of density ρ.
Cuboid Z is made of material of density 0.5ρ.
A The upthrust of the water on each of the cuboids is the same.

B The upthrust of the water on W is twice the upthrust of the water on X.
C The upthrust of the water on X is twice the upthrust of the water on W.
D The upthrust of the water on Y is zero.
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

9
15 An air bubble in a tank of water is rising with constant velocity. The forces acting on the bubble
are X, Y and Z as shown.
velocity
air bubble
What describes the three forces?
A Z is the viscous drag on the bubble, Y is the weight of the bubble, X is the upthrust on the
bubble and X = Y + Z.
B Z is the viscous drag on the bubble, Y is the weight of the bubble, X is the upthrust on the
bubble and X > Y + Z.
C Z is the weight of the bubble, Y is the viscous drag on the bubble, X is the upthrust on the
bubble and X = Y + Z.
D Z is the weight of the bubble, Y is the viscous drag on the bubble, X is the upthrust on the
bubble and X > Y + Z.
16 The diagrams represent systems of coplanar forces acting at a point. The lengths of the force
vectors represent the magnitudes of the forces.
Which system of forces is in equilibrium?
A B C D

10
17 The gas in an engine does work on a piston of cross-sectional area 80 cm2. The pressure on the
piston has a constant value of 4.6 × 105 Pa.
25 cm
force of gas
pushing piston
final position initial position

of piston of piston
How much work is done by the gas on the piston when it moves through a distance of 25 cm?
A 9.2 × 102 J B 9.2 × 104 J C 9.2 × 106 J D 9.2 × 108 J
18 A loaded aeroplane has a total mass of 1.2 × 105 kg while climbing after take-off. It climbs at an
angle of 23° to the horizontal with a speed of 50 m s–1. What is the rate at which it is gaining
potential energy at this time?
A 2.3 × 106 J s–1
B 2.5 × 106 J s–1
C 2.3 × 107 J s–1
D 2.5 × 107 J s–1
19 When a horizontal force F is applied to a frictionless trolley over a distance s, the kinetic energy
of the trolley changes from 4.0 J to 8.0 J.
If a force of 2F is applied to the trolley over a distance of 2s, what will the original kinetic energy
of 4.0 J become?
A 16 J B 20 J C 32 J D 64 J
distance between
density
molecules
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

11
21 A W-shaped tube contains two amounts of mercury, each open to the atmosphere. Air at
pressure P is trapped in between them. The diagram shows two vertical distances x and y.
atmospheric atmospheric
pressure pressure
air at NOT TO
pressure P SCALE
x
y
50 mm
mercury
Atmospheric pressure is equal to the pressure that would be exerted by a column of mercury of
height 760 mm. The pressure P is expressed in this way.
Which values of x, y and P are possible?
P / mm of
x / mm y / mm
mercury
A 20 20 780
B 20 30 780
C 30 20 810
D 30 30 790
22 A steel bar of circular cross-section is under tension T, as shown.
The diameter of the wide portion is double the diameter of the narrow portion.
T T
What is the value of stress in the wide portion ?

stress in the narrow portion
A 0.25 B 0.50 C 2.0 D 4.0

12
23 The graph shows the non-linear force-extension curve for a wire made from a new composite
material.
F/N
100 P
0
0 1.0 2.0
x / mm
What could be the value of the strain energy stored in the wire when it is stretched elastically to
point P?
A 0.09 J B 0.10 J C 0.11 J D 0.20 J
24 The diagram shows the stress-strain graph for bone.
stress 2
/ 106 N m–2
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5
strain / %
What is the Young modulus of bone?
A 1 × 106 N m–2
B 2 × 106 N m–2
C 1 × 108 N m–2
D 2 × 108 N m–2
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

13
25 A cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) is used to display the trace from a sound wave. The time-base
is set at 5 µs mm–1.
1 cm
1 cm
A 6.7 Hz B 67 Hz C 6.7 kHz D 67 kHz
26 A wave pulse moves along a stretched rope in the direction shown.
Which diagram correctly shows the variation with time t of the displacement s of the particle P in
the rope?
A B
s s
t t
C D
s s
t t

14
27 The table contains statements about stationary and progressive waves.
stationary wave progressive wave

A all particles vibrate all particles vibrate
with the same amplitude with the same amplitude
B energy is transferred energy is transferred
along the wave along the wave
C particles in adjacent particles vibrate in phase
loops vibrate in antiphase with their immediate neighbours
D particles one wavelength particles one wavelength
apart vibrate in phase apart vibrate in phase
28 Which electromagnetic wave would cause the most significant diffraction effect for an atomic
lattice of spacing around 10–10 m?
A infra-red
B microwave
C ultraviolet
D X-ray
29 Wave generators at points X and Y produce water waves of the same wavelength. At point Z, the
waves from X have the same amplitude as the waves from Y. Distances XZ and YZ are as
shown.
X Y
24 cm 34 cm
When the wave generators operate in phase, the amplitude of oscillation at Z is zero.
What could be the wavelength of the waves?
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

15
30 A molecule behaves as an electric dipole consisting of two equal point charges, of opposite sign,
separated by a fixed distance. The molecule moves with constant horizontal velocity as it enters a
vertical uniform electric field, as shown.
–
+
molecule
electric field
The positive and negative charges of the molecule enter the field at the same time.
Which row describes the velocity of the molecule in the field?

of velocity of velocity
A constant increases
B constant zero
C increases increases
D increases zero
31 Which diagram best represents the electric field between two point charges of equal magnitude
and opposite sign?
A B C D
+ + + +
– – – –
32 A pedal bicycle is fitted with an electric motor. The rider switches on the motor for a time of
3.0 minutes. A constant current of 3.5 A in the electric motor is provided from a battery with a
terminal voltage of 24 V.
What is the energy supplied by the battery?
A 84 J B 250 J C 630 J D 15 000 J

16
resistance of R.
done against the resistance of R.
34 A simple circuit is formed by connecting a resistor of resistance R between the terminals of a

battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 9.0 V and constant internal resistance r.
9.0 V
r
A charge of 6.0 C flows through the resistor in a time of 2.0 minutes causing it to dissipate 48 J of
thermal energy.
What is the internal resistance r of the battery?
A 0.17 Ω B 0.33 Ω C 20 Ω D 160 Ω
35 A source of e.m.f. 9.0 mV has an internal resistance of 6.0 Ω.
What is the current in the galvanometer?
A 250 µA B 300 µA C 1.5 mA D 2.5 mA
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

17
36 A box with four terminals P, Q, R and S contains two identical resistors.
P Q
S R
When a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E and negligible internal resistance is connected
E
across PS, a high-resistance voltmeter connected across QR reads .
2
Which diagram shows the correct arrangement of the two resistors inside the box?
A B
P Q P Q
S R S R
C D
P Q P Q
S R S R

18
37 The diagram shows part of a current-carrying circuit. The ammeter has negligible resistance.
1.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
A
5.0 A 5.0 A
5.0 Ω
A 0.7 A B 1.3 A C 1.5 A D 1.7 A
38 Nucleus P decays in two stages to produce nucleus Q.
Which decay sequence will result in the highest number of neutrons in nucleus Q?
A an α-particle followed by a β-particle
B an α-particle followed by a γ-ray
C a β-particle followed by another β-particle
D a β-particle followed by a γ-ray
133
39 A neutral atom has a nucleus given by the symbol 55 Cs .
How many protons, neutrons and electrons are in this atom?
protons neutrons electrons
A 55 78 55
B 55 133 55
C 78 55 78
D 133 55 133
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

19
40 The nuclear equation for a fission reaction is shown below.
235 1 93 141
92 U + 0n → X Rb + 55 Cs + Y 10 n
What are the values of X and Y?
X Y
A 37 0
B 37 1
C 37 2
D 38 2
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/13/M/J/15

* 1 9 5 3 1 8 5 0 3 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/21
1 hour

DC (LK) 92821/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
1 (a) Use the definition of power to show that the SI base units of power are kg m2 s–3.
[2]
(b) Use an expression for electrical power to determine the SI base units of potential difference.
units ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

5
2 (a) Define speed and velocity and use these definitions to explain why one of these quantities is
a scalar and the other is a vector.
speed: ......................................................................................................................................
velocity: .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A ball is released from rest and falls vertically. The ball hits the ground and rebounds vertically,
initial position
ball
rebound
ground
Fig. 2.1

6
The variation with time t of the velocity v of the ball is shown in Fig. 2.2.
12.0
10.0
8.0
v / m s–1
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
t/s
– 2.0
– 4.0
– 6.0
– 8.0
– 10.0
Fig. 2.2
(i) Without calculation, use Fig. 2.2 to describe the variation with time t of the velocity of the
ball from t = 0 to t = 2.1 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration of the ball after it rebounds from the ground. Show your
working.
acceleration = ................................................. m s–2 [3]

© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15
7
(iii) Calculate, for the ball, from t = 0 to t = 2.1 s,
1. the distance moved,
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
2. the displacement from the initial position.
displacement = ...................................................... m [2]
(iv) On Fig. 2.3, sketch the variation with t of the speed of the ball.
12.0
10.0
8.0
speed / m s–1
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
t/s
– 2.0
– 4.0
– 6.0
– 8.0
– 10.0
Fig. 2.3
[2]

8
3 Two balls X and Y are supported by long strings, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
X Y
4.5 m s–1 2.8 m s–1
Fig. 3.1
The balls are each pulled back and pushed towards each other. When the balls collide at the
position shown in Fig. 3.1, the strings are vertical. The balls rebound in opposite directions.
Fig. 3.2 shows data for X and Y during this collision.
ball mass velocity just before velocity just after

collision / m s–1 collision / m s–1
X 50 g +4.5 –1.8
Y M –2.8 +1.4
Fig. 3.2
The positive direction is horizontal and to the right.
(a) Use the conservation of linear momentum to determine the mass M of Y.
M = ....................................................... g [3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

9
(b) State and explain whether the collision is elastic.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Use Newton’s second and third laws to explain why the magnitude of the change in momentum
of each ball is the same.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]

10
4 A spring is kept horizontal by attaching it to points A and B, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
slider spring
cart, mass 1.7 kg v support
A B
Fig. 4.1
Point A is on a movable slider and point B is on a fixed support. A cart of mass 1.7 kg has horizontal
velocity v towards the slider. The cart collides with the slider. The spring is compressed as the cart
comes to rest. The variation of compression x of the spring with force F exerted on the spring is
shown in Fig. 4.2.
4.5
3.5
F/N
2.5
1.5
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
x / cm
Fig. 4.2
Fig. 4.2 shows the compression of the spring for F = 1.5 N to F = 4.5 N. The cart comes to rest
when F is 4.5 N.
(a) Use Fig. 4.2 to
(i) show that the compression of the spring obeys Hooke’s law,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

11
(ii) determine the spring constant of the spring,
(iii) determine the elastic potential energy EP stored in the spring due to the cart being
brought to rest.
EP = ....................................................... J [3]
(b) Calculate the speed v of the cart as it makes contact with the slider. Assume that all the
kinetic energy of the cart is converted to the elastic potential energy of the spring.
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [2]

12
5 The variation with potential difference (p.d.) V of current I for a semiconductor diode is shown in
Fig. 5.1.
12.0
10.0
8.0
I / mA
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
– 0.5 0 0.5 1.0
V/V
Fig. 5.1
(a) Use Fig. 5.1 to describe the variation of the resistance of the diode between
V = −0.5 V and V = 0.8 V.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the variation with p.d. V of current I for a filament lamp. Numerical values
are not required.
0
0 V
Fig. 5.2
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

13
(c) Fig. 5.3 shows a power supply of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V and internal resistance
0.50 Ω connected to a filament lamp and switch.
12 V 0.50 1
Fig. 5.3
The filament lamp has a power of 36 W when the p.d. across it is 12 V.
(i) Calculate the resistance of the lamp when the p.d. across it is 12 V.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [1]
(ii) The switch is closed and the current in the lamp is 2.8 A. Calculate the resistance of the
lamp.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
(d) Explain how the two values of resistance calculated in (c) provide evidence for the shape of
the sketch you have drawn in (b).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]

14
6 (a) State what is meant by diffraction and by interference.
diffraction: .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
interference: ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Light from a source S1 is incident on a diffraction grating, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
diffraction
light grating
S1 zero order
The light has a single frequency of 7.06 × 1014 Hz. The diffraction grating has 650 lines per
millimetre.
Calculate the number of orders of diffracted light produced by the grating. Do not include the
zero order.
Show your working.
number = .......................................................... [3]
(c) A second source S2 is used in place of S1. The light from S2 has a single frequency lower
than that of the light from S1.
State and explain whether more orders are seen with the light from S2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

15
7 (a) Explain what is meant by an electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A uniform electric field is produced between two vertical metal plates AB and CD, as shown in
Fig. 7.1.
A C
_-particle
16 mm
B D
450 V
+ –
Fig. 7.1
The potential difference between the plates is 450 V and the separation of the plates is 16 mm.
An α-particle is accelerated from plate AB to plate CD.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw lines to represent the electric field between the plates. [2]
(ii) Calculate the electric field strength between the plates.
electric field strength = ................................................ V m–1 [2]
(iii) Calculate the work done by the electric field on the α-particle as it moves from AB to CD.
work done = ....................................................... J [3]

16
(iv) A β-particle moves from AB to CD. Calculate the ratio
work done by the electric field on the α-particle

work done by the electric field on the β-particle.
Show your working.
ratio = .......................................................... [1]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
© UCLES 2015 9702/21/M/J/15

* 5 1 9 2 0 5 2 7 6 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour

DC (NF/SW) 92820/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

5
1 (a) Use the definition of work done to show that the SI base units of energy are kg m2 s−2.
[2]
(b) Define potential difference.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Determine the SI base units of resistance. Show your working.
units .......................................................... [3]

6
2 A stone is thrown vertically upwards. The variation with time t of the displacement s of the stone is
shown in Fig. 2.1.
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
t /s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use Fig. 2.1 to describe, without calculation, the speed of the stone from t = 0 to t = 3.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Assume air resistance is negligible and therefore the stone has constant acceleration.
Calculate, for the stone,
(i) the speed at 3.0 s,
speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

7
(ii) the distance travelled from t = 0 to t = 3.0 s,
distance = ..................................................... m [3]
(iii) the displacement from t = 0 to t = 3.0 s.
displacement = ........................................................... m
direction ...............................................................
[2]
(c) On Fig. 2.2, draw the variation with time t of the velocity v of the stone from t = 0 to t = 3.0 s.
v / m s–1
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0
t /s
Fig. 2.2
[3]
8
3 A rod PQ is attached at P to a vertical wall, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
wire
wall
F
0.64 m 0.96 m
30°
Q
P
rod
W
Fig. 3.1
The length of the rod is 1.60 m. The weight W of the rod acts 0.64 m from P. The rod is kept
horizontal and in equilibrium by a wire attached to Q and to the wall at R. The wire provides a
force F on the rod of 44 N at 30° to the horizontal.
(a) Determine
(i) the vertical component of F,
vertical component = ...................................................... N [1]
(ii) the horizontal component of F.
horizontal component = ...................................................... N [1]
(b) By taking moments about P, determine the weight W of the rod.
W = ...................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

9
(c) Explain why the wall must exert a force on the rod at P.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) On Fig. 3.1, draw an arrow to represent the force acting on the rod at P. Label your arrow with
the letter S. [1]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

11
4 (a) A gas molecule has a mass of 6.64 × 10−27 kg and a speed of 1250 m s−1. The molecule
collides normally with a flat surface and rebounds with the same speed, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
flat surface flat surface
molecule molecule
Fig. 4.1
Calculate the change in momentum of the molecule.
change in momentum = ................................................... N s [2]
(b) (i) Use the kinetic model to explain the pressure exerted by gases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain the effect of an increase in density, at constant temperature, on the pressure of
a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

12
5 (a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the temperature characteristic of a thermistor.
resistance
0
0 100
temperature / °C
Fig. 5.1
[2]
(b) A potential divider circuit is shown in Fig. 5.2.
12 V
Fig. 5.2
The battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V and negligible internal resistance is connected
in series with resistors X and Y and thermistor Z. The resistance of Y is 15 kΩ and the
resistance of Z at a particular temperature is 3.0 kΩ. The potential difference (p.d.) across Y
is 8.0 V.
(i) Explain why the power transformed in the battery equals the total power transformed in
X, Y and Z.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ...................................................... A [2]

© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15
13
(iii) Calculate the resistance of X.
resistance = ...................................................... Ω [3]
(iv) The temperature of Z is increased.
State and explain the effect on the potential difference across Z.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

14
6 (a) State two differences between progressive waves and stationary waves.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A source S of microwaves is placed in front of a metal reflector R, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
metal reflector R
microwave detector D
microwave
source
S
meter
Fig. 6.1
A microwave detector D is placed between R and S.
Describe
(i) how stationary waves are formed between R and S,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) how D is used to show that stationary waves are formed between R and S,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) how the wavelength of the microwaves may be determined using the apparatus in
Fig. 6.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

15
(c) The wavelength of the microwaves in (b) is 2.8 cm. Calculate the frequency, in GHz, of the
microwaves.
frequency = ................................................. GHz [3]

16
7 A uranium-235 nucleus absorbs a neutron and then splits into two nuclei. A possible nuclear
reaction is given by
235 a 93 c
92U + bn 37Rb + dX + 2 abn + energy.
(a) State the constituent particles of the uranium-235 nucleus.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Complete Fig. 7.1 for this reaction.
value
[3]
Fig. 7.1
(c) Suggest a possible form of energy released in this reaction.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Explain, using the law of mass-energy conservation, how energy is released in this reaction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/22/M/J/15

* 2 1 4 6 3 1 5 3 0 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour

DC (ST/CGW) 92819/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r
1 Nm 2
V

v = ± ω (x02 – x 2)
Q
4πε0r

t 1
2

4
1 (a) The distance between the Sun and the Earth is 1.5 × 1011 m. State this distance in Gm.
distance = ................................................... Gm [1]
(b) The distance from the centre of the Earth to a satellite above the equator is 42.3 Mm. The
radius of the Earth is 6380 km.
A microwave signal is sent from a point on the Earth directly below the satellite.
Calculate the time taken for the microwave signal to travel to the satellite and back.
time = ....................................................... s [2]
(c) The speed v of a sound wave through a gas of density ρ and pressure P is given by
CP
v= ρ
where C is a constant.
Show that C has no unit.
[3]
(d) Underline all the scalar quantities in the list below.
acceleration energy momentum power weight [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

5
(e) A boat travels across a river in which the water is moving at a speed of 1.8 m s–1.
The velocity vectors for the boat and the river water are shown to scale in Fig. 1.1.
water velocity 1.8 m s–1

river
boat velocity 3.0 m s–1
60°
river bank
Fig. 1.1 (shown to scale)
In still water the speed of the boat is 3.0 m s–1. The boat is directed at an angle of 60° to the
river bank.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, draw a vector triangle or a scale diagram to show the resultant velocity of the
boat. [2]
(ii) Determine the magnitude of the resultant velocity of the boat.
resultant velocity = ................................................ m s–1 [2]

6
2 The variation with time t of the velocity v of a ball is shown in Fig. 2.1.
v / m s–1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
t/s
ï
ï
ï
Fig. 2.1
The ball moves in a straight line from a point P at t = 0. The mass of the ball is 400 g.
(a) Use Fig. 2.1 to describe, without calculation, the velocity of the ball from t = 0 to t = 16 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

7
(b) Use Fig. 2.1 to calculate, for the ball,
(i) the displacement from P at t = 10 s,
displacement = ...................................................... m [2]
(ii) the acceleration at t = 10 s,
acceleration = ................................................ m s–2 [2]
(iii) the maximum kinetic energy.
kinetic energy = ....................................................... J [2]
(c) Use your answers in (b)(i) and (b)(ii) to determine the time from t = 0 for the ball to return to P.
time = ....................................................... s [2]

8
3 (a) Define power.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a car travelling at a speed of 22 m s–1 on a horizontal road.
speed 22 m s–1
1200 N
resistive force
horizontal road
Fig. 3.1
The car has a mass of 1500 kg. A resistive force of 1200 N acts on the car.
Calculate
(i) the force F required from the car to produce an acceleration of 0.82 m s–2,
F = ...................................................... N [3]
(ii) the power required to produce this acceleration.
power = ..................................................... W [2]
(c) The resistive force on the car is proportional to v 2, where v is the speed of the car.
Suggest why the car has a maximum speed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

9
4 Fig. 4.1 shows the values obtained in an experiment to determine the Young modulus E of a metal
in the form of a wire.
quantity value instrument
diameter d 0.48 mm
length l 1.768 m
5.0 N to 30.0 N
load F
in 5.0 N steps
extension e 0.25 mm to 1.50 mm
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) Complete Fig. 4.1 with the name of an instrument that could be used to measure each of
the quantities. [3]
(ii) Explain why a series of values of F, each with corresponding extension e, are measured.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain how a series of readings of the quantities given in Fig. 4.1 is used to determine the
Young modulus of the metal. A numerical answer for E is not required.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]

10
5 A uniform resistance wire AB has length 50 cm and diameter 0.36 mm. The resistivity of the metal
of the wire is 5.1 × 10–7 Ω m.
(a) Show that the resistance of the wire AB is 2.5 Ω.
[2]
(b) The wire AB is connected in series with a power supply E and a resistor R as shown in
Fig. 5.1.
R
M B
A
2.5 1
C N D
Fig. 5.1
The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of E is 6.0 V and its internal resistance is negligible.
The resistance of R is 2.5 Ω. A second uniform wire CD is connected across the terminals
of E. The wire CD has length 100 cm, diameter 0.18 mm and is made of the same metal as
wire AB.
Calculate
(i) the current supplied by E,
current = ...................................................... A [4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

11
(ii) the power transformed in wire AB,
power = ..................................................... W [2]
(iii) the potential difference (p.d.) between the midpoint M of wire AB and the midpoint N of
wire CD.
p.d. = ...................................................... V [2]

12
6 (a) Two overlapping waves of the same type travel in the same direction. The variation with
distance x of the displacement y of each wave is shown in Fig. 6.1.
3.0
y / cm
2.0
1.0
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
x/m
ï
ï
ï
Fig. 6.1
The speed of the waves is 240 m s–1. The waves are coherent and produce an interference
pattern.
(i) Explain the meaning of coherence and interference.
coherence: .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
interference: .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Use Fig. 6.1 to determine the frequency of the waves.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]

© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15
13
(iii) State the phase difference between the waves.
phase difference = ........................................................ ° [1]
(iv) Use the principle of superposition to sketch, on Fig. 6.1, the resultant wave. [2]
(b) An interference pattern is produced with the arrangement shown in Fig. 6.2.
B
S1 A
laser 0.13 mm
S2
85 cm screen
Laser light of wavelength λ of 546 nm is incident on the slits S1 and S2. The slits are a distance
0.13 mm apart. The distance between the slits and the screen is 85 cm.
Two points on the screen are labelled A and B. The path difference between S1A and S2A is
zero. The path difference between S1B and S2B is 2.5 λ. Maxima and minima of intensity of
light are produced on the screen.
(i) Calculate the distance AB.
distance = ...................................................... m [3]
(ii) The laser is replaced by a laser emitting blue light. State and explain the change in the
distance between the maxima observed on the screen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

14
7 The equation represents the spontaneous radioactive decay of a nucleus of bismuth-212.
212 208
83 Bi X+ 81 Tl + 6.2 MeV
(a) (i) Explain the meaning of spontaneous radioactive decay.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the constituent particles of X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Use the conservation of mass-energy to explain the release of 6.2 MeV of energy in this
reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the energy, in joules, released in this reaction.
energy = ....................................................... J [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/23/M/J/15

* 5 6 9 7 5 9 5 5 9 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours


Total
DC (ST/CGW) 97161/2
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the current in a circuit varies as the resistance of
the circuit is changed.
(a) (i) You have been provided with a length of bare wire and two crocodile clips which
have small screws on them. Connect the wire between the crocodile clips using the
screws as shown in Fig. 1.1.
The length w of wire between the screws should be approximately 50 cm. The
screws should be tightened using the screwdriver.
crocodile clip bare wire screw
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Measure and record w.
w = ........................................................ [1]
(b) (i) Set up the circuit as shown in Fig. 1.2.
power supply
+ –
wire
crocodile clips
A
Fig. 1.2
(iii) Record the ammeter reading IA.
IA = ........................................................
© UCLES 2015 9702/31/M/J/15

3
(c) (i) Move the crocodile clip to set up the circuit as shown in Fig. 1.3.
+ –
Fig. 1.3
(iii) Record the ammeter reading IB.
IB = ........................................................ [1]

4
(d) Change w and repeat (a)(ii), (b) and (c) until you have six sets of values of w, IA and IB.
(IA + IB)
IAIB
[10]
(IA + IB)
(e) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against w on the x-axis. [3]
IAIB
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/31/M/J/15

5

6
(f) The quantities IA, IB and w are related by the equation
(IA + IB)
= Mw + N
IAIB
where M and N are constants.
Using your answers in (e)(iii), determine values for M and N.

M = ........................................................
N = ........................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/31/M/J/15

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the balance of a wooden strip.
(a) (i) Measure and record the length L of the longer wooden strip as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wooden strip
Fig. 2.1
L = ........................................................ [1]
(ii) Measure and record the mass m, in grams, of the longer wooden strip.
m = ........................................................ g [1]
(iii) Calculate the mass per unit length p of the wood, where
p = m.
L
p = ........................................................
(iv) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your value of p.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

8
(b) (i) Measure and record the mass M, in grams, of the slotted mass.
M = ........................................................ g [1]
(ii) Use the Blu-Tack to attach the slotted mass to the top of the longer wooden strip
top view
slotted mass
wooden strip
side view
Blu-Tack
Fig. 2.2
The centre of the slotted mass should be positioned at the end of the wooden strip.
(iii) Calculate C, where

L2
C= .
2(M + Lp)
C = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/31/M/J/15

9
(c) (i) Balance the wooden strip on the pivot as shown in Fig. 2.3.
pivot
bench
Fig. 2.3
(ii) Measure and record the distance x from the pivot to the end of the wooden strip as
shown in Fig. 2.3. Do not mark the wooden strip.
x = ........................................................ [1]
percentage uncertainty = ........................................................ [1]

10
(d) Repeat (a)(i), (b)(ii), (b)(iii), (c)(i) and (c)(ii) for the shorter wooden strip.
L = ........................................................
C = ........................................................
x = ........................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/31/M/J/15

11
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between x and C is
x = kC
first value of k = ........................................................
second value of k = ........................................................

[1]
(ii) Explain whether your results in (e)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/31/M/J/15

* 4 1 2 4 3 0 3 2 9 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours


Total
DC (AC/CGW) 94416/4
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the forces acting on a wooden strip in equilibrium.
(a) The apparatus has been assembled for you as shown in Fig. 1.1.
boss
A B
rod of clamp
spring spring
wooden strip
string loops
bench
Fig. 1.1
(i) Adjust the positions of the stands so that the springs are vertical.
(ii) If necessary, adjust the height of the boss A so that the wooden strip is parallel to
the bench.
© UCLES 2015 9702/32/M/J/15

3
(b) (i) Increase the height of boss A by approximately 10 cm.

Leave boss B at the same height throughout the experiment.
(ii) Hang the mass M from the string loop as shown in Fig. 1.2.
A
B
string
loop
h x
bench
Fig. 1.2
(c) (i) Adjust the position of the string loop until the wooden strip is parallel to the bench
again.
(ii) Measure and record the distance h from the bench to the top of the spring at A, as
shown in Fig. 1.2.
h = .................................................. cm [1]
(iii) Measure and record the distance x from the string loop below A to the string loop
supporting M, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
x = .................................................. cm [1]

4
(d) Lower boss A and repeat (c) until you have six sets of values of h and x.
1 x
h h
The position of boss B should remain the same throughout the experiment.
[10]
1 x
h h
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/32/M/J/15

5

6
(f) The quantities h and x are related by the equation

1 ax
= +b
h h
Use your answers in (e)(iii) to determine the values of a and b.

a = .......................................................
b = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/32/M/J/15

7

8
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the force from the surface of water acting on a wire
loop.
(a) You are provided with two circular wire loops, each with a hook.
Take the smaller loop.
(i) Make sure that the loop lies flat on the bench, and that the loop is horizontal if
suspended by its hook.
(ii) Take measurements to find the diameter D of the loop, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
hook
loop D
side view top view
D = .................................................. cm [2]
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of D.
percentage uncertainty = ....................................................... [1]
(iv) Calculate the circumference C of the loop using the expression C = πD.
C = ....................................................... [1]
(b) Justify the number of significant figures you have given for your value of C.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/32/M/J/15

9
(c) You are also provided with a stand holding a spring with a pointer.
Hold a ruler vertically behind the pointer, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
pointer stand
spring
clamp
ruler
bench
Fig. 2.2
(d) (i) Place the hook of the wire loop onto the end coil of the spring, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
r1
wire loop
bench
Fig. 2.3
(ii) Record the pointer reading r1.
r1 = ....................................................... [1]

10
(iii) Position the beaker of water underneath the wire loop and then lift the beaker up
until the water is in contact with the loop, as shown in Fig. 2.4.
Fig. 2.4
(iv) Slowly lower the beaker. The water surface will pull the loop down until it breaks
away from the water surface.
(v) Repeat steps (iii) and (iv), this time recording the pointer reading r2 just before the
loop breaks away.
r2 = ....................................................... [1]
(vi) Remove the wire loop from the spring.
(e) Using the other wire loop, repeat (a)(i), (a)(ii), (a)(iv), (c) and (d).
D = ........................................................
C = .......................................................
r1 = .......................................................
r2 = .......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/32/M/J/15
11
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between r1, r2 and C is
r1 – r2 = k C
first value of k = .......................................................
second value of k = .......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/32/M/J/15

* 0 9 4 2 7 7 9 9 5 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours


Total
DC (LEG/SW) 92828/1
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the position of a suspended card varies with the
distribution of masses attached to it.
(a) (i) Use the nail to make two holes in the card as shown in Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2.
hole hole
Fig. 1.1
1 cm
card
1 cm
Fig. 1.2
The holes should be approximately 1 cm from the edges of the card as shown in
Fig. 1.2.
Each hole should be big enough for the card to swing freely when the nail is inserted
in the hole.
(ii) Record the mass C of the card shown on the base of the stand.
C = ................................................... g

4
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.3. Suspend the card from the nail through
one of the holes. Hang the plumb-line from the nail. Mark the card at a point along
the plumb-line as shown in Fig. 1.3.
boss
nail
plumb-line
mark
bench
Fig. 1.3
(ii) Remove the card. Draw a line on the card through the hole and the mark. This line
should go just over half the length of the card as shown in Fig. 1.4.
(iii) Repeat (b)(i) and (b)(ii) using the other hole in the card.
(iv) Measure and record the distance y as shown in Fig. 1.4.
hole
card
lines drawn on card
Fig. 1.4
y = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

5
(c) (i) Using some Blu-Tack, attach one of the 10 g slotted masses to the card. The
position of the slotted mass should be half-way along the edge of the card and
touching the edge as shown in Fig. 1.5.
slotted mass
Fig. 1.5
(ii) Repeat (b) using the card with the mass attached.
y = .................................................. [1]

6
(d) The mass attached to the card is m. Increase m by fixing another 10 g slotted mass on
top of, or behind, the first mass.
Record m and repeat (b) until you have six sets of readings of m and y. Include your
results from (b) and (c).
Include values of y (C + m) in your table.
[10]
(e) (i) Plot a graph of y (C + m) on the y-axis against m on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

7

8
(f) It is suggested that the quantities y, C and m are related by the equation
AB
y (C + m) = Am +
2
Use your answers in (e)(iii) to determine the values of A and B.

A = ......................................................
B = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

9
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a small container in water.
(a) You have been provided with three glass marbles and a small container with a separate
lid.
The dimensions of the glass marbles and the small container are shown in Fig. 2.1.
h
marble
small container
Fig. 2.1
(i) Measure and record the diameter d of the marble and the inner diameter D of the
small container.
d = ......................................................
D = ......................................................
[1]
(ii) Measure and record the height h of the small container.
h = .................................................. [1]

10
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d.
(b) (i) Place the small container in the tray. Fill the small container with water from the
beaker.
(ii) Place two glass marbles in the small container. Wait until the water has stopped
overflowing. Place the lid on the small container.
(iii) The fraction x of glass in the small container is given by
2nd3
x=
3D2h
where n is the number of marbles in the small container.
Calculate x.
x = .................................................. [1]
(c) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your value of x.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

11
(d) (i) Place the small container in the cylinder as shown in Fig. 2.2.
small container
cylinder
water
tray
bench
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Release the small container and measure the time t taken for the small container to
fall to the bottom of the cylinder.
t = .................................................. [2]

12
(e) Repeat (b) and (d) using three marbles.
x = ......................................................
t = ......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

13
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between t and x is

k
t2 =
x
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

14
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/33/M/J/15

* 0 4 5 6 4 2 3 5 3 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/34
2 hours


Total
DC (CW/SW) 94418/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate a metre rule rocking on a beaker.
(a) Assemble the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.1 with the beaker horizontal. The centres of
each of the two masses should be at the same distance r from the centre of the metre
rule, where r is approximately 30 cm.
mass r r mass
metre
rule label
¶723·
beaker
modelling clay
A
bench
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Measure and record the distance r.
r = ............................................... [1]
(ii) Adjust the position of the metre rule on the beaker so that the metre rule is balanced
and approximately parallel to the bench.
(c) (i) Hold down the end of the metre rule on A, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(ii) Release the metre rule and measure and record the time T for it to move up and
then down again to its lowest position, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
metre rule
Fig. 1.2
T = ............................................ s [2]

4
(d) Reposition the two masses at a different distance r from the centre of the metre rule and
repeat (b) and (c) until you have six sets of values of r and T.
Use values of r less than or equal to 40 cm.

Include values of r 2 and T 3 in your table.
[9]
(e) (i) Plot a graph of T 3 on the y-axis against r 2 on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ...................................................
y-intercept = ...................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

5

6
(f) The quantities T and r are related by the equation
T 3 = ar 2 + b
Use your answers from (e)(iii) to determine the values of a and b.

a = ...................................................
b = ...................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate how the optical properties of a lens depend on its
shape.
(a) (i) Select one of the two glass lenses.
(ii) Take measurements to determine the thickness t, diameter D and edge height h of
the lens, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
h t
Fig. 2.1
t = ............................................. cm
D = ............................................. cm
h = ............................................. cm
[3]
(b) Calculate R, where

D 2 + (t – h)2
R= .
4(t – h)
R = ........................................ cm [2]

8
(c) You are provided with a small card which names a bright object in your exam room.
You are also provided with a white screen.
(i) Use the lens to focus a sharp image of the bright object onto the screen, as shown
in Fig. 2.2.
sharp image
here
f
bright
object
screen lens
(ii) Measure the distance f from the lens to the screen, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
f = ........................................ cm [1]
(iii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of f.
percentage uncertainty = .............................................. [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

9
(d) Using the second lens, repeat (a)(ii), (b), (c)(i) and (c)(ii).
t = ............................................. cm
D = ............................................. cm
h = ............................................. cm
R = ............................................. cm
f = ............................................. cm
[2]

10
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between R and f is
R = kf
first value of k = ...................................................
second value of k = ...................................................

[2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

11
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/34/M/J/15

* 3 8 3 6 3 2 1 5 7 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours


Total
DC (ST/CGW) 94472/3
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/35/M/J/15

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the voltage across components in a circuit varies
as the resistance of the circuit is changed.
(a) (i) Set up the circuit as shown in Fig. 1.1.
+ ï
15 1
V1 V
x wire
10 1
metre rule
crocodile clips
V
V2
Fig. 1.1
Attach the crocodile clips to the wire so that the distance x is approximately 30 cm.
x = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Record the voltmeter readings V1 and V2.
V1 = .......................................................
V2 = .......................................................
[1]

4
(c) Change x and repeat (a)(ii) and (b) until you have six sets of readings of x, V1 and V2.
V2
V1
[10]
V2
(d) (i) Plot a graph of on the y-axis against x on the x-axis. [3]
V1
gradient = .....................................................
y-intercept = .....................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/35/M/J/15

5

6
(e) The quantities V2, V1 and x are related by the equation
V2 Ax Q
= +
V1 P B
where P = 15 Ω, Q = 10 Ω and A and B are constants.
Use your answers in (d)(iii) to determine values for A and B.

A = ........................................................
B = ........................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/35/M/J/15

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a metal bar.
(a) Use the loops on one piece of string to arrange the string on a wooden rod as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
The loops of the string on the rod should be approximately 18 cm apart.
Repeat for the other rod and string.
wooden rod
§18 cm
string
Fig. 2.1
(b) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.2.
wooden rod
boss
50 cm
metal rod
stand
50 cm
Fig. 2.2
The two wooden rods should be parallel, equal heights above the bench and 50 cm
apart.
The two strings supporting the metal rod should be 50 cm apart.

8
(c) (i) Measure and record the angle θ as shown in Fig. 2.3.
metal rod
Fig. 2.3
θ = ........................................................ [1]
(ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of θ.
percentage uncertainty = ........................................................ [1]
(iii)
2 冢冣
Calculate the value of cos θ .
冢冣
cos θ = ........................................................ [1]
2
(d) (i) Move the metal rod to the left.
Release the metal rod and watch the movement.
The metal rod will move to the right and then to the left again, completing a cycle
Fig. 2.4
© UCLES 2015 9702/35/M/J/15
9
(ii) The time taken for one complete cycle is T1.

By timing several of these complete cycles, determine an accurate value for T1.
T1 = ........................................................ [2]
(e) (i) Move the centre of the metal rod towards you through a small distance.
Release the metal rod and watch the movement.
The metal rod will move away from you and then back towards you completing a
cycle as shown in Fig. 2.5.
Fig. 2.5
(ii) The time taken for one complete cycle is T2.

By timing several of these complete cycles, determine an accurate value for T2.
T2 = ........................................................ [1]

10
(f) (i) Reduce the distance between the loops of string on each wooden rod to
approximately 9 cm as shown in Fig. 2.6.
§9 cm
Fig. 2.6
(ii) Repeat (b), (c)(i), (c)(iii), (d) and (e).
θ = ........................................................
冢冣
cos θ = ........................................................
2
T1 = ........................................................
T2 = ........................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/35/M/J/15

11
(g) It is suggested that the relationship between T1, T2 and θ is

T1
T2
= k cos θ
2 冢冣
first value of k = ........................................................
second value of k = ........................................................

[1]
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Explain whether your results in (g)(i) support the suggested relationship.
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
(h) (i) Describe four sources of uncertainty or limitations of the procedure for this
experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/35/M/J/15

* 6 5 9 2 5 8 1 0 5 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
2 hours
1
appropriate units.
3
4
part question. 5
10
11
12
13
Total
DC (NF/CGW) 92826/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The planet Neptune has eight moons (satellites). Each moon orbits Neptune in a circular path
of radius r with a period T.
Assuming that Neptune and each moon behave as point masses, show that r and T are
related by the expression
4π2r 3
GMN =
T2
where G is the gravitational constant and MN is the mass of Neptune.
[3]
(c) Data for the moon Triton that orbits Neptune and for the moon Oberon that orbits the planet
Uranus are given in Fig. 1.1.
planet moon radius of orbit period of orbit

r /105 km T / days
Neptune Triton 3.55 5.9
Uranus Oberon 5.83 13.5
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

5
Use the expression in (b) to determine the ratio
mass of Neptune
.
mass of Uranus
ratio = ......................................................... [3]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation with volume V of the pressure p of an ideal gas as it undergoes a cycle ABCA of
changes is shown in Fig. 2.1.
4.0
p / 105 Pa
B
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
A C
1.0
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
V / 10ï m3
Fig. 2.1
The temperature of the gas at A is 290 K. The temperature at B is 870 K.
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

7
Determine
(i) the amount, in mol, of gas,
amount = .................................................. mol [2]
(ii) the temperature of the gas at C.
temperature = ..................................................... K [2]
(c) Explain why the change from C to A involves external work and a change in internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

8
3 (a) Define specific latent heat.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An electrical heater is immersed in some melting ice that is contained in a funnel, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
heater
melting
ice
water
Fig. 3.1
The heater is switched on and, when the ice is melting at a constant rate, the mass m of
ice melted in 5.0 minutes is noted, together with the power P of the heater. The power P of
the heater is then increased. A new reading for the mass m of ice melted in 5.0 minutes is
recorded when the ice is melting at a constant rate.
Data for the power P and the mass m are shown in Fig. 3.2.
power of heater mass m melted in mass m melted

P/ W 5.0 minutes / g per second / g s−1
70 78 .................................
110 114 .................................
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

9
(i) Complete Fig. 3.2 to determine the mass melted per second for each power of the heater.
[2]
(ii) Use the data in the completed Fig. 3.2 to determine
1. a value for the specific latent heat of fusion L of ice,
L = ................................................ J g−1 [3]
2. the rate h of thermal energy gained by the ice from the surroundings.
h = .................................................... W [2]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

11
4 (a) For an oscillating body, state what is meant by
(i) forced frequency,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) natural frequency of vibration,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) resonance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain one situation where resonance is useful.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In some situations, resonance should be avoided.
State one such situation and suggest how the effects of resonance are reduced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

12
5 A charged metal sphere is isolated in space. Measurements of the electric potential V are made
for different distances x from the centre of the sphere.
The variation with distance x of the potential V is shown in Fig. 5.1.
4.0
3.0
V / 103 V
2.0
1.0
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
x / cm
Fig. 5.1
(a) Use Fig. 5.1 to determine the electric field strength, in N C−1, at a point where x = 4.0 cm.
electric field strength = ............................................... N C−1 [3]
(b) The charge on the sphere is 8.0 × 10−9 C.
(i) Use Fig. 5.1 to state the electric potential at the surface of the sphere.
potential = ..................................................... V [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

13
(ii) The sphere acts as a capacitor. Determine the capacitance of the sphere.
capacitance = ..................................................... F [2]

14
6 (a) State the type of field, or fields, that may cause a force to be exerted on a particle that is
(i) uncharged and moving,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) charged and stationary,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) charged and moving at right-angles to the field.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A particle X has mass 3.32 × 10−26 kg and charge +1.60 × 10−19 C.
The particle is travelling in a vacuum with speed 7.60 × 104 m s−1. It enters a region of uniform
magnetic field that is normal to the direction of travel of the particle. The particle travels in a
semicircle of diameter 12.2 cm, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
region of
uniform magnetic
field
12.2 cm
path of
particle X
Fig. 6.1
For the uniform magnetic field,
(i) state its direction,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

15
(ii) calculate the magnetic flux density.
magnetic flux density = ..................................................... T [3]
(c) A second particle Y has mass less than that of particle X in (b) and the same charge.
It enters the region of uniform magnetic field in (b) with the same speed and along the same
initial path as particle X.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of particle Y in the region of the magnetic field. [1]
7 In many distribution systems for electrical energy, the energy is transmitted using alternating
current at high voltages.
Suggest and explain an advantage, one in each case, for the use of
(a) alternating voltages,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) high voltages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

16
8 A photon of wavelength 6.50 × 10−12 m is incident on an isolated stationary electron, as illustrated

in Fig. 8.1.
deflected photon
wavelength 6.84 × 10–12 m
incident photon
e

electron
mass me
Fig. 8.1
The photon is deflected elastically by the electron of mass me. The wavelength of the deflected
photon is 6.84 × 10−12 m.
(a) Calculate, for the incident photon,
(i) its momentum,
momentum = .................................................. N s [2]
(ii) its energy.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

17
(b) The angle θ through which the photon is deflected is given by the expression
h
Δλ = (1 – cos θ )
mec
where Δλ is the change in wavelength of the photon, h is the Planck constant and c is the
speed of light in free space.
(i) Calculate the angle θ.
θ = ...................................................... ° [2]
(ii) Use energy considerations to suggest why Δλ must always be positive.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

18
9 (a) An isotope of an element is radioactive. Explain what is meant by radioactive decay.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) At time t, a sample of a radioactive isotope contains N nuclei. In a short time Δt, the number of
nuclei that decay is ΔN.
State expressions, in terms of the symbols t, Δt, N and ΔN for
(i) the number of undecayed nuclei at time (t + Δt),
number = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) the mean activity of the sample during the time interval Δt,
mean activity = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) the probability of decay of a nucleus during the time interval Δt,
probability = ......................................................... [1]
(iv) the decay constant.
decay constant = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

19
(c) The variation with time t of the activity A of a sample of a radioactive isotope is shown in
Fig. 9.1.
0
0 t½ 2t ½ 3t ½
t
Fig. 9.1
The radioactive isotope decays to form a stable isotope S. At time t = 0, there are no nuclei of
S in the sample.
On the axes of Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the number n of
nuclei of S in the sample.
0
0 t½ 2t ½ 3t ½
t
Fig. 9.2
[2]

20
Section B
10 An operational amplifier (op-amp) is used in the comparator circuit of Fig. 10.1.
+4.5 V
4.2 k1
+5 V
+
–
–5 V
V IN V OUT
1.2 k1 R
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) Show that the potential at the inverting input of the op-amp is +1.0 V.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the potential difference across resistor R is + 5 V when VIN is greater than
1.0 V and is zero when VIN is less than 1.0 V.
VIN > 1.0 V: .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
VIN < 1.0 V: .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

21
(b) The variation with time t of the input voltage VIN is shown in Fig. 10.2.
4
voltage / V
3
V IN
2
1 +1 V
0
0 time t
Fig. 10.2
(i) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, draw the variation with time t of the output potential VOUT. [2]
(ii) Suggest a use for this type of circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

22
11 (a) State and explain how, in an X-ray tube, the hardness of the X-ray beam is controlled.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A parallel beam of X-rays has intensity I0 and is incident on a medium having a linear
absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ.
(i) State an equation for the variation of the intensity I with the thickness x of the medium.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Data for the linear absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ for an X-ray beam in blood and
in muscle is shown in Fig. 11.1.
μ / cm−1
blood 0.23
muscle 0.22
Fig. 11.1
Suggest why, if this X-ray beam is used to image blood vessels in muscle, contrast on
the image would be poor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

23
12 (a) Information may be carried by means of various channels of communication.
Name examples, one in each case, of devices where information is carried to the device
using
(i) a wire pair,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a coaxial cable,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) microwaves.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State two advantages of optic fibres as compared with coaxial cables for long-range
communication.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) An optic fibre has length 62 km and an attenuation per unit length of 0.21 dB km−1.
The input power to the fibre is P. At the receiver, the noise power is 9.2 μW.
The signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is 25 dB.
(i) Calculate the ratio, in dB, of the input power P to the noise power at the receiver.
ratio = ................................................... dB [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine the input power P.
P = .................................................... W [2]
24
13 During magnetic resonance imaging to obtain information about internal body structures, a large
constant magnetic field is used with a calibrated non-uniform magnetic field superimposed on it.
(a) State and explain the purpose of
(i) the large constant magnetic field,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the non-uniform magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The de-excitation energy E (measured in joule) of a proton in magnetic resonance imaging is
E = 2.82 × 10−26 B
where B is the magnetic flux density measured in tesla.

The energy E is emitted as a photon of electromagnetic radiation in the radio-frequency
range.
Calculate the magnetic flux density required for the radio frequency to be 42 MHz.
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15

* 2 2 0 3 2 4 1 3 4 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours
1
appropriate units.
3
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (KN/CGW) 92818/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A
1 (a) The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere of radius 6.37 × 103 km with its mass
of 5.98 × 1024 kg concentrated at its centre. The Earth spins on its axis with a period of
24.0 hours.
(i) A stone of mass 2.50 kg rests on the Earth’s surface at the Equator.
1. Calculate, using Newton’s law of gravitation, the gravitational force on the stone.
gravitational force = ....................................................... N [2]
2. Determine the force required to maintain the stone in its circular path.
force = ....................................................... N [2]
(ii) The stone is now hung from a newton-meter.
Use your answers in (i) to determine the reading on the meter. Give your answer to three
significant figures.
reading = ....................................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

5
(b) A satellite is orbiting the Earth. For an astronaut in the satellite, his sensation of weight is
caused by the contact force from his surroundings.
The astronaut reports that he is ‘weightless’, despite being in the Earth’s gravitational field.
Suggest what is meant by the astronaut reporting that he is ‘weightless’.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]

6
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

7
2 In a sample of gas at room temperature, five atoms have the following speeds:
1.32 × 103 m s–1

1.50 × 103 m s–1
1.46 × 103 m s–1
1.28 × 103 m s–1
1.64 × 103 m s–1.
For these five atoms, calculate, to three significant figures,
(a) the mean speed,
mean speed = ................................................. m s–1 [1]
(b) the mean-square speed,
mean-square speed = ................................................ m2 s–2 [2]
(c) the root-mean-square speed.
root-mean-square speed = ................................................. m s–1 [1]

8
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A beaker containing a liquid is placed on a balance, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
liquid
heater
insulation
pan of
balance
Fig. 3.1
A heater of power 110 W is immersed in the liquid. The heater is switched on and, when the
liquid is boiling, balance readings m are taken at corresponding times t.
A graph of the variation with time t of the balance reading m is shown in Fig. 3.2.
380
360
m/g
340
320
300
0 2 4 6 8
t / min
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

9
(i) State the feature of Fig. 3.2 which suggests that the liquid is boiling at a steady rate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use data from Fig. 3.2 to determine a value for the specific latent heat L of vaporisation
of the liquid.
L = ................................................ J kg–1 [3]
(iii) State, with a reason, whether the value determined in (ii) is likely to be an overestimate
or an underestimate of the normally accepted value for the specific latent heat of
vaporisation of the liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]

10
4 (a) State what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The variation with time t of the displacement x of two oscillators P and Q is shown in Fig. 4.1.
3
x / cm
2
oscillator P
1 oscillator Q
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8
t/s
−1
−2
−3
−4
Fig. 4.1
The two oscillators each have the same mass.
(i) the phase difference between the two oscillators,
phase difference = ................................................... rad [1]
(ii) the maximum acceleration of oscillator Q,
maximum acceleration = ................................................ m s–2 [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

11
(iii) the ratio
maximum kinetic energy of oscillations of Q

maximum kinetic energy of oscillations of P .
ratio = .......................................................... [2]
(c) Use data from (b) to sketch, on the axes of Fig. 4.2, the variation with displacement x of the
acceleration a of oscillator Q.
0
–4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4
x / cm
Fig. 4.2
[2]

12
5 (a) Define electric potential at a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Two positively charged metal spheres A and B are situated in a vacuum, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
sphere A sphere B
Fig. 5.1
A point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two spheres and is a distance x from the
surface of sphere A.
The variation with x of the electric potential V due to the two charged spheres is shown in
Fig. 5.2.
600
500
V/V
400
300
200
100
0 2 4 6 8 10
x / cm
surface surface
of A of B
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15
13
(i) State how the magnitude of the electric field strength at any point P may be determined
from the graph of Fig. 5.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Without any calculation, describe the force acting on a positively charged particle placed
at point P for values of x from x = 0 to x = 10 cm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The positively charged particle in (b)(ii) has charge q and mass m given by the expression
q 7 –1
m = 4.8 × 10 C kg .
Initially, the particle is at rest on the surface of sphere A where x = 0. It then moves freely
along the line joining the centres of the spheres until it reaches the surface of sphere B.
(i) On Fig. 5.2, mark with the letter M the point where the charged particle has its maximum
speed. [1]
(ii) 1. Use Fig. 5.2 to determine the potential difference between the spheres.
potential difference = ....................................................... V [1]
2. Use your answer in (ii) part 1 to calculate the speed of the particle as it reaches the
surface of sphere B.
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [3]

14
6 (a) Explain what is meant by a photon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An X-ray photon of energy 3.06 × 10–14 J is incident on an isolated stationary electron, as
deflected photon
incident photon
e
energy 3.06 × 10–14 J
Fig. 6.1
The photon is deflected elastically by the electron through angle θ. The deflected photon has
a wavelength of 6.80 × 10–12 m.
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw an arrow to indicate a possible initial direction of motion of the electron
after the photon has been deflected. [1]
(ii) Calculate
1. the energy of the deflected photon,
photon energy = ....................................................... J [2]
2. the speed of the electron after the photon has been deflected.
speed = ................................................ m s–1 [3]

© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15
15
(c) Explain why the magnitude of the final momentum of the electron is not equal to the change
in magnitude of the momentum of the photon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
7 (a) A solenoid is connected in series with a resistor, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
N S
motion of magnet
Fig. 7.1
As the magnet is being moved into the solenoid, thermal energy is transferred in the resistor.
Use laws of electromagnetic induction to explain the origin of this thermal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the alternating current in the primary coil of a transformer is not in phase with the
alternating e.m.f. induced in the secondary coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]

16
8 The power for a space probe is to be supplied by the energy released when plutonium-236 decays
by the emission of α-particles.
The α-particles, each of energy 5.75 MeV, are captured and their energy is converted into electrical
energy with an efficiency of 24%.
(a) Calculate
(i) the energy, in joules, equal to 5.75 MeV,
energy = ....................................................... J [1]
(ii) the number of α-particles per second required to generate 1.9 kW of electrical power.
number per second = .................................................... s–1 [2]
(b) Each plutonium-236 nucleus, on disintegration, produces one α-particle.

Plutonium-236 has a half-life of 2.8 years.
(i) Calculate the decay constant, in s–1, of plutonium-236.
decay constant = .................................................... s–1 [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

17
(ii) Use your answers in (a)(ii) and (b)(i) to determine the mass of plutonium-236 required
for the generation of 1.9 kW of electrical power.
mass = ....................................................... g [4]
(c) The minimum electrical power required for the space probe is 0.84 kW.
Calculate the time, in years, for which the sample of plutonium-236 in (b)(ii) will provide
sufficient power.
time = ................................................ years [2]

18
Section B
9 (a) The strain in a beam is to be monitored using a strain gauge.

The strain gauge is included in the potential divider circuit shown in Fig. 9.1.
+2000 mV
120.0 1 5000 1
A B
strain
gauge 5000 1
Fig. 9.1
The strain gauge has a resistance of 120.0 Ω when it is not strained. The resistance increases
to 121.5 Ω when the strain is ε.
Calculate the potential difference between points A and B on Fig. 9.1 when the strain in the
gauge is ε.
potential difference = ................................................... mV [3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

19
(b) An inverting amplifier, incorporating an operational amplifier (op-amp), uses a high-resistance

voltmeter to display the output. A partially completed circuit for the amplifier is shown in
Fig. 9.2.
+9 V
V IN –9 V V
Fig. 9.2
The voltmeter is to indicate a full-scale deflection of +6.0 V for an input potential VIN of 0.15 V.
(i) On Fig. 9.2,
1. complete the circuit for the inverting amplifier, [2]
2. mark, with the letter P, the positive terminal of the voltmeter. [1]
(ii) Suggest appropriate values for the resistors you have shown in Fig. 9.2.
Label the resistors in Fig. 9.2 with these values. [2]

20
10 (a) State what is meant by the specific acoustic impedance of a medium.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The specific acoustic impedances Z of some media are given in Fig. 10.1.
Z / kg m–2 s–1
air 4.3 × 102
gel 1.5 × 106
soft tissue 1.6 × 106
bone 7.0 × 106
Fig. 10.1
(i) The density of a sample of bone is 1.7 × 103 kg m–3.
Determine the wavelength, in mm, of ultrasound of frequency 9.0 × 105 Hz in the bone.
wavelength = ................................................... mm [3]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

21
(ii) Ultrasound of intensity I is incident normally on the boundary between two media of
specific acoustic impedances Z1 and Z2, as shown in Fig. 10.2.
incident intensity I Z1 Z2
reflected intensity IR
Fig. 10.2
The intensity of the ultrasound reflected from the boundary is IR.

IR
The ratio is given by the expression
I
IR (Z1 – Z2)2
= .
I (Z1 + Z2)2
By making reference to the data for air, gel and soft tissue, explain quantitatively why,
during medical diagnosis using ultrasound, a gel is usually put on the skin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]

22
11 One channel of communication is by the use of a coaxial cable. Such a cable is illustrated in
Fig. 11.1.
protective
covering
inner copper
wire
plastic insulation A
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) Suggest the material from which the component labelled A on Fig. 11.1 is made.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest two functions of the component labelled A.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) When a signal travels along the coaxial cable, it is attenuated.
(i) State the meaning of attenuation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain why attenuation is frequently measured in decibels (dB).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

23
(c) A television aerial is connected to a receiver using a coaxial cable of length 11 m. The
attenuation per unit length of the cable is 190 dB km–1.
Calculate the ratio

output signal from coaxial cable
.
input signal to coaxial cable
ratio = ...........................................................[3]

24
12 A mobile phone handset is, at its simplest, a radio transmitter and receiver.
Outline the role of base stations and the cellular exchange when a mobile phone is switched on
and before a call is made.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/42/M/J/15

* 4 3 8 8 3 1 5 6 1 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/43
2 hours
1
appropriate units.
3
4
part question. 5
10
11
12
13
Total
DC (LK/CGW) 109959
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 10 9 m F–1 )
4πε0
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

3
Formulae

v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
Nm 2
<c >

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2 ⎯ –⎯ x⎯ ⎯ 2⎯ )
Q
4πε0r

0.693
t

4
Section A
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The planet Neptune has eight moons (satellites). Each moon orbits Neptune in a circular path
of radius r with a period T.
Assuming that Neptune and each moon behave as point masses, show that r and T are
related by the expression
4π2r 3
GMN =
T2
where G is the gravitational constant and MN is the mass of Neptune.
[3]
(c) Data for the moon Triton that orbits Neptune and for the moon Oberon that orbits the planet
Uranus are given in Fig. 1.1.
planet moon radius of orbit period of orbit

r /105 km T / days
Neptune Triton 3.55 5.9
Uranus Oberon 5.83 13.5
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

5
Use the expression in (b) to determine the ratio
mass of Neptune
.
mass of Uranus
ratio = ......................................................... [3]

6
2 (a) State what is meant by internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation with volume V of the pressure p of an ideal gas as it undergoes a cycle ABCA of
changes is shown in Fig. 2.1.
4.0
p / 105 Pa
B
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
A C
1.0
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
V / 10ï m3
Fig. 2.1
The temperature of the gas at A is 290 K. The temperature at B is 870 K.
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

7
Determine
(i) the amount, in mol, of gas,
amount = .................................................. mol [2]
(ii) the temperature of the gas at C.
temperature = ..................................................... K [2]
(c) Explain why the change from C to A involves external work and a change in internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

8
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An electrical heater is immersed in some melting ice that is contained in a funnel, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
heater
melting
ice
water
Fig. 3.1
The heater is switched on and, when the ice is melting at a constant rate, the mass m of
ice melted in 5.0 minutes is noted, together with the power P of the heater. The power P of
the heater is then increased. A new reading for the mass m of ice melted in 5.0 minutes is
recorded when the ice is melting at a constant rate.
Data for the power P and the mass m are shown in Fig. 3.2.
power of heater mass m melted in mass m melted

P/ W 5.0 minutes / g per second / g s−1
70 78 .................................
110 114 .................................
Fig. 3.2
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

9
(i) Complete Fig. 3.2 to determine the mass melted per second for each power of the heater.
[2]
(ii) Use the data in the completed Fig. 3.2 to determine
1. a value for the specific latent heat of fusion L of ice,
L = ................................................ J g−1 [3]
2. the rate h of thermal energy gained by the ice from the surroundings.
h = .................................................... W [2]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

11
4 (a) For an oscillating body, state what is meant by
(i) forced frequency,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) natural frequency of vibration,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) resonance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain one situation where resonance is useful.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In some situations, resonance should be avoided.
State one such situation and suggest how the effects of resonance are reduced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

12
5 A charged metal sphere is isolated in space. Measurements of the electric potential V are made
for different distances x from the centre of the sphere.
The variation with distance x of the potential V is shown in Fig. 5.1.
4.0
3.0
V / 103 V
2.0
1.0
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0
x / cm
Fig. 5.1
(a) Use Fig. 5.1 to determine the electric field strength, in N C−1, at a point where x = 4.0 cm.
electric field strength = ............................................... N C−1 [3]
(b) The charge on the sphere is 8.0 × 10−9 C.
(i) Use Fig. 5.1 to state the electric potential at the surface of the sphere.
potential = ..................................................... V [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

13
(ii) The sphere acts as a capacitor. Determine the capacitance of the sphere.
capacitance = ..................................................... F [2]

14
6 (a) State the type of field, or fields, that may cause a force to be exerted on a particle that is
(i) uncharged and moving,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) charged and stationary,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) charged and moving at right-angles to the field.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A particle X has mass 3.32 × 10−26 kg and charge +1.60 × 10−19 C.
The particle is travelling in a vacuum with speed 7.60 × 104 m s−1. It enters a region of uniform
magnetic field that is normal to the direction of travel of the particle. The particle travels in a
semicircle of diameter 12.2 cm, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
region of
uniform magnetic
field
12.2 cm
path of
particle X
Fig. 6.1
For the uniform magnetic field,
(i) state its direction,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

15
(ii) calculate the magnetic flux density.
(c) A second particle Y has mass less than that of particle X in (b) and the same charge.
It enters the region of uniform magnetic field in (b) with the same speed and along the same
initial path as particle X.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of particle Y in the region of the magnetic field. [1]
7 In many distribution systems for electrical energy, the energy is transmitted using alternating
current at high voltages.
Suggest and explain an advantage, one in each case, for the use of
(a) alternating voltages,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) high voltages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]

16
8 A photon of wavelength 6.50 × 10−12 m is incident on an isolated stationary electron, as illustrated

in Fig. 8.1.
deflected photon
incident photon
e

electron
mass me
Fig. 8.1
The photon is deflected elastically by the electron of mass me. The wavelength of the deflected
photon is 6.84 × 10−12 m.
(a) Calculate, for the incident photon,
(i) its momentum,
momentum = .................................................. N s [2]
(ii) its energy.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

17
(b) The angle θ through which the photon is deflected is given by the expression
h
Δλ = (1 – cos θ )
mec
where Δλ is the change in wavelength of the photon, h is the Planck constant and c is the
speed of light in free space.
(i) Calculate the angle θ.
θ = ...................................................... ° [2]
(ii) Use energy considerations to suggest why Δλ must always be positive.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

18
9 (a) An isotope of an element is radioactive. Explain what is meant by radioactive decay.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) At time t, a sample of a radioactive isotope contains N nuclei. In a short time Δt, the number of
nuclei that decay is ΔN.
State expressions, in terms of the symbols t, Δt, N and ΔN for
(i) the number of undecayed nuclei at time (t + Δt),
number = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) the mean activity of the sample during the time interval Δt,
mean activity = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) the probability of decay of a nucleus during the time interval Δt,
probability = ......................................................... [1]
(iv) the decay constant.
decay constant = ......................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

19
(c) The variation with time t of the activity A of a sample of a radioactive isotope is shown in
Fig. 9.1.
0
0 t½ 2t ½ 3t ½
t
Fig. 9.1
The radioactive isotope decays to form a stable isotope S. At time t = 0, there are no nuclei of
S in the sample.
On the axes of Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the number n of
nuclei of S in the sample.
0
0 t½ 2t ½ 3t ½
t
Fig. 9.2
[2]

20
Section B
10 An operational amplifier (op-amp) is used in the comparator circuit of Fig. 10.1.
+4.5 V
4.2 k1
+5 V
+
–
–5 V
V IN V OUT
1.2 k1 R
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) Show that the potential at the inverting input of the op-amp is +1.0 V.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the potential difference across resistor R is + 5 V when VIN is greater than
1.0 V and is zero when VIN is less than 1.0 V.
VIN > 1.0 V: .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
VIN < 1.0 V: .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

21
(b) The variation with time t of the input voltage VIN is shown in Fig. 10.2.
4
voltage / V
3
V IN
2
1 +1 V
0
0 time t
Fig. 10.2
(i) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, draw the variation with time t of the output potential VOUT. [2]
(ii) Suggest a use for this type of circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]

22
11 (a) State and explain how, in an X-ray tube, the hardness of the X-ray beam is controlled.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A parallel beam of X-rays has intensity I0 and is incident on a medium having a linear
absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ.
(i) State an equation for the variation of the intensity I with the thickness x of the medium.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Data for the linear absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ for an X-ray beam in blood and
in muscle is shown in Fig. 11.1.
μ / cm−1
blood 0.23
muscle 0.22
Fig. 11.1
Suggest why, if this X-ray beam is used to image blood vessels in muscle, contrast on
the image would be poor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

23
12 (a) Information may be carried by means of various channels of communication.
Name examples, one in each case, of devices where information is carried to the device
using
(i) a wire pair,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a coaxial cable,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) microwaves.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State two advantages of optic fibres as compared with coaxial cables for long-range
communication.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) An optic fibre has length 62 km and an attenuation per unit length of 0.21 dB km−1.
The input power to the fibre is P. At the receiver, the noise power is 9.2 μW.
The signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver is 25 dB.
(i) Calculate the ratio, in dB, of the input power P to the noise power at the receiver.
ratio = ................................................... dB [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine the input power P.
P = .................................................... W [2]
24
13 During magnetic resonance imaging to obtain information about internal body structures, a large
constant magnetic field is used with a calibrated non-uniform magnetic field superimposed on it.
(a) State and explain the purpose of
(i) the large constant magnetic field,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) the non-uniform magnetic field.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The de-excitation energy E (measured in joule) of a proton in magnetic resonance imaging is
E = 2.82 × 10−26 B
where B is the magnetic flux density measured in tesla.

The energy E is emitted as a photon of electromagnetic radiation in the radio-frequency
range.
Calculate the magnetic flux density required for the radio frequency to be 42 MHz.
© UCLES 2015 9702/43/M/J/15

* 8 1 2 9 2 8 9 2 4 9 *
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SW) 94471/2
2
1 A student is investigating simple harmonic motion using an electric vibrator. A plate is attached to
the top of the electric vibrator. A small mass is placed on the metal plate as shown in Fig. 1.1.
metal plate
small mass
vibrator
Fig. 1.1
An alternating potential difference (p.d.) is applied to the vibrator. For a given peak p.d. V, there
is a maximum frequency f at which the small mass remains in contact with the plate. The contact
between the small mass and plate is lost when the frequency is greater than f.
It is suggested that the relationship between f and V is
k = π2f 2V
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between f and V. Explain how your results
could be used to determine a value for k. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the

[15]
© UCLES 2015 9702/51/M/J/15

3
Diagram
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................

4
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2015 9702/51/M/J/15

5
2 A student is investigating the performance of a motor vehicle.
The vehicle is driven at a constant speed v on a test track, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
The performance P of the vehicle is the distance travelled per unit volume of fuel, measured
in kilometres per litre (km l –1). This is obtained from the vehicle’s computer system.
The experiment is repeated for different speeds.
It is suggested that P and v are related by the equation
P = kv m
where k and m are constants.
(a) A graph is plotted of lg P on the y-axis against lg v on the x-axis.
Determine expressions for the gradient and y-intercept.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[1]

6
(b) Values of v and P are given in Fig. 2.2.
v / km h–1 P / km l –1 lg (v / km h–1) lg (P / km l –1)
50 20.5 ± 0.5
61 16.0 ± 0.5
71 13.0 ± 0.5
80 11.0 ± 0.5
90 9.5 ± 0.5
99 8.0 ± 0.5
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of lg (v / km h–1) and lg (P / km l –1) in Fig. 2.2.

Include the absolute uncertainties in lg (P / km l –1). [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of lg (P / km l –1) against lg (v / km h–1).

Include error bars for lg (P / km l –1). [2]
gradient = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/51/M/J/15

7
1.35
1.30
1.25
lg (P / km l –1)
1.20
1.15
1.10
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00
lg (v / km h–1)

8
answer.
y-intercept = ................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a), (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine the values of k and m. You
need not be concerned with the units of k and m.
k = ......................................................
m = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in k.
percentage uncertainty in k = .................................................. %

[1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/51/M/J/15

* 8 1 9 5 8 0 9 2 7 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (RW/JG) 94470/2
2
1 A student is investigating how the intensity of the reflection of sound from a wall varies with
the thickness of foam attached to the wall, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
wall
foam
Fig. 1.1
It is suggested that the intensity I of the reflected sound is related to the thickness t of the
foam by the relationship
I = I0e−αρt
where I0 is the intensity of the sound before reflection, ρ is the density of the foam and α is a
constant.
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between I and t. Explain how your
results could be used to determine a value for α. You should draw a diagram, on page 3,
showing the arrangement of your equipment. In your account you should pay particular
attention to

[15]
© UCLES 2015 9702/52/M/J/15

3
Diagram
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

4
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
____________________________________________________________________________
Defining the Methods of data Method of Safety Additional

problem collection analysis considerations detail
© UCLES 2015 9702/52/M/J/15

5
2 A student is investigating a circuit containing two horizontal parallel plates separated by an

insulator.
vibrating
reed switch
I
+ plate
power
supply
–
area of
l
overlap
w
plate
Fig. 2.1
An experiment is carried out to investigate how the current I varies with the area X of overlap
of the parallel plates. The student measures the length l of overlap. To determine the area X
of overlap, the student uses the relationship
X = wl
where w is the width of the plates.
It is suggested that I and X are related by the equation

I = εE
fX d
where E is the e.m.f. of the power supply, f is the frequency of the vibrating reed switch, d is
the separation of the two parallel plates and ε is a constant.
(a) A graph is plotted of I on the y-axis against X on the x-axis.

Determine an expression for the gradient.
gradient = .................................................. [1]

6
(b) The width w of the plates has a value of 0.300 ± 0.005 m.
Values of l and I are given in Fig. 2.2.
l/m I / 10−6 A
0.160 ± 0.005 4.6
0.180 ± 0.005 5.3
0.210 ± 0.005 6.2
0.240 ± 0.005 7.1
0.270 ± 0.005 8.0
0.300 ± 0.005 8.8
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of X / 10−2 m2 in Fig. 2.2. Include the uncertainties in X. [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of I / 10−6 A against X / 10−2 m2. Include error bars for X. [2]
gradient = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/52/M/J/15

7
9.5
9.0
I / 10–6 A
8.5
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
5.5
5.0
4.5
4.0
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
X / 10–2 m2

8
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a) and (c)(iii), determine the value of ε. Include an
appropriate unit.
Data: E = 12.0 ± 0.2 V, f = 400 ± 10 Hz and d = 0.0030 ± 0.0002 m.
ε = .................................................. [2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in your value of ε.
percentage uncertainty = ............................................. % [1]
(e) The experiment is repeated with two square plates of length 0.500 ± 0.001 m which
completely overlap. Determine the frequency f of the reed switch that will produce a
current of 5.0 ± 0.1 μA. Include the absolute uncertainty in your answer.
Data: E = 12.0 ± 0.2 V and d = 0.0030 ± 0.0002 m.
f = ............................................Hz [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/52/M/J/15

* 7 3 0 6 9 8 5 7 0 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SW) 108577
2
1 A student is investigating simple harmonic motion using an electric vibrator. A plate is attached to
the top of the electric vibrator. A small mass is placed on the metal plate as shown in Fig. 1.1.
metal plate
small mass
vibrator
Fig. 1.1
An alternating potential difference (p.d.) is applied to the vibrator. For a given peak p.d. V, there
is a maximum frequency f at which the small mass remains in contact with the plate. The contact
between the small mass and plate is lost when the frequency is greater than f.
It is suggested that the relationship between f and V is
k = π2f 2V
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between f and V. Explain how your results

[15]
© UCLES 2015 9702/53/M/J/15

3
Diagram
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................

4
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................

© UCLES 2015 9702/53/M/J/15

5
2 A student is investigating the performance of a motor vehicle.
The vehicle is driven at a constant speed v on a test track, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
Fig. 2.1
The performance P of the vehicle is the distance travelled per unit volume of fuel, measured
in kilometres per litre (km l –1). This is obtained from the vehicle’s computer system.
The experiment is repeated for different speeds.
It is suggested that P and v are related by the equation
P = kv m
where k and m are constants.
(a) A graph is plotted of lg P on the y-axis against lg v on the x-axis.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[1]

6
(b) Values of v and P are given in Fig. 2.2.
v / km h–1 P / km l –1 lg (v / km h–1) lg (P / km l –1)
50 20.5 ± 0.5
61 16.0 ± 0.5
71 13.0 ± 0.5
80 11.0 ± 0.5
90 9.5 ± 0.5
99 8.0 ± 0.5
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of lg (v / km h–1) and lg (P / km l –1) in Fig. 2.2.

Include the absolute uncertainties in lg (P / km l –1). [3]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of lg (P / km l –1) against lg (v / km h–1).

Include error bars for lg (P / km l –1). [2]
gradient = ................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2015 9702/53/M/J/15

7
1.35
1.30
1.25
lg (P / km l –1)
1.20
1.15
1.10
1.05
1.00
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80 1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00
lg (v / km h–1)

8
answer.
y-intercept = ................................................. [2]
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a), (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine the values of k and m. You
need not be concerned with the units of k and m.
k = ......................................................
m = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in k.
percentage uncertainty in k = .................................................. %

[1]
© UCLES 2015 9702/53/M/J/15

PHYSICS 9702/11
1 hour 15 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*3167994674*

IB16 06_9702_11/3RP
2
Data
speed of light in free space c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1
permeability of free space µ0 = 4π × 10–7 H m–1
permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10–12 F m–1

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10–19 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s
unified atomic mass unit 1 u = 1.66 × 10–27 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg
molar gas constant R = 8.31 J K–1 mol–1
the Avogadro constant NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1
the Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1
gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10–11 N m2 kg–2
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s–2
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
uniformly accelerated motion s = ut + 2
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = p∆V
gravitational potential φ = – Gm
r
hydrostatic pressure p = ρ gh
pressure of an ideal gas p= 1 Nm <c 2>

3 V
simple harmonic motion a = – ω 2x
velocity of particle in s.h.m. v = v0 cos ωt

v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
f sv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
electric potential V= Q
4πε 0r
capacitors in series 1 / C = 1 / C1 + 1 / C2 + . . .
capacitors in parallel C = C1 + C2 + . . .
1
energy of charged capacitor W= 2
QV
electric current I = Anvq
resistors in series R = R1 + R2 + . . .
resistors in parallel 1 / R = 1 / R1 + 1 / R2 + . . .
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
alternating current/voltage x = x0 sin ωt
radioactive decay x = x0 exp(–λt)
decay constant λ = 0.693

t1
2

4
1 Three wires each exert a horizontal force on a vertical pole, as shown.
Which vector diagram shows the resultant force R acting on the pole?
A B C D
R R
R
R
2 Which pair of quantities do not have the same SI base units?
A electromotive force and electric potential difference

B pressure and stress
C spring constant and moment of a force
D torque and work
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

5
3 A lift is supported by two steel cables, each of length 10 m and diameter 0.5 cm.
steel
cables
10 m
NOT TO
SCALE
lift
The cables extend by 1 mm when a man of mass 80 kg steps into the lift.
What is the best estimate of the value of the Young modulus of the steel?
A 2 × 1010 N m–2
B 4 × 1010 N m–2
C 2 × 1011 N m–2
D 4 × 1011 N m–2
4 When performing an experiment, a student should minimise the uncertainty of any measurement.
In which case is the student reducing the systematic error in a measurement?
A adjusting a voltmeter needle pointer to the zero position before using it to measure a
potential difference
B measuring the diameter of a wire at several points and orientations
C measuring the mass of 100 paperclips to determine the mass of one paperclip
D timing 20 oscillations of a mass on a spring to determine the period of one oscillation

6
5 A calibration graph is produced for a faulty ammeter.
1.0
ammeter
reading / A
0
0 1.0
true
current / A
Which ammeter reading will be nearest to the true current?
A 0.2 A B 0.4 A C 0.6 A D 0.8 A
6 A car accelerates uniformly from velocity u to velocity v in time t.
velocity
v S
Q R
u T
P W
N V U
0
0 t t time
2
On the graph, which area equals the distance travelled by the car in time t ?
A NPTU + PQST
B NPW V + VRSU
C NPW V + WRST
D PST + PQS
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

7
7 A student uses a spring gun to launch a steel ball with a constant horizontal velocity. He varies
the height h of the gun and measures the horizontal displacement r of the ball when it hits the
ground.
gun
Which graph shows the variation with height h of the horizontal displacement r ?
A B
r r
0 0
0 h 0 h
C D
r r
0 0
0 h 0 h
8 Two cars X and Y are positioned as shown at time t = 0.
They are travelling in the same direction.
X is 50 m behind Y and has a constant velocity of 30 m s–1. Y has a constant velocity of 20 m s–1.
30 m s–1
X
20 m s–1
50 m
What is the value of t when X is level with Y?
A 1.0 s B 1.7 s C 2.5 s D 5.0 s

8
9 Which statement about a perfectly elastic collision between two bodies in an isolated system is
correct?
A Both total kinetic energy and total momentum are conserved.

B Total kinetic energy is conserved, but total momentum is not conserved.
C Total momentum is conserved, but total kinetic energy is not conserved.
D Neither total kinetic energy nor total momentum is conserved.
10 Two spheres approach each other along the same straight line. Their speeds are u1 and u2
before they collide. After the collision, the spheres separate with speeds v1 and v2 in the
directions shown below.
u1 u2 v1 v2
The collision is perfectly elastic. Which equation must be correct?
A u1 – u2 = v2 + v1
B u1 – u2 = v2 – v1
C u1 + u2 = v2 + v1
D u1 + u2 = v2 – v1
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

9
11 The diagram shows a man standing on a platform that is attached to a flexible pipe. Water is
pumped through the pipe so that the man and platform remain at a constant height.
flexible pipe
platform
water in
vertical jet of water out,

mass flow rate 40 kg s–1
The resultant vertical force on the platform is zero. The combined mass of the man and platform
is 96 kg. The mass of water that is discharged vertically downwards from the platform each
second is 40 kg.
What is the speed of the water leaving the platform?
A 2.4 m s–1 B 6.9 m s–1 C 24 m s–1 D 47 m s–1
12 Forces are applied to a rigid body. The forces all act in the same plane.
In which diagram is the body in equilibrium?
A B C D
F F F F
1 1 1 1
2F 2F 2F 2F
1 1
2F 2F
F F F F

10
13 A solid metal cylinder stands on a horizontal surface, as shown.
area A
cylinder
x
surface
The cylinder has length x and cross-sectional area A. The cylinder exerts a pressure p on the
surface. The acceleration of free fall is g.
Which expression gives the density of the metal of the cylinder?

gx p gx pA
A B C D
p gx pA gx
14 A trailer of weight 30 kN is attached to a cab at X, as shown in the diagram.
cab
trailer X
30 kN
10 m 10 m
What is the upward force exerted at X by the cab on the trailer?
A 3 kN B 15 kN C 30 kN D 60 kN
15 The diameter of a solid metal sphere is measured using a micrometer screw gauge. The diagram
shows an enlargement of the shaft of the micrometer screw gauge when taking the
measurement.
3 4 40
30
20
The mass of the sphere is 0.450 g.
What is the density of the metal used to make the sphere?
A 965 kg m–3 B 1340 kg m–3 C 7720 kg m–3 D 10 700 kg m–3
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

11
16 Some gas in a cylinder is supplied with thermal energy q.
The gas does useful work in expanding at constant pressure p from volume V0 to volume VF, as
shown.
volume V0
gas
pressure p
volume VF
Which expression gives the efficiency of this change?

pV0 VF p(VF − V0 ) (VF − V0 )
A B C D
q V0 q q V0 q
17 The power P required to move an object through a medium at constant speed depends on the
speed v and the resistive force F acting on the object.
The resistive force F also depends on the speed v.
Which row shows a possible relationship between speed v, resistive force F and power P ?
resistive force F power P
A proportional to v constant
B proportional to v proportional to v
C proportional to v 2 proportional to v 2
D proportional to v 2 proportional to v 3
18 Which amount of energy is not 2400 J?
A the decrease in gravitational potential energy of a body of mass 60 kg when it moves

vertically downwards through 40 m near the Earth’s surface
B the energy transferred in 15 s by a machine of power 160 W
C the kinetic energy of a body of mass 12 kg moving at a speed of 20 m s–1
D the work done by a gas expanding against a constant external pressure of 120 kPa when its
volume increases by 0.020 m3

12
19 A hammer with 10 J of kinetic energy hits a nail and pushes it 5.0 mm into a plank.
Both the hammer and nail come to rest after the collision.
What is the approximate average force that acts on the nail while it moves through 5.0 mm?
A 0.050 N B 2.0 N C 50 N D 2000 N
20 A number of identical springs are joined in four arrangements.
Which arrangement has the same spring constant as a single spring?
A B C D
load
load load load
21 A sample of material is stretched by a tensile force to a point beyond its elastic limit. The tensile
force is then reduced to zero. The graph of force against extension is shown below.
force
X Z
0
0 extension
Which area represents the net work done on the sample?
A X B X+Y C Y+Z D Z
22 Two sound waves have frequencies of 250 Hz and 300 Hz. The speed of sound is 340 m s–1.
What is the difference between the wavelengths of the two waves?
A 0.23 m B 1.1 m C 1.4 m D 6.8 m
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

13
23 Which electromagnetic waves have the wavelengths of 10–2 m, 10–5 m, 10–10 m and 10–13 m?
10–2 m 10–5 m 10–10 m 10–13 m
A infra-red microwaves visible light X-rays

B microwaves infra-red X-rays gamma rays
C microwaves visible light ultraviolet gamma rays
D radio waves microwaves ultraviolet X-rays
24 Which statement concerning a stationary wave is correct?
A All the particles between two successive nodes oscillate in phase.

B The amplitude of the stationary wave is equal to the amplitude of one of the waves creating it.
C The wavelength of the stationary wave is equal to the separation of two adjacent nodes.
D There is no displacement of a particle at an antinode at any time.
25 Continuous water waves are diffracted through a gap in a barrier in a ripple tank.
Which change will cause the diffraction of the waves to increase?
A increasing the frequency of the waves

B increasing the width of the gap
C reducing the wavelength of the waves
D reducing the width of the gap
26 A parallel beam of light of wavelength 450 nm is incident normally on a diffraction grating which
has 300 lines / mm.
What is the total number of intensity maxima observed?
A 7 B 8 C 14 D 15
27 Fringes of separation x are observed on a screen 1.00 m from a double slit that is illuminated by
yellow light of wavelength 600 nm.
At which distance from the slits would fringes of the same separation x be observed when using
blue light of wavelength 400 nm?
A 0.33 m B 0.67 m C 0.75 m D 1.50 m

14
28 A charged particle is moving in a uniform electric field.
For the motion of the particle due to the field, which quantity has a constant non-zero value?
A acceleration
B displacement
C rate of change of acceleration
D velocity
29 Which diagram could represent the electric field lines between two oppositely charged conducting
surfaces?
A B
C D
30 There is a current in a resistor for an unknown time.
Which two quantities can be used to calculate the energy dissipated by the resistor?
A the current in the resistor and the potential difference across the resistor
B the resistance of the resistor and the current in the resistor
C the total charge passing through the resistor and the potential difference across the resistor
D the total charge passing through the resistor and the resistance of the resistor
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

15
31 Two copper wires of equal length are connected in parallel. A potential difference is applied
across the ends of this parallel arrangement. Wire S has a diameter of 3.0 mm. Wire T has a
diameter of 1.5 mm.
What is the value of the ratio current in S ?

current in T
A 1 B 1 C 2 D 4
4 2
32 A 100 Ω resistor conducts a current with changing direction and magnitude, as shown.
2
current / A
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
time / ms
–1
What is the mean power dissipated in the resistor?
A 100 W B 150 W C 250 W D 400 W
33 Which graph shows the I–V characteristic of a filament lamp?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

16
34 In the circuit shown, X is a variable resistor whose resistance can be changed from 5.0 Ω to
500 Ω. The e.m.f. of the battery is 12.0 V. It has negligible internal resistance.
40 Ω
12.0 V
X output
What is the maximum range of values of potential difference across the output?
A 1.3 V to 11.1 V
B 1.3 V to 12.0 V
C 1.5 V to 11.1 V
D 1.5 V to 12.0 V
35 There is a current from P to R in the resistor network shown.
3V 6V
Q
P R
S
5V
The potential difference (p.d.) between P and Q is 3 V.
The p.d. between Q and R is 6 V.
The p.d. between P and S is 5 V.
Which row in the table is correct?
p.d. between p.d. between

Q and S S and R
A 2V 4V
B 2V 10 V
C 3V 4V
D 3V 10 V
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

17
36 Two resistors of resistances R1 and R2 are connected in parallel.
R1
X Y
R2
What is the combined resistance between X and Y?

R1 R 2 R1 + R 2 R1
A R1 + R2 B C D
R1 + R 2 R1 R 2 R2
37 A voltmeter is used to monitor the operation of an electric motor. The motor speed is controlled
by a variable resistor. A fixed resistor is used to limit the speed.
The current in the motor is gradually changed.
In which circuit is the voltmeter reading proportional to the current in the motor?
M
+
A supply
–
M
+
B supply
–
M
+
C supply
–
M
+
D V supply
–

18
38 Which statement describes β– decay in terms of a simple quark model?
A A down quark changes to an up quark and emits an electron and an electron antineutrino.
B A down quark changes to an up quark and emits a positron and an electron neutrino.
C An up quark changes to a down quark and emits an electron and an electron antineutrino.
D An up quark changes to a down quark and emits a positron and an electron neutrino.
39 Which word equation represents β+ decay?
A proton → neutron + electron + electron antineutrino
B proton → neutron + electron + electron neutrino
C proton → neutron + positron + electron antineutrino
D proton → neutron + positron + electron neutrino
40 Which statement about the alpha-particle scattering experiment provides evidence for the
existence of the nucleus?
A A tiny proportion of the alpha-particles are deflected through large angles.

B Slower alpha-particles are deflected through larger angles.
C The kinetic energies of the deflected alpha-particles are unchanged.
D The number of alpha-particles deflected depends on the thickness of the foil.
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/11/M/J/16

PHYSICS 9702/12
1 hour 15 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*0353395208*

IB16 06_9702_12/4RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
f sv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
4πε 0r
1
QV
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq

t1
2

4
1 Which quantity with its unit is correct?
A acceleration of a bicycle = 1.4 m s–1

B electric current in a lamp = 0.25 A s–1
C electric potential difference across a battery = 8.0 J C–1
D kinetic energy of a car = 4500 N m–1
2 The luminosity L of a star is given by
L = 4πr 2σT 4
where
r is the radius of the star,

T is the temperature of the star,
σ is a constant with units W m–2 K–4.
What are the SI base units of L ?
A kg m2 s–1 B kg m2 s–2 C kg m2 s–3 D kg m2 s–4
3 The diagram shows two vectors X and Y, drawn to scale.
Y
X
If X = Y – Z, which diagram best represents the vector Z?
A B C D
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

5
4 The diagram shows a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) being used to measure the rate of rotation
of a flywheel.
flywheel
10 cm
M coil
The flywheel has a small magnet M mounted on it. Each time the magnet passes the coil, a
voltage pulse is generated, which is passed to the c.r.o. The display of the c.r.o. is 10 cm wide.
The flywheel is rotating at 3000 revolutions per minute.
Which time-base setting will display clearly separate pulses on the screen?
A 1 s cm–1 B 10 ms cm–1 C 100 µs cm–1 D 1 µs cm–1
5 A student determines the density ρ of steel by taking measurements from a steel wire.
mass m = 6.2 ± 0.1 g
length l = 25.0 ± 0.1 cm
diameter d = 2.00 ± 0.01 mm
He uses the equation ρ = 4m2 .

πd l
What is the percentage uncertainty in his calculated value of density?
A 1.1% B 1.8% C 2.5% D 3.0%

6
6 The acceleration of free fall on the Moon is 1.6 m s–2. The Moon has no atmosphere. An astronaut
standing on the surface of the Moon drops a feather.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the speed of the feather during the first second of its
fall?
A B
speed 1.6 speed 1.6

/ m s–1 / m s–1
0 0
0 1 0 1
time / s time / s
C D
speed 1.6 speed 1.6

/ m s–1 / m s–1
0 0
0 1 0 1
time / s time / s
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

7
7 A tennis ball is released from rest at the top of a tall building.
Which graph best represents the variation with time t of the acceleration a of the ball as it falls,
assuming that the effect of air resistance is not negligible?
A B
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
a a
0 0
0 t 0 t

8
8 The graph shows how the velocity v of an object moving in a straight line varies with time t from
t = 0 to t = T.
0
0 T t
Which graph represents the displacement s of the object in the time t = 0 to t = T ?
A B
s s
0
0 T t
0
0 T t
C D
s s
0 0
0 T t 0 T t
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

9
9 A ball falls vertically onto horizontal ground and rebounds, as shown.
p2
p1
before after
The ball has momentum p1 downwards just before hitting the ground. After rebounding, the ball
leaves the ground with momentum p2 upwards. The ball is in contact with the ground for 0.020 s.
During this time interval, an average resultant force of 25 N acts on the ball.
What is a possible combination of values for p1 and p2?
p1 / kg m s–1 p2 / kg m s–1
A 0.15 0.65
B 0.20 0.30
C 0.30 0.20
D 0.65 0.15

10
10 A sphere falls from rest through the air. The graph shows the variation with time of the sphere’s
velocity.
velocity
0
0 time
Which diagram shows the forces acting on the sphere when it is at the velocity corresponding to
point P on the graph?
A B C D
air resistance
air resistance
air resistance
weight weight weight weight
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

11
11 A ball of mass m travelling at velocity u collides with a stationary ball of mass M. After collision
the two balls travel at velocities v and V respectively, in the directions shown.
m v
m u M 30°
not to 40°
before collision M
scale
V
after collision
A student writes three equations relating to the collision.
Which row in the table indicates the correct and incorrect equations?
mv sin 30° = mu =
mu = MV + mv
MV sin 40° mv cos 30° + MV cos 40°
A correct correct correct

B incorrect correct incorrect
C correct incorrect incorrect
D incorrect correct correct
12 A light rigid rod XY has an object of weight W fixed at one end. The rod is in equilibrium, resting
on a roller at Z and a vertical wall at X. The roller exerts a force R on the rod as shown. The
diagram shows the directions, but not the magnitudes, of the forces R and W.
wall Y
W
R
What is the direction of the force on the rod at X?
A B C D

12
13 In a large container in an oil refinery, three oils of different densities are mixed. No chemical
activity occurs.
The mixture consists of
1200 kg of oil of density 1100 kg m–3,

1500 kg of oil of density 860 kg m–3,
4000 kg of oil of density 910 kg m–3.
What is the density of the mixture?
14 Two coplanar forces act on the rim of a wheel. The forces are equal in magnitude.
Which arrangement of forces provides only a couple?
A B C D
15 The density of air on the Earth decreases almost linearly with height from 1.22 kg m–3 at sea level
to 0.74 kg m–3 at an altitude of 5000 m.
Atmospheric pressure at the Earth’s surface on a particular day is 100 000 Pa. The value of g
between the Earth’s surface and an altitude of 5000 m can be considered to have a constant
value of 9.7 m s–2.
What will be the atmospheric pressure at an altitude of 5000 m?
A 36 000 Pa B 48 000 Pa C 52 000 Pa D 59 000 Pa
16 A parachutist is falling at constant (terminal) velocity.
Which statement is not correct?
A Gravitational potential energy is converted into kinetic energy of the air.

B Gravitational potential energy is converted into kinetic energy of the parachutist.
C Gravitational potential energy is converted into thermal energy of the air.
D Gravitational potential energy is converted into thermal energy of the parachutist.
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

13
17 A boy on a bicycle starts from rest and rolls down a hill inclined at 30° to the horizontal.
The boy and bicycle have a combined mass of 25 kg.
There is a frictional force of 30 N, which is independent of the velocity of the bicycle.
What is the kinetic energy of the boy and the bicycle after rolling 20 m down the slope?
A 1850 J B 2450 J C 3050 J D 3640 J
18 An escalator in an underground station has 250 people standing on it and is moving with a
velocity of 4.3 m s–1. The average mass of a person is 78 kg and the angle of the escalator to the
horizontal is 40°.
What is the minimum power required to lift these people?
A 54 kW B 64 kW C 530 kW D 630 kW
19 An electric motor operating a lift has an output power of 20 kW.
motor
cable
20 m
lift and
passengers
1500 kg
The lift and passengers have a combined mass of 1500 kg. The motor raises the lift through a
distance of 20 m.
How long does it take?
A 6s B 15 s C 30 s D 60 s
20 A spring balance consists of a spring of length 20.0 cm with a hook attached.
When a fish of mass 3.0 kg is suspended from the hook, the new length of the spring is 27.0 cm.
What is the spring constant of the spring?
A 4.2 N m–1 B 43 N m–1 C 110 N m–1 D 420 N m–1

14
21 A metal wire is attached at one end to a fixed point and a load is hung from the other end so that
the wire hangs vertically. The load is increased from zero to 20 N. This causes the wire to extend
elastically by 5.0 mm. The load is then reduced to 12 N and the extension decreases to 3.0 mm.
load / N
20
12
0
0 3.0 5.0
extension / mm
How much strain energy is released during the unloading process?
A 0.8 × 10–2 J B 1.8 × 10–2 J C 2.4 × 10–2 J D 3.2 × 10–2 J
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

15
22 A microphone connected to the Y-plates of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.) is placed in front of

a loudspeaker. The trace on the screen of the c.r.o. is shown.
1 cm
1 cm
The time-base setting is 0.5 ms cm–1 and the Y-plate sensitivity is 0.2 mV cm–1.
What is the frequency of the sound from the loudspeaker and what is the amplitude of the trace
on the c.r.o.?
frequency amplitude
/ Hz / mV
A 330 0.6
B 330 1.2
C 670 0.6
D 670 1.2
23 A source of sound of frequency 1000 Hz moves away from a stationary observer at a speed of
30.0 m s–1. The speed of sound is 330 m s–1.
What is the frequency of the sound heard by the observer?
A 909 Hz B 917 Hz C 1090 Hz D 1100 Hz
24 Each of the principal radiations of the electromagnetic spectrum has a range of wavelengths.
Which wavelength is correctly linked to its radiation?
wavelength
radiation
/m
A 10–9 gamma ray

B 10–5 microwave
C 10–8 ultraviolet
D 10–14 X-ray

16
25 A stationary wave is set up on a stretched string.
The diagram shows the string at two instants of time when it has maximum displacement.
The oscillations of point P on the string have amplitude A.
What is the distance moved by P from the position shown in the diagram after half a time period
of the wave?
A 0 B A C 2A D 4A
26 Which statement is an example of the diffraction of light?
A the addition of the amplitudes of two beams of light which are in phase
B the change in direction of a beam of light when passing from air into water
C the separation of a beam of white light into a spectrum of colours using a prism
D the spreading of a beam of light as it passes through a small hole
27 Sound waves of wavelength λ are emitted by a loudspeaker and pass through two slits P and Q.
Two sound waves from the slits meet at R.
R
microphone
P
Q
loudspeaker
sound barrier
with two slits
What is the condition for an intensity maximum (loud sound) to be detected by a microphone
at R?
A The amplitudes of the two waves at R must be the same.
B The distance PQ must be smaller than the wavelength λ.

C The two waves from the slits must have travelled the same distance to R.
D The two waves must be in phase at R.
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

17
28 Coherent light passes through a double slit, producing bright and dark fringes on a screen placed
parallel to the plane of the double slit. The intensity of the light from each of the slits is initially the
same.
The intensity of the light passing through one of the slits in the double slit is now increased. The
frequency of the light remains constant.
What is the effect on the appearance of the fringes on the screen?
separation maximum intensity

of fringes of dark fringes
A decreases no change
B increases greater
C no change greater
D no change no change
29 Which diagram shows the pattern of the electric field between a positively charged metal sphere
and a negatively charged metal plate?
A B
+ +
– – – – – – – –
C D
+ +
– – – – – – – –

18
30 Before a thunderstorm, the hairs on your head sometimes stand on end.
A hair with mass 0.50 mg and charge 1.0 pC is supported by a force due to an electric field.
Ignore any forces other than the weight of the hair and the electric force.
What is the electric field strength?
A 4.9 × 103 N C–1
B 4.9 × 105 N C–1
C 4.9 × 106 N C–1
D 4.9 × 109 N C–1
31 Two parallel metal plates, 4.0 cm apart, are at electric potentials of 800 V and 2000 V. Points X, Y
and Z are situated in the space between the plates at distances of 1.0 cm, 2.0 cm and 3.0 cm from
the lower plate.
2000 V
Z
3.0 cm
metal
4.0 cm Y
plates
2.0 cm
X
1.0 cm
800 V
What is the electric field strength, in V m–1, at X, Y and Z?
X Y Z
A 300 600 900

B 1100 1400 1700
C 3.0 × 104 3.0 × 104 3.0 × 104
D 5.0 × 104 5.0 × 104 5.0 × 104
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

19
32 The potential difference V across a filament lamp is slowly raised from zero to its normal
operating value.
Which graph represents the variation with V of the current I in the lamp?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
33 Two lamps are connected in series to a 250 V power supply. One lamp is rated 240 V, 60 W and
the other is rated 10 V, 2.5 W.
Which statement most accurately describes what happens?
A Both lamps light at less than their normal brightness.

B Both lamps light at their normal brightness.
C Only the 240 V lamp lights.
D The 10 V lamp blows.
34 Which equation is used to define resistance?
A energy = (current)2 × resistance × time
B potential difference = current × resistance
C power = (current)2 × resistance
D resistivity = resistance × area ÷ length
35 The charge that a fully charged 12 V car battery can supply is 100 kC. The starter motor of the car
requires a current of 200 A for an average period of 2.0 s. The battery does not recharge because
of a fault.
What is the maximum number of times the starter motor of the car can be used?
A 21 B 25 C 42 D 250

20
36 A potential divider circuit is formed by connecting a battery of negligible internal resistance in

series with two variable resistors, as shown.
RX RY
VX
The variable resistors have resistances RX and RY.

VX is the potential difference across resistance RX.
RX and RY are both changed at the same time.
Which combination of changes must cause VX to increase?
RX RY
A larger larger
B larger smaller
C smaller larger
D smaller smaller
37 In the circuit shown, contact may be made at any point along the 3 Ω resistor (potentiometer).
9V
2Ω 3Ω 4Ω
output
voltage
The battery has e.m.f. 9 V and negligible internal resistance.
What is the maximum range of the output voltage?
A 0–2 V B 0–5 V C 2–3 V D 2–5 V
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

21
185
38 The gold nucleus 79 Au undergoes alpha decay.
What are the nucleon number and proton number of the nucleus formed by this decay?
A 183 79
B 183 77
C 181 77
D 181 75
39 Which row gives the correct classification of protons, electrons and neutrinos?
protons electrons neutrinos
A hadrons leptons hadrons

B hadrons leptons leptons
C leptons hadrons hadrons
D leptons hadrons leptons
40 Which equation represents β+ decay?
A neutron → proton + positron + antineutrino
B neutron → proton + positron + neutrino
C proton → neutron + positron + antineutrino
D proton → neutron + positron + neutrino
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

22
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

23
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

24
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/M/J/16

PHYSICS 9702/13
1 hour 15 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*6375742808*

IB16 06_9702_13/3RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
f sv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
4πε 0r
1
QV
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq

t1
2

4
1 Which list contains only SI base units?
A ampere, kelvin, joule, gram

B kilogram, newton, metre, ampere
C metre, coulomb, second, kelvin
D second, kelvin, ampere, kilogram
2 The stress σ needed to fracture a particular solid is given by the equation
γE
σ= k
d
where E is the Young modulus, d is the distance between planes of atoms, and k is a constant
with no units.
What are the SI base units of γ ?
A kg m s–2 B kg s–2 C kg m s–1 D kg s–1
3 Vectors P and Q are drawn to scale.
P Q
Which diagram represents the vector (P – Q)?
A B C D
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

5
4 A metre rule is supported horizontally by two pivots as shown.
The vertical displacement y at the centre of the rule is given by the equation
y = kML
3
wt 3
where
k is a constant,
L is the distance between the pivots,
M is the mass of the rule,
t is the thickness of the rule and
w is the width of the rule.
In an experiment, the following results are obtained:
L = (80.0 ± 0.2) cm
M = (60 ± 1) g
t = (6.0 ± 0.1) mm
w = (23.0 ± 0.5) mm.
Which measurement contributes most to the uncertainty in the calculated value of y ?
A L B M C t D w

6
5 The following trace is seen on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
The setting of the time-base is then changed from 10 ms cm–1 to 20 ms cm–1 and the Y-plate
sensitivity remains constant.
Which trace is now seen on the screen?
A B
C D
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

7
6 A ball rolls in a straight line up a ramp and then back down the ramp along its original path.
Which graph shows the variation with time of the ball’s velocity?
A B
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
velocity velocity
0 0
0 time 0 time
7 A ball is thrown with velocity V at an angle θ to the horizontal.
θ
x
The acceleration of free fall is g. Assume that air resistance is negligible.
What are the horizontal displacement x and the vertical displacement y after time t?
x y
1
A Vt cos θ Vt sin θ + 2
gt 2
1
B Vt cos θ Vt sin θ – 2
gt 2
1
C Vt sin θ Vt cos θ + 2
gt 2
1
D Vt sin θ Vt cos θ – 2
gt 2

8
8 A ball travels from point X to point Y around a semi-circular track of radius 1.0 m as shown.
north ball
west east
south 1.0 m
What is the displacement of the ball from X to Y?
A 2.0 m
B 2.0 m due south
C 3.1 m
D 3.1 m due south
9 Which row in the table gives the quantities that are conserved in a perfectly elastic collision
between two gas molecules?
total momentum total kinetic energy
A conserved conserved
B conserved not conserved
C not conserved conserved
D not conserved not conserved
10 Two equal masses travel towards each other on a frictionless track at speeds of 60 cm s–1 and
60 cm s–1 30 cm s–1
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

9
11 The IKAROS satellite has mass 320 kg and moves through space using a solar sail of area 20 m2.
The average solar wind pressure is 1.0 × 10–5 N m–2.
What is the acceleration of the satellite caused by the solar wind?
A 3.1 × 10–8 m s–2
B 6.3 × 10–7 m s–2
C 3.2 × 10–3 m s–2
D 6.4 × 10–2 m s–2
12 Three coplanar forces act on an object in the directions shown.
In which diagram could the object be in equilibrium?
A B C D
13 What is the centre of gravity of an object?
A the geometrical centre of the object

B the point at which the weight of the object may be considered to act
C the point on the object about which there is a zero net torque
D the point where gravity acts on the object

10
14 A bicycle pedal is connected to a pivot by a metal bar, as shown.
force 60 N
pedal
bar
12 cm
20 cm
pivot
16 cm
The force on the pedal is 60 N downwards.
What is the moment of this force about the pivot?
A 7.2 N m B 9.6 N m C 12 N m D 1200 N m
15 For a change in depth ∆h in a liquid of density ρ, the change in pressure ∆p is given by

∆p = ∆hρ g where g is the acceleration of free fall.
What is the equation, or principle of physics, used in the derivation of this formula?
A atmospheric pressure decreases with height
B change in gravitational potential energy = mass × g∆h
mass
C ρ=
volume
D the density of a fluid increases with depth
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

11
16 A bungee jumper jumps from a platform and is decelerated by an elastic bungee cord, as shown.
platform bungee
jumper
bungee cord bungee

cord
ground ground
not to
before jumping scale during the jump
When the jumper makes the jump, his initial gravitational potential energy is converted into his
kinetic energy and into elastic potential energy in the cord.
At which part of the jump are all three types of energy non-zero?
A on the platform before the jump

B on the way down before the cord has started to extend
C on the way down as he decelerates
D at the bottom of the jump when he is stationary
17 An object of mass 0.30 kg is thrown vertically upwards from the ground with an initial velocity of
8.0 m s–1. The object reaches a maximum height of 1.9 m.
How much work is done against air resistance as the object rises to its maximum height?
A 4.0 J B 5.6 J C 9.6 J D 15 J
18 A racing car has an output power of 300 kW when travelling at a constant speed of 60 m s–1.
What is the total resistive force acting on the car?
A 5 kN B 10 kN C 50 kN D 100 kN

12
19 The diagram shows the design of a water wheel which drives a generator to produce electrical
power. The flow rate of the water is 200 kg s–1. The generator supplies a current of 32 A at a
voltage of 230 V.
water
direction of rotation
8.0 m
generator
Ignoring any changes in kinetic energy of the water, what is the efficiency of the system?
A 14% B 16% C 22% D 47%
20 The diagram shows the force-extension graph for a sample of material. The sample is stretched
and then returns to its original length.
force
area P
area Q
area R
0
0
extension
Which area represents the work done to stretch the sample?
A P+Q B P only C Q+R D R only
21 A metal wire of cross-sectional area 0.20 mm2 hangs vertically from a fixed point. A load of 84 N is
then attached to the lower end of the wire. The wire obeys Hooke’s law and increases in length
by 0.30%.
What is the Young modulus of the metal of the wire?
A 1.4 × 105 Pa
B 1.4 × 108 Pa
C 1.4 × 109 Pa
D 1.4 × 1011 Pa
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

13
22 The diagram shows a beam supported on two pivots.
X
Y
Which statement describes the state of the top surface X and of the bottom surface Y?
A Both X and Y are in compression.

B Both X and Y are in tension.
C X is in compression and Y is in tension.
D X is in tension and Y is in compression.
23 A beam of red laser light has length 1.0 m.
What is the order of magnitude of the number of wavelengths of the red light in 1.0 m?
A 104 B 106 C 108 D 1010
24 When a car travelling with constant velocity passes a stationary observer, the observer hears a
change in the frequency of the sound emitted by the car.
A The change in frequency is greater as the car moves away than as it approaches.
B The greater the speed of the car, the greater the change in observed frequency.
C The observed frequency is lower as the car moves towards the observer and higher as the
car moves away from the observer.
D The volume of the sound heard by the observer does not change as the car approaches.

14
25 The intensity I of sound is inversely proportional to the square of the distance x from the source
of the sound. This can be represented as
I ∝ 12 .
x
source S P Q
of sound
r
2r
Air molecules at point P, a distance r from the source S, oscillate with amplitude 8.0 µm.
Point Q is situated a distance 2r from S.
What is the amplitude of oscillation of air molecules at Q?
A 1.4 µm B 2.0 µm C 2.8 µm D 4.0 µm
26 A hill separates a television (TV) transmitter from a house. The transmitter cannot be seen from
the house. However, the house has good TV reception.
hill
TV transmitter house
By which wave effect at the hill could the TV signal reach the house?
A coherence
B diffraction
C interference
D reflection
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

15
27 A diffraction grating with N lines per metre is used to deflect light of various wavelengths λ.
The graph shows a relation between the deflection angle θ and λ for different wavelengths in the
n th order interference pattern.
sin θ
0
0 λ
What is the gradient of the graph?
N n 1
A Nn B C D
n N Nn
28 Which wave phenomenon is not needed to explain the pattern of observable fringes produced by
a double slit experiment?
A coherence
B diffraction
C interference
D reflection
29 Which diagram shows the electric field pattern of an isolated negative point charge?
A B C D
– – – –

16
30 An electron is in an electric field of strength 5 × 104 V m–1. The field is the only influence on the
electron.
The mass and charge of an electron are known.
Which quantity can be calculated without any more information?
A the force on the electron

B the momentum of the electron
C the kinetic energy of the electron
D the speed of the electron
31 In an electrolyte, the electric current is carried by charged particles (ions) in solution.
What is not a possible value for the charge on an ion in solution?
A – 4.8 × 10–19 C
B +1.6 × 10–19 C
C +3.2 × 10–19 C
D +4.0 × 10–19 C
32 The graph shows the variation with length of the resistance of a uniform metal wire.
resistance
0
0 length
The gradient of the graph is G.

The wire has cross-sectional area A.
Which expression could be used to calculate the resistivity of the metal of the wire?
A G×A B G C A D G × A2
A G
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

17
33 What describes the electric potential difference between two points in a wire that carries a
current?
A the force required to move a unit positive charge between the points
B the ratio of the energy dissipated between the points to the current
C the ratio of the power dissipated between the points to the current
D the ratio of the power dissipated between the points to the charge moved
34 The graphs show possible current-voltage (I-V ) characteristics for a filament lamp and for a
P Q R S
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
Which row in the table best specifies the correct I-V graphs for the lamp and for the diode?
semiconductor
filament lamp
diode
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S

18
35 A circuit contains a cell, two resistors of resistances R1 and R2 and a variable resistor X. The cell
has negligible internal resistance.
V1
R1
I2 R2
V1 is the potential difference across the resistor of resistance R1.
I2 is the current through the resistor of resistance R2.
The resistance of X is reduced.
What is the effect on V1 and I2?
V1 I2
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

19
36 A 100 cm potentiometer wire QT is connected in series with a 2.00 V cell. Another circuit,
consisting of a 2.00 V cell in series with resistors of resistance 4.00 Ω and 6.00 Ω, is set up
alongside the potentiometer. Connections PQ and RS are then made so that the potential
difference (p.d.) across the 4.00 Ω resistor is balanced against the p.d. across a length L of
potentiometer wire. Both cells have negligible internal resistance.
2.00 V
L
S
Q T
P
4.00 Ω R 6.00 Ω
2.00 V
What is the balance length L?
A 0 cm B 40 cm C 60 cm D 100 cm
37 Two identical batteries each have e.m.f. 6.0 V and internal resistance r. The batteries are
connected to an external resistor of resistance 11 Ω, as shown.
6.0 V
r
6.0 V
r
11 Ω
0.50 A
The current in the external resistor is 0.50 A.
What is the internal resistance r of each battery?
A 1.0 Ω B 2.0 Ω C 4.0 Ω D 6.5 Ω

20
38 A nitrogen-13 nucleus 137 N undergoes beta decay.
In the equations below, ν and represent a neutrino and antineutrino respectively and γ
represents a photon of gamma radiation.
Which equation represents this decay?

13 13
A 7N → 6C + β– + + γ
13 13
B 7N → 6C + β– + ν + γ
13 13
C 7N → 6C + β+ + + γ
13 13
D 7N → 6C + β+ + ν + γ
222 214
39 Radon 86 Rn is the start of a decay chain that forms bismuth 83 Bi by α and β– emission.
For the decay of each nucleus of radon, how many α particles and β– particles are emitted?
α particles β– particles
A 1 1
B 2 1
C 1 2
D 2 2
40 The magnitude of the charge on the proton may be regarded as +1 unit. On this basis, the
charges on the up (u) quark, down (d) quark and their antiquarks ( u and d ) are not whole units.
Which row in the table shows the correct values for the charges on the u, d, u and d quarks?
u d u d
A +2 –1 +2 –1
3 3 3 3
B –2 +1 +2 –1
3 3 3 3
C +2 –1 –2 +1
3 3 3 3
D –2 +1 –2 +1
3 3 3 3
© UCLES 2016 9702/13/M/J/16

* 1 6 7 3 6 0 2 6 0 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/21
Paper 2 AS Level Structured Questions May/June 2016
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/FD) 108390/3
2
Data
speed of light in free space c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1
permeability of free space μ0 = 4π × 10−7 H m−1
permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10−19 C
the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s
unified atomic mass unit 1 u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg
rest mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg
rest mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg
molar gas constant R = 8.31 J K−1 mol−1
the Avogadro constant NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol−1
the Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1
gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2
acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
uniformly accelerated motion s = ut + 2 at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
work done on/by a gas W = p ΔV
Gm
gravitational potential φ =−
r
hydrostatic pressure p = ρgh
1 Nm 2
pressure of an ideal gas p = 3
〈c 〉
V
simple harmonic motion a = − ω 2x

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
electric potential V =
4πε0r
capacitors in series 1/C = 1/C1 + 1/C2 + . . .
energy of charged capacitor W = 12 QV
resistors in parallel 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + . . .
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
alternating current/voltage x = x0 sin ω t
radioactive decay x = x0 exp(−λt )
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) Make estimates of
(i) the mass, in kg, of a wooden metre rule,
mass = ..................................................... kg [1]
(ii) the volume, in cm3, of a cricket ball or a tennis ball.
volume = .................................................. cm3 [1]
(b) A metal wire of length L has a circular cross-section of diameter d, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
The volume V of the wire is given by the expression

πd 2L
V= .
4
The diameter, length and mass M are measured to determine the density of the metal of the
wire. The measured values are:
d = 0.38 ± 0.01 mm,

L = 25.0 ± 0.1 cm,
M = 0.225 ± 0.001 g.
Calculate the density of the metal, with its absolute uncertainty. Give your answer to an
appropriate number of significant figures.
density = ...................................... ± ...................................... kg m–3 [5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16
5
2 A ball is thrown from a point P with an initial velocity u of 12 m s–1 at 50° to the horizontal, as
path of ball
Q
X =12 m s–1
50°
P horizontal
Fig. 2.1
The ball reaches maximum height at Q.
(a) Calculate
(i) the horizontal component of u,
horizontal component = ................................................. m s–1 [1]
(ii) the vertical component of u.
vertical component = ................................................. m s–1 [1]
(b) Show that the maximum height reached by the ball is 4.3 m.
[2]
(c) Determine the magnitude of the displacement PQ.
displacement = ...................................................... m [4]
[Total: 8]
6
3 A ball of mass 150 g is at rest on a horizontal floor, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
ball
floor
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) Calculate the magnitude of the normal contact force from the floor acting on the ball.
force = ...................................................... N [1]
(ii) Explain your working in (i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The ball is now lifted above the floor and dropped so that it falls vertically, as illustrated in
Fig. 3.2.
ball
6.2 m s–1 2.5 m s–1
just before contact just after losing contact
Fig. 3.2
Just before contact with the floor, the ball has velocity 6.2 m s–1 downwards. The ball bounces
from the floor and its velocity just after losing contact with the floor is 2.5 m s–1 upwards. The
ball is in contact with the floor for 0.12 s.
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16

7
(i) State Newton’s second law of motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the average resultant force on the ball when it is in contact with the floor.
magnitude of force = ........................................................... N
direction of force ...............................................................

[3]
(iii) State and explain whether linear momentum is conserved during the collision of the ball
with the floor.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

8
4 (a) State what is meant by elastic potential energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A spring is extended by applying a force. The variation with extension x of the force F is
shown in Fig. 4.1 for the range of values of x from 20 cm to 40 cm.
11.0
10.0
9.0
)/N
8.0
7.0
6.0
5.0
20 30 40
[ / cm
Fig. 4.1
(i) Use data from Fig. 4.1 to show that the spring obeys Hooke’s law for this range of
extensions.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16

9
(ii) Use Fig. 4.1 to calculate
1. the spring constant,
2. the work done extending the spring from x = 20 cm to x = 40 cm.
work done = ....................................................... J [3]
(c) A force is applied to the spring in (b) to give an extension of 50 cm.
State how you would check that the spring has not exceeded its elastic limit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

10
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16

11
5 The variation with time t of the displacement y of a wave X, as it passes a point P, is shown in
Fig. 5.1.
4.0
3.0
\ / cm
ZDYH;
2.0
1.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
W / ms
–1.0
–2.0
–3.0
–4.0
Fig. 5.1
The intensity of wave X is I.
(a) Use Fig. 5.1 to determine the frequency of wave X.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]
(b) A second wave Z with the same frequency as wave X also passes point P.
Wave Z has intensity 2I. The phase difference between the two waves is 90°.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch the variation with time t of the displacement y of wave Z.
Show your working.
[3]

12
(c) A double-slit interference experiment is used to determine the wavelength of light emitted
from a laser, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
0.45 mm
laser light
double slit ' screen
The separation of the slits is 0.45 mm. The fringes are viewed on a screen at a distance D
from the double slit.
The fringe width x is measured for different distances D. The variation with D of x is shown in
Fig. 5.3.
5.0
4.0
[ / mm
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
'/m
Fig. 5.3
(i) Use the gradient of the line in Fig. 5.3 to determine the wavelength, in nm, of the laser
light.
wavelength = .................................................... nm [4]
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16

13
(ii) The separation of the slits is increased. State and explain the effects, if any, on the graph
of Fig. 5.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]

14
6 (a) Define the coulomb.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A resistor X is connected to a cell as shown in Fig. 6.1.
$
l
Fig. 6.1
The resistor is a wire of cross-sectional area A and length l. The current in the wire is I.
Show that the average drift speed v of the charge carriers in X is given by the equation
I
v=
nAe
where e is the charge on a charge carrier and n is the number of charge carriers per unit
volume in X.
[3]
(c) A 12 V battery with negligible internal resistance is connected to two resistors Y and Z, as
shown in Fig. 6.2.
12 V
Y Z
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16
15
The resistors are made from wires of the same material. The wire of Y has a diameter d and
length l. The wire of Z has a diameter 2d and length 2l.

average drift speed of the charge carriers in Y .
average drift speed of the charge carriers in Z
ratio = .......................................................... [3]
(ii) Show that

resistance of Y = 2.
resistance of Z
[2]
(iii) Determine the potential difference across Y.
(iv) Determine the ratio

power dissipated in Y .
power dissipated in Z
ratio = .......................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]

16
7 (a) Give one example of
a hadron: ...................................................................................................................................
a lepton: ....................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) Describe, in terms of the simple quark model,
(i) a proton,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a neutron.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Beta particles may be emitted during the decay of an unstable nucleus of an atom. The
emission of a beta particle is due to the decay of a neutron.
(i) Complete the following word equation for the particles produced in this reaction.
neutron .................................... + .................................... + .................................... [1]
(ii) State the change in quark composition of the particles during this reaction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 9702/21/M/J/16

* 6 2 2 5 9 6 6 8 8 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/FD) 108391/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A man travels on a toboggan down a slope covered with snow from point A to point B and
then to point C. The path is illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
man
toboggan, at rest
A
40°
horizontal
B
horizontal 20°
C
The slope AB makes an angle of 40° with the horizontal and the slope BC makes an angle of
20° with the horizontal. Friction is not negligible.
The man and toboggan have a combined mass of 95 kg.
The man starts from rest at A and has constant acceleration between A and B. The man
takes 19 s to reach B. His speed is 36 m s–1 at B.
(i) Calculate the acceleration from A to B.
acceleration = ................................................. m s–2 [2]
(ii) Show that the distance moved from A to B is 340 m.
[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16
5
(iii) For the man and toboggan moving from A to B, calculate
1. the change in kinetic energy,
change in kinetic energy = ....................................................... J [2]
2. the change in potential energy.
change in potential energy = ....................................................... J [2]
(iv) Use your answers in (iii) to determine the average frictional force that acts on the
toboggan between A and B.
frictional force = ...................................................... N [2]
(v) A parachute opens on the toboggan as it passes point B. There is a constant deceleration
of 3.0 m s–2 from B to C.
Calculate the frictional force that produces this deceleration between B and C.
frictional force = ...................................................... N [2]
[Total: 12]

6
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a liquid in a cylindrical container.
F\OLQGULFDO
FRQWDLQHU
OLTXLG
K
DUHD$
Fig. 2.1
The cross-sectional area of the container is A. The height of the column of liquid is h and the
density of the liquid is ρ.
Show that the pressure p due to the liquid on the base of the cylinder is given by
p = ρgh.
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

7
(b) The variation with height h of the total pressure P on the base of the cylinder in (a) is shown in
Fig. 2.2.
3.0
3 / 105 Pa
2.0
1.0
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
K/m
Fig. 2.2
(i) Explain why the line of the graph in Fig. 2.2 does not pass through the origin (0,0).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Use data from Fig. 2.2 to calculate the density of the liquid in the cylinder.
density = .............................................. kg m–3 [2]
[Total: 6]

8
3 (a) Define the Young modulus.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The Young modulus of steel is 1.9 × 1011 Pa. The Young modulus of copper is 1.2 × 1011 Pa.
A steel wire and a copper wire each have the same cross-sectional area and length. The two
wires are each extended by equal forces.
(i) Use the definition of the Young modulus to determine the ratio
extension of the copper wire .

extension of the steel wire
ratio = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) The two wires are each extended by a force. Both wires obey Hooke’s law.
On Fig. 3.1, sketch a graph for each wire to show the variation with extension of the
force.
Label the line for steel with the letter S and the line for copper with the letter C.
force
0
0 extension
Fig. 3.1
[1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

9
4 (a) By reference to the direction of the propagation of energy, state what is meant by a longitudinal
wave and by a transverse wave.
longitudinal: ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
transverse: ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The intensity of a sound wave passing through air is given by
Ι = Kvρ f 2A2
where Ι is the intensity (power per unit area),

K is a constant without units,
v is the speed of sound,
ρ is the density of air,
f is the frequency of the wave
and A is the amplitude of the wave.
Show that both sides of the equation have the same SΙ base units.
[3]

10
(c) (i) Describe the Doppler effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A distant star is moving away from a stationary observer.
State the effect of the motion on the light observed from the star.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A car travels at a constant speed towards a stationary observer. The horn of the car sounds at
a frequency of 510 Hz and the observer hears a frequency of 550 Hz. The speed of sound in
air is 340 m s–1.
Calculate the speed of the car.
speed = ................................................ m s–1 [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

11
5 (a) Light of a single wavelength is incident on a diffraction grating. Explain the part played by
diffraction and interference in the production of the first order maximum by the diffraction
grating.
diffraction: .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
interference: ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The diffraction grating illustrated in Fig. 5.1 is used with light of wavelength 486 nm.
second order
first order
light
wavelength 486 nm
59.4° zero order
diffraction
grating first order
second order screen
The orders of the maxima produced are shown on the screen in Fig. 5.1. The angle between
the two second order maxima is 59.4°.
Calculate the number of lines per millimetre of the grating.
number of lines per millimetre = ................................................ mm–1 [3]
[Total: 6]
12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

13
6 Two parallel vertical metal plates are connected to a power supply, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
metal plate metal plate
16 mm
+ –
Fig. 6.1
The separation of the plates is 16 mm.
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw at least six field lines to represent the electric field between the plates. [1]
(b) An α-particle travels in a vacuum between the two plates.
The electric field does work on the α-particle. The gain in kinetic energy of the α-particle is
15 keV.
Calculate the electric field strength between the plates.
electric field strength = ................................................ V m–1 [4]
[Total: 5]

14
7 (a) Electric current is a flow of charge carriers. The charge on the carriers is quantised. Explain
what is meant by quantised.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 9.0 V and internal resistance 0.25 Ω is connected in
series with two identical resistors X and a resistor Y, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
battery
9.0 V 0.251
X Y X
0.15 1 2.7 1 0.15 1
Fig. 7.1
The resistance of each resistor X is 0.15 Ω and the resistance of resistor Y is 2.7 Ω.
(i) Show that the current in the circuit is 2.8 A.
[3]
(ii) Calculate the potential difference across the battery.
potential difference = ...................................................... V [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

15
(c) Each resistor X connected in the circuit in (b) is made from a wire with a cross-sectional area
of 2.5 mm2. The number of free electrons per unit volume in the wire is 8.5 × 1029 m–3.
(i) Calculate the average drift speed of the electrons in X.
drift speed = ................................................ m s–1 [2]
(ii) The two resistors X are replaced by two resistors Z made of the same material and
length but with half the diameter.
Describe and explain the difference between the average drift speed in Z and that in X.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

16
8 (a) State the name of the class (group) to which each of the following belongs:
electron ...............................................................
neutron ................................................................
neutrino ...............................................................
proton ..................................................................
[2]
(b) A proton may decay into a neutron together with two other particles.
(i) Complete the following to give an equation that represents this proton decay.
1p ........ n + ................. + .................

1 ........ ........ ........ [2]
(ii) Write an equation for this decay in terms of quark composition.
[1]
(iii) State the name of the force responsible for this decay.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/M/J/16

* 4 1 5 0 1 4 1 6 3 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/23
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KN/SG) 108408/2
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) A list of quantities that are either scalars or vectors is shown in Fig. 1.1.
quantity scalar vector

distance ✓
energy
momentum
power
time
weight
Fig. 1.1
Complete Fig. 1.1 to indicate whether each quantity is a scalar or a vector.
One line has been completed as an example. [2]
(b) A girl runs 120 m due north in 15 s. She then runs 80 m due east in 12 s.
(i) Sketch a vector diagram to show the path taken by the girl. Draw and label her resultant
displacement R.
north
east
[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

5
(ii) Calculate, for the girl,
1. the average speed,
average speed = ................................................. m s–1 [1]
2. the magnitude of the average velocity v and its angle with respect to the direction of
the initial path.
magnitude of v = ...................................................... m s–1
angle = ............................................................. °
[3]
[Total: 7]
2 (a) Describe the effects, one in each case, of systematic errors and random errors when using a
micrometer screw gauge to take readings for the diameter of a wire.
systematic errors: .....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
random errors: ..........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Distinguish between precision and accuracy when measuring the diameter of a wire.
precision: ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
accuracy: ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 4]
6
3 (a) Explain what is meant by gravitational potential energy and by kinetic energy.
gravitational potential energy: ...................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
kinetic energy: ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A motion sensor is used to measure the velocity of a ball falling vertically towards the ground,
motion sensor
v
A
B
ground
Fig. 3.1
The ball passes through points A and B as it falls. The ball has a mass of 1.5 kg.
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

7
The variation with time t of the velocity v of the ball as it falls from A to B is shown in Fig. 3.2.
8.0
7.0
6.0
v / m s–1
5.0
4.0
3.0
0.40 0.60 0.80 t /s
ball at position A ball at position B
Fig. 3.2
Use Fig. 3.2 to calculate, for the ball falling from A to B,
(i) the displacement,
displacement = .......................................................m [3]
(ii) the acceleration,
acceleration = ................................................. m s–2 [2]

8
(iii) the change in kinetic energy.
change in kinetic energy = ........................................................J [3]
(c) Show that the work done by the gravitational field on the ball in (b) as it moves from A to B is
equal to the change in kinetic energy.
[2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

9
4 A spring balance is used to weigh a cylinder that is immersed in oil, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
spring balance
thin wire
cross-sectional area 13 cm2
cylinder
5.0 cm
oil
Fig. 4.1
The reading on the spring balance is 4.8 N. The length of the cylinder is 5.0 cm and the cross-
sectional area of the cylinder is 13 cm2. The weight of the cylinder is 5.3 N.
(a) The cylinder is in equilibrium when it is immersed in the oil. Explain this in terms of the forces
acting on the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the density of the oil.
density = ............................................... kg m–3 [3]
[Total: 4]

10
5 (a) State the law of conservation of momentum.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two particles A and B collide elastically, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
y-direction
vA
A 60°
A B x-direction x-direction
500 m s–1 at rest 30°

B
vB
Fig. 5.1
The initial velocity of A is 500 m s–1 in the x-direction and B is at rest.
The velocity of A after the collision is vA at 60° to the x-direction. The velocity of B after the
collision is vB at 30° to the x-direction.
The mass m of each particle is 1.67 × 10–27 kg.
(i) Explain what is meant by the particles colliding elastically.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the total initial momentum of A and B.
momentum = .....................................................N s [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

11
(iii) State an expression in terms of m, vA and vB for the total momentum of A and B after the
collision
1. in the x-direction,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. in the y-direction.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(iv) Calculate the magnitudes of the velocities vA and vB after the collision.
vA = ...................................................... m s–1
vB = ...................................................... m s–1
[3]
[Total: 9]

12
6 (a) Define the ohm.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A 15 V battery with negligible internal resistance is connected to two resistors P and Q, as
shown in Fig. 6.1.
15 V
12 1
Q
Fig. 6.1
The resistors are made of wires of the same material. The wire of P has diameter d and
length 2l. The wire of Q has diameter 2d and length l.
The resistance of P is 12 Ω.
(i) Show that the resistance of Q is 1.5 Ω.
[3]
(ii) Calculate the total power dissipated in the resistors P and Q.
power = ...................................................... W [3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

13
(iii) Determine the ratio

average drift speed of the charge carriers in P
.
average drift speed of the charge carriers in Q
ratio = .......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

14
7 (a) Apparatus used to produce stationary waves on a stretched string is shown in Fig. 7.1.
frequency
generator light string
pulley
vibrator wheel
masses
Fig. 7.1
The frequency generator is switched on.
(i) Describe two adjustments that can be made to the apparatus to produce stationary
waves on the string.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the features that are seen on the stretched string that indicate stationary waves
have been produced.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

15
(b) The variation with time t of the displacement x of a particle caused by a progressive wave R is
shown in Fig. 7.2. For the same particle, the variation with time t of the displacement x caused
by a second wave S is also shown in Fig. 7.2.
4.0
R
3.0
x / cm 2.0
S
1.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
t /s
ï
ï
ï
ï
Fig. 7.2
(i) Determine the phase difference between wave R and wave S. Include an appropriate
unit.
(ii) Calculate the ratio

intensity of wave R
.
intensity of wave S
ratio = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]

16
8 (a) Distinguish between an α-particle and a β+-particle.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State the equation that shows the decay of a particle in a nucleus that results in β+ emission.
All particles in the equation should be shown in the notation that is usually used for the
representation of nuclides.
[2]
(c) (i) State the quark composition of
1. a proton,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. a neutron.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Use the quark model to explain the charge on a proton.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/23/M/J/16

* 0 9 4 8 3 9 1 0 8 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/31
2 hours


Total
DC (NH/FD) 109584/3
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a loaded wooden strip.
(a) (i) Use the modelling clay to attach the slotted masses to the centre of the wooden
strip as shown in Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2.
[
wooden strip
small string loop slotted mass
large string loop

springs
Fig. 1.1
slotted masses
modelling clay
end of wooden strip
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Measure and record the distance x between the end of the wooden strip with the
small string loop attached and the centre of the slotted masses as shown in Fig. 1.1.
x = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/31/M/J/16

3
stand
clip clip
stand
loop of spring
bench
Fig. 1.3
(ii) Slide the small string loop over the rod of a stand and fix it in place using a clip.
Slide the free loop of the spring down the rod of the other stand and fix it in place
using the other clip.
(iii) Adjust the apparatus until the large string loop and springs are parallel to the bench.
(iv) Use G-clamps to secure both stands to the bench.
(c) Move the right-hand end of the wooden strip downwards through a distance of
approximately 3 cm. Release the wooden strip.
The wooden strip will oscillate.
Determine the period T of these oscillations.
T = .................................................. [1]

4
(d) Change x by moving the slotted masses along the wooden strip.
For each value of x, adjust the position of the clips so that the large string loop and
springs are parallel to the bench.
Repeat (a)(ii) and (c) until you have five sets of values of x and T.
Include values of T 2 in your table.
[10]
(e) (i) Plot a graph of T 2 on the y-axis against x on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/31/M/J/16

5

6
(f) It is suggested that the quantities T and x are related by the equation
T2 = Px + Q

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/31/M/J/16

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a container on a wooden board.
(a) Measure and record the length w of the shorter side of the wooden board, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
wooden
board
Z
Fig. 2.1
w = .............................................. m [1]
(b) (i) Set up the wooden board as shown in Fig. 2.2.
stand
boss clamp gripping shorter side of board
longer side of
wooden board
15 cm
e
bench
Fig. 2.2
The distance between the bottom of the board and the bench should be
(ii) Measure and record the angle θ as shown in Fig. 2.2.
θ = .................................................. [1]

8
(c) (i) Place the container on the wooden board as shown in Fig. 2.3.
clamp
container
lid
Fig. 2.3
The container should be aligned with the edges of the board as shown in Fig. 2.3.
(ii) Release the container. The container will follow the path shown in Fig. 2.4.
Fig. 2.4
© UCLES 2016 9702/31/M/J/16

9
(iii) Measure and record the distance y, as shown in Fig. 2.4.
y = .............................................. m [2]
(d) (i) Calculate D using

w2 + y2
D= .
w
D = .............................................. m [1]
(ii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your value of D.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

10
(e) (i) Increase the angle θ.
(ii) Repeat (b)(ii), (c) and (d)(i).
θ = ......................................................
y = ................................................... m
D = ................................................... m
[3]
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between D and θ is
D = k sin θ
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/31/M/J/16

11
(ii) Explain whether your results in (f)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/31/M/J/16

* 3 6 2 0 1 6 8 0 6 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/32
2 hours


Total
DC (ST/SG) 109588/3
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the motion of a suspended card shape.
(a) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.1.

Suspend the card from the pin held in the split cork. Ensure that the pin is parallel to the
bench. Suspend the plumb-line from the pin.
pin
A
card
plumb-line
bench
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Measure and record the angle i between the edge of arm B and the plumb-line, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
i = ....................................................... [1]
(ii) Remove the plumb-line from the pin.
(iii) Displace arm B approximately 2 cm to one side and release it so that the card
oscillates.
(iv) Take measurements to find the period T of the oscillations.

Record T.
T = ..................................................... s [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/32/M/J/16

3
(c) (i) Decrease the length of arm B by cutting approximately 3 cm off its end.
(ii) Replace the plumb-line and repeat (b).
i = ........................................................
T = ...................................................... s

4
(d) Continue to decrease the length of arm B.

For each length of arm B, repeat (b) until you have six sets of values for i and T.
You may include your values from (b) and (c).

1
Include values for in your table.
tan i
[9]
1
(e) (i) Plot a graph of T on the y-axis against on the x-axis. [3]
tan i
gradient = .......................................................
y-intercept = .......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/32/M/J/16

5

6
(f) The quantities T and i are related by the equation

p
T= +q
tan i
Use your answers from (e)(iii) to determine the values of p and q.

p = ........................................................
q = ........................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/32/M/J/16

7

8
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the force exerted by a flow of water.
You are provided with two plastic water bottles labelled A and B, each with a hole in the base.
(a) (i) Measure and record the distance h between the two lines marked on bottle A, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
bottle A
lines
Fig. 2.1
h = ................................................. cm [1]
(ii) Measure and record the diameter d of the bottle, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
d = ................................................. cm [1]
(b) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of d.
percentage uncertainty = ...................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/32/M/J/16

9
(c) (i) With the unused stand, clamp the bottle securely by its neck above the tray, as
shown in Fig. 2.2. The base of the bottle should be approximately 20 cm above the
bench.
clamp
bottle
water level boss
stand
hole
stream of water
≈20 cm
tray
bench
Fig. 2.2
Fill the bottle with water.

As the water flows through the hole into the tray, measure and record the time t
for the water level to fall from the upper line to the lower line.
t = ....................................................... [2]

10
(ii) Calculate the flow rate R of the water using

2
rd h
R= .
4t
R = ....................................................... [1]
(iii) When the water stops flowing, empty the water from the tray into one of the jugs
provided.
(d) (i) Refill the bottle with water and position the stand holding the wooden strip so that
the stream of water falls on the end of the strip, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
stand holding
wooden strip
water level clamp
boss
stream of water
wooden strip
mark stand
x1
Fig. 2.3
(ii) When the water level is between the two lines on the bottle, measure and record
the height x1 above the tray of the mark on the wooden strip, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
x1 = ....................................................... [1]
(iii) Move the bottle so that the stream of water is missing the wooden strip, and
measure and record the height x2 above the tray of the mark on the wooden strip.
x2 = .......................................................
(iv) When the water stops flowing, empty the water from the tray into one of the jugs
provided.
© UCLES 2016 9702/32/M/J/16
11
(e) Repeat (a), (c) and (d) using bottle B.
h = ................................................. cm
d = ................................................. cm
t = .......................................................
R = .......................................................
x1 = .......................................................
x2 = .......................................................
[3]
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between x1, x2 and R is
x2 – x1 = kR
first value of k = .......................................................
second value of k = .......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/32/M/J/16

* 3 2 4 1 8 3 3 2 2 5 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
2 hours


Total
DC (LK/CGW) 109591/2
2
1 In this experiment, you will investigate a wooden strip acted on by several forces.
spring clamp
stand
y
boss
boss
nail θ
wooden strip
string
pulley
boss
mass m
bench
Fig. 1.1
The mass m should be 100 g.
The angle θ between the wooden strip and the string should be approximately 45°.
(ii) Adjust the apparatus so that the spring is vertical and the wooden strip is parallel to
the bench.
(b) (i) Record the mass m.
m = ......................................................
(ii) Measure and record the length y of the coiled part of the spring.
y = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Measure and record θ.
θ = .................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/M/J/16

3
(c) (i) Add 100 g to the mass hanger.
(ii) Adjust the height of the boss holding the nail until the wooden strip is parallel to the
bench.
(iii) Measure and record m, y and θ.
m = ......................................................
y = ......................................................
θ = ......................................................

4
(d) Change m and repeat (c)(ii) and (c)(iii) until you have six sets of values of m, y and θ.
You may include your values from (b) and (c).
Include values of m sin θ in your table.
[10]
(e) (i) Plot a graph of y on the y-axis against m sin θ on the x-axis. [3]
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/M/J/16

5

6
(f) The quantities y, m and θ are related by the equation
y = P m sin θ + Q


P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/M/J/16

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the movement of a loaded wire.

(a) (i) Take the shorter of the two wires.
(ii) Measure and record the diameter d of the wire.
d = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Calculate the cross-sectional area A of the wire using

rd 2
A= .
4
A = .................................................. [1]

8
(b) (i) Secure the hook of the mass hanger to one end of the wire leaving at least 20 cm of
excess wire.
The wire may be wrapped around the hook several times.
(ii) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.1.
The length L of wire between the clip and the hook of the mass hanger should be
front view side view
rod of clamp
clip
wire
L
mass hanger
bench
Fig. 2.1
(iii) Measure and record L.
L = .................................................. [1]
(iv) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of L.
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/M/J/16

9
(c) (i) Calculate C where

L
C= .
A
C = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Justify the number of significant figures that you have given for your value of C.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) (i) Twist the mass hanger through approximately 180°.
Release the mass hanger. The mass hanger will oscillate as shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2
(ii) Take measurements to determine the period T of the oscillations.
Record T.
T = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Remove the wire from the mass hanger.

10
(e) (i) Take the longer wire. Repeat (a)(ii) and (a)(iii).
d = ......................................................
A = ......................................................
(ii) Secure the hook of the mass hanger to one end of the wire leaving 40 cm of excess
wire.
Repeat (b)(ii), (b)(iii), (c)(i) and (d) for a value of L of approximately 30 cm.
L = ......................................................
C = ......................................................
T = ......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/M/J/16

11
(f) It is suggested that the relationship between T and C is
T = kC
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
(ii) Explain whether your results in (f)(i) support the suggested relationship.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/M/J/16

* 1 1 4 0 0 2 8 3 8 2 *
PHYSICS 9702/34
2 hours


Total
DC (RW/FD) 109595/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/34/M/J/16

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate the behaviour of an electrical circuit.
(a) The positive terminals of C and the d.c. supply are already connected. Complete the
circuit shown in Fig. 1.1, making sure that the positive terminals are connected as
indicated on the diagram.
d.c. supply
+ –
+
C
R
+
V
Fig. 1.1
(b) (i) Switch S should be open.
When the d.c. supply is switched on, the voltmeter reading will rise and become
constant.
Switch on the d.c. supply and record the voltmeter reading VS after approximately
60 s.
VS = ....................................................V
(ii) Calculate the value of 0.9VS.
0.9VS = ..............................................V [1]
(c) (i) Close switch S. The voltmeter reading will fall to zero.
(ii) Open S and measure the time t for the voltmeter reading to rise to a value VC of
approximately 4.0 V.
Record t and VC.
t = .................................................... s
VC = ....................................................V
[1]

4
(d) (i) Write down your value of 0.9VS from (b)(ii).
0.9VS = ....................................................V
(ii) Repeat (c) for different values of VC in the range 0 to 0.9VS until you have six sets
of values of t and VC.
[8]
(e) (i) Plot a graph of VC on the y-axis against t on the x-axis. [2]
(ii) Draw a smooth curve through your points. [1]
(f) (i) Calculate the value of 0.5VS.
0.5VS = ....................................................V
(ii) Draw the tangent to your curve at VC = 0.5VS. [1]
(iii) Determine the gradient and y-intercept of this tangent.
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/34/M/J/16
5

6
(g) The tangent has the equation
VC = a t + b
Use your answers in (f)(iii) to determine the values of a and b.

a = ......................................................
b = ......................................................
[2]
(h) Calculate the value of T using the relationship
VS
T= .
2a
T = .................................................. [2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/34/M/J/16

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the relationship between the dimensions of a spring
and its spring constant.
You are provided with two lengths of copper wire with the same diameter.
(a) Measure and record the diameter d of the wire.
d = .................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Wind one of the lengths of wire around the rod labelled A so that it makes a spring,
rod A
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Slide the spring off the rod and then twist the ends to give a loop at each end, as
shown in Fig. 2.2.
loop loop
Fig. 2.2

8
(iii) Count and record the number n of coils in your spring, and measure and record the
outside diameter x of your spring, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
Q coils
Fig. 2.3
n = ......................................................
x = ......................................................
[2]
(c) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of x.
(d) Calculate the value of D using the expression
D = x – d.
D = ......................................................
© UCLES 2016 9702/34/M/J/16

9
(e) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.4, with the boss approximately 25 cm
above the bench.
VWDQG QDLO
ERVV VSULQJ
PDVVKDQJHU
K1
EHQFK
Fig. 2.4
(ii) Measure and record the height h1 of the bottom of the mass hanger above the
bench.
h1 = .................................................. [1]
(iii) Add the 50 g mass to the mass hanger and measure the height h2 of the bottom of
the mass hanger above the bench, as shown in Fig. 2.5.
JPDVV
K2
Fig. 2.5
h2 = ......................................................

10
(iv) Calculate the spring constant k using the expression
mg
k=
(h1 – h2)
where m = 0.050 kg and g = 9.81 N kg–1.
Give your answer to an appropriate number of significant figures.
k = .................................................. [2]
(f) Repeat (b), (d) and (e) using the rod labelled B and the other length of wire.
n = ......................................................
x = ......................................................
D = ......................................................
h1 = ......................................................
h2 = ......................................................
k = ......................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/34/M/J/16

11
(g) It is suggested that the relationship between k, D and n is
k = c3
D n
where c is a constant.
(i) Using your data, calculate two values of c.
first value of c = ......................................................
second value of c = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

12
experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/34/M/J/16

* 7 6 1 3 7 2 2 7 9 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/35
2 hours


Total
DC (ST/SG) 109597/2
2
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

3
1 In this experiment, you will investigate how the current in a circuit changes as the resistance
of the circuit is changed.
wooden strip
wire
nail +
power supply
wooden strip
–
A
L
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Measure and record the length L of the shorter wire.
L = ..................................................[1]
(b) (i) Complete the circuit as shown in Fig. 1.2.
+
wire crocodile clip
–
A
Fig. 1.2
Each crocodile clip should be attached to a wire at the same distance x from the
end of the wire, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(ii) Measure and record the distance x.
x = ......................................................
(iii) Close the switch.
(iv) Record the ammeter reading I.
I = ..................................................[1]
(v) Open the switch.

4
(c) Change x and repeat (b) until you have six sets of readings of x and I.
Include values of 1 in your table.

I
[9]
(d) (i) Plot a graph of 1 on the y-axis against x on the x-axis. [3]
I
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

5

6
(e) The quantities I and x are related by the equation

1 = – Px + Q
I
Using your answers in (d)(iii), determine values for P and Q.

P = ......................................................
Q = ......................................................
[2]
(f) (i) The e.m.f. E of the d.c. power supply is given on the card.
Record E.
E = .................................................. V
(ii) Theory suggests that
Q = R + 3PL
E 2
where R is the resistance of the resistor.
Use values in (a)(ii), (e) and (f)(i) to determine the value of R.
R = ..............................................Ω [1]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

7
2 In this experiment, you will investigate the position of a wooden strip with several forces
acting on it.
(a) (i) Balance the wooden strip on the pivot as shown in Fig. 2.1.
The distance between one end of the wooden strip and the pivot is C when the
wooden strip is balanced.
C
wooden strip string
A B
pivot
bench
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Measure and record C.
C = ..................................................[1]
(iii) Measure and record the distance d between the end of the wooden strip and the
centre of hole A as shown in Fig. 2.2.
A B
Fig. 2.2
d = ..................................................[1]
(iv) Calculate (C – d ).
(C – d ) = ..................................................[1]

8
(b) (i) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.3 with the nail through hole A.
stand
boss
stand
nail
wooden strip
e
string boss
pulley
mass hanger
bench
Fig. 2.3
Adjust the apparatus so that the string is parallel to the bench. The angle θ is the
angle between the wooden strip and the stand.
(ii) Measure and record θ.
θ = ..................................................[1]
percentage uncertainty = ..................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

9
(c) Calculate (tanθ – 1).
Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures.
(tanθ – 1) = ..................................................[2]
(d) Using hole B, repeat (a)(iii), (a)(iv), (b)(i), (b)(ii) and (c).
d = ......................................................
(C – d ) = ......................................................
θ = ......................................................
(tanθ – 1) = ......................................................
[3]

10
(e) It is suggested that the relationship between θ and d is
(tanθ – 1) = k
(C – d )
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

11
experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
4. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/35/M/J/16

* 7 1 9 9 9 3 4 2 9 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/41
Paper 4 A Level Structured Questions May/June 2016
2 hours

DC (NF/SG) 108406/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) By reference to the definition of gravitational potential, explain why gravitational potential is a
negative quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two stars A and B have their surfaces separated by a distance of 1.4 × 1012 m, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
1.4 = 1012 m
star A star B
P
Fig. 1.1
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two stars. The distance x of point P from the
surface of star A may be varied.
The variation with distance x of the gravitational potential φ at point P is shown in Fig. 1.2.
x / 1012 m
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
–2
–4
–6
–8
q/ 108 J kg–1
–10
–12
–14
–16
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

5
A rock of mass 180 kg moves along the line joining the centres of the two stars, from star A
towards star B.
(i) Use data from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the change in kinetic energy of the rock when it
moves from the point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m to the point where x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
State whether this change is an increase or a decrease.
change = ............................................................. J
..................................................................................
[3]
(ii) At a point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m, the speed of the rock is v.
Determine the minimum speed v such that the rock reaches the point where
x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
minimum speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) An ideal gas is assumed to consist of atoms or molecules that behave as hard, identical
spheres that are in continuous motion and undergo elastic collisions.
State two further assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Helium-4 ( 42He) may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
(i) Show that the mass of one atom of helium-4 is 6.6 × 10−24 g.
[1]
(ii) The mean kinetic energy EK of an atom of an ideal gas is given by the expression
EK = 32 kT.
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of a helium-4 atom at a temperature of

27 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

7
3 (a) State, by reference to displacement, what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A mass is undergoing oscillations in a vertical plane.
The variation with displacement x of the acceleration a of the mass is shown in Fig. 3.1.
0
0 x
Fig. 3.1
State two reasons why the motion of the mass is not simple harmonic.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

8
(c) A block of wood is floating in a liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
oscillation
block of block
liquid
Fig. 3.2
The block is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.3.
2.0
y / cm
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 t/s
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 3.3
(i) the angular frequency ω of the oscillations,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16
9
(ii) the maximum vertical acceleration of the block.
maximum acceleration = ............................................... m s−2 [2]
(iii) The block has mass 120 g.
The oscillations of the block are damped. Calculate the loss in energy of the oscillations
of the block during the first three complete periods of its oscillations.
energy loss = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 11]

10
4 (a) (i) State what is meant by the specific acoustic impedance of a medium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The intensity reflection coefficient α is given by the expression
(Z2 − Z1)2
α = .
(Z2 + Z1)2
Explain the meanings of the symbols in this expression.
α : .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Z2 and Z1: ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A parallel beam of ultrasound has intensity I0 as it enters a muscle.

The beam passes through a thickness of 3.4 cm of muscle before being incident on the
boundary with a bone, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
muscle bone
intensity I0 intensity IT
entering muscle entering bone
3.4 cm
Fig. 4.1
The intensity of the ultrasound beam as it passes into the bone is IT.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

11
Some data for muscle and bone are given in Fig. 4.2.
linear absorption specific acoustic impedance

coefficient / m−1 / kg m−2 s−1
muscle 23 1.7 × 106

bone 130 6.3 × 106
Fig. 4.2
IT
Calculate the ratio .
I0
ratio = ......................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]

12
5 The variation with time t of the voltage level of part of an analogue signal is shown in Fig. 5.1.
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.1
The signal is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. Each sample is converted into a four-bit digital number.
Fig. 5.2 lists various times t at which the voltage level is sampled.
The digital number for time t = 0 is shown.
time t / ms 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
digital number 1011
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.2, underline the most significant bit (MSB) for the digital number at time t = 0.
[1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 5.2 for the times shown. [2]
(b) After transmission of the digital numbers, the signal is passed through a digital-to-analogue
converter (DAC).
On Fig. 5.3, plot the transmitted analogue signal from the DAC.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

13
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.3
[3]
(c) The transmitted signal in (b) has less detail than the original signal in Fig. 5.1.
Suggest and explain two means by which the level of detail in the transmitted signal could be
increased.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]

14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

15
6 A solid metal sphere of radius R is isolated in space. The sphere is positively charged so that the
electric potential at its surface is VS. The electric field strength at the surface is ES.
(a) On the axes of Fig. 6.1, show the variation of the electric potential with distance x from the
centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Vs
0.8 Vs
potential
0.6 Vs
0.4 Vs
0.2 Vs
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.1
[3]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, show the variation of the electric field strength with distance x from
the centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Es
0.8 Es
field
strength 0.6 Es
0.4 Es
0.2 Es
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.2
[3]
[Total: 6]

16
7 A student sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 7.1 to measure the charge on a capacitor C for different
values of potential difference across the capacitor.
C meter to
V
measure charge
Fig. 7.1
The variation with potential difference V of the charge Q stored on the capacitor is shown in
Fig. 7.2.
15
Q / mC
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
V/V
Fig. 7.2
(a) State and explain how Fig. 7.2 indicates that there is a systematic error in the readings of one
of the meters.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

17
(b) Use Fig. 7.2 to determine the capacitance, in μF, of capacitor C.
capacitance = .................................................... μF [3]
(c) Use your answer in (b) to determine the additional energy stored in the capacitor C when the
potential difference across it is increased from 6.0 V to 9.0 V.
energy = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 8]

18
8 The circuit of an inverting amplifier incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown
in Fig. 8.1.
R1
+V
R2
P
–
+
V IN V OUT
–V
Fig. 8.1
(a) Explain why point P is known as a virtual earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Derive an expression, in terms of the resistances R1 and R2, for the gain of the amplifier
circuit.
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

19
(c) A relay and the output terminals of the amplifier circuit are shown in Fig. 8.2.
V OUT
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, show how the relay may be connected to the amplifier output so that the relay
operates only when VOUT is positive. [3]
[Total: 9]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

21
9 A thin rectangular slice of aluminium has sides of length 65 mm, 50 mm and 0.10 mm, as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
direction of
magnetic field
Z Y
0.10 mm
50 mm
X
current
3.8 A
Q R
P S
65 mm
Some of the corners of the slice are labelled.
A current I of 3.8 A is normal to face RSXY of the slice.
In aluminium, the number of free electrons per unit volume is 6.0 × 1028 m−3.
A uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B equal to 0.13 T is normal to face QRYZ of the
aluminium slice in the direction from Q to P.
A Hall voltage VH is developed across the slice and is given by the expression
VH = BI .
ntq
(a) Use Fig. 9.1 to state the magnitude of the distance t.
t = ................................................. mm [1]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the Hall voltage VH.
VH = ..................................................... V [2]
[Total: 3]

22
10 (a) A coil of insulated wire is wound on a copper core, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
insulated copper
wire core
Fig. 10.1
An alternating current is passed through the coil.
The heating effect of the current in the coil is negligible.
Explain why the temperature of the core rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Two hollow tubes of equal length hang vertically as shown in Fig. 10.2.
magnet A magnet B
plastic aluminium
tube tube
Fig. 10.2
One tube is made of plastic and the other of aluminium.
Two small similar bar magnets A and B are held above the tubes and then released
simultaneously.
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

23
The magnets do not touch the sides of the tubes.

Explain why magnet B takes much longer than magnet A to fall through the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 9]

24
11 The variation with time t of the sinusoidal current I in a resistor of resistance 450 Ω is shown in
Fig. 11.1.
1.0
I/A
0.5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
t / ms
–0.5
–1.0
Fig. 11.1
Use data from Fig. 11.1 to determine, for the time t = 0 to t = 30 ms,
(a) the frequency of the current,
frequency = ................................................... Hz [2]
(b) the mean current,
mean current = ..................................................... A [1]
(c) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) current,
r.m.s. current = ..................................................... A [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

25
(d) the energy dissipated by the resistor.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
[Total: 7]

26
12 Some of the electron energy bands in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
conduction band
(partially filled)
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 12.1
(a) In isolated atoms, electron energy levels have discrete values.

Suggest why, in a solid, there are energy bands, rather than discrete energy levels.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A light-dependent resistor (LDR) consists of an intrinsic semiconductor.
Use band theory to explain the dependence on light intensity of the resistance of the LDR
when it is at constant temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

27
13 Copper-66 is a radioactive isotope.
When a nucleus of copper-66 decays, the emissions include a β− particle and a γ-ray photon.
The count rate produced from a sample of the isotope copper-66 is measured using a detector
and counter, as illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
to counter
detector
radioactive
sample
shielding
Fig. 13.1
(a) State three reasons why the activity of the sample of copper-66 is not equal to the measured
count rate.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

28
(b) In a time of 42.0 minutes, the count rate from the sample of copper-66 is found to decrease
from 3.62 × 104 Bq to 1.21 × 102 Bq.
Calculate the half-life of copper-66.
half-life = .......................................... minutes [2]
(c) The γ-ray photons emitted from radioactive nuclei have specific energies, dependent on the
nucleus emitting the photons.
By comparison with emission line spectra, suggest what can be deduced about energy levels
in nuclei.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16

* 7 6 2 2 8 7 4 4 8 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
2 hours

DC (NF/FD) 108407/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 A binary star consists of two stars A and B that orbit one another, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
2.8 × 108 km
t
VWDU$ VWDU%
PDVV0$ 3 PDVV0%
t
G
Fig. 1.1
The stars are in circular orbits with the centres of both orbits at point P, a distance d from the
centre of star A.
(a) (i) Explain why the centripetal force acting on both stars has the same magnitude.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The period of the orbit of the stars about point P is 4.0 years.
Calculate the angular speed ω of the stars.
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

5
(b) The separation of the centres of the stars is 2.8 × 108 km.
The mass of star A is MA. The mass of star B is MB.
M
The ratio A is 3.0.
MB
(i) Determine the distance d.
d = ................................................... km [3]
(ii) Use your answers in (a)(ii) and (b)(i) to determine the mass MB of star B.
MB = .................................................... kg [3]
[Total: 10]

6
(i) the Avogadro constant NA,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the mole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A container has a volume of 1.8 × 104 cm3.
The ideal gas in the container has a pressure of 2.0 × 107 Pa at a temperature of 17 °C.
Show that the amount of gas in the cylinder is 150 mol.
[1]
(c) Gas molecules leak from the container in (b) at a constant rate of 1.5 × 1019 s−1.
The temperature remains at 17 °C.
In a time t, the amount of gas in the container is found to be reduced by 5.0%.
Calculate
(i) the pressure of the gas after the time t,
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

7
(ii) the time t.
t = ....................................................... s [3]
[Total: 9]
3 (a) Explain what is meant by the statement that two bodies are in thermal equilibrium.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest suitable types of thermometer, one in each case, to measure
(i) the temperature of the flame of a Bunsen burner,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the change in temperature of a small crystal when it is exposed to a pulse of ultrasound
energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Some water is heated so that its temperature changes from 26.5 °C to a final temperature of
38.0 °C.
State, to an appropriate number of decimal places,
(i) the change in temperature in kelvin,
change = ..................................................... K [1]
(ii) the final temperature in kelvin.
final temperature = ..................................................... K [1]
[Total: 5]

8
4 A metal block hangs vertically from one end of a spring. The other end of the spring is tied to a
thread that passes over a pulley and is attached to a vibrator, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
pulley vibrator
spring
block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The vibrator is switched off.

The metal block of mass 120 g is displaced vertically and then released. The variation with
time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is shown in Fig. 4.2.
y / cm 2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
–1 W /s
–2
–3
Fig. 4.2
For the vibrations of the block, calculate
(i) the angular frequency ω,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16
9
(ii) the energy of the vibrations.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(b) The vibrator is now switched on.
The frequency of vibration is varied from 0.7f to 1.3f where f is the frequency of vibration of
the block in (a).
For the block, complete Fig. 4.3 to show the variation with frequency of the amplitude of
vibration. Label this line A. [3]
amplitude
0
0.7I I 1.3I
frequency
Fig. 4.3
(c) Some light feathers are now attached to the block in (b) to increase air resistance.
The frequency of vibration is once again varied from 0.7f to 1.3f. The new amplitude of
vibration is measured for each frequency.
On Fig. 4.3, draw a line to show the variation with frequency of the amplitude of vibration.
Label this line B. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 The signal from a radio station is amplitude modulated.
(a) State what is meant by amplitude modulation (AM).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation with frequency of the intensity of the signal from the radio station is shown in
Fig. 5.1.
intensity
0
193 198 203
frequency / kHz
Fig. 5.1
State, for this signal,
(i) the bandwidth,
bandwidth = ................................................. kHz [1]
(ii) the maximum audio frequency that is broadcast.
maximum frequency = ................................................. kHz [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

11
(c) A transmission line of length 45 km has an attenuation per unit length of 2.0 dB km−1.
The input power to the transmission line is 500 mW.

The minimum acceptable signal-to-noise ratio is 24 dB for background noise of 5.0 × 10−13 W.
(i) Calculate the minimum acceptable power output from the transmission line.
power = .................................................... W [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine whether it is possible to transmit the signal along the
transmission line.
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

13
6 (a) By reference to electric field lines, explain why, for points outside an isolated spherical
conductor, the charge on the sphere may be considered to act as a point charge at its centre.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two isolated protons are separated in a vacuum by a distance x.
electric force between the two protons

.
gravitational force between the two protons
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (i), suggest why gravitational forces are not considered
when calculating the force between charged particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

14
7 (a) State two uses of capacitors in electrical circuits, other than for the smoothing of direct current.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The combined capacitance between terminals A and B of the arrangement shown in Fig. 7.1
is 4.0 μF.
+F
& &
A B
+F
Fig. 7.1
Two capacitors each have capacitance C and the remaining capacitors each have
capacitance 3.0 μF.
The potential difference (p.d.) between terminals A and B is 12 V.
(i) Determine the capacitance C.
C = ................................................... μF [2]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the total positive charge transferred to the arrangement.
charge = ................................................... μC [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

15
(iii) Use your answer in (ii) to state the magnitude of the charge on one plate of
1. a capacitor of capacitance C,
charge = ......................................................... μC
2. a capacitor of capacitance 3.0 μF.
charge = ......................................................... μC
[2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 An ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) has infinite voltage gain and infinite slew rate.
(a) State what is meant by
(i) the voltage gain,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) infinite slew rate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A non-inverting amplifier circuit incorporating an ideal op-amp is shown in Fig. 8.1.
9
–
²9
9,1 N1 9287
Fig. 8.1
The supply to the op-amp is +9 V / −9 V.

The voltage gain of the amplifier circuit is 12.
Determine the resistance of resistor R.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

17
(c) For the circuit of Fig. 8.1, the variation with time t of the input potential VIN to the amplifier is
shown in Fig. 8.2.
1.0
9IN / V
0.5
0
W W W
–0.5
–1.0
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.3, show the variation with time t of the output potential VOUT for time t = 0 to time
t = t2.
15
9OUT / V
10
0
W W W
–5
–10
–15
Fig. 8.3
[4]
[Total: 9]

18
9 A magnetic field of flux density B is normal to face PQRS of a slice of a conducting material, as
shown in Fig. 9.1.
magnetic field
flux density %
S
R
Z FXUUHQWI
P Q
X Y
Fig. 9.1
A current I in the slice is normal to face QRZY of the slice.
The Hall voltage VH across the slice is given by the expression
BI
VH = .
ntq
(a) (i) State what is represented by the symbol n.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The symbol t represents the length of one side of the slice. Use letters from Fig. 9.1 to
identify t.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) In general, the Hall voltage produced in a slice of a metal is very small.
For a slice of the same dimensions with the same current and magnetic flux density, the
Hall voltage produced in a semiconductor material is much larger.
Suggest and explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

19
(ii) In some semiconducting materials, electrons are mainly responsible for conduction.
In other semiconducting materials, holes are mainly responsible for conduction.
Suggest and explain the difference, if any, that conduction by electrons or by holes will
have on the Hall voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

20
10 Two coils P and Q are placed close to one another, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
coil P coil Q
V
power
supply
Fig. 10.1
(a) The current in coil P is constant.
An iron rod is inserted into coil P.
Explain why, during the time that the rod is moving, there is a reading on the voltmeter
connected to coil Q.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

21
(b) The current in coil P is now varied as shown in Fig. 10.2.
current
0
0 W1 W2 WLPH
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.3, show the variation with time of the reading of the voltmeter connected to coil Q
for time t = 0 to time t = t2.
voltmeter
reading
0
0 W1 W2 time
Fig. 10.3 [4]
[Total: 6]

22
11 A bridge rectifier contains four ideal diodes A, B, C and D, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
input $
9
' & / N 1
Fig. 11.1
The output of the rectifier is connected to a load L of resistance 2.4 kΩ.
(a) On Fig. 11.1, mark with the letter P the positive terminal of the load. [1]
(b) The variation with time t of the potential difference V across the input to the rectifier is shown
in Fig. 11.2.
6 LQSXW
9/V
4
0
W
–2
–4
–6
–8
Fig. 11.2
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) current in the load L.
r.m.s. current = ..................................................... A [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16
23
(c) The potential difference across the load L is to be smoothed using a capacitor.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, draw the symbol for a capacitor, connected to produce smoothing. [1]
(ii) The minimum potential difference across the load L with the smoothing capacitor
connected is 3.0 V.
On Fig. 11.2, sketch the variation with time t of the potential difference across the load L.
[3]
[Total: 7]

24
12 High-energy electrons collide with a metal target, producing X-ray photons.
The variation with wavelength of the intensity of the X-ray beam is illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
intensity
0
wavelength
Fig. 12.1
(a) Explain why there is
(i) a continuous distribution of wavelengths,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) a sharp cut-off at short wavelength,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) a series of peaks superimposed on the continuous distribution of wavelengths.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) In the X-ray imaging of body structures, longer wavelength photons are frequently filtered out
of the X-ray beam.
(i) State how this filtering is achieved.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

25
(ii) Suggest the reason for this filtering.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

26
13 (a) Explain what is meant by gamma radiation (γ-radiation).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A source of gamma radiation is placed a fixed distance away from a detector and counter, as
WRFRXQWHU
GHWHFWRU
OHDGVKHHW
[
VKLHOGLQJ VRXUFH
Fig. 13.1
A sheet of lead of thickness x is placed between the source and the detector.
The average count rate C, corrected for background, is recorded. This is repeated for different
values of x.
The variation with thickness x of ln C is shown in Fig. 13.2.
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

27
4.00
3.75
ln (& / s–1)
3.50
3.25
3.00
2.75
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
[ / mm
Fig. 13.2
The absorption of gamma radiation in lead may be represented by the equation
C = C0 e−μx
where C0 is the count rate for x = 0 and μ is the linear attenuation (absorption) coefficient.
Use Fig. 13.2 to determine the linear attenuation coefficient μ for this gamma radiation in lead.
μ = .............................................. mm−1 [4]

28
(c) The value of μ calculated in (b) is for gamma radiation in lead.
Suggest and explain whether the value of μ for aluminium would be the same, greater or
smaller.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16

* 2 7 3 7 7 4 8 8 7 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/43
2 hours

DC (FD/SG) 126924
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
1 (a) By reference to the definition of gravitational potential, explain why gravitational potential is a
negative quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two stars A and B have their surfaces separated by a distance of 1.4 × 1012 m, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
1.4 = 1012 m
star A star B
P
Fig. 1.1
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two stars. The distance x of point P from the
surface of star A may be varied.
The variation with distance x of the gravitational potential φ at point P is shown in Fig. 1.2.
x / 1012 m
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
–2
–4
–6
–8
q/ 108 J kg–1
–10
–12
–14
–16
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

5
A rock of mass 180 kg moves along the line joining the centres of the two stars, from star A
towards star B.
(i) Use data from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the change in kinetic energy of the rock when it
moves from the point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m to the point where x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
State whether this change is an increase or a decrease.
change = ............................................................. J
..................................................................................
[3]
(ii) At a point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m, the speed of the rock is v.
Determine the minimum speed v such that the rock reaches the point where
x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
minimum speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 8]

6
2 (a) An ideal gas is assumed to consist of atoms or molecules that behave as hard, identical
spheres that are in continuous motion and undergo elastic collisions.
State two further assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Helium-4 ( 42He) may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
(i) Show that the mass of one atom of helium-4 is 6.6 × 10−24 g.
[1]
(ii) The mean kinetic energy EK of an atom of an ideal gas is given by the expression
EK = 32 kT.
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of a helium-4 atom at a temperature of

27 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

7
3 (a) State, by reference to displacement, what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A mass is undergoing oscillations in a vertical plane.
The variation with displacement x of the acceleration a of the mass is shown in Fig. 3.1.
0
0 x
Fig. 3.1
State two reasons why the motion of the mass is not simple harmonic.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]

8
(c) A block of wood is floating in a liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
oscillation
block of block
liquid
Fig. 3.2
The block is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.3.
2.0
y / cm
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 t/s
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 3.3
(i) the angular frequency ω of the oscillations,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16
9
(ii) the maximum vertical acceleration of the block.
maximum acceleration = ............................................... m s−2 [2]
(iii) The block has mass 120 g.
The oscillations of the block are damped. Calculate the loss in energy of the oscillations
of the block during the first three complete periods of its oscillations.
energy loss = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 11]

10
4 (a) (i) State what is meant by the specific acoustic impedance of a medium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The intensity reflection coefficient α is given by the expression
(Z2 − Z1)2
α = .
(Z2 + Z1)2
Explain the meanings of the symbols in this expression.
α : .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Z2 and Z1: ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A parallel beam of ultrasound has intensity I0 as it enters a muscle.

The beam passes through a thickness of 3.4 cm of muscle before being incident on the
boundary with a bone, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
muscle bone
intensity I0 intensity IT
entering muscle entering bone
3.4 cm
Fig. 4.1
The intensity of the ultrasound beam as it passes into the bone is IT.
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

11
Some data for muscle and bone are given in Fig. 4.2.
linear absorption specific acoustic impedance

coefficient / m−1 / kg m−2 s−1
muscle 23 1.7 × 106

bone 130 6.3 × 106
Fig. 4.2
IT
Calculate the ratio .
I0
ratio = ......................................................... [5]
[Total: 9]

12
5 The variation with time t of the voltage level of part of an analogue signal is shown in Fig. 5.1.
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.1
The signal is sampled at 0.25 ms intervals. Each sample is converted into a four-bit digital number.
Fig. 5.2 lists various times t at which the voltage level is sampled.
The digital number for time t = 0 is shown.
time t / ms 0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
digital number 1011
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i) On Fig. 5.2, underline the most significant bit (MSB) for the digital number at time t = 0.
[1]
(ii) Complete Fig. 5.2 for the times shown. [2]
(b) After transmission of the digital numbers, the signal is passed through a digital-to-analogue
converter (DAC).
On Fig. 5.3, plot the transmitted analogue signal from the DAC.
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

13
16
14
voltage level 12
10
0
0 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50
time t / ms
Fig. 5.3
[3]
(c) The transmitted signal in (b) has less detail than the original signal in Fig. 5.1.
Suggest and explain two means by which the level of detail in the transmitted signal could be
increased.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]

14
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

15
6 A solid metal sphere of radius R is isolated in space. The sphere is positively charged so that the
electric potential at its surface is VS. The electric field strength at the surface is ES.
(a) On the axes of Fig. 6.1, show the variation of the electric potential with distance x from the
centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Vs
0.8 Vs
potential
0.6 Vs
0.4 Vs
0.2 Vs
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.1
[3]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, show the variation of the electric field strength with distance x from
the centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Es
0.8 Es
field
strength 0.6 Es
0.4 Es
0.2 Es
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.2
[3]
[Total: 6]

16
7 A student sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 7.1 to measure the charge on a capacitor C for different
values of potential difference across the capacitor.
C meter to
V
measure charge
Fig. 7.1
The variation with potential difference V of the charge Q stored on the capacitor is shown in
Fig. 7.2.
15
Q / mC
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
V/V
Fig. 7.2
(a) State and explain how Fig. 7.2 indicates that there is a systematic error in the readings of one
of the meters.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

17
(b) Use Fig. 7.2 to determine the capacitance, in μF, of capacitor C.
capacitance = .................................................... μF [3]
(c) Use your answer in (b) to determine the additional energy stored in the capacitor C when the
potential difference across it is increased from 6.0 V to 9.0 V.
energy = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 8]

18
8 The circuit of an inverting amplifier incorporating an ideal operational amplifier (op-amp) is shown
in Fig. 8.1.
R1
+V
R2
P
–
+
V IN V OUT
–V
Fig. 8.1
(a) Explain why point P is known as a virtual earth.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Derive an expression, in terms of the resistances R1 and R2, for the gain of the amplifier
circuit.
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

19
(c) A relay and the output terminals of the amplifier circuit are shown in Fig. 8.2.
V OUT
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, show how the relay may be connected to the amplifier output so that the relay
operates only when VOUT is positive. [3]
[Total: 9]

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

21
9 A thin rectangular slice of aluminium has sides of length 65 mm, 50 mm and 0.10 mm, as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
direction of
magnetic field
Z Y
0.10 mm
50 mm
X
current
3.8 A
Q R
P S
65 mm
Some of the corners of the slice are labelled.
A current I of 3.8 A is normal to face RSXY of the slice.
In aluminium, the number of free electrons per unit volume is 6.0 × 1028 m−3.
A uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B equal to 0.13 T is normal to face QRYZ of the
aluminium slice in the direction from Q to P.
A Hall voltage VH is developed across the slice and is given by the expression
VH = BI .
ntq
(a) Use Fig. 9.1 to state the magnitude of the distance t.
t = ................................................. mm [1]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the Hall voltage VH.
VH = ..................................................... V [2]
[Total: 3]

22
10 (a) A coil of insulated wire is wound on a copper core, as illustrated in Fig. 10.1.
insulated copper
wire core
Fig. 10.1
An alternating current is passed through the coil.
The heating effect of the current in the coil is negligible.
Explain why the temperature of the core rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Two hollow tubes of equal length hang vertically as shown in Fig. 10.2.
magnet A magnet B
plastic aluminium
tube tube
Fig. 10.2
One tube is made of plastic and the other of aluminium.
Two small similar bar magnets A and B are held above the tubes and then released
simultaneously.
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

23
The magnets do not touch the sides of the tubes.

Explain why magnet B takes much longer than magnet A to fall through the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 9]

24
11 The variation with time t of the sinusoidal current I in a resistor of resistance 450 Ω is shown in
Fig. 11.1.
1.0
I/A
0.5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
t / ms
–0.5
–1.0
Fig. 11.1
Use data from Fig. 11.1 to determine, for the time t = 0 to t = 30 ms,
(a) the frequency of the current,
frequency = ................................................... Hz [2]
(b) the mean current,
mean current = ..................................................... A [1]
(c) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) current,
r.m.s. current = ..................................................... A [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

25
(d) the energy dissipated by the resistor.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
[Total: 7]

26
12 Some of the electron energy bands in a solid are illustrated in Fig. 12.1.
conduction band
(partially filled)
forbidden band
valence band
Fig. 12.1
(a) In isolated atoms, electron energy levels have discrete values.

Suggest why, in a solid, there are energy bands, rather than discrete energy levels.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A light-dependent resistor (LDR) consists of an intrinsic semiconductor.
Use band theory to explain the dependence on light intensity of the resistance of the LDR
when it is at constant temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

27
13 Copper-66 is a radioactive isotope.
When a nucleus of copper-66 decays, the emissions include a β− particle and a γ-ray photon.
The count rate produced from a sample of the isotope copper-66 is measured using a detector
and counter, as illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
to counter
detector
radioactive
sample
shielding
Fig. 13.1
(a) State three reasons why the activity of the sample of copper-66 is not equal to the measured
count rate.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]

28
(b) In a time of 42.0 minutes, the count rate from the sample of copper-66 is found to decrease
from 3.62 × 104 Bq to 1.21 × 102 Bq.
Calculate the half-life of copper-66.
half-life = .......................................... minutes [2]
(c) The γ-ray photons emitted from radioactive nuclei have specific energies, dependent on the
nucleus emitting the photons.
By comparison with emission line spectra, suggest what can be deduced about energy levels
in nuclei.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16

* 3 4 0 0 6 6 0 3 5 6 *
PHYSICS 9702/51
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SG) 109582/2
2
1 A student is investigating the characteristics of different light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Fig. 1.1
shows examples of LEDs and the circuit symbol for an LED.
blue red
circuit symbol:
Fig 1.1
Each LED needs a minimum potential difference V across it to emit light. The student is
investigating the relationship between V and the wavelength λ of the light emitted by the LED for
several different LEDs.
It is suggested that the relationship is
V = kλn
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between V and λ. Explain how your results
could be used to determine values for k and n. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the
• the procedure to be followed,
• the measurements to be taken,
• the control of variables,
• the analysis of the data,
• any safety precautions to be taken.
[15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/51/M/J/16

3
Diagram
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................

4
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/51/M/J/16
5
2 A student is investigating how the extension of a loaded wire depends on the diameter of the wire.
The apparatus is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wire
load F
Fig. 2.1
A load F is applied to the wire and the extension e is measured.
The experiment is repeated for wires of the same material and same initial length L but different
diameter d.
It is suggested that e and d are related by the equation
4LF
e=
πEd 2
where E is a constant.
1
(a) A graph is plotted of e on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
d2
gradient = ...........................................................[1]

6
(b) Values of d and e are given in Fig. 2.2.
d / 10–3 m e / 10–3 m
0.28 ± 0.02 11.3
0.32 ± 0.02 8.6
0.38 ± 0.02 6.0
0.46 ± 0.02 4.1
0.56 ± 0.02 2.7
0.72 ± 0.02 1.7
Fig. 2.2
1
Calculate and record values of / 106 m–2 in Fig. 2.2.
d2
1
Include the absolute uncertainties in 2. [3]
d
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of e / 10–3 m against 2 / 106 m–2.
d
1
Include error bars for 2. [2]
d
(ii) Draw the straight line of best fit and a worst acceptable straight line on your graph. Both
(iii) Determine the gradient of the line of best fit. Include the absolute uncertainty in your
answer.
gradient = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/51/M/J/16

7
12
11
10
e / 10–3 m
1
1.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 15.0
1
/ 106 m–2
d2

8
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a) and (c)(iii), determine the value of E. Include an appropriate
unit.
Data: L = 2.50 ± 0.01 m and F = 19.0 ± 0.5 N.
E = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in E.
percentage uncertainty in E = ..................................................... % [1]
(e) The experiment is repeated with a thinner wire of diameter 0.23 ± 0.02 mm. The wire is of the
same material and initial length.
Determine the extension e of the wire when the same load is added to it. Include the absolute
uncertainty in your answer.
e = .......................................................m [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/51/M/J/16

* 1 3 0 9 6 6 0 6 0 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/SG) 109583/2
2
1 A student is investigating the acceleration of a trolley moving up an inclined plane as shown in

Fig. 1.1.
inclined plane trolley
bench
Fig. 1.1
The student is investigating the relationship between the acceleration a of the trolley and the
angle θ of the inclined plane when a force F is applied to the trolley.
ma = F – (mg sin θ + k )
where g is the acceleration of free fall, m is the mass of the trolley and k is a constant.
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between a and θ. Explain how your results

[15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/M/J/16

3
Diagram
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................

4
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/M/J/16
5
2 A student is investigating how the resistance of a wire depends on the diameter of the wire.
ohmmeter
wire
Fig. 2.1
The resistance R of the wire is measured using an ohmmeter.
The experiment is repeated for wires of the same material and same length L but different
diameter d.
It is suggested that R and d are related by the equation
4ρL
R=
πd 2
where ρ is a constant.
1
(a) A graph is plotted of R on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
d2
gradient = ...........................................................[1]

6
(b) Values of d and R are given in Fig. 2.2.
d / 10–3 m R/Ω
0.91 ± 0.01 1.6
0.56 ± 0.01 4.4
0.46 ± 0.01 6.6
0.38 ± 0.01 9.7
0.32 ± 0.01 13.9
0.27 ± 0.01 19.5
Fig. 2.2
1
d2
1
Include the absolute uncertainties in 2 . [3]
d
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of R / Ω against 2 / 106 m–2.
d
1
Include error bars for 2 . [2]
d
answer.
gradient = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/M/J/16

7
20
18
16
R/1
14
12
10
0
1.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 15.0
1
/ 106 m–2
G2

8
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a) and (c)(iii), determine the value of ρ. Include an appropriate
unit.
Data: L = 1.00 ± 0.01 m.
ρ = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in ρ.
percentage uncertainty in ρ = ...................................................... % [1]
same material and length.
Determine the resistance R of the wire. Include the absolute uncertainty in your answer.
R = ....................................................... Ω [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/M/J/16

* 6 3 6 2 3 4 2 6 8 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/53
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/SG) 127220
2
1 A student is investigating the characteristics of different light-emitting diodes (LEDs). Fig. 1.1
shows examples of LEDs and the circuit symbol for an LED.
blue red
circuit symbol:
Fig 1.1
Each LED needs a minimum potential difference V across it to emit light. The student is
investigating the relationship between V and the wavelength λ of the light emitted by the LED for
several different LEDs.
V = kλn
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between V and λ. Explain how your results
could be used to determine values for k and n. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the
[15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/53/M/J/16

3
Diagram
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................

4
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/53/M/J/16
5
2 A student is investigating how the extension of a loaded wire depends on the diameter of the wire.
The apparatus is set up as shown in Fig. 2.1.
wire
load F
Fig. 2.1
A load F is applied to the wire and the extension e is measured.
The experiment is repeated for wires of the same material and same initial length L but different
diameter d.
It is suggested that e and d are related by the equation
4LF
e=
πEd 2
where E is a constant.
1
(a) A graph is plotted of e on the y-axis against on the x-axis.
d2
gradient = ...........................................................[1]

6
(b) Values of d and e are given in Fig. 2.2.
d / 10–3 m e / 10–3 m
0.28 ± 0.02 11.3
0.32 ± 0.02 8.6
0.38 ± 0.02 6.0
0.46 ± 0.02 4.1
0.56 ± 0.02 2.7
0.72 ± 0.02 1.7
Fig. 2.2
1
d2
1
Include the absolute uncertainties in 2. [3]
d
1
(c) (i) Plot a graph of e / 10–3 m against 2 / 106 m–2.
d
1
Include error bars for 2. [2]
d
answer.
gradient = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/53/M/J/16

7
12
11
10
e / 10–3 m
1
1.0 3.0 5.0 7.0 9.0 11.0 13.0 15.0
1
/ 106 m–2
d2

8
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a) and (c)(iii), determine the value of E. Include an appropriate
unit.
Data: L = 2.50 ± 0.01 m and F = 19.0 ± 0.5 N.
E = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in E.
percentage uncertainty in E = ..................................................... % [1]
same material and initial length.
Determine the extension e of the wire when the same load is added to it. Include the absolute
uncertainty in your answer.
e = .......................................................m [2]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/53/M/J/16

PHYSICS 9702/12
Paper 1 Multiple Choice February/March 2016
1 hour 15 minutes
Soft clean eraser
*4633464165*

IB16 03_9702_12/7RP
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F–1)
4πε 0
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

3
Formulae
1
at 2
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
r

3 V

v = ±ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
f sv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
4πε 0r
1
QV
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq

t1
2
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16 [Turn over

4
1 The prefixes nano (n), micro (µ) and pico (p) are often used with units.
Which row shows their correct values?
n µ p
A 10–6 10–9 10–12

B 10–6 10–12 10–9
C 10–9 10–6 10–12
D 10–12 10–9 10–6
2 A crane has an arm to which is attached a frictionless pulley. A cable passes over the pulley and
supports a load of 10 kN as shown.
frictionless pulley
10 kN
30°
30°
crane arm load
10 kN
The crane arm exerts a force F on the pulley.
What is the value of F ?
A 5.0 kN B 8.7 kN C 10 kN D 17 kN
3 The SI unit of specific heat capacity is J kg–1 K–1.
What is the unit of specific heat capacity expressed in SI base units?
A m s–2 K–1 B kg m s–1 K–1 C m2 s–2 K–1 D kg m2 s–1 K–1
4 Quantity X has a fractional uncertainty of x. Quantity Y has a fractional uncertainty of y.
What is the fractional uncertainty in X2 ?

Y
A x+y B x–y C x + 2y D x – 2y
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

5
5 PQR and XYZ are wires in a circuit. A galvanometer connects Q and Y as a null indicator.
P Q R
X Y Z
When the galvanometer reads zero, which statement is correct?
A The potential difference between Q and Y is infinite.

B The potential difference between Q and Y is zero.
C The resistance between Q and Y is infinite.
D The resistance between Q and Y is zero.
6 An object has an initial velocity u and an acceleration a. The object moves in a straight line
through a displacement s and has final velocity v.
The above quantities are related by the equation shown.
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Which condition must be satisfied in order for this equation to apply to the motion of the object?
A The direction of a is constant and the direction of a is the same as the direction of s.
B The direction of a is constant and the direction of a is the same as the direction of u.
C The magnitude of a is constant and the direction of a is constant.
D The magnitude of a is constant and the direction of a is the same as the direction of v.
7 A car is travelling at constant velocity. Its brakes are then applied, causing uniform deceleration.
Which graph shows the variation with distance s of the velocity v of the car?
A B C D
v v v v
0 0 0 0
0 s 0 s 0 s 0 s

6
8 A ball is thrown across a flat field.
path of ball
Which statement describes the motion of the ball, when the effects of air resistance are ignored?
A The ball lands with the same velocity at which it is thrown.

B The horizontal component of acceleration is constant throughout the motion.
C The horizontal and vertical components of acceleration are both zero at the highest point of
the motion.
D The horizontal and vertical components of velocity are both zero at the highest point of the
motion.
9 Which statement defines force?
A When a force acts on a body that is free to move, the force is the product of the mass of the
body and its acceleration.
B When a force acts on a body that is free to move, the force is the rate of change of
momentum of the body.
C When a force acts on a body that is free to move, the force is the work done by the force
divided by the distance moved by the body.
D When a force acts on a lever and causes a moment, the force is the moment divided by the
perpendicular distance of the force from the pivot.
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

7
10 A particle of mass m, travelling with speed u, collides with a stationary particle of mass M. The
velocities of the two particles before and after the collision are shown.
u
3
M
u α
m M β
m u
2
Which vector diagram correctly shows the momenta before and after the collision?
A B
mu mu
α β β α
mu mu
2 Mu 2 Mu
3 3
C D
mu mu
α β β α
mu mu
2 Mu 2 Mu
3 3

8
11 An object falls freely from rest in a vacuum. The graph shows the variation with time t of the
velocity v of the object.
0
0 t
Which graph, using the same scales, represents the object falling in air?
A B C D
v v v v
0 0 0 0
0 t 0 t 0 t 0 t
12 The diagram shows a uniform beam PQ. The length of the beam is 3.0 m and its weight is 50 N.
The beam is supported on a pivot 1.0 m from end P. A load of weight W is hung from end P and
the beam is in equilibrium.
3.0 m
1.0 m
P Q
W
pivot
What is the value of W ?
A 25 N B 50 N C 75 N D 100 N
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

9
13 Two forces, each of magnitude F, act at points V and W on an object.
The two forces form a couple. The shape of the object is a right-angled triangle with sides of
lengths x and y, as shown.
F
V
y
x
W F
Which expression gives the torque exerted by the couple?
A Fx B Fy C 2Fx D 2Fy
14 A giant squid of length 20.0 m is vertical in seawater, with the top of the squid at a depth of
8.00 m. The density of seawater is 1050 kg m–3.
What is the difference in pressure between the top and the bottom of the squid?
A 82 000 Pa B 206 000 Pa C 288 000 Pa D 389 000 Pa
15 The force diagram shows an aircraft accelerating. At the instant shown, the velocity of the aircraft
is 40 m s–1.
velocity 40 m s–1
600 kN lift
200 kN 500 kN
air resistance engine thrust
600 kN weight
At which rate is its kinetic energy increasing?
A 2.4 MW B 8.0 MW C 12 MW D 20 MW
16 A man is running in a straight line.
What is an approximate value of his kinetic energy?
A 10 J B 100 J C 1000 J D 10 000 J

10
17 The pump of a water pumping system uses 2.0 kW of electrical power when raising water. The
pumping system lifts 16 kg of water per second through a vertical height of 7.0 m.
What is the efficiency of the pumping system?
A 1.8% B 5.6% C 22% D 55%
18 A metal wire is stretched by a load. The force-extension graph is shown.
force
0
0 extension
What is represented by the area under the whole graph?
A the change in gravitational potential energy of the wire

B the energy that would be released from the wire if the final load was removed
C the energy transferred into heat energy in the wire
D the work done in stretching the wire
19 The Young modulus of steel is twice that of copper.
A 50 cm length of copper wire of diameter 2.0 mm is joined to a 50 cm length of steel wire of

diameter 1.0 mm, making a combination wire of length 1.0 m, as shown.
fixed support
copper wire
steel wire
weight
The combination wire is stretched by a weight added to its end. Both the copper and the steel
wires obey Hooke’s law.
extension of steel wire

What is the ratio ?
extension of copper wire
A 4 B 2 C 1 D 0.5
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

11
20 With which types of wave can the Doppler shift be observed?
A all types of wave

B light and sound waves only
C sound waves and water waves only
D sound waves only
21 A distant star is receding from the Earth with a speed of 1.40 × 107 m s–1. It emits light of
frequency 4.57 × 1014 Hz. The speed of light is 3.00 × 108 m s–1.
The Doppler effect formula can be used with light waves.
What will be the frequency of this light when detected on Earth?
A 2.04 × 1013 Hz
B 4.37 × 1014 Hz
C 4.57 × 1014 Hz
D 4.79 × 1014 Hz
22 The graph shows the variation with time of the displacement of two separate waves X and Y.
displacement wave Y
0
0 time
wave X
Wave X has frequency f and amplitude A.
What is the frequency and what is the amplitude of wave Y?
frequency amplitude
1 1
A 2
f 2
A
1
B 2
f 2A
1
C 2f 2
A
D 2f 2A

12
23 Diffraction is a term used to describe one aspect of wave behaviour.
What does diffraction make possible?
A the ability to hear around corners

B the ability to hear high frequency and low frequency sound waves
C the ability to hear loud and quiet sounds
D the ability to hear sound through a brick wall
24 The diagram represents the pattern of stationary waves formed by the superposition of sound
waves from a loudspeaker and their reflection from a metal sheet (not shown).
W X Y Z
W, X, Y and Z are four points on the line through the centre of these waves.
Which statement about these stationary waves is correct?
A An antinode is formed at the surface of the metal sheet.

B A node is a quarter of a wavelength from an adjacent antinode.
C The oscillations at X are in phase with those at Y.
D The air particles oscillate perpendicular to the line WZ.
25 A musical instrument called a bugle is a long tube with a mouthpiece at one end. The other end is
open and flared, as shown.
A musician maintains stationary sound waves with a node at the mouthpiece and an antinode at
the other end. The lowest frequency of sound that the bugle can produce is 92 Hz.
Which different frequencies of sound can be produced by the bugle?
A 92 Hz, 138 Hz, 184 Hz, 230 Hz, 276 Hz

B 92 Hz, 184 Hz, 276 Hz, 368 Hz, 460 Hz
C 92 Hz, 276 Hz, 460 Hz, 644 Hz, 828 Hz
D 92 Hz, 276 Hz, 828 Hz, 2484 Hz, 7452 Hz
26 Monochromatic light of wavelength 5.30 × 10–7 m is incident normally on a diffraction grating. The
first order maximum is observed at an angle of 15.4° to the direction of the incident light.
What is the angle between the first and second order diffraction maxima?
A 7.7° B 15.4° C 16.7° D 32.1°
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

13
27 The diagram shows an electron in a uniform electric field.
In which direction will the field accelerate the electron?
electron
A
electric
D B field
C
28 The electric field strength at a certain distance from an isolated alpha particle is 3.0 × 107 N C–1.
What is the force on an electron when at that distance from the alpha particle?
A 4.8 × 10–12 N
B 9.6 × 10–12 N
C 3.0 × 107 N
D 6.0 × 107 N
29 Two large parallel plates X and Y are placed a distance of 5.0 mm apart and connected to the
terminals of a 200 V d.c. supply, as shown.
X Y
5.0 mm
200 V
A small oil drop at P carries one excess electron.
What is the magnitude of the electrostatic force acting on the oil drop due to the electric field
between the plates?
A 6.4 × 10–15 N
B 6.4 × 10–18 N
C 1.6 × 10–19 N
D 4.0 × 10–24 N

14
30 An electrical conductor has a resistance of 5.6 kΩ. A potential difference (p.d.) of 9.0 V is applied
across its ends.
How many electrons pass a point in the conductor in one minute?
A 6.0 × 1020 B 1.0 × 1019 C 6.0 × 1017 D 1.0 × 1016
31 A fixed resistor of resistance 12 Ω is connected to a battery. There is a current of 0.20 A in the

resistor. The current is now doubled.
What is the new power dissipated in the resistor?
A 0.48 W B 0.96 W C 1.92 W D 4.8 W
32 Which measurements are taken in order to calculate the resistivity of the metal of a piece of
wire?
A p.d., current, area, length

B p.d., current, diameter, length
C resistance, area, length
D resistance, length, radius
33 A 12 V battery is charged for 20 minutes by connecting it to a source of electromotive force

(e.m.f.). The battery is supplied with 7.2 × 104 J of energy in this time.
How much charge flows through the battery?
A 5.0 C B 60 C C 100 C D 6000 C
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

15
34 Three cells with e.m.f.s V1, V2 and V3, have negligible internal resistance. These cells are
connected to three resistors with resistances R1, R2 and R3, as shown.
V1
I R1
V2 V3
R2 R3
The current in the circuit is I.
Which equation is correct?
A V1 + V2 + V3 = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
B V1 + V2 – V3 = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
C V1 – V2 + V3 = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
D V1 – V2 – V3 = I (R1 + R2 + R3)
35 Three resistors, each of resistance R, are connected in a network, as shown.
X Y
R R
The total resistance between points X and Y is 8.0 Ω.
What is the value of R ?
A 2.7 Ω B 4.0 Ω C 5.3 Ω D 12 Ω
laws are used.


16
37 The battery of a car has an internal resistance of 0.10 Ω and an electromotive force of 12 V. When
the battery is connected to the starter motor, the potential difference across the battery terminals
is 7.0 V.
What is the current supplied to the starter motor?
A 50 A B 70 A C 120 A D 190 A
38 A sample of an isotope emits β– particles.
The emitted β– particles have a range of energies.
What must also be emitted?
A antineutrinos
B neutrinos
C antineutrons
D neutrons
+
39 A nucleus of magnesium decays into a nucleus of sodium by emitting a β particle. The decay is
represented by the equation shown.
23 P 0
12 Mg → Q Na + + 1β
What are the values of P and Q?
P Q
A 22 11
B 22 13
C 23 11
D 23 13
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

17
40 Thorium-234 ( 234
90 Th) decays by β emission into a daughter product which in turn decays by a
–
further β– emission into a granddaughter product.
A B
92
91
proton
90
number
89
C D
88
232 233 234 235 236

nucleon number
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/12/F/M/16

* 7 9 1 7 3 6 8 0 4 3 *
PHYSICS 9702/22
Paper 2 AS Level Structured Questions February/March 2016
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/SW) 107947/3
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

5
1 The speed v of a transverse wave on a uniform string is given by the expression
Tl
v=
m
where T is the tension in the string, l is its length and m is its mass.
An experiment is performed to determine the speed v of the wave. The measurements are shown
in Fig. 1.1.

T 1.8 N ± 5%
l 126 cm ± 1%
m 5.1 g ± 2%
Fig. 1.1
(a) State an appropriate instrument to measure the length l.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Use the data in Fig. 1.1 to calculate the speed v.
v = ................................................. m s−1 [2]
(ii) Use your answer in (b)(i) and the data in Fig. 1.1 to determine the value of v, with its
absolute uncertainty, to an appropriate number of significant figures.
v = ...................................... ± ...................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 6]
6
2 (a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A ball is kicked from horizontal ground towards the top of a vertical wall, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
path of ball
v
wall
ball
28°
horizontal
24 m ground
The horizontal distance between the initial position of the ball and the base of the wall is 24 m.
The ball is kicked with an initial velocity v at an angle of 28° to the horizontal. The ball hits the
top of the wall after a time of 1.5 s. Air resistance may be assumed to be negligible.
(i) Calculate the initial horizontal component vX of the velocity of the ball.
vX = ................................................. m s−1 [1]
(ii) Show that the initial vertical component vY of the velocity of the ball is 8.5 m s−1.
[2]
(iii) Calculate the time taken for the ball to reach its maximum height above the ground.
time = ........................................................ s [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16
7
(iv) The ball is kicked at time t = 0. On Fig. 2.2, sketch the variation with time t of the vertical
component vY of the velocity of the ball until it hits the wall. It may be assumed that
velocity is positive when in the upwards direction.
10.0
vY / m s–1
5.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
t /s
–5.0
–10.0
Fig. 2.2
[2]
(c) (i) Use the information in (b) to determine the maximum height of the ball above the ground.
maximum height = ...................................................... m [2]
(ii) The maximum gravitational potential energy of the ball above the ground is 22 J. Calculate
the mass of the ball.
mass = ...................................................... kg [2]
(d) A ball of greater mass is kicked with the same velocity as the ball in (b).
State and explain the effect, if any, of the increased mass on the maximum height reached by
the ball. Air resistance is still assumed to be negligible.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 13]

8
(i) work done,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) elastic potential energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A block of mass 0.40 kg slides in a straight line with a constant speed of 0.30 m s−1 along a
horizontal surface, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
spring
block 0.30 m s–1
mass 0.40 kg
Fig. 3.1
The block hits a spring and decelerates. The speed of the block becomes zero when the
spring is compressed by 8.0 cm.
(i) Calculate the initial kinetic energy of the block.
kinetic energy = ....................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

9
(ii) The variation of the compression x of the spring with the force F applied to the spring is
shown in Fig. 3.2.
8.0
x / cm
0
0 FMAX F
Fig. 3.2
Use your answer in (b)(i) to determine the maximum force FMAX exerted on the spring by
the block.
FMAX = ....................................................... N [3]
(iii) Calculate the maximum deceleration of the block.
deceleration = ................................................. m s−2 [1]
(iv) State and explain whether the block is in equilibrium
1. before it hits the spring,
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
2. when its speed becomes zero.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
[2]

10
(c) The energy E stored in a spring is given by
E = 12 k x 2
where k is the spring constant of the spring and x is its compression.
The mass m of the block in (b) is now varied. The initial speed of the block remains constant
and the spring continues to obey Hooke’s law.
On Fig. 3.3, sketch the variation of the maximum compression x0 of the spring with mass m.
x0
0
0 m
Fig. 3.3 [2]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

11
BLANK PAGE

12
4 (a) (i) By reference to the direction of propagation of energy, state what is meant by a transverse
wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the principle of superposition.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Circular water waves may be produced by vibrating dippers at points P and Q, as illustrated in
Fig. 4.1.
wavefront
P
44 cm
R
29 cm
Q
The waves from P alone have the same amplitude at point R as the waves from Q alone.
Distance PR is 44 cm and distance QR is 29 cm.
The dippers vibrate in phase with a period of 1.5 s to produce waves of speed 4.0 cm s−1.
(i) Determine the wavelength of the waves.
wavelength = ..................................................... cm [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

13
(ii) By reference to the distances PR and QR, explain why the water particles are at rest at
point R.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) A wave is produced on the surface of a different liquid. At one particular time, the variation of
the vertical displacement y with distance x along the surface of the liquid is shown in Fig. 4.2.
1.0
y / cm
0.5
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 x / cm
–0.5
–1.0
Fig. 4.2
(i) The wave has intensity I1 at distance x = 2.0 cm and intensity I2 at x = 10.0 cm.
Determine the ratio
intensity I2
.
intensity I1
ratio = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) State the phase difference, with its unit, between the oscillations of the liquid particles at
distances x = 3.0 cm and x = 4.0 cm.
[Total: 11]

14
5 (a) (i) State what is meant by an electric current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Define electric potential difference (p.d.).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A power supply of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 8.7 V and negligible internal resistance is
connected by two identical wires to three filament lamps, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
connecting wires
power supply
8.7 V
0.30 A
The power supply provides a current of 0.30 A to the circuit.

The filament lamps are identical. The I–V characteristic for one of the lamps is shown in
Fig. 5.2.
0.40
I/A
0.30
0.20
0.10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
V/V
Fig. 5.2
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

15
(i) Show that the resistance of each connecting wire is 2.0 Ω.
[2]
(ii) The resistivity of the metal of the connecting wires does not vary with temperature.
On Fig. 5.2, sketch the I–V characteristic for one of the connecting wires. [2]
(iii) Calculate the power loss in one of the connecting wires.
power = ...................................................... W [2]
(iv) Some data for the connecting wires are given below.
cross-sectional area = 0.40 mm2

resistivity = 1.7 × 10−8 Ω m
number density of free electrons = 8.5 × 1028 m−3
Calculate
1. the length of one of the connecting wires,
length = ...................................................... m [2]
2. the drift speed of a free electron in the connecting wires.
drift speed = ................................................. m s−1 [2]
[Total: 12]
16
6 A neutron decays by emitting a β− particle.
(a) Complete the equation below for this decay.
......... ......... .........

1
0n .........
........... + .........
β− + .........
ν
[2]
(b) State the name of the particle represented by the symbol ν.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State the name of the class (group) of particles that includes β− and ν.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State
(i) the quark structure of the neutron,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the change to the quark structure when the neutron decays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/22/F/M/16

* 3 6 4 7 5 4 4 0 8 1 *
PHYSICS 9702/33
Paper 3 Advanced Practical Skills 1 February/March 2016
2 hours


Total
DC (LK/SW) 107948/4
2
1 In this experiment you will investigate the behaviour of a sphere rolling across a sloping
board.
(a) Pass the thread through the hole in the board and clip it in place with the spring clip.
Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.1, with the board at an angle of approximately
45° to the bench. The length of the thread between the spring clip and the sphere should
be approximately 20 cm.
spring clip
thread
sphere
boss wooden strip

clamp
G-clamp
stand
board
§ 45°
bench
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16

3
(b) (i) Measure and record the angle θ between the board and the bench, as shown in
Fig. 1.2.
spring clip
sphere
board
bench
θ = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Push the sphere to one side. Release the sphere so that it oscillates from side to
side.
(iii) Take measurements to find the period T of the oscillations.

Record T.
T = ............................................... s [2]

4
(c) Change θ by moving the boss and clamp and repeat (b) until you have six sets of values
for θ and T. Do not change the length of the thread between the sphere and the spring
clip.
Include values for 13 in your table.

T
[9]
(d) (i) Plot a graph of θ on the y-axis against 13 on the x-axis. [3]
T
gradient = ......................................................
y-intercept = ......................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16

5

6
(e) It is suggested that the quantities θ and T are related by the equation
θ = a3 + b
T
Use your answers from (d)(iii) to determine the values of a and b.

a = ......................................................
b = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16

7
2 In this experiment you will investigate the motion of a sphere launched from a ramp.
(a) Set up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 2.1. Adjust the height of the clamp so that the
launch angle φ is approximately 15°.
stand
clamp
mark
ramp
tray
sand
wooden block
q
bench
(b) (i) Measure and record φ , as shown in Fig. 2.1.
φ = .................................................. [1]
(ii) Measure and record the height h1 of the mark above the bench, as shown in
Fig. 2.2.
mark
h1
tray
sand
h2
bench
h1 = ........................................... cm [1]
8
(iii) Measure and record the height h2 of the end of the ramp, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
h2 = ................................................. cm
(iv) Calculate the speed v of the sphere when it leaves the ramp using the expression
v= 2g (h1 – h2)
where g = 9.81 m s–2.
v = .................................................. [1]
(c) Justify the number of significant figures you have given for your value of v.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) (i) Place the smaller sphere on the ramp at the mark. Release the sphere.
(ii) Measure and record the horizontal distance R from the end of the ramp to the
landing position of the sphere, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
R = ............................................ cm [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16
9
(e) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value of R.
(f) By lowering the clamp, increase the launch angle φ to approximately 25°. Repeat (b)
and (d) using the same sphere.
φ = ......................................................
h1 = ................................................. cm
h2 = ................................................. cm
v = ......................................................
R = ................................................. cm
[3]

10
(g) It is suggested that the relationship between R, v and φ is
R = k v cos φ
first value of k = ......................................................
second value of k = ......................................................

[1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16

11
experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
4. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 20]
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 9702/33/F/M/16

* 8 9 6 5 6 0 8 0 0 4 *
PHYSICS 9702/42
Paper 4 A Level Structured Questions February/March 2016
2 hours
1
2
appropriate units.
4
part question.
6
10
11
12
13
Total
DC (NH/SW) 107972/4
2
Data

1
( = 8.99 × 109 m F−1)
4πε0
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

3
Formulae
1
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
Gm
r
1 Nm 2
〈c 〉
V

v = ± ω √⎯(x⎯ 0⎯ 2⎯ –⎯ ⎯ x⎯ 2⎯ )
fsv
Doppler effect fo =
v ± vs
Q
4πε0r
BI
Hall voltage VH =
ntq
0.693
decay constant λ =
t 1
2

4
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A satellite of mass m has a circular orbit of radius r about a planet of mass M. It may be
assumed that the planet and the satellite are uniform spheres that are isolated in space.
Show that the linear speed v of the satellite is given by the expression
v= GM
r

[2]
(c) Two moons A and B have circular orbits about a planet, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
vA
B
A vB
rA
rB
planet
Moon A has an orbital radius rA of 1.3 × 108 m, linear speed vA and orbital period TA.
Moon B has an orbital radius rB of 2.2 × 1010 m, linear speed vB and orbital period TB.
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

5

vA
1. ,
vB
ratio = ...........................................................[2]
TA
2. .
TB
ratio = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) The planet spins about its own axis with angular speed 1.7 × 10–4 rad s–1.
Moon A is always above the same point on the planet’s surface.
Determine the orbital period TB of moon B.
TB = ........................................................s [2]
[Total: 11]

6
2 (a) State
(i) what is meant by internal energy,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) the basic assumption of the kinetic theory of gases that leads to the conclusion that there
is zero potential energy between the molecules of an ideal gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The pressure p and volume V of an ideal gas are related by
pV = 1 Nm 〈c 2〉
3
where N is the number of molecules, m is the mass of a molecule and 〈c 2〉 is the mean-square
speed of the molecules.
Use this equation to show that the mean kinetic energy 〈EK〉 of a molecule is given by
〈EK〉 = 3 kT
2
where k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the thermodynamic temperature.
[3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

7
(c) A cylinder contains 17 g of oxygen gas at a temperature of 12 °C. The mass of 1.0 mol of
oxygen gas is 32 g. It may be assumed that the oxygen behaves as an ideal gas.
Calculate, for the oxygen gas in the cylinder,
(i) the mean kinetic energy of a molecule,
mean kinetic energy = ........................................................J [2]
(ii) the number of molecules,
number = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the total internal energy.
internal energy = ........................................................J [1]
[Total: 11]

8
3 (a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of a liquid using
the apparatus illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
liquid out,
tube temperature 25.5 °C
liquid in, heating

temperature 19.5 °C coil
Fig. 3.1
Liquid enters the tube at a constant temperature of 19.5 °C and leaves the tube at
a temperature of 25.5 °C. The mass of liquid flowing through the tube per unit time is m.
Electrical power P is dissipated in the heating coil.
The student changes m and adjusts P until the final temperature of the liquid leaving the tube
is 25.5 °C.
The data shown in Fig. 3.2 are obtained.
m / g s–1 P/W
1.11 33.3
1.58 44.9
Fig. 3.2
(i) Suggest why the student obtains data for two values of m, rather than for one value.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

9
(ii) Calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
Show your working.
specific heat capacity = .......................................... J kg–1 K–1 [3]
(c) When the heating coil in (b) dissipates 33.3 W of power, the potential difference V across the
coil is given by the expression
V = 27.0 sin (395t ).
The potential difference is measured in volts and the time t is measured in seconds.
Determine the resistance of the coil.
resistance = ....................................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 9]

10
4 An object of mass 80 g oscillates with simple harmonic motion. The variation with time t of the
displacement x of the object is shown in Fig. 4.1.
2.0
x / cm
1.0
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5
t /s
–1.0
–2.0
Fig. 4.1
(a) Use Fig. 4.1 to determine the amplitude and the period of the oscillations.
amplitude = ..........................................................cm
period = .............................................................s
[1]
(b) Use Fig. 4.1 and your answers in (a) to calculate the kinetic energy of the object at time
t = 0.19 s.
kinetic energy = ........................................................J [3]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

11
5 (a) A digital signal is produced by sampling an analogue signal and passing the samples through
an analogue-to-digital converter (ADC).
(i) State what is meant by a digital signal.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State one change to the sampling or to the ADC that will improve the accuracy of
reproduction of the original analogue signal.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The least significant bit of the four-bit digital number 1100 represents a signal voltage of
2.5 mV. Determine the signal voltage, in mV, represented by this digital number.
voltage = .................................................... mV [1]
[Total: 4]

12
6 A parallel beam of ultrasound is incident normally on the surface of a layer of fat of thickness
1.1 cm, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
fat muscle
ultrasound I1 I2
beam
I4 I3
1.1 cm
Fig. 6.1
For the ultrasound,

I1 is the intensity just after entering the surface of the fat layer,
I2 is the intensity incident on the fat-muscle boundary,
I3 is the intensity reflected from the fat-muscle boundary,
I4 is the intensity received back at the surface of the fat layer.
Some data for the fat are given in Fig. 6.2.
specific acoustic impedance Z 1.4 × 106 kg m–2 s–1

density ρ 940 kg m–3
absorption (attenuation) coefficient μ 48 m–1
Fig. 6.2
(a) Calculate the time interval between a short pulse of ultrasound initially entering the layer of fat
and then returning back to the surface of the fat layer.
time = ........................................................s [3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

13
I2
(b) Calculate the ratio .
I1
ratio = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Intensity I4 is 0.33% of intensity I1.

I3
Determine the ratio .
I2
ratio = ...........................................................[2]
(d) The specific acoustic impedance of the muscle is greater than that of the fat.
I3
State the effect, if any, on the value of the ratio of an increase in the difference between the
I2
specific acoustic impedance of the muscle and that of the fat.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
7 (a) Define capacitance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Three capacitors of capacitances C1, C2 and C3 are initially uncharged. They are then
connected in series to a battery, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
C1 C2 C3
Fig. 7.1
The battery applies a potential difference V across the three capacitors.
Show that the combined capacitance C of the capacitors is given by

1 1 1 1
= + + .
C C1 C2 C3
[2]
(c) A battery of e.m.f. 12 V and negligible internal resistance is connected to a network of two
capacitors and a resistor, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
200 +F
A B
12 V
600 +F
Fig. 7.2
The capacitors have capacitances of 200 μF and 600 μF. The switch has two positions,
A and B.
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

15
(i) The switch is moved to position A.
Calculate
1. the combined capacitance of the two capacitors,
combined capacitance = ..................................................... μF [1]
2. the charge on the 600 μF capacitor,
charge = ....................................................... C [1]
3. the potential difference across the 600 μF capacitor.
(ii) The switch is now moved from position A to position B.
Calculate the potential difference across the 600 μF capacitor when it has discharged
50% of its initial energy.
[Total: 9]

16
8 (a) State two effects of negative feedback on the gain of an amplifier incorporating an operational
amplifier (op-amp).
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An incomplete diagram of an amplifier circuit incorporating an ideal operational amplifier is

shown in Fig. 8.1.
+8.0 V
+
7.2 k1
–8.0 V
VIN VOUT
Fig. 8.1
The amplifier has a voltage gain of +5.0.
(i) Complete the circuit diagram of Fig. 8.1. [2]
(ii) Calculate the resistance of any additional resistor you have drawn on Fig. 8.1.
resistance = ..................................................... kΩ [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

17
(iii) Fig. 8.2 shows the variation with time of the input potential VIN.
15
potential / V
10
VIN
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / ms
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the variation with time of the output potential VOUT. [2]
[Total: 8]

18
9 A particle of charge +q and mass m is travelling with a constant speed of 1.6 × 105 m s–1 in a
vacuum. The particle enters a uniform magnetic field of flux density 9.7 × 10–2 T, as shown in
Fig. 9.1.
uniform magnetic
field out of the plane of
particle the paper
charge +q flux density 9.7 × 10–2 T
mass m
speed 1.6 × 105 m s–1
path of particle
Fig. 9.1
The magnetic field direction is perpendicular to the initial velocity of the particle and perpendicular
to, and out of, the plane of the paper.
A uniform electric field is applied in the same region as the magnetic field so that the particle
passes undeviated through the fields.
(a) State and explain the direction of the electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the electric field strength.
electric field strength = .................................................V m–1 [3]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

19
(c) The electric field is now removed so that the positively-charged particle follows a curved path
in the magnetic field. This path is an arc of a circle of radius 4.0 cm.
q
Calculate, for the particle, the ratio m .
ratio = ................................................C kg–1 [3]
(d) The particle has a charge of 3e where e is the elementary charge.
(i) Use your answer in (c) to determine the mass, in u, of the particle.
mass = ........................................................u [2]
(ii) The particle is the nucleus of an atom. State the number of protons and the number of
neutrons in this nucleus.
number of protons = ...............................................................
number of neutrons = ...............................................................

[1]
[Total: 11]

20
10 A small coil of wire is situated in a non-uniform magnetic field, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
coil,
constant non-uniform
40 turns
velocity magnetic
field
P
Fig. 10.1
The coil consists of 40 turns of wire and moves with a constant speed in a straight line.
The coil has displacement x from a fixed point P.
The variation with x of the magnetic flux Φ in the coil is shown in Fig. 10.2.
7
\ / 10–6 Wb
6
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
x / cm
Fig. 10.2
(a) The coil is moved at constant speed between point P and the point where x = 3.0 cm.
(i) Calculate the change in magnetic flux linkage of the coil.
change in flux linkage = .................................................... Wb [1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

21
(ii) The e.m.f. induced in the coil is 5.0 × 10–4 V. Determine the speed of the coil.
speed = ................................................. m s–1 [2]
(b) On Fig. 10.3, sketch the variation with x of the e.m.f. E induced in the coil for values of x from
x = 0 to x = 6.0 cm.
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
x / cm
Fig. 10.3
[2]
[Total: 5]

22
11 (a) With reference to the photoelectric effect, state what is meant by the threshold frequency.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Electromagnetic radiation of wavelength λ is incident on a metal surface. Electrons of

maximum kinetic energy EMAX are emitted.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, sketch the variation with 1/λ of EMAX.
EMAX
0
0 1/h
Fig. 11.1
[2]
(ii) State an equation relating the gradient of the graph drawn on Fig. 11.1 to the Planck
constant h.
Explain any symbols you use.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Explain why, for any particular wavelength of electromagnetic radiation, most of the
electrons are emitted with kinetic energies less than the maximum value EMAX.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

23
(iv) Light of a particular wavelength is incident on a metal surface and gives rise to a
photoelectric current.
The wavelength is reduced. The intensity of the light is kept constant.
State and explain the effect, if any, on the photoelectric current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
12 (a) In an X-ray tube, the hardness of an X-ray beam may be controlled.
(i) State what is meant by the hardness of the beam.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the hardness of the beam may be decreased.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State one advantage and one disadvantage of producing a CT scan image of a person rather
than a standard X-ray image.
advantage: ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage: ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 4]

24
13 Beryllium-7 (74 Be) is produced in the upper atmosphere and then sinks down onto the Earth’s
surface. Nuclei of beryllium-7 decay with a half-life of 53.3 days to form stable nuclei.
The activity of a sample of beryllium-7 on a tree leaf is 39 mBq.
(a) Show that the decay constant of beryllium-7 is 1.5 × 10–7 s–1.
[1]
(b) Determine the mass of the beryllium-7 on the leaf.
mass = ......................................................kg [3]
(c) The leaf is covered so that no further beryllium-7 is added to the existing sample from the
atmosphere.
Calculate the time that must elapse before the activity of the sample is reduced to 2.0 mBq.
time = ........................................................s [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16

* 9 5 0 0 4 0 2 5 0 7 *
PHYSICS 9702/52
Paper 5 Planning, Analysis and Evaluation February/March 2016
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SW) 107971/2
2
1 A student is interested in ‘bungee jumping’, where a person attached to an elastic cord falls from a
height and travels downwards through a distance before moving upwards. Different cords are used
for different people. A schematic diagram is shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
The student models ‘bungee jumping’ in the laboratory by using elastic cords of unstretched length
50.0 cm with different spring constants. An object is attached to each cord.
The student investigates the relationship between the maximum distance h fallen by the object
and the spring constant k of the elastic cord.
It is suggested that the relationship between h and k is
k(h – L)2 = mgh

where L is the unstretched length of the cord, m is the mass of the object and g is the acceleration
of free fall.
Design a laboratory experiment to test the relationship between h and k.

(h – L)2
Explain how your results could be used to plot a graph with on the y-axis and to determine
h
the value of g. You should draw a diagram, on page 3, showing the arrangement of your equipment.

[15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/F/M/16

3
Diagram
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................

4
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................................
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/F/M/16
5
2 A student is investigating the heating of metal blocks immersed in water. A 100 g metal block is
added to 250 cm3 of water in an insulated beaker. The water is heated by an electrical heater as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
to power supply thermometer
water
insulation
metal block
heater
Fig. 2.1
A stopwatch is used to measure the time t for the temperature of the water and metal block of
mass mm to change by 20 °C.
The experiment is repeated by adding additional 100 g metal blocks to the water.
It is suggested that t and mm are related by the equation
Pt = mmcmΔθ + mwcwΔθ + k
where P is the constant power of the heater,

cm is the specific heat capacity of the metal,
cw is the specific heat capacity of water,
Δθ is the temperature change,
mw is the mass of the water and
k is a constant.
(a) A graph is plotted of t on the y-axis against mm on the x-axis.

gradient = ...............................................................
y-intercept = ...............................................................
[1]

6
(b) The number of 100 g metal blocks added to the water is n.

Values of n and t are given in Fig. 2.2.
The percentage uncertainty in the mass of each 100 g metal block is ±10%.
n t /s
1 465
2 485
3 505
4 525
5 545
6 560
Fig. 2.2
Calculate and record values of mm / g in Fig. 2.2.

Include the absolute uncertainties in mm. [2]
(c) (i) Plot a graph of t / s against mm / g. Include error bars for mm. [2]
answer.
gradient = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/F/M/16

7
570
560
550
t /s
540
530
520
510
500
490
480
470
460
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
mm / g

8
(iv) Determine the y-intercept of the line of best fit. Include the absolute uncertainty in your
answer.
y-intercept = ...........................................................[2]
(d) (i) Using your answers to (a), (c)(iii) and (c)(iv), determine the values of cm and k. Include
appropriate units.
Data: P = 50 ± 5 W, cw = 4200 J kg–1K–1, Δθ = 20.0 ± 0.5 °C and mw = 250 g.
cm = ...............................................................
k = ...............................................................
[3]
(ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in cm.
percentage uncertainty in cm = ..................................................... % [1]
[Total: 15]
© UCLES 2016 9702/52/F/M/16

Physics Binder 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Physics Binder 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

General Certificate of Education Advanced Subsidiary Level

INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES

This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

speed of light in free space, c = 3.00 × 10 8 m s –1

permeability of free space, 0 = 4 × 10 –7 H m–1

permittivity of free space, 0 = 8.85 × 10 –12 F m–1

elementary charge, e = 1.60 × 10 –19 C

the Planck constant, h = 6.63 × 10 –34 J s

unified atomic mass constant, u = 1.66 × 10 –27 kg

rest mass of electron, me = 9.11 × 10 –31 kg

rest mass of proton, mp = 1.67 × 10 –27 kg

molar gas constant, R = 8.31 J K –1 mol –1

the Avogadro constant, NA = 6.02 × 10 23 mol –1

the Boltzmann constant, k = 1.38 × 10 –23 J K –1

gravitational constant, G = 6.67 × 10 –11 N m 2 kg –2

acceleration of free fall, g = 9.81 m s –2

uniformly accelerated motion, s = ut + at 2

work done on/by a gas, W = pV

velocity of particle in s.h.m., v = v0 cos t

resistors in parallel, 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 + . . .

energy of charged capacitor, W= QV

hydrostatic pressure, p = qgh

radioactive decay, x = x0 exp(– t )

decay constant, = 0.693

equation of continuity, Av = constant

Bernoulli equation (simplified), p1 + qv12 = p2 + qv22

1 Which of the following pairs of units are both SI base units?

A ampere, degree celsius

2 The diagram shows two vectors X and Y.

Which of the following is an explanation for the intercept on the t axis?

5 The power loss P in a resistor is calculated using the formula P = V 2 /R.

What is the uncertainty in P?

9702/1/M/J/02 [Turn over

6 The graph relates to the motion of a falling body.

Which is a correct description of the graph?

A y is distance and air resistance is negligible

What is the height of the cliff-top above the sea?

The spheres have a head-on elastic collision.

Which statement is correct?

A The spheres stick together on impact.

9702/1/M/J/02 [Turn over

What is the magnitude of the frictional force acting on the block?

Which relationship between their magnitudes is correct?

A weight < drag

A 0.23 Nm B 0.39 Nm C 0.46 Nm D 0.60 Nm

Which of the following expressions is equal to the upthrust on the block?

15 The vector diagram shows three coplanar forces acting on an object at P.

The magnitude of the resultant of these three forces is 1 N.

What is the direction of this resultant?

9702/1/M/J/02 [Turn over

16 Power is transferred through a machine as shown.

power input PI power output PO

What is the efficiency of the machine?

What is the kinetic energy of the trolley at Q?

At what speed does it travel?

9702/1/M/J/02 [Turn over

What is the density of the liquid mixture?

stress strain Young modulus

A (force) x (area) (extension) x (original length) (stress) / (strain)

23 A wire is stretched by 8 mm when a load of 60 N is applied.

A MLP B MNQP C MNSR D MPLU

What is the frequency of the sound wave?

A 62.5 Hz B 125 Hz C 250 Hz D 500 Hz